HeadfileFAS4-334 07 PT

Pasta do guia
Souza Cruz S/A
Flavor Application System FAS4 – 334
N.º de projeto 86-01641
Versão: 07
Manual de instruções original

Diretório de alterações:
Versão Elaborado: Descrição da alteração Revisor:

Nome/Data Nome/Data
01 Hubers Recém-criado após revisão da
10.03.2015 avaliação de risco
02 Hubers Recém-criado após revisão da

02/04/2015 avaliação de risco
03 Hubers Nova estrutura

19/06/2015
04 Hubers Visão geral área ATEX

02/09/2015
05 Thees Adaptação à versão em inglês

07/08/2017 HeadfileFAS_05_EN
06 Thees Capítulos 12 e 14.2 atualizados

22/12/2017
07 Thees Layout alterado para impressão

09/10/2019 frente e verso
Capítulo 12 alterado
Pasta do guia
Versão:07 3/105
Índice
1 Prefácio ...................................................................................................... 9
1.1 Endereço do fabricante ................................................................................. 9
1.2 O manual de instruções................................................................................. 9
1.3 Garantia....................................................................................................... 10
1.4 Qualificação do pessoal operacional ........................................................... 10
1.5 Deveres do pessoal operacional ................................................................. 10
1.6 Atividades de verificação ............................................................................. 11
1.7 Medidas organizacionais da empresa gestora ............................................ 11
1.8 Identificação do sistema .............................................................................. 13
Compatibilidade tanque – estação ........................................................ 14
2 Segurança ................................................................................................ 17
2.1 Símbolos e indicações gerais ...................................................................... 18
2.2 Segurança e prevenção de acidentes ......................................................... 19
2.3 Utilização prevista ....................................................................................... 20
2.4 Pessoal operacional/requisitos de treinamento ........................................... 21
2.5 Áreas perigosas .......................................................................................... 23
2.6 Indicações de segurança para o manuseio do FAS 4 ................................. 24
2.7 Atividades de controle ................................................................................. 26
2.8 Comportamento em caso de acidentes ....................................................... 27
2.9 Comportamento em caso de avarias e conservação................................... 27
2.10 Lista dos riscos residuais e suas contramedidas ........................................ 28
2.11 Liberação não intencional de meios explosivos .......................................... 29
2.12 Perigos devidos a influências mecânicas .................................................... 30
2.13 Perigos devidos a energia elétrica .............................................................. 32
2.14 Perigos durante o transporte de materiais operacionais ............................. 34
2.15 Perigos devidos a materiais e materiais de trabalho ................................... 35
2.16 Perigo devido a calor, incêndio e explosão ................................................. 37
2.17 Perigo devido a radiação ............................................................................. 39
2.18 Perigo devido a ruído .................................................................................. 40
2.19 Perigo devido a aceleração e vibração........................................................ 41
2.20 Mais informações sobre os perigos especiais ............................................. 42
Energia elétrica .................................................................................. 42
Gás, poeira, vapor, fumaça ............................................................... 43
Sistema hidráulico, pneumático ......................................................... 43
Pasta do guia
Versão:07 5/105
Óleos, gorduras e outras substâncias químicas ................................ 44
Funcionamento normal ...................................................................... 44
Trabalhos de manutenção ................................................................. 45
3 Livro de controle ..................................................................................... 47
3.1 Geral............................................................................................................ 47
3.2 Entradas no livro de controle ....................................................................... 47
3.3 Atividades de controle ................................................................................. 48
3.4 Livro de controle/avarias ............................................................................. 49
4 Descrição funcional ................................................................................ 53
4.1 Dados técnicos ............................................................................................ 55
PC do painel ......................................................................................... 55
FAS4 ..................................................................................................... 56
5 Transporte ............................................................................................... 57
5.1 A instalação ................................................................................................. 58
Ligação à terra ...................................................................................... 59
6 Colocação em funcionamento ............................................................... 61
7 Colocação fora de funcionamento/desmontagem do sistema........... 63
7.1 Eliminação ................................................................................................... 63
Proteção ambiental ............................................................................... 63
Óleo e resíduos oleosos e lubrificantes ................................................ 64
Metais ................................................................................................... 64
Lixo elétrico e eletrônico ....................................................................... 64
8 Instruções de operação.......................................................................... 65
9 Limpar o FAS4 ......................................................................................... 67
10 Manutenção, inspeção, conservação ................................................ 69
10.1 Manutenção, inspeção, conservação .......................................................... 70
10.2 Intervalos de inspeção e manutenção ......................................................... 71
10.3 Medição volumétrica.................................................................................... 74
10.4 Calibração do medidor de caudal ................................................................ 77
10.5 Calibração da tela sensível ao toque........................................................... 79
10.6 Calibração do sistema de aviso de gás ....................................................... 80
10.7 Ajuste e afrouxamento do acoplamento do tanque ..................................... 82
10.8 Lista de manutenção detalhada .................................................................. 85
10.9 Materiais operacionais recomendados ........................................................ 89
11 Peças de reposição ............................................................................. 91
Pasta do guia
6/105 Versão:07
12 Listagem Descrições de produtos/Documentação de terceiros .... 93
13 Símbolos de perigo na máquina ........................................................ 97
14 Certificados .......................................................................................... 99
14.1 Visão geral das áreas ATEX de acordo com a norma 94/9/CE ................. 101
14.2 Certificados ............................................................................................... 103
14.3 Medida de proteção contra explosões FAS-4............................................ 105
Pasta do guia
Versão:07 7/105
Prefácio
1 Prefácio
1.1 Endereço do fabricante
KÖHL Maschinenbau AG Tel.: +352 276827 - 0
17, Am Scheerleck Fax: +352 276827 - 99
6868 Wecker http://www.koehl-mb.eu/
Luxemburg
1.2 O manual de instruções
Orientações
Para melhor orientação, informações importantes são colocadas nos cabeçalhos e

rodapés. As seguintes informações estão escondidas aqui:
 – o número do projeto
 – o nome do projeto
 – o capítulo atual
 – o documento
 – a versão
Anexo 1
• Plano elétrico
Anexo 2
• Documentação OEM (Fabricante de Equipamento Original)
Pasta do guia
Versão:07 9/105
Prefácio
1.3 Garantia
A KÖHL Maschinenbau AG não é responsável - nem mesmo durante o período de
garantia - por danos causados pela não observância das recomendações deste
manual de instruções.
Alterações não autorizadas na máquina e uso indevido excluem qualquer

responsabilidade e garantia por parte da KÖHL Maschinenbau AG e não são
permitidas por razões de segurança.
1.4 Qualificação do pessoal operacional

O sistema só pode ser conduzido e operado por pessoal que tenha sido instruído
pela KÖHL Maschinenbau AG e autorizado pela empresa gestora.
O(s) operador(es) do sistema deve(m) ter pelo menos 18 anos de idade e ser física
e mentalmente capaz(es) de operar o sistema.
O pessoal operacional também deve ter conhecimento de como detectar e evitar

riscos particulares e de medidas imediatas para tratar as pessoas feridas (primeiros
socorros).
O manuseio de extintores portáteis deve ser praticado em intervalos regulares e a

usabilidade de meios de apoio à descida e rotas de fuga, assim como o
funcionamento adequado dos controles de anulação na área do sistema
transportador em caso de incêndio ou desastre, devem ser verificados.
1.5 Deveres do pessoal operacional

As recomendações no manual de instruções devem ser seguidas. Isso se aplica em
particular às indicações de segurança gerais e especiais anteriores e nos capítulos
e seções relevantes.
Em caso de dúvida, pergunte ao responsável pela segurança e prevenção de

acidentes em sua área.
Após a ingestão de estupefacientes, medicamentos ou alimentos que possam

prejudicar o desempenho físico e/ou mental, o pessoal operacional deve parar
imediatamente de trabalhar no sistema.
Pasta do guia
10/105 Versão:07
Prefácio
O pessoal operacional é obrigado a manter um livro de controle.
No caso de qualquer alteração ou comportamento operacional que possa

comprometer a segurança, qualquer dano iminente deve ser relatado sem demora
ao supervisor de turno. Nesse caso, a operação do sistema deve ser interrompida
imediatamente.
Antes de utilizar a máquina pela primeira vez, recomendamos a realização de

testes e exercícios para se familiarizar mais com o controle da máquina.
1.6 Atividades de verificação

Antes de iniciar os trabalhos, são prescritas medidas de verificação e controle a fim
de detectar perigos iminentes ou danos iminentes à máquina em uma fase inicial.
Um livro de controle deve ser mantido para esse fim: 3 "Livro de controle"
1.7 Medidas organizacionais da empresa gestora

As responsabilidades pela operação do sistema devem ser claramente definidas e
cumpridas, para que não surjam competências pouco claras do ponto de vista da
segurança (p.ex., quem desliga o sistema e quem mantém o livro de controle).
A empresa gestora do sistema ou seu representante é obrigado a instruir

expressamente por escrito o pessoal operacional competente para operar e fazer a
manutenção da máquina.
Além desse manual de instruções, as regulamentações legais gerais sobre

prevenção de acidentes e proteção ambiental também devem ser observadas.
O equipamento de proteção individual deve ser fornecido ao pessoal operacional.
Em conformidade com o manual de instruções, o manuseio consciente da

segurança e do perigo do sistema pelo pessoal deve ser praticado regularmente.
Os trabalhos de verificação e manutenção devem ser planejados e executados de

acordo com as instruções de operação e manutenção.
As avarias devem ser comunicadas à pessoa ou organismo responsável por isso e

inseridas no livro de controle.
Pasta do guia
Versão:07 11/105
Prefácio
Danos menores devem ser reparados imediatamente por pessoal especializado

treinado, a fim de evitar possíveis danos maiores e falhas no sistema.
As modificações intencionais e adições ou conversões na máquina devem ser

previamente aprovadas por escrito pela empresa KÖHL Maschinenbau AG,
consulte 1.1 Endereço do fabricante!
Ao operar o sistema, certifique-se de que o pessoal usa

equipamento de proteção como calçado de segurança, óculos
de proteção, proteção auditiva, luvas, etc.
Pasta do guia
12/105 Versão:07
Prefácio
1.8 Identificação do sistema

Na placa de identificação, você encontrará as características do sistema.
As características de seu sistema são muito importantes para contatos posteriores

entre você, seu representante da KÖHL Maschinenbau AG e nosso Centro de
Serviços.
Elas nos permitem fornecer peças de reposição corretamente e fornecer um

suporte técnico adequado.
 – Endereço do fabricante
 – Número do pedido
 – Designação da máquina
 – Número de série
 – Ano de fabricação
 – Marcação CE
Pasta do guia
Versão:07 13/105
Prefácio
IMPORTANTE A estação e o tanque

O FAS4 é composto pela "estação" e o "tanque". Ambos os
componentes do FAS4 possuem uma placa de máquina onde
cada estação pode ser atribuída ao tanque correspondente.
Exemplo:
Estação – FAS4 - 000
Tanque – TW FAS4 - 000
Compatibilidade tanque – estação
TW 4
TW 4 TW 4 TW 4 TW 4 TW 4
COLD
COLD UNI PM PM+ WBF
CLT
FAS 4 COLD
CLASSIC 120/240 X X X X X
C/F
FAS 4 COLD TWIN

X X X X X
120/240 C
FAS 4 UNI CLASSIC

X X X X X
120/240 C/F
FAS 4 UNI TWIN

X X X X X
120/240 C
FAS 4 COLD TWIN

X X X X X X
120/240 g WBF
FAS 4 COLD
CLASSIC 120/240 g X X X X X X
WBF
Pasta do guia
14/105 Versão:07
Prefácio
FAS 4 UNI CLASSIC

X X X X X
480 F
FAS 4 UNI CLASSIC

X X X X X
120/240 F 4
FAS 4 COLD
CLASSIC X X X X X
120 CLT
FAS 4 UNI CLASSIC

X X X X X
240 PLA
Pasta do guia
Versão:07 15/105
Segurança
2 Segurança
Essa seção informa você sobre possíveis perigos ao manusear o sistema.
Essas instruções contêm informações importantes sobre como operar a máquina de

forma segura, adequada e econômica. Observar as instruções ajuda a evitar riscos,
reduzir custos de reparos e tempos de parada e a aumentar a confiabilidade e a
vida útil da máquina.
Ela deve ser complementada por instruções elaboradas com base nas
regulamentações nacionais existentes sobre prevenção de acidentes e proteção
ambiental.
Essas instruções devem ser lidas e aplicadas por cada pessoa

a quem for confiado os seguintes trabalhos na máquina.
• Colocação em funcionamento
• Operação
• Manutenção
• Transporte
• Montagem e desmontagem
Leia esse manual de instruções cuidadosamente e siga todas as indicações.
O fabricante não assume qualquer garantia por danos causados pelo não
cumprimento de indicações, mesmo dentro do período de garantia.
A máquina só pode ser usada em condições técnicas adequadas, de forma

consciente da segurança e de acordo com os regulamentos.
Como mencionado acima, danos pessoais e danos materiais podem ocorrer no

caso de ações incorretas.
Pasta do guia
Versão:07 17/105
Segurança
2.1 Símbolos e indicações gerais

Os símbolos e indicações que se seguem o advertem sobre possíveis danos
pessoais ou materiais ou lhe fornecem auxílios de trabalho.
Seguir esta indicação torna possível um trabalho eficaz e evita

danos à propriedade.
Refere-se a uma situação perigosa, se não puder ser evitada,

que pode resultar em um dano menor ou moderado.

que pode levar à morte ou a ferimentos graves.

que resultará em morte ou ferimentos graves.
Observar as referências para documentação adicional.
IMPORTANTE Indicação importante para a operação e manutenção.
 Desconsiderar tal indicação pode prejudicar o funcionamento

do sistema ou dos sistemas adjacentes
Essas indicações devem ser estritamente observadas para

evitar ferimentos fatais ou graves.
Pasta do guia
18/105 Versão:07
Segurança
2.2 Segurança e prevenção de acidentes

As disposições que se seguem devem ser rigorosamente seguidas, a fim de reduzir
o risco de danos pessoais e/ou danos materiais.
Por razões de segurança, todos os que trabalham no sistema ou com o sistema

devem ter lido e compreendido essas instruções de operação e devem cumprir as
instruções.
Além disso, siga as instruções de segurança suplementares estabelecidas no

regulamento interno desse sistema.
Em caso de dúvida, pergunte ao responsável pela segurança encarregado por sua

área.
Por favor, observe também os regulamentos de prevenção de acidentes da

associação de seguro de responsabilidade civil de seu empregador.
Ao operar o sistema, certifique-se de que o pessoal usa

equipamento de proteção como calçado de segurança, óculos
de proteção, proteção auditiva, luvas, etc.
Pasta do guia
Versão:07 19/105
Segurança
2.3 Utilização prevista

O FAS4 é conectado on-line às máquinas de cigarros, assim como às máquinas de
filtros, a fim de distribuir os aromas de forma homogênea sobre o produto.
O FAS4 só pode ser usado para dosagem e distribuição fina de substâncias

aromatizantes aquecidas ou dissolvidas na indústria do tabaco.
As substâncias aromatizantes podem ser pulverizadas no canal da tubagem de

sucção da máquina de cigarros (Mark 8, máquinas de filtros, GD, Protos, ...).
No caso de aromatização de filtros, o aroma é adicionado ao jato de transporte.
A aromatização de papel de cigarro só é feita na máquina de cigarros.
A unidade FAS4 é colocada ao lado da máquina de cigarros. A quantidade de

aroma é calculada em função da velocidade da máquina de cigarros e aplicada por
meio de um sistema de dosagem.
Se o FAS4 for conectado a uma máquina de cigarros, charutos ou máquina de

filtros desconhecida da Köhl Maschinenbau AG, a Köhl Maschinenbau AG deve dar
sua aprovação.
O uso na máquina só é permitido após aprovação pela empresa Köhl
Maschinenbau.
Somente substâncias explosivas podem ser utilizadas que são detectadas pelo
dispositivo de aviso de gás existente, levando, assim, a um desligamento seguro do
FAS4.
Nesse caso, o FAS4 pode ser desligado com segurança.
Isso inclui todas as substâncias especificadas na documentação do dispositivo de

aviso de gás (ver também o manual de instruções GMA 41):
Gás Fórmula Faixa de medição
Etanol C2H5OH 0 – 100% UEG

O limite inferior de explosão (UEU) deve ser ajustado no computador de medição
de gás usando a base de dados CHEMSAFE da DECHEMA e.V. (em Frankfurt
a.M.) (ver também manual de instruções GMA 41).
Pasta do guia
20/105 Versão:07
Segurança
O uso impróprio pode resultar em perigo de vida e membros ou

danos ao sistema e aos espaços circundantes.
O fabricante não aceita qualquer responsabilidade por danos

resultantes de manuseio inadequado.
2.4 Pessoal operacional/requisitos de treinamento
O pessoal para operação, manutenção, inspeção e montagem

deve ter a qualificação apropriada para trabalhar em
atmosferas potencialmente explosivas.
O sistema só pode ser operado por pessoal que tenha sido instruído pela KÖHL
Maschinenbau AG e autorizado pela empresa gestora.
• Essas pessoas devem ter pelo menos 18 anos de idade.
• Todos os operadores devem ser instruídos em teoria e prática antes do primeiro

uso e sobre o sistema:
 Medidas de emergência no local de um acidente e o uso de rotas de fuga e

resgate
 O uso de meios de resgate
• As instruções e exercícios devem ser repetidos uma vez por ano.
• Eles foram autorizados pela pessoa responsável pela segurança do sistema com
base em seu treinamento, experiência e instrução, assim como seu conhecimento
das normas de prevenção de acidentes e condições de operação.
• Você está familiarizado com as instalações locais de resgate e os procedimentos

de primeiros socorros.
Pasta do guia
Versão:07 21/105
Segurança
• Você leu e compreendeu as indicações de segurança, as informações sobre

colocação em funcionamento, operação, manutenção com conservação e
transporte.
• Você recebeu treinamento do fabricante e está familiarizado com os regulamentos

internos de segurança da empresa.
• As responsabilidades do pessoal devem ser claramente definidas para a operação

e manutenção. O pessoal a ser treinado só pode trabalhar na máquina sob a
supervisão de uma pessoa experiente.
Operador
Tarefas do operador:
• Ligar e desligar o sistema
• Reiniciar o sistema após um alarme
• Limpar
Técnico de manutenção
As funções do técnico de manutenção ainda incluem o seguinte:
• Ligar e desligar o sistema
• Reiniciar o sistema após um alarme
• Ajustes dos dispositivos periféricos
• Limpar
Pasta do guia
22/105 Versão:07
Segurança
2.5 Áreas perigosas

Somente pessoal autorizado pode estar na área do sistema durante os trabalhos
para resolver avarias ou para trabalhos de conservação. As áreas de console e
sistemas adjacentes devem ser desligados.
As áreas de perigo devem ser fechadas através de medidas adequadas. O

aumento do perigo deve ser indicado por sinais de advertência.
As áreas de perigo devem estar permanentemente identificadas por:
• Fitas coloridas
• Correntes de segurança vermelhas e brancas e sinais de advertência
• Ou através de outras indicações claras
Nenhuma pessoa pode estar presente em áreas de perigo durante a operação.
Antes de ligar o interruptor principal e a tensão de controle,

certifique-se de que não existem pessoas na área de perigo.
Pasta do guia
Versão:07 23/105
Segurança
2.6 Indicações de segurança para o manuseio do FAS 4
• Deve ser tomado extremo cuidado ao conectar a

fonte de alimentação de 3x400 volts N/PE 50 Hz!
• Ao manusear aromas e detergentes, é imperativo o

uso de óculos de proteção!
• A estação só pode ser transportada sem ou com

recipientes completamente esvaziados!
• Nenhum enchimento dos recipientes na máquina
• As substâncias aromatizantes/detergentes são

substâncias altamente inflamáveis. Por conseguinte,
é proibido entrar em contato com ou chegar perto
dos líquidos com fogo, chama aberta ou similares.
• Misturas de gases explosivos podem ocorrer se

líquidos aromatizantes/de limpeza escaparem ou
forem derramados! Nesse caso, o FAS 4 deve ser
desligado imediatamente e os líquidos vazados
devem ser removidos. Isso também se aplica às
imediações da máquina.
Pasta do guia
24/105 Versão:07
Segurança
• Se o FAS4 for desligado pelo dispositivo de aviso de

gás (ver luz de indicação de avaria, linha de
indicação de avaria ou arquivo de indicação de
avaria), o interruptor principal deve ser desligado
imediatamente.
Em seguida, todas as linhas de abastecimento da
máquina de cigarros devem ser desconectadas. A
máquina só poderá então ser liberada para produção
novamente por uma pessoa autorizada.
• Pede-se cuidado quando o FAS4 se encontrar no

modo de operação a quente. Os agregados podem
atingir temperaturas superiores a 70 °C!
• A operação a quente com misturas de álcool não é

permitida; perigo de explosão!
Pasta do guia
Versão:07 25/105
Segurança
2.7 Atividades de controle
Antes de cada colocação em funcionamento do FAS4, o bom

funcionamento da máquina deve ser verificado!
Ler o protocolo de avarias do turno anterior/do dia anterior. Realizar atividades de

verificação e controle de acordo com o livro de controle.
A operação deve ser interrompida imediatamente se o sistema não funcionar

corretamente ou se ocorrerem outros defeitos que sejam obviamente perigosos.
Os defeitos perigosos devem ser comunicados imediatamente ao pessoal

responsável.
• Eficácia de dispositivos de segurança
• Os dispositivos de segurança não devem ser tornados ineficazes nem devem ser
mal utilizados.
• As configurações de fábrica dos componentes só podem ser alteradas por pessoal

especializado. Isto se aplica em particular a:
• Bloqueios de segurança elétricos/eletrônicos e acoplamentos, como p.ex.,
 Interruptor de fim de curso de parada de emergência
 Interruptor de parada de emergência
 Fusíveis de sobrecarga
 Interruptores de porta
 Interruptores de chave, etc.
• Componentes mecânicos
• Controles e programas
Se, entretanto, os dispositivos de segurança tiverem que ser tornados ineficazes

aquando da resolução de avarias, eles deverão ser tornados efetivos novamente
imediatamente após a conclusão desses trabalhos.
Pasta do guia
26/105 Versão:07
Segurança
Antes de colocar o sistema novamente em funcionamento, a função dos

dispositivos de segurança deve ser verificada.
2.8 Comportamento em caso de acidentes

Em caso de acidentes envolvendo danos pessoais, danos ao equipamento ou
danos a edifícios, o supervisor deve ser informado imediatamente após o
tratamento inicial dos feridos.
Quando veículos de emergência são utilizados, a gravidade dos danos pessoais e
materiais deve ser relatada.
Em caso de um desastre (p.ex., incêndio), todas as pessoas devem abandonar as

instalações. Somente as instalações de fuga e rotas de escape marcadas devem
ser utilizadas. As operações de resgate só podem ser realizadas por pessoal
instruído de operação e resgate (bombeiros).
Os equipamentos de proteção fornecidos devem ser utilizados e seu uso deve ser
praticado.
2.9 Comportamento em caso de avarias e conservação

Se ocorrerem avarias durante a operação, o sistema deve ser desligado
imediatamente para que a avaria possa ser corrigida por pessoal especializado
adequado.
O pessoal operacional deve ser informado antes de iniciar os trabalhos de

resolução de avarias ou conservação. Ao trabalhar acima da altura do corpo, utilize
os auxiliares de elevação e as plataformas de trabalho previstas para esse fim.
As peças de máquinas não devem ser utilizadas como auxiliares de elevação. As

áreas de reparo devem ser protegidas em uma ampla área.
O operador deve garantir que quaisquer defeitos que ocorram sejam registrados e
retificados e que o sistema seja verificado quanto ao funcionamento adequado.
Pasta do guia
Versão:07 27/105
Segurança
2.10 Lista dos riscos residuais e suas contramedidas

Os dispositivos de segurança da máquina protegem você de ferimentos.
No entanto, em alguns lugares existe o risco de ferimentos durante mudanças de
material e trabalhos de manutenção ou reparos, pois é necessário trabalhar em
áreas perigosas.
Cuidado: perigo de ferimentos!
Os perigos residuais só podem ser evitados através de um

comportamento apropriado.
Use seu equipamento de proteção individual (óculos de

proteção, vestuário de proteção justo, calçado de segurança,
máscara respiratória, etc.).
Sempre mantenha distância suficiente dos pontos perigosos e

observe os seguintes perigos residuais.
Pasta do guia
28/105 Versão:07
Segurança
2.11 Liberação não intencional de meios explosivos
Possíveis danos:
• Morte por queimaduras na pele
• Risco de asfixia
• Ferimentos por queimaduras na pele
Causas:
• Liberação não intencional do aroma no interior do FAS4 e na máquina de

cigarros/filtros
Opções de proteção:
• Inspeção diária do FAS4!
• Os materiais estão sujeitos ao envelhecimento natural. Todas as vedações,

mangueiras e conexões estão sujeitas a manutenção regular. No caso de
qualquer anomalia, as partes danificadas ou porosas devem ser substituídas!
• Se os intervalos de inspeção não forem observados, gases, vapores ou líquidos

podem escapar de forma descontrolada nas vedações, mangueiras e conexões.
Pasta do guia
Versão:07 29/105
Segurança
2.12 Perigos devidos a influências mecânicas
Possíveis danos:
Perda de consciência e ferimentos são possíveis devido a:
• Esmagamento, cisalhamento, corte, enrolamento
• Tração, colisão, perfuração, fricção
• Pulverização de líquidos sob alta pressão
• Escorregamento, tropeções, quedas
Causas:
• Elementos de corte, arestas afiadas, peças pontiagudas
• Áreas de esmagamento, cisalhamento e enrolamento
• Projeção/escorregamento para o lado de peças de trabalho
• Quebra ou estouro de peças
• Elementos elásticos (molas)
• Líquidos e gases sob pressão ou em vácuo
• Ambiente de trabalho escorregadio, com manchas de óleo, obstáculos no chão
• Usar luvas de proteção de couro
• Usar vestuário de proteção justo
• Amarrar a barba e os cabelos mais compridos, usar proteção no cabelo
• Usar calçado de segurança
Pasta do guia
30/105 Versão:07
Segurança
• Usar proteção facial e ocular
• Manter o piso, equipamentos e máquinas limpos
• Instalar bacias coletoras de absorção de óleo ou à prova de óleo
• Eliminar vazamentos
Pasta do guia
Versão:07 31/105
Segurança
2.13 Perigos devidos a energia elétrica
Somente eletricistas qualificados podem trabalhar em sistemas ou equipamentos

elétricos de acordo com os regulamentos eletrotécnicos (VDE).
Também são permitidas pessoas instruídas sob a direção e supervisão de um

eletricista qualificado.
Possíveis danos:
• Morte por choque elétrico,
• Ferimentos e queimaduras
Causas:
• Contato, toque ou proximidade com peças não isoladas ou isoladas de forma

inadequada,
• que estão sob corrente e tensão.
• Uso de ferramentas não isoladas.
• Peças expostas eletricamente condutoras após falha de isolamento.
• Má execução e controle de segurança após os trabalhos de manutenção.
• Instalação de fusíveis incorretos.
• Curto-circuito
Pasta do guia
32/105 Versão:07
Segurança
• Antes de iniciar os trabalhos, desconectar da fonte de alimentação as peças da

máquina e do sistema que vão ser sujeitas a manutenção e protegê-las contra
religação
• Verificar primeiro as peças desbloqueadas quanto à ausência de tensão, depois

aterrar e provocar curto-circuito; isolar as peças adjacentes sob tensão
• Verificar regularmente o equipamento elétrico. Substituir os cabos soltos ou

danificados, não tocar nas peças condutoras de tensão
• Use vestuário de proteção para proteger contra contato acidental
• (luvas de plástico/borracha, sapatos com sola grossa em crepe)
• Uso de ferramentas isoladas de tensão
• Substituição de fusíveis queimados por novos
Pasta do guia
Versão:07 33/105
Segurança
2.14 Perigos durante o transporte de materiais

operacionais
Possíveis danos:
• Ferimentos devido à escaldadura e queimadura da pele,
• Alergias
• Risco de incêndio,
• Danos ambientais devidos à penetração no solo e na água
Causas:
• Recipientes com vazamento e inadequados
• Transporte inadequado
• Usar vestuário de proteção (proteção dos olhos, rosto, mãos e corpo)
• Inspeção visual regular dos recipientes
• Eliminar os danos imediatamente
Pasta do guia
34/105 Versão:07
Segurança
2.15 Perigos devidos a materiais e materiais de trabalho
Trata-se de substâncias como óleos, graxas, líquidos de refrigeração, agentes de

limpeza e solventes, ácidos, álcalis.
Possíveis danos:
• Deflagração devido a inflamação; perda de consciência, intoxicação ou sonolência

devido a inalação
• Alergias
• Ferimentos devido à escaldadura e queimadura da pele
• Queimaduras devido a concentrado ácido e alcalino
• Explosões, incêndios
• Danos ambientais devidos a vazamentos e penetração de líquidos prejudiciais ao

meio ambiente no solo e nos corpos de água
Causas:
• Contato da pele com líquidos nocivos à pele
• Vestuário de trabalho molhado com substâncias perigosas
• Derramamento e capotamento de recipientes com substâncias perigosas
• Cigarros acesos ou chamas abertas ao manusear substâncias perigosas
• Saídas causadas por vazamentos
Pasta do guia
Versão:07 35/105
Segurança
• Extrema cautela ao manusear materiais operacionais e auxiliares
• Usar vestuário de proteção (luvas resistentes a óleo e ácido; possível proteção

respiratória)
• Evitar o contato com a pele e a inalação a qualquer custo
• Trocar imediatamente o vestuário embebido em substâncias perigosas
• Garantir arejamento e ventilação suficientes da área de trabalho
• Observar as indicações de perigo nos recipientes de materiais perigosos
• Fechar bem os recipientes de material perigoso imediatamente após o uso
• Coletar com segurança os materiais operacionais usados e descartá-los de forma

ambientalmente correta
• Armazenar os materiais operacionais usados separadamente em recipientes

adequados
• Fechar de maneira segura e selar firmemente recipientes com materiais

operacionais novos/antigos
• Em caso de vazamento ou após derramamento, espalhar imediatamente os

agentes absorventes adequados e descartar de forma ambientalmente segura
Pasta do guia
36/105 Versão:07
Segurança
2.16 Perigo devido a calor, incêndio e explosão
Possíveis danos:
• Morte por queimaduras na pele
• Risco de asfixia
• Ferimentos por queimaduras na pele
Causas:
• Funcionamento a quente dos mancais e eixos
• Aquecimento das paredes externas por fricção ou por defeitos da máquina
• Curto-circuito elétrico
• Incêndios de cabos após desgaste do isolamento e sobrecarga
• Ignição espontânea de substâncias perigosas devido à proximidade de objetos

quentes
• Manuseio descuidado de gases, solventes, corantes, descalcificantes, ácidos e

álcalis
• Chamas abertas, cigarros acesos
Opções de proteção contra o calor:
• Usar luvas de couro e vestuário de proteção contra o calor
Opções de proteção contra incêndios:
• Ter prontos extintores de incêndio, cobertores de incêndio e proteção respiratória
Pasta do guia
Versão:07 37/105
Segurança
Opções de proteção contra explosões:
• Não fumar, inexistência de chamas abertas ao manusear produtos de limpeza e

solventes inflamáveis
Pasta do guia
38/105 Versão:07
Segurança
2.17 Perigo devido a radiação
Possíveis danos:
Ferimentos e queimaduras
• agudas : Ferimentos e queimaduras
• crônicas : Tumores, defeitos celulares, irritações da pele
Causas:
• Arco elétrico (trabalhos de soldagem)
• Radiação laser (laser de medição, solda a laser)
• radiação ionizante
• Máquinas com campos eletromagnéticos de alta frequência a partir de

transformadores
• Bobinas e linhas elétricas com correntes fortes
• Raios radioativos (raios alfa, beta, gama)
• Manter o máximo de distância possível de fontes de radiação
• Expor-se a fontes de radiação por um período de tempo tão curto quanto possível
• Estabelecer escudos de radiação que sejam tão espessos e reflexivos quanto

possível
• Usar proteção da pele, dos olhos e do corpo
Pasta do guia
Versão:07 39/105
Segurança
2.18 Perigo devido a ruído
• O nível de ruído da máquina é < 70 dB(A).
• Não existe perigo em termos de ruído.
Possibilidades básicas de proteção contra ruído:
• Usar proteção auditiva (algodão, tampões ou capacete)
• Usar dispositivos de proteção acústica (cabines de proteção)
• Melhorar o isolamento acústico ou a atenuação acústica
• Eliminar os desequilíbrios das máquinas
• Aplicar revestimentos anti-drumming em chapas metálicas vibrantes
• Instalação isolada por vibração de máquinas
Pasta do guia
40/105 Versão:07
Segurança
2.19 Perigo devido a aceleração e vibração
Possíveis danos:
• Escorregamento, tropeções, quedas
• Peças que caem ou se soltam
• Distúrbios de saúde (perda do equilíbrio e da consciência; distúrbios

cardiovasculares)
Risco de danos devidos a:
• peças soltas
• componentes defeituosos, quebrados
Causas:
• Acelerações no sentido longitudinal
• Acelerações na direção do curso
• Montagens defeituosas, ajustes de folga excessivos
• O sistema tem um desequilíbrio
• Sistema não instalado com isolamento contra vibrações
• procurar uma posição ou suporte seguros
• Eliminar os desequilíbrios das máquinas
• Instalação isolada por vibração de máquinas
Pasta do guia
Versão:07 41/105
Segurança
2.20 Mais informações sobre os perigos especiais
Energia elétrica
• Usar somente fusíveis originais com amperagem especificada! Em caso de

avarias no fornecimento de energia elétrica, desligar a máquina/sistema
imediatamente!
• Os trabalhos em sistemas ou equipamentos elétricos só podem ser realizados por

um eletricista qualificado ou por pessoas instruídas sob a direção e supervisão de
um eletricista qualificado, de acordo com os regulamentos eletrotécnicos.
• Máquinas e partes do sistema nas quais são realizados trabalhos de inspeção,

manutenção e reparo devem ser desconectadas do fornecimento de energia, se
prescrito. Verificar primeiro as peças expostas para garantir que estão livres de
tensão, depois aterrá-las, provocar curto-circuito e desconectar as peças
adjacentes sob tensão!
• O equipamento elétrico de uma máquina/sistema deve ser inspecionado/testado

regularmente. Defeitos, tais como conexões soltas ou cabos queimados, devem
ser retificados imediatamente.
• Se for necessário trabalhar com peças sob tensão, chamar uma segunda pessoa
para acionar a parada de emergência ou o interruptor principal com liberação de
tensão em caso de emergência. Fechar a área de trabalho com uma corrente de
segurança vermelha e branca e um sinal de advertência. Usar somente
ferramentas isoladas por tensão.
Pasta do guia
42/105 Versão:07
Segurança
Gás, poeira, vapor, fumaça
• Somente realizar trabalhos de solda, polimento na máquina/no sistema se isto

tiver sido expressamente aprovado. Pode haver um risco de incêndio e explosão!
• Ao trabalhar em espaços confinados, observe qualquer regulamentação nacional

existente!
Sistema hidráulico, pneumático
• Os trabalhos em equipamentos hidráulicos só podem ser realizados por pessoas

com conhecimentos e experiência especial em hidráulica!
• Durante todos os trabalhos de montagem, o sistema deve ser despressurizado

tanto pneumaticamente quanto hidraulicamente.
• Verifique regularmente todas as tubagens, mangueiras e conexões roscadas

quanto a vazamentos e danos visíveis externamente! Eliminar os danos
imediatamente! O derramamento de óleo pode causar ferimentos e incêndios.
• Colocar e montar sistemas hidráulicos e tubagens de ar comprimido de forma

profissional!
• Não confundir as conexões! As conexões, comprimento e qualidade das linhas de

mangueiras devem atender aos requisitos.
Pasta do guia
Versão:07 43/105
Segurança
Óleos, gorduras e outras substâncias químicas
• Ao manusear óleos, graxas lubrificantes e outras substâncias químicas, observar

as normas de segurança aplicáveis ao produto!
• Cuidado ao manusear materiais operacionais e auxiliares quentes (risco de

queimaduras ou escaldaduras)!
Instruções de segurança para determinadas fases de operação
Funcionamento normal
• Evitar qualquer método de trabalho relevante para a segurança!
• Tomar medidas para garantir que a máquina/o sistema é operado somente em

condições seguras e funcionais!
• Somente operar a máquina se todos os dispositivos de proteção e equipamentos

relacionados à segurança, p.ex., dispositivos de proteção destacáveis, dispositivos
de parada de emergência, isolamento acústico, dispositivos de extração,
estiverem presentes e funcionais!
• Verificar a máquina/o sistema quanto a danos e defeitos visíveis externamente

pelo menos uma vez por turno! Informar imediatamente o órgão/a pessoa
responsável quaisquer mudanças que tenham ocorrido (incluindo aquelas no
comportamento operacional)! Se necessário, parar e proteger a máquina
imediatamente.
• Em caso de avarias no funcionamento, parar e proteger a máquina/o sistema

imediatamente! Solicitar a resolução imediata das avarias!
• Observar os procedimentos de ligação e desligamento, indicações de controle de

acordo com o manual de instruções!
Antes de ligar/colocar a máquina/o sistema em funcionamento, certifique-se de que

ninguém possa ser colocado em perigo pela máquina/o sistema em funcionamento!
Pasta do guia
44/105 Versão:07
Segurança
Trabalhos de manutenção
Trabalhos de manutenção no âmbito do uso da máquina/do sistema e atividades de

conservação, assim como resolução de avarias no decurso do trabalho:
• Observar as atividades de ajuste, manutenção e inspeção e os prazos

especificados no manual de instruções, incluindo indicações sobre a substituição
de peças/partes de equipamentos! Essas atividades só podem ser realizadas por
pessoal especializado.
• No caso de trabalhos específicos de manutenção/conservação, designe o pessoal

adequadamente treinado (p.ex., trabalhos em altura).
• Em todos os trabalhos relativos à operação, ajuste da produção, conversão ou

ajuste da máquina/do sistema e seus dispositivos relacionados à segurança,
assim como inspeção, manutenção e reparo, observe os procedimentos de
ligação e desligamento de acordo com o manual de instruções e indicações para
trabalhos de conservação!
• Proteger a área de conservação na medida do necessário!
• Se a máquina/o sistema estiver completamente desligada/o durante os trabalhos

de manutenção e reparo, deve ser protegida/o contra religação inesperada:
 Bloquear os dispositivos de comando principal e remover a chave e/ou
 anexar um sinal de advertência ao interruptor principal
• As peças individuais e as montagens maiores devem ser cuidadosamente fixados

aos equipamentos de elevação e protegidos durante a substituição, de modo que
nenhum perigo possa surgir a partir daí. Utilizar somente equipamentos de
elevação e acessórios de manuseio de carga adequados e tecnicamente
impecáveis, com capacidade de carga suficiente! Não permanecer nem trabalhar
sob cargas suspensas!
• Ao trabalhar acima da altura do corpo, utilize os auxiliares de elevação e as

plataformas de trabalho previstas para esse fim. As peças de máquinas não
devem ser utilizadas como auxiliares de elevação. Devem ser usados cintos de
segurança para trabalhos de manutenção em alturas maiores.
Pasta do guia
Versão:07 45/105
Segurança
• Mantenha todas as pegas, degraus, corrimões, plataformas, escadas livres de

sujeira, neve e gelo!
Pasta do guia
46/105 Versão:07
Livro de controle
3 Livro de controle
3.1 Geral
Os registros aqui arquivados têm um significado importante para os serviços de
garantia e para sua segurança.
Se você precisar remover registros, grampeie uma folha de anotações com a data
de remoção e seu nome na página onde você removeu os registros.
Os registros que servem de base para o trabalho, p.ex., o livro de controle, devem
ser copiados em conformidade.
Certifique-se de que esses registros estão completos novamente.
3.2 Entradas no livro de controle

Avarias e anomalias no dispositivo devem ser inseridas no livro de controle em sua
ordem cronológica. Este livro de controle deve ser assinado pelo supervisor de
turno diariamente ou pelo menos uma vez por semana.
O livro de controle é um documento importante. Manter um livro de controle o

ajudará a realizar os trabalhos de verificação e controle prescritos com
regularidade. Isso assegura que a máquina está sempre pronta para o uso e
eficiente e permite detectar danos iminentes em uma fase inicial, a fim de evitar
grandes trabalhos de reparo.
Somente documentando consistentemente as avarias é possível uma análise de

avarias.
No caso de uma reclamação de garantia, a KÖHL Maschinenbau AG se reserva o

direito de examinar o livro de controle.
Pasta do guia
Versão:07 47/105
Livro de controle
3.3 Atividades de controle

Ler o protocolo de avarias do turno anterior/do dia anterior. Realizar atividades de
verificação e controle de acordo com o livro de controle.
A operação deve cessar imediatamente no caso
de:
Falha no funcionamento adequado do sistema.
Se ocorrerem outros defeitos obviamente perigosos.
Os defeitos perigosos devem ser comunicados imediatamente

ao pessoal responsável.
Se forem detectados vazamentos.
Antes de ligar o interruptor principal e a tensão de controle,

certifique-se de que não existem pessoas na área de perigo
Os defeitos perigosos devem ser comunicados imediatamente

ao pessoal responsável.
Pasta do guia
48/105 Versão:07
Livro de controle
3.4 Livro de controle/avarias

Avaria
Assinatura do
Data Tipo de sistema Tipo de avaria resolvida?
chefe de turno
Sim/não
Data Remetente
Pasta do guia
Versão:07 49/105
Livro de controle
Ao utilizar o serviço da empresa KÖHL, o livro de controle com um formulário

preenchido da solicitação de serviço deve ser enviado à empresa KÖHL
Maschinenbau.
Isso permite uma análise precisa das avarias e uma visão geral das atividades
realizadas e das condições do sistema.
No anexo dessa documentação, você encontrará os documentos correspondentes

à solicitação de serviço.
 1.1 Endereço do fabricante
Pasta do guia
Versão:07 51/105
Descrição funcional
4 Descrição funcional
O KÖHL Flavor Application System (Sistema de Aplicação de Aroma) (FAS Modelo

4 = FAS4) é uma unidade móvel que permite aplicar todos os tipos de aroma
homogeneamente no canal de sucção de todas as máquinas de cigarros
disponíveis (p.ex., Hauni, GD, Decoufle, Mollins) ou no "Transport Jet" (jato de
transporte) das máquinas de filtros.
Representação de princípios
 Tanque (TW)  Área do tanque de amortecimento
 Tanque de aromas  Armário de cabos
 Sistema de aquecimento  Armário de comutação
 Estação  Painel de controle
O KÖHL FAS4 está equipado com um sistema de tanque duplo: o tanque de aroma
móvel (50kg) e o tanque amortecedor integrado (5kg).
Ambos os recipientes estão equipados com sensores de nível de enchimento para
o reabastecimento automático do tanque amortecedor durante a produção. A
substituição do tanque pode ser feita sem interromper a produção.
Pasta do guia
Versão:07 53/105
Ambos os tanques são equipados com filtros feitos de malha fina de aço inoxidável
para limpar o aroma por meio de filtragem.
Além disso, um agitador está disponível para misturar o aroma.
Ao utilizar mentol puro, é fornecido um sistema de aquecimento para ambos os
tanques.
IMPORTANTE A estação e o tanque

Ambos os componentes do FAS4 possuem uma placa de
máquina onde cada estação pode ser atribuída ao tanque
correspondente. Exemplo:
Estação – FAS 4 - 000
Tanque – TW FAS4 - 000
O tanque pode ser abastecido em uma área protegida contra explosões. O tanque
não possui quaisquer fontes de ignição próprias.
Risco de explosão
O tanque não deve ser conectado eletricamente em uma
atmosfera potencialmente explosiva!
Risco de explosão
A estação não é adequada para uso em uma atmosfera
potencialmente explosiva.
Pasta do guia
54/105 Versão:07
4.1 Dados técnicos
PC do painel
• Estrutura em alumínio
• Braço de fixação
• Classe de proteção IP 65
• Temperatura de operação 0 a 45 °C
• Sistema operacional –Windows 7
• Processador Intel Celeron M 1.5 GHz
• 256 MB DDR-RAM, expansível até 2 GB
• Adaptador Ethernet duplo integrado com conexão 2 x 10/100 Base-T
• Disco rígido IDE, 2,5'', 40 GB
• 2 interfaces seriais RS232 e USB 2.0 integradas
• Fonte de alimentação 24 V CC
• Tela de 15 polegadas 1024 x 768 como tela tátil
• Fornecimento ininterrupto de energia
Pasta do guia
Versão:07 55/105
FAS4
Fornecimento de energia elétrica (com sistema de aquecimento)

3x400 volts N/PE/AC-50 Hz/8 KW
Dispositivo de aquecimento interno (FAS4) 1x230 volts/AC-50 Hz/4 KW
Dispositivo de aquecimento externo (máquina de cigarros)

1x24 volts/AC-50 Hz/0,32 KW
Dispositivo de aquecimento tanque externo (com sistema de aquecimento)

3x400 volts N/PE/AC-50 Hz/4 KW
Pressão de ar 4,5 até 6 bar- 6 mm
Faixa de dosagem 3 - 120 g/min./4 – 240 g/min./
10 – 480 g/min.
Precisão na dosagem ± 3% a ± 0,5% do valor nominal
Faixa de temperatura 20 °C a 70 °C
Precisão da temperatura ± 3% do valor nominal
Velocidade da máquina 1000 a 20 000 cig./min
Capacidade do tanque integrado aprox. 5 l
Capacidade do tanque móvel: aprox. 45 l
Dimensões da estrutura C x L x A 1400 x 550 x 1400 [mm]
Pesos (vazio)
FAS4 total 450 kg
Estação 300 kg
Tanque 150 kg
Pasta do guia
56/105 Versão:07
Transporte
5 Transporte
O FAS4 é entregue em uma caixa de madeira.
Transporte em uma distância maior.
Recomendamos ao operador que mova o FAS4 na caixa até o

local de uso. P.ex., com um porta-paletes.
A eliminação das caixas de madeira deve ser implementada de acordo com as

regulamentações nacionais!
Pasta do guia
Versão:07 57/105
Transporte
5.1 A instalação
Após desembalar, a estação deve ser conectada à máquina de cigarros de acordo
com as instruções de operação. Consultar detalhes 8 Instruções de operação!
Empurrar o FAS4 para a posição
A estação e o tanque estão equipados cada um com 4 rodízios. O tanque tem dois
rodízios fixos e dois rodízios de apoio. A estação está equipada com 4 rodízios
giratórios.
Danos ao acoplamento por empurrar em conjunto!
A estação e o tanque devem ser sempre empurrados

separadamente!
Risco de capotagem do tanque.
Ao empurrar o tanque, certifique-se de que o trajeto está livre!
Empurre sempre o tanque em pares!
Pasta do guia
58/105 Versão:07
Transporte
Aperte os freios dos rodízios giratórios!
A estação está equipada com 4 rodízios giratórios e o

petroleiro com 2 rodízios giratórios. Certifique-se de que todos
os freios nos  rodízios giratórios são acionados!
Para consultar a colocação em funcionamento detalhada, ver 8 Instruções de

operação!
Ligação à terra
O agregado é ligado à terra por meio do conector. Além disso, a ligação à terra é
feita através das rodas condutoras.
 ver também 14.2 Certificados
Limpe as rodas!
Certifique-se de que as rodas do FAS4 são mantidas e limpas

de acordo com o capítulo de manutenção na pasta do guia!
Pasta do guia
Versão:07 59/105
Colocação em funcionamento
6 Colocação em funcionamento
A colocação em funcionamento inicial é realizada pela KÖHL Maschinenbau AG.
A ação não autorizada e a colocação em funcionamento da máquina sem a

presença de um colaborador da KÖHL Maschinenbau AG exclui a responsabilidade
e a garantia.
A futura instalação e conexão com uma máquina de cigarros só é permitida por

uma pessoa autorizada por escrito pelo operador.
Para consultar a colocação em funcionamento detalhada, ver 8 "Instruções de

operação"
Risco de explosão devido a vazamentos
Todas as mangueiras e conexões estão sujeitos a um

envelhecimento natural. Se forem detectados vazamentos
durante o manuseio diário do FAS, a máquina deve ser
imediatamente desconectada da fonte de alimentação e
protegida contra religação.
Informe diretamente um técnico de serviço!
Pasta do guia
Versão:07 61/105
Colocação fora de
funcionamento/desmontagem do
sistema
7 Colocação fora de
funcionamento/desmontagem do sistema
Se o sistema for colocado permanentemente fora de funcionamento, seja

completamente ou apenas parcialmente, as leis e regulamentos para eliminação em
vigor naquele momento devem ser cumpridas. Faz sentido verificar quais materiais
podem ser reciclados e depois implementar isto.
Indicações sobre a colocação fora de funcionamento
A desmontagem elétrica só pode ser realizada por um

eletricista qualificado.
7.1 Eliminação
Proteção ambiental
Substâncias perigosas para a água!
Algumas substâncias podem poluir o solo e as águas subterrâneas ou entrar no

sistema de esgotos! Observe as obrigações legais para evitar desperdícios e
reciclagem ou descarte adequado para todos os trabalhos no e com o sistema!
Especialmente durante os trabalhos de instalação, reparo e manutenção, as

substâncias perigosas para a água, como graxas e óleos lubrificantes, não devem
poluir o solo ou entrar no sistema de esgotos!
Essas substâncias devem ser armazenadas, transportadas, coletadas e

descartadas em recipientes adequados!
Pasta do guia
Versão:07 63/105
Colocação fora de
funcionamento/desmontagem do
sistema
Óleo e resíduos oleosos e lubrificantes
Indicações sobre óleo e resíduos oleosos e lubrificantes
O óleo e os resíduos oleosos, assim como os lubrificantes, representam um

potencial de alto risco para o meio ambiente. Portanto, seu descarte é feito por
empresas especializadas!
Elimine esses resíduos para o próprio departamento de eliminação de resíduos da

empresa, que os repassará para empresas especializadas! Ao manusear óleos,
resíduos oleosos e lubrificantes, as fichas de dados de segurança dos respectivos
fabricantes e as instruções de operação do operador devem ser lidas e observadas.
Metais
Separe os diferentes metais e descarte-os separadamente. A eliminação deve ser

feita por uma empresa autorizada.
Lixo elétrico e eletrônico
Os dispositivos com este logótipo na embalagem ou no dispositivo devem ser

descartados separadamente. Esses dispositivos não devem ser descartados com o
lixo doméstico normal. Você é responsável por garantir que qualquer resíduo
elétrico ou eletrônico seja descartado através dos pontos apropriados, p.ex., o
centro de reciclagem.
Pasta do guia
64/105 Versão:07
Instruções de operação
8 Instruções de operação
As instruções de operação foram criadas como um documento

removível para operação conveniente e para fins de
treinamento.
Se as instruções de operação não estiverem arquivadas nesta

IMPORTANTE pasta, você pode:
 • voltar a imprimir as instruções de operação a partir

da versão em CD da documentação.
• encomendar uma nova cópia do manual de

instruções à KÖHL Maschinenbau AG 1.1 Endereço
do fabricante.
Pasta do guia
Versão:07 65/105
Manual de operação FAS4
Versão: 02
Manual de operação original
Diretório de alterações:
Versão
Elaborado: Descrição da alteração Revisor:
Nome/Data Nome/Data
01 Thees/ Novo layout, conteúdo adaptado à

2017-11-07 versão em inglês a partir de 20.07.2017
02 Thees Layout alterado para impressão frente e

verso
09/10/2019
Manual de operação
Versão:02 3/133
Índice
1 Prefácio ...................................................................................................... 9
1.1 Endereço do fabricante ................................................................................. 9
1.2 Identificação do sistema ................................................................................ 9
2 Símbolos e indicações gerais................................................................ 11
3 Primeiras etapas ..................................................................................... 13
3.1 Introdução ................................................................................................... 13
3.2 Indicações de segurança ............................................................................. 16
3.3 Ligação à máquina de produção ................................................................. 16
3.4 Ligação do FAS4 ......................................................................................... 17
3.5 Desligamento do FAS4................................................................................ 17
3.6 Modo UPS ................................................................................................... 18
4 Informações gerais sobre a visualização ............................................. 19
4.1 Menu principal ............................................................................................. 19
4.2 Gerenciamento de usuários ........................................................................ 21
4.2.1 Níveis de usuários ................................................................................ 21
4.2.2 Gerenciar usuários................................................................................ 22
4.2.3 Mudar o próprio login de usuário .......................................................... 22
4.3 Criação de uma captura de tela .................................................................. 23
4.3.1 A ajuda on-line ...................................................................................... 23
4.4 Mudança de idioma ..................................................................................... 24
4.5 Estrutura funcional da exibição ................................................................... 24
4.6 Indicadores .................................................................................................. 27
4.6.1 Indicadores de status na barra de cabeçalho ....................................... 27
4.6.2 Indicadores de semáforo na janela "Produktion" (Produção) ................ 28
4.6.3 Indicadores de status da engenharia de processo................................ 28
4.6.4 Indicadores de status do sistema de aquecimento ............................... 29
5 As telas de processo do FAS4 .............................................................. 31
5.1 Visão geral do processo .............................................................................. 31
5.2 Visão geral da produção.............................................................................. 32
5.3 Processo ..................................................................................................... 33
5.4 Registro de qualidade.................................................................................. 36
5.5 Trending (Tendência) .................................................................................. 37
5.6 Menu de manutenção .................................................................................. 38
5.6.1 Filtros e mangueiras ............................................................................. 38
Versão:02 5/133
5.7 Estatísticas .................................................................................................. 40
5.8 Alarmes ....................................................................................................... 41
5.9 Histórico de alarmes .................................................................................... 42
6 Configuração e parametrização ............................................................ 43
6.1 Parâmetros da máquina .............................................................................. 43
6.1.1 Extern 1 (Externo 1) .............................................................................. 44
6.1.2 Prozess 1 (Processo 1) ......................................................................... 46
6.1.3 Mudança de aroma na operação .......................................................... 48
6.1.4 Tankraum (Espaço do tanque).............................................................. 49
6.1.5 Prozess2 (Processo 2), Extern2 (Externo 2) ......................................... 50
6.2 Circuitos de regulação ................................................................................. 50
6.2.1 Configurações do regulador .................................................................. 51
6.2.2 Visão geral do regulador ....................................................................... 54
6.3 Limites de alarme ........................................................................................ 55
6.3.1 Extern 1 (Externo 1) .............................................................................. 56
6.3.2 Prozess 1 (Processo 1) ......................................................................... 58
6.3.3 Tankraum (Espaço do tanque).............................................................. 61
6.3.4 Prozess2 (Processo 2), Extern2 (Externo 2) ......................................... 63
6.4 Calibração ................................................................................................... 63
7 Produzir com o FAS4 (modo de produção) .......................................... 67
7.1 Introdução ................................................................................................... 67
7.2 Preparação .................................................................................................. 67
7.3 Inserção dos parâmetros de produção e início da produção ....................... 68
7.3.1 Modo frio/modo quente e interruptor de chave ..................................... 68
7.3.2 Inserção dos parâmetros de produção (máquina de produção de
cigarros) ............................................................................................................ 70
7.3.3 Inserção dos parâmetros de produção (máquina de produção de filtros)
71
7.3.4 Inserção dos parâmetros de produção (máquina de enrolamento ou de
papel) 72
7.3.5 FAS4 Preparação da produção............................................................. 74
7.4 Produção ..................................................................................................... 75
7.4.1 Ligação do agitador .............................................................................. 76
7.4.2 Standby e standby automático .............................................................. 77
7.4.3 Ajuste da pressão de ar para o bico de duas substâncias .................... 77
7.4.4 Retirar aroma ........................................................................................ 78
7.5 Terminar a produção ................................................................................... 78
6/133 Versão:02
8 Modos de operação ................................................................................ 81
8.1 Modo de produção....................................................................................... 81
8.2 Modo manual ............................................................................................... 81
8.3 Semioperação ou semiautomático .............................................................. 83
8.3.1 Circuito de limpeza ............................................................................... 83
8.3.2 Pulverizar detergente ............................................................................ 83
8.3.3 Suprimir detergente .............................................................................. 84
8.3.4 Circuito de aroma.................................................................................. 84
8.3.5 Pulverizar aroma ................................................................................... 84
8.3.6 Suprimir aroma ..................................................................................... 85
8.4 Automático .................................................................................................. 85
9 Limpeza do FAS4 .................................................................................... 87
9.1.1 Limpeza manual.................................................................................... 88
9.1.2 Limpar o tanque .................................................................................... 89
9.1.3 Esvaziar completamente o tanque ........................................................ 91
9.1.4 Limpar as tubagens .............................................................................. 94
9.1.5 Limpar a estação .................................................................................. 95
9.1.6 Limpar os filtros..................................................................................... 96
10 O tanque de aroma externo (opcional) .............................................. 97
10.1 Estrutura ...................................................................................................... 97
10.2 O painel de controle .................................................................................... 98
10.3 Enchimento ................................................................................................. 98
10.4 Derretimento e preparação do aroma.......................................................... 99
10.5 Acoplamento ao FAS4............................................................................... 100
10.6 O agitador.................................................................................................. 102
11 O Additional Screen (a tela adicional) (opcional) ........................... 103
11.1 Introdução ................................................................................................. 103
11.2 Conexão entre o monitor e o FAS4 ........................................................... 104
11.3 Utilização do monitor em múltiplas unidades FAS4................................... 105
11.4 Resolução do erro ..................................................................................... 105
12 Janela de diagnóstico (opcional) ..................................................... 107
12.1 Vista principal ............................................................................................ 108
12.2 Configuração das conexões da interface .................................................. 109
12.3 Esquemas ................................................................................................. 110
12.4 Exemplos................................................................................................... 111
12.4.1 Falha no fornecimento de ar ............................................................ 111
Versão:02 7/133
12.4.2 Falha da entrada analógica ............................................................. 112
13 Detectar dados de produção (opcional) .......................................... 113
14 Glossário ............................................................................................ 117
15 Observações ...................................................................................... 133
8/133 Versão:02
Prefácio
1 Prefácio
1.1 Endereço do fabricante
KÖHL Maschinenbau AG Tel.: +352 276827 - 0
17, Am Scheerleck Fax: +352 276827 - 99
6868 Wecker http://www.koehl-mb.eu/
Luxemburg
1.2 Identificação do sistema

Na placa de identificação, você encontrará as características do sistema.
As características de seu sistema são muito importantes para contatos posteriores

entre você, seu representante da KÖHL Maschinenbau AG e nosso Centro de
Serviços.
Elas nos permitem fornecer peças de reposição corretamente e fornecer um

suporte técnico adequado.
 – Endereço do fabricante
 – Número do pedido
 – Designação da máquina
 – Número de série
 – Ano de fabricação
 – Marcação CE
Versão:02 9/133
Símbolos e indicações gerais
2 Símbolos e indicações gerais
Os símbolos e indicações que se seguem o advertem sobre possíveis danos

pessoais ou materiais ou lhe fornecem auxílios de trabalho.
Observar as referências para documentação adicional.

Refere-se a uma situação perigosa,

se não puder ser evitada,

que pode levar à morte ou a ferimentos graves.

que resultará em morte ou ferimentos graves.
Versão:02 11/133
Primeiras etapas
3 Primeiras etapas
3.1 Introdução
O Sistema de Aplicação de Aroma (FAS4) da empresa KÖHL Maschinenbau AG é
uma unidade móvel para a aplicação homogênea do aroma:
 no canal da tubagem de aspiração da máquina de cigarros
 no feixe de transporte de qualquer tipo de máquina de cigarros de filtro
 em papel ou material similar
Dependendo do modelo FAS4 com o qual você está trabalhando, você pode aplicar
diferentes aromas ou aditivos das mais diversas maneiras. Os modelos diferem
principalmente se forem projetados para um ou dois fios e se possuírem ou não um
sistema de aquecimento integrado para mentol natural.
Você pode saber com qual modelo está trabalhando a partir do código de tipo do
FAS4 e da tabela abaixo. Por exemplo, o código de tipo é parecido com este:
FAS4 UNI TWIN 240 Z 0
Versão:02 13/133
Primeiras etapas
Use a tabela para determinar quais funções e opções são realizadas em seu
dispositivo:
Código de tipo Variantes Descrição
FAS4 FAS4 Versão atual do sistema FAS
Desenvolvimento adicional do FAS4, ainda não

FAS5
disponível
UNI COLD Somente para o aroma "frio"
UNI Para aromas "frio" e "quente"
Somente para máquina de produção de uma

TWIN CLASSIC
tubagem
TWIN Máquina de produção de uma e duas tubagens
240 120 Aplicação máxima de 120 g/min.
240 Aplicação máxima de 240 g/min.
480 Aplicação máxima de 480 g/min.
Z F Aplicação de filtros
Z Aplicação de cigarros
FZ Aplicação de filtros e cigarros
WBF Aroma à base de água
S Aplicação especial
0 0 Sem construção especial
1 Parada de emergência e conector de 90°
2 Recipiente para pequenas quantidades
3 Outras personalizações
4 Outras personalizações
14/133 Versão:02
Primeiras etapas
TW 4 COLD
Código de tipo Variantes Descrição
TW 4 Versão atual do sistema FAS
Desenvolvimento adicional do FAS4, ainda não

5
disponível
COLD COLD Somente para o aroma "frio"
UNI Para aromas "frio" e "quente"
PM Outras personalizações
PM+ Outras personalizações
WBF Aroma à base de água
O FAS4 designa a unidade principal que tem como função a aplicação de aroma a
vários tipos de meios.
Para esse fim, todos os componentes de regulação necessários para o processo,

assim como um sistema de recipientes, estão localizados na unidade principal. O
sistema de recipientes localizado no FAS4 tem apenas uma capacidade limitada.
Para expandir esse volume, o tanque externo pode ser usado em conjunto com o
FAS. O recipiente interno pode ser reabastecido automaticamente a partir deste, se
necessário.
A fim de produzir o mesmo estado agregado do aroma, o tanque externo pode ser
operado independentemente. Nesse processo, o aroma pode ser preparado em
outro lugar e, se necessário, transferido para o FAS, onde pode ser acoplado ao
sistema FAS4.
O tanque externo serve apenas como uma unidade adicional com um recipiente-
tanque e não tem influência sobre a função principal (aplicação de aroma) do FAS4.
Diferentes pontos do manual se referem a diferentes opções ou variantes do FAS.

Você será encaminhado ao local apropriado para que possa pular as informações
de que não precisa.
Alguns termos importantes para lidar com o FAS são explicados no glossário
(capítulo 1).
Versão:02 15/133
Primeiras etapas
3.2 Indicações de segurança
O FAS4 só pode ser operado por pessoal especializado

treinado.
Observe as indicações de segurança na documentação

principal e garanta que o sistema é utilizado como previsto.
3.3 Ligação à máquina de produção

A alimentação de ar comprimido e tensão do FAS4 é fornecida através da linha de
conexão do sistema e através da tomada de conexão na máquina de produção, que
é especialmente anexada para o FAS4. A atribuição dos pinos do conector e uma
visão geral dos sinais trocados entre a máquina de produção e o FAS4 podem ser
encontrados no Anexo 1 do manual de instruções.
Como o FAS é aterrado no circuito de segurança da máquina de produção, esta só

pode ser iniciada quando o FAS4 estiver pronto para a produção. Se você quiser
operar a máquina de produção sem um FAS4 conectado, por favor, coloque o
conector fictício fornecido na tomada de conexão na máquina de produção.
A conexão e desconexão da ligação à máquina de produção

não deve ser feita sob tensão ou carga. Certifique-se de que o
interruptor principal do FAS4 está desligado.
Certifique-se de que a ligação ao ar comprimido é conectada e

desconectada somente em estado despressurizado.
16/133 Versão:02
Primeiras etapas
3.4 Ligação do FAS4

Depois de a conexão com a máquina de produção ter sido estabelecida, verifique
se todos os fusíveis e o disjuntor FI estão ligados. Se este for o caso, o sistema
pode ser ligado através do interruptor principal. Certifique-se de que a porta do
armário de distribuição esteja fechada ao ligar. O sistema inicia agora e depois de
inicializar o IPC ou iniciar a visualização, o sistema está pronto para operar.
3.5 Desligamento do FAS4

Antes de desligar o sistema, a produção atual deve ser interrompida primeiro
(consulte o capítulo 7.5). Em seguida, o FAS4 pode ser desligado através do botão
"Herunterfahren" (Encerrar) no menu principal. Assim que o IPC desligar
automaticamente, você pode desligar o sistema através do interruptor principal.
Sempre desligue o IPC corretamente antes de desligar o

sistema. Caso contrário, pode resultar em perda de dados e
danos ao hardware.
Se o botão "Herunterfahren" (Encerrar)

for pressionado durante uma produção
em execução, a seguinte mensagem
será exibida:
Caso seja necessário desligar o sistema imediatamente, confirme esta consulta

com "Ja" (Sim). Caso contrário, pare a produção de acordo com o capítulo 7.5.
Versão:02 17/133
Primeiras etapas
3.6 Modo UPS

O FAS4 possui uma alimentação de energia ininterrupta integrada que mantém a
operação do PC industrial por um período de tempo no caso de uma falha de
tensão da rede. O funcionamento do PC continuará até que a capacidade da
bateria caia abaixo de 20%. Depois disso, todos os aplicativos são fechados
automaticamente e o PC é desligado.
Se ocorrer uma falha na fonte de alimentação, você será informado pela seguinte
mensagem:
18/133 Versão:02
Informações gerais sobre a
visualização
4 Informações gerais sobre a visualização
4.1 Menu principal

Após o início do FAS4, o menu principal é exibido primeiro:
Elementos do menu principal:
1. O número do FAS4. Se você entrar em contato com o suporte da KÖHL, por

favor, tenha esse número pronto.
2. Os elementos de controle do menu principal. As telas individuais do processo

podem ser acessadas clicando nesses botões. Os botões que estão ativados
para o usuário conectado são rotulados com letras brancas.
Versão:02 19/133
visualização
3. A data e hora atuais são exibidas aqui. Uma captura de tela da imagem do
processo atual pode ser criada através da câmera (consulte o capítulo 4.3).
4. Ao pressionar as bandeiras, o idioma do FAS4 pode ser alterado.
5. Saída dos números de versão de controle (CLP) e visualização (Visu). Você

também deve ter esses números prontos para consultas.
20/133 Versão:02
visualização
4.2 Gerenciamento de usuários

Para proteger configurações importantes e para uma melhor visão geral, a
visualização do FAS4 está equipada com diferentes níveis de usuário. Estes
diferem principalmente porque certos parâmetros e janelas são bloqueados ou
escondidos para usuários de nível inferior. Os usuários dos diferentes níveis são
definidos de fábrica, mas podem ser alterados pelo próprio pessoal instruído.
4.2.1 Níveis de usuários
São implementados os seguintes níveis de usuário no FAS4:
Usuário Nome de
Senha Autorização
usuário
Operador operador operador Início e fim da produção
Funções de manutenção,
Apoio ao cliente servicec servicec
parâmetros básicos
Funções de manutenção,
Serviço avançado servicem servicem parâmetros avançados,
restaurar parâmetros
Administrator XXX XXX Acesso completo
Versão:02 21/133
visualização
4.2.2 Gerenciar usuários
Depois de iniciar o FAS, o usuário "Operador" é logado por padrão. Ele dispõe de
todos os direitos para poder produzir com o FAS4. Os parâmetros da máquina,
ajustes do regulador e várias funções de manutenção estão desativados para ele.
Para logar um outro usuário, por exemplo, para alterar parâmetros ou realizar uma
calibração do medidor de caudal, pressione o botão "Anmelden" (Iniciar sessão) no
menu principal. Aparecerá então uma janela na qual você poderá digitar o nome do
usuário e a senha correspondente usando o teclado na tela:
Se o usuário for desconhecido ou a senha estiver incorreta, você será notificado por
uma mensagem correspondente.
Para terminar a sessão do usuário atual, basta clicar no botão "Abmelden"

(Terminar sessão). Você retornará então ao nível de usuário padrão "Operator"
(Operador).
4.2.3 Mudar o próprio login de usuário
Através da tecla de função "Benutzer Management" (Gerenciamento de usuários)

no menu principal, o próprio nome de usuário, assim como a senha, podem ser
ajustados.
Se você alterar os dados do usuário, anote os novos dados em

um local seguro. Em caso de esquecimento das informações
de login, os usuários devem ser reinicializados por um
colaborador da KÖHL.
22/133 Versão:02
visualização
4.3 Criação de uma captura de tela

Para documentar várias configurações, telas de processo, diagramas ou
mensagens de erro, é possível criar uma captura de tela usando a câmera. Este
símbolo geralmente está localizado na parte superior direita da tela ou na parte
superior esquerda de uma mensagem e é liberado para cada nível de usuário.
Para salvar a captura de tela, primeiro insira um dispositivo USB adequado na porta
frontal USB do PC FAS4 e espere um momento para que o FAS4 reconheça o
dispositivo. Em seguida, clique em um dos símbolos de câmera para salvar a
captura de tela para o dispositivo.
4.3.1 A ajuda on-line
Os documentos técnicos e manuais mais importantes são armazenados como

arquivos PDF no FAS4 e podem ser acessados através do botão "Info" no menu
principal. Dentro da ajuda on-line, você pode alternar entre as diferentes categorias
na estrutura em árvore à esquerda. À direita, você encontrará os submenus e as
fichas de dados correspondentes.
A partir de um nível superior de usuário, ser-lhe-á perguntado se você deseja exibir

ou exportar a ajuda quando chamar o botão "Info". Se você conectou anteriormente
um dispositivo USB, agora você pode exportar os dados para o dispositivo e
visualizá-los em outro PC ou imprimi-los.
Versão:02 23/133
visualização
4.4 Mudança de idioma

Por padrão, os idiomas inglês e alemão estão instalados no FAS4. Além disso, um
outro idioma pode ser adquirido pelo cliente. Para comutar, basta clicar em uma das
bandeiras correspondentes. Os textos nas janelas serão então mudados para o
idioma desejado.
4.5 Estrutura funcional da exibição

Para uma fácil orientação e operabilidade, todas as janelas são estruturadas de
acordo com o mesmo princípio:
24/133 Versão:02
visualização
 A barra de cabeçalho
A barra de cabeçalho exibe as informações mais importantes sobre o sistema e o

processo em curso.
 A barra de funções
Com a ajuda da barra de funções é possível alternar entre as telas de processo

(alternativamente para o menu principal), selecionar o modo e iniciar ou parar a
produção. A barra de funções, como a barra de cabeçalho, é exibida em todas as
telas.
Botão Função
Câmera Criação de uma captura de tela
Alteração do modo de operação (modo) e a função.
Mode
Liberado a partir do nível de usuário "servicec".
Start Início da tecnologia do processo.
Stop Parada da tecnologia do processo.

Define o sistema para o modo standby em operação a
Standby quente. Os dispositivos de aquecimento internos
permanecem ativos, os externos são desligados.
Confirmar Confirmar os alarmes.
Termina a produção atual e inicia o procedimento de
Terminar
limpeza.
Main Abrir o menu principal.
Visão geral Abrir a janela "Übersicht" (Visão Geral).
Processo Abrir a janela "Prozess" (Processo).
Produção Abrir a janela "Produktion" (Produção).
Qualidade Abrir a janela "Qualität" (Qualidade).
Trending
Abrir a janela "Trending" (Tendência).
(Tendência)
Versão:02 25/133
visualização
Dependendo do tipo de sistema ou modo ou estado atual, alguns botões podem ser
desativados. Por exemplo, a função de Standby só é possível com sistemas do tipo
"UNI" em operação a quente.
 A tela principal
Dependendo da janela selecionada, as exibições reais da janela selecionada são

mostradas na tela principal (azul). Aqui, por exemplo, vários gráficos da produção
atual, a imagem esquemática do processo ou os parâmetros da máquina podem ser
encontrados. Uma descrição detalhada das janelas individuais pode ser encontrada
nos capítulos seguintes.
26/133 Versão:02
visualização
4.6 Indicadores
Os indicadores de status representam os estados operacionais do FAS4 de
maneira facilmente visível, usando diferentes cores e animações. São usados os
seguintes indicadores:
4.6.1 Indicadores de status na barra de cabeçalho
Os indicadores no título se referem ao estado geral do FAS4. Eles estão localizados

ao lado das exibições de texto para status e alarme:
Desligado/parado
Avaria/alarme
Arranque dos sistemas/preparação
Pronto para a operação/pronto para a produção
Produção
Versão:02 27/133
visualização
4.6.2 Indicadores de semáforo na janela "Produktion" (Produção)
Na visão geral da produção você encontrará um indicador de semáforo (dois

indicadores para máquinas TWIN) com os seguintes estados:
 – Desligado
 – Avaria
 – Preparação
 – Pronto
 – Produção
4.6.3 Indicadores de status da engenharia de processo
Os seguintes indicadores de tecnologia de processo são usados na visão geral do

processo:
 – Desligado
 – Avaria
 – Preparação
 – Produção
28/133 Versão:02
visualização
4.6.4 Indicadores de status do sistema de aquecimento
Se o sistema de aquecimento for pré-selecionado (somente sistemas UNI), o

símbolo de aquecimento é exibido no título. As seguintes cores são definidas para
os estados dos aquecedores:
 – Aquecimento pré-
selecionado/Stop
 – Fase de
aquecimento/Standby
 – Temperatura interna
OK/Standby
 – Fase de
aquecimento/Start
 – Todas as
temperaturas OK
Versão:02 29/133
As telas de processo do FAS4
5 As telas de processo do FAS4
Dentro da visualização existem diferentes telas de processo para o controle,

configuração e manutenção do FAS4. O acesso às telas do processo depende do
nível do usuário. Enquanto apenas algumas imagens são exibidas ao operador, os
usuários do nível de serviço podem acessar quase todas as imagens e também
alterar os parâmetros e configurações lá. No capítulo seguinte, são explicadas as
diferentes telas de processo e explicadas as opções de acesso para os diferentes
níveis de usuário.
5.1 Visão geral do processo

Na visão geral do processo, são exibidos todos os pontos de ajuste do processo e
valores reais (SP e PV). Os estados das unidades do processo são exibidos com a
ajuda dos indicadores descritos no capítulo anterior. Dessa forma, o operador pode
facilmente obter uma visão geral da situação atual do sistema e da produção. A
estrutura dessa página corresponde à estrutura do FAS4 e está dividida nas áreas
seguintes:
 – Extern 1 (Externo
1)
 – Prozess 1
(Processo 1)
 – Tankraum (Espaço
do tanque)
Para sistemas TWIN:
 Prozess 2 (Processo
2)
 Extern 2 (Externo 2)
Para iniciar uma nova produção, o operador pode usar o botão "Produktion"
(Produção) na parte inferior da tela para inserir os parâmetros de produção e iniciar
a produção.
Versão:02 31/133
Enquanto os outros valores na visão geral do processo não podem ser alterados
pelo operador, os usuários podem alterar os valores nominais para quantidade da
aplicação, temperaturas e pressão do ar a partir do nível de serviço. Para o efeito, o
valor nominal a ser alterado deve ser clicado e reinserido usando o teclado que
então aparece. Os usuários do serviço também podem iniciar o procedimento de
medição volumétrica clicando em um botão à esquerda do botão "Produktion"
(Produção). Na tela isso está escondido, pois não está disponível para o operador.
5.2 Visão geral da produção

Na visão geral da produção são apresentados dados importantes sobre a
quantidade e qualidade da aplicação durante a produção. A página é dividida em
Processo 1 e Processo 2, onde o lado direito é usado somente para sistemas
TWIN. Com sistemas UNI ou COLD, somente o lado 1 do processo é sempre
ativado.
Dentro das páginas do processo, a janela é dividida em três outras áreas. A área
"Extern" (Externo) mostra a velocidade da máquina de produção e o comprimento
do bastão. Na área "Intern" (Interno), são exibidos os valores nominais e reais para
a quantidade da aplicação (SP = valor nominal, PV = valor real).
32/133 Versão:02
O valor XD descreve o desvio percentual do valor real para o valor nominal. Esse
desvio é exibido graficamente na área inferior da tela e é a medida da qualidade da
aplicação. As linhas vermelhas no diagrama são os valores-limite de desvio de
quantidade da aplicação estabelecidos nos limites de alarme.
O indicador de semáforo mostra o estado atual de operação do sistema (consulte o

capítulo 4.6.2)
5.3 Processo
A tecnologia de processo do FAS4 é mostrada esquematicamente na tela "Prozess"
(Processo). O layout da tela também é baseado na estrutura do FAS4 e está
dividido nas áreas Externo 1 e Externo 2, Processo 1 e Processo 2, assim como
Espaço do Tanque e Tanque de Aroma. No caso de sistemas de uma tubagem
(COLD CLASSIC e UNI CLASSIC), somente as áreas de Processo 1 e Externo 1
são exibidas. Externo 2 e Processo 2 só estão disponíveis no caso de sistemas de
duas tubagens.
Os seguintes símbolos são usados nessa tela:
Bomba Aquecimento/Temperatura
Sensor de pressão Motor
Medidor de caudal Válvula
Versão:02 33/133
Na parte inferior da tela dentro da seção "Tankraum" (Espaço do tanque) são

mostrados o tanque de aroma (à direita) e o tanque de detergente (à esquerda). Os
retângulos coloridos representam os níveis de enchimento dos dois tanques. As
tubulações cinzas mostram as conexões com a tecnologia de processo e,
dependendo do estado operacional atual, ficam amarelas se houver detergente nas
tubagens e verdes se as tubagens estiverem cheias de aroma. Se o sistema estiver
parado, no entanto, as tubagens estão sempre cinzentas. A partir dos dois tanques,
as tubagens seguem para a esquerda para o Processo 1 (nos sistemas TWIN
também para a direita, para o Processo 2) e passam ali pela bomba, o sensor de
pressão e o medidor de caudal. De lá, dependendo do modo, continuam até ao bico
ou de volta para um dos dois tanques. Além dos símbolos para medidor de caudal,
bomba, sensor de pressão e dispositivos de aquecimento, são exibidos os valores
nominais correspondentes (SP) e os valores reais (PV).
Na margem direita da tela, na seção "Flavourtank" (Tanque de Aroma), é exibido o

tanque externo. No entanto, este só é o caso se o tanque estiver realmente
conectado, caso contrário, esta área estará cinzenta.
34/133 Versão:02
Abaixo do tanque está o botão "Verbinden" (Conectar). Quando é acionado, o

acoplamento do FAS4 se move para cima e faz a conexão com o tanque. Se se
seguir a tubagem na tela até a válvula na frente do tanque de aroma, se encontrará
o botão para o enchimento automático do tanque interno. Durante a produção, se
deve sempre ativar essa função para que o tanque interno seja automaticamente
abastecido pelo tanque externo.
A partir do nível de usuário "servicec", os usuários podem mudar o sistema para o

modo manual. A indicação "Hand" (Manual) aparece então à direita dos símbolos
do processo e o operador pode ativar ou desativar os dispositivos conectados
manualmente, clicando nos símbolos do processo. Para mais informações sobre o
modo manual, consulte o capítulo 8.2.
Versão:02 35/133
5.4 Registro de qualidade

No diagrama de qualidade, o desvio percentual da quantidade da aplicação é
exibido pelo valor nominal ao longo do tempo. O desvio é mostrado como uma linha
azul para o lado do PE1 e como uma linha amarela para o lado do PE2 (PE2
somente para sistemas TWIN). As linhas vermelhas refletem os valores-limite de
desvio de fluxo estabelecidos nos limites de alarme (geralmente 3% de desvio).
Os dados para a tendência de qualidade são arquivados no FAS4 durante um mês.

Com a ajuda dos botões (<<,<,>,>>,>|) abaixo do gráfico, o eixo temporal do
diagrama pode ser movido e se pode visualizar o atual, mas também os dados de
produções passadas. Ao pressionar o botão "Online", se pode comutar entre o
registro atual e o carregamento dos dados do arquivo. Além disso, a resolução para
o eixo temporal pode ser alterada entre 1 min. e 24 h através do menu de seleção à
direita. Se se quiser ler os valores exatos do diagrama, pode se exibir um ponteiro
móvel pressionando a tecla "Cursor".
Ao mover o cursor ao longo do eixo temporal, os dados atuais naquele momento

são exibidos.
36/133 Versão:02
5.5 Trending (Tendência)

Os dados mais importantes do processo são exibidos graficamente na tendência.
Ele tem uma estrutura semelhante ao registro de qualidade, mas com a diferença
de que até seis valores absolutos diferentes podem ser exibidos aqui. Os valores a
serem exibidos podem ser selecionados através de seis menus de seleção na parte
inferior da tela. Todos os dados das tendências são arquivados no FAS4 durante
um mês. Logo abaixo do diagrama estão vários botões e menus para mover o eixo
temporal ou alterar sua resolução. Com o botão "Cursor" (Cursor), pode ser exibido
um ponteiro para consultar os valores exatos das curvas individuais dentro do
diagrama.
Versão:02 37/133
5.6 Menu de manutenção
5.6.1 Filtros e mangueiras
Os filtros e as mangueiras do FAS4 devem ser revisados regularmente. Por esse

motivo, foram criados menus correspondentes na janela de manutenção.
Dentro dos menus estão os intervalos de manutenção dos filtros e mangueiras, o

tempo restante até à próxima manutenção e um botão para confirmar a
manutenção.
O intervalo de manutenção para as mangueiras é fixado em dois anos. Duas

semanas antes desse prazo expirar, um aviso o alertará de que a manutenção está
prevista para breve. Se o tempo expirar, é gerado um alarme e o sistema não pode
mais ser iniciado. Após a substituição das mangueiras, um usuário do nível de
serviço pode confirmar a manutenção e, assim, reiniciar o tempo restante.
38/133 Versão:02
O intervalo para a manutenção dos dois filtros deve ser definido pelo usuário. O
tempo depende das taxas de fluxo em que você está produzindo e da quantidade
de impurezas de seu aroma. Por conseguinte, se deve inicialmente estabelecer
intervalos bastante curtos (4-8 h) e depois observar o quanto o filtro entope. Se
você notar pouca ou nenhuma contaminação no filtro, pode aumentar lentamente
os tempos. Os filtros entupidos também podem ser reconhecidos pelo fato de que a
rotação da bomba aumenta e a qualidade da aplicação diminui.
Uma vez que os filtros tenham sido limpos, pressione o botão "Wartung vollendet"
(Manutenção concluída) para repor o tempo restante até à próxima manutenção
para o intervalo definido.
Se um intervalo de manutenção tiver expirado, o símbolo no menu fica amarelo. Ao

mesmo tempo, o símbolo correspondente no título também é colorido a amarelo
para indicar a necessidade de manutenção também nas outras janelas.
Realize regularmente a manutenção dos filtros. Filtros entupidos

levam a uma diminuição na qualidade da aplicação e, no pior
dos casos, causam danos à bomba.
As conexões de mangueira no FAS4 podem envelhecer devido

ao contato com o aroma e, por conseguinte, devem ser
substituídas após o tempo especificado. As tubagens antigas
podem vazar e rebentar.
Versão:02 39/133
5.7 Estatísticas
Para o controle de qualidade, o FAS4 registra vários dados em tempo de execução.
Isso inclui, por exemplo, as horas de funcionamento da bomba, as operações de

comutação das válvulas ou a quantidade total de aroma aplicado.
O operador pode visualizar os dados a qualquer momento, mas não pode redefinir
a maioria dos contadores, pois algumas informações são importantes para a análise
de falhas e só podem ser apagadas pelo pessoal de serviço da KÖHL.
40/133 Versão:02
5.8 Alarmes
Se houver alarmes ou avisos, isso é indicado em todas as telas do processo dentro
do título. A mensagem atual é exibida em vermelho se for um alarme e em laranja
se for um aviso. À esquerda do texto da mensagem está a hora em que a
mensagem ocorreu. O indicador à direita da barra de mensagens pisca na cor
correspondente quando uma mensagem é exibida. Embora os avisos sirvam
apenas como indicação e não influenciem a produção, a máquina entra no estado
de parada no caso de um alarme.
Exemplo de alarme:
Exemplo de aviso:
Para obter uma visão geral exata de todos os avisos e alarmes pendentes, o
operador pode acessar a janela "Alarme" (Alarmes) através do menu principal ou da
barra de funções:
Versão:02 41/133
Todas as mensagens atuais são exibidas aqui em ordem cronológica. Com a ajuda
dos filtros na margem inferior da tela, você pode filtrar especificamente para avisos
ou alarmes. Após alterar a seleção para o filtro, a visualização deve ser atualizada
através do botão "Ermitteln" (Determinar). Com o botão "Alle Quittieren" (Confirmar
tudo), as mensagens podem ser confirmadas da mesma forma que com o botão
"Quittieren" (Confirmar) na barra de funções. O FAS4 dispõe de um arquivo de
alarmes, que arquiva todas as mensagens durante um mês. Para abrir o arquivo,
por favor clique no botão "Alarmhistorie" (Histórico de alarmes).
5.9 Histórico de alarmes

O histórico do alarmes mostra todas as mensagens que ocorreram em um período
de tempo livremente definido.
Para definir o período de tempo desejado e as mensagens (avisos ou alarmes) a

serem exibidas, por favor, use os campos de entrada na margem inferior da tela.
Para atualizar a visualização, por favor clique no botão "Ermitteln" (Determinar).
42/133 Versão:02
Configuração e parametrização
6 Configuração e parametrização
A partir do nível de usuário "Service" (Serviço), as configurações e parâmetros do

FAS4 podem ser alterados. As janelas e opções correspondentes são explicadas
nesse capítulo.
6.1 Parâmetros da máquina

Na janela Maschinenparameter (Parâmetros da máquina), podem ser alterados
vários tempos e valores de controle para os diferentes processos. Os parâmetros
são classificados por localização e podem ser selecionados por meio das guias na
parte superior da tela. Quais guias estão disponíveis depende do modelo FAS4.
Para máquinas de uma única tubagem, apenas as guias "Extern1" (Externo 1),
"Process1" (Processo 1) e "Tankraum" (Espaço do tanque) estão normalmente
disponíveis. As guias "Process2" (Processo 2) e "External2" (Externo 2) são
utilizadas apenas para sistemas de duas tubagens (TWIN).
Com a ajuda dos dois botões "Export" (Exportar) e "Import" (Importar), os conjuntos
de dados podem ser copiados para um dispositivo USB e importados para outros
sistemas.
Versão:02 43/133
6.1.1 Extern 1 (Externo 1)
Hand (Manual)
O valor manual define a variável com a qual todos os atuadores externos na área
"Extern1" (Externo 1) são controlados. Para sistemas com aquecimento, isso inclui
os dispositivos de aquecimento para o conjunto de mangueiras, bico e calha. Esse
valor não é necessário para sistemas frios ou ao dirigir sem aquecimento.
Aquecimento
O tempo de reaquecimento para as áreas externas pode ser definido aqui. Esse
tempo deve garantir que todo o aroma foi liquefeito no conjunto de mangueiras e no
bico e que não existem bloqueios. Após o FAS4 ter sido iniciado e as temperaturas
nominais terem sido atingidas, esse tempo começa a diminuir.
Atraso da válvula de ar
Após comutar da produção para a prontidão da produção, o transporte do aroma

para o bico é imediatamente interrompido. Para evitar que o bico pingue, pode ser
ajustado um tempo de atraso aqui para a válvula de ar.
O bico é então soprado livremente por um momento antes de o ar ser desligado.
44/133 Versão:02
Atraso de pulverização (Winding - Bobinagem)
No caso de bicos para aplicação em papel, o ar de controle e o ar de processo para

o bico deve primeiro ser ligado. Somente então a válvula do circuito é comutada e o
aroma direcionado para o bico. Defina aqui o tempo de atraso para a válvula do
circuito. O tempo de atraso resulta em um início mais suave para a aplicação e
evita manchas no início da produção.
Temperatura de compensação bico X (filtro)
Essa compensação é automaticamente adicionada à entrada de temperatura do

bico X para a máquina de produção do filtro. O valor deve compensar a perda de
temperatura elevada desse bico.
Versão:02 45/133
6.1.2 Prozess 1 (Processo 1)
A área "Processo 1" abrange toda a tecnologia de processo no lado esquerdo do

FAS e inclui, por exemplo, a bomba e as válvulas. Os tempos para os diversos
procedimentos de produção e limpeza também são definidos nessa área.
Hand (Manual)
O valor manual determina a variável manipulada para os atuadores do lado do

processo 1 do FAS4. Isso inclui, por exemplo, a bomba e o aquecimento da placa
de montagem.
Circuito de limpeza
Tempo e valor nominal para o circuito de limpeza após o final de uma produção.
Pulverizar detergente
Defina aqui o tempo para a pulverização de detergente durante a limpeza do bico.
46/133 Versão:02
Suprimir detergente
Ao iniciar uma produção, o aroma é bombeado do tanque de aromas em direção ao

tanque de detergente por um certo tempo. Isso desloca o detergente da última
produção e evita uma contaminação do aroma com o detergente.
Circuito de aroma
Antes de o sistema atingir o estado "Produktionsbereit" (Pronto para a produção), o

aroma é primeiro bombeado em um circuito. Isso assegura que as tubagens são
preenchidas uniformemente com aroma e reduz bolhas de ar, o que pode levar a
uma aplicação impura. Ajuste aqui o tempo desejado e o valor nominal para esse
processo.
Pulverizar aroma
Tempo e valor nominal para pulverizar o aroma, p.ex., durante a medição

volumétrica.
Suprimir aroma
Depois de terminar uma produção, a primeira coisa a fazer é deslocar o aroma das
tubagens com o detergente de volta para o tanque de aroma. Por um lado, menos
aroma é desperdiçado e, por outro, o detergente é menos contaminado com aroma.
O tempo e o valor nominal não devem ser definidos muito alto, caso contrário, o
detergente pode entrar no tanque do aroma.
Maximale Pumpenleistung (Capacidade máxima da bomba)
A saída máxima da bomba embutida é definida aqui. Essa pode ser, por exemplo,
120, 240 ou 480 g/min. O valor é definido uma vez com a colocação em
funcionamento do sistema e só pode ser alterado por colaboradores da KÖHL.
Aquecimento (somente operação a quente)
O tempo de reaquecimento do sistema é definido aqui. As bombas não podem ser

ligadas até que todas as temperaturas nominais tenham sido atingidas e o tempo
aqui estabelecido tenha passado. Nesse ponto, o valor não pode ser alterado,
mude para a área "Tankraum" (Espaço do tanque) se você quiser definir um valor
diferente.
Versão:02 47/133
O tempo de aquecimento não deve ser selecionado muito

curto, caso contrário não é garantido que o aroma completo se
derreta. Os aromas não derretidos podem causar danos ao
sistema.
Retirar aroma
Quando o aroma quente é aplicado, se a máquina de produção para após o tempo

estabelecido aqui, a bomba é rodada lentamente ao contrário para tirar o aroma
para fora do bico e voltar para a tubagem. Isso impede que o aroma esfrie na ponta
do bico não aquecido e crie uma sobrepressão ao reiniciar. O aroma é retraído com
a variável manipulada até que a quantidade definida em "Sollwert" (Valor nominal)
seja atingida.
Retirar detergente
Após limpar o bico, o detergente é sugado para fora da ponta do bico de volta para
a tubagem. Para o efeito, a bomba é controlada com a variável manipulada até que
a quantidade definida em "Sollwert" (Valor nominal) tenha sido atingida.
6.1.3 Mudança de aroma na operação
O sistema ou partes do sistema devem ser completamente

desconectados do fornecimento de energia e protegidos contra
reconexão intencional e não intencional!
48/133 Versão:02
6.1.4 Tankraum (Espaço do tanque)
Os parâmetros a seguir se aplicam à área "Tankraum" (Espaço do tanque):
Hand (Manual)
Ajuste aqui o valor de controle para os atuadores no espaço do tanque do FAS4 em

modo manual.
Aquecimento (somente operação a quente)
O tempo de reaquecimento para o FAS4 é definido aqui. Ao aquecer, o primeiro

aquecimento é realizado até que todas as temperaturas nominais tenham sido
atingidas. Depois disso, o tempo aqui estabelecido será suficiente para garantir que
o aroma é completamente derretido. O tempo não deve ser ajustado muito baixo,
pois os aromas sólidos podem danificar o sistema.
Versão:02 49/133
Zeit bis Auto-Standby (Tempo até modo de espera automático)
Durante a prontidão para produção do FAS4, o aroma é bombeado em um circuito

para estar pronto para uso a qualquer momento. Entretanto, no caso de uma falha
prolongada da máquina de produção, é aconselhável parar as bombas para evitar
um desgaste desnecessário. Após o tempo aqui definido, o sistema muda
automaticamente para o modo standby. Quando o sistema de aquecimento é
ativado, as bombas e os dispositivos de aquecimento externos são então
desligados.
6.1.5 Prozess2 (Processo 2), Extern2 (Externo 2)
Essas duas guias estão disponíveis apenas para os sistemas TWIN. Os parâmetros
são análogos aos do Prozess1 (Processo 1) e Extern1 (Externo 1).
6.2 Circuitos de regulação

O FAS4 está equipado com uma variedade de reguladores para as bombas e os
dispositivos de aquecimento. O comportamento de regulação pode ser definido
usando os parâmetros Kp, Tn, Tv e Td e pode ser observado no diagrama.
50/133 Versão:02
Pode usar a tecla de seta para selecionar o regulador desejado. Os diagramas e

parâmetros na janela são atualizados automaticamente.
Antes de alterar as configurações do regulador, familiarize-se com os seguintes

termos:
SP: Setpoint – O valor nominal para um valor de processo.
PV: Process value – O valor real atual de um regulador.
CV: Control value – A variável atual do regulador.
Kp: Parte proporcional de um regulador. Gera um sinal de ajuste (CV)

proporcional ao desvio de regulação (SP-PV) para um atuador. Um Kp
muito grande pode fazer o regulador oscilar.
Tn: Tempo de reinicialização ou tempo integral de um regulador. Enquanto

houver um desvio de regulação (SP-PV), a variável (CV) de um atuador
é aumentada ou diminuída ainda mais. Quanto menor o tempo de
reinicialização, mais rápido o regulador se torna, mas ele pode ter
tendência a oscilar.
Tv, Td: Tempo de retenção e tempo de amortecimento de um regulador.

Determinar em conjunto o comportamento diferencial do regulador. Tv =
0 desativa a parte D do regulador.
6.2.1 Configurações do regulador
Todos os parâmetros de regulação são definidos durante a produção do sistema e

verificados novamente durante a colocação em funcionamento e adaptados às
condições locais. Sob certas circunstâncias, entretanto, pode ser útil reajustar os
reguladores (por exemplo, no caso de uma bomba desgastada ou de um aroma
diferente). Ao configurar o regulador, você deve observar o seguinte:
Versão:02 51/133
 Sempre execute pequenas etapas ao alterar um parâmetro.
 Um Kp mais alto causa um controle mais forte do atuador. O comportamento de

regulação pode assim tornar-se mais rápido, mas também reage mais
violentamente a avarias e tende a oscilar.
 Um Tn mais baixo leva a uma correção mais rápida da variável manipulada, mas
também faz com que o controlador oscile prontamente.
 Por norma, o Tv e o Td não devem ser alterados.
 Um regulador é bem ajustado quando o valor de processo (PV) segue

rapidamente o valor nominal (SP), mas não ultrapassa ou ultrapassa apenas
ligeiramente e se estabiliza em torno do valor nominal dentro de um tempo
aceitável. Não tente ajustar os reguladores "desnecessariamente" rapidamente.
As fortes mudanças da variável são sempre uma carga, sobretudo para a bomba.
Abaixo estão alguns exemplos de diferentes configurações de regulação usando o

exemplo do regulador para o circuito de aroma:
Kp = 4,20 Nesse exemplo, o regulador é

ajustado muito rapidamente.
Tn = 0,22
Kp é alto enquanto Tn é muito
Tv = 0,09
baixo. Como resultado, o
Td = 0,01 regulador ultrapassa
fortemente e não se
estabelece mesmo após o
valor nominal ter sido
alcançado. O regulador
reagiria muito fortemente às
mudanças do valor nominal ou
avarias causadas por uma
bolha de ar, por exemplo.
Nesse caso, você deve
aumentar o Tn e ou diminuir o
Kp.
52/133 Versão:02
Kp = 2,60 O regulador se comporta de

forma estável após atingir o
Tn = 1,00
valor nominal, mas é muito
Tv = 0,09
lento em geral. Ao baixar o
Td = 0,01 valor Tn, o regulador deve ser
ajustado mais rapidamente.
Kp = 2,60 O valor real segue o valor

nominal em um curto intervalo
Tn = 0,42
de tempo e não ultrapassa.
Tv = 0,09
Esse exemplo deve servir
Td = 0,01 como uma referência ideal
para seu regulador quando do
ajuste.
Siga as recomendações do manual ao ajustar os reguladores.

Observe também que alguns sistemas controlados são muito
lentos e as alterações nos parâmetros não são imediatamente
perceptíveis. Isso é válido, sobretudo, para os reguladores
internos de aquecimento e para os sistemas de aquecimento
de aroma e detergente. Uma forte ultrapassagem das
temperaturas pode destruir o sistema ou o aroma.
Versão:02 53/133
6.2.2 Visão geral do regulador
Use o botão "Reglerübersicht" (Visão geral do regulador) para abrir uma janela de
visão geral dos reguladores ativados e desativados.
Se um regulador for desativado, o processo correspondente é desligado e os avisos

e alarmes associados são ignorados. Em um sistema frio (CLASSIC), por exemplo,
todos os reguladores de temperatura são desligados e somente os reguladores
para as bombas estão ativos. Um outro exemplo é que quando conectado a uma
máquina de filtros, o aquecimento da calha (Externo Y) é normalmente desativado
porque este circuito de aquecimento não está disponível. Se você quiser operar um
sistema TWIN como uma máquina de uma tubagem, você pode desativar uma das
duas bombas. Somente o outro lado do processo correspondente é então utilizado
para a produção. Basicamente, não importa se você usa PE1 ou PE2.
A combinação de reguladores ativados e desativados é armazenada pelo FAS4

quando a máquina de produção é calibrada. O FAS4 cria um registro de dados
separado para cada máquina de produção. Isso significa que você pode armazenar
diferentes combinações, que são automaticamente carregadas quando a máquina
de produção correspondente é conectada. Por exemplo, se você pegar o FAS4 de
uma máquina de produção de filtros e conectá-lo a uma máquina de cigarros, os
reguladores de aquecimento das calhas são reativados automaticamente, desde
que tenham sido ativados previamente na máquina de cigarros.
54/133 Versão:02
6.3 Limites de alarme

Todos os valores de processo do FAS4 são monitorados de acordo com o seguinte
conceito:
tHH
Y(t)
SP 1 2
PV
Seis parâmetros são definidos nos limites de alarme para cada valor de processo.
Os denominados Nível "High" (Alto) e "Low" (Baixo) (1) são valores-limite, se forem
excedidos ou ficarem abaixo deles, é gerado um aviso.
Isso inicialmente indica apenas que há um desvio do valor real para o valor
nominal. O nível seguinte são os níveis "High" (Alto-Alto) e "LowLow" (Baixo-Baixo)
(2). Se esses valores-limite forem excedidos ou não forem alcançados, inicia-se
uma contagem regressiva. Se o valor do processo não retornar abaixo do valor-
limite dentro do tempo definido HH ou LL (tHH), um alarme é acionado e o sistema
é parado.
A configuração dos níveis individuais e dos temporizadores é feita através da janela

"Alarmlimits" (Limites de alarme), que pode ser aberta através do menu principal, a
partir do nível de serviço. Tal como acontece com os parâmetros da máquina, os
parâmetros individuais são ordenados por local e podem ser exportados e
transferidos para outros sistemas usando os botões "Export" (Exportar) e "Import"
(Importar)
Versão:02 55/133
Os limites de alarme protegem o sistema de danos e sua

produção de aplicações de má qualidade. Por conseguinte,
escolha cuidadosamente os valores-limite. Se um alarme
ocorrer com mais frequência, esclareça as causas do
comportamento errado.
6.3.1 Extern 1 (Externo 1)
Na área "Extern 1" (Externo 1), você encontrará os parâmetros para as áreas
externas do sistema. Nesse caso, isso inclui a máquina de produção e o conjunto
de mangueiras.
56/133 Versão:02
Potência máquina externa (valores-limite absolutos)
Estabeleça aqui os valores-limite para o sinal de velocidade da máquina de

produção.
 Nível LL: Monitoramento do sinal do codificador incremental. Se os sinais de

partida para o FAS4 da máquina de produção estiverem presentes e o sinal de
velocidade for <= nível LL, um alarme é gerado depois de decorrido o tempo
definido.
 Nível L: Abaixo da velocidade aqui definida, é gerado um aviso. Por outro lado, o
FAS4 só inicia quando essa velocidade é excedida, a fim de evitar falsas partidas.
 Nível H: Deve ser ajustado para corresponder à velocidade máxima da máquina

de produção. Se o valor exceder esse limite, é gerado um aviso.
 Nível HH: Deve estar ligeiramente acima do valor-limite H. Se esse valor for
excedido, o FAS4 desliga.
Diferença de temperatura (somente sistemas com aquecimento,
valores de diferença absolutos)
Os valores-limite para as temperaturas externas podem ser definidos aqui. Isso

inclui o conjunto de mangueiras, bico e calha. O monitoramento da temperatura é
iniciado após o aquecimento, se a temperatura estiver em uma área válida.
 Nível LL: Se o valor real da temperatura estiver abaixo da diferença para o valor
do valor nominal aqui definido, um alarme é gerado e desligado depois que o
tempo LL definido tiver decorrido.
 Nível L: Se a temperatura cair abaixo dessa diferença, é gerado um aviso.
 Nível H: Se essa diferença para o valor nominal for excedida, é gerado um aviso.
 Nível HH: Se essa diferença de temperatura for excedida, é gerado um alarme

após o tempo HH ter decorrido e o sistema é desligado.
Versão:02 57/133
6.3.2 Prozess 1 (Processo 1)
Aqui você encontrará os parâmetros para o lado esquerdo do processo do FAS4.
Rotação da bomba (valores-limite absolutos)
Defina aqui os valores-limite para a rotação da bomba. Estes dependem do modelo

da bomba.
 Nível LL: Deve ser ajustado para "0", pois não é fornecida uma rotação mínima.
 Nível L: Deve ser ajustado para "0", pois não é fornecida uma rotação mínima.
 Nível H: A partir da rotação aqui definida, é gerado um aviso.
 Nível HH: Defina aqui os limites superiores para a rotação. Se o valor for
excedido, surge um alarme após o tempo HH ajustado.
58/133 Versão:02
Desvio de fluxo de aroma (valores de diferença relativos)
Aqui são definidos os limites para o desvio do valor real do fluxo para o valor
nominal do fluxo.
 Nível LL: Se esse valor-limite não for atingido, um alarme é gerado após o tempo
LL ajustado e o sistema é parado.
 Nível L: Se o valor cair abaixo desse limite, é gerado um aviso.
 Nível H: Se esse valor-limite for excedido, é gerado um aviso.
 Nível HH: Se esse valor-limite for excedido, um alarme é gerado após o tempo
ajustado e o sistema é parado.
Pressão do sistema
 Nível LL: Deve ser ajustado para "0", pois não existe pressão mínima do sistema.
 Nível L: Deve ser ajustado para "0", pois não existe pressão mínima do sistema.
 Nível H: Se a pressão subir acima desse valor, é gerado um aviso.
 Nível HH: Se a pressão subir acima desse valor, é gerado um alarme após o
tempo HH ajustado e o sistema é parado. Note que a pressão máxima para o
FAS4 é de 10 bar. O valor HH deve, portanto, ser ajustado para um máximo de
cerca de 9,8 bar.
Os valores-limite para as temperaturas do lado do processo 1 podem ser definidos

aqui. O monitoramento é iniciado após o aquecimento, se as temperaturas
estiverem em uma área válida.
Versão:02 59/133

Desvio de densidade (valores-limite absolutos, não no caso de
medidores de caudal M54)
Os valores-limite para as densidades medidas pelo medidor de caudal podem ser

definidos aqui. Esses valores podem ser usados para detectar o funcionamento a
seco da bomba, ar nas tubagens ou o meio errado.
Empfindlichkeit Schwingungsalarm (Sensibilidade do alarme de
oscilações)
O FAS4 reconhece oscilações na quantidade do pedido que podem ser causadas

por reguladores incorretamente configurados, impurezas no tanque, bolhas de ar
nas tubagens ou terminais com vazamento. Através do menu, a sensibilidade desta
detecção de oscilações pode ser definida para baixa, normal e alta. "Niedrig"
(baixo) significa que pequenas oscilações são ignoradas e um alarme é acionado
apenas com flutuações maiores. No nível "hoch" (alta), o sistema de alarme
também reage a pequenas oscilações. Por padrão, a opção "normal" deve ser
selecionada e ajustada conforme necessário.
60/133 Versão:02
6.3.3 Tankraum (Espaço do tanque)
Estabeleça aqui os valores-limite de alarme para o espaço do tanque do FAS4.
Desvio de pressão de ar (valores de diferença absolutos)
Os valores-limite para o desvio da pressão de ar da válvula de regulação de

pressão podem ser ajustados aqui. Esse ar é utilizado como ar de processo (ar de
pulverização) para o bico de duas substâncias em máquinas de produção de
cigarros.
Versão:02 61/133
Nível do aroma (valores-limite absolutos)
Aqui são estabelecidos os limites para o nível de enchimento do tanque de aroma

interno.
Os parâmetros para o nível de enchimento não devem ser alterados, uma vez que
foram calculados para a capacidade volumétrica do tanque.
Os valores-limite para as temperaturas no espaço do tanque podem ser ajustados

aqui. O monitoramento é iniciado após o aquecimento, se as temperaturas
estiverem em uma área válida.

62/133 Versão:02
6.3.4 Prozess2 (Processo 2), Extern2 (Externo 2)
Os valores-limite para estas duas localidades estão disponíveis apenas para os

sistemas TWIN. Sua função é análoga às do grupo Process1 (Processo 2) e
External1 (Externo 2). Para transferir facilmente os parâmetros entre os grupos 1 e
2, você pode usar o botão "Transfer" (Tranferir) na margem inferior da tela. Os
parâmetros são então copiados um a um entre as páginas do processo.
6.4 Calibração
Para sincronizar o FAS4 com a máquina de produção conectada, um codificador
incremental na máquina de produção fornece um sinal de corrente entre 0 e 20 mA.
Para que o FAS4 estabeleça uma relação entre o sinal de corrente e a velocidade
atual da máquina, uma calibração deve ser realizada para cada máquina de
produção. O FAS4 pode armazenar essa calibração para até 16 máquinas de
produção diferentes e acessá-la automaticamente quando conectado a um outro
dispositivo. A fim de poder distinguir entre as diferentes máquinas de produção,
cada máquina de produção recebe, portanto, um código que é ligado à tomada de
conexão para o FAS4. Para visualizar os dados de calibração ou para realizar uma
nova calibração, acesse a janela "Kalibrierung" (Calibração) no menu principal.
Versão:02 63/133
Na tabela, você pode ver facilmente em qual máquina de produção o FAS4 já está
calibrado. Para o efeito, o código na primeira coluna é de 0 a 15 e na segunda
coluna a identificação livremente selecionável da máquina de produção. As colunas
de três a cinco usam o "X" para indicar que tipo de máquina de produção é.
Possíveis são máquinas de produção de filtros, máquinas de produção de cigarros
ou máquinas de enrolamento. As colunas seis e sete mostram as velocidades
máximas da máquina de produção. Entretanto, o valor na sexta coluna é apenas o
valor teórico da velocidade a 20 mA e não tem que corresponder à velocidade
máxima da máquina de produção. A coluna Oito indica se a máquina é de uma ou
duas tubagens. Na coluna da direita, o "X" indica qual máquina de produção está
atualmente conectada e pode ser calibrada.
64/133 Versão:02
Para iniciar uma nova calibração, pressione o botão

"Kalibrieren" (Calibrar) na margem inferior da tela.
Aparecerá agora uma janela na qual você poderá
determinar um ID para a máquina de produção. Para o
efeito, use o teclado na tela que aparece
automaticamente após clicar no campo de entrada. Com o botão "Weiter"
(Seguinte) acessa a janela seguinte.
Para que o FAS4 possa ser calibrado à velocidade da

máquina de produção, esta deve estar funcionando a uma
velocidade constante. Um bom resultado de calibração é
alcançado quando a máquina de produção está
funcionando a cerca da metade da velocidade máxima. Como o FAS4 está
conectado à máquina de produção, ela só pode ser iniciada quando o FAS4 der o
sinal de partida. Para o efeito, pressione o botão "Freigabe" (Liberação) agora e
inicie a máquina de produção. A calibração é mais fácil quando você anda sem
material.
Agora especifique que tipo de máquina de produção é.

No caso de filtros e máquinas enroladoras, a velocidade
é normalmente indicada em m/min. No caso de
máquinas de produção de cigarros, em pcs/min.
(cigarros por minuto). Após pressionar o botão
correspondente, abre-se a janela para a calibração propriamente dita. Digite os
dados necessários, um após o outro.
Versão:02 65/133
Ao calibrar em m/min., insira primeiro a velocidade

máxima da máquina de produção no campo de
entrada superior. Se a máquina de produção estiver
agora funcionando a uma velocidade constante,
leia isso na máquina de produção e insira no
campo do meio. Em seguida, pressione o botão
"Berechnen" (Calcular). A partir dos dados inseridos
e do valor atual medido pelo FAS4, a velocidade da
máquina de produção é agora calculada pelo FAS4
e indicada no campo inferior. Esse valor deve ser o
mesmo que o valor que você lê na máquina de
produção. Se esse for o caso, pressione o botão "Übernehmen" (Aplicar) para
completar o procedimento de calibração. Se o valor não corresponder, cancele o
procedimento e repita a calibração.
Se o FAS4 tiver que ser calibrado em uma

máquina de cigarros, por favor, digite primeiro
a velocidade máxima da máquina de
produção. Se a máquina de produção estiver
agora funcionando a uma velocidade
constante, insira o comprimento do bastão e a
velocidade lida da máquina de produção nos
dois campos seguintes. Se todos os valores
estiverem corretos, pressione o botão
"Berechnen" (Calcular). A partir dos dados
inseridos e do valor atual do codificador incremental, o FAS4 calcula a velocidade e
a exibe no campo inferior. Se o valor estiver de acordo com o valor lido, você
também deve deixar a máquina de produção funcionar a baixa e alta velocidade e
comparar o valor calculado com o valor exibido. Se os valores estiverem de acordo
em toda a faixa de velocidade, você pode salvar a calibração pressionando o botão
"Übernehmen" (Aplicar). Caso contrário, por favor cancele a calibração e repita o
procedimento. Se necessário, a conexão com a máquina de produção deve ser
verificada.
66/133 Versão:02
Produzir com o FAS4 (modo de
produção)
7 Produzir com o FAS4 (modo de produção)
7.1 Introdução
O FAS4 pode ser usado de várias maneiras para a aplicação do aroma. As
primeiras diferenças são se o sistema está conectado a uma máquina para
cigarros, filtros ou papel e que tipo de aroma deve ser aplicado. No entanto, em
última análise, essas variantes levam apenas a pequenos ajustes no processo. O
operador do FAS4 não precisa mudar quando a máquina é trocada. Os trabalhos
preliminares para a produção e o processo no FAS4 basicamente não mudam.
7.2 Preparação
O FAS4 está normalmente pronto para uso sem muita preparação. Entretanto, você
deve completar as seguintes etapas antes da produção para que o processo de
produção não seja interrompido e você possa começar rapidamente:
 Conecte o FAS4 à máquina de produção. Para o efeito, ligue o conector de

tomada aos cigarros, filtro ou máquina de enrolamento e estabeleça também a
conexão com o ar de alimentação.
 Conecte o FAS4 e a máquina de produção.
 Verifique os níveis de enchimento dos tanques
 Se o aroma for frio, agora você pode adicionar detergente e aroma fresco
aos tanques e conectar o tanque externo ao FAS4, se necessário. Quando o
aroma é frio, você também pode ter o tanque de aroma interno
automaticamente enchido diretamente, acoplando o tanque externo.
 Se você estiver usando aroma quente, o sistema normalmente precisa

aquecer antes de acrescentar detergente e/ou aroma. Por conseguinte,
aguarde até que o sistema esteja quente antes de reabastecer.
Versão:02 67/133
produção)
 Conecte o bico à máquina de produção. Sempre coloque o conjunto de

mangueiras para que não seja dobrado e fique protegido de danos.
 Prepare a máquina de produção de acordo com suas especificações.
 No próximo passo são inseridos os parâmetros de produção no FAS4 e o sistema

é iniciado.
Limpeza manual
Os recipientes do FAS4 e o carrinho externo do recipiente só

podem ser abertos na cozinha de molho (local para
enchimento do aroma) na área designada para o efeito e não
na área de produção ao utilizar meios inflamáveis.
Risco de explosão
O FAS4 não deve ser conectado eletricamente na área ATEX!
7.3 Inserção dos parâmetros de produção e início da

produção
O tipo de máquina de produção ao qual o FAS4 está conectado foi definido durante
a calibração (capítulo 6.4) e não precisa ser inserido novamente antes da produção.
A inserção dos parâmetros de produção difere ligeiramente e, portanto, é explicada
a seguir para cada variante. Entretanto, o primeiro e mais importante ajuste é se o
aquecimento é ativado ou não (somente sistemas UNI).
7.3.1 Modo frio/modo quente e interruptor de chave
No modo frio, os aromas podem ser processados, os quais são líquidos em seu
estado normal e não têm que ser derretidos por aquecimento. Estes podem ser, por
exemplo, substâncias que são dissolvidas em álcool ou glicerina.
68/133 Versão:02
produção)
Para os aromas que são sólidos à temperatura ambiente e devem primeiro ser
liquefeitos, deve ser pré-selecionado o modo quente. Essas substâncias incluem,
por exemplo, o mentol natural.
Os dispositivos de aquecimento são ligados e desligados usando o interruptor de

chave na porta frontal do FAS4. São possíveis as seguintes posições:
O interruptor de chave está na posição de base. Nem o

dispositivo de aquecimento nem o agitador estão liberados.
Nessa posição, o agitador é liberado em operação fria.
Girando a chave da posição de base para a direita, o

dispositivo de aquecimento é ativado. O dispositivo de
aquecimento é desativado automaticamente após o final de
uma etapa de produção ou após o reinício de um sistema.
Nesse caso, a chave deve ser virada novamente para a
posição de base e depois novamente para a direita.
Consequentemente, se a chave estiver na posição correta, isto
não significa automaticamente que o aquecimento seja
ativado. Se o aquecimento estiver ativado, a lâmpada amarela
"Heizung vorgewählt" (Aquecimento pré-selecionado) acende
na porta frontal do FAS4 e o símbolo de aquecimento é
exibido na linha de título do FAS4.
Exemplo:
Dispositivo de aquecimento não ativado:
Versão:02 69/133
produção)
Dispositivo de aquecimento ativado:
Após o FAS4 ter sido iniciado ou uma produção em andamento ter sido encerrada,
o modo frio é sempre pré-selecionado automaticamente por razões de segurança e,
assim, os dispositivos de aquecimento são desligados. Isso é para evitar o
aquecimento acidental de materiais inflamáveis.
Observe a posição do interruptor de chave e se os dispositivos

de aquecimento estão ativados ou não. Basicamente, as
substâncias inflamáveis não devem ser aquecidas. Ao
processar substâncias quentes, o dispositivo de aquecimento
deve ser ligado.
Após verificar o status do dispositivo de

aquecimento, proceda para entrar nos
parâmetros de produção. Para o efeito, vá para
a janela "Übersicht" (Visão Geral) e clique no
botão "Produktion" (Produção) na parte inferior da página. Observe que o botão só
é liberado se o FAS4 tiver sido calibrado com a máquina de produção conectada.
7.3.2 Inserção dos parâmetros de produção (máquina de

produção de cigarros)
Para a aplicação de aroma à vareta de tabaco em uma máquina de produção de

cigarros, devem ser inseridos os valores de comprimento do bastão, quantidade de
aplicação e, se necessário, a temperatura. Se o aquecimento não for ativado, o
campo de temperatura é automaticamente bloqueado. Os parâmetros mais altos
são sempre inseridos primeiro, somente depois os mais baixos são liberados.
70/133 Versão:02
produção)
 Criar captura de tela
 Nome da máquina de produção

conectada
 Temperatura nominal [°C]
 Comprimento do bastão [mm/pcs]
 Quantidade de aplicação [g/10³pcs]
 Assumir SP para o circuito de aroma

em prontidão de produção da máquina
de produção
 Início da produção
 Terminar
Depois de clicar no botão "Start" (Iniciar), o FAS4 começa com a preparação da

produção.

produção de filtros)
Para a aplicação de aroma ao cabo do filtro em uma máquina de produção de

filtros, devem ser igualmente inseridos os valores de comprimento do bastão,
quantidade de aplicação e, se necessário, a temperatura. Se o aquecimento não for
ativado, o campo de temperatura é automaticamente bloqueado. Os parâmetros
mais altos são sempre inseridos primeiro, somente depois os mais baixos são
liberados. A diferença para a inserção dos parâmetros para a máquina de produção
de cigarros é que, aqui, a quantidade de aplicação é inserida em g/10²pcs e não em
g/10³pcs.
Versão:02 71/133
produção)
 Nome da máquina de produção

conectada
 Quantidade de aplicação [g/10³pcs]
 Assumir SP para o circuito de

aroma em prontidão de produção da
máquina de produção
 Início da produção
 Terminar

produção.

enrolamento ou de papel)
Se o FAS4 for calibrado para uma máquina de enrolamento, você tem a escolha
entre duas variantes de inserção para os parâmetros de produção. Você pode
inserir a quantidade da aplicação em g/10²pcs como na máquina de filtros ou mudar
para uma inserção percentual.
72/133 Versão:02
produção)

 Nome da máquina de produção conectada
 Mudança da unidade de quantidade de

aplicação
 Quantidade de aplicação [g/10³pcs]
 Assumir SP para o circuito de aroma em
prontidão de produção da máquina de
produção
 Início da produção
 Terminar
Quando você clica no botão para mudar a quantidade da aplicação, os campos de

inserção mudam como se segue:
 Nome da máquina de produção conectada
 Mudança da unidade de quantidade de
aplicação
 Peso do tabaco por bastão [mg]
 Conteúdo de aroma no tabaco [%]
 Assumir SP para o circuito de aroma em

prontidão de produção da máquina de
produção
 Início da produção
 Terminar

produção.
Versão:02 73/133
produção)
7.3.5 FAS4 Preparação da produção
Após "Start" (Iniciar) ter sido pressionado, o FAS4 começa a passar por várias
etapas de produção. Até que o sistema esteja finalmente pronto para a produção,
são realizadas as seguintes etapas:
1. Aquecer (se o dispositivo de aquecimento for ativado)
Os dispositivos de aquecimento internos e externos são iniciados. Assim que as

temperaturas atingem a faixa das temperaturas nominais, é iniciado um tempo de
reaquecimento por razões de segurança. Após esse tempo, se passa para a etapa
seguinte.
2. Circuito de limpeza
O detergente é bombeado através das tubagens por um tempo definido, a fim de

limpá-las e remover possíveis resíduos de aroma.
3. Suprimir detergente
Nessa etapa, a bomba absorve o aroma e a bombeia para o tanque do detergente.

Isso desloca o detergente para fora das tubagens e impede que ele entre mais
tarde no tabaco.
4. Circuito de aroma
No circuito de aroma, o aroma é sugado para fora do tanque e bombeado de volta

para dentro dele. Desse modo, são deslocadas bolhas de ar das tubagens e
mistura o aroma.
5. Prontidão para a produção
Durante a prontidão para a produção, o FAS4 espera no circuito de aroma para o

arranque da máquina de produção. Se o FAS4 estiver pronto para a produção, a
lâmpada amarela na porta frontal acende-se e é dado o sinal de ativação para a
máquina de produção. Você pode agora iniciar a máquina de produção e produzir.
Assim que os cigarros ou filtros são produzidos, o FAS4 muda para a produção e
pulveriza o aroma através do bico.
74/133 Versão:02
produção)
Algumas informações adicionais sobre as etapas individuais podem ser

encontradas no capítulo 8.3.
A etapa atual e o tempo até à próxima etapa são exibidos na linha de título durante
a produção:
Enquanto o indicador amarelo ao lado da etapa estiver piscando, o FAS4 não está
pronto. Somente quando os indicadores estiverem permanentemente amarelos, a
máquina de produção pode ser iniciada.
Os tempos e valores nominais para as várias etapas podem ser definidos nos
parâmetros da máquina (capítulo 6.1).
7.4 Produção
Quando o FAS4 está pronto para a produção, ele espera no circuito de aroma até
que a máquina de produção tenha sido iniciada e informa que está produzindo. Ao
mesmo tempo, o FAS4 muda para o modo de produção e começa a aplicar o
aroma. Você também pode detectar quando o FAS4 está produzindo pela entrada
correspondente na linha do título e a lâmpada verde ao lado do texto:
Se a máquina de produção parar a produção, o sistema volta automaticamente para

a prontidão para a produção ou para o circuito de aroma e espera até que a
máquina de produção envie novamente o sinal de produção.
Versão:02 75/133
produção)
7.4.1 Ligação do agitador
Operação a frio
Na operação a frio, o agitador deve ser habilitado primeiro usando o interruptor de

chave antes de ser ligado. Para fazer isso, gire o interruptor para a posição
esquerda. Assim que você tiver feito isso, uma mensagem aparece no FAS4. Essa
mensagem indica que a agitação só é permitida com substâncias não
inflamáveis. As substâncias inflamáveis podem explodir devido a faíscas
durante a agitação.
Somente substâncias não-inflamáveis podem ser agitadas.

Caso contrário, existe o risco de explosão devido à formação
de faíscas ao se agitar.
Depois que o agitador for ativado, ele pode ser ligado na janela
"Prozess" (Processar) usando o botão ao lado do tanque. Se um
tanque externo for conectado, o agitador também é automaticamente
ligado lá.
Operação a quente
Antes que o agitador possa ser ligado na operação a quente todos os valores
nominais internos de temperatura devem ser atingidos. Se esse for o caso e o
tempo de segurança correspondente tiver decorrido, o botão para ligar o agitador é
liberado na tela "Prozess" (Processar) (ver acima). Se o sistema parar, o agitador
também é automaticamente desligado. Não é necessário liberar o interruptor de
chave durante a operação a quente.
76/133 Versão:02
produção)
7.4.2 Standby e standby automático
Durante a prontidão para a produção, o FAS4 bombeia aroma em um círculo e está

sempre pronto para uso. Se os dispositivos de aquecimento forem ativados, eles
permanecem ligados e mantêm a temperatura nominal. Se for previsível que o
FAS4 não irá produzir por um período de tempo maior, por exemplo, devido a
problemas com a máquina de produção, o FAS4 deve ser parado (em operação a
frio) ou colocado em modo standby (operação a quente). Você encontrará o botão
correspondente na barra de funções. No modo standby, as bombas são paradas,
mas a temperatura ainda é mantida. Isso protege as bombas e garante uma vida
útil mais longa. Além disso, os dispositivos de aquecimento externos são desligados
em modo standby, economizando assim energia. Se a produção for retomada,
basta pressionar o botão "Start" (Iniciar) na barra de funções.
A função de standby automático muda automaticamente para o modo standby se

não houver produção por um determinado período de tempo. Esse tempo pode ser
definido nos parâmetros da máquina (capítulo 6.1.4).
Se a máquina de produção estiver parada por um longo tempo,

você deve parar o FAS4 se estiver operando em operação a
frio ou colocá-lo em modo standby se os dispositivos de
aquecimento estiverem ativos. Isso evita o desgaste
desnecessário da bomba.
7.4.3 Ajuste da pressão de ar para o bico de duas substâncias
Se o FAS4 for operado em uma máquina de cigarros com um bico de duas

substâncias, uma certa pressão de ar deve ser ajustada através da válvula de
regulação de ar para o ar atomizador. Sem esse ar, o aroma não é finamente
atomizado, mas atinge o fio a vareta de tabaco como um jato duro. Isso torna
impossível a aplicação correta do aroma, pois causa quebras de varetas e
contaminação da máquina de produção. A pressão do ar de trabalho geralmente
está entre 1,2 e 1,8 bar, mas pode variar ligeiramente e deve ser ajustada de
acordo com o tabaco e o aroma.
Versão:02 77/133
produção)
O valor nominal para a válvula de regulação de ar pode ser

ajustado a partir do nível de serviço na janela "Übersicht" (Visão
Geral). Para fazer isso, clique no símbolo da válvula de
regulação de ar e digite o valor desejado. A pressão de ar ajustada influencia a
ocorrência de manchas nos cigarros. Se essas manchas aparecem com mais
frequência na parte de trás do cigarro, o aroma está penetrando demais na vareta
do tabaco. Nesse caso, é preciso reduzir ligeiramente a pressão do ar. Se, por
outro lado, você tiver manchas no lado frontal (de frente para o bico), a pressão do
ar deve ser ligeiramente aumentada. Algumas manchas no cigarro são normais.
Estas geralmente secam em poucos minutos e não deixam vestígios.
Para evitar produção acidental sem ar comprimido, uma mensagem aparece

quando o sistema é iniciado se a pressão ajustada for inferior a 0,5 bar.
Para máquinas de filtros, a pressão de ar pode ser ajustada para 0, já que não é
necessário ar comprimido para o bico do filtro.
7.4.4 Retirar aroma
Para evitar que o aroma permaneça no bico e escorra ou solidifique no caso de

uma interrupção na produção, o FAS4 tem a função de "retirar o aroma". Se o
sistema detectar uma parada da máquina de produção, a bomba é lentamente
revertida após um tempo definido (consulte o capítulo 6.1.2). Isso retira o aroma do
bico de volta para a tubagem e já não pode causar mais problemas. Se você tiver
frequentemente o problema de um bico entupido, especialmente com sistemas de
filtragem, você deve verificar o tempo e o valor nominal definidos para a quantidade
e ajustá-los, se necessário.
7.5 Terminar a produção

Para terminar corretamente uma produção em curso, pressione o botão "Beenden"
(Terminar) na barra de funções. O FAS4 iniciará então o ciclo de limpeza e seguirá
as seguintes etapas:
78/133 Versão:02
produção)
1. Suprimir aroma
A bomba suga detergente e o bombeia por um curto período na direção do tanque

de aroma. Desse modo, o aroma é pressionado na tubagem entre o tanque e a
válvula de volta para o tanque de aroma e não contamina o detergente no tanque
de limpeza.
2. Circuito de limpeza
No circuito de limpeza, o detergente é bombeado no circuito por um certo tempo.

Isso limpa e remove os resíduos de aroma da bomba, medidor de caudal, válvulas
e tubagens.
3. Limpar o bico (opcional)
Após o circuito de limpeza, aparecerá um pop-up perguntando se o bico deve ser

limpo. Clique em "Ja" (Sim), o detergente será bombeado através do conjunto de
mangueiras e do bico por um curto período de tempo. Em seguida, o detergente é
sugado de volta para a tubagem um pouco na função "Reiniger zurückziehen"
(Retirar detergente) para que o bico não pingue durante a não utilização. Antes de
confirmar o pop-up com "Ja" (Sim), certifique-se de que o bico está desmontado e
mantido em um recipiente. Caso contrário, o detergente corre para a máquina de
produção.
Quando a limpeza estiver completa, o FAS4 lhe perguntará se você deseja desligar
o PC. Se você quiser desligar o FAS4 após a limpeza, confirme esta consulta, caso
contrário clique em "No" (Não). O sistema também pode ser desligado
posteriormente usando o botão "Herunterfahren" (Encerrar) no menu principal.
Versão:02 79/133
produção)
Sempre termine uma produção usando o botão "Beenden"

(Terminar) para que o sistema seja limpo após a produção. O
mentol quente, em particular, pode se expandir durante o
resfriamento e danificar a tecnologia de processo do FAS4.
Antes de desligar o FAS4, o PC deve ser encerrado. Caso

contrário, há um risco de perda de dados e danos ao sistema
de arquivos.
Após terminar uma produção, todos os parâmetros de produção são reinicializados

e a pré-seleção de aquecimento é eliminada. Se você quiser produzir com
dispositivo de aquecimento na próxima vez, lembre-se de ativar o dispositivo de
aquecimento novamente (capítulo 7.3.1).
80/133 Versão:02
Modos de operação
8 Modos de operação
Após iniciar o sistema, o modo de produção é sempre selecionado por padrão. No

entanto, além do modo de produção, existem vários outros modos para fins de teste
e manutenção.
Para mudar o modo, você deve primeiro

fazer o login como usuário do nível de
serviço. Posteriormente, a janela para mudar
o modo de operação pode ser acessada
através do menu principal, clicando no botão
"Mode" (Modo). Alternativamente, você pode
usar o botão com o mesmo nome na barra de
funções na parte superior direita.
Na janela do modo de operação você encontrará, da esquerda para a direita, o

modo de produção, modo manual, semimodo com suas diversas funções e, na
extrema direita, o modo automático.
8.1 Modo de produção

No modo de produção, todos os processos dentro do FAS4 são executados
automaticamente. Somente ao iniciar a produção, vários parâmetros de produção
têm de ser inseridos. O manuseio do modo de produção é descrito nos capítulos
anteriores.
8.2 Modo manual

Enquanto no modo de produção o sistema é controlado e regulado de maneira
completamente automática, no modo manual quase todos os automatismos são
desativados. Para fins de teste, manutenção e diagnóstico, isso pode ser
exatamente o que é necessário. No modo manual, todos os atuadores podem ser
ligados e desligados manualmente e controlados com um valor de controle fixo.
Versão:02 81/133
Modos de operação
Por exemplo, você pode controlar a bomba com exatamente 25% de potência ou
um elemento de aquecimento específico em qualquer valor de controle.
A tela mais importante na visualização durante a

operação manual é a tela "Prozess" (Processar).
Todos os atuadores de processo, tubagens e valores
são exibidos aqui. Você pode ver qual atuador você
pode controlar pelo fato de que uma caixa de texto
com o conteúdo "Hand" (Manual) é exibida ao lado do
atuador. Quando não estão no estado controlado, os
dispositivos são exibidos em cinza. Assim que você
clica na bomba, como nesse exemplo, ela é ligada e fica verde. Você pode definir
os valores de controle dos vários atuadores nos parâmetros da máquina (capítulo
6.1.) ou ajustá-los a qualquer momento na tela de regulação (capítulo 6.2). O SP
não desempenha um papel no modo manual, uma vez que não é regulado, mas
apenas controlado. Os únicos fatores decisivos aqui são o CV e o PV.
No modo manual, o sistema não é monitorado de acordo com

o conceito de valor-limite de alarme (capítulo 6.3), ou seja,
você é responsável por qualquer dano causado por operação
incorreta ao trabalhar no modo manual.
O modo manual só deve ser usado por pessoal treinado para

fins de teste e manutenção.
Após passar para o modo manual, todos os atuadores,

incluindo os dispositivos de aquecimento, são desligados. Por
conseguinte, tenha em mente que o sistema esfria e o aroma
pode solidificar novamente antes de trocar a bomba ou as
válvulas.
82/133 Versão:02
Modos de operação
8.3 Semioperação ou semiautomático

A diferença entre modo manual e semioperação é que na semioperação o sistema
regula automaticamente e controla os atuadores, mas você mesmo pode
selecionar, iniciar e parar uma das etapas definidas. Além disso, o sistema é
novamente protegido contra danos pelo conceito de valor-limite de alarme.
Quando você muda para o modo semi, você pode selecionar uma das seguintes
etapas do processo:
8.3.1 Circuito de limpeza
No circuito de limpeza, a bomba aspira o detergente do

tanque de detergente e também o bombeia de volta para o
tanque de detergente através das tubagens. Isso irá
nivelar as tubagens apropriadas, a bomba, o sensor de
pressão do sistema, o medidor de caudal e o bloco de
válvulas.
8.3.2 Pulverizar detergente
Se "Reiniger sprühen" (Pulverizar detergente) for

selecionado e iniciado, a bomba suga detergente do
tanque de detergente e o bombeia através do bico. Essa
função pode ser usada para limpar o conjunto de
mangueiras e o bico. Certifique-se de que o bico é
removido da barra da tubagem de sucção e mantido em
um recipiente adequado, caso contrário, correrá
detergente para a máquina de produção.
Versão:02 83/133
Modos de operação
8.3.3 Suprimir detergente
Nesta etapa, o aroma é retirado do tanque de aroma e

bombeado através das tubagens para o tanque de
detergente. Essa função permite que o detergente antigo
seja deslocado da tubagem de volta para o tanque de
detergente e que a tubagem seja preenchida com aroma.
8.3.4 Circuito de aroma
No circuito de aroma, o aroma é retirado do tanque de

aroma e bombeado de volta para o mesmo tanque. Esse
modo é bom para a descarga de bolhas de ar para fora
das tubagens. Estes podem ocorrer, por exemplo, após a
limpeza dos filtros ou o levantamento da tampa do tanque.
8.3.5 Pulverizar aroma
No modo "Flavor sprühen" (Pulverizar aroma), o aroma é

bombeado do tanque de aroma através do bico. A função é
boa para deslocar o detergente do conjunto de mangueiras
após uma limpeza e enchê-lo de aroma. Alternativamente,
a função também pode ser usada para a medição
volumétrica manual. Antes de iniciar, certifique-se de que o
bico é desmontado e é colocado em um recipiente
adequado.
84/133 Versão:02
Modos de operação
8.3.6 Suprimir aroma
Com essa função, o detergente é sugado e bombeado

para dentro do tanque de aroma. Isso permite que a
tubagem do tanque de aroma seja completamente
liberada de aroma e enchida com detergente.
8.4 Automático
O modo automático funciona como o modo de produção, mas também pode ser
usado para testes sem a máquina de produção conectada. Todos os outros
processos correspondem aos do modo de produção.
Versão:02 85/133
Limpeza do FAS4
9 Limpeza do FAS4
Basicamente, um circuito de limpeza é realizado toda vez que termina uma

produção. No entanto, em alguns casos, como na mudança de aromas, pode ser
aconselhável limpar o FAS4 manualmente para evitar o transporte de aromas.
A limpeza do FAS4 depende principalmente do aroma utilizado. Ao utilizar o aroma

cristalino, o sistema deve primeiro ser aquecido para a limpeza. Por norma, um
agente correspondente à substância transportadora do aroma é usado como
detergente. Por exemplo, álcool para aromas solúveis em álcool ou água para
mentol quente.
Limpeza manual
Os recipientes do FAS4 e o carrinho externo do recipiente só

podem ser abertos na cozinha de molho (local para
enchimento do aroma) na área designada para o efeito e não
na área de produção ao utilizar meios inflamáveis.
Risco de explosão
O FAS4 não deve ser conectado eletricamente na área ATEX!
Ao utilizar substâncias inflamáveis, o dispositivo de

aquecimento do FAS4 não deve ser ligado. Utilize somente
materiais não inflamáveis na operação a quente.
A limpeza automática pode ser realizada na máquina de cigarros.
Se tiverem sido gerados gases inflamáveis dentro do FAS4 devido a vazamento, o

dispositivo de aviso de gás comuta a área do tanque amortecedor sem tensão.
Versão:02 87/133
Limpeza do FAS4
Os bicos devem ser limpos novamente com muita água limpa após a primeira
limpeza. Certifique-se de que os bicos estão bem enxaguados!
9.1.1 Limpeza manual
Substâncias irritantes
Use sempre vestuário de proteção apropriado durante a

limpeza. O vestuário de proteção deve ser aprovado para a
zona explosiva correspondente!
 Óculos de proteção ou máscara de proteção
 Luvas
 Botas de borracha
Perigo de escaldaduras
Perigo de escaldaduras devido a água quente.
O FAS4 pode ser limpo com água quente ou com etanol.
Se o FAS4 for limpo com água, é necessária uma temperatura

de água acima do ponto de fusão das substâncias
aromatizantes. São alcançadas temperaturas acima de 50
graus Celsius.
Use vestuário de proteção apropriado para se proteger da

água quente!
A limpeza da unidade FAS4 depende do tipo de aroma utilizado. Ao utilizar o aroma

cristalino, o sistema deve primeiro ser aquecido para a limpeza e não pode ser
usado qualquer detergente inflamável. A escolha do detergente depende do aroma
e deve ser o mesmo que a substância transportadora do aroma.
88/133 Versão:02
Limpeza do FAS4
Risco de explosão
Na limpeza de sistemas quentes, só podem ser usados

detergentes não inflamáveis!
9.1.2 Limpar o tanque
Desconecte o tanque da
estação.
1. Desconectar
eletricamente o tanque
da estação .
2. Solte o freio nas rodas

 (2x).
Versão:02 89/133
Limpeza do FAS4
3. Desbloqueie o
acoplamento mecânico
.
4. Puxe o tanque na sua

direção até que a
tomada seja facilmente
acessível.
5. Desbloqueie a tomada
nos ganchos de
segurança  (2x).
6. Desconecte a
tomada.
O tanque está agora

desconectado da estação.
90/133 Versão:02
Limpeza do FAS4
9.1.3 Esvaziar completamente o tanque
Para esvaziar completamente o tanque, você precisa de um recipiente vazio.

1. Abra a porta do tanque.
2. Puxe a tubagem  para
fora da abertura.
3. Coloque a tubagem 
no recipiente vazio.
4. Abra a válvula de esfera
 aprox. 75%
1
75%
O aroma corre para

dentro do recipiente.
5. Feche a válvula de
esfera depois que o
tanque estiver
completamente vazio.
Mangueira entupida
Se for usado aroma quente e não drenar ou drenar muito

lentamente, pode ser porque a mangueira está entupida com
aroma resfriado.
Nesse caso, use um secador de ar quente e aqueça a
mangueira até que o aroma se desprenda.
Versão:02 91/133
Limpeza do FAS4
6. Remova o cartucho do
filtro.
Abra o fecho 
completamente.
Puxe o cartucho do filtro
pelo  cabo de estrela.
Retire o cartucho do
filtro na vertical!
7. Limpe o cartucho do
filtro com etanol ou
água quente em
abundância.
A água precisa de uma
temperatura que esteja
acima do ponto de
fusão das substâncias
aromatizantes.
Perigo
de escaldadura
Use um EPI!
Preste atenção aos

anéis de vedação . Os
anéis de vedação não
92/133 Versão:02
Limpeza do FAS4
devem ser danificados!
8. Limpe o interior do
tanque com uma
esponja.
Ao limpar, certifique-se
de não danificar nada
dentro do tanque!
9. Drene o detergente
restante também
através da mangueira.
 "Esvaziar
completamente o
tanque"
Mentol cristalizado
O metanol resfriado se cristaliza. Para limpar o taque, dever reaquecer-se o tanque.
Risco de queimaduras
O interior do tanque fica muito quente devido ao aquecimento

do metanol. Existe o risco de queimaduras.
Use o EPI apropriado para se proteger de queimaduras.
Deixe o tanque esfriar novamente para se proteger de

queimaduras.
Versão:02 93/133
Limpeza do FAS4
9.1.4 Limpar as tubagens
1. Deixe detergente limpo

no tanque
2. Coloque um recipiente
vazio sob o
acoplamento do fecho
3. Pressione o
acoplamento do fecho
 com uma ferramenta
sem corte.
Dica:
 Chave Allen.
A mola cede e o aroma

restante é empurrado
através do detergente da
tubagem.


94/133 Versão:02
Limpeza do FAS4
9.1.5 Limpar a estação
A limpeza do tanque externo é feita na cozinha de aromas .
Para isso, desmonte o tanque externo da seguinte maneira:
Lembre-se da cobertura de transporte!
A cobertura de transporte está incluída com o FAS4.
1 x para o tanque de amortecimento – substâncias

aromatizantes
1 x para o tanque de amortecimento – detergente
 Tanque de amortecimento
 Fecho tampa
 Suspensão tampa
 Gancho para a tampa
1. Desligue o sistema da
fonte de alimentação!
2. Solte os parafusos de
fecho  (2x).
3. Pendure a tampa nos
ganchos 
4. Coloque a tampa de
transporte no tanque .
5. Feche os parafusos de
fecho  (2x).
Versão:02 95/133
Limpeza do FAS4
9.1.6 Limpar os filtros
Os filtros são parafusados

nas tampas dos tanques
(amortecedor e tanque de
limpeza).
A fim de limpar os filtros,
recomendamos desmontar
a tubagem incluindo o filtro.
1. Desmonte a tubagem
com filtro da tampa .
Segure firmemente a
tubagem  ao
desatarraxá-lo!
2. Puxe a tubagem com
filtro  para baixo.
Limpe a tubagem e o filtro
com água quente.
Perigo de
escaldadura, use vestuário
de proteção apropriado!
Existem dois tipos de filtros:

Um para o tanque de aroma
e outro para o tanque de
limpeza
96/133 Versão:02
O tanque de aroma externo (opcional)
10O tanque de aroma externo (opcional)
O tanque de aroma externo é um sistema autossuficiente para processar aroma e

garantir a produção ininterrupta. Não tem nada a ver com a aplicação direta do
aroma, mas fornece uma quantidade maior de aroma à unidade principal como uma
unidade adicional ao encher o recipiente amortecedor da unidade principal do lado
de fora. O tanque interno do FAS4 pode ser conectado diretamente ao tanque
externo através de um acoplamento, permitindo, assim, o reabastecimento
automático do tanque interno quando o nível de cai abaixo de um certo nível de
enchimento.
10.1 Estrutura
O tanque externo é construído da seguinte forma:
 Conector
 Abertura de enchimento
 Cartucho do filtro
 Desbloqueio do FAS4
 Painel de controle
 Porta de manutenção do compartimento

elétrico
 Freio
Versão:02 97/133
10.2 O painel de controle

O tanque externo é controlado com a ajuda do painel de controle. Quando o tanque
está frio, o painel de controle não é necessário, pois as poucas funções elétricas
são controladas pelo FAS4.
 Especificação do valor nominal e valor real

de temperatura
 Ligar o tanque
 Interruptor para o agitador
 Interruptor de chave para pré-seleção de

aquecimento
 Desligar o tanque
 Função de aquecimento
 Lâmpada de alarme
10.3 Enchimento
Para encher o tanque externo, abra
o fecho e vire a tampa para a frente.
Agora preencha com seu aroma
líquido ou sólido. A melhor maneira
de fazer isso é com o funil opcional
com peneira integrada. Ao encher,
observe o nível máximo de
enchimento e assegure-se de que
nenhum aroma passa pelo gargalo de enchimento para dentro do espaço do
tanque.
98/133 Versão:02
A abertura do recipiente do carrinho externo do recipiente só

pode ser aberta na cozinha de aromas (local para enchimento
do aroma) na área designada para o efeito e não na área de
produção.
Antes de cada enchimento, certifique-se de que a válvula de
esfera para drenar o aroma está fechada. Use equipamento de
proteção pessoal, caso este seja necessário ao manusear seu
aroma.
10.4 Derretimento e preparação do aroma

Você pode conectar o tanque externo diretamente ao FAS4 ou preparar o tanque
na cozinha de aromas (local para enchimento do aroma) e conduzi-lo ao FAS4 e
conectá-lo mais tarde. Em ambos os casos, aplica-se o seguinte procedimento:
Se for utilizado aroma frio, não são necessárias precauções especiais. Após o
enchimento do aroma, o tanque está pronto para operação.
Se o aroma sólido tiver de ser aquecido e derretido, por favor, encha-o. Em

seguida, conecte o tanque à fonte de alimentação. Agora use o interruptor de chave
para selecionar o dispositivo de aquecimento e ligue o tanque. São agora exibidos o
valor nominal e real de temperatura no regulador de temperatura e o dispositivo de
aquecimento começa a aquecer o aroma.
O tanque só pode ser ligado quando forem utilizadas

substâncias não inflamáveis.
O dispositivo de aquecimento do tanque diferencia entre dois níveis de potência:
1. Fase de derretimento (Warm-Up - aquecimento): O tanque aquece em potência

máxima para liquefazer o aroma o mais rápido possível.
2. Aquecer: O tanque aquece com potência reduzida.
Após ligar o tanque, a fase de derretimento é automaticamente pré-selecionada.

Isso pode ser detectado pelo fato de que o botão de aquecimento (Warm-Up) se
acende. O tanque aquecerá agora em potência máxima até que a temperatura se
aproxime do valor nominal.
Versão:02 99/133
Em seguida, o sistema muda automaticamente para o nível de potência inferior. A

fase de derretimento pode ser ligada ou desligada manualmente, pressionando o
botão de aquecimento (Warm-Up). Ao ligar o tanque, deve observar o seguinte:
Se a fase de derretimento for ativada e o tanque estiver

apenas parcialmente cheio ou o aroma já estiver quente, a
temperatura pode ser fortemente ultrapassada. Por
conseguinte, ao ligar a função de aquecimento (Warm-Up) e o
tanque, não deixe de observar o nível de enchimento e a
temperatura do aroma. Como a função de aquecimento
(Warm-Up) é ativada automaticamente quando o tanque é
ligado, desligue-a, se necessário.
Assim que o aroma tiver alcançado sua temperatura definida, você pode desligar o
tanque, desconectá-lo da fonte de alimentação e movê-lo da cozinha de molho
(local para enchimento do aroma) para o FAS4. Se o tanque já estiver conectado à
unidade principal, continue com a conexão da tecnologia de processo.
Os tanques cheios são pesados e podem tombar devido ao

centro de gravidade desfavorável. Por conseguinte, não desça
rampas nem passe por entalhes com o tanque cheio.
Certifique-se de que a tampa está fechada durante cada
transporte.
10.5 Acoplamento ao FAS4

Para conectar o tanque à unidade principal, estabeleça primeiro a conexão elétrica.
Observe a posição do interruptor de chave no tanque externo. Se o dispositivo de
aquecimento for ligado no FAS4, o dispositivo de aquecimento também deve ser
ligado no tanque externo antes da conexão.
100/133 Versão:02
 Conexão elétrica
 Centralização
 Bloqueio mecânico
Após a conexão da tomada, você pode agora aproximar o tanque da unidade

principal e deixá-lo engatar. Os freios do FAS4 devem ser bloqueados. Certifique-
se de que a unidade principal e o tanque estão em terreno plano e que não existem
objetos sob as rodas. O tanque é engatado quando não pode mais ser puxado para
longe do FAS4 sem acionar o mecanismo de liberação.
Uma vez feitas as conexões elétricas e

mecânicas, você pode agora conectar a
tecnologia de processo. Para fazer isso, abra
a tela de processo no FAS4.
Após conectar a tomada elétrica, o tanque

externo é automaticamente exibido aqui.
Agora pressione o botão "Verbinden"

(Conectar) para acoplar mecanicamente o
acoplamento de meio. Observe que a conexão só é possível com dispositivo de
aquecimento ativado se as temperaturas estiverem na faixa definida.
Se o acoplamento inicializar com sucesso, o símbolo do acoplamento fica verde; se

houver uma falha, ele fica vermelha. Se houver problemas com o acoplamento,
consulte o capítulo "Manutenção, inspeção, conservação" na pasta do guia.
O botão para ativar o enchimento automático está localizado ao lado da válvula de

enchimento na tela do processo. Essa função abre automaticamente a válvula de
enchimento quando o nível de enchimento está baixo e reabastece o tanque interno
até que ele esteja novamente cheio. Para ligar ou desligar manualmente, use este
botão.
Versão:02 101/133
10.6 O agitador
Antes que o agitador possa ser ligado em operação a quente, a temperatura
definida deve ser atingida e um tempo de segurança também deve ter decorrido.
Assim que o agitador for liberado, o botão correspondente no painel de controle
pisca. Na operação a frio, o agitador é ligado automaticamente quando o agitador
interno do FAS4 é ligado.
102/133 Versão:02
O Additional Screen (a tela adicional)
(opcional)
11O Additional Screen (a tela adicional) (opcional)
11.1 Introdução
Com a ajuda da tela adicional (Additional Screen), os operadores podem operar o
FAS4 independentemente da posição do sistema. A tela adicional (Additional
Screen) mostra a tela espelhada da visualização do FAS4 e permite a mesma
entrada do usuário através da tela sensível ao toque como no próprio FAS4. Se o
monitor adicional for instalado diretamente na máquina de produção, o operador
pode operar ambas as máquinas sem sair de seu posto de trabalho.
A tela adicional (Additional Screen) é um IPC baseado no Windows CE com tela

sensível ao toque e porta USB frontal. A entrega inclui uma base robusta ajustável
que pode ser facilmente instalada na área de produção (p.ex., diretamente na
máquina de produção). Para iniciar o monitor, somente a conexão com o FAS4
deve ser estabelecida através do cabo de conexão ou da tomada elétrica. O
sistema operacional e o software do cliente começam independentemente e estão
prontos para operar após um tempo muito curto. A operação através do monitor
adicional pode ser realizada assim que a mesma tela seja mostrada como
diretamente no FAS4.
A inserções do usuário no monitor auxiliar ou no FAS4 irão bloquear

automaticamente a outra tela por aprox. 2 segundos. Isso impede que sejam feitas
inserções em ambas as telas ao mesmo tempo, o que poderia levar a operações
erradas.
Versão:02 103/133
(opcional)
A porta frontal USB é ligada diretamente ao PC do FAS4 e pode ser usada para
armazenar capturas de tela ou parâmetros da mesma forma que a conexão
diretamente no FAS4.
Para desligar o monitor adicional, é suficiente desligar a conexão ao FAS4 ou, se

não for necessário, desligar o interruptor principal do FAS4. Se o monitor adicional
não for necessário, ele pode ser estacionado no FAS4.
11.2 Conexão entre o monitor e o FAS4

A imagem anterior mostra a conexão entre o monitor e o FAS4. Os conectores
contêm dois pinos para a fonte de alimentação de 24 V e o conector para o cabo
Ethernet.
A comunicação entre o monitor adicional e o FAS4 é feita através de uma conexão

de rede de 1Gbit. Isto permite que grandes distâncias entre o monitor e o FAS4
possam ser transpostas e a troca de dados segura possa ser implementada através
do protocolo TCP/IP.
Se você conectar um dispositivo USB à porta USB frontal do monitor adicional, o

dispositivo conectado será tratado como se estivesse diretamente ligado ao FAS4
IPC.
104/133 Versão:02
(opcional)
11.3 Utilização do monitor em múltiplas unidades FAS4

Um monitor adicional pode ser usado de forma flexível em todos os sistemas e
máquinas de produção preparados. Não é necessária uma atribuição fixa dos
monitores a um FAS4 específico.
11.4 Resolução do erro
Problema Solução possível
O monitor adicional não inicia ! Verifique a fonte de alimentação e o

fusível +ET – 3F3
! Verifique todos os conectores de

encaixe
! Certifique-se de que o FAS4 está ligado
O monitor adicional inicia, mas não mostra ! Verifique a conexão de rede entre o
a visualização do FAS4 FAS4 e a tela adicional (Additional
Screen). No monitor adicional, o
símbolo de rede no canto inferior direito
da barra de tarefas deve mostrar o
status "Verbunden" (Conectado).
O ponteiro do mouse do monitor adicional ! Realize uma nova calibração. Para fazer
reage de forma incorreta às inserções do isso, abra a janela de manutenção no
usuário. FAS4 e clique no símbolo do monitor
para abrir a calibração da tela. Calibre
agora primeiro o monitor do FAS4 e
depois a tela adicional (Additional
Screen).
Versão:02 105/133
Janela de diagnóstico (opcional)
12Janela de diagnóstico (opcional)
Uma ferramenta útil para solucionar problemas ou para avaliar o status do sistema
é a janela de diagnóstico do FAS. Ela pode ser aberta através do menu de
manutenção:
Versão:02 107/133
12.1 Vista principal

A vista principal da janela de diagnóstico fornece uma visão geral esquemática do
sistema. Os aparelhos elétricos e pneumáticos mais importantes são exibidos como
caixas relacionadas e refletem a estrutura do sistema:
Se houver uma falha em um aparelho ou grupo de aparelhos, ela é indicada por um

piscar vermelho das caixas e conexões correspondentes.
108/133 Versão:02
Muitas vezes há falhas sucessivas quando os dispositivos principais falham.

Comece a inspeção no primeiro dispositivo defeituoso da cadeia. Informações
detalhadas de diagnóstico podem ser acessadas clicando nas caixas.
Detalhe caixa "UPS" Detalhe caixa "Serial" (série)
Detalhe caixa "Modbus" Detalhe caixa "Analog Output"
(saída analógica)
12.2 Configuração das conexões da interface

Para além das informações de diagnóstico, um botão está disponível para a
configuração inicial dos equipamentos terminais de comunicação. Isto se aplica aos
terminais Beckhoff (KS6041/KS6001) que são usados para conexão a medidores
de bombas e de caudal. Depois de substituir os terminais, clicar no botão leva à
configuração. Um canto vermelho piscando indica o processo executado. O display
fica verde novamente após o processo de configuração.
Versão:02 109/133
12.3 Esquemas
Em alguns casos, por exemplo, no caso de falhas nas válvulas, o usuário é apoiado
por resumos apropriados de diagramas de circuito ou esquemas pneumáticos.
110/133 Versão:02
12.4 Exemplos
12.4.1 Falha no fornecimento de ar
 O sensor de pressão de ar no FAS4 detecta baixa pressão
 A caixa correspondente pisca em vermelho
 As válvulas de comutação e as válvulas de regulação do ar dependem da pressão

de ar correta. Se aquelas não estiverem funcionando corretamente, também
piscarão em vermelho.
Versão:02 111/133
12.4.2 Falha da entrada analógica
As entradas analógicas conectam sensores para pressão do sistema, válvula de

regulação de pressão e enchimento. Se uma entrada analógica falhar, os campos
correspondentes e os seguintes campos piscam em vermelho para indicar falhas ou
possíveis erros subsequentes.
Para iniciar a inspeção, a visualização detalhada da entrada analógica deve ser

aberta clicando na caixa de seleção correspondente.
Nesse caso, é bastante óbvio que o canal 1 do terminal 5A5 indica "Underrange"
(Abaixo do intervalo). Isso significa que a corrente de entrada caiu abaixo de 4 mA.
Isso pode ser causado por um sensor defeituoso ou por uma fiação incorreta.
112/133 Versão:02
Detectar dados de produção (opcional)
13Detectar dados de produção (opcional)
Após a máquina ter sido

configurada com "Dados de
produção", você pode
atribuir um "ID de lotes"
adicional .
O registro dos dados

começa com o início da
produção.
IMPORTANTE!
As seguintes etapas só são
visíveis para os usuários do
nível "servicem"!
Abra o menu de
manutenção.
Pressionar
"Produktionsdaten-
Download" (Download de
dados de produção), para
abrir a
"Produktionsdatenfenster"
(Janela de dados de
produção).
Nota:
A
Versão:02 113/133
"Produktionsdatenfenster"
(Janela de dados de
produção) exibe os dados
por dia.
 – Eliminar dados de
produção
 – Exportar dados de
produção
IMPORTANTE!
Os dados devem ser

selecionados. Sem
seleção, uma janela pop-up
se abrirá lembrando que
você deve selecionar dados
para cada tipo de ação.
Dica
Você pode selecionar

várias datas.
Após a confirmação do
botão de eliminação, um
pedido de confirmação
também deve ser
confirmado.
114/133 Versão:02
Uma eliminação bem

sucedida é exibida em uma
janela separada.
Uma exportação bem

sucedida também é
exibida.
Uma janela é exibida se

nenhum dado de produção
tiver sido encontrado.
Versão:02 115/133
Parâmetros para download:
 Data  Quantidade aplicada PE1 SP

[g/1000 pcs]
 Hora
 Pressão do sistema PE1 [bar]
 Número FAS
 Densidade PE1 [g/ml]
 Número de lote
 Velocidade do motor PE1 [rpm]
 Status
 Taxa de fluxo PE2 PV [g/min.]
 Potência máquina externa [pcs/min.]
 Taxa de fluxo PE2 SP [g/min.]
 Comprimento dos cigarros [mm]
 Quantidade aplicada PE2 PV
 Pressão de ar PV [bar]
[g/1000 pcs]
 Pressão de ar SP [bar]
 Quantidade aplicada PE2 SP
 Taxa de fluxo PE1 PV [g/min.] [g/1000 pcs]
 Taxa de fluxo PE1 SP [g/min.]  Pressão do sistema PE2 [bar]
 Quantidade aplicada PE1 PV [g/1000  Densidade PE2 [g/ml]

pcs]
 Velocidade do motor PE2 [rpm]
Os dados são automaticamente eliminados após 365 dias.
116/133 Versão:02
Glossário
14Glossário
Additional Monitor adicional opcional para operar o FAS4 da máquina de

produção.
screen (tela
adicional)
Dosagem Durante a dosagem, é verificado se o medidor de caudal está

calibrado corretamente e funciona com precisão. O aroma é
pulverizado por um tempo definido e coletado em um copo
medidor. O peso do aroma no copo é então pesado e
comparado com o resultado do FAS4.
Enchimento Função de enchimento automático do tanque de aroma interno

pelo tanque externo. Quando o nível de aroma é baixo, a válvula
automático
de enchimento é automaticamente aberta e fechada novamente
quando o tanque está cheio.
Standby Após um tempo ajustável, o FAS4 para automaticamente a

bomba e muda para o modo standby. Os dispositivos de
automático
aquecimento internos, se ativados, permanecem ligados.
Sistema Modelo FAS4 para máquina de produção de uma tubagem.
CLASSIC
Sistema Modelo FAS4, que só pode processar aroma frio.
COLD
CV Controlvalue (valor de controle), variável para um atuador.
ET Compartimento elétrico no FAS4. Contém, entre outras coisas, o

fornecimento de energia, vários fusíveis e dispositivos.
FAS4 Flavor Application System (sistema de aplicação de aroma)
Versão:02 117/133
Glossário
g/10²pcs Unidade para a quantidade de aroma nos filtros, corresponde a

gramas por 100 cigarros.
g/10³pcs Unidade para a quantidade de aroma nos cigarros, corresponde

a gramas por 1000 cigarros.
g/100 m Unidade para a quantidade de aroma nos filtros, corresponde a

gramas por 100 metros
Kp Parte proporcional de um regulador. Gera um sinal de ajuste

(SP-PV) proporcional ao sinal de controle (SP-PV) para um
atuador. Um Kp muito grande pode fazer o regulador oscilar.
PE0 Engenharia de processos 0, área de processo 0, a área de

processo interno do FAS4.
PE1 Engenharia de processos 1, lado do processo 1, o lado

esquerdo do processo da FAS4 como visto de frente.
PE2 Engenharia de processos 2, lado do processo 2, o lado direito

do processo da FAS4 como visto de frente.
PV Processvalue (valor do processo), valor real do processo.
SP Setpoint (ponto de ajuste), valor nominal do processo.
Tn Tempo de reinicialização ou tempo integral de um regulador.

Enquanto houver um desvio de regulação (SP-PV), a variável
(CV) de um atuador é aumentada ou diminuída ainda mais.
Quanto menor o tempo de reinicialização, mais rápido o
regulador se torna. No entanto, ele pode tender a oscilar sob
certas circunstâncias.
Tv, Td Tempo de retenção e tempo de amortecimento de um regulador.
118/133 Versão:02
Glossário
Determinar em conjunto o comportamento diferencial do

regulador. Tv = 0 desativa a parte D do regulador.
Sistema Modelo FAS4 para máquina de produção de uma e duas

tubagens.
TWIN
Sistema UNI Modelo FAS4 que pode processar e aplicar tanto o aroma frio
quanto o quente.
USV Fonte de alimentação ininterrupta = bateria do FAS4.
Função de Função do tanque externo para derretimento rápido do aroma.

Só deve ser ligado sob certas condições.
aquecimento
(Warm-up)
XC1 Externo 1, a área externa 1, geralmente abrange o conjunto de

mangueiras e o bico, assim como o aquecedor de bicos e a
calha, se aplicável.
XC2 Externo 2, a área externa 2, geralmente abrange o conjunto de

mangueiras e o bico, assim como o aquecedor de bicos e a
calha, se aplicável (XC2 somente para sistemas TWIN).
XD Desvio entre o valor nominal e o real.
Versão:02 119/133
Mensagens de alarme
Mensagem Possíveis causas Resolução do erro

ET Falha dispositivo de aviso de gás ? Falha no sensor de gás ! Verifique o sensor
Alarme de gás ET ? A unidade de aviso de gás ainda está inicializando ! Ventile o sistema e determine a causa
? Alarme devido à alta concentração de gás ! Verifique os tubos/conexões quanto a vazamentos
ET RCCB acionou ? Foi detectada uma corrente residual ! Verifique o sistema quanto a danos
? Aparelhos elétricos danificados ! Verifique a fiação
? Quebra de fio
ET Parada de emergência ? O botão de parada de emergência foi pressionado ! Desbloqueie o botão de parada de emergência e
confirme a avaria
FAS4 Monitoramento da pressão de ar ? A pressão do ar de alimentação caiu abaixo de 4,1 ! Verifique a pressão do ar na unidade de manutenção
bar e aumente-a, se necessário
! Verifique as linhas de alimentação do FAS4
! Verificar as tubagens pneumáticas internas
Erro de comunicação entre Visu/CLP ? Erro na comunicação entre o CLP e o sistema de ! Confirmar; se a mensagem não desaparecer,
visualização reinicialize o sistema
24 V CA Erro de fusível ? O fusível para o fornecimento de 24 V CA dos ! Verifique o sistema quanto a danos
dispositivos de aquecimento disparou ! Verifique o sistema quanto a quebra de fio
! Elimine a causa do erro e confirme
24 V CC Erro de fusível ? Um fusível para o fornecimento de 24 V CC disparou ! Verifique o sistema quanto a danos
! Verifique o sistema quanto a quebra de fio
PE0 230 V CA Erro Fusível de aquecimento ? Um fusível para o fornecimento de 230 V CA ! Verifique o sistema quanto a danos
queimou ! Verifique o sistema quanto a quebra de fio
Versão:02 121/133
PE0 Erro Válvula de enchimento ? A válvula de enchimento não muda corretamente ! Verifique a pressão do ar
! Verifique as tubagens pneumáticas e o sistema
elétrico
! Limpe a válvula, se necessário
PE0 Alarme alto Desvio de pressão de ar ? A pressão da válvula de regulação de ar é muito alta ! Verifique a válvula de regulação
PE0 Alarme alto Diferença de temperatura Tanque de ? A temperatura do aroma é muito alta ! Verifique o nível de enchimento
aroma ! Verifique os parâmetros do regulador
! Verifique a temperatura do tanque externo
PE0 Alarme alto Diferença de temperatura Válvula de ? A temperatura da válvula de enchimento é muito alta ! Verifique os parâmetros do regulador
enchimento ! Verifique os assentamentos do cartucho de
aquecimento e o sensor
PE0 Alarme alto Diferença de temperatura interna ? A temperatura interna é muito alta ! Verifique o aquecedor com ventilador
! Verifique os parâmetros do regulador
! Verifique o sensor de temperatura
PE0 Alarme alto Diferença de temperatura Tanque de ? A temperatura do detergente é muito alta ! Verifique o nível de enchimento
limpeza ! Verifique os parâmetros do regulador
PE0 Alarme alto Diferença de temperatura Conexões ? A temperatura da conexão com o tanque externo é ! Verifique o acoplamento
muito alta ! Verifique os parâmetros do regulador
! Verifique o assentamento do cartucho de
PE0 Alarme baixo Nível de enchimento do aroma ? O nível de enchimento do aroma é muito baixo ! Preencha o aroma
! Conecte ao tanque externo e ative o enchimento
automático
! Verifique se existem bolhas de ar na tubagem do
tanque externo
PE0 Alarme baixo Desvio de pressão de ar ? A pressão da válvula de regulação de ar é muito ! Verifique a pressão do ar
baixa ! Verifique as tubagens pneumáticas
! Verifique a válvula de regulação
PE0 Alarme baixo Diferença de temperatura Tanque de ? A temperatura do aroma é muito baixa ! Verifique se o tanque de aroma está assentado
aroma corretamente
! Verifique a placa de aquecimento e o sensor
! Verifique a temperatura do tanque externo
Versão:02 122/133
PE0 Alarme baixo Diferença de temperatura Válvula de ? A temperatura da válvula de enchimento é muito ! Verifique os cartuchos de aquecimento e o sensor
enchimento baixa ! Verifique os parâmetros do regulador
PE0 Alarme baixo Diferença de temperatura interna ? A temperatura interna é muito baixa ! Feche as portas do FAS4
! Verifique o soprador de ar quente e o sensor
PE0 Alarme baixo Diferença de temperatura Tanque de ? A temperatura do detergente é muito baixa ! Verifique se o tanque de detergente está assentado
limpeza corretamente
! Verifique a placa de aquecimento e o sensor
PE0 Alarme baixo Diferença de temperatura Conexões ? A temperatura da conexão com o tanque externo é ! Verifique o acoplamento
muito baixa ! Verifique os parâmetros do regulador
! Verifique o assentamento do cartucho de
PE0 Nível máximo de enchimento Detergente ? O tanque de limpeza está muito cheio ! Retire detergente
PE0 Nível mínimo de enchimento Detergente ? Há muito pouco detergente no tanque ! Abasteça com detergente
PE0 Desligamento de emergência Temperatura excessiva ? A temperatura do tanque de aroma é muito alta. O ! Verifique o assentamento do tanque de aroma
Tanque de aroma dispositivo de aquecimento é desligado por razões ! Verifique o nível de enchimento
de segurança ! Verifique o dispositivo de aquecimento e o sensor
PE0 Desligamento de emergência Temperatura excessiva ? A temperatura da válvula de enchimento é muito ! Verifique o assentamento do cartucho de
Válvula de enchimento alta. O dispositivo de aquecimento é desligado por aquecimento e o sensor
razões de segurança ! Verifique os parâmetros do regulador
PE0 Desligamento de emergência Temperatura excessiva ? A temperatura interna é muito alta. O dispositivo de ! Verifique o soprador de ar quente e o sensor
interna aquecimento é desligado por razões de segurança ! Verifique os parâmetros do regulador
PE0 Desligamento de emergência Temperatura excessiva ? A temperatura do tanque de limpeza é muito alta. O ! Verifique o assentamento do tanque de limpeza
Tanque de limpeza dispositivo de aquecimento é desligado por razões ! Verifique o nível de enchimento
de segurança ! Verifique o dispositivo de aquecimento e o sensor
PE0 Desligamento de emergência Temperatura excessiva ? A temperatura da conexão com o tanque externo é ! Verifique o assentamento do cartucho de
Conexões muito alta. O dispositivo de aquecimento é desligado aquecimento e o sensor
por razões de segurança ! Verifique os parâmetros do regulador
PE0 Temperatura do aroma ? Erro do sensor ou quebra de fio ! Verifique se o sensor apresenta defeitos ou uma
PT100 está defeituoso ou não existe quebra de linha e substitua-o se necessário
Versão:02 123/133
PE0 Temperatura da válvula de enchimento ? Erro do sensor ou quebra de fio ! Verifique se o sensor apresenta defeitos ou uma
PE0 Temperatura do dispositivo de aquecimento do ? Erro do sensor ou quebra de fio ! Verifique se o sensor apresenta defeitos ou uma
tanque de aroma quebra de linha e substitua-o se necessário
PT100 está defeituoso ou não existe
PE0 Temperatura do dispositivo de aquecimento do ? Erro do sensor ou quebra de fio ! Verifique se o sensor apresenta defeitos ou uma
tanque de limpeza quebra de linha e substitua-o se necessário
PE0 Temperatura interna ? Erro do sensor ou quebra de fio ! Verifique se o sensor apresenta defeitos ou uma
PE0 Temperatura do detergente ? Erro do sensor ou quebra de fio ! Verifique se o sensor apresenta defeitos ou uma
PE0 Temperatura das conexões ? Erro do sensor ou quebra de fio ! Verifique se o sensor apresenta defeitos ou uma
PE0 Temperatura do dispositivo de aquecimento da placa ? Erro do sensor ou quebra de fio ! Verifique se o sensor apresenta defeitos ou uma
de montagem quebra de linha e substitua-o se necessário
PE1 230V CA Erro Fusível de aquecimento ? Um fusível para o fornecimento de 230 V CA ! Verifique o sistema quanto a danos
PE1 Erro Válvula de sucção ? A válvula de sucção não muda corretamente ! Verifique a pressão do ar
elétrico
PE1 Erro Medidor de caudal ? O medidor de caudal emite um erro ou a ! Verifique o medidor de caudal
comunicação é perturbada ! Verifique a comunicação.
Se existentes, os LEDs no medidor de caudal e no
cartão Modbus (KS6041) devem piscar rapidamente.
Se necessário, substitua o KS6041.
PE1 Erro Servo acionamento ? O motor da bomba emite um erro ! Verifique a fiação
! Verifique a bomba
PE1 Erro Enrolamento ? O enrolamento não muda corretamente ! Verifique a pressão do ar
elétrico
Versão:02 124/133
PE1 Erro Válvula de retenção ? A válvula de retenção não muda corretamente ! Verifique a pressão do ar
elétrico
PE1 Erro Válvula de segurança ? A válvula de segurança não muda corretamente ! Verifique a pressão do ar
elétrico
PE1 Erro Válvula de comutação ? A válvula de comutação não muda corretamente ! Verifique a pressão do ar
elétrico
PE1 Alarme alto Desvio de densidade ? A densidade do meio é maior do que a estabelecida ! Verifique os valores-limite
nos limites do alarme ! Verifique as válvulas
! Verifique os filtros
PE1 Alarme alto Diferença na taxa de fluxo do aroma ? A taxa de fluxo é muito alta ! Verifique os parâmetros do controlador
! Verifique as tubagens, válvulas e filtros
PE1 Alarme alto Rotação da bomba ? A rotação da bomba é muito alta ! Verifique a pressão do sistema
! Verificar as tubagens, válvulas e filtros quanto a
vazamentos ou entupimento
! A bomba pode estar desgastada e precisa ser
substituída
! Verifique o bico
PE1 Alarme alto Pressão do sistema ? A pressão do sistema é muito alta ! Verifique os tubos quanto a dobras ou entupimentos
! Verifique o bico e limpe-o, se necessário
! Verifique os dispositivos de aquecimento
externos/Temperaturas
! Verifique as válvulas e limpe-as, se necessário
PE1 Alarme alto Diferença de temperatura Placa de ? A temperatura da placa de montagem é muito alta ! Verifique o dispositivo de aquecimento e o sensor
montagem ! Verifique os parâmetros do regulador
Versão:02 125/133
PE1 Alarme baixo Desvio de densidade ? A densidade do meio é mais baixa do que a ! Verifique as tubagens quanto a bolhas de ar e
estabelecida nos limites do alarme estanqueidade
! Verifique as válvulas
! Verifique os valores-limite
PE1 Alarme baixo Diferença na taxa de fluxo do aroma ? A taxa de fluxo é muito baixa ! Verifique os filtros e limpe-os, se necessário
! Verifique as tubagens e o bico e limpe-os ou remova
as bolhas de ar, se necessário
! Verificar a bomba quanto a desgaste
PE1 Alarme baixo Rotação da bomba ? A rotação da bomba é muito baixa ! Verifique o valor-limite do alarme
PE1 Alarme baixo Pressão do sistema ? A pressão do sistema é muito baixa ! Verifique o valor-limite do alarme
PE1 Alarme baixo Diferença de temperatura Placa de ? A temperatura da placa de montagem é muito baixa ! Verifique o dispositivo de aquecimento e o sensor
! Feche as portas do FAS4
PE1 Desligamento de emergência Temperatura excessiva ? A temperatura da placa de montagem é muito alta. O ! Verifique o dispositivo de aquecimento e o sensor
Placa de montagem dispositivo de aquecimento é desligado por razões ! Verifique os parâmetros do regulador
de segurança.
PE1 Temperatura da bomba ? Erro do sensor ou quebra de fio ! Verifique se o sensor apresenta defeitos ou uma
PE1 Temperatura excessiva do aquecimento da bomba ? O aquecimento da bomba ficou muito quente ! Verifique o assentamento do aquecimento da bomba
! Verifique o cartucho de aquecimento e o sensor
! Verifique os valores nominais de temperatura dos
dispositivos de aquecimento
PE1 Tensão excessiva Motor ? A tensão do motor da bomba é muito alta ! Verificar o fornecimento de energia do motor
PE1 Corrente excessiva Motor ? O motor da bomba consome muita corrente ! Verifique a pressão do sistema em uma operação
! Limpe os filtros
! Verifique as tubagens, válvulas e filtros e limpe-os,
se necessário
! Verifique o assentamento da cabeça da bomba
Versão:02 126/133
PE1 Aquecimento excessivo Motor ? O motor da bomba está muito quente ! Verifique a pressão do sistema em uma operação
! Limpe os filtros
se necessário
! Verifique os valores nominais da temperatura
PE1 A bomba está bloqueada >> Diagnóstico da bomba ? A bomba está bloqueada ! Abra o diagnóstico da bomba
! Verifique a cabeça da bomba e lave-a se necessário
! Verifique o motor da bomba
! Substitua a bomba
PE1 Alarme de oscilação Diferença na taxa de fluxo de ? A taxa de fluxo varia muito ! Verifique os bicos e os filtros e limpe-os, se
aroma necessário
! Verifique as configurações do regulador
! Verifique as tubagens
PE2 230V CA Erro Fusível de aquecimento ? Um fusível para o fornecimento de 230 V CA ! Verifique o sistema quanto a danos
PE2 Erro Válvula de sucção ? A válvula de sucção não muda corretamente ! Verifique a pressão do ar
elétrico
PE2 Erro Medidor de caudal ? O medidor de caudal emite um erro ou a ! Verifique o medidor de caudal
comunicação é perturbada ! Verifique a comunicação.
Se existentes, os LEDs no medidor de caudal e no
cartão Modbus (KS6041) devem piscar rapidamente.
Se necessário, substitua o KS6041.
PE2 Erro Servo acionamento ? O motor da bomba emite um erro ! Verifique a fiação
! Verifique a bomba
PE2 Erro Enrolamento ? O enrolamento não muda corretamente ! Verifique a pressão do ar
elétrico
PE2 Erro Válvula de retenção ? A válvula de retenção não muda corretamente ! Verifique a pressão do ar
elétrico
Versão:02 127/133
PE2 Alarme alto Desvio de densidade ? A densidade do meio é maior do que a estabelecida ! Verifique os valores-limite
nos limites do alarme ! Verifique as válvulas
PE2 Alarme alto Diferença na taxa de fluxo do aroma ? A taxa de fluxo é muito alta ! Verifique os parâmetros do controlador
! Verifique as tubagens, válvulas e filtros
PE2 Alarme alto Rotação da bomba ? A rotação da bomba é muito alta ! Verifique a pressão do sistema
! Verificar as tubagens, válvulas e filtros quanto a
vazamentos ou entupimento
! A bomba pode estar desgastada e precisa ser
substituída
! Verifique o bico
PE2 Alarme alto Pressão do sistema ? A pressão do sistema é muito alta ! Verifique os tubos quanto a dobras ou entupimentos
! Verifique o bico e limpe-o, se necessário
! Verifique os dispositivos de aquecimento
externos/Temperaturas
! Verifique as válvulas e limpe-as, se necessário
PE2 Alarme alto Diferença de temperatura Placa de ? A temperatura da placa de montagem é muito alta ! Verifique o dispositivo de aquecimento e o sensor
PE2 Alarme baixo Desvio de densidade ? A densidade do meio é mais baixa do que a ! Verifique as tubagens quanto a bolhas de ar e
estabelecida nos limites do alarme estanqueidade
! Verifique as válvulas
! Verifique os valores-limite
PE2 Alarme baixo Diferença na taxa de fluxo do aroma ? A taxa de fluxo é muito baixa ! Verifique os filtros e limpe-os, se necessário
! Verifique as tubagens e o bico e limpe-os ou remova
as bolhas de ar, se necessário
! Verificar a bomba quanto a desgaste
PE2 Alarme baixo Rotação da bomba ? A rotação da bomba é muito baixa ! Verifique o valor-limite do alarme
PE2 Alarme baixo Pressão do sistema ? A pressão do sistema é muito baixa ! Verifique o valor-limite do alarme
PE2 Alarme baixo Diferença de temperatura Placa de ? A temperatura da placa de montagem é muito baixa ! Verifique o dispositivo de aquecimento e o sensor
! Feche as portas do FAS4
Versão:02 128/133
PE2 Desligamento de emergência Temperatura excessiva ? A temperatura da placa de montagem é muito alta. O ! Verifique o dispositivo de aquecimento e o sensor
Placa de montagem dispositivo de aquecimento é desligado por razões ! Verifique os parâmetros do regulador
de segurança.
PE2 Temperatura da placa de montagem ? Erro do sensor ou quebra de fio ! Verifique se o sensor apresenta defeitos ou uma
PE2 Tensão excessiva Motor ? A tensão do motor da bomba é muito alta ! Verificar o fornecimento de energia do motor
PE1 Corrente excessiva Motor ? O motor da bomba consome muita corrente ! Verifique a pressão do sistema em uma operação
! Limpe os filtros
se necessário
! Verifique o assentamento da cabeça da bomba
PE2 Aquecimento excessivo Motor ? O motor da bomba está muito quente ! Verifique a pressão do sistema em uma operação
! Limpe os filtros
se necessário
! Verifique os valores nominais da temperatura
PE2 A bomba está bloqueada >> Diagnóstico da bomba ? A bomba está bloqueada ! Abra o diagnóstico da bomba
! Verifique a cabeça da bomba e lave-a se necessário
! Verifique o motor da bomba
! Substitua a bomba
O intervalo de manutenção do sistema de mangueiras ? O intervalo de manutenção para as mangueiras ! Substitua as mangueiras e confirme a manutenção
expirou expirou na janela de manutenção
XC1 24 V CA Erro Fusível de aquecimento ? O fusível para o fornecimento de 24 V CA disparou ! Verifique os circuitos externos de aquecimento
quanto a danos ou quebra de fio
XC1 Saída alta de alarme da máquina externa ? O sinal de velocidade da máquina de produção é ! Verifique a conexão com a máquina de produção e
maior do que o possível pela calibração realize uma recalibração
XC1 Alarme alto Diferença de temperatura do bico ? A temperatura do bico é muito alta ! Verifique se o assentamento do bico está correto
XC1 Alarme alto Diferença de temperatura de Externo X ? A temperatura do aquecimento dos trilhos é muito ! Verifique o assentamento do cartucho de
alta aquecimento e o sensor
Versão:02 129/133
XC1 Alarme alto Diferença de temperatura de Externo Y ? A temperatura do aquecimento dos trilhos é muito ! Verifique o assentamento do cartucho de
XC1 Alarme alto Diferença de temperatura do conjunto de ? A temperatura do conjunto de mangueiras é muito ! Verifique o conjunto de mangueiras quanto a danos
mangueiras alta ! Verifique as configurações do regulador
XC1 Saída baixa de alarme da máquina externa ? O sinal de velocidade da máquina de produção é ! Verifique a conexão com a máquina de produção e
muito baixo realize uma recalibração
XC1 Alarme baixo Diferença de temperatura do bico ? A temperatura do bico é muito alta ! Verifique se o assentamento do bico está correto
XC1 Alarme baixo Diferença de temperatura de Externo X ? A temperatura do aquecimento dos trilhos é muito ! Verifique o assentamento do cartucho de
baixa aquecimento e o sensor
XC1 Alarme baixo Diferença de temperatura de Externo Y ? A temperatura do aquecimento dos trilhos é muito ! Verifique o assentamento do cartucho de
XC1 Alarme baixo Diferença de temperatura do conjunto ? A temperatura do conjunto de mangueiras é muito ! Verifique o conjunto de mangueiras quanto a danos
de mangueiras baixa ! Verifique as configurações do regulador
XC1 Desligamento de emergência Temperatura excessiva ? A temperatura do bico é consideravelmente alta ! Verifique se o assentamento do bico está correto
Bico demais. ! Verifique o cartucho de aquecimento e o sensor
O dispositivo de aquecimento é desligado por razões ! Verifique as configurações do regulador
de segurança
XC1 Desligamento de emergência Temperatura excessiva ? A temperatura do aquecimento dos trilhos é ! Verifique o cartucho de aquecimento e o sensor
de Externo X consideravelmente alta demais. ! Verifique as configurações do regulador
O dispositivo de aquecimento é desligado por razões
de segurança
de Externo Y consideravelmente alta demais. ! Verifique as configurações do regulador
de segurança
XC1 Desligamento de emergência Temperatura excessiva ? A temperatura do conjunto de mangueiras é ! Verifique o conjunto de mangueiras quanto a danos
do conjunto de mangueiras consideravelmente alta demais. ! Verifique as configurações do regulador
de segurança
Versão:02 130/133
XC1 O sinal do sensor de velocidade está com defeito ? O sinal de velocidade da máquina de produção está ! Verifique a fiação do codificador incremental da
com defeito máquina de produção para o FAS4
! Realize a calibração novamente.
XC1 Temperatura do bico ? Erro do sensor ou quebra de fio ! Verifique se o sensor apresenta defeitos ou uma
XC1 Temperatura de Externo X ? Erro do sensor ou quebra de fio ! Verifique se o sensor apresenta defeitos ou uma
XC1 Temperatura de Externo Y ? Erro do sensor ou quebra de fio ! Verifique se o sensor apresenta defeitos ou uma
XC1 Temperatura do conjunto de mangueiras ? Erro do sensor ou quebra de fio ! Verifique se o sensor apresenta defeitos ou uma
XC2 24 V CA Erro Fusível de aquecimento ? O fusível para o fornecimento de 24 V CA disparou ! Verifique os circuitos externos de aquecimento
quanto a danos ou quebra de fio
XC2 Alarme alto Diferença de temperatura do bico ? A temperatura do bico é muito alta ! Verifique se o assentamento do bico está correto
XC2 Alarme alto Diferença de temperatura de Externo X ? A temperatura do aquecimento dos trilhos é muito ! Verifique o assentamento do cartucho de
XC2 Alarme alto Diferença de temperatura de Externo Y ? A temperatura do aquecimento dos trilhos é muito ! Verifique o assentamento do cartucho de
XC2 Alarme alto Diferença de temperatura do conjunto de ? A temperatura do conjunto de mangueiras é muito ! Verifique o conjunto de mangueiras quanto a danos
mangueiras alta ! Verifique as configurações do regulador
XC2 Alarme baixo Diferença de temperatura de Externo X ? A temperatura do aquecimento dos trilhos é muito ! Verifique o assentamento do cartucho de
XC2 Alarme baixo Diferença de temperatura de Externo Y ? A temperatura do aquecimento dos trilhos é muito ! Verifique o assentamento do cartucho de
XC2 Alarme baixo Diferença de temperatura do conjunto ? A temperatura do conjunto de mangueiras é muito ! Verifique o conjunto de mangueiras quanto a danos
de mangueiras baixa ! Verifique as configurações do regulador
Versão:02 131/133
XC2 Desligamento de emergência Temperatura excessiva ? A temperatura do bico é consideravelmente alta ! Verifique se o assentamento do bico está correto
Bico demais. ! Verifique o cartucho de aquecimento e o sensor
O dispositivo de aquecimento é desligado por razões ! Verifique as configurações do regulador
de segurança
de Externo X consideravelmente alta demais. ! Verifique as configurações do regulador
de segurança
de Externo Y consideravelmente alta demais. ! Verifique as configurações do regulador
de segurança
XC2 Desligamento de emergência Temperatura excessiva ? A temperatura do conjunto de mangueiras é ! Verifique o conjunto de mangueiras quanto a danos
do conjunto de mangueiras consideravelmente alta demais. ! Verifique as configurações do regulador
de segurança
XC2 Temperatura do bico ? Erro do sensor ou quebra de fio ! Verifique se o sensor apresenta defeitos ou uma
XC2 Temperatura de Externo X ? Erro do sensor ou quebra de fio ! Verifique se o sensor apresenta defeitos ou uma
XC2 Temperatura de Externo Y ? Erro do sensor ou quebra de fio ! Verifique se o sensor apresenta defeitos ou uma
XC2 Temperatura do conjunto de mangueiras ? Erro do sensor ou quebra de fio ! Verifique se o sensor apresenta defeitos ou uma
Versão:02 132/133
Observações
15Observações
Versão:02 133/133
Limpar o FAS4
9 Limpar o FAS4
 ver o manual de operação "FAS4 Reinigen" (Limpar o FAS4)!
Pasta do guia
Versão:07 67/105
Manutenção, inspeção, conservação
10 Manutenção, inspeção, conservação
O choque elétrico causado pelo contato com
partes condutoras de tensão pode levar a
ferimentos graves ou mesmo à morte.
O sistema ou partes do sistema devem ser completamente

desconectados do fornecimento de energia e protegidos contra
reconexão intencional e não intencional!
A área em que os trabalhos de manutenção são realizados

deve ser protegida!
Nunca ignorar os dispositivos de segurança nem os
tornar inoperantes!
Verifique o funcionamento dos dispositivos de segurança antes

de cada início de trabalho!
Existe perigo ao operar o sistema sem dispositivos de

proteção:
• para a vida e a integridade física do usuário ou de

terceiros
• de danos ao sistema ou aos componentes do

sistema ou a outros bens materiais.
Pasta do guia
Versão:07 69/105
10.1 Manutenção, inspeção, conservação

A inspeção, manutenção, reparo do sistema são parte essencial da
conservação, o que garante um funcionamento adequado.
Inspeção
A inspeção é uma "determinação" e "avaliação" do estado real da máquina.
Manutenção
Medidas que levam à "manutenção" do estado nominal.
Reparo
Medidas que levam ao "restabelecimento" do estado nominal.
Os trabalhos de soldagem na máquina só podem ser

realizados se o cabo de aterramento estiver preso ao mesmo
componente. A corrente de solda não deve ser passada
através de vedações de cabos ou outras conexões mecânicas.
ALÉM DISSO: Queima de cabos e vedações ou soldagem de

componentes mecânicos.
Pasta do guia
70/105 Versão:07
10.2 Intervalos de inspeção e manutenção
Pré-requisitos gerais
Deve ser criado um livro da máquina para cada sistema. Todos os trabalhos devem
ser inseridos nele com a data, horas de funcionamento, etc.
Os elementos de comutação elétrica devem permanecer fechados à prova de

poeira e salpicos.
As tubulações ou mangueiras danificadas devem ser substituídas imediatamente.

Somente podem ser instalados tubos de precisão sem costura e mangueiras
originais.
Critérios de inspeção para mangueiras e linhas de mangueiras
Para linhas de mangueiras, usar somente mangueiras aprovadas para a pressão

correspondente.
Verificar as mangueiras quanto a dobras!
Valores de referência para tempo de armazenamento e duração de uso para linhas

de mangueiras.
(Os valores de referência são válidos a partir da data de fabricação).
Pasta do guia
Versão:07 71/105
Tempo de armazenamento mangueiras/linhas de mangueiras
Linha de mangueira: 2 anos
O período de uso das linhas de mangueiras não deve exceder 6 anos, incluindo um
período de armazenamento não superior a 2 anos.
A capacidade funcional deve ser avaliada em intervalos especificados. As linhas de

mangueiras serão substituídas se os seguintes critérios forem determinados
durante a inspeção:
• Danos na camada externa até a inserção (p.ex., marcas de arranhões, cortes ou

fissuras)
• Fragilização da camada externa (formação de fissuras do material da mangueira)
• Deformações que não correspondem à forma natural da mangueira ou da linha de

mangueira, tanto na condição despressurizada e pressurizada ou quando
dobradas, p.ex., separação de camadas, formação de bolhas.
• Vazamento ou deformações do encaixe da mangueira (função de vedação

prejudicada); pequenos danos superficiais não são motivo para substituição.
• Mangueira vagando para fora do encaixe
• Corrosão que reduz a função e força do encaixe
• Diretriz de instalação não observada
• Tempos de armazenamento e duração de uso excedidos (ver acima)
Pasta do guia
72/105 Versão:07
Tempo de armazenamento Elastômeros Elementos de vedação
p.ex., anéis de vedação e raspadores
Tempo de armazenamento: aprox.5 anos
As seguintes indicações de armazenamento se aplicam aos elementos de vedação

de elastômeros:
• Temperatura de armazenamento entre + 5 °C e + 25 °C
• As peças devem ser armazenadas em um local seco (umidade relativa do ar não

superior a 65%).
• Sem exposição à luz do dia ou iluminação fluorescente direta.
• Os elastômeros devem ser armazenados em suas embalagens para protegê-los

do oxigênio.
• Sem deformação de compressão quando em armazenamento.
• Se não houver informações disponíveis sobre tempo de armazenamento e

duração de uso, os valores de referência, conforme descrito acima, são
recomendados.
Pasta do guia
Versão:07 73/105
10.3 Medição volumétrica

De tempos em tempos, os resultados da medição do medidor de caudal FAS4
devem ser verificados. O aroma é pulverizado através do bico por um período de
tempo definido com a ajuda da função de medição volumétrica. O peso do aroma é
então comparado ao peso determinado pelo medidor de caudal, indicando se o
medidor de caudal precisa ser calibrado ou se os valores estão corretos.
Para a medição volumétrica do FAS4, siga as etapas abaixo:
1. Conecte o FAS4 a uma máquina de produção e ligue os dois dispositivos.
2. Inicie uma nova produção com os parâmetros de produção desejados

através da janela "Übersicht" (Visão Geral). Observe a posição do
interruptor de chave, dependendo do aroma usado.
3. O FAS4 passa pela preparação da produção e aguarda assim que estiver

pronto para a produção.
4. O botão para a medição volumétrica está agora ativo na janela de visão

geral:
Pasta do guia
74/105 Versão:07
5. Depois de pressionar, a janela seguinte se abre:
 Bomba selecionada
 Período restante
 Quantidade medida
 Valor nominal e real
 Captura de tela
6. Na parte superior da janela, você pode selecionar qual página do processo

deve ser sujeita a medição volumétrica. Para sistemas de uma tubagem
(CLASSIC), apenas o PE1 está sempre disponível. Com os sistemas TWIN,
você pode escolher entre PE1 e PE2.
7. Antes de prosseguir, você deve agora montar o bico para que ele pulverize
em um recipiente adequado. Caso contrário, o aroma corre para a máquina
de produção.
Opcional:
Você também pode desconectar a tubulação do aroma diretamente do ponto de

conexão do conjunto de mangueiras no FAS4 e segurá-la em um recipiente.
8. Pressione agora o botão "Düse befüllen" (Encher o bico). Desse modo, a

bomba será iniciada por alguns segundos para remover bolhas de ar do bico
e da tubagem. Após essa etapa você deve trocar ou esvaziar o recipiente,
caso contrário, o resultado da medição será adulterado. Se você quiser
pesar manualmente, é recomendável ajustar o ponto zero da balança para o
recipiente.
9. Inicie agora sua máquina de produção e coloque-a na velocidade de

produção. Não importa se você trabalha com ou sem tabaco.
Pasta do guia
Versão:07 75/105
10. Uma vez que a máquina de produção esteja em ordem, comece a próxima
etapa pressionando o botão "Freigabe" (Liberação). O FAS4 irá agora
bombear o aroma no circuito para que a regulação tenha tempo para se
ajustar.
11. Após decorrido o tempo exibido, pressione o botão "Start" (Iniciar). O aroma
é agora pulverizado por 60 segundos.
12. Após os 60 segundos decorridos, os resultados da medição interna são

exibidos nos campos correspondentes. Compare o resultado com o peso
exibido em sua balança. Se você notar uma diferença de mais de 3%, o
medidor de caudal deve ser recalibrado.
As instruções para o efeito podem ser encontradas no capítulo seguinte. Para outra
medição, prepare um novo recipiente e pressione simplesmente o botão "Start"
(Iniciar). Para fechar a janela, pressione "Exit" (Sair).
Se ocorrer um alarme durante a medição volumétrica, a medição é parada

automaticamente e a janela da medição volumétrica é fechada. Nesse caso, elimine
primeiro a causa do alarme antes de iniciar uma nova medição.
Pasta do guia
76/105 Versão:07
10.4 Calibração do medidor de caudal

Uma calibração do medidor de caudal só deve ser feita se você notar um desvio
excessivo (>3%) na quantidade de aplicação ou ao efetuar uma medição
volumétrica.
IMPORTANTE Quando você efetua uma calibração do medidor de caudal, a

calibração antiga é apagada. Por segurança, o medidor de
caudal deve, portanto, ser verificado com a função de medição
volumétrica após cada calibração.
A calibração do medidor de caudal pode ser acessada a partir do menu principal.
No entanto, o botão só é ativado se o FAS4 estiver no circuito de aroma. Portanto,

enquanto usuário a nível de operador, inicie sua produção como sempre e espere
até que o FAS4 esteja pronto para a produção. O botão é então ativado.
Enquanto usuário do nível de serviço, você pode mudar diretamente para a etapa
de circuito de aroma no modo "Semi" e ligar a máquina.
Depois de pressionar o botão, abre-se uma pequena janela. Lá você encontrará a

entrada "Flavorkreislauf" (Circuito de aroma) e uma contagem regressiva que conta
de 120 segundos a 0.
Durante esse tempo, o FAS4 continua a bombear o aroma no circuito para eliminar
quaisquer bolhas de ar nas tubagens. Depois de decorrido o tempo, a bomba é
parada por 60 segundos para que o aroma nas tubagens descanse e não
comprometa o resultado da calibração.
Depois de decorridos 60 segundos, você pode agora calibrar o medidor de caudal

pressionando o botão "Kalibrieren" (Calibrar).
No caso de máquinas de duas tubagens (TWIN), você pode selecionar qual lado do
processo deve ser calibrado. No caso de máquinas de uma tubagem, o medidor de
caudal PE1 é sempre calibrado.
A calibração geralmente leva de 20 a 30 segundos. Durante esse tempo, o botão

"Kalibrieren" (Calibrar) está cinzento.
Pasta do guia
Versão:07 77/105
Assim que o texto ficar novamente preto, o processo está concluído e a janela pode
ser fechada.
Para verificar o resultado, use agora a função de medição volumétrica.
Em determinadas circunstâncias, poderá ser necessário repetir o processo de

calibração.
Se o botão de calibração não estiver liberado, apesar de o sistema se encontrar no

circuito de aroma, reinicie o FAS4 e repita o procedimento.
Isto assegura que nenhum parâmetro antigo na memória compromete o resultado.
Pasta do guia
78/105 Versão:07
10.5 Calibração da tela sensível ao toque

Um símbolo de monitor é exibido na parte inferior esquerda do menu de
manutenção, a partir do nível de serviço. Com a ajuda desse símbolo, a calibração
para a tela sensível ao toque pode ser aberta. Após acionamento, abre-se um
programa no qual você tem que tocar três alvos diferentes no monitor, um após o
outro. Em seguida, você pode verificar se o ponteiro do mouse segue seu dedo e
sair do programa pressionando a tecla da seta verde.
Você só deve calibrar se, ao operar o sistema, você perceber que os cliques não
estão sendo feitos onde você clica.
Caso você não consiga mais alcançar o símbolo do monitor através da tela sensível
ao toque, conecte um mouse USB ao conector frontal do FAS4 e depois clique no
símbolo do monitor. Em qualquer caso, porém, realize a calibração novamente com
seu dedo ou com a caneta fornecida.
IMPORTANTE Se você estiver usando uma tela adicional, você deve primeiro
executar a tela principal do processo. Depois disso, a calibração
 pode ser realizada na tela adicional. A calibração na tela
auxiliar começa automaticamente após pressionar o botão do
monitor.
Pasta do guia
Versão:07 79/105
10.6 Calibração do sistema de aviso de gás

O sistema de aviso de gás do FAS4 é composto por dois componentes. O teor de
gás no sistema é medido através do sensor CC28 no compartimento de processo
do FAS4. A avaliação do resultado da medição é realizada pelo sistema eletrônico
de avaliação GMA41 no compartimento de controle (ET). Um sinal de corrente de 4-
20mA é usado para transmitir o valor de medição do sensor para a eletrônica.
Depois de um certo tempo, é possível que o ponto zero do dispositivo de aviso de

gás caia para baixo e um sinal abaixo de 4mA seja enviado para o sistema
eletrônico de avaliação. Este muda então para o status de falha e mostra "_ _ _" no
visor. Se este caso ocorrer com seu sistema de medição, por favor, execute os
seguintes passos:
Para determinar se o erro foi realmente disparado por um deslocamento de zero, no

sistema eletrônico de avaliação (GMA41) pressione o botão " " por aprox. 2
segundos. Logo em seguida, o visor mostra o nível atual recebido pelo sensor. Se
este estiver abaixo de 4mA, uma calibração do ponto zero deve ser executada.
Antes de calibrar o sensor, é importante que o ar no espaço do tanque do FAS4

esteja livre de gases de todos os tipos. Por conseguinte, abra ambas as portas e
remova os tanques internos. Agora deixe o FAS4 por alguns minutos até que o
sistema seja "ventilado".
Pasta do guia
80/105 Versão:07
Remova cuidadosamente o pequeno parafuso no lado

esquerdo do sensor de gás. Tome cuidado para não
perder o pequeno anel de vedação entre a estrutura e o
parafuso.
Depois de o parafuso ficar solto, use um objeto fino para

pressionar o botão dentro da caixa e mantenha-o
pressionado por cerca de três segundos.
Assim que o LED laranja começar a piscar, o processo

de calibração é iniciado e você pode soltar o botão.
O processo de calibração está concluído assim que o

LED verde acender novamente e um "0" for exibido no
visor do sistema eletrônico de avaliação.
Para terminar, deve pressionar novamente o botão " " no sistema eletrônico de
avaliação, por segurança. Se "4mA" for agora exibido, a calibração foi bem
sucedida.
Pasta do guia
Versão:07 81/105
10.7 Ajuste e afrouxamento do acoplamento do tanque

A placa de acoplamento no tanque externo é ajustada em fábrica e normalmente
não precisa ser reajustada. No entanto, o acoplamento pode encravar durante o
transporte ou se o piso do pavilhão for irregular.
Nesse caso, existem vários parafusos que você pode usar para ajustar a folga do
acoplamento:
1. A primeira opção é ajustar o

acoplamento através do anel de
centralização. Você pode acessar a ele
desapertando a abertura de manutenção
acima do acoplamento no tanque
externo. Você pode ajustar a posição
horizontal da placa de acoplamento com a ajuda dos três parafusos, que são
montados em um ângulo de 120° entre si. A placa deve
ser ajustada para que as duas aberturas (azul) fiquem
precisamente acima da guia do acoplamento FAS4. Além
disso, a placa deve ter uma distância de aprox. 10 mm da
parede traseira do tanque e correr paralelamente a ela.
2. A segunda opção de ajuste pode ser

encontrada diretamente na parte inferior da
placa. Nas pequenas aberturas (vermelho)
há parafusos com os quais a placa de
acoplamento pode ser alinhada
verticalmente. Para ajustar, desaperte
primeiro os parafusos e depois volte a
enrosque-os lentamente até que a placa não possa mais ser movida para cima ou
para baixo. No tanto, deve ser possível movê-la facilmente paralelamente ao fundo
do tanque. É importante que a placa flutue livremente e não encrave.
Pasta do guia
82/105 Versão:07
Para evitar desgaste e problemas, os pinos guia no FAS4 e as aberturas

correspondentes na placa de acoplamento (azul) devem ser lubrificados de tempos
em tempos.
No caso da o acoplamento estar preso e não baixar automaticamente, você

encontrará uma haste metálica no tanque
externo. A haste tem uma rosca em sua
extremidade e pode ser empurrada através da
abertura mostrada até o acoplamento. Quando
chegar ao acoplamento, gire a haste no sentido
horário para conectá-la ao acoplamento. Agora
você pode tentar soltar o acoplamento novamente, movendo-o ligeiramente para
frente e para trás. Observe que o botão para desacoplamento é selecionado no
FAS4.
Pasta do guia
Versão:07 83/105
10.8 Lista de manutenção detalhada

1. Manutenção de acordo
com Trabalhos de inspeção/
Componente Medida Observação
Todos os demais manutenção
M T W M H
Geral X Controle visual e sonoro Procurar e eliminar a causa
Verificação de acordo com a

Peças elétricas do sistema regulamentação nacional Realizar verificação
pertinente
Verificar os cabos elétricos Substituir a tubagem

Conexões elétricas 1 X quanto a danos e assentamento danificada ou reapertar os
fixo parafusos
Verificação e calibração (ver
Mandar fazer a calibração por
capítulo 10 Descrição dos
Dispositivo de aviso de gás 6 X parte de um organismo
produtos Manual de instruções
certificado
GMA 41)
Ajustes de portas, dobradiças,
Estrutura 3 X rodas, dispositivos de Ajustar
aquecimento
Verificar vazamentos, controlar a Se necessário, reapertar as

Espaço para recipientes X estanqueidade dos dispositivos e conexões roscadas ou
tubagens substituir as mangueiras
Pasta do guia
Versão:07 85/105
M T W M H
Limpeza em caso de
Recipientes 1 X Inspeção visual
contaminação
Substituir em caso de
Vedações de recipientes 1 X Inspeção visual
desgaste
Verificação dos filtros quanto a Limpeza dos elementos

Filtros 1 X
contaminação filtrantes
Verificar vazamentos, controlar a Se necessário, reapertar as

Espaço da bomba 1 X estanqueidade dos dispositivos e conexões roscadas ou
tubagens substituir as mangueiras
Em caso de defeito ou
Verificar se há desenvolvimento
desgaste (aumento de
Bomba 1 X de ruído e desgaste a cada 1000
rotações no mesmo volume de
horas de operação
entrega) substituir a bomba
Substituir os anéis de vedação
Verificar anéis de vedação
Válvulas de aroma 6 X e lubrificar o interior do corpo
internos quanto a defeito/danos
da válvula
Verificar anéis de vedação e Substituir anéis de vedação e

Acoplamento de fluidos
6 X molas de pressão internos quanto molas de pressão em caso de
Estação
a defeito/danos danos
Pasta do guia
Versão:07 86/105
M T W M H
Verificar anéis de vedação e Substituir anéis de vedação e
Acoplamento de fluidos
3 X molas de pressão internos quanto molas de pressão em caso de
Tanque
a defeito/danos danos
Verificar a mangueira de
Mangueira de aquecimento X aquecimento quanto a danos Substituir em caso de defeitos
externos
Verificar quanto a vazamento, Se necessário, reapertar as

Verificação da estanqueidade
1 X controlar conexões de parafuso e conexões roscadas ou
do sistema de tubagens
conexões de mangueira substituir as mangueiras
Todas as mangueiras de aroma Todas as mangueiras de
que se encontram dentro e fora aroma que se encontram
Substituição sistema de
do FAS4 devem ser substituídas dentro e fora do FAS4 devem
tubagens
por novas mangueiras após dois ser substituídas por novas
anos mangueiras após dois anos
Conexões para a máquina de Verificar quanto a assentamento Reajustar ou substituir, se

X
cigarros fixo e danos necessário
Verificar as conexões das

mangueiras, limpar o bico,
Substituir anéis de vedação,
verificar o desgaste dos anéis de
Bico X substituir o bico se este estiver
vedação, verificar o assentamento
defeituoso ou desgastado
fixo das peças individuais do bico
entre si
Inspeção visual de contaminação
Limpeza da área abaixo do
Rodas eletricamente (poeira, sujeira, tinta, ácidos,
1 X FAS4 e remoção da sujeira
condutoras álcalis) sob as rodas, o que pode
abaixo das rodas.
afetar a condutividade.
Pasta do guia
Versão:07 87/105
10.9 Materiais operacionais recomendados
Número de artigo Designação Local de utilização
20053591 Cola Loctite 638, alta Ligação de aperto

resistência
20071773 Hevolit SLMF2 Válvulas
Pasta do guia
Versão:07 89/105
Peças de reposição
11 Peças de reposição
Pasta do guia
Versão:07 91/105
FAS 4 Spare parts catalogue FAS 4-334, Souza Cruz Uberlandia, Brasil
Price
No. DWG Part-No. Item designation Description Drawing-No. Dimensions Price UoM Reference
Unit
1 1 Stiffener wall Station / unit
2 100 N0002215 +ET-6A0/-6A1 Calibrated Gas warning system CC28, GMA41 1 Piece B
3 300 F0000047 +PE1-6Y7 Solenoid valve 1 Piece B
4 301 20114563 +PE1-6Y7 Outlet cable 1 Piece B
5 400 F0000047 +PE2-6Y7 Solenoid valve 1 Piece B
7 1200 20067585 +PE1-6Y3 5/2 Way valve 1 Piece B
19 500 N0003702 +FT-2Y2 Solenoid valve 1 Piece B
20 501 N0000058 +FT-2Y2 Illuminating seal 1 Piece B
21 600 N0003098 +PE0-9R1 Internal PT100 PWF 1 1 Piece B
22 700 N0001770 Filter regulation valve 1/8" 1 Piece B
23 800 20027584 +PE0-5B6 Air pressure sensor 1 Piece B
24 2 Mounting plate PE1 Station / unit
25 100 20121253 +PE1-6Y3/-6Y4/-6Y5 Valveblock air pressure 4-6mm doublecontrol 4-6mm 1 Piece B
26 110 20079622 +PE1-6Y3 Valvebody incl. Initiator and 3/2 Way valve 369.01.20015 6mm 1 Piece A
27 111 20082776 O-ring Set 369.99.00002 1 Piece A
29 121 20082776 O-ring Set 369.99.00002 1 Piece A
31 131 20082776 O-ring Set 369.99.00002 1 Piece A
32 200 20121254 +PE1-2M1 Pump head 0,024 incl. motor 4-6mm connection 1 Piece B
33 201 20121255 Pump head 0,024 4-6mm connection 1 Piece A
34 202 20041464 +PE1-2M1 Motor HNP pump 0,24 1 Piece B
35 500 20113116 +PE1-10B5 Pressure converter 1 Piece B
36 600 20074524 +PE1-3A3 Mini Core Mass Flow Meter 1 Piece B
37 700 20121184 +PE0-2E1 Internal heating 1 Piece B
Page 1 from 9
Price
Unit
38 800 20039884 +PE1-1E1/-8R3 Heating mat, left 150-2010-10-031 375 x 485 mm 1 Piece B
39 900 N0003240 +PE1-8R1 Temperature sensor, PT100 6 x 45mm 1 Piece A
40 3 Mounting plate PE2 Station / unit
41 100 20121253 +PE1-6Y3/-6Y4/-6Y5 Valveblock air pressure 4-6mm doublecontrol 4-6mm 1 Piece B
43 111 20082776 O-ring Set 369.99.00002 1 Piece A
45 121 20082776 O-ring Set 369.99.00002 1 Piece A
47 131 20082776 O-ring Set 369.99.00002 1 Piece A
48 200 20121254 +PE2-2M1 Pump head 0,024 incl. motor 4-6mm connection 1 Piece B
49 201 20121255 Pump head 0,024 4-6mm connection 1 Piece A
50 202 20041464 +PE2-2M1 Motor HNP pump 0,24 1 Piece B
51 500 20113116 +PE2-10B5 Pressure converter 1 Piece B
52 600 20074524 +PE2-3A3 Mini Core Mass Flow Meter 1 Piece B
53 700 20121184 +PE0-2E2 Internal heating 1 Piece B
54 800 20039883 +PE2-1E1/-7R3 Heating mat, right 150-2010-10-031 375 x 485 mm 1 Piece B
55 900 N0003240 +PE2-7R1 Temperature sensor, PT100 6 x 45mm 1 Piece A
56 4 Installation kit internal tanks Station / unit
57 100 20117764 +PE0-1E1 / 8R3 Heated plate system incl. PT100 Ø180mm 1 Piece B
58 101 20116064 +PE0-1E1 Hotplate Ø180mm 1 Piece B
59 102 20117180 +PE0-8R3 Temperature sensor, PT100 M6 x 20mm 1 Piece B
60 200 20117764 +PE0-1E5 / 8R7 Heated plate system incl. PT100 Ø180mm 1 Piece B
61 201 20116064 +PE0-1E5 Hotplate Ø180mm 1 Piece B
62 202 20117180 +PE0-8R7 Temperature sensor, PT100 M6 x 20mm 1 Piece B
63 5 Cleaning tank / Wastetank Station / unit
64 100 20083210 Tank 150-2011-02-001 1 Piece B
65 101 N0003054 Gasket NW 150 1 Piece B
66 110 20047452 Tank incl. Cover 1 Piece B
67 120 20062166 Cover for internal tanks 1 Piece B
68 200 N0003691 +PE0-14S2/-14S3 Solenoid level switch, cleaning N04-ER05ööxxYS GL=165mm 1 Piece B
69 300 N0003006 +PE0-8R1 Immersion sensor, PT100 1 Piece B
70 400 20041448 Filter 10µm cleaning tank, 6mm connection 10µm - 6mm 1 Piece B
71 6 Buffertank Station / unit
72 100 20083210 Tank 150-2011-02-001 1 Piece B
73 101 N0003054 Gasket NW 150 1 Piece B
74 110 20047452 Tank incl. Cover 1 Piece B
Page 2 from 9
Price
Unit
75 120 20062166 Cover for internal tanks 1 Piece B

76 200 N0003690 +PE0-13S2/-13S3/-13S6 Solenoid level switch, internal N04-ER05öööxYS GL=240mm 1 Piece B
77 300 N0003006 +PE0-8R5 Immersion sensor, PT100 1 Piece B
78 400 20041447 Filter 100µm buffer tank, 6mm connenction 100µm - 6mm 1 Piece B
79 500 20025390 O-seal 1 Piece B
80 600 20051050 +PE0-4M1 Motor-gear-unit 1 Piece B
81 700 20079635 Oldham-type coupling D1=4H8 / D2=8H8 1 Piece B
82 800 20087796 Bearing 1 Piece B
83 900 N0002933 Shaft seal 1 Piece B
84 1000 20028841 +PE0-7Y8 Filling valve air control 255.01.00008 1 Piece B
85 1100 N0003240 +PE0-9R5 Temperature sensor, PT100 6 x 45mm 1 Piece B
86 1200 N0003989 +PE0-3E1 Heating resistor 6,5 x 50mm 1 Piece B
87 7 Coupling unit Station / unit
88 100 N0003701 Guided cylinder 1 Piece B
89 200 Z0011402 Centring pin 1 Piece B
90 300 N0002491 Check valve with choke 1 Piece B
91 400 N0005215 +FT-1S7 Proximity switch 1 Piece B
92 500 N0005215 +FT-1S8 Proximity switch 1 Piece B
93 600 20052435 Self-sealing coupling 57-G12 DN 12 1 Piece B
94 601 F0000109 O-Ring self-sealing coupling 1 Piece A
95 602 F0000107 O-ring Self-sealing coupling intern 1 1 Piece A
96 603 20022300 O-ring Self-sealing coupling intern 2 1 Piece A
97 604 20052310 Snap ring 1 Piece A
98 605 20049969 Pressure Spring 1 Piece A
99 700 N0003482 +PE0-2E5 Heating resistor 6,5 x 60mm 1 Piece B
100 800 N0003240 +PE0-9R3 Temperature sensor, PT100 6 x 45mm 1 Piece B
101 900 N0002904 Bottom roller 31 F XPU/NI/100/34/3R L Laufrolle 1 Piece B
102 8 Tube area Station / unit
103 200 20005573 +ET-4A1 Battery pack USV C9900-U330 1 Piece B
104 300 20055932 +XC1-1E1 / -5R1 Heated hose, connection 8 pol. reduced, new design 3,5m 1 Piece B
105 400 20055932 +XC2-1E1 / -5R1 Heated hose, connection 8 pol. reduced, new design 3,5m 1 Piece B
106 301 N0003993 +XC1-5R7 PT 100 4 x 25mm 1 Piece A
107 302 N0003991 +XC1-2E5 Heating resistor 6 x 35mm 1 Piece A
110 9 IPC Station / unit
111 100 20110462 +ET-4A2 Industrial PC FAS 4_Version 2016 CP7202-1052-0050 2000 Tags 1 Piece B
Page 3 from 9
Price
Unit
112 200 20005571 Touch screen pen with holder 1 Piece B

113 300 20110463 Additional Screen incl. Holder_Version 2016 CP7202-1051-0050 1 Piece B
114 10 Electronic components Station / unit
115 100 N0004343 Pressure control valve 1 Piece B
116 200 20111306 +ET-1FI1 Ground fault circuit interruptor, 4pol., 25A/30mA, 4TE, (100A) 1 Piece B
117 201 20011927 +ET-1FI1 Auxiliary contact, 1NC+1NO 1 Piece B
118 300 20012088 +ET-2F1 Circuit breaker, 1 pole, C16A, 10kA 1 Piece B
122 601 20011927 +ET-3F5 Auxiliary contact, 1NC+1NO 1 Piece B
128 1000 20012088 +PE0-1F1 Circuit breaker, 1 pole, C16A, 10kA 1 Piece B
129 1001 20011927 +PE0-1F1 Auxiliary contact, 1NC+1NO 1 Piece B
140 1600 20012088 +XC1-1F1 Circuit breaker, 1 pole, C16A, 10kA 1 Piece B
141 1601 20011927 +XC1-1F1 Auxiliary contact, 1NC+1NO 1 Piece B
Page 4 from 9
Price
Unit

150 2100 20093264 +ET-2X1 Outlet 1 Piece B
151 2200 20098730 +ET-5B1 Power supply, controlled, 24V DC 20A, PSU 1 Piece B
152 2300 EE0000344 +ET-5T1 Power supply 1,0KVA 230VAC,24VAC 50/60Hz 1 Piece B
153 2400 20018047 +ET-8K7 Contactor, 11kW, 24VDC, S0, AC-3 25A, AC-1 35A 1 Piece B
154 2401 20020079 +ET-8K7 Varistor, AC 24…48V, DC 24…70V 1 Piece B
155 2450 20018047 +FT-2K5 Contactor, 11kW, 24VDC, S0, AC-3 25A, AC-1 35A 1 Piece B
156 2451 20020079 +FT-2K5 Varistor, AC 24…48V, DC 24…70V 1 Piece B
157 2452 20017874 +FT-2K5 Control switch, 22,2NO+2NC 1 Piece B
158 2460 20040834 +FT-2K6 Auxiliary relay, 24VUC, 2changer 1 Piece B
159 2500 20116646 +PE0-2K4 Auxiliary relay, 24VUC, 1changer 1 Piece A
160 2600 20116646 +PE0-7K7 Auxiliary relay, 24VUC, 1changer 1 Piece B
161 2700 20116646 +PE0-7K7.1 Auxiliary relay, 24VUC, 1changer 1 Piece B
164 3100 20116646 +FT-2K1 Auxiliary relay, 24VUC, 1changer 1 Piece B
165 3500 20116646 +XC1-4K2 Auxiliary relay, 24VUC, 1changer 1 Piece B
166 3900 20010712 +PE0-1K1 Power semicontactor, 24V DC, AC-1 20A, 48-460V 1 Piece A
167 4000 20010712 +PE0-1K5 Power semicontactor, 24V DC, AC-1 20A, 48-460V 1 Piece B
170 4300 20010711 +PE0-3K1 Power semicontactor, 24V DC, AC-1 20A, 24-230V 1 Piece A
172 4500 20010711 +XC1-1K1 Power semicontactor, 24V DC, AC-1 20A, 24-230V 1 Piece B
181 5400 20078952 +ET-6A3 Emergency stop relay 1 Piece B
182 5500 20008878 +PE0-13A1 Safety switch amplifier 1 Piece B
185 5800 20008878 +FT-4A5 Safety switch amplifier 1 Piece B
Page 5 from 9
Price
Unit
186 5850 20008878 +FT-5A1 Safety switch amplifier 1 Piece B

187 5900 N0002215 +ET-6A0 Calibrated Gas warning system CC28, GMA41 1 Piece B
188 6200 20005563 +PLC-1A0 Bus coupler BK1120, 24V 1 Piece B
189 6300 20005594 +PLC-2A1 Digital input 8DI, 24VDC 1 Piece B
196 7200 20005606 +PLC-1A2 Power terminal 24VDC 1 Piece B
199 7500 20005596 +PLC-3A1 Digital output 8DO, 24VDC 1 Piece B
206 8300 20005600 +PLC-4A1 Analog input 4AE, PT100 1 Piece B
212 8900 20005599 +PLC-5A1 Analog input 2AE, 0-10V 1 Piece B
213 9000 20005599 +PLC-5A2 Analog input 2AE, 0-10V 1 Piece B
214 9100 20005597 +PLC-5A3 Analog input 1AE, 0-20mA 1 Piece B
217 9600 20005601 +PLC-6A1 Analog output 4AO, 0-10V 1 Piece B
220 10200 20080132 +PLC-1A5 Power supply K-Bus 1 Piece B
221 10300 20021074 +PLC-7A1 Serial-Interface RS422/RS485 1 Piece A
222 10400 20021074 +PLC-7A2 Serial-Interface RS422/RS485 1 Piece A
Page 6 from 9
Price
Unit
223 10500 20040100 +PLC-7A3 Serial-Interface RS232 1 Piece B

224 10600 20040100 +PLC-7A4 Serial-Interface RS232 1 Piece B
225 10700 20005590 +PLC-7A5 Bus termination fitting 1 Piece B
226 10800 20027801 +PE0-10B1 Proportional pressure regulator 1 Piece B
227 Door mounting parts Station / unit
228 100 00081438 +ET-1S1 Main switch with emergency stop, 32A, 7,5kW 1 Piece B
229 200 20108056 +ET-3H1 Lamp, clear, 24V, led 1 Piece B
230 300 20118123 +ET-7S4 Key switch Ronis 1-0-2, to rest 1 Piece B
231 301 20108063 +ET-7S4 Normally open contact 1 Piece B
232 400 20108051 +ET-8H2 Lamp, red, 24V, led 1 Piece B
233 500 20108053 +ET-8H8 Lamp, yellow, 24V, led 1 Piece B
234 600 20108052 +ET-8H3 Lamp, green, 24V, led 1 Piece B
235 Wear parts
236 100 F0000086 Clamp ring set 4mm 1 Piece A
237 200 N0003837 Clamp ring set 6mm 1 Piece A
238 300 N0003838 Clamp ring set 12mm 1 Piece B
239 500 N0000084 Air hose 4mm 50 m A
240 600 N0000540 Air hose 6mm 50 m B
241 700 20052571 PP-Flavour hose 2-4mm 2-4mm 50 m A
242 800 20052572 PP-Flavour hose 4-6mm 4-6mm 50 m A
243 1000 N0000538 Flavour hose 8,5-12mm PAN 12x1,75 50 m B
244 Installation kit Protos 70 / 80
245 100 N0004172 Ball valve 1 Piece B
246 200 20016185 Socket shell, M20 1 Piece B
247 300 20016186 Socket housing, M20 1 Piece B
248 400 20016026 Plug connector, 4 pol. 1 Piece B
249 500 20016027 Bush insert, 4 pol. 1 Piece B
250 600 20020443 Cap, 4 pol. 1 Piece B
253 800 20021493 +XC1-2E1 Heating resistor 6 x 60mm 1 Piece A
255 1000 N0003993 +XC1-5R5 PT 100 4 x 25mm 1 Piece B
256 1030 20040835 +XC1-3K? Auxiliary relay, 110V AC, 2changer 1 Piece B
257 1040 20040834 +XC1-3K? Auxiliary relay, 24VUC, 2changer 1 Piece B
258 1100 N0004250 Toothed wheel 26 gears 1 Piece B
259 1200 N0004347 Toothed belt 430mm 1 Piece A
Page 7 from 9
Price
Unit
260 1250 20021778 Toothed belt 500mm 1 Piece A

261 1300 N0004251 Toothed belt 690mm 1 Piece A
262 1400 20086425 Nozzle Front Rail Protos, GD121, MK9 including pipe fitting 0,5mm 1 Piece B
263 1401 20086464 O-Ring Set Nozzle 1 Piece B
264 1402 20083802 Set Air- / flavorconnection 1 Piece B
265 1403 F0000077 Nozzle body without pipe fitting 0,5mm 1 Piece B
266 1400 20074607 Nozzle Front Rail Protos including pipe fitting 0,3mm 1 Piece B
268 1500 20021504 Nozzle box Protos 150-2025-04-015 1 Piece B
269 1600 N0003204 +XC1-6N1 Speed sensor 1 Piece B
270 1700 20118028 Converter 0-10V_ 0-20mA 1 Piece B
271 1700 20008482 Analog converter, 4-20mA - 2x 4-20mA 1 Piece B
272 1800 A0000167 -XS0 Electrical plug connector 1 Piece B
273 1810 20004460 Socket shell 1 Piece B
274 1811 20004367 Insert frame (a/b/c/d/e/f) 1 Piece B
275 1812 20004338 Plug connector Dummy 1 Piece B
276 1813 20023062 Plug connector, 12 pol 1 Piece B
277 1814 20004369 Jack, 1,0 mm² 10 Piece B
278 1820 20004459 Socket housing 1 Piece B
279 1821 20004366 Insert frame (A/B/C/D/E/F) 1 Piece B
280 1822 20004345 Bush insert, 3 pol 1 Piece B
283 1825 20004374 Input jack, 1,0 mm² 10 Piece B
284 1826 20004414 Input jack, 1,5 mm² 10 Piece B
285 Installation kit GD 121A
286 100 20086425 Nozzle Front Rail Protos, GD121, MK9 including pipe fitting 0,5mm 1 Piece B
290 200 20086426 Nozzle Rear Rail GD121 including pipe fitting 0,5mm 1 Piece B
294 300 20023060 Nozzle box GD 121A front 852048-00-001 1 Piece B
295 400 20023061 Nozzle box GD 121A rear 852048-00-001 1 Piece B
296 Installation kit M5
Page 8 from 9
Price
Unit
297 100 20086427 Nozzle M5 front rail 0,5 mm 1 Piece B

301 200 20083795 Nozzle M5 rear rail 0,5 mm 1 Piece B
304 203 20086465 Nozzle body without pipe fitting 0,5 mm 1 Piece B
Reference: We advise, that you put the A-componentes in your company storage. The B-componentes are not mandatory for you. If a component is mentioned a few times with a "A" in the Spare parts
catalogue you don't need the additional amount of all mentioned component.
Advice: There could be differences in the Item designation in the case of different FAS types or a different system status.
Information: We have for urgent cases all mentioned parts in a small amount in our Spare part storage and are able to send them directly to you after we received a written purchase order. The amount of the
parts in our Spare part storage depends on our experience and the part delivery time.
Note: While we always update and check the FAS 4 product catalogue could it happen, that you are not able to find specified components in the new price list.
If you still need some information about such components do not hesitate to contact us to clarify this issue.
During the warranty period from the FAS 4 are you not allowed to order any FAS 4 spare parts from another supplier then from the company KÖHL with there corresponding part number.
In the other case will the warranty period from the FAS 4 expire with the date where using a part that not received from the company KÖHL.
ATEX Components
Page 9 from 9
IL-SM-2044-EN_01 Instruction Leaflet
FAS 4 Explosion Drawing

19/12/2017 FAS 4 UNI TWIN 120 C 0_V8
subject to alterations ©KÖHL Maschinenbau AG - Luxembourg 1/4


19/12/2017 FAS 4 UNI TWIN 120 C 0_V8
2/4 ©KÖHL Maschinenbau AG - Luxembourg subject to alterations


19/12/2017 FAS 4 UNI TWIN 120 C 0_V8


19/12/2017 FAS 4 UNI TWIN 120 C 0_V8
No. Part. No. Item designation Description Drawing-No. Dimensions
1 20121253 +PE1-6Y3/-6Y4/-6Y5 Valveblock air pressure 4-6mm doublecontrol 4-6mm

2 20079622 +PE1-6Y3 Valvebody incl. Initiator and 3/2 Way valve 6mm
3 20082776 O-ring Set
5 20082776 O-ring Set
7 20082776 O-ring Set
8 20121254 +PE1-2M1 Pump head 0,024 incl. motor 4-6mm
9 20121255 Pump head 0,024 4-6mm
10 20041464 +PE1-2M1 Motor HNP pump 0,024
11 20113166 +PE1-10B5 Pressure converter
12 20074524 +PE1-3A3 Mini Core Mass Flow Meter
13 20121184 +PE0-2E1 Internal heating
14 20039884 +PE1-1E1/-8R3 Heating mat, left 150-2010-10-031 375mm*485mm
15 N0003240 +PE1-8R1 Temperature sensor, PT100 6mm*45mm
16 20121253 +PE2-6Y3/-6Y4/-6Y5 Valveblock air pressure 4-6mm doublecontrol 4-6mm
18 20082776 O-ring Set
20 20082776 O-ring Set
22 20082776 O-ring Set
23 20121254 +PE2-2M1 Pump head 0,024 incl. motor 4-6mm
24 20121255 Pump head 0,024 4-6mm
25 20041464 +PE2-2M1 Motor HNP pump 0,024
26 N0000478 +PE2-10B5 Pressure converter
27 20074524 +PE2-3A3 Mini Core Mass Flow Meter
28 20121184 +PE0-2E2 Internal heating
29 20039884 +PE2-1E1/-8R3 Heating mat, left 150-2010-10-031 375mm*485mm
31 --- Install. Kit Internal Tank HOT Assembly 4 IL-SM-2006-EN
32 --- Coupling Unit HOT Assembly 7 IL-SM-2007-EN
33 --- Buffer Tank HOT TWIN Assembly 6 IL-SM-2041-EN
34 --- Cleaning Tank HOT TWIN Assembly 5 IL-SM-2042-EN
35 --- Stiffener Wall UNI TWIN_V6 IL-SM-2043-EN
36 20110462 +ET-4A2 Industrial PC
37 20005571 Touch screen pen with holder


19/12/2017 Install. Kit Internal Tank HOT Assembly 4 150-2012-05-000
1 20116064 +PE0-1E1 Hotplate Ø180mm

2 20117180 +PE0-8R3 Temperature sensor, PT100 6mm*45mm
3 20116064 +PE0-1E5 Hotplate Ø180mm
4 20117180 +PE0-8R7 Temperature sensor, PT100 6mm*45mm

IL-SM-2042-EN Instruction Leaflet

09/10/2014-1 Cleaning Tank HOT TWIN Assembly 5
1 20083210 Tank 150-2011-02-001

2 N0003054 Gasket NW 150
3 20047452 Tank incl. Cover
4 20062166 Cover for internal tanks
5 N0003691 +PE0-14S2/-14S3 Solenoid level switch, cleaning GL=165mm
6 N0003006 +PE0-8R1 Immersion sensor, PT100
7 20041448 Filter 10µm cleaning tank, 6mm connection 10µm
8 20041448 Filter 10µm cleaning tank, 6mm connection 10µm


19/12/2017 Buffer Tank HOT TWIN Assembly 6
1 20083210 Tank 150-2011-02-001

2 N0003054 Gasket NW 150
3 20047452 Tank incl. Cover
4 20062166 Cover for internal tanks
5 N0003690 +PE0-13S2/-13S3/-13S6 Solenoid level switch, internal GL=240mm
6 N0003006 +PE0-8R5 Immersion sensor, PT100
7 20041447 Filter 100µm, 6mm 100µm
8 20041447 Filter 100µm, 6mm 100µm
9 20025390 O-seal d=44, 12x2,6
10 20051050 +PE0-4M1 Motor-gear-unit
11 20079635 Oldham-type coupling D1=4H8 / D2=8H8
12 20087796 Bearing
13 N0002933 Shaft seal A-8x22x7
14 20028841 +PE0-7Y8 Filling valve air control
16 N0003989 +PE0-3E1 Heating resistor 6,5mm*50mm


06/07/2017 Coupling Unit HOT Assembly 7 150-2012-07-000
1 N0003701 Guided cylinder

2 Z0011402 Centring pin
3 N0002491 Check valve with choke
4 N0005215 +FT-1S7 Proximity switch
5 N0005215 +FT-1S8 Proximity switch
6 20052435 Self-sealing coupling DN 12
7 F0000109 O-Ring self-sealing coupling
8 F0000107 O-ring Self-sealing coupling intern 1
9 20022300 O-ring Self-sealing coupling intern 2
10 20052310 Snap ring
11 20049969 Spring
12 N0003482 +PE0-2E5 Heating resistor 6,5mm*60mm


19/12/2017 Tube Area / Stiffener Wall UNI TWIN_V6


19/12/2017 Tube Area / Stiffener Wall UNI TWIN_V6
1 N0002215 +ET-6A1 Gas transmitter incl. Sensor

2
3 F0000047 +PE1-6Y7 Solenoid valve
4 20114563 +PE1-6Y7 Outlet cable
5 F0000047 +PE2-6Y7 Solenoid valve
7 20067585 +PE1-6Y3 5/2 Way valve
9 20067585 +PE1-6Y4 5/2 Way valve
11 20067585 +PE1-6Y5 5/2 Way valve
13 20067585 +PE2-6Y3 5/2 Way valve
15 20067585 +PE2-6Y4 5/2 Way valve
17 20067585 +PE2-6Y5 5/2 Way valve
19 N0003702 +FT-2Y2 Solenoid valve
20 N0000058 +FT-2Y2 Illuminating seal
21 N0003098 +PE0-9R1 Internal PT100
22 N0001770 Filter regulation valve
23 20027584 +PE0-5B6 Air pressure sensor
24 20005573 +ET-4A1 Battery pack USV
25 20055932 +XC1-1E1 / -5R1 Heated hose 7,0m
26 N0003993 +XC1-5R7 PT100 4mm*25mm
27 N0003991 +XC1-2E5 Heating resistor 6mm*35mm
28 20055932 +XC1-1E1 / -5R1 Heated hose 7,0m
29 N0003993 +XC2-5R7 PT100 4mm*25mm
30 N0003991 +XC2-2E5 Heating resistor 6mm*35mm


External Tank Unit HOT Assembly 12 /
30/06/2014-1 150-2013-20-000
TW 4 UNI


External Tank Unit HOT Assembly 12 /
30/06/2014-1 150-2013-20-000
TW 4 UNI
1 Z0008275 Bowden cable 150-2010-025

2 N0003478 Round plug
3 --- External Case HOT Assembly 15 IL-SM-2012-EN
4 --- Coupling Tank Unit HOT IL-SM-2014-EN
5 --- Installation Kit Tank Heating HOT IL-SM-2013-EN


30/06/2014-1 Coupling Tank Unit HOT Assembly 13 150-2012-08-000
1 20052436 Self-Sealing Adaptor DN 12
2 F0000108 O-ring Self-sealing Adaptor extern
3 F0000107 O-ring Self-sealing Adaptor intern 1
4 20022300 O-ring Self-sealing Adaptor intern 2
5 20052312 Snap ring
6 20052311 Spring
7 N0003240 -2B2 Temperature sensor, PT100 6mm*45mm
8 N0003719 -2E2 Heating resistor Ø6,5mm*80mm


Installation Kit Tank Heating HOT
30/06/2014-1 150-2012-06-000
Assembly 14
1 N0002184 -3E2 / -4E1 Hotplate Ø400mm
2 N0003240 -8B5 Temperature Sensor, PT100 6mm*45mm


19/12/2017 External Case HOT Assembly 15 / TW 4 UNI 150-2013-01-000
1 N0003009 +FT-4S6 / -4S7 Solenoid Level Switch, external GL=324
2 N0003389 -9B1 Temperature Sensor, PT100 M6x100mm
3 20051050 +FT-5M1 Motor-gear-unit
4 20079635 Oldham-type coupling D1=4H8/D2=8H8
5 20087796 Bearing
6 N0002933 Shaft seal A-8x22x7
7 N0004217 Ball valve, mini, AG-IG 3/8"
8 N0004207 -2E3 Heating resistor Ø6,5mm*40mm
9 N0003240 -2B3 Temperature sensor, PT100 6mm*45mm
10 20020931 Filter candle 200µm
11 F0000084 O-ring filter candle
12 N0004895 O-ring cap filter candle
13 N0004259 -2E1 / -2B1 Heated Hose H300 0,5m
14 20036482 Flavour hose for heated hose 0,6m

Listagem Descrições de
produtos/Documentação de terceiros
12 Listagem Descrições de
Número de
Designação Fabricante
artigo
20052571 Mangueiras 2,0x4,0 mm
20052572 Mangueiras 4,0x6,0 mm
Medidor de fluxo de massa

20074524 Bronkhorst
Mini Core-Flow
Sensor de temperatura da
N0003240 Conatex
manga PT100
N0003006 Sensor de imersão PT100 Conatex
20113116 Transdutor de pressão Endress Hauser
20051050 Motor Engrenagem Unidade Faulhaber
20027584 Sensor de pressão Festo
N0001770 Válvula de regulação do filtro Festo
N0000058 Vedação luminosa Festo
20067585 Válvula solenoide 5/2 vias Festo
F0000047 Válvula solenoide 3/2 vias Festo
N0003702 Válvula solenoide Festo
Pasta do guia
Versão:07 93/105
Número de
artigo
N0002215 Transdutor de gás GFG Gaswarner
N0003098 Sensor de temperatura Hewid
Esteira de aquecimento em
20039884 silicone autoadesiva, lado Hewid
esquerdo
20121254 Grupo de motobombas 0,024 HNP
Cabeçote da bomba de
20121255 HNP
reposição 0,024
20041464 Grupo de motobombas 0,24 HNP
Elementos de aquecimento
N0003989 Cartucho de aquecimento
HS
Tanque amortecedor de
N0003690 interruptor magnético de Kobold
nível, interno
Tanque de limpeza de
N0003691 interruptor magnético de Kobold
nível, interno
20121184 Dispositivo de aquecimento LMtherm
Bloco de válvulas de válvula

20079623 única Actuador pneumático Schumacher
Dupla acção
Pasta do guia
94/105 Versão:07
Número de
artigo
Grupo de peças
sobressalentes bloco de
20121253 Schumacher/KÖHL
válvulas dupla comutação 4-
6mm
Conexões roscadas
xxx Swagelok
Swagelok
Pasta do guia
Versão:07 95/105
Símbolos de perigo na máquina
13 Símbolos de perigo na máquina
Símbolos que são colocados na máquina.
O símbolo o avisa de:
tensão elétrica perigosa!
Aviso de uma área na qual podem surgir atmosferas

explosivas!
Substâncias irritantes!
O símbolo indica:
Usar proteção facial!
O símbolo indica:
Lavar as mãos!
O símbolo indica:
Usar luvas!
O símbolo indica:
Proibido extinguir com água!
O símbolo indica:
Proibido comer e beber!
Pasta do guia
Versão:07 97/105
Símbolos de perigo na máquina
O símbolo indica:
A máquina não pode ser conectada eletricamente em uma

atmosfera potencialmente explosiva!
O símbolo indica:
Máquinas quentes (de mentol) não devem ser abastecidas de

álcool!
A fita adesiva de perigo e informação mostrada acima pode ser
DICA encomendada como uma peça de reposição:
Número de artigo KÖHL: 20102085
Pasta do guia
98/105 Versão:07
Certificados
14 Certificados
Conteúdo:
• Declaração de conformidade CE 
• Certificados de inspeção 
• Certificados de material 
• Certificado de emissão de ruídos 
Pasta do guia
Versão:07 99/105
Certificados
14.1 Visão geral das áreas ATEX de acordo Zona 0 Dentro do recipiente
com a norma 94/9/CE
Fora do recipiente
A zona 0 está presente dentro de um recipiente que pode conter solventes. Os circuitos MSR aí contidos do monitoramento de Zona 2
Dentro da unidade
nível de enchimento são projetados no tipo de proteção contra ignição "segurança intrínseca" com categoria EEx ia. O agitador
e o dispositivo de aquecimento de aroma aí contidos, assim como os circuitos de medição de temperatura, podem ser
desligados por software e hardware através de um interruptor de chave, de modo que só possam ser colocados em
/ / Fora da unidade
funcionamento durante a operação pretendida. O agitador existente é adequado para uso na zona 0.
As mangueiras e tubulações são preenchidas com os meios utilizados durante a operação. Se o nível do líquido cair abaixo do
limite, isso é sinalizado e leva a um desligamento. Além disso, o volume total das linhas de mangueiras e dispositivos utilizados
(< 0,5 l) não é suficiente para formar uma atmosfera explosiva perigosa no caso de uma falha. Isso também se aplica aos
processos de arranque e desligamento.
Os meios a serem utilizados são movidos dentro do FAS-4 em um sistema tecnicamente estanque. Isso pode ser considerado
suficiente, pois se ocorrer um vazamento, um sensor de aviso de gás fará com que todas as fontes potenciais de ignição sejam
desligadas. Por essa razão, não é necessário verificar mais a estanqueidade das tubagens e conexões dentro do FAS-4. Os
materiais operacionais elétricos e mecânicos utilizados não produzem faíscas e, em operação normal, também não estão
sujeito a temperaturas que possam causar ignição imediata. Portanto, a zona 2 pode ser aplicada no interior da sala de
aparelhos do FAS-4 e a medida de proteção contra explosões mencionada anteriormente pode ser aplicada.
Para o tanque, duas áreas precisam ser consideradas: o interior do tanque e a área entre o tanque e o revestimento externo. O
interior do tanque deve ser atribuído à zona 0 quando forem utilizados líquidos inflamáveis. Os materiais operacionais aqui
disponíveis são projetados de acordo com a categoria 1. As tampas dos tanques são projetadas com vedações que provaram
ser suficientemente estanques nos testes da KÖHL, mesmo se todo o sistema caísse. Vazamentos de gás que poderiam levar
a uma atmosfera explosiva perigosa também não são de se esperar.
Na área entre o tanque e o revestimento externo, não se pode descartar a formação de atmosferas explosivas em casos raros
quando líquidos inflamáveis são utilizados (Zona 2). Por esse motivo, nenhuma fonte de ignição está presente aqui. Os
materiais operacionais presentes na parte inferior do tanque (no caso da versão "Uni") é completamente desenergizado
(através do FAS-4 conectado) quando operando com líquidos inflamáveis, de modo que estes não tenham que ser
considerados como fontes potenciais de ignição. Esses materiais operacionais só estão ativos no modo de operação com o
aquecimento ligado, o que não é permitido quando se utiliza líquidos inflamáveis.
O tanque simples sem FAS acoplado (ou seja, sem fonte de alimentação externa) é geralmente adequado para uso na zona 0.
Não há fontes de ignição eficazes nessa condição. Para proteger contra cargas estáticas ao mover o tanque, ele é equipado
com rodas dissipativas.  Tanque de aroma – Tanque externo
 Tanque de amortecimento – Estação
 Tanque de limpeza – Estação
Pasta do guia
Versão:07 101/105
Certificados
14.2 Certificados
Pasta do guia
Versão:07 103/105
Certificados
Número de
Posição Componente Certificado
artigo
Rodas de condutividade
N0002904 Rodízio
1 elétrica
N0002903 Rodízio fixo
Protocolo de verificação
Certificação de
20052436 Bocal de fecho
2 dispositivos de vazamento
20052435 Acoplamento de fecho
Conforme VDI 2440
Teste de pressão
3 N0004217 Válvula de esfera
Certificação da fábrica
Ficha de dados
4 Diversos Mangueiras Mangueiras
Propriedades físicas
N0003009
Interruptor magnético de ATEX 94/9/CE
5 N0003690
nível II GD Exia IIC T6
N0003691
ATEX 94/9/CE
6 N0002215 Sistema de aviso de gás
II 2G EEx dem [ib] IIC T4
Amplificador de ATEX 94/9/CE

7 20008878
isolamento II (3) G [Ex ic GC] IIc
Ficha de dados Vedação

8 N0003054 Vedação do tanque
Propriedades físicas
Pasta do guia
104/105 Versão:07
1
1
2
3
Werkszeugnis
Carl Geisen GmbH EN10204-2.2 (DIN 50 049 - 2.2)
Güterstr. 76
54295 Trier Nummer : ARMRE607472 vom 11.05.15
Auftrag : ARMAU607132
Ihre Bestellung : 15047155
Seite :1
Kennzeichen
Menge Armaturentyp Art. Nr. Werkstoff DN PN Prüf Nr. Herstellerzeichen
[mm] [bar]
4 Mini-Kugelhahn 3/8", Edelstahl/PTFE-FKM BV311322 Edelstahl 1.4408 3/8" 63
PN63, Innen/Außengewinde
11.05.15
Datum Werkssachverständiger
4
Technisches Datenblatt
Fluidfix Polypropylen-Schläuche
__________________________________________________________
Diese Schläuche bestehen aus einem speziellen, hochwärme- und extraktionsstabilen

Polypropylen-Copolymer. Sie sind zähelastisch (E-Modul bei 20°C ca. 800 N/mm 2). Thermisch
dauerbelastbar bis 70°C. Kurzeitige Spitzentemperaturen bis 110°C sind unproblematisch. Die
Schläuche aus diesem Werkstoff zeigen bei Lagerung in feuchter Umgebung oder in Wasser
keine Veränderung der mechanischen Werte. Gute Chemikalienbeständigkeit.
Fluidfix Polypropylen ist ein Polymerisat des Ethylens mit isotaktischer Anordnung von
Methylgruppen. Es gehört nicht zu der Gruppe der Fluorkunststoffe.
Fluidfix Polypropylen-Schläuche sind sterilisierbar ( bei +121°C) und haben bis dicht an die
Erweichungsgrenze gute mechanische und chemische Eigenschaften.
Physikalische Eigenschaften
Allgemeine Eigenschaften:
Dichte: 0,904 – 0,907 g/cm 3

Obere Gebrauchstemperatur ohne
Belastung: 90-100°C
Brennbarkeit: brennbar
Wasseraufnahme: < 0,05 %
Farbe: milchig opak
Strahlenbeständigkeit: 0,020 Mgy
Lebensmittelechtheit: ja
Mechanische Eigenschaften:
Reißfestigkeit 23°C: 25-40 N/ mm2

Reißfestigkeit 70°C: 18-28 N/ mm2
Streckgrenze bei 23°C: 25-40 N/ mm2
Reißdehnung bei 23°C: 400-800%
Zug-E-Modul bei 23°C: 1100-2100 N / mm2
Grenzbiegespannung bei 23°C: 45-60 N/ mm2
Biege-E-Modul: 800-1500 N /mm 2
Kugeldruckhärte 132/60: 58-80 N/ mm2
Shore Härte (DIN 53 505): 70-75° Shore D
Reibungskoeffizient, dyn.
gegen Stahl, trocken: 0,3-0,5
Die aufgeführten Angaben sind nach eigenen Prüfungen, Empfehlungen unserer Grundstofflieferanten sowie Erfahrungsberichten unserer Kunden
erarbeitet und zusammengetragen worden. Da individuelle Betriebsbedingungen die Einsetzbarkeit jedes Schlauches zusätzlich beeinflussen,
können die Angaben nur Richtwerte darstellen. In Fällen, in denen noch keine Einsatzerfahrungen vorliegen, empfehlen wir, um Risiken zu
vermeiden, einen Vorversuch beim Anwender. Dies empfiehlt sich besonders bei Stoffgemischen.
SEITE 1 VON 2 zuletzt bearbeitet: 13.02.2008/ MP
LIQUID-scan GmbH & Co.KG • Heiligenbreite 19 • 88662 Überlingen • Tel: 07551/ 301770 • Fax: 07551/ 932959 • www.liquidscan.de • info@liquidscan.de
4
Technisches Datenblatt
Fluidfix Polypropylen-Schläuche
__________________________________________________________
Thermische Eigenschaften:
Schmelztemperatur: 158-167°C
Formbeständigkeit in der
Kp
Wärme A (18,5) /cm 3: 55-60°C
Lin. Wärmeausdehnungs-
koeffizient: 15-18 1K x 10-5
Wärmeleitfähigkeit bei 23°C: 0,22 W /K x m
Spezifische Wärme bei 23°C: 1,68 Kj/ Kg x K
Sauerstoffindex: < 30%
Elektrische Eigenschaften:
Dielektrizitätskonstante bei 103: 2,26-2,4

Dielektrizitätskonstante bei 106: 2,25
Spezifischer Durchgangswiderstand: > 1016 O x cm
Oberflächenwiderstand: > 1013 O
Kriechstromfestigkeit: KA3c
KV
Durchschlagfestigkeit: 60-90 /mm
Gasdurchlässigkeit:
cm3
Stickstoff Durchlaß: 4,3 / m 2 d/ bar
cm3
Sauerstoff Durchlaß: 19 / m2 d/bar
cm3
Kohlendioxid Durchlaß: 61 / m2 d/bar
cm3
Wasserdampf Durchlaß: 2,1 / m 2 d/ bar
Die aufgeführten Angaben sind nach eigenen Prüfungen, Empfehlungen unserer Grundstofflieferanten sowie Erfahrungsberichten unserer Kunden
erarbeitet und zusammengetragen worden. Da individuelle Betriebsbedingungen die Einsetzbarkeit jedes Schlauches zusätzlich beeinflussen,
können die Angaben nur Richtwerte darstellen. In Fällen, in denen noch keine Einsatzerfahrungen vorliegen, empfehlen wir, um Risiken zu
vermeiden, einen Vorversuch beim Anwender. Dies empfiehlt sich besonders bei Stoffgemischen.
SEITE 2 VON 2 zuletzt bearbeitet: 13.02.2008/ MP
LIQUID-scan GmbH & Co.KG • Heiligenbreite 19 • 88662 Überlingen • Tel: 07551/ 301770 • Fax: 07551/ 932959 • www.liquidscan.de • info@liquidscan.de
5
M series
16. Declaration of conformance

DT0497
DECLARACIÓN DE CONFORMIDAD CE
EC DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY
EG-KONFOMITÄTSERKLÄRUNG
DÉCLARATION DE CONFORMITÉ
DICHIARAZIONE DI CONFORMITÀ CE
KOBOLD MESURA SLU
Avda. Conflent 68 nave 15 08915 Badalona (España)
Declara, bajo la propia responsabilidad, que el producto

Declares under our sole responsibility, that the product
Erklärt in alleiniger Verantwortung, daß das produkt
Déclare sous sa seule responsabilité, que le produit
Dichiara sotto la propia responsabilità, che il prodotto
Magnetic level switch

M..E
A los cuales se refiere esta declaración, son conformes a las siguiente Directivas Europeas:
To which this declaration relates is in conformity with the following European Directives:
An auf das diese Erklärung verweist, sie mit den Europäischen Richtlinien im Einklang stehen folgend:
À auxquels se réfère cette déclaration, ils sont conformes aux Directives Européennes suivant :
A ai quali si riferisce questa dichiarazione, sono conformi alle direttive europee seguente:
EMC2004/108/EC LVD2006/95EC Atex94/9/EC RoHS2002/95

Normas armonizadas y documentos de la normativa aplicados:
Applied harmonised standards and normative documents:
Angewandte harmonisierte Normen oder normativer Dokumente:
Normes harmonisées et documents normatifs appliqués
Norme armonizzate e documenti normativi applicati:
EN61010-1 :2011 EN60079-0:2009 (acc. EN60079-0:2011) EN61241-11:2010

EN61000-6-2 :2006 EN60079-11:2007 (acc. EN60079-112013)
EN60079-31:2009 (acc. EN60079-31:2010)
Certificado de examen CE de tipo Marcado
EC-type examination certificate Marking
EG-baumusterprübescheinigung Markierung
Attestation d´examen CE de type Inscription
Certificazione per esame di tipo CE Marcatura
LOM06ATEX2054X
II 1 GD Ex ia IIC T6 Ga / Ex ia IIIC T85ºC Da

-20≤Ta≤+60ºC
Fabricado en: KOBOLD MESURA SLU Avda. Conflent 68 nave 15 08915 BADALONA (Spain)
Made in:
Hergesteltlt in:
Fabriqué dans:
Fabbricato in:
Organismo notificado : LOM 0163 Número notificación : LOM 05ATEX9070

Notified organism Number notification
Mitgeteilter Organismus Zahlmitteilung
Organization annoncée Nombre notification
Organismo informato Notifica di numero
Badalona sept. 2013 Gerente
page 16 DT0493
5
M series
17. Declaration of conformance

DT0498
DECLARACIÓN DE CONFORMIDAD CE
EC DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY
EG-KONFOMITÄTSERKLÄRUNG
DÉCLARATION DE CONFORMITÉ
DICHIARAZIONE DI CONFORMITÀ CE
KOBOLD MESURA SLU
Avda. Conflent 68 nave 15 08915 Badalona (España)
Declara, bajo la propia responsabilidad, que el producto

Declares under our sole responsibility, that the product
Erklärt in alleiniger Verantwortung, daß das produkt
Déclare sous sa seule responsabilité, que le produit
Dichiara sotto la propia responsabilità, che il prodotto
Magnetic level switch

M…
A los cuales se refiere esta declaración, son conformes a las siguiente Directivas Europeas:
To which this declaration relates is in conformity with the following European Directives:
An auf das diese Erklärung verweist, sie mit den Europäischen Richtlinien im Einklang stehen folgend:
À auxquels se réfère cette déclaration, ils sont conformes aux Directives Européennes suivant :
A ai quali si riferisce questa dichiarazione, sono conformi alle direttive europee seguente:
EMC2004/108/EC LVD2006/95EC RoHS2002/95

Normas armonizadas y documentos de la normativa aplicados:
Applied harmonised standards and normative documents:
Angewandte harmonisierte Normen oder normativer Dokumente:
Normes harmonisées et documents normatifs appliqués
Norme armonizzate e documenti normativi applicati:
EN61010-1 :2011
EN61000-6-2 :2006
Fabricado en: KOBOLD MESURA SLU Avda. Conflent 68 nave 15 08915 BADALONA (Spain)
Made in:
Hergesteltlt in:
Fabriqué dans:
Fabbricato in:
Badalona sept. 2013 Gerente
page 17 DT0493
5
M series
18. ATEX Certified
page 18 DT0493
5
5
M series
page 20 DT0493
5
M series
page 21 DT0493
5
M series
page 22 DT0493
EG-Baumusterprüfbescheinigungen
6
32
6
33
6
34
6
35
7
7
7
7
8
Certificados
14.3 Medida de proteção contra explosões FAS-4

Declaração TÜV Rheinland, ver páginas seguintes!
Pasta do guia
Versão:07 105/105
Industry Service
TÜV Rheinland Industrie Service GmbH • Postfach 3710 • D-54227 Trier
Product:
Köhl AG
17, Am Scheerleck Flavour Application System 4
L-6868 Wecker FAS-4
Technical Report on Applied

Explosion Protection Measures for the FAS-4
Client: Köhl AG
17, Am Scheerleck
L-6868 Wecker
Customer no.: 435396
Carried out by: TÜV Industrie Service GmbH

Dipl.-Ing. (FH) Haubrich
Am Bahnhofsplatz 8
D-54292 Trier
No. of pages: 6
Date: 22.06.2015
TÜV reference: 542 ha

Köhl AG, 17, Am Scheerleck, L-6868 Wecker
Technical Report on Explosion Protection Measures for the FAS 4-X
Contents:
1. Task....................................................................................... 3
2. Short description ..................................................................................... 3
3. Standardised assignment of the FAS-4 devices ................................ 3
4. Ignition source analysis .................................................................................. 4
5. Description of applied explosion protection measures ........ 10
6. Summary .................................................................................... 14
List of literature / documents ............................................................. 15
Page 2 of 15
1. Task
TÜV Rheinland Industrie Service GmbH was commissioned to assess the selected explosion
protection measures and, if necessary, to suggest ways of improving explosion protection for
FAS-4 devices.
2. Short description of FAS-4 devices

The Flavour Application System 4 (FAS-4) is a fully automatic, mobile device that can be
used in the cigarette industry. The device ensures the uniform application of flavours on
cigarette paper, in cigarette filters or directly on the cigarette tobacco. The FAS-4 consists of
two main parts, which are interconnected by a mechanical locking mechanism. The external
mobile container (tank wagon) is filled in a separate area and connected to the FAS-4 during
production. The FAS-4 contains a reservoir tank for the flavour and another tank for the
cleaning agent. The external tank is connected to the FAS-4 via a quick-release coupling.
The reservoir tank is filled via a valve. Various monitoring and control components ensure the
flavour is dosed as accurately as possible for application.
During this process, media with flammable components may collect in the tank, hoses,
tubes and the applied equipment, thus resulting in a risk of explosion and relevant
measures have been taken to ensure safe operation.
A detailed description of the device and device functions can be found in the literature and
documents listed at the end of this report.
3. Standardised assignment of FAS 4 devices
The FAS-4 devices conform to EC Machinery Directive, which has an explicit requirement
for manufacturers to carry out risk assessment and a CE Declaration of Conformity. The
specified procedures were carried out by Köhl AG.
A position specified within the risk assessment for machines is the analysis of potential
explosion hazards. Explosion hazards exist within the FAS-4,
Page 3 of 15
therefore explosion protection measures have been applied. The explosion protection
concepts is described in Chapter 5.
Since the FAS-4 should not be operated in a potentially explosive area and only poses a risk
of internal explosion, the FAS-4 does not come fully under ATEX Directive 94/9/EC (ATEX
95). Nonetheless, Directive 94/9/EC must be applied to devices used inside the FAS-4 or in
potentially explosive areas within the FAS 4.
4. Ignition source analysis
Naked flames and hot gases

There are no exothermic reactions or naked flames inside the FAS-4, neither during normal
operation nor in the event of malfunctioning. For work with naked flames, please refer to the
section entitled "Possible risks of ignition when working or using tools" in this ignition risk
analysis. Sources of hot gases which may achieve the ignition temperature of potentially
explosive atmospheres do not exist in the potentially explosive areas.
Hot surfaces
There is a risk of ignition in areas were hot surfaces come into contact with potentially
explosive atmospheres. The following methods and declarations prove that the surface
temperature of technical equipment at the FAS-4 remains below the relevant permissible limit
values in a safe and secure manner:
For electrical and non-electrical equipment labelled and certified according to Directive
94/9/EC or applicable national regulations prior to 01.07.2003, assessment of the surface
temperature is an integral part of the type examination test, testing prior to initial
commissioning and regular inspections.
Page 4 of 15
The surfaces of all other technical equipment heat up in normal operation to no more
than 80% of the ignition temperature of the potentially explosive atmospheres in
which they are being used. In Zone 1, this declaration also applies in the event of
foreseeable and frequent malfunctions and in Zone 0 also in the event of infrequent
malfunctions.
Electrical systems and equipment

All the electrical equipment must meet the minimum explosion protection requirements
specified for use in the potentially explosive areas and potentially explosive atmospheres:
Explosion group: IIA
Temperature class: T2 (ignition temperature ethanol: 425°C)
Site of operation Zone 0: Category 1G
Site of operation Zone 1: Category 1G or 2G
Site of operation Zone 2: Category 1G or 2G or 3G
All electrical equipment used within a potentially explosive zone of the FAS-4 meet
Directive 94/9/EC of the European Parliament and the Council for the
harmonisation of the legal regulations of member states for devices and protective
systems intended for use in potentially explosive areas.
The maintenance measures specified in the manufacturer's documents are carried out to
ensure the permanent explosion protection for the electrical equipment. All the necessary
maintenance tasks are summarised in the maintenance plan provided by Köhl.
Explosion protection of the electrical systems in potentially explosive areas is provided by the
technical design in accordance with DIN EN 60079-14 (VDE 0165 Part 1). Testing prior to
initial commissioning and regular inspections ensure the correct technical design and safe
working order.
Page 5 of 15
Non-electrical equipment
All non-electrical equipment whose design poses a risk of ignition must meet the minimum
explosion protection requirements specified for use in the potentially explosive areas and
the potentially explosive atmospheres:
Explosion group: IIA
Temperature class: T2
Site of operation Zone 0: Category 1G
Site of operation Zone 1: Category 1G or 2G
Site of operation Zone 2: Category 1G or 2G or 3G
All non-electrical equipment with a potential source of ignition that are used within a
potentially explosive zone of the FAS-4 meet Directive 94/9/EC of the European Parliament
and the Council for the harmonisation of the legal regulations of member states for devices
and protective systems intended for use in potentially explosive areas.
The maintenance measures specified in the manufacturer's documents are carried out to
ensure the permanent explosion protection for the non-electrical equipment. Testing prior to
initial commissioning and regular inspections ensure the correct technical design and safe
working order of the non-electrical equipment.
Possible risks of ignition when working or using tools

Impact, friction and grinding, as well as welding and cutting are technical procedures which
generate ignitable sparks, arcs and flames. These sources of ignition must be controlled in a
safe and reliable way when working or using tools in potentially explosive areas. Please note
that impact, friction and grinding involving rust, light metals and their alloys may result in
highly exothermic reactions and incendive sparks which can cause potentially explosive
atmospheres to ignite. For instance, a hammer blow on a rusty steel surface covered with an
aluminium foil,
Page 6 of 15
coated with aluminium paint or placed on aluminium particles or swarf will produce highly
incendive sparks. Sparks are thus also produced if there is an impact between aluminium
components and rusty steel parts or rust on the surface of steel parts. Incendive sparks
can also be the result of impacting or rubbing titanium or zirconium against sufficiently
hard materials, even if there is no rust present.
The following rules apply when working in potentially explosive areas of the FAS-4:
In Zones 1 and 2, steel tools are only permissible if their application produces just
one single spark. These include, e.g. hammers, screwdrivers, spanners or impact
wrenches. Furthermore, it is possible to use tools certified for use in Zones 1 and 2;
Tool which produces more than one spark (e.g. jack hammers, cutting and grinding
tools) may only be used in Zones 1 and 2 when there is no potentially explosive
atmospheres;
When working on aluminium surfaces or working with aluminium tools
(e.g. aluminium ladders), pay attention to the aforementioned sources of ignition. It is
essential to eliminate rubbing between aluminium or magnesium and iron/steel. Except
when it is stainless steel and the presence of rust particles can be categorically
excluded. Alloys with less than 10% aluminium and coating materials containing < 25%
aluminium are also unproblematic;
The required level of safety when carrying out work with mechanically generated sparks
or naked flames and arcs is guaranteed through organisational measures (instructions
and permits) and the provision of suitable tools (responsibility of the user);
Equalising currents
Equalising currents are controlled in a safe and reliable way through comprehensive
potential equalisation or by the type of structure (stainless steel) according to IEC 60364-
4-41 and DIN EN 60079-14.
Page 7 of 15
Lightning
Since FAS systems are only intended for indoor use in industrial halls, there is no risk of a direct
lightning strike.
Static electricity
In general, any electrostatic compensation may generate a level of energy greater than
the minimum ignition energy of the respective potentially explosive atmosphere. For
this reason, static electricity must be controlled in a safe and reliable way as a possible
source of ignition.
The following declarations apply to the assessed system:
For electrical or non-electrical equipment labelled and certified according to Directive
94/9/EC or applicable national regulations prior to 01.07.2003, assessment of the
electrostatic sources of ignition is an integral part of the type examination test;
There are no technical procedures that result in hazardous electrostatic
charges/discharges;
Cleaning cloths used in all the zones must not produce electrostatic discharge and should
not exceed a surface resistance of 5 1010;
All the FAS-4 wheels have a conductive design;
The entire structure is made of steel or stainless steel, all the system components are
connected to each other with good electrical conductivity, separation processes within
the system are not expected;
Electromagnetic fields with a frequency range of 9 kHz to 300 GHz

Within the potentially explosive areas or in the vicinity of these areas there is no
exposure to hazardous electromagnetic fields of this frequency range as a result of
permanently installed equipment.
The following rules apply for mobile transmitters:

There is no need to keep a safe distance when using mobile telephones in the C Network
and the E Network with a transmitting power level < 2 W. The devices can be operated
within the potentially explosive area if they have
Page 8 of 15
an explosion-proof design. However, the aerial must not come into contact with any
conductive parts;
Mobile telephones in the C Network and the D Network with a transmitting power level of
between 2 and 16 W must never be used in potentially explosive areas or any closer than
0.5 m from potentially explosive areas;
Cordless telephones (DECT, CT1, CT1+, CT2) with a transmitting power level < 2 W can
be operated within the potentially explosive area if they have an explosion-proof design.
However, the aerial must not come into contact with any conductive parts;
BOS radio systems (for authorities and organisations responsible for safety) must never
be used in potentially explosive areas or any closer than 1.9 m from potentially explosive
areas;
It is organisationally ensured that members of staff and external staff are informed
of these regulations. Furthermore, it is assumed that authorities and organisations
responsible for safety, can make decisions on their own regarding which radio
systems to use in these areas.
Further ignition hazards

Further ignition hazards, such as ionising radiation, ultrasonic, adiabatic compression,
shock waves, flowing gases or chemical reactions, are not available at the FAS-4 and
are therefore not discussed further in this technical report.
Page 9 of 15
5. Description of applied explosion protection measures / zones
The zones correspond to relevant international IEC publications, European standards, EU

regulations and any national legislation that applies.
The following directives and standards apply for the classification of areas for potentially
explosive atmospheres:
IEC 60079-10-1 (2008-12); Explosive atmospheres - Part 10-1: Classification of areas
- Explosive gas atmospheres
EN 60079-10-1 (2009-03); Explosive atmospheres – Part 10-1: Classification of areas
– Explosive gas atmospheres (IEC 60079-10-1:2008)
Directive 1999/92/EC of the European Parliament and Council of 16 December 1999
on the minimum requirements for improving the safety and health protection of
workers potentially at risk from explosive atmospheres (15th individual directive within
the meaning of Article 16, Section 1 of Directive 89/391/EEC) - ATEX 137
DIN EN 60079-10-1 (VDE 0165-101): 2009-10; Explosive Atmospheres – Part
10-1 Classification of areas - Explosive gas areas (IEC 60079-10-
1:2008); German version EN 60079-10-1: 2009
The international standard lEC 60079-10-1 is based on the concept of sources of release
and defines a continuous, primary and secondary source of release. It is based on a concept
of sources of release and grades of release and defines sources of release as well as a
continuous, primary and secondary grade of release.
A source of release is a point or location from which a flammable gas, vapour, mist or liquid
may be released into the atmosphere so that an explosive gas atmosphere could be formed.
Examples of sources of release are:
Open liquid surfaces
Leaky gaskets
Sampling points
Filling and drainage points
Technological apertures
Page 10 of 15
The following three grades of release are defined in terms of their likely frequency
and duration for the existence of a potentially explosive gas atmosphere:
Continuous grade of release
Primary grade of release
Secondary grade of release
A source of release can cause any one of these grades of release or a combination of
grades of release.
A continuous grade of release is a release that is continuous or nearly so, or that
occurs frequently for short periods
A primary grade of release is a release that is likely to occur periodically or
occasionally in normal operation
A secondary grade of release is a release that is unlikely to occur in normal
operation and, in any event, will occur only infrequently or for short periods
In Germany, the general reservation applies that specific technical rules and regulations in
accordance with IEC 60079-10-1 are currently being drawn up for the classification of areas
based on the Ordinance on Industrial Health and Safety. These rules and regulations do not
exist at the present time, we therefore, as the user, apply the applicable standards without
the absolute presumption of conformity while exercising entrepreneurial responsibility.
Accordingly, the following regulations and information are applied for the classification of
areas:
Ordinance governing the health and safety aspects of the provision and use of
materials at work, the operation of equipment requiring supervision and the
organisation of occupational health and safety (Ordinance on Industrial Health and
Safety - BetrSichV): published in BGBI. No. 70 on 27 September 2002 (Pg. 3777) in
the version dated November 2011
BGR 104 (Explosion Protection Rules) - compilation of technical rules for preventing
hazards caused by potentially explosive atmospheres with examples for classifying
potentially explosive areas into zones; German statutory accident insurance: June
2009
The classification of areas is therefore carried in accordance with the examples specified in the
current version of BGR 104 and DIN EN 60079-10-1.
Page 11 of 15
According to Appendix 3 of the Ordinance on Industrial Health and

Safety (BetrSichV), the following declarations apply to zones in
potentially explosive gas areas:
Potentially explosive areas are subdivided into zones based on the likelihood of
occurrence and duration of a potentially explosive atmosphere. This subdivision results
in the scope of the necessary measures according to Appendix II Section A.
Zone 0: A place in which an explosive atmosphere consisting of a mixture of air and
flammable gases, vapours or mist is present continuously or for long periods
Zone 1: A place in which an explosive atmosphere consisting of a mixture of air

and flammable gases, vapours or mist is likely to occur in normal operation
occasionally
Zone 2: A place in which an explosive atmosphere consisting of a mixture of air
and flammable gases, vapours or mist is not likely to occur in normal operation,
but if it does occur, will persist for a short period only
Normal operation is defined as the situation when the system is operated within the
intended parameters. The risk assessment focuses on various operating conditions of the
system.
The following potentially explosive areas exist inside the FAS-4. The explosion protection
measures have been specifically selected to prevent the potential hazards.
Zone 0 exists within a tank possibly filled with solvent. The type of protection offered by
the measurement and control circuits of the fill level indicator inside the tank is "intrinsic
safety" to category EEx ia. The software and hardware of the contained agitator, flavour
heater and temperature measuring circuits can be deactivated via a key-operated switch
to ensure they are only operated as intended and when required. The supplied agitator is
suitable for use in Zone 0.
The hoses and pipelines are filled with the applied media in normal operation. A message is
output if the fill level drops below the minimum level and results in the system shutting down.
The total volume of the applied hoses and devices (< 0.5 l) is however not large enough
Page 12 of 15
to cause a potentially explosive atmosphere in the event of fault. This also applies to start-
up and shut-down processes.
The applied media are contained inside the FAS-4 in a leak-proof system. This is deemed
adequate, as in the unlikely event of a leak, all potential sources of ignition are shut-off by a
gas warning sensor. Therefore, further evidence concerning the leak tightness of lines and
connectors inside the FAS-4 is not required. In normal operation, the applied electrical and
mechanical equipment are non-sparking and do not generate temperatures which could
cause spontaneous ignition. Zone 2 can therefore be specified for the equipment space inside
the FAS-4 and the aforementioned explosion protection measure applied.
Two areas must be considered for the tank wagon: the tank interior and the area between
the tank and the outer cover. The tank interior is specified as Zone 0 when using flammable
liquids. The relevant equipment is designed to meet the requirements of Category 1. The
lids are fitted with gaskets, which proved to be leak-proof during tests carried out by Köhl;
even when the entire system was placed on its side. Gas leaks, which could cause a
hazardous explosive atmosphere, are also not expected.
When using flammable liquids, it is not always possible to eliminate the risk of a potentially
explosive atmosphere in the area between the tank and the outer cover (Zone 2). For this
reason, there are no sources of ignition in this area. The equipment in the lower section of
the tank wagon (for the "Uni" version) are fully de-energised (via the connected FAS-4)
when operation involves flammable liquids. In other words, this equipment does not have
to be considered as a potential source of ignition. This equipment is only active when the
heater is in use; and use of the heater is not permitted with flammable liquids.
The only tank wagon without a connected FAS (i.e. without an external power supply) is
generally suitable for use in Zone 0. In this situation, there are no effective sources of ignition.
The tank wagon is equipped with conductive wheels to prevent static charges when it is being
moved.
Page 13 of 15
6. Summary
Various explosion protection measures are used at the FAS-4 in order to meet the
requirements of the relevant regulations.
Further protection measures include monitoring and controlling concentration levels,

shutting-off and shutting-down potential sources of ignition and ensuring the type of
protection is "intrinsically safe".
The information and actions required to safeguard these protection measures are
described in the respective device documentation and user manual. Moreover, respective
warning signs have been clearly affixed to the machine.
The aforementioned protection concept is fully implemented by the FAS-4. The device can
thus be used for its intended purpose without any general safety concerns regarding its
explosion protection.
Trier, Germany, 22.06.2015 Principal engineer

542 ha
.
Dipl.-Ing. (FH) Haubrich
Page 14 of 15
List of literature / documents
The following literature was used to prepare this technical report:
TRBS 2152 Hazardous potentially explosive atmospheres
TRBS 1201 Testing work equipment and systems requiring supervision
TRBS 2152 Hazardous potentially explosive atmospheres – General
TRBS 2153 Avoiding ignition hazards as a result of electrostatic charges
VDE 0165 Part 1 Electrical systems in potentially explosive areas

August 1998 (DIN EN 60079-14)
FAS-4 Technical documentation, updated September 2014, in particular
"Additional Manual according to 94/9/EG (ATEX) for FAS-4"
Page 15 of 15
Sistema de aplicação de aroma FAS4
Anexo 1
Interfaces
Diagramas elétricos
Maker FAS
female male
XS0
PE PE
0 0
PE
A1 A1
L1 400V/25A 1 1 L1 400V/16A 2 4 6
A2 A2
L2 400V/25A 2 2 L2 400V/16A
A3 A3 XS0.5 F 1 3 5
L3 400V/25A 3 3 L3 400V/16A
B1 B1
N 400V/25A 4 4 N 400V/16A 2 4 6
B2 B2
Spare 5 5 Spare
B3 B3 XS0.4 E 1 3 5
Spare 6 6 Spare
7 8 9 10 11 12
C1 C1
+24VDC 7 7 24V+ (DC) 24P6 XS0.3 D
C2 C2 1 2 3 4 5 6
Coding Maker 8 8 Code 1 (E8.0)
C3 C3
Coding Maker 9 9 Code 2 (E8.1) 7 8 9 10 11 12
C4 C4
Coding Maker 10 10 Code 3 (E8.2) XS0.2 C
C5 C5 1 2 3 4 5 6
C6 C6
Maker Stop (Opener NC) 12 12 Maker Stop (E8.4)
C7 C7 1 2 3
Start Spraying (Opener NC) 13 13 Start Spraying (E8.5)
C8 C8 B
External Voltage (potential free) 14 14 4K2 Ready for Production
C9 C9 XS0.1
External Voltage (potential free) 15 15 Ready for Production
Spare C10 C10 1 2 3
16 16 Warning or Alarm (A12.4) 24V+ (DC) A
C11 C11
Ground 17 17 0V- (DC) M
C12 C12
Spare 18 18 Spare
PE
D1 D1
Speed Encoder Signal (0-20mA) 19 19 Speed Signal (0-20mA)
D2 D2
GND (0-20mA) 20 20 GND (0-20mA)
D3 D3
PT 100 + Temperature Front XC1 21 21 IB 142
D4 D4
PT 100 - Temperature Front XC1 22 22 IB 142
D5 D5
PT 100 + Temperature Rear XC1 23 23 IB 144
D6 D6
PT 100 - Temperature Rear XC1 24 24 IB 144
D7 D7
Speed Encoder Signal 24V+ 25 25 24V+ (DC) 24P6
D8 D8
Speed Encoder Signal 0V- 26 26 0V- (DC) M
D9 D9
Spare 27 27 Spare
D10 D10
Spare 28 28 Spare
D11 D11
Spare 29 29 Spare
D12 D12
Spare 30 30 Spare
Heating Front XC1 / 24V+ 31

E1
31
E1
+XC1 / 1K5 (AC) XC1 = Front leg (Strang)
E2 E2
Heating Front XC1 / 0V- 32 32 24V (AC) N
Heating Rear XC1 / 24V+ E3 E3
33 33 +XC1 / 2K1 (AC)
Heating Rear XC1 / 0V- E4 E4
34 34 24V (AC) N
E5 E5
Spare 35 35 Spare
E6 E6
Spare 36 36 Spare
F1 F1
Spare 37 37 Spare
F2 F2
Spare 38 38 Spare
F3 F3
Spare 39 39 Spare FAS 4
F4 F4
Spare 40 40 Spare
F5 F5
Spare 41 41 Spare
Spare F6 F6 Plug Connection between FAS and Maker
42 42 Spare
BAT Uberlândia
PE PE
0 0 Zeichnungs.-Nr: 34-XXXX Bereich: Maker Datum: 09.12.2010 Blatt: 1/1
Maker FAS
female male
XS0
PE PE
0 0
PE
A1 A1
L1 400V/25A 1 1 L1 400V/16A 2 4 6
A2 A2
L2 400V/25A 2 2 L2 400V/16A
A3 A3 XS0.5 F 1 3 5
L3 400V/25A 3 3 L3 400V/16A
B1 B1
N 400V/25A 4 4 N 400V/16A 2 4 6
B2 B2
Spare 5 5 Spare
B3 B3 XS0.4 E 1 3 5
Spare 6 6 Spare
7 8 9 10 11 12
C1 C1
+24VDC 7 7 24V+ (DC) 24P6 XS0.3 D
C2 C2 1 2 3 4 5 6
C3 C3
Coding Maker 9 9 Code 2 (E8.1) 7 8 9 10 11 12
C4 C4
Coding Maker 10 10 Code 3 (E8.2) XS0.2 C
C5 C5 1 2 3 4 5 6
C6 C6
Maker Stop (Opener NC) 12 12 Maker Stop (E8.4)
C7 C7 1 2 3
Start Spraying (Opener NC) 13 13 Start Spraying (E8.5)
C8 C8 B
External Voltage (potential free) 14 14 4K2 Ready for Production
C9 C9 XS0.1
External Voltage (potential free) 15 15 Ready for Production
Spare C10 C10 1 2 3
16 16 Warning or Alarm (A12.4) 24V+ (DC) A
C11 C11
Ground 17 17 0V- (DC) M
C12 C12
Spare 18 18 Spare
PE
D1 D1
Speed Encoder Signal (0-20mA) 19 19 Speed Signal (0-20mA)
D2 D2
GND (0-20mA) 20 20 GND (0-20mA)
D3 D3
D4 D4
D5 D5
PT 100 + Temperature Rear XC1 23 23 IB 144
D6 D6
D7 D7
Speed Encoder Signal 24V+ 25 25 24V+ (DC) 24P6
D8 D8
Speed Encoder Signal 0V- 26 26 0V- (DC) M
D9 D9
D10 D10
D11 D11
PT 100 + Temperature Right XC2 29 29 IB 164
D12 D12
Heating Front XC1 / 24V+ 31

E1
31
E1
+XC1 / 1K5 (AC) XC1 = Front leg (Strang)
E2 E2
Heating Front XC1 / 0V- 32 32 24V (AC) N XC2 = Rear leg (Strang)
Heating Rear XC1 / 24V+ E3 E3
33 33 +XC1 / 2K1 (AC)
Heating Rear XC1 / 0V- E4 E4
34 34 24V (AC) N
E5 E5
Spare 35 35 Spare
E6 E6
Spare 36 36 Spare
F1 F1
Heating Front XC2 / 24V+ 37 37 +XC2 / 1K5 (AC)
F2 F2
Heating Front XC2 / 0V- 38 38 24V (AC) N
F3 F3
Heating Rear XC2 / 24V+ 39 39 +XC2 / 2K1 (AC) FAS 4
F4 F4
Heating Rear XC2 / 0V- 40 40 24V (AC) N
F5 F5
Spare 41 41 Spare
Spare F6 F6 Plug Connection between FAS and Maker
42 42 Spare
BAT Uberlândia
PE PE
0 0 Zeichnungs.-Nr: 34-XXXX Bereich: Maker Datum: 09.12.2010 Blatt: 1/1
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
customer : Souza Cruz S.A., Uberlandia, Brazil
plant : FAS-UNIT 4-334

UNI TWIN 120 C 0
drawing-no.: 86-01641-02
Passing on and copying of this document is prohibited. Respect protective note ISO 16016!
technical data item designation:
Item designation is given without unit identifier

operating voltage: 400/230V AC/50Hz and location designation.
control voltage : 24V DC / 24V AC The complete item designation contains,
the unit identifier (in the richt bottem of the current page (=) ),
auxiliary supply : possibly the location designation ( (+) ),
regulations : VDE and the item designation.
The devices of another plant or unit (=) or location (+)
are described corresponding to them.
Release: 15.12.2020
EPLAN VERSION: 2.9.4
2
Date 15.12.2020 unit = FAS
drawer gillena Souza Cruz S.A., Uberlandia, Brazil FAS-UNIT 4-334 86-01641-02 location +G
Modified 27.11.2018
UNI TWIN 120 C 0 cover sheet Bl. 1
Examiner Page 1 of 106 5 Bl.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
terminal ledges overview plug overview
X0 = feeding 400V/50HZ XS1.2 = Harting Stecker digital signals flavour tank
X1 = main current 400V/50HZ XS1.3 = Harting Stecker analog signals flavour tank
X2 = control voltage 230V AC XS2.1 = Harting Stecker external heating system
X3 = control voltage 24V DC XS2.2 = Harting Stecker digital signals external machine
X4 = analog signals XS2.3 = Harting Stecker analog signals external machine
X5 = servo amplifier
1 3
Modified 27.11.2018
UNI TWIN 120 C 0 terminal ledges overview Bl. 2
Examiner 5 Bl.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Index
Plant location Page Denomination of pages Revision Draughtsman
date
FAS G 1 cover sheet 27.11.2018 gillena

FAS G 2 terminal ledges overview 27.11.2018 gillena
FAS G 3 table of contents 15.12.2020 gillena
FAS VIEW 1 assembly 11 M1:5 (DIN A3) 27.11.2018 gillena
FAS VIEW 2 assembly 10 M1:5 (DIN A3) 27.11.2018 gillena
FAS VIEW 3 process overview 15.12.2020 gillena
FAS ET 1 feeding power supply 27.11.2018 gillena
FAS ET 2 control voltage 230V AC 27.11.2018 gillena
FAS ET 3 control voltage 24V DC 27.11.2018 gillena
FAS ET 4 control voltage 24V DC 23.01.2019 gillena
FAS ET 5 control voltage 24V AC 27.11.2018 gillena
FAS ET 6 safety monitoring 23.01.2019 gillena
FAS ET 7 digital input generally 27.11.2018 gillena

FAS ET 8 digital output generally 27.11.2018 gillena
FAS PLC 1 PLC overview Beckhoff 27.11.2018 gillena
FAS PLC 2 overview digital input 27.11.2018 gillena
FAS PLC 3 overview digital output 27.11.2018 gillena
FAS PLC 4 overview analog input PT100 27.11.2018 gillena
FAS PLC 5 overview analog input 0/4-20mA 27.11.2018 gillena
FAS PLC 6 overview analog output 4-20mA / 0-10V 27.11.2018 gillena
FAS PLC 7 overview serial interface 27.11.2018 gillena
FAS PE0 1 heating system PE0 27.11.2018 gillena
FAS PE0 4 agitator PE0 27.11.2018 gillena
FAS PE0 5 digital input PE0 27.11.2018 gillena
FAS PE0 6 spare 27.11.2018 gillena
FAS PE0 8 analog input PT100 PE0 27.11.2018 gillena
FAS PE0 10 analog input 0-10V PE0 27.11.2018 gillena
FAS PE0 11 analog output 4-20mA PE0 27.11.2018 gillena
FAS PE0 13 isolation amplifier 27.11.2018 gillena
FAS PE0 14 isolation amplifier 27.11.2018 gillena
FAS FT 1 digital input flavour tank 28.11.2018 gillena
KOE4E/31.Aug.2006
2 4
Modified 15.12.2020
UNI TWIN 120 C 0 table of contents Bl. 3
Examiner 5 Bl.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Index
date
FAS FT 2 digital output flavour tank 27.11.2018 gillena

FAS FT 3 analog input 0-20mA flavour tank 27.11.2018 gillena
FAS FT 4 signal to flavour tank 27.11.2018 gillena
FAS FT 5 signal flavour tank connection 28.11.2018 gillena
FAS PE1 2 servo amplifier PE1 27.11.2018 gillena
FAS PE1 3 micro motion PE1 27.11.2018 gillena
FAS PE1 5 serial interface 27.11.2018 gillena
FAS PE1 6 digital output PE1 27.11.2018 gillena
FAS PE1 10 analog input 4-20mA PE1 27.11.2018 gillena
FAS PE1 11 analog output 0-10V PE1 27.11.2018 gillena
FAS XC1 1 heating system XC1 27.11.2018 gillena

FAS XC1 3 digital input XC1 27.11.2018 gillena
FAS XC1 4 digital output XC1 27.11.2018 gillena
FAS XC1 5 analog input PT100 XC1 27.11.2018 gillena
FAS XC1 6 analog input 0-20mA XC1 27.11.2018 gillena
FAS XC1 7 spare 27.11.2018 gillena
FAS XC1 8 signal to external machine 27.11.2018 gillena
FAS PE2 2 servo amplifier PE2 27.11.2018 gillena
FAS PE2 3 micro motion PE2 27.11.2018 gillena
FAS PE2 6 digital output PE2 27.11.2018 gillena
FAS PE2 10 analog input 4-20mA PE2 27.11.2018 gillena
FAS PE2 11 analog output 0-10V PE2 27.11.2018 gillena
FAS XC2 3 digital input XC2 27.11.2018 gillena
FAS XC2 4 digital output XC2 27.11.2018 gillena
FAS XC2 5 analog input PT100 XC2 27.11.2018 gillena
FAS TERMINALS 1 =FAS+ET-X0 27.11.2018 gillena
KOE4E/31.Aug.2006
3 5
Modified 28.11.2018
Examiner 5 Bl.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Index
date
FAS TERMINALS 2 =FAS+ET-X3 23.01.2019 gillena

FAS TERMINALS 3 =FAS+ET-XE 27.11.2018 gillena
FAS TERMINALS 4 =FAS+ET-XS0.1 27.11.2018 gillena
FAS TERMINALS 7 =FAS+PE0-X2 27.11.2018 gillena
FAS TERMINALS 11 =FAS+FT-X3 27.11.2018 gillena
FAS TERMINALS 12 =FAS+FT-XS3.2 28.11.2018 gillena
FAS TERMINALS 13 =FAS+FT-XS3.3 27.11.2018 gillena
FAS TERMINALS 18 =FAS+XC1-XFRONT 27.11.2018 gillena
FAS TERMINALS 19 =FAS+XC1-XS0.2 27.11.2018 gillena

FAS TERMINALS 26 =FAS+XC2-XREAR 27.11.2018 gillena
KOE4E/31.Aug.2006
4 +VIEW/1
Modified 23.01.2019
Examiner 5 Bl.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1200
1070
346
+ET-3H1
160
+ET-8H3 +ET-8H2
200
200 +ET-1S1
+ET-7S4 +ET-8H8
1440
1640
200 200
assembly 11
+G/5 2
drawer gillena Souza Cruz S.A., Uberlandia, Brazil FAS-UNIT 4-334 86-01641-02 location + VIEW
Modified 27.11.2018
UNI TWIN 120 C 0 assembly 11 Bl. 1
Examiner M1:5 (DIN A3) 5 Bl.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1 - +ET-3F1 57 - +PLC-3A3
2 - +ET-5F1 58 - +PLC-3A4
3 - +PE0-1F1 59 - +PLC-3A5
4 - +PE0-1F5 60 - +PLC-3A6
5 - +PE0-2F1 61 - +PLC-3A7
6 - +PE0-2F5 62 - +PLC-4A1
7 - +PE1-1F1 63 - +PLC-4A2
1120
8 - +PE2-1F1 64 - +PLC-4A3
9 - +PE0-3F1 65 - +PLC-4A4
99
10 - +XC1-1F1 66 - +PLC-4A5
11 - +XC1-1F5 67 - +PLC-4A6
12 - +XC2-1F1 68 - +PLC-5A1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
13 - +XC2-1F5 69 - +PLC-5A2
14 - +ET-3F3 70 - +PLC-5A3
15 - +ET-3F5 71 - +PLC-1A3
16 - +ET-3F6 72 - +PLC-5A4
17 - +ET-3F7 73 - +PLC-5A5
18 - +ET-1FI1 74 - +PLC-6A1
termin.
24......37 19 - +ET-2F1 75 - +PLC-6A2
18 19 20 31 21 32 22 20 - +ET-8K7 76 - +PLC-6A3
21 - +ET-6A0 77 - +PLC-1A5
22 - +ET-6A3 78 - +PLC-7A1
23 - 79 - +PLC-7A2
24 - +PE0-2K4 80 - +PLC-7A3
25 - +PE0-7K7 81 - +PLC-7A4
26 - +PE0-7K7.1 82 - +PLC-7A5
27 - +PE0-7K7.2 83 - +PE0-1K1
100
1520
38 39 40 41 42 43 44 28 - +PE0-7K7.3 84 - +PE0-1K5
terminals
29 - 85 - +PE0-2K1
30 - +FT-2K1 86 - +PE0-2K5
31 - +FT-2K5 87 - +PE0-3K1
32 - +FT-2K6 88 - +PE1-1K1
33 - 89 - +XC1-1K1
34 - 90 - +XC1-1K5
35 - 91 - +XC1-2K1
36 - +XC1-4K2 92 - +XC1-2K5
37 - 93 - +PE2-1K1
45 46................................................................82 38 - +PE0-13A1 94 - +XC2-1K1
39 - +PE0-13A5 95 - +XC2-1K5
40 - +PE0-14A1 96 - +XC2-2K1
41 - +FT-4A5 97 - +XC2-2K5
42 - +FT-5A1 98 - +ET-2X1
43 - +ET-3B1 99 - pressure control valve
44 - +ET-5T1 100 - +PE0-10B1
terminals 45 - +PLC-1A0
83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97
98 46 - +PLC-2A1
47 - +PLC-2A2
48 - +PLC-2A3
49 - +PLC-2A4
50 - +PLC-2A5
51 - +PLC-2A6
assembly 10 52 - +PLC-2A7
53 - +PLC-1A2
54 - +PLC-3A1
55 - +PLC-1A3
56 - +PLC-3A2
1 3
Modified 27.11.2018
UNI TWIN 120 C 0 assembly 10 Bl. 2
Examiner M1:5 (DIN A3) 5 Bl.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
SOLENOID LEVEL SWITCH

NOZZLE FRONT NOZZLE REAR
+PE1 +PE2 4
4 4
-6Y5_1 -6Y5_1
1 4 2 1 1 4 2 1
+PE1 +PE2 3
-6Y4_1 2 3 3 -6Y4_1 2 3 3
4 4 2
2 2 1
+PE1 +PE2
-3A3 -3A3 TEMPERATURE SENSOR
1 1
4 4 4 4 4 4
2 2
+PE1 +PE2
P P
-10B5 1 -10B5 1
4 4
2 2
+PE1 +PE2
+PE1 +PE1 +PE1
1 -2M1 1 -2M1
-6Y3_1 -6Y5_1 -6Y4_1/
6 6
+PE1 +PE2 +PE2 +PE2 +PE2
-6Y3_1 2 -6Y3_1 2 -6Y3_1 -6Y5_1 -6Y4_1
3 1 3 1
3 3 3
2
2 1
1 1 2
6 4 6 4 6 4 6 4
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
6 4 6 4 6 4 6 4
CLEANING TANK BUFFERTANK

2 4
Modified 15.12.2020
UNI TWIN 120 C 0 process overview Bl. 3
Examiner 5 Bl.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
AIR SUPPLY
NOZZLE FRONT NOZZLE REAR
4 4 6
1
FILTER REGULATION
+PE1 4 +PE2 4
-6Y7 -6Y7 2
2 2
10 3 10 3 6
1 1 1
7 3
8 4
9 5
10 6
2
COUPLING 4 4 1
1 2
6 6
6
4 2
2
+FT +PE0 7 3
-2Y2 -10B1
1 1
6 4 6 4
AIR 8 4
6 8 5 9
1 spare
2 spare
3 air supply 9 5
4 climatisation electric cabinet
5 proportional pressure regulator
6 coupling
7 air pressure sensor / air valves
8 control air solenoid valve 10 6
nozzle front
9 control air solenoid valve
nozzle rear
10 spare
2
3 5
Modified 27.11.2018
Examiner 5 Bl.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
+PE1 +PE1 +PE1 +PE2 +PE2 +PE2 +PE0

-6Y3_1 -6Y5_1 -6Y4_1 -6Y3_1 -6Y5_1 -6Y4_1 -7Y8
11 11 11 11 11 11
12 12 12 12 12 12 11
4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
4 4 4 4 4 4
2 2 2 2 2 2
1 1 1 1 1 1
+PE1 +PE1 +PE1 +PE2 +PE2 +PE2
-6Y3 -6Y5 -6Y4 -6Y3 -6Y5 -6Y4
climatisation
electric
4 4 4 4 4 4 4
cabinet
6 6
2
2 pressure
+PE0 control
-5B6 1 valve
1
6 6
7 4
4 +ET/1
Modified 27.11.2018
Examiner 5 Bl.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
400/230V/50 Hz
L1 / 2.1
L2 / 2.1
L3 / 2.1
N / 2.1
PE / 2.1
2 4 6 N. 13 1 3 5
-1FI1 -8K7
25A/30mA 1 3 5 N 14 /8.7 2 4 6
/7.7
1L1 / 5.1
1L2 / 5.1
1L3 / 5.1
L1.1 / 3.1
N.1 / 3.1
T2 T4 T6
-1S1
25A L1 L3 L5 1 3 5
+FT-2K5
+FT/2.5 2 4 6
-X0 L1 L2 L3 N PE -X0 1L1 1L2 1L3 N PE
-XS0.1 1 2 3 4 PE XS3.1 1 2 3 4 PE
=XC1 =FT
external flavour
machine L1 L2 L3 N PE tank L1 L2 L3 N PE
400/230V/50Hz
400/230V/50Hz
power supply
power supply
flavour tank
25A
+VIEW/5 2
drawer gillena Souza Cruz S.A., Uberlandia, Brazil FAS-UNIT 4-334 86-01641-02 location + ET
Modified 27.11.2018
UNI TWIN 120 C 0 feeding Bl. 1
Examiner power supply 8 Bl.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
400/230V/50 Hz
1.8 / L1 L1
1.8 / L2 L2
1.8 / L3 L3
1.8 / N N / 5.1
1.8 / PE PE / 3.1
-2F1
C16A 1
L N PE
-2X1
230V AC
service
1 3
Modified 27.11.2018
UNI TWIN 120 C 0 control voltage 230V AC Bl. 2
Examiner 8 Bl.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
230V/50 Hz
1.8 / L1.1
1.8 / N.1
2.8 / PE PE / 5.1
-3F1
C6A 1
-3B1
L N PE
power supply
SITOP POWER DIP-switch:
6EP 1336-3BA10 1/A : Off
230V/24V DC 20A 2/B : On
+24V M
XE 1
X2
XE 2
-3H1
wh X1
2 2 13 2 2 13
-3F3 -3F5 -3F6 -3F7

C10A 1 C4A 1 14 C6A 1 C6A 1 14
/7.2 /7.2
-6A3 23 -6A3 13
/6.5 /6.5
safety safety
unit unit
24 14
M
24P3
24P5
24P6
24P7
4.1 /
4.1 /
+PE0/4.1 /
6.1 /
+PLC/1.1 /
PLC components
agitator
24V DC
24V DC
24V DC
24V DC
output
plant
IPC
2 4
Modified 27.11.2018
UNI TWIN 120 C 0 control voltage 24V DC Bl. 3
Examiner 8 Bl.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
24VDC
3.3 / 24P3 24P3 / +PLC/1.1
3.1 / M M / 6.1
PORT1 / +PLC/1.1
-X3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 PE
PLC SERVICE CP3LINK SERVICE CP3LINK
-IPC -XS1
1 2 PE 1 2 3 5 6 7 8 4 A1 A2
- + X104 X106 X105
- + - +
Battery NC Power PC on Power
Status
-C9900-U330 CP7202
Akkupack IPC
additional
24V DC
24V DC
24V DC
service
screen
IAkku
IAkku
port
IPC
3 5
Modified 23.01.2019
UNI TWIN 120 C 0 control voltage 24V DC Bl. 4
Examiner 8 Bl.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
400/230V/50 Hz
1.8 / 1L1 1L1 / +PE0/1.1
1.8 / 1L2 1L2 / +PE0/1.1
1.8 / 1L3 1L3 / +PE0/1.1
2.8 / N N / +PE0/1.1
3.8 / PE PE / +PLC/1.1
2 13
-5F1
C10A 1 14
/7.3
L N
-5T1
ELTRA STS 1,0
prim. 230V AC/ 24N 24L
sek. 24V AC
1,0kVA
XE 3
XE 4
24N
24L
+PE0/3.1 /
+PE0/3.1 /
external
heating
24V AC
system
4 6
Modified 27.11.2018
UNI TWIN 120 C 0 control voltage 24V AC Bl. 5
Examiner 8 Bl.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
-6A0 gas warning unit for ethanol

Fab.: GfG Dortmund type GMA 41
fault alarm 1 alarm 2 alarm 3
0,2-1 mA
+24V DC
signal
24V DC
reset
gnd
gnd
+ -
29 30 28 36 35 11 10 12 2 1 3 5 4 6 8 7 9 32 31
6A0_3 / 7.6
6A0_10 / 7.3
6A0_36 / 8.1
24V DC
3.6 / 24P6 24P6 / 7.1
4.8 / M M / 8.1
-6A3 A1 T1 IN1 T2 IN2 T3 IN3 T4 IN
/3.5 SIEMENS + F/S

13 23 33 41
/3.6
/8.6
Logic
Autostart
br gn ws
14 24 34 42
-
A2
safety unit
=PE0 Siemens
-6A1 2 4 1
6A3 / 7.7
3SK1111-1AB30
measure transmitter
type: MWG 0238EX
no. 93100562
5 7
Modified 23.01.2019
UNI TWIN 120 C 0 safety monitoring Bl. 6
Examiner 8 Bl.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
24V DC
6.8 / 24P6 24P6 / +PE0/5.1
13 13 13 23 13
-3F5 -5F1 -7S4 -1FI1

/3.5 14 /5.2 14 14 24 /1.2 14
13
-3F7
/3.7
24P6.7
14
+PE0/7.1 /
/ 6.8
/ 6.8
/ 6.8
6A0_10
6A0_3
6A3
11
+PE0
-7K7.2 12 14
+PE0/7.6
+PLC-2A1 1 5 2 6 3 7 4 8
IX0.0 IX0.1 IX0.2 IX0.3 IX0.4 IX0.5 IX0.6 IX0.7

+PLC/2.4 +PLC/2.5 +PLC/2.4 +PLC/2.5 +PLC/2.4 +PLC/2.5 +PLC/2.4 +PLC/2.5
BECKHOFF
KS1418
gas warning
gas warning
gas warning
cold system
agitator on
interrupter
selection
warning
heating
24V DC
24V AC
ground
system
system
system
system
failure
failure
circuit
alarm
fault
fault
fuse
fuse
on
6 8
Modified 27.11.2018
UNI TWIN 120 C 0 digital input generally Bl. 7
Examiner 8 Bl.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
+PLC-3A1
BECKHOFF
KS2408
QX12.0 QX12.1 QX12.2 QX12.3 QX12.4 QX12.5 QX12.6 QX12.7
1 5 2 6 3 7 4 8
-6A3 33
/6.5
safety
unit
6.8 / 6A0_36
34
-XS0.2 10
=XC1
external
machine
A1
A2
X1 X1 A1 X1
-8H2 -8H3 -8K7 -8H8

rd X2 gn X2 A2 ge X2
-XS0.2 11
6.8 / M M / +PLC/1.1
1 2 /1.5
3 4 /1.5
5 6 /1.5
emergency stop
heating system
warning FAS
gas warning
gas warning
warning or
production
unit alarm
alarm FAS
alarm FAS
unit reset
ready for
preselect
(option)
(option)
heating
fas unit
7 +PLC/1
Modified 27.11.2018
UNI TWIN 120 C 0 digital output generally Bl. 8
Examiner 8 Bl.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
24V DC
+ET/4.8 / 24P3 24P3
+ET/3.7 / 24P7 24P7 / +PE0/5.1

+ET/8.8 / M M / +PE0/1.1
+ET/5.8 / PE PE / +PE0/1.1
-1A0 -1A2 -1A3 -1A4 -1A5

/2.4 /3.4 /3.4 /5.4 /7.4
RUN
ERR
24V 0V 24V 0V
X1 I/ORUN
IN
I/OERR + + + + + + + + + +
BECKHOFF
- - - - - - - - - -
BK1120
INTERFACE
CONFIG.
PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE
INTERFACE
CONFIG.
X2
OUT KS9100 KS9100 KS9100 KS9400
PORT1
+ET/4.6 /
+ET/8 2
drawer gillena Souza Cruz S.A., Uberlandia, Brazil FAS-UNIT 4-334 86-01641-02 location + PLC
Modified 27.11.2018
UNI TWIN 120 C 0 PLC overview Beckhoff Bl. 1
Examiner 7 Bl.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
function description device page page device function description
4 8
spare -2A7:4 +XC2/3.7 IX10.6 IX10.7 +XC2/3.7 +XC2-1F5:14 fuse failure 24VAC heating XC2
3 7
spare -2A7:3 +XC2/3.5 IX10.4 IX10.5 +XC2/3.6 -2A7:7 spare
2
8 CH. INPUT
KS1418
-2A7 6
1 5
4 8
spare -2A6:4 +XC1/3.7 IX8.6 IX8.7 +XC1/3.7 +XC1-1F5:14 fuse failure 24VAC heating XC1
3 7
external machine operate +XC1/3.5 IX8.4 IX8.5 +XC1/3.6 external machine production
2
8 CH. INPUT
KS1418
-2A6 6
external machine code 4 =XC1+XC1-4 +XC1/3.3 IX8.2 IX8.3 +XC1/3.4 =XC1+XC1-8 external machine code 8
1 5
external machine code 1 =XC1+XC1-1 +XC1/3.2 IX8.0 IX8.1 +XC1/3.3 =XC1+XC1-2 external machine code 2
4 8
spare -2A5:4 +PE2/4.7 IX6.6 IX6.7 +PE2/4.7 +PE2-1F1:14 PE2 fuse failure 230VAC heating system
3 7
return direction flavour tank valve =PE2+PE2-4B5:BK +PE2/4.5 IX6.4 IX6.5 +PE2/4.6 -2A5:7 spare
2
8 CH. INPUT
KS1418
-2A5 6
suction direction flavour tank valve =PE2+PE2-4B3:BK +PE2/4.3 IX6.2 IX6.3 +PE2/4.4 =PE2+PE2-4B4:BK circulation direction nozzle valve
1 5
servo amplifier no fault +PE2-X5:7 +PE2/4.2 IX6.0 IX6.1 +PE2/4.3 -2A5:5 spare
4 8
spare -2A4:4 +PE1/4.7 IX4.6 IX4.7 +PE1/4.7 +PE1-1F1:14 PE1 fuse failure 230VAC heating system
3 7
return direction flavour tank valve =PE1+PE1-4B5:BK +PE1/4.5 IX4.4 IX4.5 +PE1/4.6 -2A4:7 spare
2
8 CH. INPUT
KS1418
-2A4 6
suction direction flavour tank valve =PE1+PE1-4B3:BK +PE1/4.3 IX4.2 IX4.3 +PE1/4.4 =PE1+PE1-4B4:BK circulation direction nozzle valve
1 5
servo amplifier no fault +PE1-X5:7 +PE1/4.2 IX4.0 IX4.1 +PE1/4.3 -2A4:5 spare
4 8
filling valve connected =PE0+PE0-5B7:BK +PE0/5.7 IX2.6 IX2.7 +PE0/5.7 +PE0-3F1:14 PE0 fuse failure 230VAC heating system
3 7
flavour tank full +PE0-13A5:9 +PE0/5.5 IX2.4 IX2.5 +PE0/5.6 =PE0+PE0-5B6:BK system air pressure O.K.
2
8 CH. INPUT
KS1418
-2A3 6
flavour tank empty +PE0-13A1:12 +PE0/5.3 IX2.2 IX2.3 +PE0/5.4 +PE0-13A1:9 flavour tank level half
1 5
cleaning tank min. +PE0-14A1:12 +PE0/5.2 IX2.0 IX2.1 +PE0/5.3 +PE0-14A1:9 cleaning tank not full
4 8
clutch connected =FT+FT-1S7:BK +FT/1.7 IX1.6 IX1.7 +FT/1.7 =FT+FT-1S8:BK clutch disconnected
3 7
flavour tank alarm :24 +FT/1.5 IX1.4 IX1.5 +FT/1.6 :23 flavour tank connection o.k.
2
8 CH. INPUT
KS1418
-2A2 6
flavour tank heating system on :24 +FT/1.3 IX1.2 IX1.3 +FT/1.4 :24 flavour tank agitator on
1 5
flavour tank pre-empty +FT-4A5:9 +FT/1.2 IX1.0 IX1.1 +FT/1.3 +FT-4A5:12 flavour tank empty
4 8
gas warning system alarm +ET-6A3:42 +ET/7.7 IX0.6 IX0.7 +ET/7.7 +ET-1FI1:14 ground fault circuit interrupter
3 7
agitator on cold system +PE0-7K7.2:14 +ET/7.5 IX0.4 IX0.5 +ET/7.6 +ET-6A0:3 gas warning system warning
2
8 CH. INPUT
KS1418
-2A1 6
gas warning system fault +ET-6A0:10 +ET/7.3 IX0.2 IX0.3 +ET/7.4 +ET-7S4:14 selection heating system on
1 5
fuse failure 24V DC +ET-3F7:14 +ET/7.2 IX0.0 IX0.1 +ET/7.3 +ET-5F1:14 fuse failure 24V AC
-1A0
OV
0V
PE
/1.1
24V
24V
0V
PE
I/ORUN
I/OERR
INTERFACE
BK1120
RUN
ERR
CONFIG.
BECKHOFF
A
OUT
X1
X2
A
IN
1 3
Modified 27.11.2018
UNI TWIN 120 C 0 overview digital input Bl. 2
Examiner 7 Bl.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
4 8
spare -3A7:4 +XC2/4.7 QX18.6 QX18.7 +XC2/4.7 -3A7:8 spare
3 7
2
8 CH. OUTPUT
KS2408
-3A7 6
enable heating external Y +XC2-2K1 +XC2/4.3 QX18.2 QX18.3 +XC2/4.4 +XC2-2K5 enable heating nozzle
1 5
enable heating tube package +XC2-1K1 +XC2/4.2 QX18.0 QX18.1 +XC2/4.3 +XC2-1K5 enable heating external X
4 8
3 7
FAS unit ready for production +XC1-4K2:A1 +XC1/4.5 QX17.4 QX17.5 +XC1/4.6 -3A6:7 spare
2
8 CH. OUTPUT
KS2408
-3A6 6
enable heating external Y +XC1-2K1 +XC1/4.3 QX17.2 QX17.3 +XC1/4.4 +XC1-2K5 enable heating nozzle
1 5
enable heating tube package +XC1-1K1 +XC1/4.2 QX17.0 QX17.1 +XC1/4.3 +XC1-1K5 enable heating external X
4 8
air flow nozzle valve =PE2+PE2-6Y7:A1 +PE2/6.7 QX16.6 QX16.7 +PE2/6.7 +PE2-X5:4 enable servo amplifier
3 7
return direction flavour tank valve =PE2+PE2-6Y5:A1 +PE2/6.5 QX16.4 QX16.5 +PE2/6.6 -3A5:7 spare
2
8 CH. OUTPUT
KS2408
-3A5 6
suction direction flavour tank valve =PE2+PE2-6Y3:A1 +PE2/6.3 QX16.2 QX16.3 +PE2/6.4 =PE2+PE2-6Y4:A1 circulation direction nozzle valve
1 5
enable heating mounting plate +PE2-1K1 +PE2/6.2 QX16.0 QX16.1 +PE2/6.3 -3A5:5 spare
4 8
air flow nozzle valve =PE1+PE1-6Y7:A1 +PE1/6.7 QX15.6 QX15.7 +PE1/6.7 +PE1-X5:4 enable servo amplifier
3 7
return direction flavour tank valve =PE1+PE1-6Y5:A1 +PE1/6.5 QX15.4 QX15.5 +PE1/6.6 -3A4:7 spare
2
8 CH. OUTPUT
KS2408
-3A4 6
suction direction flavour tank valve =PE1+PE1-6Y3:A1 +PE1/6.3 QX15.2 QX15.3 +PE1/6.4 =PE1+PE1-6Y4:A1 circulation direction nozzle valve
1 5
enable heating mounting plate +PE1-1K1 +PE1/6.2 QX15.0 QX15.1 +PE1/6.3 -3A4:5 spare
4 8
agitator flavour tank +PE0-7K7:A1 +PE0/7.5 QX14.6 QX14.7 +PE0/7.7 =PE0+PE0-7Y8:A1 filling internal flavour tank valve
3 7
enable heating filling valve +PE0-3K1 +PE0/7.4 QX14.4 QX14.5 +PE0/7.4 +PE0-2K4:A1 heating internal fan
2
8 CH. OUTPUT
KS2408
-3A3 6
enable heating internal +PE0-2K1 +PE0/7.3 QX14.2 QX14.3 +PE0/7.3 +PE0-2K5 enable heating connecting FAS - tank
1 5
enable heating cleaning tank +PE0-1K1 +PE0/7.2 QX14.0 QX14.1 +PE0/7.2 +PE0-1K5 enable heating flavour tank
4 8
spare -3A2:4 +FT/2.7 QX13.6 QX13.7 +FT/2.7 -3A2:8 spare
3 7
TW ON +FT-2K5:A1 +FT/2.5 QX13.4 QX13.5 +FT/2.6 -3A2:7 spare
2
8 CH. OUTPUT
KS2408
-3A2 6
spare -3A2:2 +FT/2.3 QX13.2 QX13.3 +FT/2.4 -3A2:6 spare
1 5
heating system FAS on +FT-2K1:A1 +FT/2.2 QX13.0 QX13.1 +FT/2.3 =FT+FT-2Y2:A1 clutch connection
=FAS+PLC-1A3
0V
KS9100
PE
/1.3
24V
0V
PE
4 8
emergency stop heating system +ET-6A3:33 +ET/8.7 QX12.6 QX12.7 +ET/8.7 +ET-8H8:X1 heating preselect
3 7
alarm FAS :A1 +ET/8.5 QX12.4 QX12.5 +ET/8.6 -3A1:7 warning or alarm FAS (option)
2
8 CH. OUTPUT
KS2408
-3A1 6
fas unit ready for production +ET-8H3:X1 +ET/8.3 QX12.2 QX12.3 +ET/8.4 -3A1:6 warning FAS (option)
1 5
gas warning unit reset +ET-6A0:36 +ET/8.2 QX12.0 QX12.1 +ET/8.3 +ET-8H2:X1 gas warning unit alarm
=FAS+PLC-1A2
0V
KS9100
PE
/1.2
24V
0V
PE
2 4
Modified 27.11.2018
UNI TWIN 120 C 0 overview digital output Bl. 3
Examiner 7 Bl.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
7 8
heating nozzle +XC2-5R7: 1 +XC2/5.7 +IB166 +XC2/5.7 +XC2-5R7: 2
3 4
temperature external Y =XC2+XC2-5R5: 1 +XC2/5.5 +XC2/5.5 =XC2+XC2-5R5: 2
+IB164
5
PT100 ANALOG
INPUT KS3204
-4A6 6
temperature external X =XC2+XC2-5R3: 1 +XC2/5.3 +IB162 +XC2/5.4 =XC2+XC2-5R3: 2
1 2
temperature tube package +XC2-5R1: 1 +XC2/5.2 +IB160 +XC2/5.2 +XC2-5R1: 2
7 8
heating nozzle +XC1-5R7: 1 +XC1/5.7 +IB146 +XC1/5.7 +XC1-5R7: 2
3 4
temperature external Y =XC1+XC1-5R5: 1 +XC1/5.5 +IB144 +XC1/5.5 =XC1+XC1-5R5: 2
5
PT100 ANALOG
INPUT KS3204
-4A5 6
temperature external X =XC1+XC1-5R3: 1 +XC1/5.3 +IB142 +XC1/5.4 =XC1+XC1-5R3: 2
1 2
temperature tube package +XC1-5R1: 1 +XC1/5.2 +IB140 +XC1/5.2 +XC1-5R1: 2
7 8
spare -4A4:7 +PE2/7.7 +IB126 +PE2/7.7
3 4
spare -4A4:3 +PE2/7.5 +IB124 +PE2/7.5
5
PT100 ANALOG
INPUT KS3204
-4A4 6
temperature mounting plate heating system =PE2+PE2-7R3: 1 +PE2/7.3 +IB122 +PE2/7.4 =PE2+PE2-7R3: 2
1 2
temperature mounting plate =PE2+PE2-7R1: 1 +PE2/7.2 +IB120 +PE2/7.2 =PE2+PE2-7R1: 2
7 8
spare -4A3:7 +PE1/8.7 +IB106 +PE1/8.7
3 4
spare -4A3:3 +PE1/8.5 +IB104 +PE1/8.5
5
PT100 ANALOG
INPUT KS3204
-4A3 6
temperature mounting plate heating system =PE1+PE1-8R3: 1 +PE1/8.3 +IB102 +PE1/8.4 =PE1+PE1-8R3: 2
1 2
temperature mounting plate =PE1+PE1-8R1: 1 +PE1/8.2 +IB100 +PE1/8.2 =PE1+PE1-8R1: 2
7 8
spare -4A2:7 +PE0/9.7 +IB86 +PE0/9.7
3 4
temperature filling valve =PE0+PE0-9R5: 1 +PE0/9.5 +IB84 +PE0/9.5 =PE0+PE0-9R5: 2
5
PT100 ANALOG
INPUT KS3204
-4A2 6
temperature connecting FAS - tank =PE0+PE0-9R3: 1 +PE0/9.3 +IB82 +PE0/9.4 =PE0+PE0-9R3: 2
1 2
temperature internal =PE0+PE0-9R1: 1 +PE0/9.2 +IB80 +PE0/9.2 =PE0+PE0-9R1: 2
7 8
flavour tank temperature heating system =PE0+PE0-8R7: 1 +PE0/8.7 +IB66 +PE0/8.7 =PE0+PE0-8R7: 2
3 4
flavour tank temperature flavour =PE0+PE0-8R5: 1 +PE0/8.5 +IB64 +PE0/8.5 =PE0+PE0-8R5: 2
5
PT100 ANALOG
INPUT KS3204
-4A1 6
cleaning tank temperature heating system =PE0+PE0-8R3: 1 +PE0/8.3 +IB62 +PE0/8.4 =PE0+PE0-8R3: 2
1 2
cleaning tank temperature cleaner =PE0+PE0-8R1: 1 +PE0/8.2 +IB60 +PE0/8.2 =PE0+PE0-8R1: 2
3 5
Modified 27.11.2018
UNI TWIN 120 C 0 overview analog input PT100 Bl. 4
Examiner 7 Bl.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

7 8
+PE2/10.6 +PE2/10.6
5 6
spare -5A5:5 +PE2/10.5 IB406 +PE2/10.5
3
4-20mA ANALOG
INPUT KS3052
-5A5 4
-7A2:3 +PE2/10.3 +PE2/10.3
1 2
system pressure =PE2+PE2-10B5:2 +PE2/10.2 IB404 +PE2/10.2 =PE2+PE2-10B5:1
7 8
+PE1/10.6 +PE1/10.6
5 6
spare -5A4:5 +PE1/10.5 IB386 +PE1/10.5
3
4-20mA ANALOG
INPUT KS3052
-5A4 4
-7A1:3 +PE1/10.3 +PE1/10.3
1 2
system pressure =PE1+PE1-10B5:2 +PE1/10.2 IB384 +PE1/10.2 =PE1+PE1-10B5:1
-1A4
0V
KS9100
PE
/1.4
24V
0V
PE
4 8
+XC1/6.3 2S
3 7
+XC1/6.3 2M
2
0-20mA ANALOG
INPUT KS3011
-5A3
+XC1-XS0.3:2 +XC1/6.2
1
external machine production power =XC1+XC1-X2:3 +XC1/6.2 +IB280
4 8
+PE0/10.3 +PE0/10.5
3 7
=PE0+PE0-10B1:7 +PE0/10.2 +PE0/10.5
2
0-10V ANALOG
INPUT KS3062
-5A2 6
1 5
process value air pressure =PE0+PE0-10B1:6 +PE0/10.2 +IB360 +IB362 +PE0/10.4 -5A2:5 spare
4 8
+FT/3.3 +FT/3.5
3 7
=FT+FT-X4:10 +FT/3.2 +FT/3.5
2
0-10V ANALOG
INPUT KS3062
-5A1 6
1 5
flavour tank temperature sensor =FT+FT-X4:9 +FT/3.2 +IB200 +IB202 +FT/3.4 -5A1:5 spare
4 6
Modified 27.11.2018
UNI TWIN 120 C 0 overview analog input 0/4-20mA Bl. 5
Examiner 7 Bl.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

7 8
spare -6A3:7 +PE2/11.7 QB686 +PE2/11.7
3 4
control value servo amplifier +PE2-X5:3 +PE2/11.5 QB684 +PE2/11.5 +PE2-X5:6
5
0-10V ANALOG
OUTPUT KS4004
-6A3 6
spare -6A3:5 +PE2/11.3 QB682 +PE2/11.4
1 2
spare -6A3:1 +PE2/11.2 QB680 +PE2/11.2
7 8
spare -6A2:7 +PE1/11.7 QB666 +PE1/11.7
3 4
control value servo amplifier +PE1-X5:3 +PE1/11.5 QB664 +PE1/11.5 +PE1-X5:6
5
0-10V ANALOG
OUTPUT KS4004
-6A2 6
spare -6A2:5 +PE1/11.3 QB662 +PE1/11.4
1 2
spare -6A2:1 +PE1/11.2 QB660 +PE1/11.2
7 8
spare -6A1:7 +PE0/11.7 QB506 +PE0/11.7
3 4
spare -6A1:3 +PE0/11.5 QB504 +PE0/11.5
5
0-10V ANALOG
OUTPUT KS4004
-6A1 6
spare -6A1:5 +PE0/11.3 QB502 +PE0/11.4
1 2
control value air pressure =PE0+PE0-10B1:4 +PE0/11.2 QB500 +PE0/11.2 =PE0+PE0-10B1:3
5 7
Modified 27.11.2018
UNI TWIN 120 C 0 overview analog output Bl. 6
Examiner 4-20mA / 0-10V 7 Bl.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

end terminal
KL9010 -7A5
4 8
+PE2/5.4 S1 S2 +PE2/5.7
3 serial 7
+PE2-X3:9 +PE2/5.3 GND1 interface GND2 +PE2/5.7
2 RS232
-7A4 6
+PE2/5.3 RTS CTS +PE2/5.6
KS6001
1 5
servo amplifier TxD +PE2-X5:9 +PE2/5.2 TXD RXD +PE2/5.5 +PE2-X5:10 servo amplifier RxD
4 8
+PE1/5.4 S1 S2 +PE1/5.7
3 serial 7
+PE1-X3:9 +PE1/5.3 GND1 interface GND2 +PE1/5.7
2 RS232
-7A3 6
+PE1/5.3 RTS CTS +PE1/5.6
KS6001
1 5
servo amplifier TxD +PE1-X5:9 +PE1/5.2 TXD RXD +PE1/5.5 +PE1-X5:10 servo amplifier RxD
7 8
+PE2/8.6 GND2 2S +PE2/8.6
3 serial 4
+PE2-X3:17 +PE2/8.3 GND1 1S +PE2/8.3
5 interface -7A2 6
flow measurement modbus data B +PE2-3A3:B +PE2/8.5 TXD- KS6041 RXD- +PE2/8.5 -7A2:TXD-
1 2
flow measurement modbus data A +PE2-3A3:A +PE2/8.2 TXD+ RXD+ +PE2/8.2 -7A2:TXD+
7 8
+PE1/9.6 GND2 2S +PE1/9.6
3 serial 4
+PE1-X3:17 +PE1/9.3 GND1 1S +PE1/9.3
5 interface -7A1 6
flow measurement modbus data B +PE1-3A3:B +PE1/9.5 TXD- KS6041 RXD- +PE1/9.5 -7A1:TXD-
1 2
flow measurement modbus data A +PE1-3A3:A +PE1/9.2 TXD+ RXD+ +PE1/9.2 -7A1:TXD+
-1A5
0V
KS9400
PE
/1.5
24V
0V
PE
6 +PE0/1
Modified 27.11.2018
UNI TWIN 120 C 0 overview serial interface Bl. 7
Examiner 7 Bl.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
400/230V/50 Hz
+ET/5.8 / 1L1 1L1 / 2.1
+ET/5.8 / 1L2 1L2 / 2.1
+ET/5.8 / 1L3 1L3 / 2.1
+PLC/1.8 / M M / 2.1
/ 7.2
/ 7.2
2 13 2 13
-1F1 -1F5
QX14.0
QX14.1
C16A 1 14 C16A 1 14
/5.7 /5.7
-1K1 -1K5
3RF2120-1AA04 3RF2120-1AA04
-X2 1 -X2 3
1 1
=PE0 PE =PE0 PE
-1E1 2
-1E5 2
2000W 2000W
-X2 2 PE -X2 4 PE
+ET/5.8 / N N / 2.1
+PLC/1.8 / PE PE / 2.1
cleaning tank
flavour tank
heating
heating
+PLC/7 2
drawer gillena Souza Cruz S.A., Uberlandia, Brazil FAS-UNIT 4-334 86-01641-02 location + PE0
Modified 27.11.2018
UNI TWIN 120 C 0 heating system PE0 Bl. 1
Examiner 14 Bl.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
400/230V/50 Hz
1.8 / 1L1 1L1 / +PE1/1.1
1.8 / 1L2 1L2 / +PE1/1.1
1.8 / 1L3 1L3 / +PE1/1.1
1.8 / M M / 3.1
/ 7.3
/ 7.3
2 13 A2 2 13
-2F1 -2K4 -2F5
QX14.2
QX14.3
C16A 1 14 A1 C4A 1 14
/5.7 /5.7
QX14.5
-2K1 7.4 -2K5
3RF2120-1AA04 3RF2120
-1AA04
11
-2K4
.4 12 14
-X2 5 7 9 11 13
1 1
=PE0 PE =PE0 PE
-2E1 2
-2E2 2
560W 560W
L N L N 1
=PE0 PE
=PE0 =PE0 -2E5
-2E1 -2E2 200W
2
PE PE
-X2 6 PE 8 PE PE 10 PE
11
12
12 .1 14 PE
14 .1
1.8 / N N / +PE1/1.1
1.8 / PE PE / 3.1
connecting
FAS - tank
internal
internal
internal
internal
heating
heating
heating
heating
fan on
fan
fan
1 3
Modified 27.11.2018
Examiner 14 Bl.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
24VAC
+ET/5.2 / 24L 24L / +XC1/1.1
2.8 / M M / 4.1
/ 7.4
2 13
-3F1
QX14.4
C6A 1 14
/5.7
-3K1
3RF2120-1AA02
-X2 15
1
=PE0 PE
-3E1 2
100W
-X2 16 PE
+ET/5.1 / 24N 24N / +XC1/1.1

2.8 / PE PE / +PE1/1.1
heating
filling
valve
2 4
Modified 27.11.2018
Examiner 14 Bl.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
24V DC
+ET/3.5 / 24P5 24P5 / +FT/1.1
3.8 / M M / 5.1
11
-7K7
/7.5 12 14
PE
-X3 1 2 3 4 5 6 PE
1 2 3 4 5 6
-4M1
flavour tank
agitator
3 5
Modified 27.11.2018
UNI TWIN 120 C 0 agitator PE0 Bl. 4
Examiner 14 Bl.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
24V DC
+ET/7.8 / 24P6 24P6 / 10.1
+PLC/1.8 / 24P7 24P7 / +PE1/3.1
4.8 / M M / 7.1
13
-X3 7 9 10 12 -1F1
/1.2 14
13
-1F5
/1.6 14
BN BU BN BU
=PE0 =PE0 13
-5B6 PNP -5B7 -2F1
/2.2 14
BK BK
13
-2F5
/2.6 14
13
-3F1
/3.2 14
14.4 14.3 13.4 13.3 13.7

IX2.0 IX2.1 IX2.2 IX2.3 IX2.4
-X3 8 11
+PLC-2A3 1 5 2 6 3 7 4 8

BECKHOFF
KS1418
heating system
cleaning tank
cleaning tank
flavour tank
flavour tank
flavour tank
air pressure
filling valve
fuse failure
connected
level half
230VAC
system
not full
empty
min.
O.K.
PE0
full
4 6
Modified 27.11.2018
UNI TWIN 120 C 0 digital input PE0 Bl. 5
Examiner 14 Bl.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
5 7
Modified 27.11.2018
UNI TWIN 120 C 0 spare Bl. 6
Examiner 14 Bl.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
+PLC-3A3
BECKHOFF
KS2408
1 5 2 6 3 7 4 8
+ET/7.5 / 24P6.7
QX14.0 QX14.1 QX14.2 QX14.3 QX14.4 QX14.5

1.4 1.7 2.4 2.7 3.4 2.4
-X3 13
A1 A1 A1 A1 A1
=PE0
-7K7 -7K7.1 -7K7.2 -7K7.3
A2 A2 A2 A2 -7Y8 A2
-X3 14
5.8 / M M / 10.1
11 12 /4.2 11 12 +FT/1.3 11 12 +ET/7.5 11 12 +FT/1.2

14 /4.2 14 +FT/1.3 14 +ET/7.5 14 +FT/1.3
cleaning tank
flavour tank
flavour tank
flavour tank
flavour tank
internal fan
connecting
FAS - tank
selection
selection
agitator
agitator
agitator
agitator
internal
internal
heating
heating
heating
heating
heating
heating
enable
enable
enable
enable
enable
filling
filling
valve
valve
cold
cold
on
on
6 8
Modified 27.11.2018
Examiner 14 Bl.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
2 2 2 2
=PE0 =PE0 =PE0 =PE0

-8R1 1 -8R3 1 -8R5 1 -8R7 1
-X4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
+PLC-4A1 1 2 5 6 3 4 7 8
+IB60 +PLC/4.5 +IB62 +PLC/4.5 +IB64 +PLC/4.5 +IB66 +PLC/4.5

+PLC/4.4 +PLC/4.4 +PLC/4.4 +PLC/4.4
BECKHOFF
KS3204
heating system
heating system
cleaning tank
cleaning tank
temperature
temperature
temperature
temperature
flavour tank
flavour tank
cleaner
flavour
7 9
Modified 27.11.2018
UNI TWIN 120 C 0 analog input PT100 PE0 Bl. 8
Examiner 14 Bl.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
2 2 2
=PE0 =PE0 =PE0

-9R1 1 -9R3 1 -9R5 1
-X4 9 10 11 12 13 14
+PLC-4A2 1 2 5 6 3 4 7 8

+PLC/4.4 +PLC/4.4 +PLC/4.4 +PLC/4.4
BECKHOFF
KS3204
temperature
temperature
temperature
connecting
FAS - tank
internal
spare
filling
valve
8 10
Modified 27.11.2018
Examiner 14 Bl.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
24V DC
5.8 / 24P6 24P6 / 11.1
7.8 / M M / 13.1
-X4 15 16
bn bu
=PE0
-10B1 2 7
/11.2 24VDC GND

Festo
VPPM
XOUT D3
6 8
pk rd
-X4 17 18
+PLC-5A2 1 3 4 2 5 7 8 6
+IB360 +PLC/5.4 +PLC/5.4 +IB362 +PLC/5.5 +PLC/5.5

+PLC/5.4 +PLC/5.5
BECKHOFF
KS3062
process value
air pressure
spare
9 11
Modified 27.11.2018
UNI TWIN 120 C 0 analog input 0-10V PE0 Bl. 10
Examiner 14 Bl.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
24V DC
10.8 / 24P6 24P6 / 13.1
-X4 19 20
wh gy
=PE0
-10B1 1 5
/10.2 D1 D2
Festo
VPPM
W+ W-
4 3
ye gn
-X4 21 22
+PLC-6A1 1 2 5 6 3 4 7 8
QB500 +PLC/6.5 QB502 +PLC/6.5 QB504 +PLC/6.5 QB506 +PLC/6.5

+PLC/6.4 +PLC/6.4 +PLC/6.4 +PLC/6.4
BECKHOFF
KS4004
control value
air pressure
spare
spare
spare
10 12
Modified 27.11.2018
UNI TWIN 120 C 0 analog output 4-20mA PE0 Bl. 11
Examiner 14 Bl.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
11 13
Modified 27.11.2018
Examiner 14 Bl.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
24V DC
11.8 / 24P6 24P6 / 14.1
10.8 / M M / 14.1
-13B1 -13B1
.5 .2
21 31 11
22 32 12
21 22 31 32 11 12
-13A1 -13A5
14+ 15- 1+ 2 3- 4+ 5 6- 7 10 14+ 15- 1+ 2 3- 4+ 5 6- 7 10
24V DC 24V DC
isolation amplifier isolation amplifier

fab.Pepperl + Fuchs 9 8 12 11 fab.Pepperl + Fuchs 9 8 12 11
type:KFD2-SR2-Ex2-W type:KFD2-SR2-Ex2-W
IX2.3
IX2.2
IX2.4
5.4 /
5.3 /
5.5 /
flavour tank
flavour tank
flavour tank
level half
empty
full
12 14
Modified 27.11.2018
UNI TWIN 120 C 0 isolation amplifier Bl. 13
Examiner 14 Bl.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
24V DC
13.8 / 24P6 24P6 / +FT/1.1
13.8 / M M / +FT/1.1
-14B1
11 21
12 22
11 12 21 22
-14A1
14+ 15- 1+ 2 3- 4+ 5 6- 7 10
24V DC
isolation amplifier
fab.Pepperl + Fuchs 9 8 12 11
type:KFD2-SR2-Ex2-W
IX2.1
IX2.0
5.3 /
5.2 /
cleaning tank
cleaning tank
not full
min.
13 +FT/1
Modified 27.11.2018
UNI TWIN 120 C 0 isolation amplifier Bl. 14
Examiner 14 Bl.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
24V DC
+PE0/4.8 / 24P5 24P5
+PE0/14.8 / 24P6 24P6 / 3.1

+PE0/14.8 / M M / 2.1
13 5.2 11
5A1:1+ +PE0
-2K5 -X3 1 3 4 6
/2.5 14 -7K7.3 12 14
+PE0/7.7
21
-2K5 11
/2.5 22
+PE0
-7K7.1 12 14
+PE0/7.5
-XS3.2 1 2 3
BN BU BN BU
=FT =FT =FT

flavour -X3 7 8 9 -1S7 -1S8
tank
BK BK
23 23 23
-8S1 -10K1 -10K2

24 24 24
-X3 10 11 12 13
-XS3.2 4 5 6 7
-X3 2 5
21 41
-2K6 -2K5
/2.6 22 24 /2.5 42
11
5A1:6- 5A1:3-
-2K6 5.3 5.3
/2.6 12 14
5.5 33 5.4
IX1.2 -2K5 IX1.5
4.7 4.7 /2.5 34
IX1.0 IX1.1
+PLC-2A2 1 5 2 6 3 7 4 8

BECKHOFF
KS1418
connection o.k.
heating system
disconnected
flavour tank
flavour tank
flavour tank
flavour tank
flavour tank
flavour tank
pre-empty
connected
agitator
empty
clutch
clutch
alarm
on
on
+PE0/14 2
drawer gillena Souza Cruz S.A., Uberlandia, Brazil FAS-UNIT 4-334 86-01641-02 location + FT
Modified 28.11.2018
UNI TWIN 120 C 0 digital input flavour tank Bl. 1
Examiner 5 Bl.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
+PLC-3A2
BECKHOFF
KS2408
1 5 2 6 3 7 4 8
-X3 7
A1
=FT
-2Y2 A2
A1 A1 A1
-2K1 -X3 8 -2K5 -2K6

A2 A2 A2
1.8 / M M / 4.1
11 12 /4.2 1 2 +ET/1.3 11 12 /1.3

14 /4.2 3 4 +ET/1.4 14 /1.4
5 6 +ET/1.4 21 22 /1.4
13 14 /1.2 24 /1.4
21 22 /1.2
33 34 /1.6
41 42 /1.6
connection
heating
TW ON
FAS on
system
clutch
spare
spare
spare
spare
spare
1 3
Modified 27.11.2018
UNI TWIN 120 C 0 digital output flavour tank Bl. 2
Examiner 5 Bl.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
24V DC
1.8 / 24P6 24P6 / 4.1
=FT
flavour
tank
-X4 9 10
-XS3.3 1 2
+PLC-5A1 1 3 4 2 5 7 8 6
+IB200 +PLC/5.4 +PLC/5.4 +IB202 +PLC/5.5 +PLC/5.5

+PLC/5.4 +PLC/5.5
BECKHOFF
KS3062
temperature sensor
flavour tank
spare
2 4
Modified 27.11.2018
UNI TWIN 120 C 0 analog input 0-20mA flavour tank Bl. 3
Examiner 5 Bl.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
24V DC
3.8 / 24P6 24P6 / 5.1
2.8 / M M / 5.1
=FT-4B6
flavour tank
=FT 11 21
flavour -X3 1
tank 12 22
-XS3.2 8
11 12 21 22
-XS3.3 7 8 9 10
11
-2K1 -4A5
12 14 14+ 15- 1+ 2 3- 4+ 5 6- 7 10
/2.2
24V DC
isolation amplifier
-XS3.2 9 fab.Pepperl + Fuchs 9 8 12 11
type:KFD2-SR2-Ex2-W
=FT
flavour -X3 2
tank
IX1.0
IX1.1
1.2 /
1.3 /
heating system
flavour tank:
flavour tank
flavour tank
pre-empty
signal to
FAS on
empty
3 5
Modified 27.11.2018
UNI TWIN 120 C 0 signal to flavour tank Bl. 4
Examiner 5 Bl.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
24V DC
4.8 / 24P6 24P6 / +PE1/2.1
4.8 / M M / +PE1/1.1
1.2 1.6 1.4

5A1:1+ 5A1:3- 5A1:6-
-5A1
14+ 15- 1+ 2 3- 4+ 5 6- 7 10
24V DC Brücke intern
isolation amplifier
fab.Pepperl + Fuchs 9 8 12 11
type:KFD2-SR2-Ex2-W
IX1.5
IX1.2
1.6 /
1.4 /
connection o.k.
heating system
flavour tank
Flavourtank
ON
4 +PE1/1
Modified 28.11.2018
UNI TWIN 120 C 0 signal flavour tank Bl. 5
Examiner connection 5 Bl.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
400/230V/50 Hz
+PE0/2.8 / 1L1 1L1 / +PE2/1.1
+PE0/2.8 / 1L2 1L2 / +PE2/1.1
+PE0/2.8 / 1L3 1L3 / +PE2/1.1
+FT/5.8 / M M / 2.1
/ 6.2
QX15.0
2 13
-1F1
C6A 1 14
/4.7
-1K1
3RF2120-1AA04
-X2 1
1
=PE1 PE
-1E1 2
850W
-X2 2 PE
+PE0/2.8 / N N / +PE2/1.1
+PE0/3.8 / PE PE / +XC1/1.1
mounting plate
heating
+FT/5 2
Modified 27.11.2018
Examiner 11 Bl.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
-2M1
Faulhaber
+UE = +24V power supply
GND = 0V ground
AL+ = analog value N+ (0..+10V)
IN1 = enable
+ -
OUT1
AL- = analog value N- (reference potential for N+)
GND
+UE
AL+
RxD
TxD
IN1
AL-
OUT1 = output
TxD = serial interface RS232
E M S C B H A K L D
RxD = serial interface RS232
S
Unitronic br wh bu pk gr vi rd bk bn gn
Bus Combi
-X5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
QX15.7
IX4.0
4.2
6.7 /
wh bn gn ye
S
QB664
QB664-
TXD RXD
5.2 5.5
11.5 /
11.5 /
24V DC
+FT/5.8 / 24P6 24P6 / 4.1
1.8 / M M / 3.1
1 3
Modified 27.11.2018
UNI TWIN 120 C 0 servo amplifier PE1 Bl. 2
Examiner 11 Bl.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
-3A3 Mini
Cori Flow
B A - + S
gr bk bu wh bn
PE
24V DC
+PE0/5.8 / 24P7 24P7 / 4.1
MB_B
MB_A
9.5 /
9.2 /
2.8 / M M / 4.1
measurement
modbus
flow
2 4
Modified 27.11.2018
UNI TWIN 120 C 0 micro motion PE1 Bl. 3
Examiner 11 Bl.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
24V DC
2.8 / 24P6 24P6 / 11.1
3.8 / 24P7 24P7 / +PE2/3.1
3.8 / M M / 5.1
-X3 1 3 4 6 7 9
13
-1F1
/1.2 14
BN BU BN BU BN BU
=PE1 =PE1 =PE1

-4B3 -4B4 -4B5
BK BK BK
2.5
IX4.0
-X3 2 5 8
+PLC-2A4 1 5 2 6 3 7 4 8

BECKHOFF
KS1418
heating system
flavour tank
flavour tank
fuse failure
circulation
amplifier
direction
direction
direction
230VAC
no fault
suction
nozzle
return
spare
spare
spare
servo
valve
valve
valve
PE1
3 5
Modified 27.11.2018
Examiner 11 Bl.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
4.8 / M M / 6.1
2.5 2.6
TXD RXD
gn ye
+PLC-7A3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
TXD RTS GND1 S1 RXD CTS GND2 S2

BECKHOFF
KS6001
amplifier
amplifier
servo
servo
RxD
TxD
4 6
Modified 27.11.2018
UNI TWIN 120 C 0 serial interface Bl. 5
Examiner 11 Bl.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
+PLC-3A4
BECKHOFF
KS2408
1 5 2 6 3 7 4 8
QX15.0 QX15.7
1.4 2.4
-X3 10 12 14 16
A1 A1 A1 A1
=PE1 =PE1 =PE1 =PE1
-6Y3 A2 -6Y4 A2 -6Y5 A2 -6Y7 A2
-X3 11 13 15 17
5.8 / M M / 9.1
flavour tank
flavour tank
circulation
mounting
amplifier
direction
direction
direction
heating
air flow
suction
enable
enable
nozzle
nozzle
return
spare
spare
servo
valve
valve
valve
valve
plate
5 7
Modified 27.11.2018
UNI TWIN 120 C 0 digital output PE1 Bl. 6
Examiner 11 Bl.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
6 8
Modified 27.11.2018
Examiner 11 Bl.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
2 2
=PE1 =PE1
-8R1 1 -8R3 1
-X4 1 2 3 4
+PLC-4A3 1 2 5 6 3 4 7 8

+PLC/4.4 +PLC/4.4 +PLC/4.4 +PLC/4.4
BECKHOFF
KS3204
heating system
mounting plate
mounting plate
temperature
temperature
spare
spare
7 9
Modified 27.11.2018
Examiner 11 Bl.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
6.8 / M M / 10.1
/ 3.4
/ 3.3
MB_A
MB_B
1 2
-9R3
120Ohm
+PLC-7A1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
TXD+ RXD+ GND1 1S TXD- RXD- GND2 2S

BECKHOFF
KS6041
measurement
measurement
modbus
modbus
data A
data B
flow
flow
8 10
Modified 27.11.2018
Examiner 11 Bl.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
9.8 / M M / 11.1
=PE1
-10B5
0-16bar
12-30V DC
P
4-20mA I
Cerabas T
Endress & Hauser 1 2 PE
PMP
131-A1B01
A1T
1 2
S
-X4 5 6
wh bn S
+PLC-5A4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
IB384 +PLC/5.5 +PLC/5.4 +PLC/5.5 IB386 +PLC/5.5 +PLC/5.4 +PLC/5.5

+PLC/5.4 +PLC/5.4
BECKHOFF
KS3052
system pressure
spare
9 11
Modified 27.11.2018
UNI TWIN 120 C 0 analog input 4-20mA PE1 Bl. 10
Examiner 11 Bl.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
24V DC
4.8 / 24P6 24P6 / +XC1/3.1
10.8 / M M / +XC1/1.1
/ 2.4
/ 2.3
QB664-
QB664
+PLC-6A2 1 2 5 6 3 4 7 8

+PLC/6.4 +PLC/6.4 +PLC/6.4 +PLC/6.4
BECKHOFF
KS4004
servo amplifier
control value
spare
spare
spare
10 +XC1/1
Modified 27.11.2018
UNI TWIN 120 C 0 analog output 0-10V PE1 Bl. 11
Examiner 11 Bl.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
24VAC
+PE0/3.8 / 24L 24L / 2.1
+PE1/11.8 / M M / 2.1
/ 4.2
/ 4.3
2 13 2 13
-1F1 -1F5
QX17.0
QX17.1
C16A 1 14 C16A 1 14
/3.7 /3.7
-1K1 -1K5
3RF2120-1AA02 3RF2120-1AA02
(-)1F1 (-)1F5
2.5 2.2
-XFRONT 1 -XS0.4 1
1 =XC1 1
-1E1 external -1E5

machine
196W 2 100W 2
-XFRONT 2 -XS0.4 2
+PE0/3.8 / 24N 24N / 2.1

+PE1/1.8 / PE PE / 2.1
external X
package
heating
heating
tube
+PE1/11 2
drawer gillena Souza Cruz S.A., Uberlandia, Brazil FAS-UNIT 4-334 86-01641-02 location + XC1
Modified 27.11.2018
UNI TWIN 120 C 0 heating system XC1 Bl. 1
Examiner 8 Bl.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
24VAC
1.8 / 24L 24L / +XC2/1.1
1.8 / M M / 4.1
1.4 1.1
/ 4.3
/ 4.4
(-)1F5 (-)1F1
QX17.2
QX17.3
-2K1 -2K5
3RF2120-1AA02 3RF2120-1AA02
-XS0.4 3 -XFRONT 5
=XC1 1 1
external -2E1 -2E5

machine
100W 2 196W 2
-XS0.4 4 -XFRONT 6
1.8 / 24N 24N / +XC2/1.1

1.8 / PE PE / +PE2/1.1
external Y
heating
heating
nozzle
1 3
Modified 27.11.2018
Examiner 8 Bl.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
24V DC
+PE1/11.8 / 24P6 24P6 / 6.1
-XS0.2 1
=XC1
external 13
machine
-1F1
/1.2 14
13
-1F5
/1.6 14
1 2 4 8
1 2 4 8
-XS0.2 2 3 4 5 6 7
+PLC-2A6 1 5 2 6 3 7 4 8

BECKHOFF
KS1418
fuse failure
production
machine
machine
machine
machine
machine
machine
external
external
external
external
external
external
operate
heating
code 1
code 2
code 4
code 8
24VAC
spare
XC1
2 4
Modified 27.11.2018
UNI TWIN 120 C 0 digital input XC1 Bl. 3
Examiner 8 Bl.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
+PLC-3A6
BECKHOFF
KS2408
1 5 2 6 3 7 4 8
QX17.0 QX17.1 QX17.2 QX17.3

1.4 1.7 2.4 2.7
A1
-4K2
A2
2.8 / M M / 6.1
11 12 /8.2
14 /8.2
tube package
production
external X
external Y
ready for
FAS unit
heating
heating
heating
heating
enable
enable
enable
enable
nozzle
spare
spare
spare
3 5
Modified 27.11.2018
UNI TWIN 120 C 0 digital output XC1 Bl. 4
Examiner 8 Bl.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
=XC1
external
machine
2 2 2 2
-5R1 -5R3 -5R5 -5R7

1 1 1 1
-XFRONT 3 4 -XS0.3 3 4 5 6 -XFRONT 7 8
+PLC-4A5 1 2 5 6 3 4 7 8

+PLC/4.4 +PLC/4.4 +PLC/4.4 +PLC/4.4
BECKHOFF
KS3204
tube package
temperature
temperature
temperature
external X
external Y
heating
nozzle
4 6
Modified 27.11.2018
UNI TWIN 120 C 0 analog input PT100 XC1 Bl. 5
Examiner 8 Bl.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
=XC1
external
machine
-X2 1 2 3
F A E
-XS0.3 7 8 1 2
gn wh
ye br
24V DC
3.8 / 24P6 24P6 / +PE2/2.1
4.8 / M M / +PE2/1.1
+PLC-5A3 1 2 3 4
+IB280 +PLC/5.4 +PLC/5.4 +PLC/5.4

+PLC/5.4
BECKHOFF
KS3011
production power
external machine
5 7
Modified 27.11.2018
UNI TWIN 120 C 0 analog input 0-20mA XC1 Bl. 6
Examiner 8 Bl.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
6 8
Modified 27.11.2018
Examiner 8 Bl.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
=XC1 ext.
external
machine
-XS0.2 8
11
-4K2
/4.5 12 14
-XS0.2 9
=XC1
external ext.
machine
production
ready for
FAS unit
7 +PE2/1
Modified 27.11.2018
UNI TWIN 120 C 0 signal to external machine Bl. 8
Examiner 8 Bl.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
400/230V/50 Hz
+PE1/1.8 / 1L1 1L1
+PE1/1.8 / 1L2 1L2
+PE1/1.8 / 1L3 1L3
+XC1/6.8 / M M / 2.1
/ 6.2
QX16.0
2 13
-1F1
C6A 1 14
/4.7
-1K1
3RF2120-1AA04
-X2 1
1
=PE2 PE
-1E1 2
850W
-X2 2 PE
+PE1/1.8 / N N
+XC1/2.8 / PE PE / +XC2/1.1
mounting plate
heating
+XC1/8 2
Modified 27.11.2018
Examiner 11 Bl.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
-2M1
Faulhaber
+UE = +24V power supply
GND = 0V ground
AL+ = analog value N+ (0..+10V)
IN1 = enable
+ -
OUT1
AL- = analog value N- (reference potential for N+)
GND
+UE
AL+
RxD
TxD
IN1
AL-
OUT1 = output
TxD = serial interface RS232
E M S C B H A K L D
RxD = serial interface RS232
S
Unitronic br wh bu pk gr vi rd bk bn gn
Bus Combi
-X5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
QX16.7
IX6.0
4.2
6.7 /
wh bn gn ye
S
QB684
QB684-
TXD RXD
5.2 5.5
11.5 /
11.5 /
24V DC
+XC1/6.8 / 24P6 24P6 / 4.1
1.8 / M M / 3.1
1 3
Modified 27.11.2018
UNI TWIN 120 C 0 servo amplifier PE2 Bl. 2
Examiner 11 Bl.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
-3A3 Mini
Cori Flow
B A - + S
gr bk bu wh bn
PE
24V DC
+PE1/4.8 / 24P7 24P7 / 4.1
MB_B
MB_A
8.5 /
8.2 /
2.8 / M M / 4.1
measurement
modbus
flow
2 4
Modified 27.11.2018
UNI TWIN 120 C 0 micro motion PE2 Bl. 3
Examiner 11 Bl.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
24V DC
2.8 / 24P6 24P6 / +XC2/3.1
3.8 / 24P7 24P7
3.8 / M M / 5.1
-X3 1 3 4 6 7 9
13
-1F1
/1.2 14
BN BU BN BU BN BU
=PE2 =PE2 =PE2

-4B3 -4B4 -4B5
BK BK BK
2.5
IX6.0
-X3 2 5 8
+PLC-2A5 1 5 2 6 3 7 4 8

BECKHOFF
KS1418
heating system
flavour tank
flavour tank
fuse failure
circulation
amplifier
direction
direction
direction
230VAC
no fault
suction
nozzle
return
spare
spare
spare
servo
valve
valve
valve
PE2
3 5
Modified 27.11.2018
Examiner 11 Bl.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
4.8 / M M / 6.1
2.5 2.6
TXD RXD
gn ye
+PLC-7A4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
TXD RTS GND1 S1 RXD CTS GND2 S2

BECKHOFF
KS6001
amplifier
amplifier
servo
servo
RxD
TxD
4 6
Modified 27.11.2018
Examiner 11 Bl.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
+PLC-3A5
BECKHOFF
KS2408
1 5 2 6 3 7 4 8
QX16.0 QX16.7
1.4 2.4
-X3 10 12 14 16
A1 A1 A1 A1
=PE2 =PE2 =PE2 =PE2
-6Y3 A2 -6Y4 A2 -6Y5 A2 -6Y7 A2
-X3 11 13 15 17
5.8 / M M / 8.1
flavour tank
flavour tank
circulation
mounting
amplifier
direction
direction
direction
heating
air flow
suction
enable
enable
nozzle
nozzle
return
spare
spare
servo
valve
valve
valve
valve
plate
5 7
Modified 27.11.2018
UNI TWIN 120 C 0 digital output PE2 Bl. 6
Examiner 11 Bl.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
2 2
=PE2 =PE2
-7R1 1 -7R3 1
-X4 1 2 3 4
+PLC-4A4 1 2 5 6 3 4 7 8

+PLC/4.4 +PLC/4.4 +PLC/4.4 +PLC/4.4
BECKHOFF
KS3204
heating system
mounting plate
mounting plate
temperature
temperature
spare
spare
6 8
Modified 27.11.2018
Examiner 11 Bl.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
6.8 / M M / 10.1
/ 3.4
/ 3.3
MB_A
MB_B
1 2
-8R3
120Ohm
+PLC-7A2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
TXD+ RXD+ GND1 1S TXD- RXD- GND2 2S

BECKHOFF
KS6041
measurement
measurement
modbus
modbus
data A
data B
flow
flow
7 9
Modified 27.11.2018
Examiner 11 Bl.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
8 10
Modified 27.11.2018
Examiner 11 Bl.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
8.8 / M M / +XC2/1.1
=PE2
-10B5
0-16bar
12-30V DC
P
4-20mA I
Cerabas T
Endress & Hauser 1 2 PE
PMP
131-A1B01
A1T
1 2
S
-X4 5 6
wh bn S
+PLC-5A5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
IB404 +PLC/5.5 +PLC/5.4 +PLC/5.5 IB406 +PLC/5.5 +PLC/5.4 +PLC/5.5

+PLC/5.4 +PLC/5.4
BECKHOFF
KS3052
system pressure
spare
9 11
Modified 27.11.2018
UNI TWIN 120 C 0 analog input 4-20mA PE2 Bl. 10
Examiner 11 Bl.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
/ 2.4
/ 2.3
QB684-
QB684
+PLC-6A3 1 2 5 6 3 4 7 8

+PLC/6.4 +PLC/6.4 +PLC/6.4 +PLC/6.4
BECKHOFF
KS4004
servo amplifier
control value
spare
spare
spare
10 +XC2/1
Modified 27.11.2018
UNI TWIN 120 C 0 analog output 0-10V PE2 Bl. 11
Examiner 11 Bl.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
24VAC
+XC1/2.8 / 24L 24L / 2.1
+PE2/10.8 / M M / 2.1
/ 4.2
/ 4.3
2 13 2 13
-1F1 -1F5
QX18.0
QX18.1
C16A 1 14 C16A 1 14
/3.7 /3.7
-1K1 -1K5
3RF2120-1AA02 3RF2120-1AA02
(-)1F1 (-)1F5
2.5 2.2
-XREAR 1 -XS0.5 1
1 =XC2 1
-1E1 external -1E5

machine
196W 2 100W 2
-XREAR 2 -XS0.5 2
+XC1/2.8 / 24N 24N / 2.1

+PE2/1.8 / PE PE / 2.1
external X
package
heating
heating
tube
+PE2/11 2
Modified 27.11.2018
Examiner 5 Bl.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
24VAC
1.8 / 24L 24L
1.8 / M M / 4.1
1.4 1.1
/ 4.3
/ 4.4
(-)1F5 (-)1F1
QX18.2
QX18.3
-2K1 -2K5
3RF2120-1AA02 3RF2120-1AA02
-XS0.5 3 -XREAR 5
=XC2 1 1
external -2E1 -2E5

machine
100W 2 196W 2
-XS0.5 4 -XREAR 6
1.8 / 24N 24N
1.8 / PE PE
external Y
heating
heating
nozzle
1 3
Modified 27.11.2018
Examiner 5 Bl.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
24V DC
+PE2/4.8 / 24P6 24P6
13
-1F1
/1.2 14
13
-1F5
/1.6 14
+PLC-2A7 1 5 2 6 3 7 4 8

BECKHOFF
KS1418
fuse failure
heating
24VAC
spare
spare
spare
spare
spare
spare
spare
XC2
2 4
Modified 27.11.2018
UNI TWIN 120 C 0 digital input XC2 Bl. 3
Examiner 5 Bl.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
+PLC-3A7
BECKHOFF
KS2408
1 5 2 6 3 7 4 8
QX18.0 QX18.1 QX18.2 QX18.3

1.4 1.7 2.4 2.7
2.8 / M M
tube package
external X
external Y
heating
heating
heating
heating
enable
enable
enable
enable
nozzle
spare
spare
spare
spare
3 5
Modified 27.11.2018
UNI TWIN 120 C 0 digital output XC2 Bl. 4
Examiner 5 Bl.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
=XC2
external
machine
2 2 2 2
-5R1 -5R3 -5R5 -5R7

1 1 1 1
-XREAR 3 4 -XS0.3 9 10 11 12 -XREAR 7 8
+PLC-4A6 1 2 5 6 3 4 7 8

+PLC/4.4 +PLC/4.4 +PLC/4.4 +PLC/4.4
BECKHOFF
KS3204
tube package
temperature
temperature
temperature
external X
external Y
heating
nozzle
4 +TERMINALS/1
Modified 27.11.2018
UNI TWIN 120 C 0 analog input PT100 XC2 Bl. 5
Examiner 5 Bl.
Date
drawer
Modified
Examiner
Klemmleistenbezeichnung
+XC2/5
0
gillena
Kabelbezeichnung
Kabelbezeichnung
=FAS+ET-X0
27.11.2018
15.12.2020
KOE1008D/19.Mai.1993
B
Seite / Pfad
Ziel- r Ziel-
name
bezeich- ü bezeich-
nummer
Kabeltyp
Kabeltyp
Anschluß
Anschluß
nung nung
Klemmen-
Klemmen-
c
1
k
Funktionstexte e
n
power supply 400/230V/50Hz 25A -XS0.1 4 N /1.2

-1FI1 N
power supply 400/230V/50Hz -XS3.1 4 N /1.4
-1S1 L1
power supply 400/230V/50Hz 25A -XS0.1 1 L1 /1.1
2
-1S1 L3
-1S1 L5
power supply 400/230V/50Hz 25A -XS0.1 PE PE /1.2
Souza Cruz S.A., Uberlandia, Brazil

-2X1 PE
power supply 400/230V/50Hz -XS3.1 PE PE /1.4
+FT-2K5 2
power supply 400/230V/50Hz -XS3.1 1 1L1 /1.3
3
+FT-2K5 4
+FT-2K5 6
4
5
FAS-UNIT 4-334
UNI TWIN 120 C 0
6
7
=FAS+ET-X0
86-01641-02
8
unit
location
= FAS
9
Bl.
+ TERMINALS
28
1
2
Bl.
1
Date
drawer
Modified
Examiner
0
gillena
Kabelbezeichnung
Kabelbezeichnung
=FAS+ET-X3
23.01.2019
15.12.2020
KOE1008D/19.Mai.1993
B
Seite / Pfad
Ziel- r Ziel-
name
nummer
Kabeltyp
Kabeltyp
Anschluß
Anschluß
nung nung
Klemmen-
Klemmen-
c
1
k
Funktionstexte e
n
-C9900-U330 1-
24V DC IAkku -IPC 1 1 /4.2
-C9900-U330 2+
24V DC IAkku -IPC 2 2 /4.3
spare -IPC 3 3 /4.3

2
-XE 1
24V DC IPC -IPC 5 4 /4.3
-3F3 1
24V DC IPC -IPC 6 5 /4.3
spare -IPC 7 6 /4.4

spare -IPC 8 7 /4.4
spare -IPC 4 PE /4.4

3
4
5
FAS-UNIT 4-334
UNI TWIN 120 C 0
6
7
=FAS+ET-X3
86-01641-02
8
unit
location
= FAS
9
Bl.
+ TERMINALS
28
2
3
Bl.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Seite / Pfad
/3.1
/3.1
/5.1
/5.1
Kabelbezeichnung Kabeltyp
16
Anschluß
bezeich-
+PE0-X2
nung
Ziel-
-X3
Klemmen-
name
=FAS+ET-XE
n
e
k
c
r
4
Klemmen-
nummer
Anschluß
bezeich-
nung
Ziel-
Funktionstexte
KOE1008D/19.Mai.1993
2 4
drawer gillena Souza Cruz S.A., Uberlandia, Brazil FAS-UNIT 4-334 86-01641-02 location + TERMINALS
Modified 27.11.2018
UNI TWIN 120 C 0 =FAS+ET-XE Bl. 3
Examiner 28 Bl.
3
Date
drawer
Modified
Examiner
0
gillena
Kabelbezeichnung
Kabelbezeichnung
=FAS+ET-XS0.1
27.11.2018
15.12.2020
KOE1008D/19.Mai.1993
B
Seite / Pfad
Ziel- r Ziel-
name
nummer
Kabeltyp
Kabeltyp
Anschluß
Anschluß
nung nung
Klemmen-
Klemmen-
c
1
k
Funktionstexte e
n
-X0 L1
power supply 400/230V/50Hz 25A =XC1-L1 L1 1 /1.1
-X0 L2
-X0 L3
2
-X0 N
power supply 400/230V/50Hz 25A =XC1-N N 4 /1.2
-X0 PE
power supply 400/230V/50Hz 25A =XC1-PE PE PE /1.2

3
4
5
FAS-UNIT 4-334
UNI TWIN 120 C 0
6
7
=FAS+ET-XS0.1
86-01641-02
8
unit
location
= FAS
9
Bl.
+ TERMINALS
28
4
5
Bl.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Seite / Pfad
/8.5
/8.5
X2
Anschluß
bezeich-
nung
Ziel-
-8H3
QX12.4
=FAS+ET-XS0.2
Klemmen-
name
B
n
e
k
c
r
10
11
Klemmen-
nummer
3
Anschluß
+PLC-3A1
bezeich-
nung
Ziel-
Funktionstexte
alarm FAS
alarm FAS
KOE1008D/19.Mai.1993
4 6
Modified 27.11.2018
UNI TWIN 120 C 0 =FAS+ET-XS0.2 Bl. 5
Examiner 28 Bl.
5
Date
drawer
Modified
Examiner
0
gillena
Kabelbezeichnung
Kabelbezeichnung
=FAS+ET-XS3.1
27.11.2018
15.12.2020
KOE1008D/19.Mai.1993
B
Seite / Pfad
Ziel- r Ziel-
name
nummer
Kabeltyp
Kabeltyp
Anschluß
Anschluß
nung nung
Klemmen-
Klemmen-
c
1
k
Funktionstexte e
n
=FT-L1 L1
power supply 400/230V/50Hz -X0 1L1 1 /1.3
=FT-L2 L2
=FT-L3 L3
2
=FT-N N
power supply 400/230V/50Hz -X0 N 4 /1.4
=FT-PE PE
power supply 400/230V/50Hz -X0 PE PE /1.4

3
4
5
FAS-UNIT 4-334
UNI TWIN 120 C 0
6
7
=FAS+ET-XS3.1
86-01641-02
8
unit
location
= FAS
9
Bl.
+ TERMINALS
28
6
7
Bl.
6
Date
drawer
Modified
Examiner
0
gillena
Kabelbezeichnung
Kabelbezeichnung
=FAS+PE0-X2
27.11.2018
15.12.2020
KOE1008D/19.Mai.1993
B
Seite / Pfad
Ziel- r Ziel-
name
nummer
Kabeltyp
Kabeltyp
Anschluß
Anschluß
nung nung
Klemmen-
Klemmen-
c
1
k
Funktionstexte e
n
-1F1 1
heating cleaning tank =PE0-1E1 1 1 /1.2
=PE0-1E1 2
heating cleaning tank +ET-5T1 N 2 /1.2
=PE0-1E1 PE
heating cleaning tank +PLC-1A5 PE PE /1.2
2
-1F5 1
heating flavour tank =PE0-1E5 1 3 /1.5
=PE0-1E5 2
heating flavour tank +ET-5T1 N 4 /1.5
=PE0-1E5 PE
heating flavour tank +PLC-1A5 PE PE /1.5

-2F1 1
heating internal =PE0-2E1 1 5 /2.2
=PE0-2E1 2
heating internal +ET-5T1 N 6 /2.2
3
=PE0-2E1 PE
heating internal +PLC-1A5 PE PE /2.2
-2F1 1
heating internal =PE0-2E2 1 7 /2.3
=PE0-2E2 2
heating internal +ET-5T1 N 8 /2.3
=PE0-2E2 PE
heating internal +PLC-1A5 PE PE /2.3
=PE0-2E1 PE
heating internal fan +PLC-1A5 PE PE /2.3
4
-2K4 14
heating internal fan =PE0-2E1 L 9 /2.3
=PE0-2E1 N
heating internal fan +ET-5T1 N 10 /2.4
=PE0-2E2 PE
heating internal fan +PLC-1A5 PE PE /2.4
-X2 9
heating internal fan =PE0-2E2 L 11 /2.4
=PE0-2E2 N
heating internal fan +ET-5T1 N 12 /2.4
5
-2F5 1
connecting FAS - tank =PE0-2E5 1 13 /2.5
=PE0-2E5 2
connecting FAS - tank +ET-5T1 N 14 /2.5
FAS-UNIT 4-334
=PE0-2E5 PE
UNI TWIN 120 C 0

connecting FAS - tank +PLC-1A5 PE PE /2.5
-3F1 1
heating filling valve =PE0-3E1 1 15 /3.2
=PE0-3E1 2
heating filling valve +ET-XE 3 16 /3.2
6
-PE PE
heating filling valve +PLC-1A5 PE PE /3.2
7
=FAS+PE0-X2
86-01641-02
8
unit
location
= FAS
9
Bl.
+ TERMINALS
28
7
8
Bl.
7
Date
drawer
Modified
Examiner
0
gillena
Kabelbezeichnung
Kabelbezeichnung
=FAS+PE0-X3
27.11.2018
15.12.2020
KOE1008D/19.Mai.1993
B
Seite / Pfad
Ziel- r Ziel-
name
nummer
Kabeltyp
Kabeltyp
Anschluß
Anschluß
nung nung
Klemmen-
Klemmen-
c
1
k
Funktionstexte e
n
-7K7 14
agitator flavour tank -4M1 1 1 /4.2

-3K1
2
-X3 2

PE
agitator flavour tank PE /4.3
+PLC-1A3 +
system air pressure O.K. =PE0-5B6 BN 7 /5.6
3
=PE0-5B6 BK
system air pressure O.K. +PLC-2A3 7 8 IX2.5 /5.6
-X3 3
system air pressure O.K. =PE0-5B6 BU 9 /5.6
+PE1-3A3 +
filling valve connected =PE0-5B7 BN 10 /5.7
=PE0-5B7 BK
filling valve connected +PLC-2A3 4 11 IX2.6 /5.7
-7K7 A2
filling valve connected =PE0-5B7 BU 12 /5.7
4
+PLC-3A3 8
filling internal flavour tank valve =PE0-7Y8 A1 13 QX14.7 /7.7
-7K7.3 A2
filling internal flavour tank valve =PE0-7Y8 A2 14 /7.7
5
FAS-UNIT 4-334
UNI TWIN 120 C 0
6
7
=FAS+PE0-X3
86-01641-02
8
unit
location
= FAS
9
Bl.
+ TERMINALS
28
8
9
Bl.
8
Date
drawer
Modified
Examiner
0
gillena
Kabelbezeichnung
Kabelbezeichnung
=FAS+PE0-X4
27.11.2018
15.12.2020
KOE1008D/19.Mai.1993
B
Seite / Pfad
Ziel- r Ziel-
name
nummer
Kabeltyp
Kabeltyp
Anschluß
Anschluß
nung nung
Klemmen-
Klemmen-
c
1
k
Funktionstexte e
n
+PLC-4A1 1
cleaning tank temperature cleaner =PE0-8R1 1 1 +IB60 /8.2
+PLC-4A1 2
cleaning tank temperature cleaner =PE0-8R1 2 2 /8.2
+PLC-4A1 5
cleaning tank temperature heating =PE0-8R3 1 3 +IB62 /8.3
2
+PLC-4A1 6
cleaning tank temperature heating =PE0-8R3 2 4 /8.4
+PLC-4A1 3
flavour tank temperature flavour =PE0-8R5 1 5 +IB64 /8.5
+PLC-4A1 4
flavour tank temperature flavour =PE0-8R5 2 6 /8.5

+PLC-4A1 7
flavour tank temperature heating =PE0-8R7 1 7 +IB66 /8.7
+PLC-4A1 8
flavour tank temperature heating =PE0-8R7 2 8 /8.7
3
+PLC-4A2 1
temperature internal =PE0-9R1 1 9 +IB80 /9.2
+PLC-4A2 2
temperature internal =PE0-9R1 2 10 /9.2
+PLC-4A2 5
temperature connecting FAS - tank =PE0-9R3 1 11 +IB82 /9.3
+PLC-4A2 6
temperature connecting FAS - tank =PE0-9R3 2 12 /9.4
+PLC-4A2 3
temperature filling valve =PE0-9R5 1 13 +IB84 /9.5
4
+PLC-4A2 4
temperature filling valve =PE0-9R5 2 14 /9.5
-1F1 13
bn
process value air pressure =PE0-10B1 2 15 /10.2
-X3 14
bu
pk +PLC-5A2 1
process value air pressure =PE0-10B1 6 17 +IB360 /10.2
rd

5
-13A1 14+
wh
control value air pressure =PE0-10B1 1 19 /11.2

gy
FAS-UNIT 4-334
+PLC-6A1 1
ye
UNI TWIN 120 C 0

control value air pressure =PE0-10B1 4 21 QB500 /11.2
+PLC-6A1 2
gn

6
7
=FAS+PE0-X4
86-01641-02
8
unit
location
= FAS
9
Bl.
+ TERMINALS
28
9
11
Bl.
9
Date
drawer
Modified
Examiner
0
gillena
Kabelbezeichnung
Kabelbezeichnung
=FAS+FT-X3
27.11.2018
15.12.2020
KOE1008D/19.Mai.1993
B
Seite / Pfad
Ziel- r Ziel-
name
nummer
Kabeltyp
Kabeltyp
Anschluß
Anschluß
nung nung
Klemmen-
Klemmen-
c
1
k
Funktionstexte e
n
-2K5 13
clutch connected =FT-1S7 BN 1 /1.7
=FT-1S7 BK
clutch connected +PLC-2A2 4 2 IX1.6 /1.7
-XS3.2 3
clutch connected =FT-1S7 BU 3 /1.7
2
-4A5 14+
clutch disconnected =FT-1S8 BN 4 /1.7
=FT-1S8 BK
clutch disconnected +PLC-2A2 8 5 IX1.7 /1.7
-2K1 A2
clutch disconnected =FT-1S8 BU 6 /1.8

+PLC-3A2 5
clutch connection =FT-2Y2 A1 7 QX13.1 /2.3
-2K1 A2
clutch connection =FT-2Y2 A2 8 /2.3
3
4
5
FAS-UNIT 4-334
UNI TWIN 120 C 0
6
7
=FAS+FT-X3
86-01641-02
8
unit
location
= FAS
9
Bl.
+ TERMINALS
28
11
12
Bl.
11
Date
drawer
Modified
Examiner
0
gillena
Kabelbezeichnung
Kabelbezeichnung
=FAS+FT-XS3.2
28.11.2018
15.12.2020
KOE1008D/19.Mai.1993
B
Seite / Pfad
Ziel- r Ziel-
name
nummer
Kabeltyp
Kabeltyp
Anschluß
Anschluß
nung nung
Klemmen-
Klemmen-
c
1
k
Funktionstexte e
n
-2K5 14
=FT-X3 7 1 /1.2
+PE0-7K7.1 14
flavour tank empty =FT-X3 8 2 /1.3
+PE0-14A1 15-
flavour tank empty =FT-X3 9 3 /1.3
2
=FT-X3 10
flavour tank heating system on -2K6 11 4 /1.3
=FT-X3 11
flavour tank agitator on +PLC-2A2 6 5 IX1.3 /1.4
=FT-X3 12
flavour tank alarm +PLC-2A2 3 6 IX1.4 /1.5

=FT-X3 13
flavour tank connection o.k. -2K5 33 7 /1.6
=FT-X3 1
signal to flavour tank: heating -2K1 11 8 /4.2
3
-2K1 14
signal to flavour tank: heating =FT-X3 2 9 /4.2
4
5
FAS-UNIT 4-334
UNI TWIN 120 C 0
6
7
=FAS+FT-XS3.2
86-01641-02
8
unit
location
= FAS
9
Bl.
+ TERMINALS
28
12
13
Bl.
12
Date
drawer
Modified
Examiner
0
gillena
Kabelbezeichnung
Kabelbezeichnung
=FAS+FT-XS3.3
27.11.2018
15.12.2020
KOE1008D/19.Mai.1993
B
Seite / Pfad
Ziel- r Ziel-
name
nummer
Kabeltyp
Kabeltyp
Anschluß
Anschluß
nung nung
Klemmen-
Klemmen-
c
1
k
Funktionstexte e
n
=FT-X4 9
flavour tank temperature sensor +PLC-5A1 1 1 +IB200 /3.2
=FT-X4 10
flavour tank temperature sensor +PLC-5A1 3 2 /3.2
=FT-4B6 11
signal to flavour tank: heating -4A5 1+ 7 /4.5
2
=FT-4B6 12
signal to flavour tank: heating -4A5 3- 8 /4.6
=FT-4B6 21
signal to flavour tank: heating -4A5 4+ 9 /4.6
=FT-4B6 22
signal to flavour tank: heating -4A5 6- 10 /4.6

3
4
5
FAS-UNIT 4-334
UNI TWIN 120 C 0
6
7
=FAS+FT-XS3.3
86-01641-02
8
unit
location
= FAS
9
Bl.
+ TERMINALS
28
13
14
Bl.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Seite / Pfad
/1.2
/1.2
/1.2
PE
Anschluß
=PE1-1E1
bezeich-
nung
Ziel-
-1F1
-PE
Klemmen-
name
=FAS+PE1-X2
n
e
k
c
r
PE
Klemmen-
nummer
1
PE
Anschluß
+PLC-1A5
=PE1-1E1
bezeich-
+ET-5T1
nung
Ziel-
heating mounting plate

Funktionstexte
KOE1008D/19.Mai.1993
13 15
Modified 27.11.2018
UNI TWIN 120 C 0 =FAS+PE1-X2 Bl. 14
Examiner 28 Bl.
14
Date
drawer
Modified
Examiner
0
gillena
Kabelbezeichnung
Kabelbezeichnung
=FAS+PE1-X3
27.11.2018
15.12.2020
KOE1008D/19.Mai.1993
B
Seite / Pfad
Ziel- r Ziel-
name
nummer
Kabeltyp
Kabeltyp
Anschluß
Anschluß
nung nung
Klemmen-
Klemmen-
c
1
k
Funktionstexte e
n
-3A3 +
suction direction flavour tank valve =PE1-4B3 BN 1 /4.3
=PE1-4B3 BK
suction direction flavour tank valve +PLC-2A4 2 2 IX4.2 /4.3
-3A3 -
suction direction flavour tank valve =PE1-4B3 BU 3 /4.4
2
-X3 1
circulation direction nozzle valve =PE1-4B4 BN 4 /4.4
=PE1-4B4 BK
circulation direction nozzle valve +PLC-2A4 6 5 IX4.3 /4.4
-X3 3
circulation direction nozzle valve =PE1-4B4 BU 6 /4.4

+PE2-3A3 +
return direction flavour tank valve =PE1-4B5 BN 7 /4.5
=PE1-4B5 BK
return direction flavour tank valve +PLC-2A4 3 8 IX4.4 /4.5
3
+PLC-7A3 3
return direction flavour tank valve =PE1-4B5 BU 9 /4.5
+PLC-3A4 2
suction direction flavour tank valve =PE1-6Y3 A1 10 QX15.2 /6.3
+PLC-7A3 3
suction direction flavour tank valve =PE1-6Y3 A2 11 /6.3
+PLC-3A4 6
circulation direction nozzle valve =PE1-6Y4 A1 12 QX15.3 /6.4
-X3 11
circulation direction nozzle valve =PE1-6Y4 A2 13 /6.4
4
+PLC-3A4 3
return direction flavour tank valve =PE1-6Y5 A1 14 QX15.4 /6.5
-X3 13
return direction flavour tank valve =PE1-6Y5 A2 15 /6.5
+PLC-3A4 4
air flow nozzle valve =PE1-6Y7 A1 16 QX15.6 /6.7
+PLC-7A1 3
air flow nozzle valve =PE1-6Y7 A2 17 /6.7
5
FAS-UNIT 4-334
UNI TWIN 120 C 0
6
7
=FAS+PE1-X3
86-01641-02
8
unit
location
= FAS
9
Bl.
+ TERMINALS
28
15
16
Bl.
15
Date
drawer
Modified
Examiner
0
gillena
Kabelbezeichnung
Kabelbezeichnung
=FAS+PE1-X4
27.11.2018
15.12.2020
KOE1008D/19.Mai.1993
B
Seite / Pfad
Ziel- r Ziel-
name
nummer
Kabeltyp
Kabeltyp
Anschluß
Anschluß
nung nung
Klemmen-
Klemmen-
c
1
k
Funktionstexte e
n
+PLC-4A3 1
temperature mounting plate =PE1-8R1 1 1 +IB100 /8.2
+PLC-4A3 2
temperature mounting plate =PE1-8R1 2 2 /8.2
+PLC-4A3 5
2
+PLC-4A3 6
+PLC-5A4 1
system pressure =PE1-10B5 2 5 IB384 /10.2
+PLC-5A4 2
system pressure =PE1-10B5 1 6 /10.2

3
4
5
FAS-UNIT 4-334
UNI TWIN 120 C 0
6
7
=FAS+PE1-X4
86-01641-02
8
unit
location
= FAS
9
Bl.
+ TERMINALS
28
16
17
Bl.
16
Date
drawer
Modified
Examiner
0
gillena
Kabelbezeichnung
Kabelbezeichnung
=FAS+PE1-X5
27.11.2018
15.12.2020
KOE1008D/19.Mai.1993
B
Seite / Pfad
Ziel- r Ziel-
name
nummer
Kabeltyp
Kabeltyp
Anschluß
Anschluß
nung nung
Klemmen-
Klemmen-
c
1
k
Funktionstexte e
n
+FT-5A1 10
-2M1 1 /2.3
-1K1
-2M1 2 /2.3
+PLC-6A2 3
-2M1 3 QB664 /2.3
2
+PLC-3A4 8
-2M1 4 QX15.7 /2.4
-2M1 5 /2.4
+PLC-6A2 4
-2M1 6 /2.4

+PLC-2A4 1
-2M1 7 IX4.0 /2.5
-2M1 8 /2.5
3
+PLC-7A3 1
-2M1 9 TXD /2.5
+PLC-7A3 5
-2M1 10 RXD /2.6
4
5
FAS-UNIT 4-334
UNI TWIN 120 C 0
6
7
=FAS+PE1-X5
86-01641-02
8
unit
location
= FAS
9
Bl.
+ TERMINALS
28
17
18
Bl.
17
Date
drawer
Modified
Examiner
0
gillena
Kabelbezeichnung
Kabelbezeichnung
=FAS+XC1-XFRONT
27.11.2018
15.12.2020
KOE1008D/19.Mai.1993
B
Seite / Pfad
Ziel- r Ziel-
name
nummer
Kabeltyp
Kabeltyp
Anschluß
Anschluß
nung nung
Klemmen-
Klemmen-
c
1
k
Funktionstexte e
n
-1F1 1
heating tube package -1E1 1 1 /1.2
-1E1 2
heating tube package +PE0-X2 16 2 /1.2
+PLC-4A5 1
temperature tube package -5R1 1 3 +IB140 /5.2
2
+PLC-4A5 2
temperature tube package -5R1 2 4 /5.2
-1F1 1
heating nozzle -2E5 1 5 /2.5
-2E5 2
heating nozzle -XS0.4 4 6 /2.5

+PLC-4A5 7
heating nozzle -5R7 1 7 +IB146 /5.7
+PLC-4A5 8
heating nozzle -5R7 2 8 /5.7
3
4
5
FAS-UNIT 4-334
UNI TWIN 120 C 0
6
7
86-01641-02
=FAS+XC1-XFRONT
8
unit
location
= FAS
9
Bl.
+ TERMINALS
28
18
19
Bl.
18
Date
drawer
Modified
Examiner
0
gillena
Kabelbezeichnung
Kabelbezeichnung
=FAS+XC1-XS0.2
27.11.2018
15.12.2020
KOE1008D/19.Mai.1993
B
Seite / Pfad
Ziel- r Ziel-
name
nummer
Kabeltyp
Kabeltyp
Anschluß
Anschluß
nung nung
Klemmen-
Klemmen-
c
1
k
Funktionstexte e
n
=XC1-1 1
external machine code 1 +PE1-1F1 13 1 /3.2
+PLC-2A6 1
external machine code 1 =XC1-1 1 2 IX8.0 /3.2
+PLC-2A6 5
2
+PLC-2A6 2
+PLC-2A6 6
+PLC-2A6 3
external machine operate 6 IX8.4 /3.5

+PLC-2A6 7
external machine production 7 IX8.5 /3.6
=XC1-ext. ext.
-4K2 11 8 /8.2
3
-4K2 14
FAS unit ready for production =XC1-ext. ext. 9 /8.2
4
5
FAS-UNIT 4-334
UNI TWIN 120 C 0
6
7
=FAS+XC1-XS0.2
86-01641-02
8
unit
location
= FAS
9
Bl.
+ TERMINALS
28
19
20
Bl.
19
Date
drawer
Modified
Examiner
0
gillena
Kabelbezeichnung
Kabelbezeichnung
=FAS+XC1-XS0.3
27.11.2018
15.12.2020
KOE1008D/19.Mai.1993
B
Seite / Pfad
Ziel- r Ziel-
name
nummer
Kabeltyp
Kabeltyp
Anschluß
Anschluß
nung nung
Klemmen-
Klemmen-
c
1
k
Funktionstexte e
n
+PLC-5A3 1 wh
external machine production power =XC1-X2 3 1 +IB280 /6.2
+PLC-5A3 2 br
external machine production power 2 /6.2
+PLC-4A5 5
temperature external X =XC1-5R3 1 3 +IB142 /5.3
2
+PLC-4A5 6
temperature external X =XC1-5R3 2 4 /5.4
+PLC-4A5 3
temperature external Y =XC1-5R5 1 5 +IB144 /5.5
+PLC-4A5 4
temperature external Y =XC1-5R5 2 6 /5.5

-1F1 13 gn
=XC1-X2 1 7 /6.2
-4K2 A2 ye
=XC1-X2 2 8 /6.2
3
4
5
FAS-UNIT 4-334
UNI TWIN 120 C 0
6
7
=FAS+XC1-XS0.3
86-01641-02
8
unit
location
= FAS
9
Bl.
+ TERMINALS
28
20
21
Bl.
20
Date
drawer
Modified
Examiner
0
gillena
Kabelbezeichnung
Kabelbezeichnung
=FAS+XC1-XS0.4
27.11.2018
15.12.2020
KOE1008D/19.Mai.1993
B
Seite / Pfad
Ziel- r Ziel-
name
nummer
Kabeltyp
Kabeltyp
Anschluß
Anschluß
nung nung
Klemmen-
Klemmen-
c
1
k
Funktionstexte e
n
-1F5 1
heating external X =XC1-1E5 1 1 /1.5
=XC1-1E5 2
heating external X -XFRONT 2 2 /1.5
-1F5 1
heating external Y =XC1-2E1 1 3 /2.2
2
=XC1-2E1 2
heating external Y -XFRONT 6 4 /2.2

3
4
5
FAS-UNIT 4-334
UNI TWIN 120 C 0
6
7
=FAS+XC1-XS0.4
86-01641-02
8
unit
location
= FAS
9
Bl.
+ TERMINALS
28
21
22
Bl.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Seite / Pfad
/1.2
/1.2
/1.2
PE
Anschluß
=PE2-1E1
=PE2-1E1
bezeich-
nung
Ziel-
-1F1
Klemmen-
name
=FAS+PE2-X2
n
e
k
c
r
PE
Klemmen-
nummer
1
PE
Anschluß
+PLC-1A5
=PE2-1E1
bezeich-
+ET-5T1
nung
Ziel-

Funktionstexte
KOE1008D/19.Mai.1993
21 23
Modified 27.11.2018
UNI TWIN 120 C 0 =FAS+PE2-X2 Bl. 22
Examiner 28 Bl.
22
Date
drawer
Modified
Examiner
0
gillena
Kabelbezeichnung
Kabelbezeichnung
=FAS+PE2-X3
27.11.2018
15.12.2020
KOE1008D/19.Mai.1993
B
Seite / Pfad
Ziel- r Ziel-
name
nummer
Kabeltyp
Kabeltyp
Anschluß
Anschluß
nung nung
Klemmen-
Klemmen-
c
1
k
Funktionstexte e
n
-3A3 +
suction direction flavour tank valve =PE2-4B3 BN 1 /4.3
=PE2-4B3 BK
suction direction flavour tank valve +PLC-2A5 2 2 IX6.2 /4.3
-3A3 -
suction direction flavour tank valve =PE2-4B3 BU 3 /4.4
2
-X3 1
circulation direction nozzle valve =PE2-4B4 BN 4 /4.4
=PE2-4B4 BK
circulation direction nozzle valve +PLC-2A5 6 5 IX6.3 /4.4
-X3 3
circulation direction nozzle valve =PE2-4B4 BU 6 /4.4

-24P7 24P7
return direction flavour tank valve =PE2-4B5 BN 7 /4.5
=PE2-4B5 BK
return direction flavour tank valve +PLC-2A5 3 8 IX6.4 /4.5
3
+PLC-7A4 3
return direction flavour tank valve =PE2-4B5 BU 9 /4.5
+PLC-3A5 2
suction direction flavour tank valve =PE2-6Y3 A1 10 QX16.2 /6.3
+PLC-7A4 3
suction direction flavour tank valve =PE2-6Y3 A2 11 /6.3
+PLC-3A5 6
circulation direction nozzle valve =PE2-6Y4 A1 12 QX16.3 /6.4
-X3 11
circulation direction nozzle valve =PE2-6Y4 A2 13 /6.4
4
+PLC-3A5 3
return direction flavour tank valve =PE2-6Y5 A1 14 QX16.4 /6.5
-X3 13
return direction flavour tank valve =PE2-6Y5 A2 15 /6.5
+PLC-3A5 4
air flow nozzle valve =PE2-6Y7 A1 16 QX16.6 /6.7
+PLC-7A2 3
air flow nozzle valve =PE2-6Y7 A2 17 /6.7
5
FAS-UNIT 4-334
UNI TWIN 120 C 0
6
7
=FAS+PE2-X3
86-01641-02
8
unit
location
= FAS
9
Bl.
+ TERMINALS
28
23
24
Bl.
23
Date
drawer
Modified
Examiner
0
gillena
Kabelbezeichnung
Kabelbezeichnung
=FAS+PE2-X4
27.11.2018
15.12.2020
KOE1008D/19.Mai.1993
B
Seite / Pfad
Ziel- r Ziel-
name
nummer
Kabeltyp
Kabeltyp
Anschluß
Anschluß
nung nung
Klemmen-
Klemmen-
c
1
k
Funktionstexte e
n
+PLC-4A4 1
+PLC-4A4 2
+PLC-4A4 5
2
+PLC-4A4 6
+PLC-5A5 1
system pressure =PE2-10B5 2 5 IB404 /10.2
+PLC-5A5 2
system pressure =PE2-10B5 1 6 /10.2

3
4
5
FAS-UNIT 4-334
UNI TWIN 120 C 0
6
7
=FAS+PE2-X4
86-01641-02
8
unit
location
= FAS
9
Bl.
+ TERMINALS
28
24
25
Bl.
24
Date
drawer
Modified
Examiner
0
gillena
Kabelbezeichnung
Kabelbezeichnung
=FAS+PE2-X5
27.11.2018
15.12.2020
KOE1008D/19.Mai.1993
B
Seite / Pfad
Ziel- r Ziel-
name
nummer
Kabeltyp
Kabeltyp
Anschluß
Anschluß
nung nung
Klemmen-
Klemmen-
c
1
k
Funktionstexte e
n
+XC1-XS0.3 7 gn
-2M1 1 /2.3
-1K1
-2M1 2 /2.3
+PLC-6A3 3
-2M1 3 QB684 /2.3
2
+PLC-3A5 8
-2M1 4 QX16.7 /2.4
-2M1 5 /2.4
+PLC-6A3 4
-2M1 6 /2.4

+PLC-2A5 1
-2M1 7 IX6.0 /2.5
-2M1 8 /2.5
3
+PLC-7A4 1
-2M1 9 TXD /2.5
+PLC-7A4 5
-2M1 10 RXD /2.6
4
5
FAS-UNIT 4-334
UNI TWIN 120 C 0
6
7
=FAS+PE2-X5
86-01641-02
8
unit
location
= FAS
9
Bl.
+ TERMINALS
28
25
26
Bl.
25
Date
drawer
Modified
Examiner
0
gillena
Kabelbezeichnung
Kabelbezeichnung
=FAS+XC2-XREAR
27.11.2018
15.12.2020
KOE1008D/19.Mai.1993
B
Seite / Pfad
Ziel- r Ziel-
name
nummer
Kabeltyp
Kabeltyp
Anschluß
Anschluß
nung nung
Klemmen-
Klemmen-
c
1
k
Funktionstexte e
n
-1F1 1
heating tube package -1E1 1 1 /1.2
-1E1 2
heating tube package +XC1-XFRONT 6 2 /1.2
+PLC-4A6 1
temperature tube package -5R1 1 3 +IB160 /5.2
2
+PLC-4A6 2
temperature tube package -5R1 2 4 /5.2
-1F1 1
heating nozzle -2E5 1 5 /2.5
-2E5 2
heating nozzle -XS0.5 4 6 /2.5

+PLC-4A6 7
heating nozzle -5R7 1 7 +IB166 /5.7
+PLC-4A6 8
heating nozzle -5R7 2 8 /5.7
3
4
5
FAS-UNIT 4-334
UNI TWIN 120 C 0
6
7
86-01641-02
=FAS+XC2-XREAR
8
unit
location
= FAS
9
Bl.
+ TERMINALS
28
26
27
Bl.
26
Date
drawer
Modified
Examiner
0
gillena
Kabelbezeichnung
Kabelbezeichnung
=FAS+XC2-XS0.3
27.11.2018
15.12.2020
KOE1008D/19.Mai.1993
B
Seite / Pfad
Ziel- r Ziel-
name
nummer
Kabeltyp
Kabeltyp
Anschluß
Anschluß
nung nung
Klemmen-
Klemmen-
c
1
k
Funktionstexte e
n
+PLC-4A6 5
temperature external X =XC2-5R3 1 9 +IB162 /5.3
+PLC-4A6 6
temperature external X =XC2-5R3 2 10 /5.4
+PLC-4A6 3
temperature external Y =XC2-5R5 1 11 +IB164 /5.5
2
+PLC-4A6 4
temperature external Y =XC2-5R5 2 12 /5.5

3
4
5
FAS-UNIT 4-334
UNI TWIN 120 C 0
6
7
=FAS+XC2-XS0.3
86-01641-02
8
unit
location
= FAS
9
Bl.
+ TERMINALS
28
27
28
Bl.
27
Date
drawer
Modified
Examiner
0
gillena
Kabelbezeichnung
Kabelbezeichnung
=FAS+XC2-XS0.5
27.11.2018
15.12.2020
KOE1008D/19.Mai.1993
B
Seite / Pfad
Ziel- r Ziel-
name
nummer
Kabeltyp
Kabeltyp
Anschluß
Anschluß
nung nung
Klemmen-
Klemmen-
c
1
k
Funktionstexte e
n
-1F5 1
heating external X =XC2-1E5 1 1 /1.5
=XC2-1E5 2
heating external X -XREAR 2 2 /1.5
-1F5 1
heating external Y =XC2-2E1 1 3 /2.2
2
=XC2-2E1 2
heating external Y -XREAR 6 4 /2.2

3
4
5
FAS-UNIT 4-334
UNI TWIN 120 C 0
6
7
=FAS+XC2-XS0.5
86-01641-02
8
unit
location
= FAS
9
Bl.
+ TERMINALS
28
28
Bl.
Anexo 2
Documentação OEM
(Fabricante de Equipamento
Original)
Designação Capítulo
Sistema de aviso de gás 1
Motor da bomba 2
Bomba 3
Sistema de aquecimento (quando

4
disponível)
Sistema de Parada de Emergência 5
Fornecimento de energia 24 V 6
Fornecimento de ar comprimido 7
Transmissor de pressão 8
Interruptor principal 9
Medidor de caudal 10
Interruptor magnético de nível 11
Tacômetro 12
Logótipo Siemens CLP Não relevante
Conexões para tubos 14
Bloco de válvulas 15
Mangueiras 16
Painel PC 17
Amplificador de isolamento 18
Acoplamento 19
Operation Manual
GMA41
Controller for mounting on DIN rail
GfG GESELLSCHAFT FÜR GERÄTEBAU MBH▐ KLÖNNESTRASSE 99▐ D-44143 DORTMUND▐ TELEPHONE +49 / (0) 2 31 / 5 64 00 – 0▐ FAX +49 / (0) 2 31 / 51 63 13
INFO@GFG-MBH.COM ▐ WWW.GASDETECTION.BIZ▐ AMTSGERICHT DORTMUND HR B 2742▐ CERTIFIED AS PER DIN EN ISO 9001:2000▐ ATEX QM CERTIFICATE
Content
Page
Introduction 3
For your Safety 3
Application and Purpose 3
Monitoring of Combustible Gases in the range 0 – 100 % LEL 4
Distinguishing the Types of GMA41 4
Detection Mode 5
Front View GMA41 5
Function Description 5
Turning On 5
Detection Mode 5
Peak Value Memory 6
Check of Display and Parameter 7
Alarm 7
Early Recognition of Gas Alarm – Delta Alarm (Catalytic Combustion Transmitter) 8
Time Delay of Alarms (#) 9
Fault 10
Relays 10
Service 10
Display of Transmitter Signal 10
Indication of Transmitter in Service Mode 11
Activation of Service Menus 11
Adjustments in Service Mode 11
Check of Relays and Logical Outputs 12
Setting of Alarm Thresholds 12
Check and Adjustment of Zeropoint 13
Check and Adjustment of Sensitivity 13
Alarm Threshold Hysteresis 14
Storing of Changed Parameters and Leaving the Service Mode 15
Maintenance 15
Inspection, maintenance, calibration and adjustment 15
Regular function tests 16
Overhaul 16
Influence of Interfering Gases and Oxygen 16
Instruction for Installation 16
Putting into Operation 17
Transmitter Cable 17
Accessories 17
Remarks concerning the Technical Safety of the GMA41 17
Trouble Shooting 17
Service Address 19
GMA41 - Gas List 19
Terminal Plan - GMA41 20
Technical Data 21
Annex 22
Connection Diagram of Mains Units 23
Technical Data of Mains Units 24
Terminal Diagram of Transmitters 25
EC-Type Examination Certificate 33
-2-
Introduction
Each detection point of your fixed gas monitoring system consists of a transmitter and a
control module GMA41, which are connected by means of a transmitter cable. The GMA41
provides the power supply for the connected transmitter and receives and processes the sensor
signals. Depending on the transmitter type, it monitors the ambient air for the presence of
toxic or combustible gases and vapors or for its oxygen content.
The GMA41 offers a variety of features, which allow adapting the gas monitoring system to
your specific requirements:
 Reading of linear measurement values in a 3-digit display

 Menu display
 3 variably adjustable alarm thresholds
 Peak value memory
 Adjustable relay functions: NC / NO contact, open-circuit / closed circuit
 Alarm hystereses prevents “flickering” of relays
 4 - 20 mA analog output signal.
The GMA41 continuously provides information on the measured gas concentration, exceeded
alarm thresholds and its operational status. As soon as the gas concentration exceeds one of
the three pre-set levels, the GMA41 gives a warning by means of the LED displays and controls
the relevant alarm relays. In addition to this, the GMA41 provides the measurement value as
an analog output signal for further evaluation. The GMA41 is easy to operate and maintenance-
free. Should unexpected failures or system faults occur, the comprehensive failure recognition
allows a quick and specific service.
For your Safety

According to § 3 of the law about technical working media, this manual points out the proper
use of the product and serves to prevent dangers. As any piece of complex equipment, the GfG
GMA41 will do the job designed to do, only, if it is used and serviced in accordance with the
manufacturer's instructions. All individuals who have or will have the responsibility for using
and servicing this product must carefully read this manual.
The warranties made by GfG with respect to the product are voided, if the adjustment of
functions or parameters is changed without GfG’s permission. They are also voided, if the
product is not used and serviced in accordance with the instructions in this manual. Please
protect yourself and your employees by following them. The above does not alter statements
regarding GfG's warranties and conditions of sale and delivery.
Essential Notice:
For the parameter setting of the supplied GMA41 please refer to the test
! report. Modification of functions or parameters may result in deletion of the

type test approval. GfG service is always at your disposal for adapting the
monitoring system to your specific requirements.
Application and Purpose

In combination with the connected transmitter, the GMA41 forms a fixed gas monitoring
system for continuous measurement of the gas concentration and for the warning from
combustible gases and vapors in the range below the LEL, toxic gases in ambient air and
oxygen.
The type examination of the GMA41 was done by „DEKRA-EXAM" for the use as warning of
explosible gas mixtures. This examination was based on the standard DIN En 60079-29-1 “Gas
dectection instruments – General requirements for the operational behavior of devices for the
-3-
detection of combustible gases" and DIN EN 50271 “Electrical devices for detection and
measurement of combustible gases, toxic gases or oxygen – Requirements and testing for
warning instruments using software and/or digital technology”.
The test refers to the combination of the GMA41 with any tested 4 – 20 mA or 0.2 – 1 mA
transmitter with linear output signal.
In addition to this the GMA41 was tested in combination with the following transmitters with
non-linear output signal for the range 0 – 100 %LEL (see also page 6):
MWG CC 24 EX (type MWG 243x II) for the gases methane and propane
MWG 0238 for the gases methane, propane, nonane und ethanol.
The functions marked (#) have not been part of the type examination.
Type approval: PFG-Nr. 41300500
With connected Ex-transmitters (for detection in explosion endangered areas), the GMA41 is
subject to the regulation 2014/34/EU as „Safety, Monitor and Control Device“ outside of
explosion endangered areas and will be labelled, therefore, as follows:
 II (2)G  0158
BVS 03 ATEX G 005 X
The EC type approval is based on the type approval PFG-Nr. 41300500. It does not
include the operation with the transmitters MWG 0238.
Monitoring of Combustible Gases in the range

0 – 100 % LEL
The lower explosion limits are to be used according to the national regulations. In Germany the
values fixed in the data base CHEMSAFE of DECHEMA e.V. in Frankfurt a.M. are valid.
If you use catalytic combustion (CC) transmitters for monitoring combustible gases below the
LEL, and if a suitable detection range 0…100 % LEL has been adjusted on your controller,
please note the following: Due to the detection principle you cannot differ between sensor
signals within the detection range and signals for very high concentrations (e.g.
>20Vol%CH4). This is why the GMA41 keeps an overrange signal stored, even if the
transmitter sends lower signals in the meantime. This status is characterized by all gas and
failure alarms being activated and by the display indicating the overrange situation (see page
7).
Do not press the QUIT button to reset the stored alarm status, before
you have made sure that the gas concentration at the transmitter does
! no longer exceed the LEL range. Use a portable or fixed detector, for
example, with a range from 0 to 100 Vol.-% to check.
Distinguishing the Types of GMA41

GMA Type Transmitter Type Built-in Supply voltage Bus system
230V mains unit
GMA41 All no 24 V DC no
GMA41 EC (#) EC 24, EC 25 (0.2 .. 1mA) yes 230 V AC / 24 V DC no
GMA41 B All no 24 V DC yes
GMA41 ECB (#) EC 24, EC 25 (0.2 .. 1mA) yes 230 V AC / 24 V DC yes
The voltage supply of the controllers GMA41 EC and GMA41 ECB is specially designed for
operating an electrochemical sensor. For all other transmitters you have to use the controllers
GMA41 or GMA41 B.
The pluggable bus system of the controllers GMA41 B and GMA41 EC B allows for easy
interlinking up to 6 GMAs. The following signals are fed in the bus system:
-4-
 24 V supply voltage
 Signal for alarm 1, alarm 2, alarm 3, fault over logical outputs
The key-operated switch can only be operated in combination with the GMA41 B or
GMA41 ECB.
Detection Mode
Front View GMA41
3-digit concentration
display Key for LED test
Menu display
Pin connector bus Key for alarm
system (GMA41 B, reset
GMA41 ECB)
LEDs for alarm 1, 2 and 3 Keys for parameter
setting
LED for operational
status
LED for fault
Fig. 1
Function Description
Turning On
Note: Information for putting into operation, see page 17!
After having turned the system on, the GMA 41 needs a warm-up time of a few minutes for:
 the self test, which checks functions, memory (ROM and RAM) and parameter memory
(approx. 15 seconds),
 the warm-up of the transmitter connected
(for detailed information please refer to the operation manual of your transmitter).
During the warm-up period the GMA41 displays the detection range, the detection unit,
measurement gas and the alarm thresholds one after the other. The LED „ON“ flashes
alternately with the measurement display and the LED „S F“ is lit, i.e. the fault alarm is active.
Alarm thresholds are not activated during the warm-up period. When the GMA41 re-starts after
a mains failure, the gas alarms are only evaluated, once the warm-up is completed. After the
warm-up the GMA41 automatically turns to detection mode.
Detection Mode
In detection mode, the green LED „ON“ is lit. If the 3-digit display is activated, it reads the
currently measured gas concentration. All gases are measured continuously, and exceeded
limit values are noticed and signalized immediately. Electronic functions like parameter
memory and transmitters are monitored permanently and the transmitter cable is checked for
short circuit and parting of the cable.
When operating transmitters with a standard output 4..20 mA or 0.2..1 mA and linear output
signal, the following display values of the transmission curve “standard” occur.
The transmitters MWG CC 24 EX (type MWG 243x II) and MWG 0238 are covered by a type
examination for the gases methane and propane as well as nonane and ethanol (see table
Standard Detection Ranges).
-5-
The following standard ranges have been tested:
Gas Formula Detection MWG CC 24 EX MWG 0238
range Ex and Function Function only
Methane CH4 0 – 100 %LEL Curve Methane Set at GMA41
Propane C3H8 0 – 100 %LEL Curve Propane Set at GMA41
n-Nonane C9H20 0 – 100 %LEL linear Set at GMA41
Ethanol C2H5OH 0 – 100 %LEL linear Set at GMA41
Transmission characteristics of transmitters which have been tested during the type
examination
Input signal Display in % LEL

Current linear transmitters Linearisation for MWG CC 24 EX
0.2 – 1.0 mA 4 – 20 mA Standard Methane Propane
0.20 4.0 0 0 0
0.24 4.8 5 9 5
0.28 5.6 10 18 9
0.32 6.4 15 25 14
0.36 7.2 20 31 19
0.40 8.0 25 36 24
0.44 8.8 30 41 29
0.48 9.6 35 46 34
0.52 10.4 40 50 38
0.56 11.2 45 54 43
0.60 12.0 50 58 48
0.64 12.8 55 62 53
0.68 13.6 60 66 58
0.72 14.4 65 70 63
0.76 15.2 70 74 69
0.80 16.0 75 79 74
0.84 16.8 80 83 79
0.88 17.6 85 87 84
0.92 18.4 90 91 89
0.96 19.2 95 96 95
1.00 20.0 100 100 100
For transmitter MWG 0238 no transmission characteristics are shown, as for this type there is
no durable reference to the input values. For re-adjustment the setting of the amplification is
not done on the transmitter but on the GMA41.
Transmitter CC28 and the transmitters with electrochemical sensors, e.g. types EC28 or EC24
provide a linear output signal. For these transmitters the GMA 41 uses the transmission
characteristic „Standard“. As the only exception a linearisation is used for the electrochemical
detection of oxygen with transmitters EC24 and EC25.
For transmitters with sensors using different detection principles, like infrared or chemosrption,
there are specific adaptations of the signal curve. This refers to e.g. transmitters MWG IR24,
MWG CS24, MWG CS21 and MWG CI21. The relevant transmission characteristics are shown in
the operation manuals of these transmitters.
Please refer to the test report of the GMA to see the type of transmitter for which a
transmission characteristic has been programmed in the GMA41. The transmission
characteristic can only be changed by a GfG service engineer.
Peak Value Memory

The controller GMA41 provides a peak value memory. Depending on the gas measured by the
connected transmitter it stores either the maximum or the minimum value.
-6-
The peak value memory is not activated during the warm-up time.
Gas Peak Value Memory

Oxygen Minimum value
Comb. gases Maximum value
Toxic gases Maximum value
Press key to indicate the peak value in the display. Measuring and warning functions are
QUIT
still working while the peak value is indicated. Press keys and MENU simultaneously to reset
the memory to the present measurement value. Once you release key , the controller
returns to the standard display.
Check of Display and Parameter
! During the test the measurement and warning functions are not
activated!
LED Test
TEST
In detection mode, shortly press key MENU to activate the LED test of the GMA41 controller.
! Fault LED is not tested only in service menu!
Display of Detection Range and Alarm Thresholds

TEST
For the display of the detection range and the alarm threshold, keep key MENU pressed for
approx. 5 seconds. The LED „ON“ flashes and the display reads the below mentioned
parameters one after the other:
Display, e.g. LED ON – flashes, Description of Display

additionally lit:
1 100 Detection range
2 UEG, LEL, ppm, ppb Detection unit
3 CH4, NH3, O2 Gas
GfG-Gas No.
4 20 (value in det. range) A1 1. Threshold alarm
Once these readings are complete, the GMA41 automatically turns to detection mode.
Alarm
The GMA41 provides 3 threshold alarms, which are activated as soon as the gas concentration
exceeds or falls below the alarm threshold. An activated alarm is indicated by means of the
QUIT
relevant alarm LED. Press key MENU or activate the external reset (see Technical Data) to
acknowledge the alarm.
Alarm Relevant Alarm

LED
has been activated Flashes
QUIT
has been activated and acknowledged by pressing key MENU
lights permanently
-7-
Together with the alarm LEDs the GMA41 activates the relevant alarm relay and, for the
models with bus system, the logical outputs. The standard setting for the switching functions is
shown below:
Alarm Function Resettable Resettable Remark

during Alarm after Alarm
1 Non-latching No selfresetting
2 Latching No yes
3 Latching Yes yes Same threshold as alarm 2,
meant as horn alarm
Overrange
In case the detection range is exceeded by more than 10 %, the GMA41 activates the fault
indication in addition to the 3 gas alarms. The display reads . When operating
transmitters for the monitoring of 0..100%LEL, all alarms and the fault indication are latching,
QUIT
i.e. the overrange can only be reset, by pressing key MENU , when the gas concentration has
fallen below the full scale value.
! Please notice:
“Monitoring of Combustible Gases in the Range 0-100 % LEL”, page 5
You can set the switching functions of the three alarms individually. For other settings than the
standard ones please refer to the test report.
Remarks concerning Alarm Functions:

Exceeding / Deviating Alarm
If the reduction of the measured gas concentration means a hazardous situation, e.g.
oxygen deficiency, the alarm is a deviating one. Exceeding alarms indicate a dangerous
situation caused by rising gas concentrations, e.g. toxic and combustible gases.
Latching / Non-latching Alarm
QUIT
A latching alarm remains valid until it is reset externally, e.g. by pressing key MENU at the
GMA41. A non-latching alarm resets automatically, when the gas concentration falls
below or exceeds the pre-set threshold.
Early Recognition of Gas Alarm – Delta Alarm (Catalytic Combustion Transmitter)

This function is only standard available for the use of catalytic combustion transmitters. Should
you wish to activate this function for other transmitters as well, please call your GfG service.
The delta alarm is meant for early recognizing of hazards caused by sudden gas
concentrations. The alarm activation is defined by the rise of gas concentration within a certain
time. As soon as the gas concentration rises by 25 % of the full-scale deflection within 1.6
seconds (see fig. 2), the GMA41 indicates overrange.
QUIT
key MENU , when the gas concentration has fallen below the full scale value.
! Please notice:
“Monitoring of Combustible Gases in the Range 0-100 % LEL”, page 5
For the activation of the delta alarm the gas concentration does not need to reach the pre-set
alarm threshold. The Delta Alarm is an additional warning to the three thresholds for alarm 1,
alarm 2 and alarm 3, which keep their standard functions.
-8-
Alarm threshold
Signal Early
alarm activation
with Delta Alarm
Alarm activation
without Delta Alarm
Delta Concentration
25%
of full scale deflection
Early
Alarm
Activation
Time
Delta Time 1.6 sec.
Fig. 2
Time Delay of Alarms (#)

This function, which is not activated in the standard setting, allows delaying the activation of
the alarm (fig. 3). Should you wish to activate this function, please call your GfG service.
Alarm Alarm
without delay
Alarm
with delay
Alarm threshold
Signal
Time-
delay
Time
Fig. 3
The time delay prevents a warning from gas concentrations only exceeding the threshold for a
very short time. It can be set from 0 to 2 minutes. For safety reasons the time delay should be
kept as short as possible, and must not be activated in case of time-critical monitoring tasks.
-9-
Fault
In case of failure the yellow LED „S F“ lights up and the fault relay and the logic output are
activated. A fault is signalized, if:
 the cable between Transmitter and GMA41 is cut;
 the sensor or the circuit of the transmitter is faulty;
 the zeropoint is deviated;
 the detection range is exceeded (together with alarm activation);
 the CPU self-monitoring is faulty.
As soon as the fault is repaired, the yellow LED “S F” goes out, the fault relay and the logic
output deactivate and the GMA41 returns to standard detection mode.
Relays
The GMA41 provides 4 relays:
 3 alarm relays for controlling external alarm devices,
 1 fault relay for signalizing of failures.
The switching behavior of the relays is the same as for alarm or fault signals. Every relay can
be operated as NC or NO contact in closed or open circuit systems. For the switching functions
as NC and NO relays you will find contact clamps. In the standard setting all 4 relays are NO
contacts. The alarm relays are standard operated as open circuit system; the fault relay is a
closed circuit. This results in the below mentioned switching functions:
In the standard setting the switching functions of the relays are as follows:
The relay switches:
in during gas alarm after gas alarm in case of in case of in case of
detection not reset not reset mains failure failure gas alarm
Relays for: mode reset reset and failure
(no gas)
Alarm 1 Ö Ö Ö Ö Ö Ö Ö Ö
S S S S S S S S
S S S S S S S S
S S S S S S S S
Fault Ö Ö Ö Ö Ö Ö Ö Ö
S S S S S S S S
It is essential to take note of the switching behavior of the relays

! when connecting external devices. In the standard setting alarm 3
(buzzer relay) can be reset even during gas alarm!
For special settings of the relay switching functions please contact your GfG service.
Service
Display of Transmitter Signal
Press key and after approx. 2 seconds the GMA41 displays the signal received from the
transmitter in mA (0.2 .. 1 mA for transmitters with 0.2-1 mA output and 4 .. 20 mA for
transmitters with 4-20 mA output). This function allows checking the zeropoint of the
transmitter at the GMA41 (see page 14).
-10-
Indication of Transmitter in Service Mode
This function is only available for Transmitter CC24 EX (type 243x II),
! CS24 EX, EC25, CC28 and EC28.
The transmitters CC24 EX, CS24 EX, EC25 provide a service switch. When this is activated
during maintenance (see operation manual for the transmitter), the GMA41 automatically turns
to fault indication. Alarm signals are being suppressed. With transmitters CC28 and EC28 this
is effected automatically when the transmitter service menu is activated.
Activation of Service Menus
The 4..20 mA voltage output continuously reads the actual measurement

! value!
The service menus allow to select and to change all important parameters of the GMA41.
A security code protects the service menus A and B from accidental maladjustment and
unauthorized access. Adhere to the following procedure to enter the service menus:
and keep both keys pressed, until „SER“ is read in the
QUIT TEST
1. Press key MENU , then key MENU
display.
2. Use keys and to enter the security code.
Security Code Adjustments

Menu A 11 Alarm thresholds and adjustment
Menu B 222 Deactivation points of alarm thresholds
QUIT
3. Press key MENU to confirm the entered security code.
The GMA41 turns to the selected service menu
or
TEST
Press key MENU to return to detection mode.
In the service mode the gas alarms are locked. The GMA41 switches to fault. The LEDs “ON“
and „S F“ light up, the fault relay is activated.
Adjustments in Service Mode
The display of the GMA41 reads the set parameters. The menu display indicates the menu
TEST QUIT
point, where the displayed parameter value can be found. Use keys MENU and MENU to scroll
forward and back. For changing of parameters use keys and .
-11-
Survey of Menu Points
Menu A Description Display, e.g. Parameter
TEST QUIT
MENU MENU
Setting
r ¦ Relay test rl
The menu starts with “G 1”

Detection unit LEL, ppm Display only
Gas CH4, NH3, O2 or

GfG-Gas No.
Threshold Alarm 1 Value in detection
range
Threshold Alarm 2 Value in detection Adjustment with
range
Threshold Alarm 3 Value in detection and
range
Zeropoint adjustment 0
Sensitivity adjustment Value in detection

range
Menu B Description Display, e.g. Parameter

TEST QUIT
MENU MENU
Setting
Threshold Alarm 1 Value in detection Adjustment with
range
Threshold Alarm 2 Value in detection and
range
Threshold Alarm 3 Value in detection
range
Check of Relays and Logical Outputs
The display of the GMA41 reads “rL”. The relays and logic outputs can be switched, one after
the other, by pressing the keys and The relevant LEDs for alarm and fault indicate,
which relay (and which logical output) was activated. When you set up this menu all alarms
are deleted and afterwards newly set.
Setting of Alarm Thresholds

1. Activate service menu A.
TEST QUIT
2. Use keys MENU and MENU to select menu point , or for the alarm threshold
to be set.
3. Set the new alarm threshold by means of keys and .
4. Store the parameters (see page 16).
Which adjustment as the lowest alarm threshold makes sense, depends on the detection task
and on the transmitter. For measuring combustible gases in the range 0 – 100 % LEL the
alarm should not be set below 10 % LEL; for most applications the alarm should not be set to
less than 5 % of full scale.
Adjustable alarms
Highest alarm Lowest alarm
End of Begin of
measurement measurement range
range + Hysteresis
-12-
Check and Adjustment of Zeropoint
1. Supply zero gas to the transmitter or make sure, that the ambient air is free from
interfering gases. Zero gas is a test gas, which is free from combustible or any other
interfering components. For details about the gas supply please refer to the operation
manual of your transmitter.
2. Wait until the display value is stable. The zeropoint must be adjusted, if the display is
different from “0”.
Use key to check the transmitter signal. An adjustment of the zeropoint is only
possible, if the transmitter signal is within a tolerance band:
For a transmitter with 0.2 … 1 mA: Tolerance of 0.15 … 0.34 mA
For a transmitter with 4 … 20 mA: Tolerance of 3 … 6.8 mA
(Depending on the transmitter, slightly different tolerances are possible.)
If the transmitter signal is out of the tolerance band, the zeropoint has to
! be adjusted at the transmitter first! For details please read the operation
manual of the transmitter!

TEST QUIT
4. Use keys MENU and MENU to select menu point .
5. Press key for 3 seconds to adjust the zeropoint
The adjustment of the zero point was successful, when the value „0“ is flashing in the
display.
If the display is not flashing, the transmitter signal is out of tolerance and has to be
adjusted at the transmitter first. Please adhere to the operation manual of your
transmitter.
6. Disconnect the zero gas from the transmitter. In case of an oxygen transmitters wait until
the displayed gas concentration exceeds the threshold alarm.
7. Store the parameter.
After the zeropoint adjustment, the sensitivity needs to be checked and eventually adjusted.
Check and Adjustment of Sensitivity

Note: Before checking the sensitivity, make sure that the zeropoint is set
correctly.
The GMA41 allows checking and adjusting the sensitivity by means of the peak value memory.
This memory is activating automatically, when the menu point is turned on for 2.5 minutes.
The GMA41 indicates the activated peak memory by a flashing display.
Check and Adjustment of Sensitivity without Peak Memory
TEST QUIT
3. Supply test gas to the transmitter. For details about the gas supply please refer to the
operation manual of your transmitter.
4. Wait until the display value is stable. The sensitivity must be adjusted, if the displayed
value is different from your test gas concentration.
5. Use keys and to set the parameter value to the concentration of your test gas.
6. Disconnect the test gas supply from the transmitter. In case of transmitters for toxic or
combustible gases wait until the displayed gas concentration falls below the threshold
alarm.
-13-
Check and Adjustment of Sensitivity with Peak Memory
This adjustment uses the possibility of the GMA41 to store the peak signal value measured
during the duration of the test gas supply. The store peak values can be used as sensitivity
point. Fig. 4 below shows this procedure.
Signal
stored
peak signal
= test gas
concentration
Clear Gas supply Exposition end Calibration Time

memory to MWG at controller
Fig. 4

TEST QUIT
3. After 1.5 minutes supply test gas to the transmitter and make sure that the gas is
constantly supplied for at least 3 minutes For details about the gas supply please refer to
the operation manual of your transmitter.
4. Disconnect the test gas source from the transmitter.
5. Use keys and to set the parameter value to the test gas concentration.
Regarding the 1000ppm detection range in service mode the use of high test gas
concentration can lead to a display value overflow! This can be recognized by a skip
! of the displayed value from (999) to (0) or so.In this case or in case the display can
not be observed the displayed value has to be reduced to the lowest possible value
(e.g. 300) by using key .Afterwards the displayed value has to be adjusted to
the exact test gas concentration.
Alarm Threshold Hysteresis
This function allows adjusting the hysteresis (point of deactivation) of the alarm thresholds.
For exceeding alarms this point can be set from the start of the detection range up to two
digits below the alarm threshold. For deviating alarms the deactivation point can be set from
two resolution units above the alarm threshold up to the end of the detection range. The
parameter setting is done in the unit of the gas to be measured.
Example:
The hysteresis of a controller, which monitors gas in the LEL range, was set to 18 % LEL for
alarm 1, 36 % LEL for alarm 2 and 54 % LEL for alarm 3. This results in the following alarm
activations:
Alarm 1 Alarm 2 Alarm 3
Alarm threshold = 20 % LEL = 40 % LEL = 60 % LEL
Alarm activation  20 % LEL  40 % LEL  60 % LEL
Alarm  18 % LEL  36 % LEL  54 % LEL
deactivation
Adjustment of deactivation point:
1. Activate service menu B.

-14-
TEST QUIT
2. Use keys MENU and MENU to select menu point , or for the alarm deactivation
point to be set.
3. Use keys and to adjust the new deactivation point.
Storing of Changed Parameters and Leaving the Service Mode

All changes done in the service mode have to be stored:
TEST QUIT
1. Press keys MENU and MENU simultaneously to activate the memory function.
The display reads „Sto“.
QUIT
2. Confirm storage: Press key MENU to confirm the storage of the parameter.
The GMA41 stores all changed parameters and returns to detection mode.
or
TEST
No storage: Press key MENU , and the GMA41 returns to detection mode without storing
the changed parameters.
 You can change several parameters one after the other, without storing them
individually. Once you have set all parameters, one storage confirmation is sufficient to
store all changed parameters.
Maintenance
After the installation of a gas warning system and before putting it into operation, a function
test must be carried out.
DIN EN 60079-29-2 „Gas detection instruments - Selection, installation, use and maintenance
of devices for detection and measurement of combustible gases or oxygen“ as well as the
relevant national directives are to be obeyed. In Germany this means the „Explosion protection
regulations“, the guideline T 023 (BGI 518) „Gas warning devices for explosion protection –
Use and operation“ and „BGR 500 part 2 chapter 2.33, 4.4 Test of gas warning devices“.
After installation and at the initial putting into operation, an expert has to do a function test of
the gas warning system (see DIN EN 60079-29-2 chapter 8.9).
The maintenance of a gas warning system includes inspection, service, calibration and
adjustment, the regular function test and repair.
Tests must be done by an expert, who has to report the result in writing.
Inspection, maintenance, calibration and adjustment

During the inspection examinations of the gas measurement systems shall be carried out (for
Germany see information sheet T023, section 9).
- Pollution by dust
- Condensation by humidity
- Protective equipment for transmitters
- Diffusion inlet for the transmitter
Maintenance and adjustment describe those measures, which retain the nominal status of the
gas warning system. They shall be checked in regular inspection intervals. Inspection intervals
should not exceed 4 months (for Germany see information sheet T023, section 9.2, 9.3 and
DIN EN 60079-29-2, Section 11).
- Zeropoint
- Sensitivity
- Activation of alarm thresholds
- Response time
- Alarm output visible and audible
- Fault report
-15-
Regular function tests
Additionally to the maintenance the function of the gas warning system has to be examined
regularly. The function tests may not exceed a period of one year (for Germany see
information sheet T023, section 9 and BGR500, part 2, chapter 2.33, 4.4)
Overhaul
Overhaul describes all repairs and exchange of components. This has to be done by the
manufacturer or persons authorized by him. Only those spare parts and structural components
that have been tested and approved by GfG may be used for exchange.
Disregard affects the detector safety, the type approvals are void, resp.
! the detectors are not operated according to ATEX.
We recommend a regular function test and overhaul and to call GfG's service for the regular
maintenance.
Influence of Interfering Gases and Oxygen

Interfering gases, oxygen surplus and oxygen deficiency may affect the measurement of gases
by the transmitter. Please adhere to the operation manual of your transmitter.
Instruction for Installation

The GMA41 controller must not be installed in hazardous areas. It shall preferably be vibration-
free installed. Vibration load may cause short-term fault reports at the relay outputs. The
transmitter and the mains supply are connected according to the terminal diagram. Make sure
that the shield of the transmitter cable is already grounded close to the terminals of the GMA41
on the metal mounting plate, e.g. by means of EMC earth clips.
Metal mounting
plate
GMA41 GMA44 GMA41/44 SW
DIN rail
Mains
EMC earth clips unit
Mains filter
Transmitter cable
Mains cable
cable glands Wiring example
Inside the wall mount casing or the cabinet the transmitter cable should be laid separately
from other control and mains cable. The mains supply for the GMA41 is generally to be fed
over a mains filter (e.g. FN 610). This filter should also be mounted and grounded on a metal
mounting plate close to the cable entry. Once the GMA41 is mounted into a casing and all
transmitters, control groups and the mains supply are connected, an expert can put the system
into operation. For installation and putting into operation of the transmitters please see the
operation manual of your transmitter.
-16-
Putting into Operation
After installation gas warning systems have to be tested for faultless functioning, be adjusted
and put into operation, by an expert. The testing and adjustment shall be carried out in
accordance with the manufacturer’s operation manual. They are only allowed to be carried out
by an expert (see information sheet T023 7/09, section 8.1, as well as DIN EN 60079-29-2,
Section 8.9).
Please call GfG’s service, or an expert authorized by GfG for putting into operation.
Transmitter Cable
The GMA41 controller and the transmitter are connected by means of a shielded transmitter
(data) cable (LiYCY). The cross section of the cable cores depends on the current consumption
of the transmitter and on the cable length (see connection diagram in the manual’s annex).
Even with the maximum cable lengths the specific power supply for the transmitter has to be
guaranteed. For detailed information please refer to the operation manual of your transmitter.
Accessories
Key-operated Switch The module GMA41/44 SW allows to control a collective
Module GMA41/44 SW (#): alarm. In addition to this, it provides the possibility of alarm
suppression, e.g. during service or maintenance.
Remarks concerning the Technical Safety of the

GMA41
Contact Protection
Mains supply and relay contacts of the GMA41 provide insulation distances of 3 mm, i.e. they
are designed for 250 V operational insulation. In case a contact is operated on a contact-critical
potential, the contacts close to it are also considered as contact-critical. According to contact
protection the contacts are not considered to be separated safely. Resulting from this, the
same applies to the relay contacts of a controller operated on 230 V. Here an operational
insulation has been provided as well. The insulation of the secondary circuit from the primary
circuit and the relay contacts complies with the requirements for contact protection. Distances
of 6.5 mm ensure a safe separation. The secondary circuit operates on extra-low safety
voltage.
Trouble Shooting
Failure Cause Solution
LED "S F" lights up, - System error, fault in parameter - Re-start of system
display „EEP“ memory - Call GfG service
LED " S F " lights up, - System is in warm-up period, - Wait until warm-up period is over
LED „ON“ flashes alarm suppression is still active
LEDs do not light up - Faulty voltage supply, - Ensure proper voltage supply
defective fuse or mains unit
Sensor signal, but gas- - Incorrect calibration, incorrect - Adjust the zeropoint, calibrate
free atmosphere zeropoint adjustment
Display - ADC overrange - If there is a gas-free atmosphere at the
- stored overrange transmitter, you can reset the stored
LED „S F“ lights up measurement value
check transmitter cable/renew
- short circuit at the transmitter - check transmitter cable/renew

cable
Display - Display deviation (< -99) - Check calibration of transmitter and GMA
- ADC range deviation controller
LED „S F“ lights up
-17-
- Cable cut - Check transmitter cable
- Zeropoint deviation by - Check calibration of transmitter and
IIN3,00mA (signal input 4..20mA) GMA controller
IIN0,15mA (signal input 0,2..1mA) - Check service key
- Check transmitter cable
-18-
Service Address
For additional questions on the product or in case of failure and problems please contact:
GfG Gesellschaft für Gerätebau mbH

Klönnestraße 99 – D-44143 Dortmund
Phone: +49-231-564000
Fax: +49-231-516313
E-Mail: info@gfg-mbh.com
GMA41 - Gas List

Gas Gas Chemical GMA Gas Gas Chemical GMA
Nr. Formula Nr Nr. Formula Nr
1 Acetone CH6O 1 55 Carbon dioxide CO2 CO2
2 Acetonnitrile C2H3N 2 56 Carbon monoxide CO CO
3 Acetylene C2H2 3 57 Coke gas CO, CH4, H2 57
4 Acrylnitrile C3H3N 4 58 Air N2, O2, CO2 58
5 Aminopropane C3H9N 5 59 Methane CH4 CH4
6 Ammonia NH3 nh3 60 Methanol CH4O 60
7 Amyl alcohol C5H12O 7 61 Methyl acetate C3H6O2 61
8 Benzine 60/95 Mixture 8 62 Methyl alcohol CH3OH 62
9 Benzine 80/110 Mixture 9 63 Methylbutylketone C6H12O 63
10 Benzine (fuel) Mixture 10 64 Methyl chloride CH3Cl 64
11 Benzene C6H6 11 65 Methylene chloride CH2Cl2 65
12 Comb. gases and vapours Mixture 12 66 Methyl-i-butylketone C6H12O 66
13 Bromtrifluoromethane C Br F3 13 67 Methylethylketone C4H8O 67
(Halon)
14 Butadien - 1.3 C4H6 14 68 Methylglycol C3H8O2 68
15 n-Butane C4H10 but. 69 Methylmethacrylate C5H8O2 69
16 i-Butane (CH3)3CH 16 70 Methylpropanol C4H10O 70
17 Butanol - 1 C4H10O 17 71 Monochlordifluormonobrom. C Br Cl F2 71
18 Butanon - 2 C4H8O 18 72 n-Nonane C9H20 non.
19 n-Butylacetate C6H12O2 19 73 i-Octane C8H18 73
20 i-Butylacetate C6H12O2 20 74 n-Octane C8H18 74
21 n-Butyl alcohol C4H10O 21 75 i-Pentane C5H12 75
22 1-Butylene C4H8 22 76 n-Pentane C5H12 76
23 Chlorine Cl2 CL2 77 Pentanon-2 C5H10O 77
24 Chloromethane CH3Cl 24 78 Penten-1 C5H10 78
25 Hydrogen chloride HCl HCL 79 Pentyl acetate C7H14O2 79
26 Hydrogen cyanide HCN hcn 80 Perchloroethylene C2Cl4 80
27 Cyclohexane C6H12 27 81 Propane C3H8 Pro.
28 Cyclopentan C5H10 28 82 Propanol-2 C3H8O 82
29 Cyclopropane C3H6 29 83 i-Propyl acetate C5H10O2 83
30 Dichlordifluoromethane C Cl2 F2 30 84 n-Propyl acetate C5H10O2 84
(R12)
31 1.1 Dichlorethane C2H4Cl2 31 85 n-Propyl alcohol C3H8O 85
32 Dichlorfluoromethane (R21) CH Cl2F 32 86 i-Propyl alcohol C3H8O 86
33 Dichloromethaen CH2Cl2 33 87 Propylene C3H6 87
34 1.2 Dichloropropane C3H6Cl2 34 88 Propylenedichloride-1.2 C3H6Cl2 88
35 Diethylamine C4H11N 35 89 Oxygen O2 O2
36 Dimethylether C2H6O 36 90 Sulfur dioxide SO2 SO2
37 Epichlorhydrin C3H5Cl O 37 91 Sulfurhexafluoride SF6 91
38 Natural gas (H+L) Cn Hm, N2 38 92 Hydrogen sulfide H2S H2S
39 Ethane C2H6 39 93 Town gas CO, CH4, H2 93
40 Ethanol C2H5OH Eol. 94 Nitrogen dioxide NO2 no2
41 Ethyl acetate C4H8O2 41 95 Nitrogen monoxide NO no
42 Ethyl alcohol C2H6O 42 96 Styrene C8H8 96
43 Ethylen C2H4 43 97 Tetrachloroethane C2Cl4 97
44 Ethylen oxide C2H4O 44 98 Toluene C7H8 98
45 FAM-Benzine Mixture 45 99 1.1.1-Trichloroethane C2H3Cl3 99
46 Jet fuel 40/180 Mixture 46 100 Trichloroethylene C2HCl3 100
47 Formaldehyde CH2O 47 101 Trifluoromethane (R23) CH F3 101
48 Frigen 22 CH Cl F2 r22 102 Vinyl acetate C4H6O2 102
49 Helium He 49 103 Vinyl chloride C2H3Cl 103
50 Heptane C7H16 50 104 Hydrogen H2 H2
51 n-Hexane C6H14 51 105 Water gas H2, CO, CH4 105
52 i-Hexane C6H14 52 106 Xylene C8H10 106
53 Hexanon-2 C6H12O 53 107 Ozone O3 107
54 Isobutyl acetate C6H12O2 54
Chart 1 - GfG-Gas List
-19-
Terminal Plan - GMA41
Relay functions, see page 9
Alarm 1 Alarm 2 Alarm 3 Fault 230 V

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 17 18 Option
GMA 41 EC
GMA 41 ECB
Option Option
Bus-system Bus-system
GMA 41 B GMA 41 GMA 41 B
GMA 41 ECB GMA 41 ECB
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
Sensor
Supply approx.24 V 5..30 V DC external reset
Ground Ground (external)
Signal 4..20mA / 0.2..1mA Ground
Signal output
4..20mA
+ 24 V DC Voltage supply
- Ground
-20-
Technical Data
Gas Monitor GMA41 for mounting on DIN rail
Type: GMA41, Software version 2.03
Dimensions: 106 x 90 x 58 mm (WxHxD), without Bus-system
Power supply
Operational voltage: GMA41, GMA41B 24 V DC
GMA41 EC, GMA41 ECB 230 V / 50Hz or 115 V / 60 Hz or 24 V DC
Current consumption: max. 150 mA at 24 V DC
max. 2.6 W at 230 V and 115 V
Primary fuse: GMA41 EC, GMA41 ECB T 100mA
Secondary fuse: GMA41 EC, GMA41 ECB T 500mAA
Climate Conditions
for operation: 0 to +55 °C, 0 to 99 % r.h., 70 to 130 kPa
0 to +40 °C with built-in mains unit (GMA41 EC (#) and
GMA41 ECB (#))
recommended storage
conditions for GMA41, -25 to +50 °C, 0 to 99 % r.h.
accessories, spares:
Transmitter connection
Transmitter connection: 2-, 3-wire transmitter
Voltage supply output: 20 V DC max. 250 mA
Input signals: 4 .. 20 mA, 0.2 .. 1 mA
Output signals
Analog outputs for meas. 4 .. 20 mA, max. load 300  (T90 = 18 seconds)
value:
Display and activation of alarm T 90 < 3 seconds
Sensor signal display: 0.12 .. 1 mA Max. deviation: < 0,2 mA  0,04 mA
0.2 .. 0.5 mA  0.02 mA
> 0.5 mA + 0.05 mA
2,4 .. 20 mA Max. deviation: < 4 mA  0,8 mA
4 .. 10 mA  0.4 mA
> 10 mA + 1 mA
Relays: max. switch voltage 250 V AC 50/60 Hz or 250 V DC
max. switch current 4 A AC/DC
max. switch performance 1000 VA AC or depending on voltage
50 .. 200 W DC
Relay outputs and mains entry are operation insulated
Logical outputs 4 open collector outputs for alarm 1, alarm 2, alarm 3, fault
Operation only on safety low voltage
Max. switch voltage: 30 V
Max. switch current: 100 mA
External reset: High active from 3 .. 24 V DC (input resistance 11kΩ)
DIN rail mounting: DIN EN 50022
Safety
Protection: DIN EN 60529 - IP –20
Protective separation: by safety transformer

GMA41 EC, GMA41 ECB Type: BV EI 306 2064 2.6VA PRI 230V / SEC 18 V 50 - 60Hz
Protective insulation: as per EN 61010 up to over voltage category III and soiling degree 2
Approvals:
EMC Test
EN 50270 : 2006
PfG-Nr. 41300500 (for tested ranges see page 4)

EC type approval function test:  II (2)G
BVS 03 ATEX G 005 X (EC-Type Examination Certificate)
Production supervision:  0158 (Notified body: DEKRA-EXAM)
-21-
Annex
The mains units mentioned in the annex are not subject to the type examination.
Selection of the proper Mains Unit for GMA41 Configurations

Depending on the requested monitor configuration you have to select a mains unit from a
choice of three performance classes.
1. Select your specific monitor configuration (type and quantity of controllers and
transmitters).
2. Add the individual current consumptions of the controllers and transmitters.
3. Compare the result with the chart below and select the suitable mains unit.
Please note:
 Only the following transmitters can be attached to a GMA41 EC, 41 ECB and 44 EC, 44 ECB:
Transmitter EC24 or EC25.
 Only transmitters of the same type and for the same gas can be attached to a GMA 44.
 If a GMA 44 is used, always select mains unit PS 50 (or higher)
 To keep the voltage reduction resulting from the combination of several controllers (> 6) as
low as possible, make sure that the voltage supply is suitably fed.
Current Qty. Current

consumption consumption
[mA] x Qty. [mA]
Evaluation Unit
GMA41/ GMA41 B 150
GMA44 /GMA44 B * 150
Key-operated 100
Switch Module
(only for B models)
Transmitter
EC24 30
EC25 30
CS21 90
CC0238 EX 100
CI21 100
CS24 EX 120
CC24 EX 120
IR24 200
Total
current
consumption
 Mains
Unit
0 mA < < 400 mA

 PS12
400 mA < < 1000 mA

 PS30
GMA 44 /
GMA 44B
1000 mA < < 2000 mA
 PS50
2000 mA <
 on
request
* GMA 44 / GMA 44B requires mains unit PS 50 or higher.
-22-
Connection Diagram of Mains Units
GMA 41 Terminals
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
PS50
Voltage supply
24 V DC + (red)
24 V DC + (red) L Mains
Ground (black) N 230 V AC
Ground (black) P 50/60 Hz
The mains unit PS 50 comes complete with 2 x 0.5 m cable red and 2 x 0.5 m cable black, so
the supply can be effected at two places.
PS12 / PS30
GMA 41 Terminals
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
Voltage supply
24 V DC +
NL
Ground
24 V DC + Mains
Ground 230 V AC
50/60 Hz
As the PS 50, the mains units PS12 and PS30 also allow the supply to be effected at two or
more places.
-23-
Technical Data of Mains Units
Type PS12 PS30 PS50

Mains units (not stabilized) Stabilized control mains unit
Dimensions 106 x 76 x 64 mm 106 x 76 x 85 mm 225 x 65 x 43.5 mm
(WxHxD):
Weight: 445 g 898 g 464 g
Input
Primary voltage: 230 V / 50Hz
Primary fuse: T 0.16 A T 0.4 A
Output
Secondary voltage 30 .. 21 V 27 .. 20 V 24 V
Secondary current 0 .. 400 mA 0 .. 1000 mA 0 .. 2000 mA
Power: 8.4 VA 20 VA 48 VA
Secondary fuse: T 0.50 A G T 1.25 A G internal overload protection
Climate Conditions
for operation: -10 ... +55 °C / -10 ... +55 °C /
0 ... 99 % r.h. / 20 ... 90 % r.h./
700 ... 1300 hPa 700 ... 1300 hPa
Recommended
storage conditions: 0 ... 30 °C, 20 ... 80 % r.h.
DIN rail mounting: DIN EN 50022
Safety
Protection: DIN 40050 – IP –20
Protective By means of safety transformer
separation:
EI 48 V11419 12.0VA EI 60 V11505 30.0VA
PRI 230V / SEC 20 V PRI 230V / SEC 21 V
50 - 60Hz 50 - 60 Hz
Protective insulation. As per EN 61010 up to overvoltage category III
and soiling degree 2
Safety standards: DIN EN 61558 UL 1950 EN 60950 VDE 0160
-24-
Terminal Diagram of Transmitters
Transmitter CC0238 EX
The CC sensor is designed as a 3-wire transmitter. The supply voltage and the 0.2 - 1 mA
output signal use the same ground line. Cable type: e.g. LiYCY 3 x 0.75 mm² (up to 200 m).
CC 0238(EX) GMA 41 Terminals

S M U (U) Supply: 24V DC
(M) Ground
31 30 32 2 0 3 (S) Signal: 0.2 ... 1.0mA
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
to sensor
Shield
Sensor
Shielding of cable is done over

the EMC cable screwing
-25-
Transmitter CS21 and CI21
These sensors are designed as 3-wire transmitters.
0.2 – 1 mA output signal

The supply voltage and the 0.2 – 1 mA output signal use the same ground line. Cable type:
e.g. LiYCY 3 x 0.75 mm² (up to 200m)
CS21
CI21 GMA41 Terminals
(U) Supply: 24 V DC
S M U Shielding of cable is (M) Ground
done over the EMC (S) Signal: 0.2 .. 1.0 mA
1 2 3 6 5 4
cable screwing
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
To sensor
Shield
Sensor
4 – 20 mA output signal
The supply voltage and the 4 – 20 mA output signal use the same ground line.
CS21
CI21 GMA41 Terminals
(U) Supply: 24 V DC
done over the EMC (S) Signal: 4 ... 20 mA
1 2 3 6 5 4
cable screwing
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
To sensor
Shield
Sensor
-26-
Transmitter EC24 (models MWG 2412, 2414, 2411 and 2413)
The EC models MWG 2412 and MWG 2414 are designed as 2-wire transmitters.
The 4 – 20 mA output signal is provided via the supply line.
2412
2414
GMA41 Terminals
(S) (U) Supply: 24 V DC
M U Shielding of cable is
done over the EMC (S) Signal: 4 ... 20 mA
6 5 4
cable screwing
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
Shield
Sensor

The EC models MWG 2411 and MWG 2413 are designed as 3-wire transmitters.
The supply voltage and the 0.2 – 1 mA output signal use the same ground line.
2411
2413
GMA41 Terminal
(U) Supply: 24 V DC
6 5 4 done over the EMC (S) Signal: 0.2 .. 1.0 mA
cable screwing
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
Shield
Sensor
-27-
Transmitter CC24 EX (models MWG 2431 and 2432)
Transmitter CS24 EX (models MWG 2471 and 2472)
Transmitter IR 24 (models MWG 2491 and 2492)

The Transmitters CC model MWG 2431, the CS model MWG 2471 and the infrared
transmitter MWG 2491 are designed as 3-wire transmitters. The supply voltage and the 0.2
- 1mA output signal use the same ground line.
MWG 2431
MWG 2471
MWG 2491
GMA41 Terminals
U M S (U) Supply: 24 V DC
(M) Ground
1 2 3 4 5 6 (S) Signal: 0,2 .. 1,0 mA
Shielding of cable is done
over the EMC cable screwing
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
to sensor
Shield
Sensor
The CC model MWG 2432, the CS model MWG 2472 and the infrared transmitter MWG 2492
are designed as 3-wire transmitters. The supply voltage and the 4 – 20 mA output signal
use the same ground line.
MWG 2432
MWG 2472
MWG 2492
GMA41 Terminals
U M S (U) Supply: 24 V DC
(M) Ground
1 2 3 4 5 6 (S) Signal: 4 ... 20 mA
Shielding of cable is done
over the EMC cable screwing
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
to sensor
Shield
Sensor
-28-
Transmitter EC25 (models MWG 2502, 2504, 2501 and 2503)
without Ex-barrier
4 - 20 mA output signal
The EC models MWG 2502 and MWG 2504 are designed as 2-wire transmitters. The 4 – 20
mA outpout signal is provided via the supply line.
MWG 2502
MWG 2504 Shielding of cable is
done over the EMC GMA41 Terminals
cable screwing (U) Supply: 24 V DC
12-24V 1
+/- 0V 2 (S) Signal: 4 .. 20 mA
+Sig. 3
- Sig. 4 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
Shield
Sensor

The EC models MWG 2501 and MWG 2503 are designed as 3-wire transmitters. The supply
voltage and the 0.2 – 1 mA output signal use the same ground line.
MWG 2501
MWG 2503 Shielding of cable is
done over the EMC GMA41 Terminals
cable screwing (U) Supply: 24 V DC
12-24V 1 (M) Ground
+/- 0V 2 (S) Signal: 0.2 .. 1.0 mA
+Sig. 3
- Sig. 4 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
Shield
Sensor
-29-
Transmitter EC25 EX (model MWG 2501) with Ex-barrier

The EC sensor MWG 2501 is designed as 4-wire transmitter. Supply and signal lines are
separated. The transmitter is considered as 4-pole. For reasons of explosion protection, Ex-
barriers are linked between transmitter and GMA41 both in the supply lines and in the signal
lines.
MWG 2501 GMA41 Terminals

Shielding of cable is
done over the EMC (U) Supply: 24 V DC
cable screwing (M) Ground
12-24V 1 (S) Signal: 0.2 .. 1.0 mA
+/- 0V 2
+ Sig. 3 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
- Sig. 4
Shield
Supply barrier
ib+ Un+
ib - Un -
Sensor PA
Evaluation barrier
ib+ Un+
ib - Un -
Potential
PA
compensation
-30-
Transmitter CC28
Transmitters CC28, CC28 D and CC28 DA are connected to the GMA41 via 3 wires. Voltage
supply and output signal are using the same ground line.
Cable type: e.g. LiYCY 3 x 0,75 mm² (up to 200m)
LiYCY 3 x 1,5 mm² (up to 1 km)
(S) 4 GMA41 Terminals

3 (U) Supply: 24 V DC
(M) 2 (M) Ground
(U) 1 (S) Signal: 4 ... 20 mA
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
CC28
CC28 D
CC28 DA Shield
Sensor
Abschirmung
Shielding des Kabels
of cable erfolgt
is done overüber
the
EMC die EMV-Kabelverschraubung
cable screwing
Transmitter EC28 (part 1)

Transmitters EC28, EC28 D, EC28 DA and EC28 DAR are connected to the GMA41 via 3
wires. Voltage supply and output signal are using the same ground line.
Cable type: e.g. LiYCY 3 x 0,75 mm² (up to 500m resp. 200m for EC28 DA/DAR)
(S) 4 GMA41 Terminals

3 (U) Versorgung: 24 V DC
(M) 2 (M) Ground
(U) 1 (S) Signal: 4 ... 20 mA
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
EC28
EC28 D
EC28 DA Shield
EC28 DAR
Sensor
Abschirmung
Shielding des Kabels
of cable erfolgt
is done overüber
the
EMCdie EMV-Kabelverschraubung
cable screwing
-31-
Transmitter EC28 (part 2)
Transmitters EC28 i and EC28 Di are connected to the GMA41 via 2 wires.
Voltage supply and output signal are using the same wire.
Cable type: e.g. LiYCY 2 x 0,75 mm² (up to 500m)
If the transmitter is installed in explosion endangered areas, connection must be done through
a safety barrier:
GMA41 Terminals
4
(U) Supply: 24 V DC
3
(S) 2
(S) Signal: 4 ... 20 mA
(U) 1
Intrinsically 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
eigensicher
safe „i“
EC28 i “i”
EC28 Di Shield
Ex-Protection
safety barrier
Sensor
Abschirmung
Shielding ofdes Kabels
cable is
doneerfolgt
overüber
thedie EMC
EMV-Kabelverschraubung
cable screwing
If the transmitter is not installed in explosion endangered areas, it may be connected to the
GMA41 without an interlinked safety barrier:
GMA41 Terminals
4
(U) Supply: 24 V DC
3
(S) 2 (S) Signal: 4 ... 20 mA
(U) 1
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
EC28 i
EC28 Di Shield
Sensor
Abschirmung
Shielding desisKabels
of cable done erfolgt über
over the
die EMV-Kabelverschraubung
EMC cable screwing
Worldwide Supplier GfG Gesellschaft für Gerätebau mbH

of Gas Detection Solutions P.O.Box 44 01 64 D-44390 Dortmund
Phone: +49-231-564000
Fax: +49-231-516313
File: 185-000.13_OM_GMA41, Edition 21st of April 2016, E-Mail: info@gfg.biz
Software Version 2.03, We reserve the right of modification. Internet: www.gfg.biz
-32-
EC-Type Examination Certificate
-33-
-34-
-35-
-36-
-37-
Operat ion Manual
CC28
Transm it t er for flam m able gases and vapours
GfG GESELLSCHAFT FÜR GERÄTEBAU MBH▐ KLÖNNESTRASSE 99 ▐ D-44143 DORTMUND▐ TELEPHONE + 49 / (0) 2 31 / 5 64 00 –0 ▐ FAX + 49 / (0) 2 31 / 51 63 13
I NFO@GFG-MBH.COM ▐ WWW.GASDETECTI ON.BI Z▐ AMTSGERI CHT DORTMUND HR B 2742 ▐ CERTI FI ED AS PER DI N EN I SO 9001:2000 ▐ ATEX QM CERTI FI CATE
Con t e n t
Page
For your Safet y 5

Operat ional Hint s 5
General Descript ion 6
Det ect ion Principle 6
Design 7
Mount ing Posit ion of Transm it t er 8
Mount ing 9
I nst allat ion of Elect rical Connect ions 9
Put t ing in Operat ion 10
Det ect ion Mode 11
Check and Aut oCal Adj ust m ent of Zeropoint ( ZERO) 13
Check and Aut oCal Adj ust m ent of Sensit ivit y ( SPAN) 14
Service Menu and Ext ended Service Menu 15
Sensor Replacem ent 20
Transm ission Charact erist ics 21
Special St at us and r elevant Error Messages 22
Messages in det ect ion m ode 23
Messages in service m ode and during calibrat ion 23
Sit uat ion of St at us LED’s and Out put 24
Priorit y of displays and m essages in det ect ion m ode 24
Put t ing int o Operat ion and Maint enance 25
Service, I nspect ion, Calibrat ion and Adj ust m ent s 25
Regular Funct ion Test s 25
Repair 25
Funct ion Rest rict ions depending on Oxygen Concent rat ion 26
Display I rrit at ion due t o Sensor Poisons 26
Trouble Shoot ing 26
Lower Explosion Lim it s ( LEL) of Gases subj ect t o Funct ion Test 26
Spare Part List 27
Accessories 27
Connect ion Diagram CC 28 - wit h 4 .. 20 m A Out put 28
Term inal Diagram MWG CC28 29
Sensor specificat ion 30
Technical Dat a 31
Annex 32
I nt ernal Mem ory CC28 32
EC- Type Exam inat ion Cert ificat e 33
Declarat ions of Conform it y 37
W a r ning:
The supply volt a ge m ust ne ve r e x ce e d 3 0 V D C, n ot e ve n in ca se of
volt a ge pe a k s!
-4-
For you r Sa fe t y
According t o § 3 of t he law about t echnical working m edia, t his m anual point s out t he proper
use of t he product and ser ves t o pr ev ent danger s. I t m ust be carefully read by all individuals
who have or will have t he r esponsibilit y for operat ing, using, servicing, m aint aining and
cont r olling t his product . This applies t o t he safet y inst ruct ions m arked wit h t he sym bol ! in
t his operat ing m anual. Like any piece of com plex equipm ent , t his product will do t he j ob
designed t o do, only, if it is operat ed, used, ser viced, m aint ained and cont r olled in accordance
wit h GfG’s inst ruct ions. The warrant ies m ade by GfG Gesellschaft für Gerät ebau wit h respect t o
t he product are v oided, if it is not operat ed, used, serviced, m aint ained and cont r olled as per
GfG’s inst ruct ions. The abov e does not alt er st at em ent s regarding GfG Gesellschaft für
Gerät ebau's war rant ies and condit ions of sale and delivery.
Ope r a t ion a l H in t s
According t o t he relevant nat ional regulat ions, gas warning inst rum ent s hav e t o pass a funct ion
t est , done by a specialist , aft er having been inst alled but befor e put in operat ion. For Germ any,
BGR500, chapt er 2.33 ( form erly: UVV Gase, BGV B6, VBG 61) is applicable. Before shipm ent ,
t he t ransm it t er has passed a funct ion and display t est , being calibrat ed wit h suit able t est gases.
Th is doe s n ot , how e v e r , ove r r u le t h e ob lig a t ion of pu t t in g in ope r a t ion w it h t e st ga s
a ft e r t h e in st a lla t ion .
The t ransm it t er CC28 ( including CC28 D and CC28 DA) is appr ov ed for t he use in explosion
endanger ed ar eas and is subj ect t o an EC- Type Exam inat ion Cert ificat e issued by DEKRA EXAM
Gm bH, according t o direct ive 94/ 9/ EG wit h t he following
Cert ificat e: BVS 04 ATEX E 132 X
Labelling:  I I 2G Ex dem b [ ib] I I C T4 - 20°C≤Ta≤+50°C

For t he use in explosion endangered areas, wit h a m easuring funct ion for explosion prot ect ion, t he
DEKRA EXAM Gm bH issued an EC- t ype exam inat ion cert ificat e for t he t ransm it t er as per direct ive
94/ 9/ EG.
Cert ificat e: BVS 05 ATEX G 001 X
The t est was based on t he st andards DI N EN 60079- 29- 1 " Elect rical apparat us for det ect ion and
m easurem ent of com bust ible gases – General requirem ent s and t est m et hods" and
DI N EN 50271 " Elect rical apparat us for det ect ion and m esurem ent of com bust ible gases –
Requirem ent s for t he operat ional behaviour of apparat us of gr oup I I wit h a det ect ion range up
t o 100 % of t he Low er Explosion Lim it " and t he DI N EN 50271 „ Elect rical devices for t he
det ect ion and m easur em ent of com bust ible gases, t oxic gases or ox ygen – Requirem ent s and
t est ing for warning devices using soft ware and/ or digit al t echnology“ .
Th e EC- Ty pe Ex a m in a t ion Ce r t if ica t e BV S
! 0 5 ATEX G 0 0 1 X
in clu de s t h e follow in g se n sor s, g a se s a n d
de t e ct ion r a n g e s:
MK208- 1, MK217- 1 0 ... 100 % LEL CH4 ( Met hane) , C3 H8 ( Pr opane)
C2 H 4 ( Et hylene) , C3 H8 O ( I sopr opanol) ,
C3 H 6 O ( Acet on) , C4 H 8 O2 ( Et hylacet at e) ,
MK208- 1 0 ... 100 % LEL
C6 H 14 ( Hexane) , C4 H10 O ( Diet hylet her) ,
C9 H 20 ( Nonane) , C7 H 8 ( Toluene)
MK217- 1 0 ... 100 % LEL H2 ( Hydrogen)
MK208- 1 0 ... 4,00 % Vol. NH3 ( Am m onia)
The funct ions m ark ed ( # ) in t his operat ion m anual have not been part of t he funct ion and EC
Type Exam inat ion Cert ificat e BVS 05 ATEX G 001 X.
-5-
Ge n e r a l D e scr ipt ion
A fixed gas m onit oring syst em consist s of a t ransm it t er and a cont roller ( GMA) , which are
connect ed by m eans of cable. The t ransm it t er conv ert s t he gas concent rat ion int o an elect rical
signal and t ransm it s it ov er t he cable t o t he cont roller for furt her processing. Com pared t o t he
t ransm it t er CC28, t he m odel CC28 D pr ovides an addit ional display, while t he CC28 DA feat ures
a display and a visual and audible alarm . The com prehensive elect r onics allow easy operat ion
and m aint enance and also increases t he operat ional safet y and accuracy. The special feat ures of
t he t ransm it t er ar e:
• I ndicat ion of concent rat ion at display or at rem ot e cont r ol

• Adj ust m ent by m eans of t ouch keys or r em ot e cont r ol, wit hout opening of casing
• Com pensat ion of t em perat ure effect s.
• Ex- Appr oval for use at t em perat ur es fr om - 20 t o + 50° C
• Funct ion Approval for use at t em perat ur es see sensor specificat ion
• Sm art Sensor syst em – sensor r eplacem ent by m eans of plug- in, pre- calibrat ed
sensor
• Per m anent st at us display ( operat ion/ fault ) at t ransm it t er
D e t e ct ion Pr in ciple
The CC28 is oper at ed on t he det ect ion principle " cat alyt ic com bust ion" ( fig. 1) . The gas/ vapour -
air m ixt ure ent er s t he sensor cham ber by diffusion t hrough t he sint er filt er. I nside t he sensor
cham ber t her e ar e an act ive and a passive sensor filam ent . The heat ed act ive sensor bur ns
( oxidizes) t he ent ering gas at it s vat alyt ic layer. This increases t he t em perat ur e at t he sensor
and result s in a change of t he elect rical resist ance, which is t he m easur e for t he gas
concent rat ion. The passive ( refer ence) sensor is exposed t o t he sam e am bient condit ions as t he
act ive ( det ect ion) filam ent and is used for com pensat ion of environm ent al effect s
( e.g. t em perat ur e changes) .
D e t e ct ion pr in ciple - Ca t a lyt ic com bu st ion
Passive element Sensor

Sinter metal chamber
Gas
Active element
Fig. 1
-6-
D e sign
CC2 8 D
Cable gland
Det ect ion range
Display
Touch keys
Type label wit h dat e of product ion

e.g. SN: 0504xxxx ( 05= year, 04= m ont h)
St at us display
Buzzer
( only for CC28 DA) green yellow
Operat ion Fault
Sensor casing
Pot ent ial equalizat ion
Alarm LEDs
Key for quick adj ust m ent

( Aut oZero key)
behind lock screw
Connect ion for

Rem ot e Cont rol
CC2 8 D A
The t ype label shows t he t ransm it t er t ype. The sensor enclosure includes t he sensor and t he
sensor card, which carries t he com ponent s for t he sensor circuit ry. For adj ust m ent of elect rical
zer opoint and sensit ivit y you can use eit her t he built - in display or t he r em ot e cont rol RC2. A
secured k ey at t he left side of t he t ransm it t er allows a quick zer o set t ing. The elect r onics on t he
m ain p.c.board conv ert s t he sensor signal int o a linear out put signal of 4 .. 20 m A.
-7-
Alw ays connect t he rem ot e cont rol RC2 only for servicing a t ransm it t er
! w it hout display.
The rem ot e cont rol RC2 m ay be used in ex plosion endangered areas.
They k ey s, funct ions and display of

t he r em ot e cont r ol RC2 are ident ical
wit h t hose of t he t ransm it t er.
M ou n t in g Posit ion of Tr a n sm it t e r
As pe r EN 6 0 0 7 9 - 0 t a ble 8 for devices of gr oup I I t h e ca sin g h as bee n
! t est ed w it h an im pact e ne rgy of 4 Jou le ( low de gr ee of m e ch an ical

da nger ) . Pr ot e ct t h e ca sin g a ga in st v e r y h a r d im pa ct s.
I t is essent ial t o exact ly know t he am bient condit ions, which have t o be t aken int o considerat ion
befor e deciding on t he m ount ing posit ion. To achieve r epr esent at ive m easur em ent result s, t ake
car e of
• t h e r oom ve n t ila t ion a n d
• t h e g a s d e n sit y.
I nst all t he t ransm it t er at a place where t he gases pass t he sensor ev en in case of bad
vent ilat ion. I f necessar y, use a sm oke cart ridge t o check. I f t he t ransm it t er has t o be inst alled
at a posit ion, wher e flow rat es can be > 3.0m / s, a wind prot ect ion is necessary . Generally a gas
supply t o t he t ransm it t er fr om below ( sensor side) should be avoided. Should t he gas flow com e
from below, how ev er, t he displayed value m ay increased bey ond t he t olerance as per EN60079-
29- 1. Most com bust ible gases and vapours are subj ect t o a higher densit y t han air, t he
t ransm it t er is t o be inst alled close t o t he floor. For light er gases, wit h a lower densit y t han air,
t he t ransm it t er is being m ount ed close t o t he ceiling. A few gases have a densit y which is
sim ilar t o t hat of air. For t hese gases t he t ransm it t er should be m ount ed at t he breat hing height
of appr ox. 1.5 m over t he floor. The following chart show s t he r elat ive densit y of som e gases
and vapour s. More det ailed inform at ion is available on r equest .
Ga s/ Va pou r r e la t ive ga s Re com m e n de d

de n sit y com p a r e d m ou n t in g posit ion
w it h a ir
Hydr ogen, m et hane and am m onia light er close t o ceiling
Et hylene, et hane, acet ylene, m et hanol about sam e at breat hing height
Propane, but ane, hexane, nonane, pr opanol, heavier close t o floor
t oluene, et hyl acet at e, acet on, diet hyl et her, all
ot her organic solvent s and fuel m ixt ures
Furt herm or e, t ake t he following int o considerat ion as well:
• Ra in w a t e r , h ose w a t e r , dr ipp in g w a t e r , con de n sa t e a n d

• du st in t h e a t m osph e r e .
The t ransm it t er is t o a great ext ent pr ot ect ed against t he ingress of wat er and dust ( I P64) .
Special accessories ar e available t o pr ovide addit ional prot ect ion for very difficult condit ions.
Please cont act GfG for det ailed inform at ion.
-8-
W a r r a n t y m a y be voide d, if t h e se n sor is e x pose d t o a m bie n t con dit ion s
! w h ich w e r e u n k n ow n t o Gf G d u r in g pla n n in g, pr od u ct ion or de live r y.
M ou n t in g
When deciding on t he posit ion for t he t ransm it t er, m ak e sure t hat it is always accessible for
service and m aint enance. The t r ansm it t er m ust be m ount ed wit h t he sensor showing t o t he
floor.
For connect ing t he t ransm it t er t o t he cont r oller refer t o t he connect ion diagram ( page 28) . For
m ount ing t he t ransm it t er r em ove t he four special scr ews and t ake t he casing t op off. Fix t he
casing by m eans of t wo scr ew s.
The print ed circuit board inside t he casing is pot t ed in epoxy resin ( encapsulat ion " m " ) . The
side- m ount ed t erm inals ( increased safet y “ e” ) are used for connect ing t he cont roller.
I n st a lla t ion of Ele ct r ica l Con n e ct ion s

Procur em ent of cable and elect rical connect ions m ust be done by a specialist only, obeying t he
applicable regulat ions. Always use shielded cable ( e.g. LI YCY 3 x 1.5 m m 2 ) . The cr oss sect ion of
t he cable depends on t he cable lengt h. For short dist ances up t o 200 m it m ay be sufficient t o
use 0.75 m m 2 inst ead of 1.5 m m 2 . For longer dist ances t he cr oss sect ion m ust be 1.5 m m 2 . The
cable lengt h m ust not be m or e t han 1000 m .
The shield is fixed t o t he M16x1.5 scr ewing. I n case t he t ransm it t er is m ount ed t o an elect rically
conduct ive backgr ound ( e.g. st eel grinder) , a pot ent ial equalizat ion is t o be effect ed. I f t he
t ransm it t er is inst alled in a room which is subj ect t o Ex- r egulat ions, m ake sure t hat only t he
t ransm it t er is inst alled in t his area. The gas m onit oring syst em resp. t he m ains supply and t he
cont r oller m ust be inst alled in t he safe area.
Th e t r a n sm it t e r m u st be in st a lle d a n d ope n e d in g a s- f r e e a t m osph e r e
! on ly.
Th e t r a n sm it t e r m u st on ly be ope n e d w h e n de - e n e r g iz e d.
Te r m ina l dia gr a m Pot e nt ia l e qua liz a t ion
Pot . e qu a liza t ion m in . 4 m m 2

( a t le ft side of ca sing) e .g. st e e l
gr in de r
Ca ble gla n d
Tr a nsm it t e r
Type la be l
1 2 3 4
24V Ground 4..20m A
Bu zze r
Se n sor
GMA Cont roller
-9-
I n case t he t ransm it t er is not operat ed on a GMA cont roller, t he oper at ional volt age of t he m ains
unit m ust not ex ceed 30 V DC.
Fix t he casing t op wit h t he four special scr ews aft er inst allat ion.
Th e u se r m u st m a k e su r e t h a t e ve n in ca se of f a ilu r e t he volt a g e a t t h e
t r a n sm it t e r t e r m in a ls doe s n ot e x ce e d t h e m a x . f a u lt volt a ge U m
! in d ica t e d on t h e t ype la b e l.
U m = 2 5 0 V AC r e sp. U m = 4 5 V D C
Pu t t in g in Op e r a t ion
The t ransm it t er CC28 has passed qualit y cont rol for cor rect operat ion and display befor e
delivery. The calibrat ion was car ried out wit h t he appropriat e t est gases. Depending on
t ransport , m ount ing and am bient condit ions however variat ions m ay occur. Therefore t he gas
warning syst em has t o be t ak en int o operat ion and funct ion check ed by t he m anufact urer or by
a professional which is aut horized by t he m anufact urer, according t o BGV B6 ( form er VBG61 -
gases) , r esp. BG RCI guideline T023.
Aft er having been t urned on, t he unit needs a few m inut es for:
• t he self- t est , checking t he pr ogram and t he w or king m em ory ,
• ent ering and evaluat ing of t ransm it t er param et er s wit h sim ult aneous m em ory check,
• ent ering and evaluat ing of sensor param et ers w it h sim ult aneous m em or y check,
• warm ing- up t he sensor.
Wit hin 6 seconds during t he warm - up period t he t ransm it t er check s t he m em or y first . The
curr ent int erface pr ovides 0 m A and bot h t he yellow and t he green LED are lit . Then t he out put
signal t urns t o 1.6 m A, t he fault LED light s up and t he operat ion LED flashes slowly. The display
reads , t hen . Once t his is com plet ed, t he display of t he CC28 D and CC28 DA resp. of
t he r em ot e cont r ol RC2 at t he CC28 r eads t he unit , t he t ype of gas, t he det ect ion range, t he
alarm t hresholds and t he calibrat ion gas concent rat ion one aft er t he ot her. I f t he aut om at ic
reset of t he am biguit y alarm is act ivat ed, t his is indicat ed last , and t he fault LED flashes rapidly.
Once t he warm - up is com plet ed aft er 2 m inut es, t he CC28 t urns t o det ect ion m ode
aut om at ically. During t his period t he display reads a count down of t he seconds fr om 120. I f a
fault is recognized during t his t im e, t he t ransm it er t urns t o fault m ode. The cur rent int erface
provides 1.2 m A and t he display indicat es a fault m essage (  .) . The st at us and fault LEDs
are lit const ant ly. The alarm LEDs and t he display illum inat ion will flash alt ernat ely. Once t he
sensor has been r eplaced aft er a sensor fault (  .) , t he t ransm it t er is aut om at ically re-
st art ed. I n case of sensor r eplacem ent adher e t o t he safet y not es for elect rical connect ions in
explosion endanger ed areas ( see page 7) .
Not e:
Aft er t he init ial put t ing int o operat ion r esp. aft er a sensor r eplacem ent it m ight be possible t hat
t he value falls below or exceeds t he det ect ion r ange (  r esp. ) . I n t his case t he zer opoint
of t he t ransm it t er m ust be cor r ect ed by st art ing t he aut om at ic zeropoint adj ust m ent ( ZERO) .
Should  . occur ( reset t able) , r e- calibrat e t he sensor ( SPAN) or , if necessary , ent er t he
service m enu t o adapt t he det ect ion range of t he sensor t o t he hardwar e. Allow a warm - up t im e
of at least 30 m inut es befor e you check t he zer opoint . Once t he war m - up is com plet ed, t he
display should read . Ot her wise act ivat e t he ( aut om at ic) zeropoint adj ust m ent ( Aut oCal
adj ust m ent see page 11) .
-10-
D e t e ct ion M ode
I n det ect ion m ode t he display shows t he curr ent gas concent rat ion.
Th e d isp la y r e a d in g is a lw a ys id e n t ica l w it h t h e d isp la y of t h e r e m ot e con t r ol
con n e ct e d!
The det ect ion is provided by cont inuous m onit oring. Exceeded t hresholds ( only for m odel
CC28 DA) and am biguous sensor signals are r ecognized im m ediat ely and report ed visually by
t he CC28. Feat ur es of t he elect r onics like param et er m em or y or sensor funct ion are
perm anent ly m onit ored. During t rouble- free operat ion t he green LED “ ON “ is lit , t he yellow fault
LED is not lit .
To in d ica t e t h a t t h e CC2 8 is in de t e ct ion m ode t h e displa y a lt e r n a t e s

! e ve r y m in u t e t o u n it a n d t yp e of g a s.
Fa llin g Be low D e t e ct ion Ra n ge

Values below t he zer opoint are indicat ed as figures wit h negat ive sign. Depending on t he
m easur em ent value t he cur rent int erface pr ovides out put s bet w een 4.0 and 2.8 m A.
Deviat ions of t he det ect ion range by – 7.5% or m ore ar e indicat ed by t he perm anent ly lit fault
LED and t he display reading  alt ernat ing wit h t he negat ive value. The curr ent int erface
provides a perm anent out put of 2.8 m A.
Deviat ions of t he det ect ion range by – 25.0% or m or e ar e indicat ed by t he perm anent ly lit fault
LED and t he display reads perm anent ly .
I n case of deviat ions beyond t he det ect ion range of t he t ransm it t er circuit ry t he curr ent
int erface provides an out put of 1.2 m A and per m anent ly reads .
Ex ce e din g D e t e ct ion Ra n ge
Det ect ion ranges which are exceeded bet w een 100 % and 112 % are indicat ed by  in t he
display, alt ernat ing wit h t he m easur ed value. Depending on t he m easurem ent value t he current
int erface provides out put s bet w een 20 and 22 m A.
Should 112 % be exceeded, t he unit act ivat es t he am biguit y alarm . The display flashes
 and t he cur rent int erface pr ovides an out put of 22 m A.
Tou ch Ke y s
The funct ions of t he t ouch keys at t he t ransm it t er and at t he rem ot e cont r ol is ident ical. The
sam e applies t o t he display at t he CC28 D and CC28 DA and t he r em ot e cont r ol.
Ch e ck of D ispla y, LED a n d Bu z z e r
TEST
Press ZERO briefly in det ect ion m ode t o act ivat e t he check of t he display and LEDs. All LEDs ar e
act ivat ed for 2 seconds, and all segm ent s of t he display ( ...) are shown. For t he CC28 DA
t he alarm LEDs and t he buzzer are act ivat ed additionally.
D isp la y of Op e r a t ion a l Pa r a m e t e r s
INFO
During det ect ion m ode press key briefly for t he aut om at ic indicat ion of t he following
SPAN
operat ional param et er s one aft er t he ot her.

This order of r eadings will also appear aft er t urning t he t ransm it t er on.
-11-
D isp la y / Ex a m ple M e a n in g of d isp la y
1a  Measuring unit ( indicat ion in % LEL)
1b  Measuring unit ( indicat ion in Vol.% )
2  Type of gas
3   Det ect ion range ( full scale in “ m easuring unit ” )
4 
 . Calibrat ion gas concent rat ion ( value in “ m easuring
unit ” )
5  . Alarm t hreshold ( value in “ m easuring unit ” )
6  . Alarm t hreshold ( value in “ m easuring unit ” )
Value in “ m easuring unit ” m eans t hat t he displayed figure st ands for eit her % LEL or Vol.% .
Reading in Vol.% applies only t o t he gas am m onia.
Ala r m Th r e sh old ( on ly for t y pe CC2 8 D A)

The CC28 DA provides t wo alarm t hresholds. An alarm is t riggered, if t he gas concent rat ion
exceeds t he pr eset lim it value ( adj ust m ent in ser vice m enu) . Ex ceeded t hresholds are indicat ed
by m eans of t he LED bar ov er t he display, t he display illum inat ion and a buzzer. When t he first
t hreshold ( A1) is exceeded, t he display illum inat ion and t he LED bar are alt ernat ing in low
fr equency . The display reads t he curr ect m easurem ent value and  alt ernat ely.
Exceeding t he second t hreshold ( A2) act ivat es t he display illum inat ion, t he LED bar and t he
buzzer alt ernat ing in high frequency. The display r eads t he cur r ent m easur em ent value and 
alt ernat ely. Reset t ing t he t hreshold alarm s can be done aut om at ically or m anually, i.e. non-
lat ching or lat ching alarm s, depending on t he funct ion set t ing in t he ser vice m enu. The funct ion
of t he buzzer is fixed and cannot be changed: Act ivat ion by alarm 2, aut om at ic reset when t he
QUIT
concent rat ion has fallen below t he second t hr eshold, always r eset t able. Pressing key MENU allows
t o r eset a lat ching alarm , if t he gas concent rat ion has fallen below t he alarm t hreshold.
Am b igu it y Ala r m
Due t o t he det ect ion principle it m ight be possible t hat a very high gas concent rat ion dissipat es
t he oxygen in t he cell, t hus result ing in a lack of oxidat ion and a reduced signal, alt hough t he
sensor is exposed t o a gas concent rat ion which is clearly above it s det ect ion range. For avoiding
false signal evaluat ion, t he CC28 pr ovides a warning from am biguous sensor signals. This alarm
is t riggered by exceeding of 112.0% LEL and by recognit ion of a defined rise of signal ( Delt a
Alarm ) . The am biguit y alarm is indicat ed by t he fault LED flashing quickly. The CC28 DA
addit ionally act ivat es t he display illum inat ion, t he LED bar and t he buzzer, alt ernat ing in high
fr equency . The display also flashes  ( also refer t o Exceeding Det ect ion Range) . On principal
QUIT
t he am biguit y alarm is lat ching and can only be reset by pressing key ( or by pressing t he
MENU
Aut oZer o k ey at m odels wit hout display) . The m easur em ent value m ust be wit hin t he det ect ion
range.
Th e t r a n sm it t e r ca n n ot r e cog n iz e w h e n t h e da n ge r of a n e x p losive ga s
m ix t u r e r e sp. of a n e ve n h igh e r g a s con ce n t r a t ion h a s e n de d . Th e e n d
! of a g a s h a z a r d h a s t o be ch e ck e d w it h a por t a ble de t e ct or w h ich w a s

a lr e a dy t u r n e d on ou t side t h e h a z a r d ou s a r e a .
Should such an alarm be t riggered by a high gas concent rat ion, m ake sur e t o check t her
zer opoint and t he sensit ivit y of t he sensor , once t he alarm was r eset . Tak e int o considerat ion
t hat zeropoint and sensit ivit y m ay vary consider ably during t he first few days.
Se n sor Lif e
Cat alyt ic com bust ion sensors are subj ect t o a lim it ed lifet im e. The expect ed lifet im e of t he
sensor used in t he CC28 for com bust ible gases is approx . 3 t o 5 y ear s, depending on operat ional
condit ions. A few m ont hs befor e t he lifet im e expires, t he t ransm it t er indicat es t hat t he sensor
has t o be replaced wit h t he next service. The m essage is indicat ed by t he fault LED flashing
regularly and by t he t he alt ernat ing reading of    and t he m easurem ent value. I f t he
sensor is not being replaced wit hin t he next few m ont hs, t he t ransm it t er t urns off t he det ect ion
-12-
m ode, when t he sensor is exhaust ed. The curr ent int erface provides an out put of 1.2 m A, t he
yellow fault LED light s up and t he gr een operat ional LED short ly flashes in int ervals.
Fa u lt
A fault of t he t ransm it t ers is indicat ed by t he const ant ly lit yellow fault LED, t he curr ent
int erface provides 1.2 m A an err or m essage is shown in t he display (  . or  .) .
Fault report is given, if:
• t he sensor or t he circuit ry in t he t ransm it t er is defect ive;
• t he sensor is m issing;
• t he self- t est of t he unit recognizes a failure.
For furt her causes see „ Special St at us and relev ant Er ror Messages“ on page 21.
Aft er t he fault is cured, t he yellow fault LED expires.
Ch e ck a n d Au t oCa l Adj u st m e n t of Ze r opoin t ( ZERO)
A prer equisit e for t his check is at m ospheric air wit hout dist urbing, r esp. int erfering gas
com ponent s. I n pollut ed at m ospher es you m ay alt ernat ively use zero gas, which is free from
com bust ible com ponent s and int erfering m at t ers. Supply t he zer o gas t o t he sensor wit hout
pressur e by m eans of t he flow adapt er , at a flow rat e of approx. 0.5 l/ m in. Once t he t ype of gas
has been changed or t he sensor has been r eplaced, t he zer opoint m ust be adj ust ed cor rect ly. I f
t he det ect ion m ode shows a deviat ion from  t he zeropoint has t o be corr ect ed as w ell. When
t he r eading is const ant t he adj ust m ent can be done using t he Aut oCal feat ure. The Aut oCal
program aut om at ically adj ust s t he zeropoint signal.
Con d it ion s
The aut om at ic zeropoint adj ust m ent by m eans of t he Aut oZero k ey or wit h t he st andard access
code 0011 is only possible, if t he cur r ent ly displayed value is m ax. 25 % LEL. Expert users hav e
t he possibilit y t o act ivat e t he zer opoint adj ust m ent even for a display of 35 % LEL by ent ering
t he access code . This access code should only be used by t rained safet y personnel of t he
cust om er . Should t he curr ent zer opoint indicat ion be higher t han a value of 35 % LEL but it is for
sure t hat t his value is not gas induced, t he sub- m enu  of t he service m enu indicat es a
t em porarily valid ( m ax. 1 hour) code ( ) , which allows t he act ivat ion of t he zeropoint
adj ust m ent wit hout any lim it at ions.
Not e:
I f t he last m ent ioned m easur e becom es necessar y, t his m ight be caused by a fault y sensor,
which should be replaced as soon as possible.
Ex e cut ion
When t he user pr esses t he Aut oZer o key at a t ransm it t er wit hout display he cannot see whet her
t he m easur em ent value is wit hin t he allowed t olerance band for zeroing ( i.e. < 25 % LEL) .
Should t he m easurem ent value be higher t han 25 % LEL when t he Aut oZero k ey is pressed, t he
t ransm it t er r em ains in det ect ion m ode – t o be ident ified by t he fact t hat t he fault LED is not lit .
I n t his case t he zer opoint adj ust m ent is only possible by m eans of t he r em ot e cont r ol. For quick
adj ust m ent by m eans of t he secur ed Aut oZero key at t he left side of t he casing rem ov e t he lock
scr ew and pr ess t he k ey for at least 3 seconds. This swit ches t he current out put t o 2.0 m A, t he
fault LED flashes slowly, and st ep 3 below is st art ed aut om at ically. When using t he keypad at t he
display or at t he r em ot e cont r ol, follow t he order below:
TEST
1. Press k ey for at least 3 seconds t o act ivat e t he program .
ZERO
During t he whole procedure t he cur r ent int erface provides 2.0 m A and t he fault LED
flashes slowly. The display short ly r eads .
TEST INFO
2. Ent er t he num eric access code  ( resp. ) . Use k ey s ZERO and SPAN t o change t he
QUIT
figure at t he curr ent posit ion, t hen confirm by m eans of key . MENU
3. Aft er cor rect ent ering t he display shows alt ernat ing t he cur rent m easurem ent value and
t he r eading . When t he m easur em ent value r em ains const ant for a defined t im e
int erval, t he display changes t o r ead  and  for a few seconds, and t he hardware
int ernally regulat es it s zer opoint s. Once t he regulat ion is com plet ed successfully, t he new
-13-
zer opoint is set , t he Aut oCal program is aut om at ically t erm inat ed wit h t he display
reading , and t he t r ansm it t er r et urns t o det ect ion m ode.
Not es:
I f t he curr ent m easur em ent value is beyond t he allowed t olerances for t he r elevant access code,
t he display reads  short ly in st ep 3, and t he t ransm it t er r et urns t o det ect ion m ode.
TEST
The Aut oCal program can be short ened by long- t erm pressing key or t he Aut oZero key, while
ZERO
t he m easurem ent value is checked for const ancy. Then t he hardware st art s t o r egulat e/ adj ust
t he zeropoint direct ly.
TEST
For leaving t he Aut oCal program wit hout zeropoint adj ust m ent , press key ZERO or t he Aut oZer o
key briefly. The display short ly r eads .
On ce t h e qu ick a dj u st m e n t is com p le t e d, r e m e m be r t o scr e w t h e lock

! scr e w a n d it s ga sk e t in a ga in t o it s st op!
The following err or m essage m ay occur during zer opoint adj ust m ent :
D isp la y M e a n ing Fa u lt LED

 Gas signal is unst able.
. flashing
 Zer opoint is beyond t he allowed t olerance quickly
. range.
QUIT
All error m essage have t o be confirm ed wit h or wit h t he Aut oZer o k ey at t he left side of t he
MENU
casing. Aft er confirm at ion t he t ransm it t er r et urns t o det ect ion m ode wit hout zeropoint
adj ust m ent .
Ch e ck a n d Au t oCa l Adj u st m e n t of Se n sit iv it y ( SPAN )
For calibrat ion of a t ransm it t er wit hout display you need t he r em ot e cont rol RC2.
INFO
Press k ey briefly t o read t he curr ent ly set calibrat ion gas concent r at ion as % LEL ( for
SPAN
am m onia as Vol.% ) of t he param et er ( 

) . The value of t he t est gas concent rat ion should, if
possible, be 20% abov e t he m ain alarm t hreshold.
Many com bust ible gases ar e also t oxic. Handling t oxic gases r equires special
safet y pr ecaut ions.
!
For checking, resp. adj ust ing t he display sensit ivit y ( span) a calibrat ion adapt er has t o be
at t ached t o t he sensor holder. Via t his adapt er t he calibrat ion gas can be supplied t o t he sensor
at at m ospheric pr essur e wit h a flow of appr ox . 0.5 l/ m in., while t he display has t o be obser ved.
I s t her e a deviat ion bet ween t he displayed value and t he act ual calibrat ion gas concent rat ion a
span calibrat ion is necessar y. I f t he r eading is const ant t he adj ust m ent can be done using t he
Aut oCal feat ure. The Aut oCal program aut om at ically adj ust s t he m easuring signal t o t he
calibrat ion gas. Follow t he order below:
→ Be for e a ca lib r a t ion is st a r t e d, m a k e su r e t h a t t h e se n sor is f r e e fr om ca lib r a t ion

ga s ( d ispla y ) .
-14-
INFO
1. Press k ey SPANfor at least 3 seconds t o act ivat e t he Aut oCal program . During t he whole
procedur e t he curr ent int erface pr ovides 2.0 m A and, t he fault LED flashes slowly. The
display short ly r eads .
TEST INFO
2. Now ent er t he num eric access code . Use key s ZERO and SPAN t o change t he figure at
QUIT
t he cur rent posit ion, and confirm by m eans of k ey MENU .
3. Aft er cor rect ent ering, t he display shows t he curr ent m easur em ent value and t he
m essage  alt ernat ely. The t ransm it t er now wait s for a clear rise of concent rat ion.
When t he m easur em ent value rem ains const ant during a defined t im e int erval ( aft er a
fixed t im e of 2 m inut es) , t he value is used t o updat e t he sensit ivit y ( display ) . This
updat es t he calibrat ion dat a successfully. The t ransm it t er, howev er, does not ret urn t o
det ect ion m ode yet , since t he pr esent ly supplied t est gas concent rat ion would act ivat e an
alarm . The t ransm it t er rem ains in calibrat ion m ode unt il it recognizes a falling gas
concent rat ion and t hen a st abilizat ion of t he display value. The display alt ernat ely r eads
 and t he current m easur em ent value. Once t he value has st abilized, t he t ransm it t er
ret urns t o det ect ion m ode. I f t he unit does not not ice a reduced gas concent rat ion resp.
a st abilized m easur em ent value, it ret urns t o det ect ion m ode aft er m ax. 3 m inut es.
INFO
At any t im e t he Aut oCal program can be short ened by long- t erm pr essing key . The display SPAN
short ly r eads  and t he m easur em ent value is accept ed direct ly as t he sensit ivit y updat e.
INFO
To leav e t he Aut oCal pr ogram wit hout sensit ivit y adj ust m ent , press key SPAN only briefly. The
display short ly r eads .
The following err or m essages m ay occur during t he adj ust m ent :
D isp la y M e a n ing Fa u lt LED

 No rise of t est gas concent rat ion not ed.
.
 Test gas signal is unst able. flashing
. quickly
 Sensit ivit y is beyond t he allowed
. t olerance range.
QUIT
The er ror m essages have t o be confirm ed wit h key . The t r ansm it t er ret urns t o det ect ion
MENU
m ode wit hout new calibrat ion. The calibrat ion procedur e has t o be r epeat ed.
Se r v ice M e n u a n d Ex t e n de d Se r v ice M e n u
Act iv a t ion of se r vice m e n u
The ser vice m enu allows t o select and t o change all im port ant param et er s of t he CC28. Ent ering
t he ser vice m enu int err upt s t he det ect ion m ode; t he t ransm it t er t urns t o service m ode, and t he
alarm s ar e de- act ivat ed. The special st at us " Ser vice" is indicat ed by t he fault LED flashing slowly
and by a curr ent out put signal of 2.4 m A. I f you do not hit any key wit hin one m inut e, t he
t ransm it t er aut om at ically leaves t he service m ode and r et urns t o det ect ion m ode.
All p a r a m e t e r s ch a n g e d in t h e se r vice m e n u r e fe r t o t h e cu r r e n t ly se t
t ype of g a s !
! Should you wish t o change t ype of gas and par am et ers, set t he new t y pe of gas
first , before param et er changes for t his gas can becom e effect ive.
The service m enu can be called in t wo different ext ensions.

The st andard ser vice m enu is act ivat ed wit h code . I t allows t o adj ust t he calibrat ion gas
concent rat ion and, wit h m odel CC28 DA, all values which are relat ed t o alarm s.
The ext ended service m enu is act ivat ed wit h code . I t allows t o also change t he t ype of gas
and t he full scale value. This code should only be used by specially t rained safet y personnel.
-15-
For t r a n sm it t e r s w it h fu n ct ion t e st ( la be llin g BVS 0 5 ATEX G 0 0 1 X) : Th e
e x t e n de d se r vice m e n u a llow s a dj u st m e n t s w h ich m a y b e com e t h e f u n ct ion
t e st v oid !
! I f t he full scale value of 100 % LEL is changed t o a different value, or if t he gas is
changed from a cert ified gas ( see page 3) t o a non- cert ified one, t he funct ion t est
becom es invalid.
When using t he keypad at t he display or at t he rem ot e cont rol follow t he order below:
QUIT
1. Press k ey for at least 3 seconds. The t ransm it t er t urns t o ser vice m ode. The display
MENU
short ly r eads .

TEST INFO
2. Ent er t he num eric code ( r esp. ) . Use k eys ZERO and SPAN t o change t he figure at
QUIT
t he cur rent posit ion and confirm wit h key MENU .
TEST INFO
3. Aft er cor rect ent ering t he m enu display reads 
. Use k ey s ZERO and SPAN t o select t he
ot her m enu point s.
QUIT
To act ivat e a select ed m enu point press k ey MENU briefly. For param et er adj ust m ent use keys
TEST INFO QUIT
ZERO and SPAN . For leaving t he m enu point briefly press k ey MENU again.
D isp la y of D e scr ipt ion Re m a r k

INFO m e n u poin t
SPAN I ndicat ion of soft ware v er sion, serial


num ber and " Code" for ruling code
 Set t ing of alarm funct ion 2
 Set t ing of alarm funct ion 1
 Set t ing of hyst eresis for alarm 2 only visible and
changeable for
 Set t ing of hyst eresis for alarm 1 m odel CC28 DA
 Set t ing of alarm t hreshold 2
 Set t ing of alarm t hreshold 1

 Set t ing of calibrat ion gas concent rat ion
 Set t ing of full scale deflect ion changeable only
Entry in ext ended
menu point 
 Change of gas
m enu.
Leaving t he ser vice m enu w it h st or in g

of t he changed param et er s
TEST
Leaving t he ser vice m enu w it h ou t
ZERO  st or in g of t he changed param et er s
 – Ch a n g e of t y pe of ga s ( on ly possible in e x t e n de d m e n u )
M e n u poin t 
This funct ion allows t o select explicit ly all param et ers for differ ent t ypes of gas, which are st or ed
in t he sensor. You can see only t hose gases which t he sensor is scheduled for .
1. Act ivat e of m enu point 
.
2. The display shows t he present ly set t ype of gas.
This reading can also be selsct ed in t he st andar d service m enu.
TEST INFO
3. Use keys and
ZERO t o set t he gas.
SPAN
I n t he st andard service m enu t he display short ly r eads  and t hen t he pr esent ly
set t ype of gas ( st ep 2) .
QUIT
4. Select t he desired t ype of gas and confirm by pressing key MENU briefly.
5. The CC28 is rest art ing ( ) ( only for select ion of a differ ent gas) .
-16-
I f t he t ype of gas has been changed sev eral t im es befor e t he user r et urns t o a gas which was
already param et erized befor e, t he t r ansm it t er t akes over t hose param et ers which wer e st or ed
by t he user before. I f t he t ype of gas has been changed and aft er a rest art , t he st ored st andar d
param et er s ( see t able on page 31) are t ak en ov er for a t ype of gas which is select ed for t he fir st
t im e. When t he t ype of gas was changed, t he zeropoint has t o be adj ust ed in any case by
m eans of t he Aut oCal funct ion. The sensit ivit y of t he sensor for t he new gas is t o be check ed as
well and t o be adj ust ed by m eans of t he Aut oCal funct ion, if necessar y.
The different gases will be indicat ed eit her as shown in t he list below.
D isp la y Ga s D isp la y Ga s D isp la y Ga s
 Acet on  Toluene . I so- But ane
. n- But ane  Met hane 

 Met hyl
acet at e
 But anol . Cyclohexane 
 Met hanol
 2- But anon . Diet hyl et her 

. MI BK
 Acet ylene 

. Dim et hyl  Am m onia
et her
 Et hylene  Et hyl acet at e . Nonane
 Et hane  Et hanol . Oct ane
 Propine  Hydr ogen . Pent ane
 Propylene . Hexane  2- Propanol
 Propane . Hept ane  Xylene
 Benzene  Nat ural Gas  Carbon

Monoxide
M e n u poin t  – Adj u st m e n t of f u ll sca le de fle ct ion ( on ly possible in e x t e n de d m e n u )

The det ect ion range can be set t o 50, 75 or 100 % LEL. The det ect ion range for am m onia ( 4
Vol.% ) cannot be changed.
Follow t he 5 st eps descr ibed below:
1. Act ivat e m enu point .
2. The display shows t he present ly set full scale value.
I n t he st andard service m enu t he display reads " 100" for 100 % LEL.
TEST INFO
3. Use keys ZERO and SPAN for param et er adj ust m ent .
I n t he st andard service m enu t he display short ly r eads  and t hen t he cur r ent value
( st ep 2) .
QUIT
4. For leaving m enu point  pr ess k ey MENU briefly.
5. I f necessary, st or e t he param et er ( ) .
Not es:
The EC- Type Exam inat ion Cert ificat e BVS 05 ATEX G 001 X is only valid for a det ect ion range
wit h a full scale of 100 % LEL resp. 4.00 % Vol. NH 3 . The change of t he det ect ion range is m ainly
a change of t he cur r ent out put . The st andardized out put signal of 4 – 20 m A is used for t he
new, r educed det ect ion range. The display indicat ion does not change. A det ect ion range of 0 –
50 % LEL result s in t he figures from 0 t o 50.0 in t he display ( i.e. t he reading rem ains at % LEL) .
Ov er range and under range r efer t o a per cent age of t he det ect ion range, i.e. wit h a det ect ion
range of 0 – 50 % LEL t he am biguit y alarm is t riggered at approx . 56 % LEL ! Alarm t hresholds
-17-
are indicat ed in % LEL ( not in % of det ect ion r ange) ! Aft er a r educt ion of t he det ect ion range
m ake sur e t hat t he alarm t hresholds are check ed and, if necessary, cor rect ed. I f alarm
t hresholds wer e adj ust ed t o a value beyond t he new full scale deflect ion, t hey are aut om at ically
set t o t he cur rent full scale value. Should t he circuit ry r ecognize t hat t he curr ent ly set det ect ion
range cannot be m onit or ed any longer ( sensor t oo sensit ive for t he m easur em ent circuit , see
also  .) , t he display t urns aut om at ically t o t he highest possible value when ent ering t his
m enu point .
M e n u poin t 
 – Adj u st m e n t of ca libr a t ion g a s con ce n t r a t ion
The calibrat ion gas concent rat ion can be set w it hin t he range of 10 % – 105 % of t he cur r ent
det ect ion range.
QUIT
1. Use key MENU t o select m enu point 
.
2. The display reads t he curr ent ly set value for t he calibrat ion gas concent rat ion in % LEL
( for am m onia in Vol.% ) .
TEST INFO
3. Use keys ZERO and SPAN t o set t he param et er .
QUIT
4. Press k ey MENU briefly t o leave m enu point 
.
QUIT
5. I f necessary, st or e t he param et er: Select m enu point  and confirm wit h MENU .
M e n u poin t   – Ad j u st m e n t of a la r m t h r e sh olds ( on ly v isib le a t m ode l CC2 8 D A)

The alarm t hresholds can be set t hroughout t he det ect ion range; A1, however, cannot be set t o
a higher value t han A2. Set t ing a t hreshold t o 0 de- act ivat es t he alar m . A2 can only be set t o 0
when A1 was also set t o 0 before.
1. Act ivat e m enu point  resp. .
2. The display reads t he pr esent ly set value for t he alarm t hreshold.
TEST INFO
3. Use keys ZERO and SPAN t o set t he param et er s .
QUIT
4. Press k ey MENU briefly t o leave m enu point  r esp. .
Not es:
The buzzer in m odel CC28 DA is always connect ed t o alarm 2.
M e n u poin t ,  – Ad j u st m e n t of h y st e r e sis ( on ly v isib le a t m ode l CC2 8 D A)

This funct ion allows t o adj ust t he hyst er esis, i.e. t he difference bet ween act ivat ion and de-
act ivat ion of t he alarm t hresholds. The set t ing of t he param et er is done in % LEL and is
rest rict ed t o m ax . 5 % LEL ( for am m onia in Vol.% , m ax. 0.2 Vol.% ) .
Exam ple:
At a CC28 wit h t he det ect ion range 0 .. 100 % LEL t he hy st eresis for alarm 1 w as set t o 4.0, i.e.
t he alarm de- act ivat ion point for t he alarm is 4 % LEL below t he alarm t hreshold.
This result s in t he following alarm t riggering:
Ala r m 1 = 10 % LEL
Ala r m a ct iv a t ion ≥ 10 % LEL
H yst e r e sis H 1 3 % LEL
Ala r m d e - a ct iv a t ion ≤ 7 % LEL
1. Act ivat e m enu point  resp. .

2. The display reads t he pr esent ly set value for t he alarm hyst eresis.
TEST INFO
3. Use keys ZERO and SPAN t o set t he param et er .
-18-
QUIT
4. Press k ey MENU briefly t o leave m enu point  r esp. .
M e n u poin t ,  – Ad j u st m e n t of a la r m fu n ct ion s ( on ly v isible a t m ode l CC2 8 D A)

1. Act ivat e m enu point  resp. .
2. The display reads t he pr esent ly set code for t he alarm funct ion.
D isp la y Ala r m for e x ce e d e d t h r e sh old ...

  non- st oring ( = non- lat ching) , not reset t able ( # at alarm 2)
  st oring ( = lat ching) , reset t able when fallen below
TEST INFO
3. Use keys ZERO and SPAN for set t ing t he param et er.
QUIT
4. Press k ey MENU briefly t o leave m enu point  r esp.  .
Not e:
The buzzer funct ion at m odel CC28 DA is fixed t o: „ Alarm for exceeded t hreshold, non- lat ching,
reset t able even during exist ing alarm condit ions“ .
The EC- Type Exam inat ion Cert ificat e BVS 05 ATEX G 001 X is valid at alarm 2 only if set t o „  “
st oring ( = lat ching) .
M e n u poin t    – I n dica t ion of se n sor t yp e ( M K n u m be r ) , se n sor se r ia l n u m be r ,

soft w a r e ve r sion , se r ia l n u m be r a n d cod e
1. Act ivat e m enu point .
2. One aft er t he ot her t he display reads t he MK num ber ( . xxx .x) , t he sensor serial
num ber ( . x xxx) , t he soft war e v er sion (  xxxx) , t he 8- digit serial num ber of t he
t ransm it t er in 2 part s ( . xxxx . xx xx) and a code (  xx xx) .
The figure indicat ed as  is a ( only t em pr orarily valid) code, which allows t he act ivat ion of
t he zeropoint adj ust m ent wit hout any lim it at ions ( r efer t o Check and Aut oCal Adj ust m ent of
Zer opoint ) .
M e n u poin t  – Le a vin g t h e se r vice m e n u w it h ou t st or in g

1. Select m enu point .
QUIT
2. Press k ey MENU briefly t o leave t he ser vice m enu wit hout st oring of param et er changes.
M e n u poin t  – Le a v in g t h e se r v ice m e n u w it h w it h st or in g

1. Select m enu point .
QUIT
2. Press k ey MENU briefly t o leav e t he service m enu wit h st oring of param et er changes.
Not es:
When t he t ype of gas is changed, confirm ing t he m enu point act ivat es t he st oring im m ediat ely
and enables t he param et ers for t his t ype of gas.
Apart from this exception you can change several param eters one after the other without storing in
between. One collective storing procedure at the end of the settings saves all param eters which have
been changed in the service m enu.
-19-
Se n sor Re p la ce m e n t
The sensor s MK 208- 1, MK 217- 1 and 219- 1 are supplied wit h an EEPROM which st or es t he
sensor dat a ( serial num ber et c.) , t he calibrat ion dat a and t he adj ust able t ypes of gases. The
sensor s ar e fit t o t he t ransm it t er by m eans of a plug connect or. For replacing t he sensor
unscr ew t he allen scr ew side- m ount ed at t he im pact prot ect ion ( see pict ure on page 5 sensor
casing) . Open t he t ransm it t er casing and use suit able t ool t o push t he sensor downward. The
new sensor slides in t he casing from below; t he sensor label m ust show forward. The
t ransm it t er provides a lock against rot at ion, which m akes sure t hat t he sensor always fit s
properly. Once t he sensor is locked in place, secur e it wit h t he allen scr ew . When opening t he
casing t ake not e of t he safet y m easur es in Ex areas ( see page 7) . Once t he sensor has been
rem ov ed, t he y ellow fault LED light s up and t he cur rent out put signal falls t o 1.2 m A. At m odel
CC28 D and DA t he display reads  . , and at t he CC28 DA t he alarm LEDs flash slowly.
When t he new sensor has been fit , t he t ransm it t er does an aut om at ic r e- st art . The display reads
 and t hen  ( m em or y t est ; curr ent out put signal of 0 m A) . Then t he warm - up period is
st art ed: The display reads , t he green LED flashes and t he curr ent int erface pr ovides an
out put signal of 1.6 m A. I f all dat a of t he new sensor m at ch t he st ored dat a for t he
m easur em ent t ask, t he t ransm it t er t urns aut om at ically from warm - up t o det ect ion m ode. Since
t he hardwar e zer opoint s of t he differ ent sensors resp. sensor t ypes m ay differ considerably , a
sensor r eplacem ent m ust always be followed by a zeropoint adj ust m ent  ( see page 11) .
Ther e are no r est rict ions for t he first zer opoint adj ust m ent aft er a sensor r eplacem ent . Zer oing
is even possible at values far bey ond t he det ect ion range (  r esp. ) .
 or  

Possible e r r or m e ssa ge s  
 During t he warm - up period t he t ransm it t er recognizes, if t he new sensor is not
 
specified for t he gas w hich is set as t he m easurem ent gas. The gr een LED t urns fr om flashing
slowly t o a t win flash ( 2 short flashes) . The y ellow fault LED rem ains lit , t he curr ent out put st ill
provides 1.6 m A, and t he display reads   . I f t he t r ansm it t er is t o det ect t hat gas which
has been set , t he sensor is t o be r eplaced by a cell which is suit able for t his gas ( e.g. sensor
MK 217- 1 by sensor MK 208- 1) .
Should you want t o use t he new, different sensor anyway ( e.g. as a prelim inary solut ion) , you
QUIT
m ay pr ess k ey MENU( longer t han 3 seconds) in fault st at us and ent er t he acces code  t o
ent er t he ext ended serv ice m enu ( see page 14/ 15) ; m enu point 
 ( appear s im m ediat ely aft er
t he code) shows t he t y pes of gases t he new sensor is specified for. I f t he user select s a t ype of
QUIT
gas and confirm s his choice by pressing key , t he t ransm it t er is convert ed t o t his gas and
MENU
rest art ed. Then t he zer opoint  and t he sensit ivit y  have t o be set for t he new t ype of
gas ( see page 11- 14) .
  New sensors, no m at t er for which gas, are always preset t o t he det ect ion range of
0 – 100 % LEL. During t he warm - up period t he t ransm it t er r ecognizes, if t he det ect ion range
which was set last , and t he preset t ing of t he sensor for t he m easur em ent gas do not m at ch.
The gr een LED t urns fr om flashing slowly t o a t win flash ( 2 short flashes) . The y ellow fault LED
rem ains lit , t he curr ent int erface st ill provides 1.6 m A, and t he display r eads  . For
check and, if required, change of t he det ect ion range set t ing direct ly from t he fault st at us, you
QUIT
m ay press k ey MENU( longer t han 3 seconds) and ent er t he code  or  t o ent er t he
service m ode ( see page 14/ 15) , which allows t o do t he adj ust m ent under m enu point . Aft er
leaving t he m enu wit h  t he warm - up pr ocedure is cont inued.
Exam ple:
I f t he det ect ion range  was set t o 50 % or 75 % , a new and unused sensor will cause t he
display t o read  . I f t he t ransm it t er is set t o 100% , but t he fit sensor had already been
used in anot her unit which was set t o 50 % or 75 % , t he display will also r ead  .
Not es:
Aft er t he sensor was put int o operat ion for t he v ery first t im e, or w hen t he sensor has been
replaced, t he t ransm it t er m ay indicat e an over range r esp. under range (  resp. ) . I n t his
case t he aut om at ic zer opoint adj ust m ent ( ZERO) has t o be act ivat ed t o corr ect t he zeropoint .
-20-
Should  . occur ( reset t able) , t he sensor m ust be r e- calibrat ed ( SPAN) or , if necessary ,
t he det ect ion range of t he sensor m ust be adapt ed t o t he hardware in t he service m enu. Allow a
warm - up t im e of at least 30 m inut es before you check t he zer opoint . Once t he warm - up is
com plet ed, t he display should have st abilized t o read . Ot herwise act ivat e t he ( aut om at ic)
zer opoint adj ust m ent ( Adj ust m ent see page 11) .
Once t he sensor was replaced ( no m at t er which ser vice and adj ust m ent int erval
is being considered) , y ou have t o effect a com plet e service and adj ust m ent
! according t o DI N EN 60079- 28- 2 para. 8.9.
Check and adj ust m ent of zer opoint and sensit ivit y is t o be done as described
( pages 11- 14) .
Tr a n sm ission Ch a r a ct e r ist ics

Depending on t he t ype of gas t he t ransm it t er is subj ect t o differ ent t ransm ission charact erist ics.
Differ ent gases m ay show different response t im es. The t ransm ission signal is always
proport ional t o t he gas concent rat ion.
-21-
Spe cia l St a t u s a n d r e le va n t Er r or M e ssa ge s
The t able below describes t hose special st at us which cause t he yellow fault LED t o be lit
perm anent ly. For a bet t er diagnosis of a t ransm it t er wit hout display you should eit her r ead t he
er ror m essages below from t he rem ot e cont r ol RC2 or analyse t he values from t he cur r ent
out put .
green yellow
No Display Output Ca u se Act ion
LED LED
01  On On 0 mA Mem ory t est when boot ing t he syst em finishes aut om at ically aft er 6
seconds
02  flashing On 1,6 m A Boot ing t he syst em at st art or aft er t urns t o sensor warm - up
Operational change of gas ( see page 8) aut om at ically
para.

03 Count down flashing On 1,6 m A Sensor warm - up period finishes aut om at ically aft er 120
of seconds seconds.
10  Off glows 0 mA Too low supply volt age increase supply volt age
flashing
11  flashing On 1,2 m A Sensor lifet im e expired Replace sensor
 short ly
( single
flash)
12  Twin On 1,2 m A Aft er sensor replacem ent : Replace sensor again or
 flash Sensor is not specified for t he gas select different gas; see page 19

„ Sensor Replacem ent “
13  Twin On 1,2 m A Aft er sensor replacem ent : Check and, if necessary, change
 flash Det ect ion range set t ing of sensor and det ect ion range SCAL
t ransm it t er do not m at ch for the gas See page 19 „ Sensor
Replacem ent “
14  Off On 1,2 m A Fault during RAM access Re- st art transm it t er. I f error is
. report ed again, replace
t ransm it t er
15  Off On 1,2 m A Fault during ROM access Re- st art transm it t er. I f error is
. report ed again, replace
t ransm it t er
16    Off On 1,2 m A Fault during EEPROM access ( int ernal) Re- st art transm it t er. I f error is
. report ed again, replace
t ransm it t er
17    Off Off 1,2 m A Reserved Re- st art transm it t er. I f error is
. report ed again, replace
t ransm it t er
18       On 1,2 m A Fault during regulat ion of sensor volt age
. .
Re- st art transm it t er. I f error is
19 Off Off On 1,2 m A Fault during regulat ion of hardware
report ed again, replace
zeropoint
t ransm it t er
20    Off On 1,2 m A Tem perat ure m easurem ent is not
. plausible
21   On 1,2 m A Sensor is m issing
Fit sensor ( aut om at ic rest art )
. .
22  Off On 1,2 m A Fault during EEPROM access ( sensor) Replace sensor ( aut om at ic re-
. st art )
23  Off On 1,2 m A Wrong sensor/ param et er m em ory
.
24  Off On 1,2 m A Error A/ D convert er ( sensor volt age) Re- st art transm it t er.
. I f error is report ed again, replace
t ransm it t er.
25     On 1,2 m A Error A/ D convert er ( NTC) Re- st art transm it t er.
. . I f error is report ed again, replace
t ransm it t er.
26  Off On 1,2 m A Error A/ D convert er ( sensor current ) Re- st art transm it t er.
. I f error is report ed again, replace
t ransm it t er.
-22-
M e ssa ge s in de t e ct ion m ode
green yellow
No Display Output Ca u se Act ion
LED LED
30  On flashing 22 m A Gas concent rat ion has exceeded Caut ion Explosion hazards!
perm anent quickly det ect ion range of t ransm it t er Lat ching alarm . Measures see page
elect ronics. Am biguit y alarm ! 9 and 10
31  On flashing 22 m A Overrange ( > 112 % ) Caut ion Explosion hazards!
flashing quickly Am biguit y alarm ! Lat ching alarm . Measures see page
9 and 10
32 Value On Off 20–22 m A Overrange Caut ion Explosion hazards!
alt ernat ing ( bet ween 100 % and 112 % )
wit h

33 Value On Off 4–20 m A Gas concent rat ion has reached resp. Reduce gas concent rat ion!
alt ernat ing exceeded t he 2.alarm t hreshold. Lat ching alarm as st andard.
wit h

34 Value On Off 4–20 m A Gas concent rat ion haa reached resp. Reduce gas concent rat ion!
alt ernat ing exceeded t he 1.alarm t hreshold. Non- lat ching alarm as st andard.
wit h

35 Value On Off 4–20 m A Caut ionary warning m essage: QUIT
alt ernat ing Hardware/ sensor com binat ion cannot Reset wit h MENU
wit h recognize full scale deflect ion a) Re- calibrat e sensor ( SPAN)
 b) Adapt resp. Reduce det ect ion
 .  range in service m enu.
36 Value On flashing 4–20 m A Caut ionary warning m essage: Replace sensor during next service
alt ernat ing short ly End of sensor life wit hin t he next few
wit h ( single m ont hs
  flash)

37 Value On Off 4–20 m A Norm al det ect ion m ode
38 Value On Off 2.8–4 m A Det ect ion range is deviat ed bet ween
- 7.5% and 0.0%
39 Value On On 2.8 m A Det ect ion range is deviat ed bet ween Adj ust zeropoint
alt ernat ing - 8.0% and –25.0%
wit h

40  On On 2.8 m A Det ect ion range is deviat ed Adj ust zeropoint and sensit ivit y
perm anent < - 25.0%
41  On On 1.2 m A Measuring signal has fallen below Adj ust zeropoint and sensit ivit y
perm anent det ect ion range of t ransm it t er
elect ronics.
M e ssa ge s in se r v ice m ode a n d du r in g ca libr a t ion
42 Menu point On flashing 2.4 m A Service m enu has been act ivat ed by Select m enu point
keys or by rem ot e cont rol RC2 Will ret urn t o det ect ion m ode
aut om at ically, if no ent ry is
m ade wit hin 1 m inut e
43  On flashing 2.0 m A Aut oCal- Adj ust m ent of zeropoint in Will be com plet ed autom at ically
process ( act ivat ed by key pad, RC2 or aft er successful adj ust m ent
by Aut oCal- Key)
44  On flashing 2.0 m A Calibrat ion act ivat ed by keys or RC2 Will be com plet ed autom at ically
aft er successful adj ust m ent
45  On flashing 2.0 m A During Aut oCal adj ust m ent of QUIT
quickly sensit ivit y no rise of calibrat ion gas Reset wit h MENU
.
concent rat ion was recognized a) Check gas supply
b) Wait for request for adj ust -
m ent before supplying gas
46  On flashing 2.0 m A During Aut oCal adj ust m ent no st able QUIT
quickly zero gas resp. calibrat ion gas Reset wit h MENU
.
concent rat ion was recognized St abilize gas supply
47  On flashing 2.0 m A The zero point resp. the sensitivity is QUIT
quickly beyond the range of tolerance Reset with MENU

.
a) Check zero resp. calibration gas
and repeat procedure.
b) Eventually replace sensor.
-23-
I n det ect ion m ode t he m essages list ed in t he second colum n are indicat ed alt ernat ing wit h t he
m easur em ent value. The readings described in No.33 and 34 ar e only applicable for m odel CC28
DA. The r eadings described in No.35 and 36 ar e caut ionary warning m essages. The t ransm it t er
rem ains in det ect ion m ode, and t here is no im m ediat e act ion required by t he user. The st at us
described in No.32 and 38 r efer t o a de fact o ext ension of t he det ect ion range fr om 4–20 m A t o
t he range 2.8–22 m A, for showing m easur em ent values „ close“ t o t he original det ect ion range.
This generat es a t olerance range ar ound t he 4–20 m A signal, befor e a special st at us occurs.
Sit u a t ion of St a t u s LED ’s a n d Ou t pu t

The following t able shows for a t ransm it t er wit hout display t he differ ent indicat ions of t he t wo
st at us LEDs and t he out put signals wit h t heir m eanings. For t he zer opoint adj ust m ent ( if display
> 25 % LEL) , for adj ust m ent s t o ent er t he ser vice m enu on a t ransm it t er wit hout display t he
rem ot e cont rol RC2 is obligat ory.
gr e e n LED ye llow LED Out put D e sr ipt ion se e ch a pt e r ...

On On 2,8 m A Page 21 „ Messages in det ect ion m ode“ No.39, 40
On On 1,2 m A P.21 „ Messages in det ect ion m ode“ No.41
On On 0 mA P.21 „ Special St at us and r elevant Error Messages“ No.01
On flashing quickly 22 m A P.21 „ Messages in det ect ion m ode“ No.30, 31
On flashing quickly 2,0 m A P.21 „ Messages in service m ode...“ No.45- 47
On Flashing slowly 2,4 m A P.21 „ Messages in service m ode...“ No.42
On Flashing slowly 2,0 m A P.21 „ Messages in service m ode...“ No.43, 44
On Single flashes 4–20m A P.21 „ Messages in det ect ion m ode“ No.36
On Off 20–22m A P.21 „ Messages in det ect ion m ode“ No.32
On Off 4–20m A P.21 „ Messages in det ect ion m ode“ No.( 33, 34) , 35, 37
On Off 2,8–4m A P.21 „ Messages in det ect ion m ode“ No.38
flashing On 1,6 m A P.21 „ Special St at us and r elevant Error Messages“ No.02, 03
Twin flash On 1,2 m A P.21 „ Special St at us and r elevant Error Messages“ No.12, 13
Single flash On 1,2 m A P.21 „ Special St at us and r elevant Error Messages“ No.11
Off On 1,2 m A P.21 „ Special St at us and r elevant Error Messages“ No.14- 26
Curr ent s w ell above 22,0m A should be seen as disrupt ion!
Pr ior it y of disp la ys a n d m e ssa g e s in d e t e ct ion m od e

The displays of sit uat ions wit h low priorit y will be subst it ut ed for displays wit h higher priorit ies
( t he sit uat ions wit h low priorit y will not be delet ed) .
Pr ior it y Sit u a t ion D e scr ipt ion se e ch a p t e r ...
Am biguit y Page 22 „ Messages in det ect ion m ode“ No.30, 31
A/ D convert er fault P.21 „ Special St at us and r elevant …“ No.24- 26
( m inor) overrange P.22 „ Messages in det ect ion m ode“ No.32
Alarm 2 P.22 „ Messages in det ect ion m ode“ No.33
Alarm 1 P.22 „ Messages in det ect ion m ode“ No.34
Det ect ion range deviat ion P.22 „ Messages in det ect ion m ode“ No.38- 40
„ SCAL- Error“ ( War ning) P.22 „ Messages in det ect ion m ode“ No.35
Sensor Replacem ent ( Warning) P.22 „ Messages in det ect ion m ode“ No.36
Syst em - and sensor er r or s ( P. 21 No. 11 und No. 14- 23) will int errupt t he det ect ion m ode wit h
it s m essages. I n case of a prior am biguit y alarm t he st at us LEDs and t he out put will st ill
indicat e it and t he new special st at us will be indicat ed only by t he LCD display.
The m essage wit h t he highest priorit y will always be displayed. Messages wit h lower priorit y can
not be queried.
-24-
Pu t t in g in t o Ope r a t ion a n d M a in t e n a n ce
Make sur e t hat DI N EN 600079- 29- 2 „ Guideline for choice, inst allat ion, use and m aint enance of
apparat us for det ect ion and m easurem ent of com bust ible gases or oxygen“ as w ell as t he
relevant nat ional regulat ions are adher ed t o. For Germ any t his m eans t he " Explosion Prot ect ion
Regulat ions" , guideline T023 ( BGI 518) „ Gas w arning Apparat us for Ex plosion Prot ect ion – Use
and Operat ion“ and “ BGR 500, Teil 2, Kapit el 2.33” ( form erly known as: UVV- Gase, BGV B6,
VGB 61) .
Aft er inst allat ion and during t he init ial put t ing int o operat ion gas warning equipm ent have t o be
checked for funct ion by an expert ( see DI N EN 60079- 29- 2 sect ion 8.9) .
Maint enance com prises inspect ion, service, calibrat ion and adj ust m ent as w ell as t he regular
funct ion t est s and repair.
Se r v ice , I n sp e ct ion , Ca libr a t ion a n d Adj u st m e n t s

I nspect ion shouls include a visual check of t he gas warning equipm ent ( for Germ any see
guideline T023, chapt er 9) .
• Mechanical dam age

• Soiling by dust
• Condensat e by m oist ure
• Prot ect ive devices for t r ansm it t er
• Diffusion inlet of t ransm it t er
• Gas sam pling syst em , gas pr ocessing syst em ( if exist ing)
Ser vice and inspect ion com prise all m easur es which are necessar y t o keep t he original proper
wor king condit ion of t he gas warning syst em . The inspect ion int ervals m ust not exceed 4
m ont hs ( see DI N EN 60079- 29- 2 chapt er 11 and in Germ any guideline T023, chapt er 9.2 and
9.3)
• Zer opoint
• Sensit ivit y wit h calibrat ion gas
• Triggering of alarm t hr esholds
• Response t im e
• Messaging funct ions visually and audibly
• Failure m essages
I t is r ecom m ended t o ent rust GfG service wit h t his t ask.
Re gu la r Fu n ct ion Te st s
Depending on t he am bient condit ions gas warning syst em s m ay behave differ ent ly. I t is
im port ant , t herefor e, t o do a daily visual check part icularly during t he first few days aft er t he
init ial put t ing int o operat ion.
I n addit ion t o t he m aint enance w or k t he funct ion of t he gas warning syst em has t o be checked
in regular int ervals. To verify t he curr ent int erface as part of t he safet y funct ion, t he connect ed
cont r ol unit has t o be checked while m easuring operat ion by using t est gas above t he m ain
alarm t hreshold. This has t o be done once a y ear.
This int erval m ust not exceed 1 y ear ( for Germ any see guideline T023, chapt er 9 and “ BGR 500,
chapt er 2.33” form erly known as: UVV gase, BGV B6, VGB 61) .
Check s are t o be effect ed by an expert , and t he result have t o be confirm ed in writ ing.
Re pa ir
Repair com prises all repair and replacem ent wor k. I t m ust only be done by t he m anufact urer
and by persons who are aut horised by t he m anufact urer – i.e. by GfG Gesellschaft für
Gerät ebau m bH. Only original spare part s and original assem blies are allowed t o be used, which
are t est ed and aut horised by t he m anufact ur er.
-25-
Fu n ct ion Re st r ict ion s de pe n din g on Ox yge n Con ce n t r a t ion
Take not e, t hat t he m easurem ent of gas and/ or vapour concent rat ions in t he range up t o 100 %
LEL cannot be done accurat ely, if sim ult aneously t he oxygen concent rat ion is less t han
10 Vol. % . I n t his case t he pellist or suffer s fr om a lack of oxygen necessary for t he „ cat alyt ic
com bust ion“ .
The Ex appr oval is not valid for using t he t ransm it t er in oxygen enriched at m ospheres w it h
concent rat ions of m or e t han 25 Vol.% oxygen.
D isp la y I r r it a t ion du e t o Se n sor Poison s

Cert ain param et ers, known as " sensor or cat alyst poisons" , m ay affect t he signal behaviour of
t he sensor. The " sensit ivit y" , i.e. t he capabilit y t o em it signals, is being reduced. Sensor poisons
are e.g. sulphur, lead and silicon vapours. Usually t hese com ponent s are found v ery rar ely or in
very low concent rat ions only.
Please draw y our special at t ent ion t o any int er fering gases, which m ight be present at y our
det ect ion place and which m ight affect t he proper funct ioning of your gas m onit oring syst em .
Depending on t he t ype of gas and it s concent r at ion, t his affect m ay r esult in failures like a m or e
or less st eady, long- t erm loss of sensit ivit y or even t o a sudden and considerable drop of
sensit ivit y ( see also DI N EN 60079- 29- 2) .
Tr ou b le Sh oot in g
Fa ilu r e Ca u se Solu t ion

Zer opoint cannot be adj ust ed Sensor is fault y Replace sensor
Sensit ivit y cannot be adj ust ed Sensor is fault y Replace sensor
Out put curr ent is fallen t o 0 m A Fuse is blown Replace fuse
Line is int errupt ed Re- connect
Low e r Ex p losion Lim it s ( LEL) of Ga se s su b j e ct t o Fu n ct ion Te st
Ga s For m u la LEL a s p e r EN 6 1 7 7 9 LEL a s EN 6 0 0 7 9 - 2 0 - 1

Fu n ct ion t e st or p e r d a t a b a se
Ch e m sa fe
Met hane CH4 4.4 Vol% 4.4 Vol%
Propane C3 H 8 1.7 Vol% 1.7 Vol%
Hexane C6 H 14 1.0 Vol% 1.0 Vol%
Nonane C9 H 20 0.7 Vol% 0.7 Vol%
Toluene C6 H 5 - CH 3 1.1 Vol% 1.0 Vol%
Acet on CH3 - CO- CH3 2.5 Vol% 2.5 Vol%
Hydr ogen H2 4.0 Vol% 4.0 Vol%
Et hylene CH2 = CH 2 2.3 Vol% 2.3 Vol%
Diet hyl et her C2 H 5 - O- C2 H 5 1.7 Vol% 1.7 Vol%
Et hyl acet at e CH3 - COO- C2 H5 2.2 Vol% 2.0 Vol%
I sopropanol CH3 - CHOH- CH3 2.0 Vol% 2.0 Vol%
Am m onia NH3 15.0 Vol% 15.0 Vol%
-26-
Spa r e Pa r t List
Pa r t - N o.
Cap and m inor part s for 5 unit s 2800301
Casing t op screw s for 5 unit s 2800302
Casing bot t om for CC28 2800303
Casing t op wit h display for CC28 D and CC28 DA 2800304
Casing bot t om wit hout buzzer for CC28 and CC28 D 2800305
Casing bot t om wit h buzzer for CC28 DA 2800306
Main m odule wit hout alarm ( Um = 45V) for CC28 and CC28 D 2800307
Main m odule wit hout alarm ( Um = 250V) for CC28 and CC28 D 2800308
Main m odule wit h alarm ( Um = 45V) for CC28 DA 2800309
Main m odule wit h alarm ( Um = 250V) for CC28 DA 2800310
Display m odule wit hout alarm for CC28 D 2800311
Display m odule wit h alarm for CC28 DA 2800312
MK 208- 1 Spar e sensor for 0…100% LEL com bust ible gases 2800750
MK 217- 1 Spar e sensor for 0…100% LEL com bust ible gases 2800751
MK 219- 1 Spar e sensor for 0…50% LEL H2 / CH 4 / C3 H 8 ( # ) com bust ible gases 2800760
Acce ssor ie s
Pa r t N o.
Rem ot e cont r ol RC2 2800201
Calibrat ion adapt er ( flow rat e 0.5 l/ m in ± 0.1 l/ m in) 2800202
Wind prot ect ion 2800204
Wheat her pr ot ect ive casing ( # ) on r equest
Spare part s and accessories should be st or ed at an am bient t em perat ure of 0 – 30° C. St oring
t im e should not exceed 5 y ear s. For st orage of spare sensors m ak e sure t hat t he am bient
at m osphere is fr ee from aggressive m edia and sensor poisons.
-27-
Con n e ct ion D ia gr a m CC 2 8 - w it h 4 .. 2 0 m A Ou t pu t
brown
1
green 2
3
white 4
24 GND 4 – 20m A Shield laid on

V screwing
GMA101 5 1 2
GMA100 5 1 2 wit h m ot herboard
from 1997
GMA104 55 53 54 connect ion t o
58 56 57 m ult iplexer
61 59 60
64 62 63
GMA301 5 1 2
GMA304 55 53 54 connect ion t o
58 56 57 m ult iplexer
61 59 60
64 62 63
GMA41 28 29 30
GMA81 ( A) 1 2 3
GMA43 19 20 21 connect ion of up t o 3
22 23 24 t ransm it t ers
25 26 27
19 20 21 connect ion of up t o 4
GMA44 and
22 23 24 t ransm it t ers
GMA84 25 26 27
28 29 30
GMA88 19 20 21 connect ion of up t o 8
: : : t ransm it t ers
40 41 42
For connect ion t o t he GMA … cont r oller please r efer t o t he operat ion m anual of t he r elevant
GMA.
-28-
Te r m in a l D ia gr a m M W G CC2 8
3 – wire connect ion
1
U= 15.0 V - 30.0 V *
CC28
2
R1 3
I = 4 - 20 mA
4
Max. load 150 Ohm
4 – wire connect ion
1
U= 15.0 V - 30.0 V *
2 CC28
3
R1
I = 4 - 20 mA
4
Max. load 150 Ohm
* A v olt a ge e x ce e din g t h e m a x . a llow e d v a lu e of 3 0 V D C ( e ve n sh or t - t e r m volt a ge

pe a k s) w ill b low t h e pr ot e ct ive fu se .
-29-
Se n sor sp e cif ica t ion
M K2 0 8 - 1 Ca t a ly t ic com bu st ion se n sor for com bu st ible ga se s a n d v a por s ( a ccor din g t o EN 6 0 0 7 9 - 2 9 - 1 )

Det ect ion range/ Resolut ion 0...100 % LEL / 0,5 % LEL or 0...4 Vol.% NH 3 / 0,05 Vol.% NH 3
Response t im e t 50 : ≤ 5 s (CH4 ) , with wind protection: ≤ 8 s (CH4 ) ,
≤ 5 s (C3 H 8 ) , * 1 ≤ 8 s (C3 H 8 ) , * 1
t 90 : ≤ 9 s (CH4 ) , with wind protection: ≤15 s (CH4 ) ,
≤10 s (C3 H 8 ) , *1
≤17 s ( C3 H 8 ) , * 1
Flow rat e 0...6m / s: m ax. ±3% of det ect ion range or ±10% of display ( regarding t o 0 m / s) * 2, * 4
Pressure 800...1100 hPa: m ax. ±3% of det ect ion range or ±7% of display ( regarding t o 1000 hPa) * 4
Hum idit y 5% ...90% r.F.: m ax. ±5% of det ect ion range or ±10% of display ( regarding t o 50% r.F. and 40° C) * 4
Tem perat ure - 25...+ 55° C: m ax. ±5% of det ect ion range or ±15% of display ( regarding t o 20° C) * 4
Cross sensit ivit ies Met hane – Measuring range( # ) * 3 . Propane – Measuring range * 3 . Nonane – Measuring range ( # ) * 3 .
at 50% LEL: 2,20 % Vol. CH 4 : = 100% 0,85 % Vol. C3 H 8 : = 100% 0,35 % Vol. C9 H 20 : = 100%
2,00 % Vol. H 2 : ca.131% 2,00 % Vol. H 2 : ca.160% 2,00 % Vol. H 2 : ca.328%
1,25 % Vol. C3 H 6 O: ca. 97% 1,25 % Vol. C3 H 6 O: ca.111% 1,25 % Vol. C3 H 6 O: ca.231%
1,15 % Vol. C2 H 4 : ca. 96% 2,20 % Vol. CH 4 : ca.107% 2,20 % Vol. CH 4 : ca.224%
0,85 % Vol. C3 H 8 : ca. 96% 1,15 % Vol. C2 H 4 : ca.101% 1,15 % Vol. C2 H 4 : ca.213%
1,10 % Vol. C4 H 8 O2 : ca. 92% 1,10 % Vol. C4 H 8 O2 : ca. 95% 0,85 % Vol. C3 H 8 : ca.210%
1,00 % Vol. C3 H 8 O: ca. 87% 1,00 % Vol. C3 H 8 O: ca. 93% 1,10 % Vol. C4 H 8 O2 : ca.201%
0,85 % Vol. C4 H 10 O: ca. 87% 0,85 % Vol. C4 H 10 O: ca. 87% 1,00 % Vol. C3 H 8 O: ca.193%
0,50 % Vol. C6 H 14 : ca. 74% 0,50 % Vol. C6 H 14 : ca. 69% 0,85 % Vol. C4 H 10 O: ca.180%
0,55 % Vol. C7 H 8 : ca. 72% 0,55 % Vol. C7 H 8 : ca. 67% 0,50 % Vol. C6 H 14 : ca.143%
0,35 % Vol. C9 H 20 : ca. 57% 0,35 % Vol. C9 H 20 : ca. 49% 0,55 % Vol. C7 H 8 : ca.132%
at 2 % Vol NH 3 : 2,00 % Vol. NH 3 : ca. 57% 2,00 % Vol. NH 3 : ca. 49% 2,00 % Vol. NH 3 : ca.100%
Special not es: This sensor is not suit able for t he det ect ion of hydrogen and for t he use in hydrogenous areas. The sensor
responds t o hydrogen, but is only suit able for warning of t his gas. Perm anent exposure t o hydrogen m ay result
in a perm anent ly rising signal.
Expect ed lifet im e: 5 years
M K2 1 7 - 1 Ca t a ly t ic com bu st ion se n sor for com bu st ible ga se s a n d v a por s ( a ccor din g t o EN 6 0 0 7 9 - 2 9 - 1 )
Det ect ion range/ Resolut ion 0...100 % LEL / 0,5 % LEL
Response t im e t 50 : ≤ 5 s (CH4 ) , with wind protection: ≤ 9 s (CH4 ) ,
≤ 7 s (C3 H 8 ) , * 1 ≤ 9 s (C3 H 8 ) , * 1
t 90 : ≤10 s (CH4 ) , with wind protection: ≤18 s (CH4 ) ,
≤12 s (C3 H 8 ) , *1
≤21 s (C3 H 8 ) , * 1
Flow rat e 0...6m / s: Max. ±3% of det ect ion range or ±10% of display ( regarding t o 0 m / s)
* 2, * 4
Pressure 800...1100 hPa: Max. ±3% of det ect ion range or ±7% of display ( regarding t o 1000 hPa) * 4
Hum idit y 5% ...90% r.F.: Max. ±5% of det ect ion range or ±15% of display ( regarding t o 50% r.F. and 40° C) * 4
Tem perat ure - 10...+ 40° C: Max. ±5% of det ect ion range or ±15% of display ( regarding t o 20° C) * 4
Cross sensit ivit ies Met hane – Measuring range ( # ) * 3 Propane – Measuring range * 3 . Hydrogen – Measuring range ( # ) * 3
at 50% LEL: 2,20 % Vol. CH 4 : = 100% 0,85 % Vol. C3 H 8 : = 100% 2,00 % Vol. H 2 : = 100%
2,00 % Vol. H 2 : ca.115% 2,00 % Vol. H 2 : ca.188% 2,20 % Vol. CH 4 : ca. 86%
0,85 % Vol. C3 H 8 : ca. 65% 2,20 % Vol. CH 4 : ca.162% 0,85 % Vol. C3 H 8 : ca. 53%
Special not es: When t he sensor was ex posed t o a gas concent rat ion which was considerably higher t han 100% LEL, t he
zeropoint and t he sensit ivit y of t he sensor hav e t o be check ed, once t he gas concent rat ion has disappeared.
M K2 1 9 - 1 Ca t a ly t ic com bu st ion se nsor for com bu st ible ga se s a n d v a por s ( # )

Det ect ion range/ Resolut ion 0...50 % LEL /
0,2 % LEL
Response Tim e t 50 : ≤ 5 s (CH4 ), ≤ 7 s (C3 H 8 ) , * 1 wit h wind prot ect ion: ≤ 9 s (CH4 ), ≤ 9 s (C3 H 8 ) , * 1
t 90 : ≤10 s (CH4 ), ≤12 s (C3 H 8 ) ,* 1 wit h wind prot ect ion ≤18 s (CH4 ), ≤21 s (C3 H 8 ) , * 1
Flow Rat e 0...6 m / s: m ax. ±5% of det ect ion range or ±10% of display ( regarding t o 0 m / s) * 2 , * 4
Pressure 80...110 kPa: m ax. ±5% of det ect ion range or ±7% of display ( regarding t o 100k Pa) * 4
Hum idit y 5% ...90% r.F.: m ax. ±5% of det ect ion range or ±15% of display ( regarding t o 50% r.F. and 40° C) * 4
Tem perat ure - 10...+ 40° C: m ax. ±5% of det ect ion range or ±15% of display ( regarding t o 20° C) * 4
Cross Sensit ivit ies Met hane – Det ect ion range * 3 . Propane – Det ect ion range * 3 . Hydrogen – Det ect ion range * 3
at 50% LEL: 2,20 Vol.% CH 4 : = 100% 0,85 Vol.% C3 H 8 : = 100% 2,00 Vol.% H 2 : = 100%
2,00 Vol.% H 2 : ca. 98% 2,00 Vol.% H 2 : ca.155% 2,20 Vol.% CH 4 : ca.103%
0,85 Vol.% C3 H 8 : ca. 63% 2,20 Vol.% CH 4 : ca.158% 0,85 Vol.% C3 H 8 : ca. 60%
Special not es: : When t he sensor was ex posed t o a gas concent rat ion which was considerably higher t han 100% LEL, t he
zeropoint and t he sensit ivit y of t he sensor hav e t o be check ed, once t he gas concent rat ion has disappeared.
* 1 For ot her gases longer response t im es are valid, especially for nonane.
* 2 At flow rat es > 3 m / s a wind prot ect ion is necessary. Generally it should be avoided t hat t he
gas is supplied t o t he t ransm it t er from below ( sensor side) .
* 3 The cross sensit ivit ies can var y depending on sensor and are dependent on gas concent rat ion and age
of sensor. Ot her com bust ible gases which are not list ed, are expect ed t o cause an increase of signal.
* 4 This specificat ion is valid for m et hane and propane.
-30-
Te ch n ica l D a t a
Tr a nsm it t e r CC2 8
Transm it t er t ype: CC28 ; CC28 D and CC28 DA
Sensor t ype: MK 208- 1, MK 217- 1 and MK 219- 1
Expect ed sensor life: 5 years - for norm al indust rial applicat ions ( see sensor
specificat ion)
Gas: Com bust ible gases and vapours,
e.g. Met hane, Propane, Hexane, Nonane ( see t est report )
Det ect ion range: e.g. 0 .. 100 % LEL respect ively 0…50 % LEL ( see t est report )
Response t im e: see sensor specificat ion
Alarm : only CC28 DA: visual and audible ( 90dB @ 10cm )
Det ect ion principle: Cat alyt ic com bust ion
Gas supply: Diffusion or
via flow adapt er ( flow rat e 0.5± 0.1 l/ m in)
Supply volt age: 15 .. 30 V DC
Max. supply current : 150 m A
Max. fault volt age: 250 V AC resp. 45 V DC ( see t ype label)
Out put current : 4 .. 20 m A ( m ax. load 150 Ohm )
Clim a t e Condit ions
Short - t erm st orage t em perat ure: - 25 .. + 60° C
Recom m ended st orage t em p.: 0 .. + 30° C
Operat ional t em perat ure ( am bient ) : - 20 .. + 50° C for use in Ex- hazardous areas
- 25 .. + 55° C for use in non- Ex areas
see Sensor specificat ion in case of using of MK217
Hum idit y range: 5 .. 90% r.h.
At m . Pressure range: 800 .. 1200 hPa
Flow rat e: 0 t o 6 m / s ( > 3 m / s wit h wind prot ect ion, m ount ing posit ion see
page 7)
Ca sing
St abilit y: Prot ect t he casing against very hard im pact s ( > 4 J)
Casing m at erial: ant i- st at ic com pound
Dim ensions: 100 x 167.5 x 55 m m ( WxHxD) ( H wit h sensor: 193 m m )
Weight : approx. 800 g ( wit h display )
Prot ect ion: I P64
Cable gland: screwing M16 x 1.5 m ax. cross sect ion 3 x 1.5 m m 2
Cable t ype and lengt h: LI YCY 3 x 0.75 m m 2 for up t o 200 m or
LI YCY 3 x 1.5 m m 2 for up t o 1000 m
Appr ova ls a n d Ce r t ifica t e s
Labelling:  I I 2G  0158
I gnit ion prot ect ion classificat ion: Ex dem b [ ib] I I C T4 Gb - 20°C≤Ta≤+50°C
EC- Type Exam inat ion Cert ificat ion: BVS 04 ATEX E 132 X ( elect rical Ex- Prot ect ion)
Funct ion t est : BVS 05 ATEX G 001 X ( m easuring funct ion)
EMC t est : EN 50270
Radio shielding: Type class I
I nt erference resist ance: Type class I I
-31-
Ann e x
I n t e r n a l M e m or y CC2 8
Ev er y t ransm it t er is pre- pr ogram m ed wit h t he dat a of t he m ost im port ant gases and t heir
addit ional param et ers. I n m ost cases, t her efor e, t he user does not need t o change t he
configurat ion. The following inform at ion is st or ed in t he int ernal m em ory of t he t ransm it t er:
Ga s For m u la Un it CGAS A1 A2 H1 H2 F1 F2
( t est ( Alarm ( Alarm ( Hyst . ( Hyst . (Funct. (Funct.
gas) 1) 2) A1) A2) A1) A2)
Met hane CH4 % LEL 45.5 20.0 40.0 1.0 1.0 NS SC
Et hane C2 H6 % LEL 50.0 20.0 40.0 1.0 1.0 NS SC
Propane C3 H8 % LEL 50.0 20.0 40.0 1.0 1.0 NS SC
But ane C4 H10 % LEL 50.0 20.0 40.0 1.0 1.0 NS SC
Pent ane C5 H12 % LEL 50.0 20.0 40.0 1.0 1.0 NS SC
Hexane C6 H14 % LEL 50.0 20.0 40.0 1.0 1.0 NS SC
Hept ane C7 H16 % LEL 50.0 20.0 40.0 1.0 1.0 NS SC
Oct ane C8 H18 % LEL 50.0 20.0 40.0 1.0 1.0 NS SC
Nonane C9 H20 % LEL 50.0 20.0 40.0 1.0 1.0 NS SC
I so- But ane ( CH3 ) 3 CH % LEL 50.0 20.0 40.0 1.0 1.0 NS SC
Cyclohexane C6 H12 % LEL 50.0 20.0 40.0 1.0 1.0 NS SC
Et hylene ( Et hene) H2 C= CH2 % LEL 50.0 20.0 40.0 1.0 1.0 NS SC
Propylene ( Propene) H2 C= CH–CH3 % LEL 50.0 20.0 40.0 1.0 1.0 NS SC
Acet ylene ( Et hine) HC≡CH % LEL 50.0 20.0 40.0 1.0 1.0 NS SC
Propine HC≡C–CH3 % LEL 50.0 20.0 40.0 1.0 1.0 NS SC
Hydrogen H2 % LEL 50.0 20.0 40.0 1.0 1.0 NS SC
Benzene C6 H6 % LEL 50.0 20.0 40.0 1.0 1.0 NS SC
Toluene C6 H5 -CH3 % LEL 50.0 20.0 40.0 1.0 1.0 NS SC
Xylene C6 H4 - ( CH3 ) 2 % LEL 50.0 20.0 40.0 1.0 1.0 NS SC
Met hanol CH3 OH % LEL 50.0 20.0 40.0 1.0 1.0 NS SC
Et hanol C2 H5 OH % LEL 50.0 20.0 40.0 1.0 1.0 NS SC
I so- Propanol (2- Propanol) CH3 - CHOH-CH3 % LEL 50.0 20.0 40.0 1.0 1.0 NS SC
2- But anol CH3 -CHOH-C2 H5 % LEL 50.0 20.0 40.0 1.0 1.0 NS SC
Dim et hyl et her CH3 - O- CH3 % LEL 50.0 20.0 40.0 1.0 1.0 NS SC
Diet hyl et her C2 H5 -O- C2 H5 % LEL 50.0 20.0 40.0 1.0 1.0 NS SC
Acet on CH3 - CO- CH3 % LEL 50.0 20.0 40.0 1.0 1.0 NS SC
2- But anon ( MEK) CH3 - CO- C2 H5 % LEL 50.0 20.0 40.0 1.0 1.0 NS SC
Met hyl acet at e CH3 - COO- CH3 % LEL 50.0 20.0 40.0 1.0 1.0 NS SC
Et hyl acet at e CH3 - COO- C2 H5 % LEL 50.0 20.0 40.0 1.0 1.0 NS SC
Met hylisobut ylketone ( MI BK) CH3 - CO- CH( CH3 ) 3 % LEL 50.0 20.0 40.0 1.0 1.0 NS SC
Am m onia (0 – 4 Vol.% ) NH3 Vol.% 3.0 1.0 3.0 0.1 0.1 NS SC
I f t he t ransm it t er is operat ed wit h a sensor for which no dat a are ent er ed y et in t his list , defined
set t ings are being used. The user can adapt t hese set t ings individually and st ore t hem in t he
t ransm it t er.
W or ldw ide Su pplie r of Ga s D e t e ct ion Solu t ion s GfG Gesellschaft für Gerät ebau m bH
Klönnest raße 99, D- 44143 Dort m und
Firm ware Version 2.6.0 Edit ion 22. April.2016 Phone: + 49- ( 0) 23156400 0
Fax: + 49- ( 0) 231-516313
197- 000.12_OM.doc We reserve t he right of m odificat ion E- Mail: info@gfg.biz
I nt ernet : www.gasdet ect ion.biz
-32-
EC- Type Ex a m in a t ion Ce r t ifica t e
-33-
-34-
-35-
-36-
D e cla r a t ion s of Con for m it y
-37-
-38-
Technical Manual
22xx...BX4(S) SC
32xx...BX4 SC
32xx...BX4 SCDC
26xx...B SC
1525...BRC
1935...BRC
3153...BRC
WE CREATE MOTION EN
Imprint
Version:
1st edition, 29-08-2017
Copyright
by Dr. Fritz Faulhaber GmbH & Co. KG
Daimlerstr. 23 / 25 · 71101 Schönaich
All rights reserved, including those to the translation.

No part of this description may be duplicated, reproduced,
stored in an information system or processed or
transferred in any other form without prior express written
permission of Dr. Fritz Faulhaber GmbH & Co. KG.
This document has been prepared with care.

Dr. Fritz Faulhaber GmbH & Co. KG cannot accept any
liability for any errors in this document or for the
consequences of such errors. Equally, no liability can be
accepted for direct or consequential damages resulting
from improper use of the equipment.
The relevant regulations regarding safety engineering

and interference suppression as well as the requirements
specified in this document are to be noted and followed
when using the software.
Subject to change without notice.
The respective current version of this technical manual is

available on FAULHABER's internet site:
www.faulhaber.com
1st edition, 29-08-2017 7000.05061, 1st edition, 29-08-20177000.05061

2
Content
1 About this document ....................................................................................................... 5

1.1 Validity of this document ...................................................................................... 5
1.2 Associated documents ............................................................................................ 5
1.3 Using this document .............................................................................................. 5
1.4 List of abbreviations ............................................................................................... 6
1.5 Symbols and designations ...................................................................................... 6
2 Safety ................................................................................................................................ 7
2.1 Intended use ........................................................................................................... 7
2.2 Safety instructions .................................................................................................. 7
2.3 Environmental conditions ...................................................................................... 8
2.4 EC directives on product safety ............................................................................. 8
3 Product description .......................................................................................................... 9
3.1 General product description .................................................................................. 9
3.2 Product information ............................................................................................. 10
3.3 Product variants .................................................................................................... 11
4 Installation ...................................................................................................................... 13
4.1 Mounting .............................................................................................................. 13
4.1.1 Mounting instructions .......................................................................... 13
4.1.2 Mounting the motor............................................................................. 14
4.2 Electrical connection ............................................................................................ 15
4.2.1 Notes on the electrical connection ...................................................... 15
4.2.2 Electrical connection of motor ............................................................. 16
4.2.2.1 EMC-compliant installation................................................... 16
4.2.2.2 EMC suppressor circuit........................................................... 16
4.2.2.3 Pin assignment ....................................................................... 17
4.2.2.4 Connection examples ............................................................ 20
5 Description of functions ................................................................................................ 22
5.1 Operating modes .................................................................................................. 22
5.1.1 Speed-controlled operation ................................................................. 22
5.1.1.1 BL motors with digital Hall sensors ...................................... 22
5.1.1.2 BL Motors with analogue Hall sensors ................................. 24
5.1.1.3 BL motors without Hall sensors (BRC motors)...................... 26
5.1.2 Operation as voltage controller ........................................................... 27
5.2 Set value specification .......................................................................................... 28
5.2.1 Fixed speed specification ...................................................................... 28
5.2.2 Analogue set value specification ......................................................... 29
5.2.3 PWM set value specification................................................................. 30
5.3 Configuration of the digital output .................................................................... 31

3
Content
5.4 Parameter settings ............................................................................................... 32

5.4.1 Current limitation values ...................................................................... 32
5.4.2 Fixed speed ............................................................................................ 33
5.4.3 Lines per motor revolution................................................................... 33
5.4.4 Maximum speed .................................................................................... 33
5.4.5 Controller parameters .......................................................................... 34
5.4.6 Start time (in sensorless mode only) .................................................... 34
5.4.7 Minimum speed (in sensorless mode only).......................................... 34
5.4.8 Delayed Current Error (only error output) .......................................... 35
5.5 Protective functions ............................................................................................. 35
5.5.1 I2t current limitation............................................................................. 35
5.5.2 Overtemperature shutdown ................................................................ 37
5.6 Voltage output at motor ..................................................................................... 37
6 Commissioning ............................................................................................................... 38
7 Maintenance ................................................................................................................... 40
7.1 Maintenance tasks ................................................................................................ 40
7.2 Troubleshooting ................................................................................................... 40
8 Accessories ...................................................................................................................... 41
9 Warranty ......................................................................................................................... 42

4
About this document
1 About this document
1.1 Validity of this document

This document describes the installation and use of the following series:
 22xx...BX4(S) SC
 32xx...BX4 SC
 32xx...BX4 SCDC
 26xx...B SC
 1525...BRC
 1935...BRC
 3153...BRC
This document is intended for use by trained experts authorised to perform installation and
electrical connection of the product.
All data in this document relate to the standard versions of the series listed above. Changes
relating to customer-specific versions can be found in the data sheet.
1.2 Associated documents

For certain actions during commissioning and operation of FAULHABER products additional
information from the following manuals is useful:
Manual Description
Motion Manager 6 Operating instructions for FAULHABER Motion Manager PC software
1.3 Using this document

 Read the document carefully before undertaking configuration, in particular chapter
"Safety".
 Retain the document throughout the entire working life of the product.
 Keep the document accessible to the operating and, if necessary, maintenance person-
nel at all times.
 Pass the document on to any subsequent owner or user of the product.

5
About this document
1.4 List of abbreviations

Abbreviation Meaning
BRC Brushless DC-Motor with integrated Electronics
EMF Back-induced electromotive force
EMC Electromagnetic compatibility
ESD Electrostatic discharge
PWM Pulse Width Modulation
SC Speed Controller
SCDC Speed Controller in two-wire version

SCS Speed Control Systems
1.5 Symbols and designations

CAUTION!
Hazards to persons. Disregard may lead to minor injuries.
 Measures for avoidance
CAUTION!
Hazards due to hot surfaces. Disregard may lead to burns.
NOTICE!
Risk of damage.
Instructions for understanding or optimising the operational procedures
 Pre-requirement for a requested action

1. First step for a requested action
 Result of a step
2. Second step of a requested action
 Result of an action
 Request for a single-step action

6
Safety
2 Safety
2.1 Intended use

The motors described here are designed as drives for small machines and for speed-con-
trolled applications. The following points must be observed to ensure that the motors are
used as intended:
 Handle the motors in accordance with the ESD regulations.
 Do not use the motors in environments where it will come into contact with water,
chemicals and/or dust, nor in explosion hazard areas.
 Always operate the motors within the limits specified in the data sheet.
 Please ask the manufacturer for information about individual use under special
environmental conditions.
2.2 Safety instructions

NOTICE!
Electrostatic discharges can damage the electronics.
 Wear conductive work clothes.
 Wear an earthed wristband.
NOTICE!
Penetration of foreign objects can damage the electronics.
 Do not open the housing.
NOTICE!
Connection and disconnection of cables while the supply voltage is still being applied at
the device can damage the electronics.
 Do not connect or disconnect cables while the supply voltage is still being applied at the
device.
NOTICE!
Exposure of the motors to mechanical shock will damage the bearings and reduce the ser-
vice life of the motor.
 Do not exceed the shock and vibrational loads defined in DIN EN 60068-2-27 and
DIN EN 60068-2-6.

7
Safety
2.3 Environmental conditions

 Select the installation location so that clean dry air is available for cooling the motor.
 Select the installation location so that the air has unobstructed access to flow around
the drive.
 When installed within housings and cabinets take particular care to ensure adequate
cooling of the motor.
 Select a supply voltage that is within the defined tolerance range.
 Protect the motor against heavy deposits of dust, in particular metal dust and chemical
pollutants.
 Protect the motor against humidity and wet.
2.4 EC directives on product safety

 The following EC directives on product safety must be observed.
 If the product is being used outside the EU, international, national and regional direc-
tives must be also observed.
Machinery Directive (2006/42/EC)

Because of their small size, no serious threats to life or physical condition can normally be
expected from electric miniature drives. Therefore the Machinery Directive does not apply
to our products. The products described here are not "incomplete machines". Therefore
installation instructions are not normally issued by FAULHABER.
Low Voltage Directive (2014/35/EU)

The Low Voltage Directive applies for all electrical equipment with a nominal voltage of 75
to 1500 V DC and 50 to 1000 V AC. The products described in this device manual do not fall
within the scope of this directive, since they are intended for lower voltages.
EMC Directive (2014/30/EU)

The directive concerning electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) applies to all electrical and
electronic devices, installations and systems sold to an end user. In addition, CE marking can
be undertaken for built-in components according to the EMC Directive. Conformity with
the directive is documented in the Declaration of Conformity.

8
Product description
3 Product description
3.1 General product description

FAULHABER Speed Control Systems are highly dynamic drive systems with controlled speed.
The drive electronics are integrated in the brushless DC-Motors and matched to the respec-
tive motor.
The compact integration of the Speed Controller as well as the flexible connection possibil-
ities enable applications in areas such as laboratory technology and equipment manufactur-
ing, automation technology, pick-and-place machines and machine tools, or pumps.
The integration of the control electronics in space-optimised add-on systems reduces space
requirements and simplifies installation and start-up.
The integrated electronics facilitate speed control by means of a PI controller with external
setpoint input. The direction of rotation can be changed via a separate switching input; the
speed signal can be read out via the frequency output. The motors can optionally be oper-
ated in voltage controller mode or in fixed speed mode.
Depending on the model series, the rotor position is detected by means of digital (option-
ally analogue) Hall sensors or sensorless by means of the induced countervoltage (EMF) of
the motors (model series BRC). The resulting lower speed limits are 1000 rpm (sensorless),
400 rpm (digital Hall) and 50 rpm (analogue Hall).
FAULHABER Speed Control Systems (SCS) can be adapted to the application via the
FAULHABER Motion Manager software from version 5.x. The following can be set:
 Type and scaling of the set value specification
 Operating mode
 Controller parameters
The USB programming adapter for Speed Controllers is used for configuration, and a con-
tacting board is used for connecting the cables. The two-wire versions (SCDC) are preconfig-
ured at the factory and the parameters can only be changed by the manufacturer.
The following interfaces and discrete I/Os are available:
 Analogue input as setpoint input for setting the speed via PWM or analogue voltage
value.
 Digital input as switching input for defining the direction of rotation of the motor
 Digital output, can be programmed either as frequency output or as error output
The following additional functions are available:

 Integrated current limitation to protect against thermal overload
 Short-time operation with up to double the continuous current
 Separate voltage supply for motor and electronics

9
Product description
3.2 Product information
... ... ... … … …
SC: Speed Controller

SCDC: Speed Controller, two-wire version
BX4: BX4 motor family

BX4S:
12: Motor nominal voltage (12 V)

S: Shaft diameter 3 mm
G: Shaft diameter 5 mm
32: Motor length 32 mm
22: Motor diameter 22 mm
Fig. 1: Designation key for motor series 22xx and 32xx
26 ... T … B SC
SC: Speed Controller
B Brushless flat DC-micromotor

T: Shaft diameter 1,5 mm

Fig. 2: Designation key for motor series 26xx

10
Product description
... ... ... ... BRC
BRC: Brushless DC-motor with integrated electronics

U: Shaft diameter 2 mm
S: Shaft diameter 3 mm
K: Shaft diameter 4 mm


Fig. 3: Designation key for motor series 1525, 1935 and 3153
3.3 Product variants

Tab. 1: Product variants – Speed Control Systems
Motor series Sensors Speed range a) Supply voltage of elec- Rated torque
tronics/motor (V DC) (mNm) b)
2232S012BX4S SC Digital Hall 400…22 500 c) 5…28 / 6…28 6

c)
Analog Hall 50…22 500 5…28 / 6…28 6
2232S024BX4S SC Digital Hall 400…17 000 5…28 / 6…28 7
Analog Hall 50…17 000 5…28 / 6…28 7
2232S012BX4 SC Digital Hall 400…14 000 5…28 / 6…28 17
Analog Hall 50…14 000 5…28 / 6…28 17
2232S024BX4 SC Digital Hall 400…8 500 5…28 / 6…28 17.5
Analog Hall 50…8 500 5…28 / 6…28 17.5
2250S024BX4S SC d) Digital Hall 400…13 500 5…28 / 6…28 13.3
2250S024BX4 SC Digital Hall 400…7 300 5…28 / 6…28 25
Analog Hall 50…7 300 5…28 / 6…28 25
3242G012BX4 SC Digital Hall 400…14 000 c) 6.5…30 / 6.5…30 50
Analog Hall 50…14 000 c) 6.5…30 / 6.5…30 50
3242G024BX4 SC Digital Hall 400…7 000 6.5…30 / 6.5…30 60
Analog Hall 50…7 000 6.5…30 / 6.5…30 60

11
Product description
Motor series Sensors Speed range a) Supply voltage of elec- Rated torque
tronics/motor (V DC) (mNm) b)
3242G012BX4 SCDC d) Digital Hall 400…12 000 c) 6.5…30 / 6.5…30 39
3242G024BX4 SCDC d) Digital Hall 400…11 200 6.5…30 / 6.5…30 45
3268G024BX4 SC Digital Hall 400…6 500 6.5…30 / 6.5…30 99
Analog Hall 50…6 500 6.5…30 / 6.5…30 99
3268G024BX4 SCDC d) Digital Hall 400…7 000 6.5…30 / 6.5…30 60
1525U009BRC Sensorless 1 000…25 000 4…18 / 1.7…18 1.9
1525U012BRC Sensorless 1 000…25 000 4…18 / 1.7…18 1.9
1525U015BRC Sensorless 1 000…18 900 4…18 / 1.7…18 1.9
1935S006BRC Sensorless 1 000…17 400 4…18 / 1.7…18 3.3
1935S009BRC Sensorless 1 500…17 500 4…18 / 1.7…18 3.6
1935S012BRC Sensorless 1 000…12 300 4…18 / 1.7…18 3.1
3153K009BRC Sensorless 1 000…10 500 5…30 / 0…18 34.5
3153K012BRC Sensorless 1 000…10 500 5…30 / 0…24 33.5
3153K024BRC Sensorless 1 000…6 500 5…30 / 0…30 36.5
2610T006B SC Digital Hall 400…13 300 4…18 / 1.7…18 3.25
2610T012B SC Digital Hall 400…10 000 4…18 / 1.7…18 3.12

e)
2622S006B SC Digital Hall 400…5 000 4…18 / 1.7…18 max. 100
e)
2622S012B SC Digital Hall 400…5 000 4…18 / 1.7…18 max. 100
a) The speed range depends on the maximum motor supply voltage.

b) At metal flange.
c) The drive must be reconfigured in order to reach the maximum speed.
d) Option of analogue Hall sensors is not available in this version.
e) Integrated gearhead; for details, see the product data sheet.

12
Installation
4 Installation
 This description must be carefully read and observed before commissioning.
 Observe the environmental conditions (see chap. 2.3, p. 8).
Only trained experts and instructed persons with knowledge of the following fields may
install and commission the motors with integrated Speed Controller:
 Automation technology
 Standards and regulations (such as the EMC Directive)
 Low Voltage Directive
 Machinery Directive
 VDE regulations (DIN VDE 0100)
 Accident prevention regulations
4.1 Mounting
4.1.1 Mounting instructions

CAUTION!
The motor can become very hot during operation.
 Place a guard against contact and warning notice in the immediate proximity of the
motor.
 Ensure that adequate heat dissipation is provided.
NOTICE!
Installation and connection of the motor when the power supply is applied can damage the
device.
 Prior to all aspects of installation and connection work on the motor, switch off the
power supply.
NOTICE!
The motor can be damaged if mounted incorrectly.
 Observe the maximum screw-in depth of the fastening screws (see Tab. 2).
NOTICE!
Excessive loads on the motor shaft can cause irreparable damage to the motor.
 When attaching parts to the motor shaft, observe the maximum permissible load values
(see the product data sheet) of the shaft.
NOTICE!
Excessive radial loads on the servomotor or excessively tightened fastening screws can
cause irreparable damage to the mounting flange.
 Observe the maximum permissible radial load on the motor (see Tab. 2).
 Make sure that the screws are tightened in accordance with Tab. 2.

13
Installation
4.1.2 Mounting the motor
Fig. 4: Mounting example – 22xxBX4 SC series

1. Secure the front flange of the motor to a suitable surface using fastening screws (for
the screw size and torque, see Tab. 2).
2. Protect the fastening screws to prevent displacement due to the effect of heat.
3. If necessary, attach parts to the motor shaft.
Information on the used flange can be found in the product data sheet.
Tab. 2: Attachment specifications

Motor series Screw type Thread depth (mm) Max. tightening Radial motor load, max.
torque (Ncm) (N)
22xx…BX4(S) SC M2 3.0 50 30
32xx…BX4 SC / SCDC M3 4.0 120 60

2622…B SC a) M2 3.5 40 20
1525…BRC M1.6 2.0 40 10
1935…BRC M2 3.0 40 15
3153…BRC M3 4.0 40 20
a) Motors of model series 2610…B SC are mounted at fastening points outside the motor diameter using a quad-
ratic flange.
3242…BX4 SC 2610…B SC
22 26
R1,5
6x60°
Fig. 5: Comparison of round flange and quadratic flange

14
Installation
4.2 Electrical connection
4.2.1 Notes on the electrical connection

NOTICE!
Electrostatic discharges to the motor connections can damage the electronic components
 Observe the ESD protective measures.
 Carry out work only at ESD-protected workstations.
 Connect the connections as per the pin assignment (see chap. 4.2.2.3, p. 17)
NOTICE!
Extreme static or dynamic loads on the ribbon cable can cause the cable to be damaged.
 Make sure that the ribbon cable is not subjected to abrasion, crushing or excessively
tight bending radii during installation and operation.
 With frequent bending, the bending radius must not be less than 10 mm. The possible
number of bending cycles increases as the bending radius increases.
 Do not bend the cable at temperatures < –10 °C.
 Observe the permissible loads (see Tab. 3).
Tab. 3: Permissible loads of the ribbon cables

Motor series Contact spacing Permissible loads
22xx…BX4(S) SC 1.27 AWG28 Tensile load: <30 N
Continuous tensile load: <17 N
Bending radius with one-off installation: >1.2 mm
32xx…BX4 SC / SCDC 2.54 AWG24 Tensile load: <60 N
Continuous tensile load: <20 N
26xx…B SC 1.00 AWG28 Tensile load: < 20 N

Continuous tensile load: < 11 N
1525…BRC / 1935…BRC 1.00 AWG28 Tensile load: < 20 N

3153…BRC 1.27 AWG26 Tensile load: < 20 N


15
Installation
4.2.2 Electrical connection of motor
4.2.2.1 EMC-compliant installation

NOTICE!
Signal interference may be caused if the connection cables are too long.
 Do not exceed a cable length of 3 m.
 Observe the EMC protective measures described here.
EMC filter
 Each electronics and motor supply cable must be installed directly at the unit with two
windings through a suitable ferrite sleeve (e.g. Würth Elektronik No.: 74270090).
4.2.2.2 EMC suppressor circuit

Suppressor circuit 1
Up
Umot
GND
C2 220 nF C1 220 nF
Unsoll
DIR
FG
Fig. 6: EMC suppressor circuit with ceramic capacitors

 If a ceramic capacitor (C1) is used in the PWMnsoll operating mode: To avoid faults, use a
signal source with a low internal resistance.
 To update the firmware using the Motion Manager software, remove capacitor C2.

16
Installation
Suppressor circuit 2
Up
D1
Umot
D2
GND
0 – 10 V DC
Unsoll
DIR
FG
Fig. 7: EMC suppressor circuit with suppressor diodes

 Separated suppressor diodes (D1 and D2, e.g. P6KE33A von STMicroelectronics) for UP
and Umot in case of separated supply voltages.
 If only one supply voltage is used (jumper between UP and Umot), one suppressor diode
(D1) is sufficient.
4.2.2.3 Pin assignment

NOTICE!
Incorrect polarity can cause irreparable damage to the electronics
 Connect the motor in accordance with the pin assignment.
Motors with integrated SC have a 6-wire cable. Wire 1 is highlighted in red for all product
variants.
Tab. 4: Pin assignment of ribbon cable (SC)
Wire Designation Meaning
1 Up Electronics supply
2 Umot Supply voltage of the motor
3 GND Common ground
4 Unsoll Control voltage for the set speed (see chap. 5.2,
p. 28)
5 DIR Switching input for the rotation direction of the

motor
6 FG Digital output with open collector and integrated

pull-up resistor (22 kΩ)
The digital output can be configured for various
tasks (see chap. 5.3, p. 31)

17
Installation
Tab. 5: Electrical data – motor connections on motor series 22xx BX4(S) SC

Wire Designation Value
1 (Up) Electronics supply 5…28 V DC
2 (Umot) Coil supply 6…28 V DC
3 (GND) Ground –
4 (Unsoll) Input voltage Uin = 0…10 V

Analogue input Uin > 10 V…Up ➙ speed set value not defined
Input resistance Rin≥ 8.9 kΩ
Speed set value pro 1 V, 1000 rpm (2000 rpm (S))

Uin < 0.15 V ➙ motor stops
Uin > 0.3 V ➙ motor runs
5 (DIR) Rotation direction input To ground or U < 0.5 V: anticlockwise

Digital input U > 3 V: clockwise
Input resistance Rin≥ 10 kΩ
6 (FG) Frequency output Max. Up, Imax = 15 mA

Digital output Open collector with 22 kΩ pull-up resistor
6 lines per revolution
Tab. 6: Electrical data – motor connections on motor series 32xx BX4 SC

1 (Up) Electronics supply 6.5…30 V DC

2 (Umot) Coil supply 6.5…30 V DC
3 (GND) Ground –

Speed set value pro 1 V, 1 000 rpm

Uin< 0.15 V ➙ motor stops


Motors in the version with SCDC have a 2-wire cable. In this operating mode, the servomo-
tor is connected in the same way as a conventional DC motor. The rotation direction of the
motor is determined by the polarity of the connection wires.

18
Installation
Tab. 7: Pin assignment of ribbon cable (SCDC)

Wire Designation Meaning
1 (red) Mot + Positive connection of the supply voltage
2 Mot – Negative connection of the supply voltage
Tab. 8: Electrical data – motor connection (SCDC)

Wire (designation) Value Voltage
1 (Mot +)  Clockwise rotation with homopolar connection 6.5…30 V

 Anticlockwise rotation with oppositely poled connection
2 (Mot –)
Tab. 9: Electrical data – motor connections on motor series 26xx B SC

1 (Up) Electronics supply 4…18 V DC

2 (Umot) Coil supply 1.7…18 V DC
3 (GND) Ground –
4 (Unsoll) Input voltage Uin= 0…10 V

Analogue input Uin> 10 V…Up ➙ speed set value not defined
Speed set value pro 1 V, 1 000 rpm



19
Installation
Tab. 10: Electrical data – motor connections on motor series BRC

1 (Up) Electronics supply 1525…BRC: 4…18 V DC

1935…BRC: 4…18 V DC
3153…BRC: 5…30 V DC
2 (Umot) Coil supply 1525…BRC: 1.7…18 V DC
1935…BRC: 1.7…18 V DC
3153…BRC: 0…30 V DC
3 (GND) Ground –


Speed set value 1525…BRC: pro 1 V, 2 000 rpm
1935…BRC: pro 1 V, 2 000 rpm
3153…BRC: pro 1 V, 1 000 rpm
Uin< 0.15 V ➙ motor stops


4.2.2.4 Connection examples
NOTICE!
Damage to the electronics caused by excessive supply voltage.
 Observe the minimum and maximum supply voltage.
Normal operation (speed set value specification by Unsoll)
FG
DIR
0 – 10 V
5 kΩ Unsoll
2,2 kΩ
GND
12 V –
Umot
DC +
UP
Fig. 8: Normal operation (speed set value specification by Unsoll)

20
Installation
 With the switch open, the connected motor rotates anticlockwise at a controlled speed;
with the switch closed, it rotates clockwise.
 The speed is preset by Unsoll and depends on the set maximum speed where
Unsoll= 10 V.
 If the digital output is configured as the frequency output (see chap. 5.3, p. 31), the
speed signal can be measured at the digital output.
Motor clockwise (SCDC)
+ Mot +
– Mot –
Fig. 9: Clockwise rotating motor

 Mot + is connected to the positive pole.
 Mot – is connected to the negative pole.
The motor rotates clockwise at a load-dependent speed.

Motor anticlockwise (SCDC)
– Mot +
+ Mot –
Fig. 10: Anticlockwise rotating motor

 Mot – is connected to the positive pole.
 Mot + is connected to the negative pole.
The motor rotates anticlockwise at a load-dependent speed.

21
Description of functions
5 Description of functions
5.1 Operating modes
5.1.1 Speed-controlled operation

The actual value for speed used for speed control can be determined by means of the sig-
nals used for commutation. The configurations described below differ with regard to the
used commutation type.
The digital output is factory-configured as the frequency output.
5.1.1.1 BL motors with digital Hall sensors
Digital output Electronics supply Motor supply
FG Up Umot
22 kΩ
Protection function:
Overtemperature
3 Phase MOSFET Phase A

PWM Power Phase B
Setpoint input Unsoll nsoll PI velocity Ua block output Phase C
BL-Motor
commutator stage
0 – 10 V DC controller
Rotational direction input DIR Evaluation

rotational Hall sensor A
(t) Armature
direction Speed Hall sensor B
position
calculation Hall sensor C
calculation
Iist Motor VCC

I²t current 5 V-Control
+5 V
limitation model
Microcontroller RM kE Signal GND

GND
Fig. 11: Block diagram of a BL motor with digital Hall sensors
The resolution of the digital Hall sensors means that stable speed control is possible
from approx. 400 rpm.
In this configuration, the commutation signal is determined via the digital Hall sensors. The
actual value for speed is determined using the time interval between the edges of the Hall
sensor signals.

22
The following basic parameters are preset in this configuration:
Designation Explanation
Set value specification Analogue
Digital output Frequency output
Operating mode Speed-controlled
2-quadrant operation with brake func- The speed is reduced by short-circuiting the motor
tion
Speed filter Active
The following settings can be made by the user:
Set value specification The following set value specifications can be set (see chap. 5.2, p. 28):
 Fixed speed mode
 Speed set value specification via analogue signal
 Speed set value specification via PWM signal at speed set value
input
Digital output  Frequency output:

The number of lines per revolution which is output at the fre-
quency output can be set. Possible values are 2 and 6 lines per rev-
olution.
 Fault output (see chap. 5.3, p. 31).
Operating mode  Speed-controlled

 Voltage controller
2-quadrant operation with brake func- The speed is reduced by short-circuiting the motor.
tion Brake function can be activated/deactivated.
Speed filter Can be activated/deactivated

23
5.1.1.2 BL Motors with analogue Hall sensors
FG Up Umot
22 kΩ
Overtemperature

PWM Power Phase B
BL-Motor
commutator stage

(t) Armature
position
calculation
Iist Motor VCC

+5 V
limitation model

GND
Fig. 12: Block diagram of a BL motor with analogue Hall sensors
The resolution of the analogue Hall sensors means that stable speed control is possible
from approx. 50 rpm.
In this configuration, the commutation signal is determined via the analogue Hall sensors.
The position information from the analogue Hall sensors is used for commutation of the
motor and for speed determination. 4-quadrant operation is also possible in this configura-
tion.
Digital output Frequency output

Speed filter Active

24
input
Digital output  Frequency output:

The number of lines per revolution which is output at the fre-
quency output can be set. Possible values are 2 and 6 lines per rev-
olution.
 Fault output (see chap. 5.3, p. 31).

2-quadrant operation with brake func- The speed is reduced by short-circuiting the motor.
tion Brake function can be activated/deactivated.
Speed filter Can be activated/deactivated

25
5.1.1.3 BL motors without Hall sensors (BRC motors)
FG Up Umot
22 kΩ
Overtemperature

PWM Power Phase B
BL-Motor
commutator stage

rotational Armature
direction Speed (t)
position
calculation
calculation
I²t current Iist Motor

limitation model
Microcontroller RM kE
GND
Fig. 13: Block diagram of a BL motor without Hall sensors
Depending on the motor, stable speed control is possible in this configuration from
approx. 1000 rpm.
BRC motors do not have any Hall sensors. The commutation signal is generated using the
back-EMF (back-induced voltage). In sensorless operation, the actual value for speed is
determined using the time interval between the commutation switching points.
Sensorless operation differs from operation with sensors with regard to the following
points:
Motor start The motor start uses algorithms which also enable the motor to start
from stationary when the position of the rotor is unknown. As a
result, when the motor starts, it can briefly (less than half a revolu-
tion) rotate in the wrong direction. The motor start time is greater
compared to operation with Hall sensors.
Operation with low load With low load and low speed values, the speed is set by specifying a
rotating field. In this case, changing the speed set value specification
or changing the load causes a transition between rotating field mode
and speed-controlled mode. In order to ensure constant speeds even
in the case of changes in load, the operating range should be outside
of this transition range. A suitable operating point can usually be
found by reducing the motor supply voltage.
Digital output Frequency output (cannot be changed)

26
input
Digital output Frequency output: The number of lines per revolution which is
output at the frequency output can be set. Possible values are 2 and 6
lines per revolution.

5.1.2 Operation as voltage controller

The integrated Speed Controller can be configured as a voltage controller. The motor volt-
age is output in proportion to the voltage at the speed set value input Unsoll. Current limita-
tion remains active.
A supervisory controller can be used in Voltage controller mode. The Speed Controller then
acts as a power amplifier for commutation.

27
5.2 Set value specification

The following setting options for set value specification are possible:
 Fixed speed specification
 Analogue set value specification
 PWM set value specification
5.2.1 Fixed speed specification

In fixed speed mode, the motor is operated at a certain speed. In this case, the set speed to
be set is fixed using a parameter (see chap. 5.4, p. 32).
The following settings for the speed set value input Unsoll are possible:
 Quick-stop input (low level)

 Motor stop with Unsoll < 0.15 V
 Motor stop with open connection

 Motor start with Unsoll > 0.3 V
 Quick-stop input inverted (high level)

 Motor start with Unsoll < 2 V
 Motor runs with open connection

 Motor stop with Unsoll > 2.4 V
 No function
 Motor always runs

28
5.2.2 Analogue set value specification
nsoll [min-1]
undefined
area
nsetMax
Unsoll [V]
10 V
Fig. 14: Set value determination for speed controller

 The analogue input can process voltages from 0 V to 10 V.
 An analogue set value specification of 10 V corresponds to the value specified in the
parameter nsetMax.
 A linear conversion is performed between 0 V and 10 V:

 Speed-controlled operation: nsoll = nsetMax * (Unsoll / 10 V)
 Voltage controller: U = Umot * (Unsoll / 10 V)
Depending on the motor type and the applied voltage, the set value specified in
nsetMax cannot be reached. In this case, the motor rotates at the maximum speed which
can be reached at the given voltage (see Tab. 1).

29
5.2.3 PWM set value specification
FG Up Umot
22 kΩ
Overtemperature

PWM Power Phase B
BL-Motor
commutator stage
PWM signal controller

(t) Armature
position
calculation
Iist Motor VCC

+5 V
limitation model

GND
Fig. 15: Block diagram of a motor with integrated SC in PWM mode

The speed set value is proportional to the duty cycle.
 Motor stop with duty cycle: <2.0 %
 Motor start with duty cycle: >3.0 %
 100% duty cycle corresponds to a set value specification of nsetMax
The PWM signal must have a fixed frequency in the range 500 Hz to 18 kHz.
TTL and PLC levels can be configured as switching levels:
Tab. 11: TTL and PLC level values
Mode High level Low level
a)
TTL >3.0 V DC <0.5 V DC
PLC >7.5 V DC <2.0 V DC
a) Not available for 1525 and 1935 BRC motors

30
5.3 Configuration of the digital output

The digital output can be configured for the following tasks:
Fault output 1
 When current limitation is activated, the output switches to high level. The delay
between activation of current limitation and setting of the output can be adjusted.
 When current limitation is deactivated, the output switches to low level.
Frequency output
 The frequency output can be used to determine the actual motor speed. In this exam-
ple, a signal contains 6 lines per motor revolution.
UFG
6T
T t
Fig. 16: Signal structure of frequency output

T Pulse duration
In order to increase the edge steepness at the digital output, an additional external
pull-up resistor can be connected.
Observe the maximum load capacity of the digital output.
By connecting the internal pull-up resistor (22 kΩ) between FG and the supply voltage
UP, cable-based electromagnetic RF interference can impair the frequency signal. This
RF interference does not have a negative effect on the speed and rotation direction of
the motor.
1
UP
22 k
6
FG
3
GND
Fig. 17: Connection of an additional pull-up resistor
1 Not available for BRC motors

31
5.4 Parameter settings

The parameters listed below can be used to adjust the Speed Controller to the respective
application. A number of the parameters listed here are only effective in certain configura-
tions or with certain settings.
5.4.1 Current limitation values

For I2t current limitation, it is possible to set the peak current (Imax) and the motor continu-
ous current (Icont) (see chap. 5.5, p. 35). The permissible values must be observed.
Parameter Meaning Maximum value Unit
Peak current (Imax) Value for the briefly permitted maximum current Motor-specific mA
Motor continuous current Value for the continuous current to which the Motor-specific mA
(Icont) motor is limited
Tab. 12: Motor-specific values for motor continuous current (Icont) and peak current (Imax)
Motor series Motor continuous current (Icont) Peak current (Imax) a) Unit
a)
2232S012BX4(S) SC 1 000 2000 mA
2232S024BX4(S) SC 500 1 000 mA
2250…BX4(S) SCC 900 1800 mA
3242G012BX4 SC 2000 4000 mA
3242G024BX4 SC 1 000 2000 mA
3242G012BX4 SCDC b) 1900 3800 mA

3242G024BX4 SCDC b) 1700 3400 mA
3268…BX4 SC 1600 3200 mA
3268…BX4 SCDC 1900 3800 mA
1525U009BRC 640 1280 mA
1525U012BRC 500 1 000 mA
1525U015BRC 390 780 mA

1935S006BRC 500 1 000 mA
1935S009BRC 400 800 mA
1935S012BRC 330 660 mA
3153K009BRC 2000 3500 mA
3153K012BRC 1600 3200 mA
3153K024BRC 850 1700 mA
2610/2622…006B SC 470 950 mA
2610/2622…012B SC 230 470 mA
a) Depending on the cooling factor, operating point and ambient temperature, the current limitation parameter
can be adapted using the FAULHABER Motion Manager. The specified values apply in the case of 22 °C ambient
temperature and the nominal voltage for motor and electronics.
b) Parameters can only be changed at the factory.

32
5.4.2 Fixed speed

In fixed speed mode, the speed set value is preset via a configurable parameter (see
chap. 5.2.1, p. 28).
Fixed speed (NsetFix) Speed set value in fixed speed mode 65 535 rpm
5.4.3 Lines per motor revolution

The digital output (FG) can be configured as a frequency output (see chap. 5.3, p. 31). The
number of lines per revolution can be set.
Lines per revolution Number of lines per revolution at the digital Depends on 1/revolution
(pulses) output encoder type
Tab. 13: Number of lines per revolution depending on encoder system

Encoder type Possible values Unit
Digital Hall sensors, 4-pin motors 2, 6 1/revolution
Analogue Hall sensors, 4-pin motors 2, 4, 6, 8, 16, 32 1/revolution
Sensorless operation, 2-pin motors 1, 3, 6 1/revolution
5.4.4 Maximum speed

If a speed set value is specified by means of an analogue voltage or PWM signal, it is then
possible to adjust the speed value which is to be set at 10 V DC and at a duty cycle of 100%.
In this way, the maximum speed is adapted to the application.
Different resolutions of the maximum speed value and different maximum values are possi-
ble depending on the operating mode and motor type.
Maximum speed value Maximum speed set value with 10 V and 100 % duty Motor-specific rpm
(nsetMax) cycle at the speed set value input Unsoll
Tab. 14: Motor-specific values nsetMax

Motor series Sensors Maximum speed value Unit
(nsetMax) a)
2232…BX4(S) SC Digital Hall 20000 rpm

Analogue Hall 20000
2250…BX4S SC b) Digital Hall 20000 rpm
2250…BX4 SC Digital Hall 10000 rpm

Analogue Hall 20000
Analogue Hall 20000

Analogue Hall 10000
1525…BRC Sensorless 20000 rpm

33
Motor series Sensors Maximum speed value Unit

(nsetMax) a)
2610…B SC Digital Hall 10000 rpm

c)
2622…B SC Digital Hall 10000 rpm
a) Delivery state. The speed range depends on the maximum motor supply voltage.
b) Option of analogue Hall sensors is not available in this version.
c) Integrated gearhead; for details, see the product data sheet.
5.4.5 Controller parameters

The controller parameters are preset at the factory. They can be adapted for special applica-
tions.
The following requirements with respect to the control system can be identified:
 Control rigidity
 Uniformity of the speed within one revolution
 Permitted control deviation
 Permitted overshoot
 Required stability reserves
The proportional component and the integral component of the PI speed controller can be
adjusted.
V Proportional component 32767 Digit
VI Proportional component multiplied by integral component 65 535 Digit
If parameter V is increased while parameter VI remains unchanged, the I-component of

the controller will decrease. If the I-component is to remain unchanged, parameter VI
must be multiplied by the same factor as parameter V.
5.4.6 Start time (in sensorless mode only)

In sensorless mode, the motor starts via a synchronous drive. The time between switchover
from one commutation state (phase) to the next commutation state can be set to the con-
nected motor.
Start time Switchover time between the phases at start-up 2739 ms
5.4.7 Minimum speed (in sensorless mode only)

Stable operation of the motor in sensorless mode is only possible from a certain speed. It is
therefore recommended to define a minimum set speed. This value is used even if other
parameters or speed set value specifications would result in a lower speed.
Parameter Meaning Minimum value Unit
Minimum speed (nsetMin) Minimum speed set value specification 1 rpm

34
5.4.8 Delayed Current Error (only error output)

This parameter is only effective if the digital output has been set as a fault output (see
chap. 5.3, p. 31). Activation of the output may be delayed in this case. The output is not
activated until the time preset by DCE has expired, even if the current is already being lim-
ited. As a result, brief exceedance of the limit current can be ignored.
Parameter Meaning Maximum Unit

value
Delayed Current Error (DCE) Delay in activation of the fault output 5100 ms
5.5 Protective functions
5.5.1 I2t current limitation

I2t current limitation protects the motor against overheating. A thermal current model
which calculates the motor temperature is created for this purpose. The motor current is
influenced depending on the calculated temperature. The following values are relevant for
I2t current limitation:
 Peak current (Imax):
The current is limited to the peak current for as long as the thermal current model cal-
culates a non-critical temperature.
 Continuous current (Icont):
The current is limited to the continuous current if the thermal model calculates a critical
temperature.

35
Functionality of the I2t current limitation

The functionality of I2t current limitation is explained below with the aid of an example.
I I II III
Imax
Icont
Tmodel t
T crit
t
X1 X2
Fig. 18: Example of I2t current limitation

Area I:
 When the motor is started, the peak current is preset as the set value at the current con-
troller.
 As the load (X1) increases, the current in the motor becomes higher and higher until the
peak current (Imax) is reached.
 The current controller comes into effect and limits the motor current to the peak cur-
rent (Imax). At the same time, the flowing current is used to calculate a model tempera-
ture in a thermal current model.
 If the calculated model temperature reaches a critical value (Tcrit), the current controller
comes into effect and limits the motor current to the continuous current (Icont).
Area II:
 As in this area the calculated model temperature reaches the critical temperature (Tcrit)
as a result of the change in load (X1), the current controller adjusts the motor current to
the continuous current (Icont).
Area III:
 The current in the motor becomes less and less as a result of the change in load (X2).
The calculated model temperature is below the critical temperature (Tcrit) so that the
current controller no longer needs to intervene.

36
5.5.2 Overtemperature shutdown

If the temperature of the electronics exceeds 100 °C, the motor is deactivated.
CAUTION!
Risk of injury caused by automatic starting of the motor.
As soon as the electronics temperature drops below approx. 95°C, the motor is activated
again automatically.
 Attach suitable guards.
5.6 Voltage output at motor

The power stage of a motor with Speed Controller uses pulse width modulation (PWM). In
the case of a fixed PWM frequency, the duty cycle between the switch-on time and switch-
off time is set according to the controller output value. Since in the case of pulse width
modulation the inductance of the motor acts as a current filter, a high PWM frequency is
selected (96 kHz and 24 kHz with BRC motors). This method is extremely energy-efficient. A
comparatively low amount of heat is generated.
With a small PWM duty cycle and a large motor load, a high current flow is briefly gen-
erated. This results in higher losses, i.e. a large amount of heat is generated.
 At the operating point, set a duty cycle as large as possible. When doing so, observe the
required control reserve. This may require the motor supply voltage to be reduced.
A reduction in efficiency at the motor causes a reduction in the maximum permissible

current. The maximum torque also decreases as a result.
If the permissible maximum housing temperature is observed in PWM mode, the maximum
possible continuous torque may be less than with full modulation. In this case, the maxi-
mum thermally permissible continuous current drops.

37
Commissioning
6 Commissioning
CAUTION!
Hazards due to hot surfaces.
Depending on the load and ambient temperature, the motor can overheat.
 Allow the motor to cool down after operation.
 Be sure to wear protective gloves when touching the motor shortly after operation.
CAUTION!
Risk of injury caused by protruding, rotating or moving parts of the driven mechanical
units.
 Attach suitable guards.
NOTICE!
Damage to the motor and/or Speed Controller as a result of incorrectly set control para-
meters.
 Before commissioning, check and if necessary adjust the configured parameters.
NOTICE!
Rapid, repeated switching of the motor's direction of rotation (reversing operation) can
damage the motor.
 Do not use the Speed Controller for reversing operation.
The connections UP and Umot can be supplied with power from the same power supply
unit.
Make sure that the output of the power supply unit is sufficient for supplying power to
the Speed Controller and the connected motor.
Controller parameters are preset at the factory. The controller can optionally be optimised
for specific applications. In this case, the digital controller operates at a sampling rate of
500 μs. Controller optimisation performed when commissioning the motor is described
below.
 Motor is mounted as per the specifications (see chap. 4, p. 13).
 Motor is electrically connected as per the specifications (see chap. 4.2.2, p. 16).
 Connected mechanical components are mounted in such a way that they cannot
become jammed.
 Shaft load (axial, radial, torque) is within the specified values.

1. Set the initial configuration.
2. Increase the controller gain (proportional component V).
3. Increase the speed jump from 1/3 of the maximum speed to 2/3 speed.
4. Set the speed jump from 2/3 of the maximum speed to 1/3 and monitor the motor's
behaviour.
5. Repeat steps 2. to 4. until the controller becomes unstable.

38
Commissioning
6. Reduce the controller gain until the system is stable again.

7. Repeat steps 2. to 6. for the proportional/integral component (VI).
 The motor is ready for operation.

39
Maintenance
7 Maintenance
7.1 Maintenance tasks

The motor is generally maintenance-free. Where the device is mounted in a cabinet,
depending on the deposition of dust the air filter should be regularly checked and cleaned
if necessary.
7.2 Troubleshooting
If unexpected malfunctions occur during operation according to the intended use, please
contact your support partner.

40
Accessories
8 Accessories
The following accessories are available:
Article Article no.
Contact adapter 6501.00112
Programming adapter USB 6501.00096
Details on configuration can be found in the Motion Manager manual (see chap. 1.2,
p. 5).
Details on the connection sequence can be found in the product data sheet of the pro-
gramming adapter.
Customer application
and power source
Programming Contact
adapter adapter
Drive with
Speed Controller
USB
Fig. 19: Setup with programming adapter and contact adapter
Information on other accessories can be found in the main catalogue.

41
Warranty
9 Warranty
Products of the company Dr. Fritz Faulhaber GmbH & Co. KG are produced using the most
modern production methods and are subject to strict quality inspections. All sales and deliv-
eries are performed exclusively on the basis of our General Conditions of Sale and Delivery
which can be viewed on the FAULHABER home page www.faulhaber.com/agb and down-
loaded from it.

42
DR. FRITZ FAULHABER
GMBH & CO. KG
Antriebssysteme
Daimlerstraße 23 / 25
71101 Schönaich • Germany
Tel. +49(0)7031/638-0
Fax +49(0)7031/638-100
info@faulhaber.de
7000.05061, 1st edition, 29-08-2017 www.faulhaber.com
© Dr. Fritz Faulhaber GmbH & Co. KG
Operating manual for micro annular gear pump
mzr-6355 and mzr-7255
HNP Mikrosysteme GmbH

Bleicherufer 25
D-19053 Schwerin
Phone: 0385/52190-301
Fax: 0385/52190-333
E-mail: info@hnp-mikrosysteme.de
http://www.hnp-mikrosysteme.de
Last update: October 2016

Impressum
Original instructions
Copyright
HNP Mikrosysteme GmbH

Bleicherufer 25
D-19053 Schwerin
All rights, including translation, reserved.
Without prior explicit written permission of HNP Mikrosysteme GmbH no part

of this manual may be, copied, reproduced or processed.
This manual has been prepared with care. HNP Mikrosysteme does assume no
liability for any errors in this manual and resulting consequences. Likewise, no
liability is assumed direct or subsequent damages arising from an incorrect use
of the devices.
While using micro annular gear pumps, the relevant standards regarding the
specifications of this manual have to be followed.
Subject to change without notice.

Contents Operating manual mzr-6355 and mzr-7255
Contents
1 General information 1
1.1 Application scope of the pumps 1
1.2 Product information 2
1.3 Technical data of the micro annular gear pumps 2
1.4 Measurements and flow chart of the mzr-6355 pump 4
1.5 Measurements and flow chart of the mzr-7255 pump 5
1.6 Technical data of the drive 3564K024BCS 6
2 Safety instructions 8
2.1 Staff qualification and training 8
2.2 Safety-conscious work 8
2.3 Safety instructions for the operator 9
2.4 Safety instructions for maintenance, check and
assembly of the pump 9
2.5 Unauthorized pump conversions and spare part
manufacture 10
2.6 Improper modes of operation 10
2.7 General safety instructions 10
3 Transport and intermediate storage 11

3.1 Shipment of the pumps and protection measures 11
3.2 Transport 11
3.3 Intermediate storage 11
4 Description of the micro annular gear pump 12

4.1 Operating principle of the micro annular gear pump 12
4.2 Construction 14
4.3 Construction materials 15
4.4 Liquid supply 16
5 Optional modules 17
5.1 Thermal insulation module 17
5.2 Heating module 18
5.2.1 Electric heating module 18
5.3 Heating device „JETmicro“ 19
6 System integration 20
6.1 Check before the first assembly 20
6.2 Mounting of micro annular gear pump 20
6.3 General instructions for the assembly of the liquid
supply network 21
6.4 Assembly of the fluid connection fittings 21
6.5 Filter selection and use 23
6.6 Connection of the micro annular gear pump to the
power supply 24
6.6.1 Startup with potentiometer 26
Last update: October 2016 Technical data subject to change without prior notice! i
6.6.2 Startup with external 0-10 V signal 27

6.6.3 Startup with an external 0(4)-20 mA current signal 28
6.6.4 Startup with external potentiometer 30
6.6.5 Startup with the RS-232 interface 31
6.6.6 Startup of the pump units with network mode (NET1
Command) 32
6.7 Connection of the micro annular gear pump with
terminal box S-G05 with screw clamp terminal 34
7 Startup/shutdown of a mzr-pump 36
7.1 Preparing for operation 36
7.2 Startup of the micro annular gear pump 36
7.3 Flushing procedure after use 36
7.4 Shutdown of the micro annular gear pump 39
7.4.1 Conservation 41
7.4.2 Dismantling of the system 42
7.5 Trouble shooting 43
7.6 Return of the micro annular gear pump to the
manufacturer 43
8 Software »mzr-pump controller« 44
9 Software »Motion Manager« 46

9.1 Direct drive control 46
9.2 Programming of the control 48
9.3 Transfer of a mcl file to the drive 48
10 Accessories for microfluidic systems 51
11 Non-liability clause 51
12 Problems and their removal 52
13 EC Directive 55
13.1 Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) 56
13.1.1 EMC Directive and Standards 56
13.1.2 Information on use as intended 57
14 Declarations of conformity 58
15 Service, maintenance and warranty 63
16 Contact person 64
17 Legal information 65
18 Safety information for the return of already

employed micro annular gear pumps and
components 66
18.1 General information 66
ii Technical data subject to change without prior notice! Last update: October 2016
18.2 Declaration of liquids in contact with the micro

annular gear pump 66
18.3 Shipment 66
19 Declaration of media in contact with the micro

annular gear pump and its components 67
20 Appendix 68
Last update: October 2016 Technical data subject to change without prior notice! iii
1 General information Operation manual mzr-6355 and mzr-7255
1 General information
This operation manual contains basic instructions to be followed during

integration, operation and maintenance of a mzr® micro annular gear pump.
For this reason it is necessary to read it carefully before any handling of the
device. The present manual should always be kept at the operation site of the
micro annular gear pump.
In case assistance is needed, please indicate the pump type visible on the
housing.
1.1 Application scope of the pumps
The micro annular gear pumps described in this manual are suitable for
continuous delivery and discrete dosage of water, watery solutions, solvents,
methanol, oils, lubricating liquids, paints and varnishes as well as many other
liquids.
! If you intend to treat any poisonous or radioactive liquids, you must conform
to safety measures as according to the regulations in force. Any project
concerning handling of corrosive liquids should be previously discussed with
the pump manufacturer.
! The micro annular gear pumps must not be used for invasive medical
applications, in which the liquid having had contact with the pump is re-
introduced to the body.
! Micro annular gear pumps exclusively are provided for use in the industrial
area. A private use is excluded.
! The micro annular gear pumps must not be used in aircrafts and spacecrafts or
other vehicles without prior consent of the manufacturer.
! Data concerning resistance of the pumps to the manipulated liquids have been
elaborated according to the best of HNPM's knowledge. However, operating
parameters varying from one application case to another, no warranty for this
information can be given.
! Information given in this manual does not release the customer from the
personal obligation to check the integrity, correct choice and suitability of the
pump for the intended use. The use of the micro annular gear pumps should
be conform with technical norms and regulations in force.
If you wish to receive more information than comprised in this manual please
contact directly HNP Mikrosysteme.
Last update: October 2016 Technische Änderungen ohne Vorankündigung vorbehalten. 1

1.2 Product information
The present operating manual is valid for the micro annular gear pump types
mzr-7255 manufactured after 2006 and mzr-6355 manufactured after 2009 by
HNP Mikrosysteme GmbH, Bleicherufer 25, D-19053 Schwerin, Germany.
The date of release of the present manual figures on the cover.
1.3 Technical data of the micro annular gear pumps
mzr-6355 mzr-7255
Technical data
Displacement volume [µl] 24 48
Measurements [mm] LxBxH 146 x 70 x 72 146 x 70 x 72
Weight [g] 1650 1650
Internal volume [µl] 524 525
Material different combination  
-cy, -cs, -hy, -hs
(see chapter 4.3)
Threaded fluid supply 1/8"NPT (lateral)  
connections
Coupling magnetic coupling  
Performance parameters
Flow rate Q [ml/min] min. 0.024 0.048
[ml/min] max. 144 288
[l/h] max. 8,64 17.28
Min. dosage volume [µl] 15 30
Max. system pressure [bar] inlet 80 (1160 psi) for -cy, -hy
pressure+differential 60 (870 psi) for -cs, -hs for pump made
pressure of 316L
Differential pressure range [bar] by viscosity 1 mPas 5 (-hx) (72 psi) 15 (-dcx) (217 psi),
15 (-cx) (217 psi), 20 (-cx) (290 psi)
30 (-hx) (435 psi)
by viscosity 16 mPas 40 (580 psi) 40 (580 psi)
Viscosity η [mPas] min. 0.3 0.3
max. 1,000 1,000
Dosage precision CV [%] <1 <1
Pulsation [%] 1,5 6
NPSHR-value [m] min. 0.5 0.5
Liquid temperature [°C] min. -5 -5
max. 60 60
-cs max 100 * -cs max 100 *
-hs max 150 * -hs max 150 *
Ambient temperature [°C] min. -5 -5
max. 60 60
Storage temperature [°C] min. -5 -5
max. 40 40
Legend:  available CV Coefficient of variation

 optional / on demand NPSHR Net Positive Suction Head Required
– not available
* with supplementary modules
table 1 Technical data and performance parameters of the micro annular gear pumps mzr-6355 and mzr-7255
2 Technische Änderungen ohne Vorankündigung vorbehalten Last update: October 2016

Warning The material properties of a liquid (e.g. viscosity, lubricating property, particle
content, corrosiveness) impacts the technical data and the lifetime of pumps.
Under appropriate conditions the characteristic values may be increased or
decreased.
Warning If you intend to operate the pump out of the range of the above given
specification, please consult the manufacturer. Modifications may be necessary
to ensure successful operation. Otherwise the pump or the system may be
damaged seriously.
Warning The manufacturer of the pump cannot guarantee the fatigue strength of the
pump case due to the unknown load impact defined by different specification
parameters like type of liquid, concentration, temperature. The cause for this
restriction is a non predictable corrosion at the pump case like pitting, micro
cracking and surface erosion which causes a wall thickness reduction and an
increase of the notch effect. This could reduce the fatigue strength limit
considerably. Under a particularly aggressive environment only a time
dependent stability can be assumed. Because of the mentioned above the
manufacturer cannot give specifications concerning the number of possible
load alternations.

1.4 Measurements and flow chart of the mzr-6355 pump
figure 1 Measurements of the micro annular gear pump mzr-6355 with lateral fluid connection 1/8" NPT
Liquid water Liquid methanol

mzr 6355
160 Liquid water 160 Liquid methanol
140 Viscosity 1 mPas Viscosity 0,58 mPas
140
120 120
Flow rate [ml/min]
Flow rate [ml/min]
100 100
80 Speed [rpm] 80
Speed [rpm]
60 6000 60 6000
5000 5000
40 4000 40 4000
3000 3000
20 20
2000 2000
0 1000 0 1000
0 5 10 15 0 10
Differential pressure [bar] Differential pressure [bar]
Liquid oil, 16 mPas Liquid oil, 100 mPas

160 Liquid oil 160 Liquid oil
Viscosity 16 mPas Viscosity 100 mPas
140 140
120 120
Flow rate [ml/min]
Flow rate [ml/min]
100 100
80 80
Speed [rpm] Speed [rpm]
60 6000 60 6000
5000 5000
40 4000 40 4000
3000 3000
20 20
2000 2000
0 1000 0 1000
0 10 20 30 0 10 20 30
figure 2 Flow charts of the mzr-6355 pump

1.5 Measurements and flow chart of the mzr-7255 pump
figure 3 Measurements of the micro annular gear pump mzr-7255 with lateral fluid connection 1/8" NPT
Liquid water
mzr 7255
Liquid55methanol
300 Liquid water 300 Liquid methanol
Viscosity 1 mPas Viscosity 0,58 mPas
250 250
Flow rate [ml/min]
Flow rate [ml/min]
200 200
150 150
6000 6000
100 100
5000 5000
4000 4000
50 3000 50 3000
2000 2000
0 1000 0 1000
0 5 10 15 20 0 10 20 30 40
Liquid oil, 16 mPas Liquid oil, 100 mPas
300 Liquid oil 300 Liquid oil

Viscosity 16 mPas Viscosity 100 mPas
250 250
Flow rate [ml/min]
Flow rate [ml/min]
200 200
150 150
6000 6000
100 100
5000 5000
4000 4000
50 3000 50 3000
2000 2000
0 1000 0 1000
0 10 20 30 40 0 10 20 30 40
figure 4 Flow charts of the mzr-7255 pump

1.6 Technical data of the drive 3564K024BCS
The micro annular gear pump is driven by electronically commutated, brushless

motors with integrated control. The control unit is composed of a 16-bit
microcontroller and power electronics. It enables to adjust both speed and
position of the motor. The motor is highly dynamic and suitable for dosing
tasks performed by the micro annular gear pump. CDs or diskettes containing
software running under Windows® which permits to set the parameters, as well
as to program and control the pump are included in the package. The package
contains also a user-friendly terminal box and a null-modem cable for an easy
connection to the serial port of a PC.
Performance characteristics of the motor

Motor type 3564K024BCS
Nominal voltage UB 24 VDC
Supply voltage 12 – 30 V
Residual ripple ≤2%
Max. continuous current 2.8 A
Max. peak current 8A
Power 44 W
Max. continuous torque 50 mNm
Counts per turn 1000 (3000*)
Speed range 1 – 6000 rpm
Max speed at 24 V 9000 rpm
Input No. 1 (speed input) 0 – 10 V
Resistance input No. 1 18 kΩ
Fault output (input No. 2) Open collector max. UB / 30 mA
no error: switched to GND
programmed as an input: low 0...0.5 V /
high 4 V...UB
Digital input No. 3 low 0...0.5 V / high 4...30 V
Serial port RS-232
Protection class IP 44
Connection cable length 1m
Legend: * with special programming
table 2 Technical data for the drive of micro annular gear pumps mzr-6355 and mzr-7255

Wire Description
blue GND
pink +24 V
brown Analog input
white Fault output
gray Analog GND
yellow RS-232 RXD
green RS-232 TXD
red Digital input
table 3 Pin configuration of the motor
Motor current parameters mzr-6355 mzr-7255

Peak current LPC [mA] 4000 4000
Continuous current LCC [mA] 2000 2500
Max. speed SP [rpm] 6000 6000
Acceleration AC [rotation/s²] 400 400
table 4 Programmed current and acceleration parameters at the delivery of standard pumps
pin Description
plug / socket
1 GND
2 analog input
3 +24 V 2
4 5
4 fault out
1 3
5 analog GND 8
6 7
6 RS-232 RxD
7 RS-232 TxD
8 digital Input 3
table 5 Pin configuration of the optional lengthening cable

2 Safety instructions Operation manual mzr-6355 and mzr-7255
2 Safety instructions
Please comply not only with the general safety instructions listed below, but
also with specific safety instructions mentioned in the following chapters.
Non respect of the safety instructions marked with the following signs
represents danger to people:
Danger symbol High voltage symbol
!
Safety symbol according to Safety symbol according to
DIN 4844 – W9 DIN 4844 – W8
Non compliance with the safety instructions marked with the following sign:
Warning
represents a risk of damage to the micro annular gear pump.
Operating instructions machined directly on the pump such as the indication of

liquid input and output should be followed and kept in a clearly readable
condition.
2.1 Staff qualification and training
The staff operating, servicing, inspecting and assembling the pumps must
evidence the appropriate qualification for these works. Areas of responsibility
and competence as well as monitoring of the staff must be precisely regulated
by the decision maker. If the personnel do not have the necessary knowledge,
they must be trained and instructed accordingly. If necessary, this can be
implemented by the supplier or the manufacturer on behalf of the operator.
Furthermore, the operator in charge must ensure that the content of the
present manual has been fully understood by the personnel.
2.2 Safety-conscious work
The safety instructions listed in this operating manual, applicable national

regulations concerning accident prevention as well as internal work, operation
and safety regulations of the operator must be complied with.

2.3 Safety instructions for the operator
The surface temperature of the motor under full load may exceed 60°C. If
needed, this surface should be protected on site against contact in order to
avoid skin burns.
The drive should be protected against dust, water vapor condensation,

humidity, splash water, aggressive gases and liquids. Please provide for
adequate air ventilation and thus cooling of the motor.
The micro annular gear pumps mzr-6355 und mzr-7255 must not be used in
areas exposed to explosion risks or in the proximity of inflammable gases and
vapors.
Possible leaks of dangerous liquids (for example from the shaft sealing) should
be guided away in a way not to represent any danger for the personnel and the
environment. The pump should be regularly checked for possible leakage. All
legal requirements in this matter should be followed.
Take care that all risks resulting from the electric energy are excluded. (For
details please refer to the instructions provided by the authorities in charge or
your power supplier.)
Warning Please insure, that the totality of the liquid supply accessories such as tubes,
hoses, filters etc. are free from dust or dirt particles. Impurities such as metal,
plastic or glass particles may impair or damage the pump leading to its failure.
Warning Please, operate the pump with a filter featuring 10 µm or smaller pores. It will
protect the pump.
2.4 Safety instructions for maintenance, check and assembly of the pump
As a rule all maintenance work on the device should be performed when the
device is at a standstill. The shutdown procedure described in this manual must
be followed. Pumps delivering liquids hazardous to health must be
decontaminated. Immediately after the work had been completed all safety
equipment and protection measures should be applied.
Before starting the operation, please take into notice the instructions listed in
the chapter 6.6.
Warning Should a malfunction of the pump occur, do not dismantle the pump on your
own but contact one of HNP Mikrosysteme's service staff for professional
assistance.

2.5 Unauthorized pump conversions and spare part manufacture
Conversions or modification to the device are only permitted with prior consent
of the manufacturer. Original spare parts and accessories authorized by the
manufacturer ensure safety. The use of other parts will annul the liability of the
pump manufacturer for any resulting consequences.
2.6 Improper modes of operation
The safety of operation of the delivered device can only be insured by correct
use, as described in chapter 1. The limit values given in this manual must not be
exceeded in any case.
2.7 General safety instructions
Please observe the following safety instructions
! The pump may operate at high pressures. For this reason please use only the
delivered accessories and ensure that the employed fittings and tubing have
been prescribed and approved for these pressures.
! In order to decrease the pressure, provide the system with a pressure control
valve directing the excess liquid to the storage tank or back to the suction side.
In the case of blockage of the pressure side the operating pressure can
multiply, this can lead to the damage of downstream components.
! At a standstill, the liquid may flow through the pump in the direction of the
falling pressure. In order to avoid this unwanted movement, please integrate
non-return valves (see accessories).
! Protect the micro annular gear pump and the electric drive against strokes and
shocks.
The allowed operating parameters of the drive should not be exceeded. In
particular an incorrect polarity setting of the supply voltage may lead to
damage of the control unit.
Warning Please insure, that the totality of the liquid supply accessories such as tubes,
hoses, filters etc. are free from dust or dirt particles. Impurities such as metal,
plastic or glass particles may impair or damage the pump leading to its failure.
Warning Please operate the pump with a filter featuring 10 µm or smaller pores. It will
protect the pump.

3 Transport and intermediate storage Operation manual mzr-6355 and mzr-7255
3 Transport and intermediate storage
3.1 Shipment of the pumps and protection measures
The pumps leaving the factory are secured against corrosion and shocks. The
inlets and outlets of the pumps are protected with plastic plugs in order to
prevent any foreign bodies from penetrating into the device.
3.2 Transport
In order to avoid any damage related to transport, the package must be

protected against shocks. HNP Mikrosysteme guarantees, that all goods leave
the factory in the best condition. Any noticed damage should be reported to
the concerned forwarding agent, authorized dealer or to HNP Mikrosysteme, as
manufacturer.
3.3 Intermediate storage
Following points concerning pump storage should be observed:
− Necessary conservation procedure (see also chapter 7.4.1)

− The protective plugs must be left screwed in
− The pump should not be stored in humid places
− For storage temperature - refer to chapter 1.3 of the present manual

4 Description of the micro annular gear pump Operation manual mzr-6355 and mzr-7255
4 Description of the micro annular gear pump
4.1 Operating principle of the micro annular gear pump
Micro annular gear pumps are positive displacement pumps. They contain two
rotors, bearing slightly eccentrically to each other; an externally toothed internal
rotor and an annular, internally toothed external rotor (see figure 5). Due to
their cycloid indenting, the rotors remain interlocked at any time, forming
during rotation a system of several sealed pumping chambers. As the rotors
revolve around their offset axis, the pumping chambers increase on the
induction (suction) side and simultaneously decrease on the delivery side of the
pump (see figure 6). A homogenous flow is generated between the kidney-like
inlet and outlet.
external internal
rotor rotor
inlet outlet
induction side delivery side
figure 5 Principle of the micro annular gear pump
figure 6 Operating principle of the micro annular gear pump
In the case of rotary displacement pumps, the delivered amount of liquid may
be easily calculated form the displacement volume Vg of the pump and the
number of revolutions of the rotor n. Displacement volume stands for the
volume of liquid that is moved within one revolution of the rotor. This
relationship is illustrated by the following formula:
Q = ηVol ⋅ V g ⋅ n
The volumetric efficiency ηVol shows the relationship between the actual and
the theoretical flow rate. The existing differences result from internal
movement of the liquid during the operation.

Example: According to the formula mentioned above the mzr-7255 pump

featuring a displacement volume of 48 µl delivers at 3000 rpm and with a
volumetric efficiency of 100% 144 ml/min. The table 6 shows theoretical flow
rate values depending on speed expressed in ml/min and ml/h.
mzr-6355 mzr-7255
Rotation speed [rpm] Q [ml/min] Q [ml/h] Q [ml/min] Q [ml/h]
500 12 720 24 1440
1000 24 1440 48 2880
2000 48 2880 96 5760
3000 72 4320 144 8640
4000 96 5760 192 11520
5000 120 7200 240 14400
6000 144 8640 288 17280
table 6 Theoretical flow rate of the micro annular gear pump
Pressure generated by the pump is determined by the configuration of the fluid

delivery system and results from both the hydraulic pressure and the hydraulic
resistance (tubing, narrow passes etc.). The volumetric efficiency of a pump
decreases when the differential pressure rises.
The viscosity of the manipulated liquid has an important impact on the

volumetric efficiency. The volumetric efficiency increases for higher viscosity
values because the internal leakage values go down.
Cavitation is an effect which, starting form a certain limit speed value, may
reduce the volumetric efficiency of a pump. In the case of highly viscous liquids
this limit speed value is lower. That happens because of the liquid-specific drop
of vapor pressure in the suction tube which leads to gas formation inside the
pump.
The particularity of the mzr-pumps is their highly precise construction, which

provides for both high operating pressures and a high dosage precision. The
gap between both rotors and between the rotors and the adjacent case parts
lies in the range of a few micrometers. This precision is the key factor enabling
to achieve volumetric efficiency close to 100%.

4.2 Construction
The micro annular gear pump is composed of the pump head, the coupling
unit, the drive and the angle support (see figure 7).
integrated
motion controller
cable for
power supply
drive
liquid outlet bracket
pressure side (D)
Magnetic coupling
micro annular gear pump head
figure 7 Construction of the micro annular gear pump

4.3 Construction materials
The micro annual gear pumps mzr -6355 and mzr -7255 are deliverable in four
different material combinations which are listed in table 7 and table 8.
Wetted parts mzr-6355-cy / mzr-7255-cy mzr-6355-cs / mzr-7255-cs

Rotor materials partially stabilized ZrO2 partially stabilized ZrO2
Control plates Al2O3 ceramics Al2O3 ceramics
Pump case material alloy C22 (2.4602) stainless steel 316 L
bearing material sintered silicon carbide (SSiC), sintered silicon carbide (SSiC),
Al2O3 ceramics Al2O3 ceramics
shaft material sintered silicon carbide (SSiC) sintered silicon carbide (SSiC)
Static sealing material FFPM (Kalrez® Spectrum™ 6375) FFPM (Kalrez® Spectrum™ 6375)
Distance washer PTFE PTFE
table 7 Construction materials of the wetted parts, rotor material CVD-diamond coated tungsten carbide
Wetted parts mzr-6355-hy / mzr-7255-hy mzr-6355-hs / mzr-7255-hs

Rotor materials tungsten carbide Ni-based tungsten carbide Ni-based
Control plates tungsten carbide Ni-based tungsten carbide Ni-based
Pump case material alloy C22 (2.4602) stainless steel 316 L
bearing material tungsten carbide Ni-based tungsten carbide Ni-based
shaft material tungsten carbide Ni-based tungsten carbide Ni-based
®
Static sealing material FFPM (Kalrez Spectrum™ 6375) FPM
optional: FFPM (Kalrez® Spectrum™
6375)
Distance washer PTFE PTFE
table 8 Construction materials of the wetted parts, rotor material tungsten carbide
! The resistance of the construction materials to the delivered liquids should be

verified by the operator for each individual application.
! The material combinations and -cs and -cy can not be used for pumping water
or DI water.
Pumps handling non-lubricating liquids have shorter service lives.

4.4 Liquid supply
mzr-6355 / mzr-7255
Liquid inlet/outlet lateral 1/8" NPT internal thread
table 9 Liquid supply
The suction side is indicated with the letter »S« the delivery side with the letter
»D«. An arrow in the front of the pump indicates the operating direction of the
shaft.
In order to prevent foreign bodies from penetrating into the pump, the liquid
inlet and outlet are protected with plastic plugs or screws. Please remove them
before you assembly the pump.

5 Optional modules Operation manual mzr-6355 and mzr-7255
5 Optional modules
The spectrum of applications of the high performance micro annular gear

pump series may be expanded by using different additional modules. The
modules allow for special applications, which could otherwise not be
accomplished with a standard pump version. The modules may be combined
with each other and with almost all available pump heads and motor versions.
− Thermal insulation module extends the operating temperature range of the

pump by protecting the motor from overheating
− Heating module enables to regulate the temperature of the fluid-containing
parts of the pump
The configuration of a given pump version should in each case be discussed

with consideration to the specific requirements of the application. Additional
customized modules may be designed on demand.
5.1 Thermal insulation module
The heat insulation module enables to deliver liquids with a higher liquid
temperature range table 10. It comprises thermally insulating coupling
components made of plastic (PEEK) located between the pump and the drive.
The drive should not be exposed to overheating. For this reason the heat
transfer from the pump to the drive should be limited. An additional thermal
barrier is provided by the plastic motor housing. If the surrounding temperature
rises, the pump is working over a longer period or the manipulated liquid
features a high temperature, convection cooling of the motor is recommended.
Material combination Liquid temperature range

-cs -20…+100 °C (-4 +212 °F)
-cy -20…+100 °C (-4 +212 °F)
-hs -20…+150 °C (-4 +302 °F)
-hy -20…+150 °C (-4 +302 °F)
table 10 Liquid temperature with heat insulation module

5.2 Heating module
5.2.1 Electric heating module
The electric heating module enables active heating of the pump head types -cs
up to 100 °C (212 °F) and -hs up to 150° C (302 °F) operating temperature.
The heating module consists of a heating jacket covering the pump head and a
thermal element type J. Depending on the pump size, the thermal element will
be integrated on the pump head in different ways. In order to adjust the
temperature of the pump head, an additional heat regulating device may be
delivered.
Thermoelectric couple
Electric heading
jacket
Connection cable for

electric band heater
figure 8 Micro annular gear pump mzr-xx55 with the electric heating module
! Before connecting the heating jacket and the thermal element to the power
supply, please observe the following technical data.
Thermal element
Type MT-1.5
Thermal element Type J (Fe-CuNi IEC 584)
alternativ:
Type L (Fe-CuNi DIN
43710)
Temperature measuring range 0 to 400 °C
Diameter of the sensing device 1.5 mm
Material V4A (1.4541)
Heating jacket mzr-6355 mzr-6355

Voltage 230 VAC 230 VAC
Power output 180 W 180 W
Diameter 50 mm 50 mm
Width 20 mm 20 mm
table 11 Technical data of the electric heating module

5.3 Heating device „JET micro“
The heating device „JETmicro“ has been designed for use with the electric
heating module (see chapter 5.2.1).
Actual value
Nominal value Heating on

No importance
No importance No importance
Increase the temperature
Decrease the temperature
Hand: Blinks during temperature set in the manual input mode
Ada: Ada display blinks during the automatic control adjustment
AL: Alarm display – not configured, no importance
Actual value = sensor failure

display:
= sensor reverse polarity
With or the nominal temperature may be set.
Power supply
90-230 VAC, Shock-proof plug, 3 m long
Electrical connection
10-pole bush insert, 16 A/250 V
Heating Sensor
L N + -
Zone 1 1 6 2 7
Zone 2 (Option) 4 9 5 10
table 12 Pin configuration of the heating device

6 System integration Operation manual mzr-6355 and mzr-7255
6 System integration
6.1 Check before the first assembly
Inspect the pumps for potential damage during the shipment (see chapter 3.2).
Please check, if the right pump type has been delivered, as according to the
following points:
− Compatibility with the delivered liquid

− Viscosity range
− Pump performance (displacement volume, dosage volumes, operating
pressures)
− Operating temperature range
! If you notice any difference between the required and the delivered pump
type, please contact HNP Mikrosysteme. Do not put the pump into operation
without prior approval.
6.2 Mounting of micro annular gear pump
The micro annular gear pump is mounted on a bracket with M4 screws. The
delivered mounting position of the micro annular gear pump is horizontal. The
optimal layer to the fastening of the micro annular gear pump is horizontally
with the fluid outlet (D) up so that air bubbles still can escape above. In vertical
operation should drive under the pump head mounted to the pump head
completely filled. However, you must pay attention that no medium can run on
or into the motor.
delivery status: vertical mounting: optimal mounting:
liquid inlet
liquid outlet suction side (S)
liquid inlet pressure side (D) liquid outlet
suction side (S) pressure side (D)
liquid outlet
pressure side (D) liquid inlet
suction side (S)
figure 9 Fitting position of the micro annular gear pump
Warning Install the pump in such a way that in case of failure no liquid can enter the
motor or controller.
! Take precautions that in case of leakage no surrounding objects or

environment will be damaged.

! Install the micro annular gear pump only in places that fulfill the required
conditions for safe pump operation.
! The motor must be protected against humidity, dust or sweat.
6.3 General instructions for the assembly of the liquid supply network
! Please always cut the tubing at a right angle with an adapted hose cutter. If
metal tubes are used, an intensive cleansing procedure will be necessary. After
machining the tubing has to be cleansed and flushed throughoutly. The
smallest piece of swarf within the liquid delivery system may cause failure of
the micro annular gear pump.
! Please note that correct integration of the tubing with the pump head is a
necessary condition to ensure the right direction of flow. If you wish to
operate the pump in a reverse direction, please contact HNP Mikrosysteme,
since it is not possible in every case.
! In order to protect the interior of the pump from pollution, the pump heads
are delivered with protective plugs. They should be put on when the pump is
at a standstill.
! For the best performance the suction tube should be as short as possible and
have a large internal diameter.
Warning In most cases the pump should be operated with a filter featuring pores that
do not exceed 10 µm. The filter protects the pump from particles and dirt.
6.4 Assembly of the fluid connection fittings
The liquid supply openings may be lateral with an 1/8" NPT thread screw Pump
heads equipped with the heating module are available with front liquid ports
only.
Lateral screw connection 1/8" NPT
figure 10 Fluid connection fitting 1/8" NPT, stainless steel
1. The thread of the fitting should be wrapped with 2-3 layers of Teflon tape
and screwed in the NPT thread (see table 13). First manually, then tightened
with ½ to ¾ wrench turns.

Clean the internal and external Make sure the internal and Wrap the PTFE tape around the screw
screw threads leaving no residues. external screw threads are not thread clockwise beginning with the
dented or deformed. second pitch of screw thread..
The PTFE tape should be wrapped Cut the PTFE tape off and wind The PTFE tape should not stick out over
tightly around the screw thread the end of the tape tightly around screw thread because pieces can be cut
approx. two times (720°). the screw thread. off and get into the system.
table 13 Use of PTFE Tape
2. Cut the tube or hose to the right angle with an adapted hose cutter. Metal
tubing, that produces swarf during cutting must be throughoutly cleansed
and flushed. The smallest piece of swarf in the liquid delivery system may
cause failure of the micro annular gear pump.
3. Screw the tube or hose (the latter always with a support tube) in the fluid
inlet/outlet port of the pump first manually then tighten it with 1¼ wrench
turns. During this operation use a second wrench to hold the hose against
the bottom of the inlet/outlet port.
4. In order to avoid dry operation, provide for a sufficient liquid supply before
each use.

6.5 Filter selection and use
In majority of cases it is recommended to integrate a filter on the suction side

of the micro annular gear pump to ensure its secure operation. The
recommended filter pores or mesh size should not exceed 10 µm. The
penetration of particles or swarf that could cause a blockage or damage to the
pump can only be avoided by using an adapted filter.
HNP Mikrosysteme offers a choice of standard filters covering a broad spectrum

of applications. You may count on our assistance for the selection of the most
suitable one.
In order to select the best adapted filter, such operating parameters as flow
rate, viscosity and degree of pollution of the liquid will be needed. An increase
in at least one of the mentioned terms will require the use of a bigger filtering
element or the pressurization of the delivered liquid. In case no suitable filter
for high viscosity liquid can be found, it is possible to use a filter with slightly
larger pore size. Prior discussion with HNP Mikrosysteme is here recommended.
A filter with larger pores is still better than no filter at all. Alternatively an
already filtered liquid may be used.
Warning Because filters have a large internal volume, it is recommended to fill in the
filter and the suction tube with already filtered liquid in order to avoid dry
operation of the pump during the startup.
Warning Please control regularly the filtering elements for pollution. Cleanse regularly
the filter or replace it with a new one. A polluted filter may considerably
decrease the volumetric efficiency of a pump. Furthermore, because of the
cavitation effects dosage imprecision and even pump damage may occur.
Warning A too small filter (too little filtering surface) may considerably decrease the
volumetric efficiency of the micro annular gear pump. What is more, because
of the cavitation effects dosage imprecision and even pump damage may
occur.

6.6 Connection of the micro annular gear pump to the power supply
In order to operate the pump a supplementary source of 24 VDC will be

required. The ampacity of the voltage source should amount to 5 A for the
micro annular pumps mzr-6355 and mzr-7255.
The micro annular gear pump is connected via the Terminal Box S-G05. This
enables an easy startup of the pump due to:
− the possibility to connect the voltage supply with the delivered plug
connector J1
− alternative voltage supply via a DIN connector conform with DIN 45323
− separable pump connection "mzr-pump"
− speed set via potentiometer
− analog voltage input 0-10 V and 0 (4)-20 mA for speed control
− change of speed setting mode with a DIP-switch
− 9-pole connection plug for the RS-232 interface
− error output programmable also as trigger input or frequency output
− digital input with a screw connection
− possibility of installation on a 35 mm top hat rail
90
4x Ø3,2
79
79
RS-232
RS-232 Power
Power In
In
24 VDC
26
Terminal
Terminal Box
Box S-G05
S-G05
HNP
HNP Mikrosysteme
Mikrosysteme GmbH
GmbH
47
18
69
Mode
Mode 90
GND
4A
VDC// 4A
g GND
ON
In.
ON
In put
ogIn.
0(4)...20
0(4)...20 mA
Dig.Input
mA
o ut
10VVout
24VDC
Anal og
1 22 33 44
alog
100
GND
Fault
3 Analo
ult
RxD
11 GND
Anal
ON
5 RxD
ON
92
10 99 Dig.
0...10
0...10 V
V
Inputt 88 77 Fa
GND 66 55 An
n.c. 44 33 10
GND 22 11 24
1 22 33 44
1
16 115
14 113
12 11
ON
ON
Poti
Poti 1 22 33 44
TxD 16
Out 14
In. 12
VDC 10
Speed
Speed Status
n.c.
Status
TxD
24VDC
GND
GND
Fau tlt Out
alog In.
g. Inpu
Analog
Ready
Ready::green
green
00
Faul
Dig.
24
Fault:
Fault: red
red
An
Di
mzr-pump power / signal

2x Ø4,5 J2 J1
69
100
figure 11 Measurements of the Terminal Box S-G05

serial alternative
interface power supply
of PC 24 V DC
RS-232
RS-232 Power
PowerIn
In
24 VDC
Term
Terminal
inal Box
Box S-G05
S-G05
HNP
HNP M
Mikrosystem
ikrosystemeeGm
GmbH
bH
Mode
Mode
GND
4A
AnalogGND
VDC//4A
ON
I n.
ON
In put
t
AnalogIn.
0(4)...20
0(4)...20mA
ut
mA
Dig.Inpu
10VVoout
24VDC
1 2 33 44
14 13 Analog
GND 66 55 Analog
Fault
GND
In put 88 77 Fault
RxD
11 GND
OO
NN
16 15 RxD
10 99 Dig.
0...10 V
V
n.c. 44 33 10
22 11 24
0...10
1 2 33 44
12 11
ON
ON
Poti
Poti 1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
TxD 16
Out 14
In. 12
C 10
Speed
Speed Status
Status
VDC
GND
GND
GND
aultOut
AnalogIn.
Dig. Input
n.c.
TxD
24VD
Analog
Re
Re a
ad d yy :: g
g re
re e
en
FFault
0 n
0
24
Dig.
Fa u
Fa u ll t:
t: re re d
d
m zr-pum p power / signal

J2 J1
Potentiometer
1 2
– +
Status LED
motor cable external voltage

24 V DC
figure 12 Connection of the micro annular gear pump to the power supply
Connector J1 Function Labeling

Pin Terminal Box
1 Voltage supply 24 VDC / 4 A
2 Ground GND
3 10 V output voltage 10 V Out
4 not used n.c.
5 Analog input Analog In
6 Ground GND
7 Fault output Fault
8 Digital Input Dig. Input
table 14 Connector J1 "power / signal" pin assignment of Terminal Box S-G05
Connnector J2 Function Wire Labeling

Pin Terminal Box
9 Digital Input red Dig. Input
10 Voltage supply pink 24VDC
11 Ground blue GND
12 Analog input brown Analog In
13 Ground analog input grey Analog GND
14 Fault output white Fault Out
15 RS-232 interface signal reception yellow RxD
16 RS-232 interface signal green TxD
transmission
table 15 Connector J2 " mzr-pump" pin assignment configuration between the motor and terminal box S-G05

Installation of the cable wires

− tool: screwdriver blade 2.5 x 0.4 mm
− open the spring clamp with the screwdriver through the side
slot
− cable in cable opening place (cable can be used with or without
ferrule)
− remove the screwdriver
figure 13 Installation of cable wires in the connectors
LED Status Definition

green Power supply to the controller is active, no error
red Motor error (current limitation or pump blocked)
table 16 LED for status indication
The operating speed of the micro annular gear pump may be set with:
− the potentiometer of the Terminal Box S-G05

− an external voltage signal 0-10 V
− an external, analog current signal 0 (4)-20 mA
− an external potentiometer and
− the RS-232 interface
Individual start up procedures are described in the following points.
6.6.1 Startup with potentiometer
1. Connect the drive with the eight colored wires to the terminal box S-G05.
The colors of the corresponding wire connections are described in the
table 15.
2. Bring the potentiometer knob to null position by turning it clockwise to the

limit stop.
3. Put the DIP-switch to the »Poti« position.
4. Connect the 24 VDC voltage supply to the terminal or to the DIN

connector.
Make sure that the polarity of the supplied direct current is correct, otherwise
electronics will be damaged.
5. Provide for a steady liquid supply to the pump in order to avoid dry
operation.
6. The pump may now be put into operation by turning on the potentiometer
knob.

Remarks:
− You may adjust speed of the micro annular gear pump without the need to
connect it to the serial interface.
− In case error occurs for example due to motor overload - the green status
LED on the Terminal Box S-G05 will turn red.
6.6.2 Startup with external 0-10 V signal
table 15.
2. Bring the potentiometer knob to the null position by turning it clockwise to

the limit stop.
3. Put the DIP-switch to »0…10 V« position.
4. Connect an external 0-10 V voltage supply to the terminal clamps

»AnalogIn« and »GND« to the S-G05. (see figure 14)
serial alternative
of PC 24 V DC
RS-232
RS-232 Power In
24 VDC
24 VDC
Term inal Box S-G05

HNP M
HNP M ikrosystem
ikrosystem e
e Gm
Gm bH
bH
Mode
Mode
GND
4A
VDC//4A
D
ON
alo g GN
ON
Inpu t
In.
AnalogIn.
0(4)...20 mA
mA
Dig.Input
0(4)...20
out
10 VVout
4 VDC
Analog
1 2 3 4
D 66 55 Analog
1 2 3 4
ault
GND
g . Input 88 77 FFault
RxD
12 11 GND
ON
15 RxD
ON
10 99 Dig.
0...10
0...10VV
D 22 11 224
14 13 An
n.c. 44 33 10
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
16 15
ON
ON
Poti
Poti 1 2 3 4
TxD 16
ault Out 14
In. 12
VDC 10
1 2 3 4
Speed
Speed Status
GND
GND
Ana log In.
n.c.
Status
TxD
24 VDC
GN
GN
Analog
Re
Reaaddyy: : ggre
reeenn
FFault
0 0
Dig.
Fa
Fauul t:
l t: re redd
Di

J2 J1
5 6 1 2
– +

24 V DC
+ –
standard signal
0 -10 V
.
figure 14 Startup with an external 0-10 V voltage signal
operation of the device.

connector.

The input circuit at the analog input is layed out as a differential amplifier. If
the analog input is “open” there is already a voltage of 2 V. That means in
this case that the motor would be turning at a speed of about 2000 rpm. In
order to set 0 rpm the input must be connected over a low ohm resistor to the
analog ground (AGND) or connected to the AGND-voltage level.
7. The micro annular gear pump may now be put into operation by increasing
the external voltage signal. A voltage signal of 0 V corresponds to 0 rpm
and 10 V to the maximal programmed speed.
Remarks:
− In case error occurs for example due to the motor overload - the green status
LED on the terminal Box S-G05 will turn red.
6.6.3 Startup with an external 0(4)-20 mA current signal
table 15.
2. Bring the potentiometer knob to the zero position by turning it clockwise to

the limit stop.
3. Put the DIP-switch to »0(4)…20 mA« position.
4. Connect the external current source to the screw clamps »AnalogIn« and
»GND« to the S-G05. (see figure 15).

serial alternative
of PC 24 V DC
RS-232
RS-232 Power
Power In
In
24
24 VDC
VDC
Term inal Box S-G05

HNP
HNP M
M ikrosystem
ikrosystem e
e Gm
Gm bH
bH
Mode
GND
4A
VDC// 4A
ND
ON
In.
ON
Input
alog In.
0(4)...20
0(4)...20 mA
AnalogG
g . Input
mA
out
10VV out
24VDC
Analog
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
14 13 Analog
GND
ult
Fault
RxD
Dig.
15 RxD
D
ON
11 GN
0...10
0...10VV
put 88 77 Fa
GND 66 55 An
.c. 44 33 10
GND 22 11 24
10 99 Di
11 22 3
3 44
16 15
12 11
ON
Poti
11 22 3
3 44
TxD 16
Out 14
In . 12
VDC 10
Speed Status
Input
n.c.
Status TxD
24 VDC
GND
GND
FaultOut
AnalogIn.
n
Analog
Dig. In
Re
Reaaddyy: : ggre
reeenn Fault
0 0
Dig.
24
Fa
Fauul t:
l t: re redd

J2 J1
5 6 1 2
– +

24 V DC
+ –
standard signal
0 (4)-20 mA
figure 15 Operation via an external 0 (4)-20 mA voltage
5. Provide for a sufficient liquid supply to the pump in order to avoid dry
6. Connect the 24 VDC voltage supply to the screw clamp terminal or to the
DIN connector.
electronics may be damaged.
the external current signal. 0 mA corresponds to 0 rpm and 20 mA to the
maximal programmed speed.
Remarks:
− For operation with the signal 4…20 mA an offset of about 2.1 V should be
set by entering the command MAV2170. In order to set the nominal values
the micro annular gear pump must be put into operation via the RS-232
interface and start with the » Motion Manager « software. Save the
command in the EEPROM with the command EEPSAV (see chapter 9.1).
− Speed of the micro annular gear pump may be set by sending an external
voltage signal without the need to connect the pump to the serial interface.
− In case error occurs for example due to a motor overload - the green status
LED on the Terminal Box S-G05 will extinguish and a red one will light up.

6.6.4 Startup with external potentiometer
table 15.
2. Bring the internal potentiometer knob to the null position by turning it

clockwise to the limit stop.
3. Put the DIP-switch to »0…10 V« position.
4. Connect an external 0-10 V voltage supply to the terminal clamps

»AnalogIn«, »10 V« and »GND« to the S-G05.(see figure 14)
serial alternative
of PC 24 V DC
RS-232
RS-232 Power
Power In
In
24 VDC
24 VDC
Term inal Box S-G05

HNP
HNP M
M ikrosystem
ikrosystem e
e Gm
Gm bH
bH
Mode
GND
VDC//44AA
AnalogGND
ON
In.
ON
Input
lo g In.
0(4)...20
0(4)...20 mA
g. Input
mA
out
10VV out
24VDC
Analog
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
3 Analog
GND
Faultlt
RxD
Dig.
ND
ON
D
ON
ut 88 77 Fau
GND 66 55 Ana
5 Rx
0...10
0...10VV
n. c. 44 33 10
GND 22 11 24
10 99 Di
11 G
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
16 115
14 113
12 11
ON
ON
Poti
Poti 1 2 3 4
xD 16
Out 14
In. 12
VDC 10
1 2 3 4
Speed Status
Input
n.c.
Speed Status
TTxD
24VDC
GND
GND
FaultOut
AnalogIn.
Dig.Inp
Analog
Reaaddyy: : ggre
Re reeenn
Fault
0 0
24
Dig.
Fa
Fauul t:
l t: re redd

J2 J1
3 5 6 1 2
– +

24 V DC
Potentiometer Analog IN
external 10 V GND
figure 16 Startup with an external potentiometer

connector.

The input circuit at the analog input is layed out as a differential amplifier. If
the analog input is “open” there is already a voltage of 2 V. That means in
this case that the motor would be turning at a speed of about 2000 rpm. In
order to set 0 rpm the input must be connected over a low ohm resistor to the
analog ground (AGND) or connected to the AGND-voltage level.
the external voltage signal. A voltage signal of 0 V corresponds to 0 rpm
and 10 V to the maximal programmed speed.
Remarks:
− In case error occurs for example due to the motor overload - the green status
LED on the terminal Box S-G05 will turn red.
6.6.5 Startup with the RS-232 interface
8. Connect the drive with the eight colored wires to the S-G05. The colors of
the corresponding wire connections are in the table 15.
9. In order to prevent uncontrolled startup of the pump, bring the

potentiometer knob to the null position by turning it clockwise to the limit
stop.
10. Put the DIP-switch to »Poti« position.
11. Connect the RS-232 interface of the Terminal Box S-G05 with a free serial
interface of a PC. Use for that the delivered 9-pole null-modem cable.
12. Now install the delivered software as described in the chapter 8 or

Chapter 9.
connector.
15. The micro annular gear pump may now be put into operation with the
available software (operating mode RS-232 see chapter 9.1).
Remarks:
− In case error occurs for example due to the motor overload - the green error
status LED on the Terminal Box S-G05 will turn red.

6.6.6 Startup of the pump units with network mode (NET1 Command)
All standard units are delivered with node number 0. In order to prepare the
units for network operation, they must first be individually connected to the PC
and set to the desired node address using the FAULHABER Motion Manager.
A serial network can be constructed using the so-called daisy-chain technique,

in which the transmit cable of the Master (PC, PLC) is connected to the receive
cable of the first node, from where it is looped through to the receive cable of
the second node, and so on. The same procedure is followed with the receive
cable of the Master, which is looped through to all transmit cables of the drive
node. The current generation of Motion Controllers do not require a
multiplexer board for serial network operation. The multiplex mode is activated
with a command NET1.
PC Controller 1 Controller 2
Pump 1 Pump 2
zero modem cable with RS-232 connection cable

internal resistor article no. 92002801
figure 17 Connection between PC, Controller Pump 1 and Controller Pump 2
1. Connect the RS-232 port of the controller Pump 2 with the RS-232 of the
controller Pump 1. For this purpose use the delivered 9-pole RS-232
connection cable.
2. Connect the In Port of the RS-232 connection cable with a free serial
interface of a PC. For this purpose use the delivered 9-pole null-modem
cable with internal resistor.
3. Put the potentiometer of the control units to zero position by turning it

clockwise to the limit stop.
4. Connect the voltage supply 24 VDC. This can be done with the integrated
DIN connector or, alternatively the 2-pole screw clamp (24 V = »+«;
GND = »-«). Pay attention to the correct polarity.
5. You may now install the delivered software as described in the chapter 8.

While connecting the DC voltage pay attention to the correct polarity,

otherwise electronics may be damaged.
Remarks:
− Controller which the manufacturer specifically shipped for the network
modus were with the command NET1, SOR0, ANSW0 and DIPROG
programmed.
− In order to address the individual drives in the network, the node number
must be specified before each ASCII command to be sent (e.g. 2V500).
Commands without a node number are adopted by all drive nodes in the
network.
− No unaddressed query commands may be sent in network mode, as
otherwise all units will answer simultaneously and the message frames will
mix, resulting in communication errors. It must also be ensured that no
asynchronous responses are sent by several units simultaneously, and that
the command acknowledgement is switched off when using unaddressed
transmit commands. Use the ANSW0 command to set the response
behaviour.

6.7 Connection of the micro annular gear pump with terminal box S-G05 with screw
clamp terminal
In order to operate the pump a supplementary source of 24 VDC will be

required. The ampacity of the voltage source should amount to around 3 A for
the micro annular pumps mzr-2505, mzr-2905 and mzr-4605 and 5 A for the
mzr-7205.
The micro annular gear pump is connected via the Terminal Box S-G05. This
enables an easy startup of the pump due to:
− the possibility to connect the voltage supply with the delivered screw clamp
terminal
− an alternative voltage supply via a DIN connector conform with DIN 45323
− speed set via potentiometer
− analog voltage input 0-10 V and 0 (4)-20 mA for speed control
− change of speed setting mode with a DIP-switch
− 9-pole connection plug for the RS-232 interface
− error output programmable also as trigger input or frequency output
− digital input with a screw connection
− possibility of installation on a 35 mm top hat rail
90 mm
4x Ø3,2
79 mm
79 mm
26 mm
Terminal Box S-G05
47 mm
18 mm
69 mm
90 mm
89 mm
100 mm
Ready: green
0
Fault: red
2x Ø4,5
69 mm
100 mm
figure 18 Measurements of the Terminal Box S-G05

serial alternative
of PC 24 V DC
Terminal Box S-G05

HNP M ikrosystem e Gm bH
Mode
0(4)...20 mA
0...10 V Analog mzr-Pump / Motor Power In

Extern
Poti
2 24 VDC / 4 A
5 Analog Inp ut
7 Analog GND
10 Dig. Input
12 In An alog
6 Fault Out
Speed Status
4 24 VDC
11 GND
3 GND
1 GND
8 RxD
9 TxD
Re a d y : g re e n
0 Fa u l t: re d
potentiometer
– = +
status LED
external voltage
motor cable 24 V DC
figure 19 Connection of the micro annular gear pump to the power supply
Wire Function Terminal Box

blue Ground GND
pink Voltage supply 24VDC
brown Analog input Analog Input
white Error output Error Out
gray Ground analog input Analog GND
yellow RS-232 interface signal reception RxD
green RS-232 interface signal transmission TxD
red Digital input Dig.Input
table 17 Wire configuration between the drive and the Terminal Box S-G05
The speed setting in operation of the micro annular gear pump is to implement
the functions from chapter 6.6. The connection of an external potentiometer
can't be realized.

7 Startup/shutdown of a mzr-pump Operation manual mzr-6355 and mzr-7255
7 Startup/shutdown of a mzr-pump
7.1 Preparing for operation
After the liquid supply system had been completed, please check once again
the operating conditions of the micro annular gear pump as according to the
following points:
− Are the inlet and outlet tubes correctly connected?

− Is the entire liquid supply system clean - that means free of particles, foreign
bodies, pollution or swarf?
− Has a filter been installed on the suction side?
− Has a sufficient amount of the right liquid been supplied?
− The pump does not run the risk of a dry operation?
− The entire liquid supply system has been checked for leakage?
− Is it possible to stop the pump by an emergency switch if an unexpected
malfunction occurs at the startup?
7.2 Startup of the micro annular gear pump
Switch on the voltage supply. The micro annular gear pump can now be put
into operation by turning on the potentiometer knob or by sending a nominal
external voltage signal.
Start the filling in of the pump at low or middle speed (1000 - 3000 rpm).
Warning Avoid dry operation of the pump. The pump should be filled in before it is put
to operation.
7.3 Flushing procedure after use
After each service the micro annular gear pump should be carefully flushed
with a non-corrosive, filtered and particle-free flushing liquid (see table 18 and
table 19). During flushing procedure the pump should operate at a speed of
about 3000 rpm and if possible against a low pressure (that can be obtained by
using a restrictor, a capillary or similar). The flushing liquid must be compatible
with the delivered liquid and suitable for solving the remaining liquid rests.
Depending on the application for example water, or isopropanol may be used.
If you have doubts whether a particular liquid is suitable for this function or
not, please ask the manufacturer of the liquid or HNP Mikrosysteme.

Flushing cycle
Selection of flushing
liquid (FL)
Right
no
flushing see table 18 (Selection of the flushing liquid)
liquid
yes
Is the
no
pump see table 19 (Resistance of the sealing material)
resistant?
yes
Flush the pump see table 18 (Selection of the flushing liquid)
Drain the pump
End of flushing
cycle
figure 20 Diagram of the flushing procedure
Warning Liquids that remain in the pump may crystallize, coagulate or lead to corrosion
and as a consequence impair the work of the micro annular gear pump.
Warning Please make sure that the pump components and particularly O-rings and
sealing are resistant to the employed flushing liquid. (see table 19).
Warning The flushing liquid (solvent) and the recommended duration of the flushing
procedure depend on the delivered liquid (see table 19). The indicated flushing
liquids are simple recommendations and should therefore be checked by the
user as to their compatibility and suitability.
! Regulations concerning use of substances dangerous to health should be

followed!

Nature of the delivered liquid Flushing time [min] Suitable flushing liquid
1 Oils, fats, plastifierss 15-20 isopropanol, ethanol, acetone,
benzine/petroleum ether
2 Solvents (polar + nonpolar) 5-10 isopropanol, ethanol
3 Other organic liquids 10-15 isopropanol , ethanol
4 Refrigerating and cooling agents 15-20 isopropanol, ethanol
5 Neutral water/y solutions 20-25 isopropanol, ethanol
6 Basic solutions 25-30 DI-water (deionized water)
7 Organic acids 30-40 isopropanol, ethanol
8 Weak mineral acids 25-30 DI- water
9 Strong mineral acids 35-45 DI- water
10 Strong oxidizing liquids 35-45 DI- water
11 Paints, varnishes, adhesives 50-60 not specified - for further information
please contact HNP Mikrosysteme.
table 18 Selection of the flushing liquid (solvent) and the duration of the flushing procedure depending on the
delivered liquid.
Warning Please make sure that the pump components and particularly O-rings and
sealing are resistant to the employed flushing liquid (see table 19).
The material combinations and -cs and -cy can not be flushed with water or
! DI-water.
O-ring material
Flushing liquid FPM EPDM FFPM
acetone 3 0 0
benzene 1 3 0
benzyl alcohol 0 2 0
butanol 1 0 0
dimethyl sulfoxide (DMSO) 3 0 0
ethanol 0 0 0
isopropanol 0 0 0
methanol 2 0 0
methylethylketone (MEK) 3 1 0
styrene 1 3 1
toluene 2 3 0
water 0 0 0
xylene 2 3 0
benzine/petroleum ether 0 3 0
oil / fine mechanics oil 0 3 0
Legend: 0 ... good suitability 1 ... suitability 2 ... conditional suitability 3 ... labile - ... not specified
table 19 Resistance of the sealing materials depending on the flushing liquid (solvent)

7.4 Shutdown of the micro annular gear pump
In order to shut down a mzr-pump the following steps should be followed:
− Flush the pump with a filtered and particle-free flushing liquid (solvent) as
described in the chapter 7.3.
− After the flushing procedure decrease speed of the pump to 0 rpm
− Fill the pump with a suitable conservation liquid (see chapter 7.4.1)
− Remove the pump from the system (see chapter 7.4.2)
By proceeding as shown in the diagram (see figure 22) you may prepare the
pump for a longer standstill.

End of test/operation
Flushing cycle
Drain the pump Selection of flushing

liquid (FL)
Pump
no yes Right
requires no see table 18
flushing
flushing?
liquid
Flushing cycle
yes
Is the
no see table 19
pump
Delivery of Is the
no resistant?
solvents pump
clean? yes
yes Flush the pump
Drain the pump
End of flushing
cycle
manipulated
liquid = no Selection of
conservation conservation liquid
liquid (CL)
Selection of conservation
liquid (CL)
yes
no CL
adequate see table 20
Nature of gaseous
liquid yes
the CL
Fill in CL Is the CL
no
compatible see table 19
with pump
Desinstall the Let the gas through
pump the pump
yes
Close the liquid

ports Is the CL
no compatible
New operation after with the
End of conservation
the conservation last FL ?
procedure
procedure
yes
Legend
End of CL
FL = flushing liquid
selection
CL = conservation liquid
figure 21 Diagram of the shutdown procedure

7.4.1 Conservation
If the micro annular gear pump operates at irregular intervals or for other
reasons should be put out of operation for a longer period, it should, after
service and flushing procedure (see chapter 7.3), be filled in with a suitable
conservation liquid.
The conservation liquid may be selected from the table 20 depending on the
duration of the standstill and the resistance of the pump to the manipulated
liquid. The indicated conservation liquids are simple recommendations and
should therefore be checked by the user as to their compatibility and suitability.
The figure 22 presents a diagram of conservation agent selection.
Remark: This diagram is repeated as a part of the figure 21 (shutdown

procedure of the micro annular gear pump).
After the cleansing procedure the pump should be filled with a suitable
conservation agent. You will find a choice of possible conservation agents in
the table 21
Selection of conservation
liquid (CL)
no CL
adequate
see table 20 (Selection of the conservation agent)
yes
Is the CL
no
compatible
with pump see table 19 (resistance of the sealing material)
yes
Is the CL
no compatible
with the
last FL ?
yes
End of CL
selection
figure 22 Diagram - selection of conservation liquid (CL)

delivered liquid
Compatibility
Solubility in
Duration of
Description
Breakaway
Toxicology
Viscosity
with the
storage
torque
Liquids water
isopropanol + + o o o + solvent for organic compounds, cosmetics, essential oils
waxes, and esters, antifreezers, antiseptic agents
acetone + + o o o + solvent for a number of organic compounds, unlimited
solubility in water, dissolves natural and synthetic resins, fats,
oils and commonly used plastifiers
ethanol + + o o o + solvent for organic compounds, fats, oils and resins
DI-water + + - - + + solvent for many organic and mineral liquids
fine mechanics - - + + + + cleansing and protective action (dissolves fats, tar, rubber or
oil adhesive substances, protects against corrosion).
hydraulic oil - - + + + - lubricating and preserving properties (Warning: may resinate
or deteriorate with time)
nitrogen - + + + o + is not a solvent, may leave deposits after drying out
air / + + + + + is not a solvent, may leave deposits after drying out
compressed air
Legend: + ... good/suitable o ... satisfactory; - ... bad/inadequate
table 20 Selection of the conservation agent
In order to prevent dust particles and foreign bodies from penetrating into the
pump or the conservation agent from leaking out, please secure the liquid
input and output openings with the delivered protective plugs or screws.
Warning Water or DI-water should not be used as conservative liquids. They germinate
already after a few days and build a biofilm which can later block the pump.
7.4.2 Dismantling of the system
− Put the drive out of operation by turning down speed to 0 rpm and by
switching off the voltage supply. Make sure that the procedure described in
the chapter 7.3 has been completed.
− Now that the pump has been stopped you may remove it from the system.
− Protect the inlet and outlet openings of the pump with adapted protective
plugs or screws.

7.5 Trouble shooting
If the pump stops operating abruptly or has difficulties with starting operation,
please undertake the following steps:
Try to liberate the micro annular gear pump:
− by turning the potentiometer knob back and forth or by connecting an

analog voltage
− via the control software
− by pressing with a syringe a suitable flushing liquid (see table 18 and
table 19) through the micro annular gear pump
− by changing the operating direction of the pump.
If these measures turn out to be ineffective, please contact the service staff of
HNP Mikrosysteme (see chapter 16) and send the pump back to the
manufacturer for inspection.
Warning You should under no condition try to disassemble the pump by yourself. This
may cause damage to the pump components and consequently annul your
warranty claims.
7.6 Return of the micro annular gear pump to the manufacturer
For the return of a micro annular gear pump and components that have already
been employed, please follow the instructions:
− drain any remaining rests of the delivered liquid from the pump
− flush the pump with an adapted solvent
− remove the filter elements from integrated or loosely delivered filters
− protect all openings against dust with the delivered protective plugs or
screws
− return the pump in its original packing
The service personnel which carries out the repair should be informed about
the condition of the already used micro annular gear pump. This is done by
means of the "Declaration of media in contact with the micro annular gear
pump and its components" (see chapter 19). This form may also be
downloaded from the web site www.hnp-mikrosysteme.de/download.
! The "Declaration of liquids in contact with the micro annular gear pump and
its components" must imperatively be filled in. The nature of liquid which
entered into contact with the micro annular gear pump and its components
must be specified.
In case of non-compliance, the sender will be liable for any resulting injure to
persons or any object damage.

8 Software »mzr-pump controller« Operation manual mzr-6355 and mzr-7255
8 Software »mzr-pump controller«
Install the delivered software »mzr-pump controller« from both diskettes by

starting the program »Setup« on CD. The delivered software is compatible with
Windows 98®, Windows NT, Windows 2000®, Windows XP® and Windows
Vista™.
After a successful installation the program »mzr-pump controller« can be found

in the start menu under »Programs - HNP Mikrosysteme«. After the program
has been initiated, data such as the pump type »mzr-6355« or »mzr-7255«.
The program enables to coordinate metering or continuous delivery tasks. The

operating parameters of the micro annular gear pump are set via included user
interface.
The »Dosage« operating mode (see figure 23) enables to set constant volumes
in units such as ml, mg or rpm as well as pauses for a fixed number of
sequences or for continuous operation. Each metering procedure will be
configured according to the speed profile which is set for such values as »Max.
velocity« and the »Acceleration«. The allowable speed values extend from 1 to
6000 rpm and the acceleration values from 1 to 2000 rotation/s².
The metering procedure can be initiated with the »Start« button or by pressing
the enter key. The task may be stopped either with the »Stop« button or by
pressing once again the enter key.
figure 23 Setup window of the »Dosage« operating mode
In the »Continuous flow« operating mode (see figure 24) continuous flow rates
in units such as ml/min, g/min and rpm may be set. Operation of the micro

8 Software »mzr-pump controller« Operation manual mzr-6355 and mzr-7255
annular gear pump may be initiated with the »Start« button or by pressing the
enter key for the indicated »Duration« value. Checking of the »endless« box
will put the pump to continuous operation. The »Stop« button or pressing of
the enter key once again will stop the delivery. If you check the
»Potentiometer« box, speed may be set by turning the potentiometer knob in
the front of the control module or on the terminal box.
The input of the »Fluid density« enables to convert units of weight to the given
volumes or to the given flow rates expressed in volume units. Remark: if you
are only working with volumes, the indication of the fluid density will not be
necessary and the standard value »1« can be left.
figure 24 Setup window of the »Continuous flow« operating mode
The »Calibration factor« enables to find the relation between the actually
delivered quantities or flow rates (= actual value) and the set up quantities or
flow rates (=nominal value). The calibration factor is specific to every pump and
each application case and therefore should be determined by the user as
according to the volume or weight of the delivered fluid. The calibration factor
may be calculated according to the following formula:
Desired quantity Desired delivery value

Calibration factor = =
Actual quantity Actual delivery value
In practice, due to the high precision of the system the calibration factor value
will only slightly exceed 1.

9 Software »Motion Manager« Operation manual mzr-6355 and mzr-7255
9 Software »Motion Manager«
The »Motion Manager« software enables operation and configuration of the

drive and offers a possibility of an online graphic analysis of the operating data.
The software is delivered on CD. The program may be installed on a PC running
under Windows 7®, Windows 8 or Windows 8.1® operating systems.
Install the software »Motion Manager« by starting the program »Setup« from
the CD.
If the CD are not available you may still download this program from the web
site http://www.hnp-mikrosysteme.de/download-center.html or the web site
www.faulhaber.com (menu support - download). Here, the latest version is
always available in English and German.
After the installation the »Motion Manager« program may be loaded from the
»Faulhaber Motors« folder from the Windows start menu.
In order to program the drive, the micro annular gear pump should be put into
operation. The drive should be connected to the PC with the delivered
null-modem cable.
9.1 Direct drive control
In the »Motion Manager« software the input commands may be sent directly
to the drive. This enables to execute the movement commands and to modify
the drive parameters.
figure 25 Motion Manager software for direct control of the drive

The commands are entered in the field »Enter command:«. The button »Send«
will send the command to the drive for execution (see figure 25). The
commands may be given alternatively in capital letters or low case. The drive
will ignore excess space characters.
An example for continuous delivery
Commands Description
SOR0 Operating mode RS-232: Set the nominal speed via the RS-232
interface
V1000 Rotation speed of 1000 rpm
V0 Standstill of the pump (speed 0 rpm)
V6000 Speed value 6000 rpm
SOR1 Analog input of the operating mode: setup of the nominal speed
with the potentiometer knob or by connecting an external
voltage signal to the analog input
An example for discrete dosage
Command Description
SOR0 Operating mode RS-232: set the position via RS-232 interface
LR10000 Load a relative position of 10000 to the control unit
10,000 = 10 rotations
(Remark: 1000 steps = 1 rotation)
M Execute the task / start positioning
LR20000 Load a relative position of 20000 to the control unit
20,000 = 20 rotations
M Execute the task / start positioning
SOR1 Analog input operating mode: Set nominal speed with
potentiometer or by connecting a voltage signal to the analog
input
In case of the mzr-6355/mzr-7255 micro annular gear pump 1 revolution of the

rotor corresponds to 1000 steps.
For more details concerning the operation of the Motion Manager, please read
the online program help.

9.2 Programming of the control
The control of the micro annular gear pump may be adapted by the user to a
specific task by means of an easy programming language. The program files are
available in the ASCII code and have by default the »mcl« extension which
stands for "motion controller language". Various parameters of the drive such
as the maximal speed, the acceleration, the number of rotations, the allowable
current load and the parameters of the PI-controller may be programmed with
this language. Furthermore, it is possible to program short movement
sequences which will be saved in the internal memory of the drive and then
autonomously executed.
9.3 Transfer of a mcl file to the drive
The existing mcl files may be loaded to the file editor window using the menu
command File - Open… (in the program window).
figure 26 Menu file- open
The required mcl file may be selected and loaded via the file selection window
(see figure 26). By using the menu command Terminal - Transfer configuration
file the mcl file will be transferred to the drive (see figure 27).

figure 27 Transfer of the mcl files as parameter data
When a window appears with the enquiry if the mcl files should be transferred
to the »Motion-Controller«, answer by clicking on the »Yes« button.
In order to save the configuration and the programmed operation files in the
EEPROM, confirm the dialogue window with »OK« (see figure 28). By this
confirmation the program will be saved in the memory with a resident status
and will be available for future operation.
figure 28 Storage confirmation

A diskette with sample mcl programms is delivered along with the Motion
Manager. At the delivery the pump has a standard program configuration.
Moreover, a sample program that may be started with an external switch is
available for discrete dosage tasks.
Pump type Standard program Sample program for dosage tasks

mzr-6355 mzr-6355.mcl switchdosage_6355_e3.mcl
mzr-7255 mzr-7255.mcl switchdosage_7255_e3.mcl
table 21 Overview of mcl sample programs

10 Accessories for microfluidic systems Operation manual mzr-6355 and mzr-7255
10 Accessories for microfluidic systems
The accessory range for the liquid delivery systems of HNP Mikrosysteme
comprises complementary equipment such as hoses, tubes, fluid fittings, filters
and non-return valves that are best adapted to your micro annular gear pump.
We will eagerly share our long date experience as far as component selection is
concerned.
11 Non-liability clause
HNP Mikrosysteme GmbH shall not be liable any damage resulting form the
non-respect of instructions comprised in this operating manual.
It belongs to the user to check the integrity, the correct choice and the
suitability of the product for the intended use.
It remains at the responsibility of the user to conform to all laws, rules and
regulations in force. This applies above all to the treatment of aggressive,
poisonous, corrosive and other dangerous liquids.

12 Problems and their removal Operation manual mzr-6355 and mzr-7255
12 Problems and their removal
Disturbance Cause Solution

1 The pump does not work. No power supply Check the power supply.
2 The pump does not pump the No liquid in the primary tank Fill the recipient/tank with liquid.
liquid.
Presence of air or gas in the pump The pump cannot run dry against the system
pressure. Fill in the pump at no pressure or at
reduced system pressure.
Malfunction of the liquid supply Check the components for possible
components (such as in the delivery tube, disturbances to be eliminated. Cleanse the
the needle or external non-return valve) accessories where needed.
Failure of the electric installation Check the electric installation for the correct
cable configuration, loose contacts, etc.
The pump did not receive the start signal or Check if the start condition have been fulfilled
start conditions are not fulfilled. start signals (software control, PLC, start signal)
and the programs.
Motor disturbance: the red error LED is on. Check the failure condition of the motor
control with the Motion Manager software.
3 The pump does not start to operate. The pump does not take in the liquid. The tubing on the induction side is too long or
has a too small internal diameter (a too low
NPSHA value).
The tubing or the fluid connection on the
induction (suction) side are not tight. Please
check the intake connection and the tubing.
Air bubbles in the fluid system
(tubes, valves, ...)
If the viscosity of the liquid is too high, apply
pressure on the suction side.
Check the pressure exerted on the primary
liquid tank.
An external non-return valve does not open.
Check the non-return valves.
Submit the non-return valve to a higher
pressure, so that the pump may fill in.
4 The motor turns, but the pump No liquid in the pump Fill the pump with liquid.
does not operate.
Air bubbles in the liquid supply system Fill the pump and the liquid supply system with
(tubing, valves, ...) liquid.
The non-return valve does not open. Rinse the non-return valve.
Blocked delivery tubing or needle Cleansing, flushing or exchange of the delivery
tubing or dosage needle
The coupling between the motor and the Return the pump to the manufacturer.
pump is out of position.
The pump shaft is broken. Return the pump to the manufacturer.
5 The pump is filled with liquid, but Error indicator (the red status LED on the Check the motor error status with the Motion
does not pump it. terminal box is on and the motor control Manager software (command GFS). Try to
has set the error output). liberate the pump by making it operate for 1 s
in a reverse direction with -1000 rpm.
Adapt the motor current to the control.
Contact the manufacturer of the pump.
Presence of particles in the delivered liquid Check the motor error status with the Motion
or blockage of the pump. Manager software.
Try to liberate the pump by making it operate
for 1 s in a reverse direction with -1000 rpm.
Return the pump to the manufacturer for
cleansing. Use a filter, flush the liquid delivery


system.
Flush the pump with a syringe.
Blockage of the delivery tubing or the Cleanse, flush or exchange the delivery tubing
needle. or the needle.
Air bubbles in the liquid delivery system, Fill in the pump and the delivery system with
(tubing, valves) liquid.
6 Dosage volume does not Air bubbles in the liquid delivery system, Vent the liquid delivery system and check for
correspond to the set values. (tubing, valves ,...) and the pump untight fluid connections.
Pump shows cavitation. Too long or too narrow intake tubing. Shorten
the intake tubing or change the position of the
pump.
Polluted or too small filter Change the filter to a new or bigger one.
7 Speed of the pump cannot be Defective electric installation Check the electric installation for correct cable
adjusted. configuration and loose contacts.
Defective drive control Return the drive control to the manufacturer.
8 Liquid drops from the dosing The non-return valve does not close. Rinse the non-return valve.
needle.
Too high pressure on the primary liquid Stop the delivery of compressed air on the
tank primary liquid tank.
The liquid tank is placed at a higher level Place the liquid tank at the same or slightly
than the dosing needle. lower level than the pump.
9 The dosage volume decreases with Polluted filter. Exchange the filter.
time.
Deposits in the pump. Flush the pump or return it to the manufacturer
for dismantling and cleaning.
The pump is worn after a long operating New definition of the calibration factor of the
period or after use with abrasive liquids. pump, by modifying the pump characteristics
graph necessary.
10 Leakage from the pump The sealing does not function correctly. Return the pump to the manufacturer.
11 Leakage from the fluid connections Untight lock rings Exchange or tighten the fluid connections,
exchange the fluid connection fittings.
12 Air bubbles on the delivery side Loose fluid connections (particularly on the Check and tighten the fluid connections.
induction side)
The shaft seal is untight or worn. Return the pump to the manufacturer.
13 Minimal leakage during standstill No error, cause relative to the operating Employ a non-return valve.
principle Place the liquid tank at the same or slightly
lower level than the pump
14 Excess temperature The surface of the pump is hot. Clean the surface of the pump, rinse the pump
The pump operates with difficulty. The pump should be flushed.
Particles in the delivered liquid or deposits The operation of the pump should immediately
in the pump be stopped! Return the pump to the
manufacturer for cleansing.
Noise of beveling The operation of the pump should immediately
be stopped! Return the pump to the
manufacturer for cleansing and repair.
The motor surface or the motor interior are High temperature indicator in the drive is on.
too hot. The motor has been shut down by the
thermistor. Return the pump to the
manufacturer.
15 The pump is noisy Wearout of the pump or defective Do not continue to operate the pump, return it
components to the manufacturer for maintenance.
16 Lack of connection with the RS-232 The pump is not connected. Check the power supply 24 VDC.
interface
Check the connection of the interface and the
null-modem cable. Change the cable if
necessary.


The drive control does not respond. Interrupt the voltage supply for about 10 s,
connect the voltage supply again. Automatic
start of the integrated drive control
17 Overcurrent Particles in the delivered liquid Rinse the pump.
The pump operates with difficulty. Dosing needle is damaged. Needle should be
cleansed, flushed or exchanged.
Tubing on the delivery side, dosing needle or
non-return valve are blocked. Cleanse, flush or
exchange the components.
Deposits inside the pump. Flush the pump. If necessary return the pump
to the manufacturer.
18 Undervoltage Voltage supply < 12 VDC Check the power supply 24 VDC.
19 Overvoltage Voltage supply > 28 VDC Check the power supply 24 VDC. The drive
control may be damaged. Return the pump to
the manufacturer.
table 22 Problem shooting - causes and solutions.
! If a disturbance that has not been mentioned in the above list, or that makes
the use of the micro annular gear pump unsafe appears, please stop the
operation of the pump without delay and contact the manufacturer.

13 EC Directive Operation manual mzr-6355 and mzr-7255
13 EC Directive
A Directive or EC Directive is a legal instrument of the European Community

addressing at the member states and forcing them to implement specific
regulations or targets. Leastwise, micro annular gear pumps are covered, by the
scope of application of the following Directives: The following directives are of
importance for the user of the described micro annular gear pumps:
Low-Voltage Directive (2006/95/EC)
The Low-Voltage Directive is not relevant for micro annular gear pumps
described in this manual, because the supply voltage is limited to a maximum of
30 VDC.
Machinery Directive (2006/42/EC)
A micro annular gear pump is a machine and is consequently covered by this

Directive. However, it may be a part of a machine or installation.
EMC Directive (2004/108/EC)
The Directive on Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) applies to all electronic

and electrical devices, installations and systems. Consequently, the Motion
Controller of the micro annular gear pump is covered by the EMC Directive.
RoHS Directive (2011/65/EC)
To our knowledge our products delivered to you do not contain substances or

applications in concentrations that are forbidden by this directive. No
substances contain our products delivered to you after our current knowledge
in concentrations or application, the placing on the market in products
according to the valid requirements forbade to the Directive.
WEEE Directive (2002/96/EC)
Disposal of micro annular gear pumps has to be environmentally sound.

All materials and liquids haveto be recycled in accordance with the relevant
regulations. Electrical parts can not be disposed of as household waste. They
have to be delivered to designated collection points.

REACH regulation (EC) No. 1907/2006
HNP Mikrosysteme is not a manufacturer or importer of chemical substances

subjected to registration, but in terms of regulation, a downstream user. As
downstream user, we conduct the necessary communication with our suppliers
to ensure future deliveries of all components necessary to us. We will notify you
of all relevant, changes in our products, their availability and the quality of
parts/products delivered by us within our business and coordinate the
appropriate action in individual cases with you. Previous inspection did not
show any limitation in the supply of material from our upstream suppliers.
13.1 Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC)
Electromagnetic compatibility is defined as the ability of a electric or electronic

device to function satisfactorily as intended in its electromagnetic environment
without introducing intolerable electromagnetic disturbances in that
environment.
13.1.1 EMC Directive and Standards
Comformity was proven by proof of compliance with the following harmonized

standards by the company Dr. Fritz Faulhaber:
− EN 61000-6-4 (10/01): Generic standards – Emission standard for industrial

environments
− EN 61000-6-2 (10/01): Generic standards – Immunity for industrial
environments
These standards prescribe certain standardised tests for the emitted-

interference and interference-immunity tests. The following tests are required
due to the connections on the controller:
Generic Standard on Emitted Description

Interference:
EN 55011 (05/98)+A1(08/99)+A2(09/02): Radio disturbance characteristics
Generic Standard on Interference
Immunity
EN 61000-4-2 (05/95)+A1(4/98)+A2(02/01): Electrostatic discharge immunity test
EN 61000-4-3 (04/02)+A1(10/02): Radiated, radio-frequency, electromagnetic field immunity
test
EN 61000-4-4 (09/04): Electrical fast transient/burst immunity test
EN 61000-4-5 (03/95)+A1(02/01 Surge immunity test
EN 61000-4-6 (07/96)+A1(02/01): Immunity to conducted disturbances, induced by radio-
frequency fields
EN 61000-4-8 (09/93)+A1(02/01): Power frequency magnetic field immunity test
table 23 Standards Summary
All tests were conducted successfully.

13.1.2 Information on use as intended
For micro annular gear pumps, note the following:

Requirement for the intended operation is the operation according to the
technical data and the manual.
Restrictions
If the micro annular gear pumps are used at home, in business or in commerce
or in small businesses, appropriate measures must be taken to ensure that
emitted interferences are below the permitted limit a values!
Installation instructions:
The power supply and motor supply cable must be connected directly to the
terminal box S-G05.
During the operation of micro annular gear pumps with a multiplexer board the
connection of the terminal box S-G05 is not possible.

14 Declarations of conformity Operation manual mzr-6355 and mzr-7255
14 Declarations of conformity
The delivered micro annular gear pump falls within scope of the following EC
directives:
− Machinery Directive (2006/42/EC)

− EMC Directive (2004/108/EC)
You may request the declarations of conformity for the micro annular gear
pumps from us separately.

EC-manufacturer’s certificate
(following Machinery Directive 2006/42/EC)
We hereby declare that the following micro annular gear pumps of the
hermetic inert pump series:
mzr-6355, mzr-7255
are intended for installation into another machinery/plant and that start of
operation is forbidden until it is identified that the machinery/plant into which
these micro annular gear pumps shall be installed corresponds to the
regulations of the EC guidelines regarding safety and health requirements.
We confirm the conformity of the product described above to the following

standards in terms of applied directives
− Machinery Directive (2006/42/EC)
Applied standards are particularly
DIN EN 809 DIN EN 60204-1 DIN EN 294

DIN EN ISO 12100 part 1 DIN EN 953
DIN EN ISO 12100 part 2 UVV
This statement does not warrant any characteristics in terms of product liability.
Please note the safety instructions in the manual.
Mr. Lutz Nowotka, HNP Mikrosysteme GmbH, Bleicherufer 25, D-19053

Schwerin is authorised to compile the technical file according to Annex VII A.
Date: 30. December 2009

Signature manufacturer:
Dr. Thomas Weisener

CEO
EC-manufacturer’s certificate
(following EMC Directive 2004/108/EC)
We hereby declare that the following micro annular gear pumps of the
hermetic inert pump series:
mzr-6355, mzr-7255
are intended for installation into another machinery/plant and that start of
operation is forbidden till it is identified that the machinery/plant into which
these micro annular gear pumps shall be installed corresponds to the
regulations of the EC guidelines regarding safety and health requirements.
We confirm the conformity of the product described above to the following

standards in terms of applied directives
− EMC Directive (2004/108/EC)
Applied standards are particularly
EN 61000-6-4 (10/01): Generic standards – Emission standard for

industrial environments
EN 61000-6-2 (10/01): Generic standards – Immunity for industrial
environments
This statement does not warrant any characteristics in terms of product liability.
Please note the safety instructions in the manual.
Date: 30. December 2009

Signature manufacturer:
Dr. Thomas Weisener

CEO
15 Service, maintenance and warranty Operating manual mzr-6355 and mzr-7255
15 Service, maintenance and warranty
The maintenance of the micro annular gear pump should be carried out
depending on the delivered liquid
− for lubricating liquids after 12,000 h working hours, but not later than
24 months after the initial operation
− for non-lubricating liquids, crystallizing liquids or liquids containing particles,

after 5000 h working hours but not later than 12 months after the initial
operation. If during the first inspection no substantial wearout of the pump
is observed, the following inspection under the same working conditions
should be performed after 8000 h working hours, yet not later than
15 months following to the last inspection.
If during the first inspection the pump shows a particularly strong wearout, the
maintenance intervals should be readapted to the operating parameters.
In order to prevent a strong wearout of the pump, the pump should be shut
down properly after every application as described in the chapter 7.4. A
supplementary flushing procedure with a neutral flushing liquid (see
chapter 7.3) also slows down the wearout process of the pump.
! It is not allowed to open the micro annular gear pumps. The warranty extincts
with the expiry of the legal warranty period or with the opening of the pump.
Furthermore HNP Mikrosysteme cannot give any warranty of exchange for
parts whose damage result from incorrect use.
! For service and maintenance please return your micro annular gear pump to
HNP Mikrosysteme (You will find the address on the cover of the present
operating manual).
! The declaration of liquids having had contact with the micro annular gear
pump and components must imperatively be completed. The nature of the
liquids must be specified. In case of non-compliance the sender will be liable
for any resulting injure to persons or any object damage.
! Sealings, rotors and shaft are parts that undergo wear and will be replaced by
HNP Mikrosysteme GmbH during maintenance depending on their degree of
wear.
Last update: October 2016 Technical data subject to change without prior notice! 63
16 Contact person Operating manual mzr-6355 and mzr-7255
16 Contact person
Development and application assistance , service and accessories
Mr. Sven Reimann

Phone +49| (0) 385|52190-349
Service and maintenance
Mr. Steffen Edler

Phone +49| (0) 385|52190-307
Drive and control technology
Mr. Lutz Nowotka

Phone +49| (0) 385|52190-346
64 Technical data subject to change without prior notice! Last update: October 2016
17 Legal information Operating manual mzr-6355 and mzr-7255
17 Legal information
Marks
mzr® is a registered German trademark of HNP Mikrosysteme GmbH.
MoDoS® is a registered German trademark of HNP Mikrosysteme GmbH.
µ-Clamp® is a registered German trademark of HNP Mikrosysteme GmbH.
HNPM® is a registered German trademark of HNP Mikrosysteme GmbH.
Teflon® is a registered trademark of DuPont.
Viton® is a registered trademark of DuPont Dow Elastomers.
Kalrez® Spectrum™ is a registered trademark of DuPont.
PEEK™ is a registered trademark of Victrex plc.
HASTELLOY® is a registered trademark of Haynes International, Inc.
Aflas® is a registered trademark of ASAHI Glass Ltd.
Microsoft®, Windows® are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in

the USA and in the other countries.
Cavro® is a registered trademark of Tecan Systems, Inc.
Other product names or descriptions not mentioned above are possibly

registered trademarks of related companies.
Patents
Micro annular gear pumps (and housings) are protected by assigned patents:
EP 1115979 B1, US 6,520,757 B1, EP 852674 B1, US 6,179,596 B1,
EP 1354135, US 7,698,818 B2. Patents pending DE 10 2011 001 041.6,
PCT/IB2011/055108, EP 11 81 3388.3, US 13/884,088, CN 2011 8006 5051.7,
HK 13 11 2934.9, DE 10 2011 051 486.4, PCT/EP2012/061514,
EP 12 728264.8, US 9,404,492 B2, CN 2012 8003 8326.2. In the US, Europe
and China additional patents are pending.
employed micro annular gear pumps and components Operating manual mzr-6355 and mzr-7255

employed micro annular gear pumps and components
18.1 General information
The operator carries the responsibility for health and safety of his/her
employees. The responsibility extends also to employees not belonging to the
company that have a direct contact with the micro annular gear pump and its
components during repair or maintenance works. The nature of media (liquids)
coming into contact with the micro annular gear pump and its components
must be specified in the corresponding declaration form.
18.2 Declaration of liquids in contact with the micro annular gear pump
The staff performing the repair or maintenance works must be informed about
the condition of the micro annular gear pump before starting any work on the
device. The »Declaration of media in contact with the micro annular gear
pump« should be filled in for this purpose.
The declaration should be sent directly to the supplier or to the company

designated by the supplier. A second copy of the declaration must be attached
to the shipment documents.
18.3 Shipment
The following instructions should be observed for the shipment of the micro
annular gear pump.
− drain any remaining liquid from the pump

− flush the pump with an adapted flushing liquid
− remove the filter elements from the integrated or loosely delivered filters
− all the openings should be air-tight plugged
− return the pump in the original packing
19 Declaration of media in contact
with the micro annular gear pump and its components Operating manual mzr-6355 and mzr-7255
19 Declaration of media in contact

with the micro annular gear pump and its components
Type of the device

Pump type/serial number/article no.:
Operating hours/running time:
Number of delivery note or delivery date:
Reason of return:
Contact with media (liquids)

The micro annular gear pump was in contact with:
and has been rinsed with:
Product info sheet / Material Safety Data Sheet: yes* no

* Please attach file
or is available on the following web site: www.
If a pump which had contact with dangerous substances could not be properly cleansed prior to shipment,
we reserve the right to entrust a specialized company with cleansing of the device. The return of the pump
in original packing is advisable. It is necessary in order to protect the employees and delivery staff.
Nature of media contact:
explosive oxidizing sensitive to moisture
toxic (toxic byproducts) radioactive pH-value: approx. to
carcinogenic microbiological other:
irritant corrosive
R-statements: S-statements:
Declaration
Hereby I/we affirm that the stated information is complete and correct. Micro annular gear pump and
accessories are shipped in conformity with the applicable regulations.
company: Mrs Mr title:
division: name:
street, no.: phone:
ZIP/city: e-mail:
country:
city, date: authorized signature /

company stamp:
20 Appendix Operating manual mzr-6355 and mzr-7255
20 Appendix
− Drawing
− Technical manual for Faulhaber motor 3564K024BCS
− Communication and function manual for Faulhaber motor 3564K024BCS
2 x 1/8" NPT Length connecting cable 1 meter
figure 29
20 Appendix
Last update: October 2016

65 2,559
35 1,378
49,5 1,949
72 2,835
39,5 1,555
4x 4,5 0,177
Drawing mzr-6355S/7255S
8 0,315 50 1,969 30 1,181 60 2,362
Orientation with respect
33,1 1,303 90 3,543 to pump head 5 70 2,756
146,4 ±3,5 5,764 ±0,138 3 0,118
Technical data subject to change without prior notice!

(1:2)
Dimensions are millimeters next to [inches].
Drawing is subject to change without notice.
TO LERANCES SCALE D IN A3
DIN ISO 2768 m-H 1:1
DRAWN CHECKED APPRO VED DESCR IPTION STATE OF DOCUMENT
MWO SVR AMZ micro annular gear pump approved
KIND OF DOCUMEN T
HNP Mik ro systeme Gmb H dimensioned drawing
brushless DC Servomotor Juri-Gagarin-Ring 4 DRAWING NUMB ER REV. ISSUE DATE LANG . SH EET
Faulhaber 3564BCS approx. 1650 g D-19370 Parchim
01-05-072-D002-01 A 27.02.12 en 1/1
gespe ich ert am: 27 02 12 11:38:3 9
69
Operating manual mzr-6355 and mzr-7255
20 Appendix Operating manual mzr-6355 and mzr-7255
JUMO dTRON 304/308/316
Compact Controller with program function
Type 703043
Type 703041 Type 703042 Type 703044
B 70.3041.0
Operating Manual
2010-04-30/00442056
) Please read this operating manual before commissioning the instrument. Keep the manual in a
place which is accessible to all users at all times.
Your comments are appreciated and may help us in improving this manual.
All necessary settings are described in this operating manual. Manipulations not described in the
manual or expressly forbidden will jeopardize your warranty rights. Please contact the nearest sub-
sidiary or the head office, should you encounter problems.
This manual is valid from instrument software version 192.02.05.
It appears by simultaneously pressing the and keys.
E
When accessing the inner parts of the unit and returning modules, assemblies or components,
please observe the regulations accordings to EN 61340-5-1 and EN 61340-5-2 „Protection of elec-
trostatic sensitive devices“. Only use ESD packaging for transport.
Please note that we cannot accept any liability for damage caused by ESD.
ESD=Electro Static Discharge
Contents
1 Introduction 7
1.1 Description .................................................................................................... 7
1.2 Typographical conventions ......................................................................... 8
2 Identifying the instrument version 9

2.1 Type designation .......................................................................................... 9
2.2 Scope of delivery ........................................................................................ 10
2.3 Accessories ................................................................................................ 10
3 Mounting 11
3.1 Mounting site and climatic conditions ..................................................... 11
3.2 Dimensions ................................................................................................. 11
3.2.1 Type 703044 ................................................................................................. 11
3.2.2 Type 703042/43 ............................................................................................ 12
3.2.3 Type 703041 ................................................................................................ 12
3.3 Side-by-side mounting .............................................................................. 13
3.4 Fitting in position ........................................................................................ 13
3.5 Removing the controller module .............................................................. 14
4 Electrical connection 15
4.1 Installation notes ........................................................................................ 15
4.2 Electrical isolation ...................................................................................... 16
4.3 Connection diagrams ................................................................................. 17
4.3.1 Type 703041 ................................................................................................. 17
4.3.2 Type 703042/43/44 ...................................................................................... 20
4.3.3 Termination resistor for the RS422/485 serial interface ............................... 24
4.3.4 Connection of the PROFIBUS-DP connector .............................................. 24
Contents
5 Operation 25
5.1 Displays and controls ................................................................................ 25
5.2 Level concept ............................................................................................. 26
5.3 Level inhibit ................................................................................................. 27
5.4 Entries and operator prompting ............................................................... 28
5.5 Fixed-setpoint controller (ex-factory) ....................................................... 29
5.6 Program controller ..................................................................................... 30
5.6.1 Entering programs ........................................................................................ 30
5.6.2 Operation ..................................................................................................... 32
5.6.3 Shifting the program profile .......................................................................... 33
6 Operator level 35
7 Parameter level 37
8 Configuration 39
8.1 Analog inputs “InP” .................................................................................... 41
8.1.1 Customized fine tuning ................................................................................ 43
8.2 Controller “Cntr” ........................................................................................ 45
8.3 Generator “Pro” .......................................................................................... 47
8.4 Limit comparators “LC” ............................................................................. 50
8.5 Outputs “OutP” ........................................................................................... 54
8.6 Binary functions “binF” .............................................................................. 56
8.7 Display “diSP” ............................................................................................. 59
8.8 Timer “tFct” ................................................................................................ 61
8.9 Interfaces “IntF” ......................................................................................... 62
9 Tuning (optimization) 63
9.1 Autotuning (self-optimization) ................................................................... 63
9.2 Check of the tuning .................................................................................... 66
Contents
10 Extra codes 67
10.1 Math and logic module .............................................................................. 67
10.2 Difference, humidity or ratio controller .................................................... 67
11 Retrofitting of modules 69
12 Appendix 71
12.1 Technical data ............................................................................................. 71
12.2 Alarm messages ......................................................................................... 74
13 Index 75
Contents
1 Introduction
1.1 Description
The controller series consists of four freely programmable instruments in different DIN
formats for controlling temperature, pressure and other process variables.
As a temperature controller TR1 according to EN 14597 the devices are used in heat-
generating plants to control the temperature of liquids or gases (mode of action: 1B).
The high-contrast, multicolor LCD display for process value, setpoint and operator
prompting contains two four-digit 7-segment displays, two single-character 16-
segment displays, display of the active setpoints, six status indicators, and displays
for the unit, ramp function and manual operation.
Just four keys on the front panel are needed for operation, parameterization and
configuration. The instruments can be used as 2-state, 3-state, modulating or
continuous controllers. The controller software includes a program or ramp function,
parameter set changeover, two autotuning (self-optimization) procedures, a math and
logic module, as well as 4 limit comparators.
Linearizations for the usual transducers are stored, and a customer-specific
linearization table can be programmed.
A setup program is available for user-friendly configuration from a PC.
An RS422/485 or a Profibus-DP interface can be used to integrate the instrument into
a data network.
The electrical connection is made at the back of the instrument, via screw terminals.
Type 703042/43/44
Analog input 2 relays (changeover)
2 binary inputs 2 logic outputs
Supply voltage
17 V / 20 mA
for 2-wire
transmitter
Option 1
Option 2
Option 3
Type 703041 (48mm x 48mm)

Analog input 2 relays (make)
Binary input or Logic output
Binary input or Logic output
Option 1
Option 2
1. For more detailed explanation, see EN 14597
7
1 Introduction
1.2 Typographical conventions
Warning signs
V Danger This symbol is used when there may be danger to
personnel if the instructions are ignored or not followed
correctly!
* Caution This symbol is used when there may be damage to

equipment or data if the instructions are ignored or not
followed correctly!
E Caution This symbol is used where special care is required when

handling components liable to damage through
electrostatic discharge.
Note signs
H Note This symbol is used when your special attention is drawn
to a remark.
v Reference This symbol refers to further information in other operating

instructions, chapters or sections.
H Action This symbol indicates that an action to be performed is

instruction described.
The individual steps are marked by this asterisk, e.g.
h Press X
Representation Menu items Texts from the setup program are shown in italics, for
example: edit program.
Blinking
IIIIIIIIIIIIIIIII
display
IIIII
IIIII
IIIIIIII IIIIIIII
8
2 Identifying the instrument version
2.1 Type designation
Basic type
703041 JUMO dTRON 316, format 48mm x 48mm
incl. 1 analog input, 2 relay outputs and 2 binary inputs or 2 logic outputs
703042 JUMO dTRON 308, format 48mm x 96mm (portrait format)
incl. 1 analog and 2 binary inputs, 2 relays and 2 logic outputs
703043 JUMO dTRON 308, format 96mm x 48mm (landscape format)
703044 JUMO dTRON 304, format 96mm x 96mm
Basic type extensions

1 Basic type 1
Version
8 standard, with factory settings
9 programming to customer specification
logic outputs (2 are available as standard)
1 0 / 12V
2 0 / 18V
Type 703042/43/44 Type 703041 (no option 3)

1. 2. 3. Option slot Max. number Max. number Option 1 Option 2
0 0 0 not used X X
1 1 1 analog input 2 (universal) 1 1 X X
2 2 2 relay (changeover) 2 1 X -
3 3 3 2 relays (make contact) 2 1 X -
4 4 4 analog output 2 2 X X
5 5 5 2 binary inputs 2 1 X X
6 6 6 solid-state relay 1A 2 2 X X
7 7 7 RS422/485 interface 1 1 X X
8 8 8 Profibus-DP interface 1 1 X X
X = available in this option slot, - = not available in this option slot
Supply
2 3 110 — 240V AC -15/+10%, 48 — 63Hz
2 5 20 — 30V AC/DC, 48 — 63Hz
Extra codes
0 0 0 none
2 1 4 math and logic module
2 1 7 ratio controller (requirement: 2 analog inputs)
2 1 8 difference controller (requirement: 2 analog inputs)
2 1 9 humidity controller (requirement: 2 analog inputs)
Approvals
0 0 0 none
0 5 6 DIN EN 14597
dTRON 304 with GL approval on request
/ 1 – – / ,
703041 / 1 8 1 – 1 4 0 – 2 3 / 0 0 0 ,
9
2 Identifying the instrument version
2.2 Scope of delivery
- 1 controller
- 1 seal
- mounting brackets
- Operating Manual B70.3041.0 in DIN A6 format
1 CD with demo software and PDF documents in DIN A4 format (operating manual
and further documentation) can be ordered separately.
The individual documents and programs are available for dowload from www.jumo.net
(the software can be enabled for a charge.)
2.3 Accessories
PC interface PC interface with TTL/RS232 converter and adapter (socket connector) for setup
program
Sales No. 70/00350260
USB interface PC interface with USB/TTL converter, adapter (socket conector) and adapter (pins)
Sales No. 70/00456352
Setup Setup program with program editor and Startup

program Sales No. 70/00445443
Hardware requirements:
- PC Pentium 100 or compatible
- 128 MB RAM, 30 MB free fixed disc memory
- CD ROM drive
- free serial or USB interface
Software requirements:
Microsoft1 Windows 98/NT4.0/ME/2000/XP
1. Microsoft is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation
10
3 Mounting
3.1 Mounting site and climatic conditions
The conditions on the mounting site must meet the requirements specified in the
technical data. The ambient temperature on the mounting site can be from 0 to 55 °C,
with a relative humidity of not more than 90 %.
3.2 Dimensions
3.2.1 Type 703044
Setup plug
Panel cut-out
11
3 Mounting
3.2.2 Type 703042/43
Setup plug
Panel cut-out
3.2.3 Type 703041
Setup plug
Panel cut-out
12
3 Mounting
3.3 Side-by-side mounting
Minimum spacing of panel cut-outs
Type horizontal vertical
without setup plug:
703041 (48mm x 48mm) 11mm 30mm
703042 (portrait format: 48mm x 96mm)) 11mm 30mm
703043 (landscape format: 96mm x 48mm) 30mm 11mm
703044 (96mm x 96mm) 11mm 30mm
with setup plug (see arrow):
703041 (48mm x 48mm) 11mm 65mm
703042 (portrait format: 48mm x 96mm)) 11mm 65mm
703043 (landscape format: 96mm x 48mm) 65mm 11mm
703044 (96mm x 96mm) 11mm 65mm
3.4 Fitting in position
Type 703042/43/44 h Fit the seal that is supplied onto the

instrument body.
h Insert the controller from the front into
the panel cut-out.
h From behind the panel, slide the
mounting brackets into the guides on
the sides of the housing.
The flat faces of the mounting brackets
must lie against the housing.
h Push the mounting brackets up to the
back of the panel, and tighten them
evenly with a screwdriver.
Type 703041 h Fit the seal that is supplied onto the

instrument body.
h Insert the controller from the front into
the panel cut-out.
h From the back of the panel, push the
mounting frame onto the instrument
body and press it against the back of
the panel, compressing the springs,
until the latches snap into the notches
provided and it is firmly fixed in position.
Care of the front The front panel can be cleaned with normal commercial washing, rinsing and cleaning
panel agents. It has a limited resistance to organic solvents (e.g. methylated spirits, white
spirit, P1, xylol etc.). Do not use high-pressure cleaning equipment.
13
3 Mounting
3.5 Removing the controller module
The controller module can be removed from its housing for servicing.
h Press together the knurled areas
(top and bottom, or left and right for
landscape format) and pull out the
controller module.
H When inserting the controller module, make sure that the latches (below the
knurled areas) snap into place.
14
4 Electrical connection
4.1 Installation notes
- The choice of cable, the installation and the electrical connection must conform to
the requirements of VDE 0100 “Regulations on the Installation of Power Circuits
with Nominal Voltages below 1000 V” or the appropriate local regulations.
- The electrical connection must only be carried out by qualified personnel.
- The instrument shall be operated by mains protected with a branch circuitry
overcurrent protection device not more than 20 Amps.
For servicing/repairing a Disconnecting Device shall be provided to disconnect all
conductors.
- The load circuit must be fused for the maximum relay current, in order to prevent
the output relay contacts becoming welded in the event of a short circuit.
- Electromagnetic compatibility conforms to the standards and regulations cited in
the technical data.
- Run input, output and supply cables separately and not parallel to one another.
- Sensor and interface cables should be shielded cables with twisted conductors.
Do not run them close to current-carrying components or cables. Ground the
shielding on one side.
- Do not connect any additional loads to the supply terminals of the instrument.
- The instrument is not suitable for use in areas with an explosion hazard (Ex areas).
- In addition to faulty installation, incorrect settings on the controller (setpoint, data
of the parameter and configuration levels, internal alterations) can also interfere
with the correct operation of dependent processes, or even cause damage. Safety
devices should always be provided that are independent of the controller (such as
overpressure valves or temperature limiters/monitors) and only capable of adjust-
ment by specialist personnel. Please observe the relevant safety regulations for
such matters. Since adaptation (self-optimization) can not be expected to handle
all possible control loops, an unstable parameterization is theoretically possible.
The stability of the actual value that is produced should therefore be checked.
The electrical connection must only be
V carried out by specialist personnel.
H The instrument version can be

identified by the type code.
Conductor cross-sections and core-end ferrules for installation

Minimum Maximum Min. length of
cross-section cross-section core-end ferrule
Without core-end ferrule 0.34mm2 2.5mm2 10mm
(stripped)
Core-end ferrule, no lip 0.25mm2 2.5mm2 10mm
Core-end ferrule, lip up to 1.5mm2 0.25mm2 1.5mm2 10mm
Core-end ferrule, lip above 1.5mm2 1.5mm2 2.5mm2 12mm
Twin ferrule with lip 0.25mm2 1.5mm2 12mm
15
4.2 Electrical isolation
3800 V AC
» » »
Input 1 Relay outputs
30 V AC
50 V DC 3800 V AC
Input 2
» 30 V AC
Solid-state relay outputs
50 V DC
Analog outputs
Logic outputs
30 V AC
50 V DC
»
Supply voltage for

Binary inputs
2-wire transmitter
Setup
interface
30 V AC
50 V DC
»
RS422/485
PROFIBUS-DP
» 3800 V AC
Supply voltage
16
1 2 3 Supply and outputs - terminal strip 3
L1 L1
L1(L+) L+
L+
1 1 110—240V AC 20—30V AC/DC
N
N(L-) N L-
Supply
2 2 L-
3 3 3 3
4.3.1 Type 703041
4 4 P
4 4 230V/3A Binary output 1 (Out1)
5 5 S
5
6 6 6 6
Relays
4.3 Connection diagrams
7 7 P
7 7 230V/3A Binary output 2 (Out2)
8 8 S
8 8
Outputs - terminal strip 2
1
2
3
4
6 Out3 (+) Binary output 3 Logic output level 12V or 18V
Logic
(see type code)
7 Out4 (+) Binary output 4 As an alternative to binary inputs 1 and 2
8 GND (-) (configurable)!
17
Type 703041 continued
18
Outputs and interfaces - terminal strip 1 (option board)
Analog Relay 2 relays Solid-state PROFIBUS RS422 RS485

output (changeover) (n.o. make) relay
1 Ö Out5 VP (+5 V) RxD +
2 + P RxD/TxD-P (B) RxD -

U x / Ix
3 - S Out8 RxD/TxD-N (A) TxD + RxD/TxD +
Option 1
Analog output 5 Binary output 5 Binary output 5+8 Binary output 5 DGND TxD - RxD/TxD -
4 (Out5) (Out5) (Out5+Out8) (Out5)
5 VP (+5 V) RxD +
6 + (not possible!) (not possible!) RxD/TxD-P (B) RxD -
U x / Ix
7 - RxD/TxD-N (A) TxD + RxD/TxD +
Option 2
8 Analog output 6 Binary output 6 DGND TxD - RxD/TxD -

(Out6) (Out6)
Note numbering of outputs.

H
v Chapter 8.5 “Outputs “OutP””
Type 703041 continued
Analog input 1 and binary inputs 1+2 - terminal strip 2

Resistance Resistance Resistance Resistance Thermo- Current Voltage Voltage
thermometer thermometer thermometer transmitter couple 0(2)—10V 0—1V
1 +
E Ux
2 + - +
S
- +
Ux
-
3
Analog 1
A Ix - / Ix~
4 -
6 bin1 Binary input 1 As an alternative to binary outputs 3 and 4
Logic
(configurable)!
7 bin2 Binary input 2
8 GND
Analog input 2 and binary inputs 3...6 - terminal strip 1 (option boards)
19
20
1 2 3 Supply and outputs - terminal strip 3
L1 L1
L1(L+) L+
L+
1 1 N 110—240V AC 20—30V AC/DC
N(L+) N L-
Supply
L-
2 2
3 3
4 4
4 4
5 5
6 6
4.3.2 Type 703042/43/44
5 6
8 8 + Supply for 2-wire transmitter
6 U= 17V/20mA
U=
7 (off-load voltage approx. 25V)
9 9 -
7 8
8 9
11 11 Ö
10
12 12 P 230V/3A Binary output 1 (Out1)
13 13 S
Relays
10 15 15 Ö
11 16 16 P 230V/3A Binary output 2 (Out2)
12 17 17 S
Outputs - terminal strip 2
6
7
8 Out3 (+) Binary output 3 Logic output level 12V or 18V
Logic
Out4 (+) Binary output 4 (see type code)
9
10 GND (-)
Type 703042/43/44 continued
Outputs and interfaces - terminal strip 1 (option boards)
Analog Relay 2 relays Solid-state PROFIBUS RS422 RS485

output (changeover) (n.o. make) relay

U x / Ix
Option 1

U x / Ix
Option 2

U x / Ix
Option 3
Note numbering of outputs.

H
21
22
Analog input 1 and binary inputs 1+2 - terminal strip 2
Analog input 2 and binary inputs 3...8 - terminal strip 1 (option boards)
23
4.3.3 Termination resistor for the RS422/485 serial interface
For fault-free operation of several devices in a line structure, their internal termination
resistors must be activated at the start and end.
h Pull plug-in module out towards the front by pressing on the knurled areas
h Using a ballpoint pen, press all the white switches into the same direction
Bus termination h Push all 5 switches down

resistor active:
No bus termination h Push all 5 switches up

(ex-factory)
h Re-insert the module back into the housing
Check h Press the P + I keys
To the right of the green “VErS” display, “ON” is shown for active and “OFF“ for inac-
tive termination resistors.
4.3.4 Connection of the PROFIBUS-DP connector
Mounting the h Identify option slot with the PROFIBUS-DP interface by means of the
adapter type code (in the case of pre-configured devices)
In this example, the PROFIBUS-DP

interface is in option slot 1
H To fit the D-SUB adapter, open the housing

of the adapter; otherwise the terminal
screws are hided by the adapter.
Assignment of
the 9-pole Pin: Signal Designation
D-SUB socket
1: VP Supply voltage positive
2: RxD/TxD-P Receive/Transmit data positive
3: RxD/TxD-N Receive/Transmit data negative
4: DGND Ground
24
5 Operation
5.1 Displays and controls
(1)
(2) (6)
(3)
(5)
(4) PGM EXIT
(1) 7-segment display (factory setting: process value)

four-digit, red, decimal place is configurable
(automatic adjustment on display overflow)
(2) Active setpoint (factory setting: SP1)
SP1, SP2, SP3, SP4 (SP=setpoint); green;
(3) 7-segment display (factory setting: setpoint)
four-digit, green; decimal place is configurable;
also used for operator prompting (display of parameter and level symbols)
(4) Keys
(5) Indication
yellow, for
- switch status of binary outputs 1—6 (display lights up = on)
- ramp/program function is active
- manual operation is active
(6) 16-segment display for the unit °C/°F and text
two-digit, green; configurable; symbols for h, min, %
In addition, the current segment number (program), the parameter set or any
two-place letter/number combination can be displayed through the setup
program.
The displays are configurable.
v Chapter 8.7 “Display “diSP””
25
5 Operation
5.2 Level concept
The parameters for making the settings on the instrument are arranged at different
levels.
H Time-out
If no key is pressed for 180sec, the instrument returns to normal display.
v Chapter 6 “Operator level”
v Chapter 7 “Parameter level”
v Chapter 8 “Configuration”
v Setup/Display - Operation/Time-out
User data “USEr” The setup program can be used to display and edit up to 8 freely chosen parameters
at this level.
v Setup / Configuration level / Display - Operation / User data
The user can assign a symbol for the representation of each parameter. Otherwise the
default symbol will be used. Permissible symbols are the letters and numbers that can
be presented by a 7-segment display.
26
5 Operation
5.3 Level inhibit
The access to the individual levels can be prevented.
Code Operator level, Parameter level Configuration level
user level,
program editor
0 enabled enabled enabled
1 enabled enabled inhibited
2 enabled inhibited inhibited
3 inhibited inhibited inhibited
h Go to code entry with P and D (simultaneously for >5sec).
h Alter code with P (display blinks!)
h Enter code with I and D. Ex-factory: all levels enabled.
h Return to normal display with X or automatically after approx. 180sec
The parameter and configuration levels can also be inhibited via the binary function.
v Chapter 8.6 “Binary functions “binF””
27
5 Operation
5.4 Entries and operator prompting
Entering values When entries are made within the levels, the parameter symbol is shown in the lower
display.
Select parameter Alter parameter
P
I/D I
IIIIIIIIIIIIIIIII
IIIII
IIIII
IIIIIIII IIIIIIII
D
h Select parameter with I or D

h Change to entry mode with P (lower display blinks!)
h Alter value with I and D
The value alters dynamically with the duration of the key stroke.
h Accept the setting with P, or automatically after 2sec
or
h Cancel entry with X.
The value is not accepted.
Entering times When entering times (e.g. timer time), the time unit is shown in addition.
Select parameter Alter parameter
P
I/D I
IIIIIIIIIIIIIIIII
IIIII
IIIII
IIIIIIII IIIIIIII
D
The highest time unit of the display is shown for the unit.
If, for instance, “h” is shown for the hour, then the time format for the value is hh:mm.
h Select parameter with I or D
h Change over to the entry mode using P (lower display blinks!)
h Alter value with I and D
The value alters dynamically with the duration of the key stroke.
h Accept the setting with P or automatically after 2sec
or
h Cancel entry with X.
The value is not accepted.
28
5 Operation
5.5 Fixed-setpoint controller (ex-factory)
Normal display Manual mode
Altering the In normal display:

setpoint
h Alter the present setpoint with I and D
(the value is accepted automatically)
Manual mode In manual mode, the controller output can be altered by hand.
h Change to manual mode with X (> 2 sec)
The output appears in the lower display. The hand symbol and the unit “%” light up in
addition.
h Alter the output with I and D
In the case of a modulating controller, the actuator is opened or closed using the keys.
The various levels can be accessed from the manual mode.
h Finish manual mode with X (>2 sec)
The output entry on a changeover is configurable. The manual mode can be inhibited.
v Chapter 8.2 “Controller “Cntr””
Additional operating options for the fixed-setpoint controller can be implemented via
the binary functions.
On overrange/underrange and probe break, the controller automatically changes over
to manual mode.
29
5 Operation
5.6 Program controller
Condition as The instrument must be configured as a program controller/generator. Furthermore, a

delivered program must be entered beforehand, to operate the instrument as a program
controller/generator.
5.6.1 Entering programs
Function A setpoint profile can be implemented with a maximum of 8 program segments.
Entry on the The instrument must be configured as a program controller/generator.

instrument
v Chapter 8.3 “Generator “Pro”” (Function)
Configurable time base: mm:ss, hh:mm und dd:hh (s=seconds, m=minutes, h=hours,
d=days).
v Chapter 8.3 “Generator “Pro”” (unit)
The settings for segment setpoints (SPP1 — SPP8) and segment times (tP1 — tP8)
are made in the program editor.
30
5 Operation
The program segments (up to eight) are defined by the segment setpoint and the seg-
ment time.
P P
I
IIIIIIIIIIIIIIIII
IIIII
IIIII
IIIIIIII IIIIIIII
D
P
I
IIIIIIIIIIIIIIIII
IIIII
IIIII
IIIIIIII IIIIIIII
D
P
I
IIIIIIIIIIIIIIIII
IIIII
IIIII
IIIIIIII IIIIIIII
D
P
I
IIIIIIIIIIIIIIIII
IIIII
IIIII
IIIIIIII IIIIIIII
D
Entry through The setup program (accessory) features a user-friendly program editor, with a
setup program graphical presentation of the program profile.
Additional - Start at the process value

functions via the - Response to over/underrange
setup program
- Repeat program
- Setpoint input (ramp/step)
- Process is controlled to the most recent setpoint
- Delay time
- Program editor/management with graphical preview
- Up to four control contacts can be programmed segment by segment
- Parameter sets can be assigned segment by segment
31
5 Operation
5.6.2 Operation
Normal display Program is running
Altering the setpoint Program pause
Normal display No program run in normal display, the controller controls to the selected setpoint.
Altering the From normal display:

setpoint h Change to setpoint input with D
h Alter the present setpoint with I and D
(the value is accepted automatically)
Starting the From normal display:

program h Start program with I
(the ramp symbol lights up!)
A delay time can be configured through the setup program. When the delay time has
elapsed, “Strt ” is shown in the lower display, and then the program is processed.
Canceling the When the program is running:

program h Cancel program with I
Pausing the When the program is running:

program
h Pause program with X (>2 sec)
(the lower display blinks!)
h Continue with X (>2 sec)
The program is canceled in the event of a power failure.

Additional program control functions via binary functions.
32
5 Operation
5.6.3 Shifting the program profile
The function “External setpoint with correction” can be used to shift the program
profile upwards or downwards (configurable through the setup program only).
The external setpoint is defined via an analog signal.

33
5 Operation
34
6 Operator level
Access
The four setpoints are displayed and edited here, and additional process variables are
shown in accordance with the configuration.
Symbol Meaning
S P 1 Setpoint 1 (editable)
S Pr Ramp setpoint (only if configured)
InP1 Measurement of analog input 1
InP2 Measurement of analog input 2 (only if available)
F1 Calculated result of math formula 1
(and for difference, ratio and humidity controller)
F2 Calculated result of math formula 2 (only if available)
y Controller output
trun Program run time (only with program controller/generator)
trES Residual program time (only with program controller/generator)
t1 Timer run time 1 (only if configured)
t2 Timer run time 2 (only if configured)
35
6 Operator level
Definition of the program times
w
(1) (2)
(3) (4)
tx t
(1) Program run time (3) Segment run time
(2) Residual program time (4) Residual segment time
36
7 Parameter level
General Two parameter sets (PAr1 and PAr2) can be stored.
Access
The level can be inhibited.
Applications - Parameter set switching via binary function

- Allocating parameter sets to program segments (only through the setup program)
v Program editor/Program
Example Setting a 2-state controller with PI action:

Pb1=12°C (proportional band)
rt=160sec (reset time; I component)
dt=0sec (derivative time, D component)
37
7 Parameter level
PArA ➔ PAr1 ( PAr2)
Display Value range Factory Description
setting
Proportional PB 1 0…9999 0 Size of the proportional band
band
Pb 2 0…9999 0 The gain of the controller decreases with
increasing proportional band.
With Pb 1,2 = 0 the controller structure is
ineffective (limit comparator response).
Continuous controllers: Pb1,2 must be >0.
Derivative time dt 0…9999 s 80 s Influences the differential component of
the controller output signal.
The effect of the D component increases
with increasing derivative time.
Reset time rt 0…9999 s 350 s Influences the integral component of the
controller output signal.
The effect of the I component decreases
with increasing reset time.
Cycle time CY1 0.0…999.9s 20 s With a switched output, the cycle time
should be chosen so that a) the pulsed
CY2 0.0…999.9 s 20 s
energy flow to the process does not cause
any impermissible PV fluctuations and b)
the switching elements are not overloaded.
Contact db 0.0…999.9 0 The spacing between the two control
spacing contacts for 3-state or modulating
(dead band) controllers.
Switching HyS1 0.0…999.9 1 Hysteresis for switching controllers
differential with Pb1,2 = 0.
HyS2 0.0…999.9 1
Actuator time tt 5…3000 s 60 s Actuator time range used by the control

valve for modulating controllers.
Working point Y0 -100…+100% 0% Output for P and PD controllers
(when x = w then y = Y0).
Output limiting Y1 0…100% 100% Maximum output limiting.
Y2 -100…+100 % -100% Minimum output limiting.
(only effective with PB>0!)
The parameters Pb2, Cy2, HyS2 refer to the second controller output for a 3-state
controller.
The decimal place of some parameters depends on the decimal place setting in the
displays.
H The parameter display on the instrument depends on the controller type

selected.
38
8 Configuration
General The following applies to the representation of parameters and functions at the
configuration level:
The parameter is not displayed or can not be selected if
- the equipment level does not permit the function assigned to the parameter.
Example: Analog output 2 can not be configured if
analog output 2 is not implemented in the instrument.
H Some parameters can only be programmed through the setup program. These
are marked in the symbol column with “(setup)”.
The symbol (appears in the display) that corresponds to the menu item is
shown in the chapter headings (e.g. 8.1 Analog inputs “InP”).
Access
H Levels can be inhibited.

v Chapter 5.3 “Level inhibit”
39
8 Configuration
Analog selector With some parameters, you can choose from a series of analog values. To provide you
with an overview, this selection is listed below.
0 no function 21 program run time in sec
1 analog input 1 22 residual program time in sec
2 analog input 2 23 segment run time in sec
3 process value 24 residual segment time in sec
4 present setpoint 25 timer run time for timer 1 in sec
5 ramp end value 26 timer run time for timer 2 in sec
6 program setpoint 27 residual run time for timer 1 in sec
7 math 1 28 residual run time for timer 2 in sec
8 math 2 29 present segment end value
9 setpoint 1 30 analog marker (Profibus)
10 setpoint 2 31 reserved
13 controller output level 32 reserved
14 controller output 1 33 reserved
15 controller output 2
Definition of the program times
w
(1) (2)
(3) (4)
tx t
(1) Program run time (3) Segment run time
(2) Residual program time (4) Residual segment time
40
8 Configuration
8.1 Analog inputs “InP”
Configuration InP: Analog input

Analog inputs Depending on the instrument version, up to two analog inputs are available.
Controller
Generator
Limit comparators
Outputs
Binary functions
H The approval according to DIN EN 14597 requires the usage of probes, also
approved to DIN EN 14597, in the specified temperature ranges.
Display v see data sheets T90.1006 and T90.2006
Timer
Interfaces
Analog input 1 InP1 ➔

Symbol Value/selection Description
Sensor type SEnS 0 no function
1 Resistance thermometer in 3-wire circuit
4 Thermocouple
5 Resistance transmitter
6 Heater current 0—50mA AC (analog input 2 only)
7 0 — 20mA
8 4 — 20mA
9 0 — 10V
10 2 — 10V
11 0 — 1V
factory-set on analog input 2: no function

Linearization L in 0 Linear
1 Pt100
2 Pt500
3 Pt1000
4 KTY11-6
5 W5Re_W26Re C
6 W3Re_W25Re D
7 NiCr-Con E
8 Cu-Con T
9 Fe-Con J
10 Cu-Con U
11 Fe-Con L
12 NiCr-Ni K
13 Pt10Rh-Pt S
14 Pt13Rh-Pt R
15 Pt30Rh-Pt6Rh B
16 NiCrSi-NiSi N
17 W3Re_W26Re
18 customized linearization
For customized linearization, a maximum of 10 knee-points

can be implemented, or a 5th order polynomial function
programmed (only through the setup program).
For the linearization “KTY11-6”, the resistance is 2kΩ at 25°C

(only through the setup program).
Factory settings are shown bold.
41
8 Configuration
Measurement offset OFFS -1999… 0… +9999 The measurement offset is used to correct a measured value
by a certain amount upwards or downwards.
Examples:
Measured Displayed
value offset value
294.7 +0.3 295.0

295.3 - 0.3 295.0
A
The controller uses the corrected value (= displayed
value) for its calculation. This value is not the same as
the actually measured value. If incorrectly applied, this
can result in impermissible values of the control
variable.
Special case: 2-wire circuit
If the input is connected to a resistance thermometer in 2-wire
circuit, then the lead resistance is set in ohms here.
Display start SCL -1999…0…+9999 On transducers with standard signal and on potentiometers, a
display value is assigned to the physical signal.
Display end SCH -1999…100…+9999
Example: 0 — 20mA Ⳏ 0 — 1500°C.
The range of the physical signal can be 20 % wider or

narrower without generating an out-of-range signal.
Filter time constant dF 0…0.6…100 s To adjust the digital input filter (0sec = filter off).
63% of the alterations are acquired after 2x filter time constant
at a signal step change.
When the filter time constant is large:
- high damping of disturbance signals
- slow reaction of the process value display
to process value changes
- low limit-frequency (2nd order low-pass filter)
Fine tuning FtS1 -1999… 0…+9999 v See “Customized fine tuning” on Page 43.
start value
A
If these values are altered by mistake, then this setting
Fine tuning FtE1 -1999…1…+9999 has to be canceled, using the procedure described
end value under “Customized fine tuning”.
These values can not be accepted by another
instrument.
Heater current HEAt 0 No function

monitoring (output) 1…10 Binary output 1—10 (controller output)
The heater current is measured via a current transformer with
standard signal output and can be monitored by linking analog
output 2 to limit comparator 1.
The input signal range is 0 — 50mA AC (see probe type:
“Heater current”) and must be scaled correspondingly (display
start/end).
The heater current is measured when the heating contact is
closed. For this purpose, the binary output which controls the
heating contact (not the binary output for the alarm) has to be
selected here.
KTY correction value (setup) 0…2000…4000 Ω Resistance at 25°C/77°F for linearization “KTY 11-6”
at 25°C
1. Both parameters can be activated/deactivated with setup program.
42
8 Configuration
Analog inputs (general)I n1 2 ➔

Temperature unit Unit 0 deg. Celsius
1 deg. Fahrenheit
Unit for temperature values

Sampling cycle time CycL 0 50msec
1 90msec
2 150msec
3 250msec
Supply frequency (setup) 50Hz Adaptation of the conversion time of the input circuitry to the
60Hz supply frequency
8.1.1 Customized fine tuning
Activate FtS and Ex-factory, both parameters are not visible at the device and have to be activated first.
FtE with setup
h Connect the device to the PC and start the setup program
program
h Establisch a connection to the device
h Make a double click on Undocumented parameters
h Click on check box at Parameter 17 (a tick shall appear)

h Save the setup file and execute Data transfer to device
Now the parameters FtS and FtE are visible in the Configuration level.
Principle The customised fine tuning (= fine adjustment) is used to correct the values displayed
by the device. This may be necessary, for example, after a system validation, if the
displayed values no longer coincide with the actual values at the point where the
measurement is taken.
Using a reference measuring instrument, two measured values are determined which
should be as far apart as possible (start value, end value). Ensure that the measuring
conditions are stable. Enter the reference value found as the start value (FtS) or end
value (FtE) on the device to be adjusted.
43
8 Configuration
A Caution:
If start value and/or end value deviate from the factory-set values (FtS=0 and FtE=1), a
fine adjustment has already been done before. In this case the fine adjustment has to
be reset (see below).
Repeating fine adjustment without doing a reset before means that an already adju-
sted characteristic curve is used. This leads to wrong values.
Example The temperature inside an oven is measured with a resistance thermometer and
displayed on a device. The reading on the device deviates from the actual temperature
as a result of the sensor temperature drifting. At 20°C the device reads 15°C, at 80°C
it shows 70°C (exaggerated example for better understanding).
Sensor
15°C / 70°C Display on the device
20°C / 80°C
Actual temperature at
20°C / 80°C reference measuring instrument
(e. g. thermometer)
Oven
Procedure h Determine lower measurement value (as low as possible and constant) with a refe-
rence measuring instrument;
Example: Oven temperature 20°C (= room temperature)
h Set start value at the device to this lower measurement value;
Example: Set start value (FtS) to 20
h Increase temperature and determine higher measurement value (as high as posible
and constant) with reference measuring instrument;
Example: Increase oven temperature to 80°C
h Set end value at the device to this higher measurement value;
Example: Set end value (FtE) to 80
Characteristic The following diagram shows the changes in the characteristic curve caused by the
curve fine adjustment (point of intersection with the x axis as well as ascent)
Display
Special case: Offset
(Instrument)
80
If the deviation between measured value
and displayed value at the low and high
70
measuring point is identical, an offset cor-
rection is sufficient (ascent remains
After fine unchanged). In this case, fine adjustment
adjustment
is not required.
Before fine
adjustment v Chapter 8.1 “Analog inputs “InP””
Parameter OFFS
20
15
Measurement
(Reference)
20 80
Reset In order to reset fine adjustment, the same value hast to be given to start value (FtS)
fine adjustment and end value (FtE) (e. g. set both parameters to 0). This automatically sets the start
value to 0 and the end value to 1 (factory setting).
44
8 Configuration
8.2 Controller “Cntr”
Configuration Cntr: Controller

Analog inputs The following are set here: controller type, input variables of the controller, the setpoint
Controller limits, conditions for manual mode and the presettings for autotuning (self-
Generator optimization).
Limit comparators
Outputs
Binary functions
Display
Timer
Interfaces

Configuration
Controller type CtyP 0 no function
1 2-state controller
2 3-state controller
3 Modulating controller
4 Continuous controller
Control action CAct 0 Direct
1 Inverse
inverse:
The controller output Y is > 0 when the process value is
smaller than the setpoint (e. g. heating).
direct:
The controller output Y is > 0 when the process value is larger
than the setpoint (e. g. cooling).
Inhibit manual mode InHA 0 enabled
1 inhibited
If the manual mode is inhibited, changing over to “manual” is

not possible from the keys or via the binary input.
Manual output HAnd -100…101 Defines the controller output level after changing over to
manual mode.
101 = last output
For modulating controller:
101 = actuator is stationary;
0 = actuator closes; 100 = actuator opens
Range output rOut -100…0…101 Output on over/underrange.
101 = last output
For modulating controller:
101 = actuator is stationary;
0 = actuator closes; 100 = actuator opens
Setpoint low S PL -1999…+9999 Setpoint limiting prevents the input of values outside the
defined range.
Setpoint high S PH -1999…+9999
H The setpoint limits are not effective with setpoint input
via the interface.
The correction value is limited for external setpoint with
correction.
45
8 Configuration

Inputs
Controller process CPr (analog selector) Defines the source for the process value of the control
value Analog inp. 1 channel.
External setpoint ESP (analog selector) Activates the external setpoint input and defines the source
switched off for the external setpoint.
External setpoint with correction:

External setpoint + setpoint 1 = present setpoint
The external setpoint is corrected up or down from the keypad
(setpoint 1). The display shows the present setpoint.
Output feedback FEEd (analog selector) Defines the source for output feedback for a modulating
switched off controller.
v See “Analog selector” on Page 40.
Autotuning
Method of tuning tyPt 0 Oscillation method
1 Step response method
v Chapter 9.1 “Autotuning (self-optimization)”
Inhibit tuning InHt 0 enabled
1 inhibited
If autotuning is inhibited, it can not be started via the keys or

the binary function.
Output of tuning 1 Ott1 0 Relay
1 Solid-state + logic
Output of tuning 2 Ott2 2 Continuous
The type of the physical output for the signal of the controller
outputs 1 and 2 has to be defined.
Controller standby S Ou t -100…0…+100% Initial output with step response
output
Step size StSI 10…30…100% Step size with step response
Analog selector 0 no function 21 program run time in sec

13 controller output level
46
8 Configuration
8.3 Generator “Pro”
Configuration Pro: (Program) Generator

Analog inputs The basic function of the instrument is defined here. The instrument can be operated
Controller as a fixed-setpoint controller with or without a ramp function, or warm-up ramp for
Generator hot-channel equipment, program controller or program generator.
Limit comparators
Outputs
Binary functions
Display
Timer
Interfaces

General
Function Fnct 0 Fixed-setpoint controller
1 Ramp function
2 Program controller
3 Program generator
4 Hot-channel controller
Ramp function:
A rising or a falling ramp function can be implemented. The
ramp end value is determined by the setpoint input and can be
altered from the I and D keys, just as for a fixed-setpoint
controller.
The ramp function can be paused or canceled via the binary

functions.
H The ramp function is interrupted on a probe break, or

for manual mode. The outputs react as for overrange/
underrange (configurable).
Program generator:
Is used, for instance, to output the setpoint profile via a
continuous output without a control function.
Settings for the program generator are not evaluated with
regard to the process value (e. g. start at process value,
continue, tolerance band).
47
8 Configuration

Unit of slope Unit Ramp function Program
0 °C/min mm:ss
1 °C/hour hh:mm
2 °C/day dd:hh
s=seconds; m=minutes; h=hours;d=days
Unit of ramp slope in °C per time unit, or format of segment

times for program controller/generator.
Ramp slope rAS L 0…9999 Value of slope for ramp function
Tolerance band toLP 0…999 0=off

For a program controller/generator and ramp function, the
process value can be monitored by applying a tolerance band
around the setpoint profile.
If the upper or lower limit is infringed, a tolerance limit signal is
generated, which is internally processed or produced via an
output.
Example:
Signal is produced
when process value is
20 °C larger or smaller
than
setpoint.
toLP=40
Processing the tolerance limit signal, see:

Program
Program start (setup) Program start Defines whether the program starts with the first program
start at the process setpoint or whether the present process value is accepted as
value the first program setpoint.
Range response (setup) Continue Defines the response to over/underrange
pause program
Response to (setup) No start Defines whether the program starts on connecting the supply
power-on automatic start voltage.
Program repeat (setup) none The “Cyclic” setting has the effect of continuously repeating
cyclic the program.
Setpoint input (setup) Ramp Setpoint ramp Setpoint step
Step w
A01 A02
Control to the (setup) inactive If active, the process is controlled to the most recent program
most recent setpoint active setpoint after the program has ended.
Delay time (setup) 0…9999 min Delays the program start by an adjustable time.
“Strt ” is shown in the lower display.

Basic status
Control contacts (setup) SK1 The four control contacts can be activated in the basic status
SK2 (when the program is not running).
SK3
SK4
48
8 Configuration
Hot-channel The warm-up ramp for hot-channel equipment is used, for example, for the gentle
controller operation of ceramic heater elements. Damage can be avoided by allowing moisture
to evaporate slowly from the hygroscopic heater elements during the warm-up phase
(t0— t2).
The present setpoint is accepted as the start value for the ramp at time t0. Within the
time period t0 — t1, the programmed ramp slope rASL is used to approach the hold
setpoint SPP2. Within this period, the ramp setpoint is increased linearly. This is
followed by the programmable dwell time tP2 (t1— t2), after which the process is
controlled to the present setpoint (factory setting: setpoint 1 (SP1)).
The hot-channel function, with the settings for the ramp function and the program, is
implemented through the setup program.
Relevant settings:
Setup/Generator/General
- Ramp slope rASL with time unit
- Tolerance band (optional)
Setup/Generator/Program
- Configure program start to “Start at process value”
- Define response after power-on; the warm-up ramp either starts automatically
when switching on the supply voltage, or by pressing the I key.
Setup/Parameter level/Controller parameters
- Output limiting for parameter sets 1 and 2 (optional)
Setup/Program editor/Program
- Set parameter set 2 for segment 1 (segment setpoint and time are not taken into
account)
- Configure segment 2 with segment setpoint (= hold setpoint SPP2), segment time
(= dwell time tP2) and parameter set 2
Setup/Display - Operation/ User data
- Relevant parameters can optionally be placed in the user data (operator level)
49
8 Configuration
8.4 Limit comparators “LC”
Configuration LC: Limit comparator

Analog inputs Limit comparators (threshold monitors, limit contacts) can be used to monitor an input
Controller variable (process value for the limit comparator) against a fixed limit or another
Generator variable (the setpoint for the limit comparator). When a limit is exceeded, a signal can
Limit comparators be output or an internal controller function initiated.
Outputs
Binary functions 4 limit comparators are available.
Display
Timer
Interfaces
Limit comparator Limit comparators can have different switching functions.

functions (lk) The hysteresis functions “asymmetrical, left” and “asymmetrical, right” can only be set
through the setup program. The “symmetrical” hysteresis function is used as
standard.
Hysteresis function
asymmetrical, left symmetrical asymmetrical, right
lk1
lk2
lk3
lk4
lk5
lk6
50
8 Configuration
In the case of the limit comparator functions lk7 and lk8, the measurement that is set
is monitored with respect to a fixed value AL.
Hysteresis function
asymmetrical, left symmetrical asymmetrical, right
lk7
lk8
Limit comparator 1 LC1 ➔

Function Fnct 0 no function
1 lk1
2 lk2
3 lk3
4 lk4
5 lk5
6 lk6
7 lk7
8 lk8
Limit value AL -1999…0…+9999 Limit value to be monitored

Limit range for lk1 and lk2: 0 — 9999
Switching differential HySt 0…1…9999 Switching differential
51
8 Configuration
Action/ AcrA 0 absolute/off
range response 1 relative/off
2 absolute/on
3 relative/on
Defines the switching action of the limit comparators and the

switch status for an overrange or underrange.
Action:
Defines the switching action of the limit comparators on a
setpoint change or power-on.
absolute:
At the time of alteration, the limit comparator acts according
to its function.
relative:
The limit comparator is in the OFF status.
An alteration of the limit value or the (limit comparator)
setpoint could cause the limit comparator to switch ON. Such
a reaction will be suppressed, and this condition is maintained
until the (limit comparator) process value has moved out of
the switch-on region (gray area).
Example:
Monitoring the (controller) process value x with function lk4
Setpoint alteration w1→w2
a) Initial condition
b) Condition at the time of the alteration

The limit comparator remains OFF, although the process value
is within the switch-on region.
c) Stabilized condition
The limit comparator again operates in accordance with its
function.
This function also prevents a limit comparator from being

triggered during the approach phase.
Switch-on delay t0n 0…9999 Delays the switch-on edge by a definable time period
Switch-off delay t0FF 0… 9999s Delays the switch-off edge by a definable time period
52
8 Configuration
Acknowledgement Acn L 0 no acknowledgement
1 acknowledgement; only with inactive limit comparator
2 acknowledgement; always possible
For settings with acknowledgement, the limit comparator is

latching, which means it remains ON, even when the switch-
on condition is no longer present.
The limit comparator must be reset via the D + X keys or
binary signal.
Pulse time tPuL 0… 9999s The limit comparator is automatically reset after an adjustable
time period.
Limit comparator PV LCPr (analog selector) see circuit diagrams
process value
Limit comparator SP LCSP (analog selector) see circuit diagrams (only with lk1—lk6)
present setpoint
Hysteresis function (setup) symmetrical see circuit diagrams
asymmetrical, left v Chapter 12.2 “Alarm messages”
asymmetrical, right

53
8 Configuration
8.5 Outputs “OutP”
Configuration OutP: Outputs

Analog inputs Configuration of the instrument outputs are subdivided into analog outputs (OutA;
Controller max. 2) and binary outputs (OutL; max. 9). Binary outputs are relay, solid-state relay
Generator and logic outputs. Display and numbering of the outputs depends on the assignment
Limit comparators of the option slots.
Outputs
Binary functions The switching states of the binary outputs 1—6 are shown in the display.
Display
Timer
Interfaces
Numbering of the Standard for all instrument versions:

outputs (Binary) output 1 (Out1) = relay
(Binary) output 2 (Out2) = relay
(Binary) output 3 (Out3) = logic output
(Binary) output 4 (Out4) = logic output
Extended numbering for the option slots:
Slot Plug-in board with Plug-in board with Plug-in board with
1 analog output 1 binary output 2 binary outputs
(relay or solid-state (2 relays)
relay)
Option 1 Output 5 (Out5) Output 5 (Out5) Output 5+8 (Out5/Out8)
Binary outputs 0utL

Binary output 1 0ut1 0 no function
1 Controller output 1 (ex-factory with Out1)
2 Controller output 2
... ... 5 Binary input 1
6 Binary input 2
Binary output 10 0ut0 7 Binary input 3
8 Binary input 4
9 Binary input 5
10 Binary input 6
11 Binary input 7
12 Binary input 8
13 Limit comparator 1
17 Control contact 1
21 Logic formula 1
22 Logic formula 2
23 Timer 1 active
24 Timer 2 active
25 Program active
26 Program end signal
27 Tolerance limit signal
28 Manual mode on/off
29 Binary marker
30 Any binary value from storage address (only through setup)
31 always active
54
8 Configuration
Analog outputs 0utA ➔ Output 5 0ut5 ➔
Output 6 0ut6 ➔
Output 7 0ut7 ➔
Function Fnct (analog selector) Function of the output
switched off
Type of signal S iGn Physical output signal
0 0 — 10V
1 2 — 10V
2 0 — 20mA
3 4 — 20mA
Range output r0u t 0…101% Signal on going above/below range
101 = last output signal
H If the output is a controller output, the controller

switches over to manual mode and produces the
output level defined in chapter “Controller Cntr”
under rOut.
Chapter 8.2 “Controller “Cntr””
Zero point 0Pnt -1999…0…+9999 A physical output signal is assigned to the value range of an
output variable.
End value End -1999…100…+9999 Ex-factory, the setting corresponds to an output level of
0 — 100% for controller outputs.
No changes of the ex-factory setting are required for
continous controllers with only one output.
H Setting for controller outputs for cooling

With 3-state controllers, the following settings must
be predefined:
zero: 0 / end value: -100
Example (function as a transducer):
An analog output (0 — 20mA) is to be used to put out the
process value (value range 150 to 500 °C), that means:
150 to 500°C Ⳏ 0 — 20mA; Zero point: 150 / End value: 500
Offset (setup) -1999…0…+9999 The offset is used to correct the output signal by a certain
amount upwards or downwards.
Examples:
Original Output
value Offset value
294.7 +0.3 295.0
295.3 - 0.3 295.0

55
8 Configuration
8.6 Binary functions “binF”
Configuration binF: Binary functions

Analog inputs Functions are assigned here to the binary signals of the binary inputs and limit
Controller comparators.
Generator
Limit comparators In addition, the functions for control contacts, tolerance limit signal and program end
Outputs signal are defined for program controllers/generators.
Binary functions In the case of a fixed-setpoint controller, functions can be assigned to the ramp end
Display signals.
Timer
Interfaces
Switching action
The functions are arranged in two groups:
Edge-triggered The binary function reacts to switch-on edges.

functions The following functions are edge-triggered:
- Start/stop of autotuning
- Acknowledge limit comparators
- Program start/cancel
- Start timer
- Segment change
State-triggered The binary function reacts to switch-on or switch-off states.

functions
- All remaining functions
56
8 Configuration

Binary input 1 b in1 0 no function
1 Start autotuning
... 2 Cancel autotuning
3 Change to manual mode
Binary input 8 b in8 4 Controller off (controller outputs are switched off)
5 Inhibit manual mode
Limit comparator 1 LC1 6 Hold ramp
7 Cancel ramp
... 8 Setpoint changeover
9 Parameter set switching
Limit comparator 4 LC4 10 Key inhibit
11 Level inhibit
Timer 1 tF1 12 Display “off” with key inhibit
13 Acknowledge limit comparators
Timer 2 tF2 14 Inhibit program start
15 Start program
Logic 1 Lo 1 16 Pause program
17 Cancel program
Logic 2 Lo 2 18 Segment change
19 Start timer 1
Control contact 1 CC1 20 Start timer 2
21 Cancel timer 1
... 22 Cancel timer 2
Control contact 4 CC4 Level inhibit:
The parameter and configuration levels are inhibited.
Tolerance limit signal toLS In addition, the start of autotuning is inhibited.
Program end signal PrES Program end signal:
The signal is active after approx. 1 second (pulse). For longer
signals, the program end signal can be used to start a timer.
Text display:
If the binary function is active, a configurable text is shown in
the lower display. The text can be uniquely defined (only
through the setup program).
Type 703041:
The settings for the binary inputs 1+2 have priority over those
for the logic outputs.
Setpoint and A binary function can be used to switch between setpoint 1 and setpoint 2 or
parameter set parameter set 1 and parameter set 2.
switching
Setpoint switching Parameter set switching Binary signal
Setpoint 1 active Parameter set 1 active 0/contact open
Setpoint 2 active Parameter set 2 active 1/contact closed
In order to switch between the four possible setpoints, two binary functions must be
configured to “setpoint switching”. The states of the two binary functions are
designated Z1 and Z2 and switch the setpoints over as shown in the table below:
Setpoint Z2 Z1
Setpoint 1 0 0
Setpoint 2 0 1
Setpoint 3 1 0
Setpoint 4 1 1
0 = contact open /OFF 1 = contact closed /ON
57
8 Configuration
The states Z1 and Z2 are assigned to the
binary functions in descending order (see
list on the right), i. e. the first binary
function selected in the list is Z1.
* only for program controller/generator
Example:
The setpoint is to be selected via a binary
input and the state of one limit comparator.
This results in the following assignment:
Z1 - binary input 1
Z2 - limit comparator 1
The binary function for the binary input 1
and limit comparator 1 have to be
configured to “setpoint switching”
Depending on the further configuration, the
following diagram applies:
* An exception to this is the configuration for a program controller with external setpoint input, with
or without correction. Setpoint 2 is the program setpoint in this case.
Additional Several binary functions can be combined through the setup program. In addition, the
functions via the binary function “Text display” can be implemented. This is used to show a letter
setup program combination in the lower display.
58
8 Configuration
8.7 Display “diSP”
Configuration diSP: Display

Analog inputs The values displayed can be matched to the existing requirements.
Controller
Generator Furthermore, time-out and level inhibit can be configured here.
Limit comparators
Outputs
Binary functions
Display
Timer
Interfaces

General
Upper display d iSU (analog selector) Displayed value for the upper display
process value
Lower display d iSL (analog selector) Displayed value for the lower display
present setpoint
Decimal point dEcP 0 no decimal place

1 one decimal place
2 two decimal places
If the value that is be displayed can no longer be represented

with the programmed decimal point, then the number of
decimal places will be automatically reduced. If, subsequently,
the measured value decreases, the number increases to the
programmed value of the decimal point.
16-segment display di S t Displayed value for the two-digit 16-segment display
0 switched off
1 Unit (°C or °F)
2 current segment
3 current parameter set
4 text (only setup program)
Brightness (setup) 0…5 (bright) 0—5 (dark)
Time-out (setup) 0…180…255s Time period, after which the instrument automatically returns
to normal display if no key is pressed.
Level inhibit (setup) none The access to the individual levels can be inhibited.
configuration level
parameter/ The setting is independent of the binary function “level inhibit”.
configuration level
operator/ Inhibiting the parameter level will, at the same time, also inhibit
parameter/ the start of autotuning.
configuration level
User data (setup program)
Up to eight parameters from different levels can be shown under User data (operator level) on
the instrument and edited. The symbols for these parameters (shown in the lower display)
must be assigned by the user himself.
59
8 Configuration
60
8 Configuration
8.8 Timer “tFct”
Configuration tFct: Timer function

Analog inputs Time-dependent control actions can be carried out with the help of the timer. The
Controller timer signal (timer 1+ 2) shows whether the timer is active. It can be output via the
Generator binary outputs or processed internally.
Limit comparators
Outputs The timers are started or canceled via the binary functions.
Binary functions v Chapter 8.6 “Binary functions “binF””
Display
Timer The current timer run times can be viewed at the operator level (process data).
Interfaces
Timer 1 tF1 ➔
Timer 2 tF2 ➔
Function Fnct 0 no function
1 with timer running: timer signal=1 (signal is active) /
unit of time: hh:mm
2 with timer running: timer signal=0 (signal is inactive) /
unit of time: hh:mm
3 tolerance band / unit of time: hh:mm
4 with timer running: timer signal=1 (signal is active) /

unit of time: mm:ss
5 with timer running: timer signal=0 (signal is inactive) /
unit of time: mm:ss
6 tolerance band / unit of time: mm:ss
Signal active Signal inactive
Function: “Tolerance band”
The time runs when the process value has reached a tolerance
band around the setpoint.
Timer signal = 1 (signal is active) from the start of the function
until the time has expired.
Timer setting t 0...99:59 Time input (unit of time, see “Function”)
Tolerance limit toLt 0…999 0=off
61
8 Configuration
8.9 Interfaces “IntF”
Configuration Configuration
Analog inputs IntF: Interfaces
Controller The interface parameters for the RS422/485 or PROFIBUS-DP interface have to be
Generator configured in order to communicate with PCs, bus systems and peripheral devices.
Limit comparators
Outputs
Binary functions
Display
Timer
Interfaces
PROFIBUS-DP Pr0F ➔
Protocol Prot 0 Intel
1 Motorola
2 Intel integer
Device address Adr 0…125 …255 Address in data network
Analog marker AnAP -1999…0…+9999 Analog value
Binary marker binP 0 …255 Binary value
Modbus r422 ➔
Protocol Prot 0 Modbus
1 Modbus integer
Baud rate bdrt 0 9600 bps
1 19200 bps
2 38400 bps
Data format dFt 0 8 data bits, 1 stop bit, no parity
1 8 data bits, 1 stop bit, odd parity
2 8 data bits, 1 stop bit, even parity
3 8 data bits, 2 stop bits, no parity
Device address Adr 0…1 …255 Address in data network
Min. response time (setup) 0…500ms Minimum time that elapses between the request of a device in
the data network and the response of the controller.
H Interface descriptions:
- B70.3041.2.0 (Modbus)
- B70.3041.2.3 (PROFIBUS-DP)
62
9 Tuning (optimization)
9.1 Autotuning (self-optimization)
Oscillation Autotuning (self-optimization, SO) establishes the optimum controller parameters for a
method PID or PI controller.
Depending on the controller type, the following controller parameters can be defined:
Reset time (rt), derivative time (dt), proportional band (Pb), cycle time (Cy), filter time
constant (dF)
The controller selects one of two procedures (a or b), depending on the size of the
control deviation:
a) SO in the approach phase b) SO at setpoint
Start of SO Start of SO
Step response This type of optimization involves determining the control parameters through an
method output step that is applied to the process. First a standby output is produced until the
process value is “steady” (constant). Afterwards, an output step (step size), which can
be defined by the user, is automatically applied to the process. The resulting response
of the process value is used to calculate the control parameters.
Autotuning establishes the optimum control parameters for a PID or PI controller,
according to the selected control structure.
Depending on the controller type, the following control parameters can be determined:
Reset time (rt), derivative time (dt), proportional band (Pb), cycle time (Cy), filter time
constant (dF)
Autotuning can be started from any system status, and can be repeated as often as is
required.
The controller outputs (continuous, relay, solid-state), the controller standby output
and the step size (min. 10%) have to be defined.
Principal applications of the step response method
- Autotuning instantly after “power on”, during the approach phase
Considerable time savings, setting: controller standby output = 0 %.
- The process does not readily permit oscillations (e.g. highly insulated furnaces with
small losses, long oscillation period)
- Process value must not exceed setpoint
If the output (with stabilized setpoint) is known, overshoot can be avoided through
the following adjustment:
standby output + step size <= output in stabilized condition
63
H With output type “solid-state”, the cycle time during autotuning is

reduced to 8 x the sampling cycle time.
With the “relay” output type, care has to be taken that the process value
is not influenced by the cycle time, since otherwise autotuning can not be
completed successfully.
Solution: Reduce the cycle time Cy, until the process value is no longer
influenced. (Manual mode can be used for the adjustment!)
Start of autotuning after power-on and during the approach phase
64
Start of autotuning during operation
Starting auto- h Start with I and D (simultaneously >2sec

tuning “tUnE” is shown, blinking, in the lower display
Autotuning is ended when the display automatically
IIIIIIIIIIIIIIIII
changes over to normal display.
IIIII
IIIII
The duration of autotuning depends on the control
process. IIIIIIII IIIIIIII
H The type of controller outputs has to be defined for autotuning.

For a device configured as program controller, the autotuning can only be
started if no program is running (normal display).
In case of problems, you may find further information at www.jumo.net
(Support/FAQ).
Canceling auto- h Cancel with I and D (simultaneously)

tuning
65
9.2 Check of the tuning
The optimum adaptation of the controller to the process can be checked by recording
the approach phase (e.g. with Startup) with the control loop closed. The diagrams
below indicate possible maladjustments and how these can be corrected.
The control response of a third-order control loop for a PID controller is shown as an
example. However, the procedure for adjusting the controller parameters can also be
applied to other control loops.
Pb too large rt, dt too small
Pb too small rt, dt too large
Cy too large optimum

adjustment
66
10 Extra codes
10.1 Math and logic module
The setup program can be used to implement two mathematical calculations or logical
combinations of various signals and process variables from the controller in a formula.
With math formulae, the calculated result is presented through the two signals
“Math 1” and “Math 2” of the analog selector. With logic formulae, the result of the
logical combination is available through the signals “Logic 1” and “Logic 2” of the
binary selector and when configuring the binary functions.
Chapter 8.6 “Binary functions “binF””
Entering formulae - The string of signs in the formula consists of ASCII characters, and can have a
maximum length of 60 characters.
- The formula can only be entered in the setup program.
- Formulae can be freely entered according to normal mathematical rules.
- Spaces can be inserted at will into the formula character string. But spaces are not
permitted within function labels, variable names and constants.
10.2 Difference, humidity or ratio controller

The controller is preset either as a difference/humidity or ratio controller (extra code)
or must be configured via the setup program. Analog input 2 must be available.
v Setup/Only setup/Math/Logic/Math 1
The process variables for the two analog inputs have a fixed definition.
Difference The difference between the measurements from analog input 1 and 2 is formed and
control made available via “Math 1”. Input 1 is affected by the controller. Input 2 is the refe-
rence value.
Difference: E1-E2
E1 = analog input 1
Math E2 = analog input 2
E1 Upper
E1 - E2 w = setpoint
display x = process value
E2
x
w
For the controller to function as a difference controller, further settings have to be

made:
- controller process value: math 1
If the difference is to be displayed, then one display must be configured to “Math 1”.
67
10 Extra codes
Humidity control A psychrometric humidity sensor is used to determine relative humidity, through the
mathematical combination of wet bulb and dry bulb temperatures.
relative humidity: (E1, E2)
E1 = analog input 1
Math
(dry bulb temperature)
E1 Upper
% E2 = analog input 2
display (wet bulb temperature)
E2 w = setpoint
x = process value
x
w
For the controller to function as a humidity controller, further settings have to be made:
- controller process value: math 1
If the value for relative humidity needs to be displayed, then one display must be con-
figured to “Math 1”.
Ratio The control is always based on analog input 1 (E1).

control The math module forms the ratio of the measurements from E1 and E2, and produces
the setpoint for the controller. The ratio of the measurements can be called up through
the function “Math 1” and displayed.
The required ratio E1/E2 is programmed as the setpoint (ratio setpoint) in the setpoint
definition.
Ratio: E1/E2
E1 = analog input 1
Math
E2 = analog input 2
E1
Upper w = setpoint
E1 / E2
display wv = ratio setpoint
E2
x = process value
w
wv wv * E2
x
For the controller to function as a ratio controller, further settings have to be made:
- controller process value: analog input 1
- external setpoint: ramp end value
If the ratio needs to be displayed, then one display must be configured to “Math 1”.
68
11 Retrofitting of modules
Safety notes
A Retrofitting of modules must only be carried out by qualified

professional persons.
E electrostatic charge during fitting and removal. Carry out retrofitting on a

The modules can be damaged by electrostatic discharge. So avoid
workbench that is earthed.
Identifying the h Identify the module by the Sales. No. glued onto the packaging
module
Module Code Sales no. View of boards
Analog input 2 1 70/00442785
1 relay (changeover, SPDT) 2 70/00442786
2 relays (make, SPST-NO) 3 70/00442787
1 analog output 4 70/00442788
2 binary inputs 5 70/00442789
1 solid-state relay 230V/1A 6 70/00442790
RS422/485 interface 7 70/00442782
PROFIBUS-DP 8 70/00442791
69
11 Retrofitting of modules
Removing the h Press together the knurled surfaces on

controller the front panel (top and bottom, or left
module and right for landscape format) and pull
out the controller module.
Retrofitting of h Select the slot for the option

modules (Observe the restrictions for Type 703041! (see connection diagram))
Type 703041 Type 703042/43/44
Option 2 Option 1
Option 1
Option 2
H On Type 703041, relays

can only be retrofitted in
option slot 1!
Option 3
h Push the module into the slot until the plug connector snaps into place
h Push the module into the housing until the lugs snap into their slots
70
12 Appendix
12.1 Technical data
Thermocouple input
Designation Measuring range Measuring Ambient
accuracy temperature error
Fe-Con L -200 to + 900°C ≤0.25% 100 ppm /°C
Fe-Con J EN 60 584 -200 to +1200°C ≤0.25% 100 ppm /°C
Cu-Con U -200 to + 600°C ≤0.25% 100 ppm /°C
Cu-Con T EN 60 584 -200 to + 400°C ≤0.25% 100 ppm /°C
NiCr-Ni K EN 60 584 -200 to +1372°C ≤0.25% 100 ppm /°C
NiCr-Con E EN 60 584 -200 to +1000°C ≤0.25% 100 ppm /°C
NiCrSi-NiSi N EN 60 584 -100 to +1300°C ≤0.25% 100 ppm /°C
Pt10Rh-Pt S EN 60 584 0 to 1768°C ≤0.25% 100 ppm /°C
Pt13Rh-Pt R EN 60 584 0 to 1768°C ≤0.25% 100 ppm /°C
Pt30Rh-Pt6Rh B EN 60 584 0 to 1820°C ≤0.25% a 100 ppm /°C
W5Re-W26Re C 0 to 2320 °C ≤0.25% 100 ppm /°C
W3Re-W25Re D 0 to 2495 °C ≤0.25% 100 ppm /°C
W3Re-W26Re 0 t o 2400 °C ≤0.25% 100 ppm /°C
Cold junction Pt100, internal
a. in the range 300 to1820°C
Input for resistance thermometer

Designation Connection Measuring range Measuring Ambient
3-/4-wire 2-wire
Pt100 EN 60 751 2-wire / 3-wire / 4-wire -200 to +850°C ≤0.05% ≤0.4% 50 ppm / °C
(factory setting)
Pt500 EN 60 751 2-wire / 3-wire / 4-wire -200 to +850°C ≤0.2% ≤0.4% 100 ppm /°C
Pt1000 EN 60 751 2-wire / 3-wire / 4-wire -200 to +850°C ≤0.1% ≤0.2% 50 ppm /°C
KTY11-6 2-wire -50 to +150°C — ≤2.0% 50 ppm /°C
Sensor lead resistance max. 30Ω per lead for 3-wire or 4-wire circuit
Measuring current approx. 250µA
Lead compensation Not required for 3-wire or 4-wire circuit. With a 2-wire circuit, the lead resistance can be
compensated in software by a correction of the process value.
Input for standard signals

Designation Measuring range Measuring Ambient
Voltage 0(2) — 10V ≤0.05% 100 ppm / °C
0 — 1V ≤0.05% 100 ppm / °C
input resistance RIN > 100kΩ
Current 0(4) — 20mA, voltage drop ≤ 1.5V ≤0.05% 100 ppm / °C
Heating current 0 — 50mA AC ≤1% 100 ppm / °C
Resistance transmitter min. 100Ω, max. 4kΩ ≤0.5% 100 ppm / °C
Binary inputs
Floating contacts
71
12 Appendix
Measuring circuit monitoring
In the event of a fault, the outputs move to a defined (configurable) status.
Sensor Overrange / Probe or lead short-circuit Probe or lead break
underrange
Thermocouple • - •
Resistance thermometer • • •
Voltage 2 — 10V • • •
0 — 10V • - -
0 — 1V • - -
Current 4 — 20mA • • •
0 — 20mA • - -
Resistance transmitter - - •
• = recognized - = not recognized
Outputs
Relay (changeover)
for Type 703042/43/44
contact rating 5A at 230VAC resistive load a
contact life 350,000 operations at rated load / 750,000 operations at 1A
Relay (changeover) (option)
contact rating 8A at 230V AC resistive load a
Relay (n.o. make)
for Type 703041
contact rating 3A at 230VAC resistive load
contact life 150,000 operations at rated load / 350,000 at 1A
Relay (n.o. make) (option)
contact rating 3A at 230VAC resistive load
Logic output 0/12V / 30mA max. (sum of all output currents) or
0/18V / 25mA max. (sum of all output currents)
Solid-state relay (option) The holding current of the triac is at least 50mA.
contact rating 1A at 230V
protection circuitry varistor
Voltage (option)
output signals 0 — 10V / 2 — 10V
load resistance Rload ≥ 500Ω
accuracy ≤0.5%
Current (option)
output signals 0 — 20mA / 4 — 20mA
load resistance Rload ≤500Ω
accuracy ≤0.5%
Supply voltage for electrically isolated, not stabilized
2-wire transmitter
for Type 703042/43/44
voltage 17V at 20mA load, 25V DC with no load
a. 3 A with devices certified to DIN EN 14597
Controller
Controller type 2-state controller (factory setting),
3-state controller, modulating controller, continuous controller
Controller structures P/PD/PI/PID
A/D converter dynamic resolution up to 16-bit
Sampling cycle time 50msec, 90msec, 150msec, 250msec (factory setting: 250msec)
72
12 Appendix
Electrical data
Supply voltage (switchmode PSU) 110 — 240V AC -15/+10%, 48 — 63Hz
20—30V AC/DC, 48—63Hz
Electrical safety Type 703041: to EN 61010, Part 1
Type 703042/43/44: to EN 60730
Overvoltage category III, pollution degree 2
Power consumption Type 703041: 8VA max.
Type 703042/43/44: 13VA max.
Data backup EEPROM
Electrical connection at the back, via screw terminals,
conductor cross-section up to 2.5mm2
with core ferrules (length: 10 mm)
Conductor cross-sections and core-end ferrules for installation
Minimum Maximum Min. length of

cross- cross- core-end ferrule
section section
Without core-end ferrule 0.34mm2 2.5mm2 10mm
(stripped)
Core-end ferrule, no lip 0.25mm2 2.5mm2 10mm
Core-end ferrule, lip up to 0.25mm2 1.5mm2 10mm
1.5mm2
Core-end ferrule, lip above 1.5mm2 2.5mm2 12mm
1.5mm2
Twin ferrule with lip 0.25mm2 1.5mm2 12mm
Electromagnetic compatibility EN 61326-1

interference emission Class B
interference immunity to industrial requirements
Housing
Housing type plastic housing for panel mounting to IEC 61554
Depth behind panel 90 mm
Ambient/storage temperature range 0 to 55°C / -30 to +70°C
Climatic conditions rel. humidity ≤90% annual mean, no condensation
Operating position horizontal
Enclosure protection to EN 60 529, front IP65 / back IP20
Weight (fully fitted) Type 703041: approx. 220g
Type 703042/43: approx. 380g
Type 703044: approx. 490g
Interface
Modbus
Interface type RS422/485
Protocol Modbus, Modbus Integer
Baud rate 9600, 19200, 38400
Device address 0 — 255
Max. number of nodes 32
PROFIBUS-DP
Device address 0 — 255
Approvals/marks of conformity
Mark of Testing laboratory Certificates/certification Test basis valid for
conformity numbers
DIN DIN CERTCO Register No. TR1187 DIN EN 14597 all types
GL - Hardware Germanischer Lloyd Type Approval Certificate GL-Approval 703044/191-320-23/
GL - Software No. 45 059-07 HH Category C, EMC1 214, 062
c UL us Underwriters Laboratories E 201387 UL 61010-1 all types
CAN/CSA-C22.2 No. 61010-1
73
12 Appendix
12.2 Alarm messages
Display Cause Fault removal

test/repair/replace
-1999 Underrange for the value being - Check that the connected probe com-
(blinking!) displayed. plies with the configured sensor type and
linearization
9999 Overrange for the value being
- Check the probe connection and the ter-
(blinking!) displayed.
minals
- Check the cable
- Check probe for short-circuit and probe
break
- In case of standard signal:
Is the signal within the permissible range
(e.g. 4 - 20mA)?
9999 Error in output feedback of Check the source signal for output feedback
(lower display) modulating controller
---- Source signal for controller Select a source signal in configuration level
process value is switched off
(blinking!)
all displays on; Watchdog or power-on trigger Replace the controller if the initialization
lower initialization (reset). continues for more than 5sec
7-segment
display is
blinking
PrOF PROFIBUS error Can be suppressed by setting the
PROFIBUS address to “0” (if PROFIBUS
interface is not used).
OPt Hardware configuration error Check which option boards are installed in
the slots
Overrange / underrange covers the following events:

- Probe break or short-circuit
- Measurement is outside the controllable range for the probe that is connected
- Display overflow
74
13 Index
A H
Access code 39 Heater current monitoring 42
Accessories 10 Hot-channel controller 49
Acknowledgement 53 Humidity control 68
Analog input 41
Analog marker 62
Analog selector 40 I
Autotuning (self-optimization) 46, 63 Installation notes 15
Interface 62
B
Baud rate 62 L
Binary functions 56 Level concept 26
Binary marker 62 Level inhibit 27, 59
Binary output 54 Limit comparator 50
Brightness 59 Limit comparator functions 50
Limit value 51
Linearization 41
C
Connection diagrams 17
Control action 45, 61–62 M
Control contacts 48 Manual mode 55
Controller 45 Manual mode, inhibiting 45
Controller module, removing 14 Manual output 45
Controller standby output 46 Measurement offset 42
Controller type 45, 54, 57, 61 Module
identification 69
retrofitting 69
D Mounting site 11
Data format 62
Decimal point 59
Delay time 48 O
Device address 62 Outputs 54
Difference control 67 numbering 54
Dimensions 11
Display 59
Display end 42 P
Displays 25 Parameter level 37
Parameter set switching 57
Password 39
E PC interface 10
Electrical isolation 16 Program profile, shifting 33
End value 55 Program start 48
Entering formulae 67 Protocol 62
Entering programs 30 Pulse time 53
Entering times 28
Entering values 28
R
Ramp slope 48
F Range output 45
Filter time constant 42 Ratio control 68
Fine tuning 42
Fitting 13
Front panel, care of 13 S
Safety notes 69
Sampling cycle time 43
75
13 Index
Scope of delivery 10
Sensor type 41
T
Setpoint 35 Text display 57
external 46 Time-out 59
Setpoint limits 45 Timer 61
Setpoint switching 57 Tolerance band 48, 61
Setup program 10 Tuning (optimization) 66
Side-by-side mounting 13 Type designation 9
Signal type 55
Step response method 63
Step size 46
U
Supply frequency 43 Unit 43, 48
Switching action 56
Switching differential 51
Switch-on delay 52
Z
Zero point 55
76
Overview of the configuration level
InP InP1 SEnS Sensor type
Page 41 InP2 Lin Linearization
OFFS Measurement offset
SCL Display start
SCH Display end
dF Filter time constant
FtS Fine tuning start value
FtE Fine tuning end value
HEAt Heater current monitoring
InP12 Unit Temperature unit

CYcL Sampling cycle time
Cntr CtYP Controller type

Page 45 CAct Control action
InHA Inhibit manual mode
HAnd Manual output
rOut Range output
SPL Setpoint low
SPH Setpoint high
CPr Controller process value
ESP External setpoint
FEEd Output feedback
tYPt Method of tuning
InHt Inhibit tuning
Ott1 Output of tuning 1
Ott2 Output of tuning 2
SOut Controller standby output
StSI Step size
Pro Fnct Function

Page 47 Unit Unit of slope
rASL Ramp slope
toLP Tolerance band
LC LC1 Fnct Function
Page 50 LC2 AL Limit value
LC3 HYSt Switching differential
LC4 AcrA Action/range response
tOn Switch-on delay
tOFF Switch-off delay
AcnL Acknowledgement
tPuL Pulse time
LCPr Limit comparator PV
LCsP Limit comparator SP
OutP OutL Out1 Binary output 1

Page 54 ... ...
Out0 Binary output 10
OutA Out5 Analog output 5

Fnct Function
SiGn Type of signal
rOut Range output
OPnt Zero point
End End value
... ...
Out7 Analog output 7
binF bin1 Binary input 1

Page 56 ... ...
bin8 Binary input 6
LC1 Limit comparator 1
... ...
LC4 Limit comparator 4
tF1 Timer 1
tF2 Timer 2
Lo1 Logic 1
Lo2 Logic 2
CC1 Control contact 1
... ...
CC4 Control contact 4
toLS Tolerance limit signal
PrES Program end signal
diSP diSU Upper display

Page 59 diSL Lower display
dEcP Decimal point
briG Brightness
diS3 16-segment display
t0ut Time-out
tFct tF1 Fnct Function

Page 61 tF2 t Timer time
toLt Tolerance limit
IntF ProF Prot Protocol

Page 62 Adr Device address
r422 Prot Protocol

Bdrt Baud rate
dFt Data format
Adr Device address
JUMO GmbH & Co. KG JUMO Instrument Co. Ltd. JUMO Process Control, Inc.
Street address: JUMO House 8 Technology Boulevard
Moritz-Juchheim-Straße 1 Temple Bank, Riverway Canastota, NY 13032, USA
36039 Fulda, Germany Harlow, Essex CM20 2DY, UK Phone: 315-697-JUMO
Delivery address: Phone: +44 1279 635533 1-800-554-JUMO
Mackenrodtstraße 14 Fax: +44 1279 635262 Fax: 315-697-5867
36039 Fulda, Germany E-mail: sales@jumo.co.uk E-mail: info@jumo.us
Postal address: Internet: www.jumo.co.uk Internet: www.jumo.us
36035 Fulda, Germany
Phone: +49 661 6003-0
Fax: +49 661 6003-607
E-mail: mail@jumo.net
Internet: www.jumo.net
Digitaler฀Thermostat
Digital฀Thermostat,฀Thermostat฀numérique
B 70.1050.0
Betriebsanleitung
Operating Instructions, Notice de mise en service
02.10/00440454
Funktionsübersicht
P >฀3฀Sekunden Anzeige฀wechselt
Istwertanzeige
30 Sekunden Timeout
oder P + (Gleichzeitig)
Code eingeben
vergrößern vergrößern
verkleinern verkleinern
oder฀30 Sekunden
P Timeout P P P
Bedienerebene Parameterebene Freigabeebene

Parameter,฀die฀in฀der฀Freigabe- Hier฀können฀werkseitig฀voreinge- Parameter฀festlegen,฀die฀in฀der
ebene฀ausgewählt฀wurden. stellte฀Parameter฀verändert Bedienerebene฀angezeigt฀werden
werden. oder฀editierbar฀sind.
Anzeige฀wechselt Anzeige฀wechselt Anzeige฀wechselt
vergrößern vergrößern
editierbar
verkleinern verkleinern
anzeigen
P P P P P nicht
weitere฀Parameter฀… weitere฀Parameter freigeben
weitere฀Parameter
…฀aus฀der
xxx Freigabeebene letzter฀Parameter
60 Sekunden Timeout฀oder P + (gleichzeitig)

Inhalt
1 Geräteausführung identifizieren . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
2 Montage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
3 Elektrischer Anschluss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
3.1฀Installationshinweise฀ ฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀. 5
3.2฀Anschlussplan฀ ฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀. 6
4 Gerät in Betrieb nehmen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
4.1฀Anzeige-฀und฀Bedienelemente฀ .฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀. 7
Inhalt
4.2฀Gerätefunktionen฀einstellen฀(Parameterebene)฀ ฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀. 8
4.3฀Bedienrechte฀vergeben฀(Freigabeebene)฀ .฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀. 14
5 Bedienen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
6 Technische Daten . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
6.1฀Setup฀Programm฀ ฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀. 19
7 Alarmmeldungen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
1 Geräteausführung identifizieren
Das฀฀Typenschild฀mit฀dem฀Bestellschlüssel฀ist฀auf฀der฀Seite฀des฀Gerätes฀aufgeklebt.฀Die฀angeschlossene฀Spannungs-
versorgung฀muss฀mit฀der฀auf฀dem฀Typenschild฀angegebenen฀Spannung฀identisch฀sein.
H
฀฀
Alle฀erforderlichen฀Einstellungen฀sind฀in฀der฀vorliegenden฀Betriebsanleitung฀beschrieben.฀Sollten฀trotzdem฀bei
der฀ Inbetriebnahme฀ Schwierigkeiten฀ auftreten,฀ bitten฀ wir฀ Sie,฀ keine฀ unzulässigen฀ Manipulationen฀ am฀ Gerät
vorzunehmen.฀Sie฀gefährden฀dadurch฀Ihren฀Garantieanspruch!฀Bitte฀setzen฀Sie฀sich฀mit฀der฀nächsten฀Nieder-
lassung฀oder฀mit฀dem฀Stammhaus฀in฀Verbindung.
Lesen฀Sie฀diese฀Betriebsanleitung,฀bevor฀Sie฀das฀Gerät฀in฀Betrieb฀nehmen.฀Bewahren฀Sie฀die฀Betriebsanlei-
tung฀an฀einem฀für฀alle฀Benutzer฀jederzeit฀zugänglichen฀Platz฀auf.฀Bitte฀unterstützen฀Sie฀uns,฀diese฀Betriebsan-
leitung฀zu฀verbessern.
Bestellangaben
auf฀dem
Typen-
schild 701050/811-02/000
(1) (2) (3) (4)
Lieferumfang
1฀Betriebsanleitung฀B฀70.1050.0
2
(1)Grundausführung
701050/ ฀฀฀฀฀฀ Digitaler฀Thermostat
(2) Grundtypergänzung
Ausführung
8 werkseitig฀eingest.,konfigurierbar฀innerhalb฀der฀Messeingangsgruppe
9 nach฀Kundenangaben฀konfiguriert
Messeingangsgruppe1
1 Pt฀100฀in฀Zweileiterschaltung
Pt฀1000฀in฀Zweileiterschaltung฀
KTY2X-6
2 Fe-CuNi฀„J“
Fe-CuNi฀„L“
NiCr-Ni฀„K“
3 0฀...฀20฀mA
4฀...฀20฀mA
4 0฀...฀10฀V
Anzahl derRelais
1 1Relais฀Wechsler฀10A/230V
(3) Spannungsversorgung
02 AC 230V฀+10/-15%฀48 ... 63Hz
05 AC 115V฀+10/-15%฀48 ... 63Hz
31 DC 12 ... 24V฀+15/-15%฀oder฀AC฀24V฀+15/-15%,฀48..63Hz
(4) Typenzusätze
000 keine
(1) (2) (3) (4)

Bestellschlüssel ฀/ ฀- ฀฀/
Bestellbeispiel 701050 ฀/ 811 ฀- 02 ฀฀/ 000
฀werkseitig฀eingestellt
1.)฀Messeingangsgruppen฀untereinander฀nicht฀umschaltbar 3
2 Montage
Demontage
°C
(1) (2)
90
55
2 Montage
0
≤ 75
4
3 Elektrischer Anschluss
3.1 Installationshinweise
- Bei฀der฀Wahl฀des฀Leitungsmaterials,฀bei฀der฀Installation,฀bei฀der฀Absicherung฀und฀beim฀elektrischen฀Anschluss฀des฀
Gerätes฀sind฀die฀Vorschriften฀der฀VDE฀0100฀„Bestimmungen฀über฀das฀Errichten฀von฀Starkstromanlagen฀mit฀Nennspan-
nungen฀unter฀1000฀V“฀oder฀die฀jeweiligen฀Landesvorschriften฀zu฀beachten.
- Der฀elektrische฀Anschluss฀darf฀nur฀von฀Fachpersonal฀durchgeführt฀werden.
- Die฀elektromagnetische฀Verträglichkeit฀entspricht฀den฀in฀den฀technischen฀Daten฀aufgeführten฀Normen฀und฀Vorschriften.
Schützen฀Sie฀das฀Gerät฀beim฀Einbau฀und฀der฀Bedienung฀vor฀elektrostatischer฀Entladung.
- Das฀Gerät฀ist฀nicht฀für฀die฀Installation฀in฀explosionsgefährdeten฀Bereichen฀geeignet฀und฀muß฀in฀ein฀Brand-฀/Elektrisches฀
Schutzgehäuse฀eingebaut฀werden.
- Neben฀einer฀fehlerhaften฀Installation฀können฀auch฀falsch฀eingestellte฀Werte฀am฀Gerät฀(Sollwert,
Daten฀der฀Parameterebene)฀den฀nachfolgenden฀Prozeß฀in฀seiner฀ordnungsgemäßen฀Funktion฀beeinträchtigen฀oder฀zu฀
Beschädigungen฀führen.฀Es฀sollten฀daher฀immer฀vom฀Gerät฀unabhängige฀Sicherheitseinrichtungen,฀z.฀B.฀Überdruckven-
tile฀oder฀Temperaturbegrenzer/-wächter฀vorhanden฀und฀die฀Einstellung฀nur฀dem฀Fachpersonal฀möglich฀sein฀(Parameter฀
für฀die฀Bedienung฀sperren).฀Bitte฀in฀diesem฀Zusammenhang฀die฀entsprechenden฀Sicherheitsvorschriften฀beachten.฀Bei฀
ungünstiger฀Verstellung฀der฀Parameter฀ist฀theoretisch฀eine฀instabile฀Regelung฀möglich.฀Der฀erreichte฀Istwert฀sollte฀daher฀
auf฀seine฀Stabilität฀hin฀kontrolliert฀und฀Kenntnisse฀über฀die฀Regelstrecke฀gesammelt฀werden.
- Der฀Lastkreis฀muss฀auf฀den฀maximalen฀Relaisstrom฀abgesichert฀sein,฀um฀im฀Fall฀eines฀dortigen฀Kurzschlusses฀฀ein฀Ver-
schweißen฀der฀Ausgangsrelais฀zu฀verhindern.
- Keine฀weiteren฀Verbraucher฀an฀die฀Schraubklemmen฀für฀die฀Spannungsversorgung฀des฀Gerätes฀anschließen.
- Das฀Gerät฀2-polig฀vom฀Netz฀trennen,฀wenn฀bei฀Arbeiten฀spannungsführende฀Teile฀berührt฀werden฀können฀(z.B฀über฀
einen฀separaten฀Netzschalter).฀
- Spannungsversorgung Messeingang und Spannungsversorgung
AC 230V฀und฀AC115V kurzschlussfest galvanisch฀voneinander฀getrennt
DC 12 ... 24V฀und฀AC฀24V nicht฀kurzschlussfest nicht฀galvanisch฀voneinander฀getrennt
5
3.2 Anschlussplan
Der฀ elektrische฀ Anschluss
V darf฀ nur฀ von฀ Fachpersonal
durchgeführt฀werden!
6
4 Gerät in Betrieb nehmen
4.1 Anzeige- und Bedienelemente
LC-Display 6฀mm฀hohe฀dreistellige฀Neunsegmentanzeige฀und฀
Symbole฀für฀Temperatureinheit

LED K1 LED฀K1฀leuchtet,฀wenn฀das฀Relais฀angezogen฀ist.
LED฀K1฀erlischt,฀wenn฀das฀Relais฀abfällt.
Tasten Programmieren
Wert฀vergrößern
Bedienstatus฀in฀฀Freigabeebene฀wählen
Wert฀verkleinern
Bedienstatus฀in฀Freigabeebene฀wählen
Setup- Das฀Gerät฀wird฀über฀ein฀PC-Interface฀mit฀TTL/RS232฀
Schnittstelle Umsetzer฀und฀
Adapter฀(3-polige฀Stifte)฀mit฀einem฀PC฀verbunden
h Spannungsversorgung฀anlegen,฀alle฀Segmente฀leuchten฀zum฀Test฀zweimal฀auf฀(Segmenttest).
Ist฀am฀Gerät฀alles฀korrekt฀angeschlossen,฀zeigt฀es฀den฀aktuellen฀Istwert฀an.
Erscheint฀eine฀Alarmmeldung,฀siehe฀Kapitel฀7฀„Alarmmeldungen“.
Das฀Relais฀arbeitet฀je฀nach฀eingestellter฀Reglerart,฀siehe฀Kapitel฀4.2฀„Gerätefunktionen฀einstellen฀(Parameterebene)“.
7
4.2 Gerätefunktionen einstellen (Parameterebene)
H Timeout:
Wird฀60฀Sekunden฀lang฀keine฀Taste฀bedient,฀schaltet฀das฀Gerät฀automatisch฀in฀die฀Istwertanzeige฀zurück,
siehe฀Funktionsübersicht฀auf฀der฀ersten฀Innenseite.

In฀der฀Parameterebene฀werden฀Gerätefunktionen฀und฀Werte฀eingestellt.฀
h ฀3฀Sekunden฀lang฀drücken฀und฀es฀erscheint฀abwechselnd฀ .
h Code฀72฀für฀den฀Zugang฀zur฀Parameterebene฀mit฀den฀Tasten฀ ฀und฀ ฀einstellen.

Je฀länger฀die฀Taste฀gedrückt฀wird,฀desto฀schneller฀verändert฀sich฀der฀Wert.
h Mit฀ ฀quittieren,฀
Parametername฀und฀Wert฀erscheinen฀abwechselnd,฀z.B. .
h Mit฀den฀Tasten฀ ฀und฀ ฀Wert฀im฀angegebenen฀Wertebereich฀einstellen.

h Einstellungen฀mit฀ ฀quittieren.
h Nächsten฀Parameter฀einstellen,฀siehe฀Funktionsübersicht฀auf฀der฀ersten฀Innenseite.
H Ausblendung von Parametern:

In฀der฀folgenden฀Tabelle฀sind฀alle฀Parameter฀für฀jeden฀Gerätetyp฀aufgeführt.
Je฀nach฀Typenbezeichnung฀auf฀dem฀Typenschild,฀werden฀nicht฀benötigte฀Parameter฀ausgeblendet.
8
Regler
Wertebereich
Parameter Bedeutung
von...werkseitig...bis
Sollwert SP.L ... 0.0 ... SP.H
Auf฀diesen฀Wert฀wird฀geregelt฀(Temperaturwert,฀Strom฀oder฀Spannung).

Hysterese 0.2 ... 1.0 ... 99.9
T/°C Kühlen T/°C Heizen
SP฀=฀70฀°C
HYS
69฀°C
9
HYS
SP฀=฀8฀°C
t t
Relais฀K1 Relais฀K1
angezogen angezogen
abgefallen abgefallen
t t
untere Sollwertgrenze -999 ... -50 ... +999

Bis฀zu฀dieser฀unteren฀Grenze฀kann฀SP฀eingestellt฀werden.
obere Sollwertgrenze฀ -999 ... 500 ... +999
Bis฀zu฀dieser฀oberen฀Grenze฀kann฀SP฀eingestellt฀werden.
Reglerart
:฀Kühlregler ,
:฀Heizregler
9
Wertebereich
Parameter Bedeutung
Einschaltverzögerungszeit ฀nach Netz-Ein 0 ... 60min
Zum฀zeitversetzten฀Einschalten฀mehrerer฀Aggregate฀einer฀Anlage.
Minimale Einschaltdauer 0฀...฀999฀s

Minimale Ausschaltdauer
Hier฀kann฀eingestellt฀werden,฀wie฀lange฀z. B.฀das฀Aggregat฀mindestens฀ein-
bzw.฀ ausgeschaltet฀ bleiben฀ muss.฀ Diese฀ Angaben฀ sind฀ abhängig฀ vom฀ ver- 0฀...฀999฀s
wendeten฀Heiz-฀oder฀Kühlgerät฀(Herstellerangaben฀beachten).
Bei฀ Fühlerfehler฀ wird฀das฀Relais,฀wie฀im฀Parameter฀S.Er฀eingestellt,฀sofort
angesteuert.
Alarme
unterer Alarmgrenzwert -999 ... -200 ... +999
Sobald฀ der฀ Istwert฀ diese฀ Grenze฀ unterschreitet,฀ wird฀ die฀ Alarmmeldung
฀in฀der฀Anzeige฀ausgegeben,฀siehe฀Kapitel฀7฀„Alarmmeldungen“.
oberer Alarmgrenzwert -999฀...฀500฀...฀+999
Sobald฀ der฀ Istwert฀ diese฀ Grenze฀ überschreitet,฀ wird฀ die฀ Alarmmeldung
฀in฀der฀Anzeige฀ausgegeben,฀siehe฀Kapitel฀7฀„Alarmmeldungen“.
Alarm-Hysterese 0.2 ... 1.0 ... 99.9
Die฀eingestellte฀Hysterese฀liegt฀unterhalb฀฀ ฀bzw.฀oberhalb฀ .
Alarmunterdrückungszeit 0฀...฀60฀min
Für฀diese฀Zeit฀wird฀ein฀Alarm฀von฀ ฀oder฀ ฀nicht฀im฀Display฀ange-
zeigt.฀Ist฀ein฀Alarm฀länger฀als฀ ฀vorhanden,฀wird฀er฀angezeigt.
10
Wertebereich
Parameter Bedeutung
Verhalten bei Messbereichsüber- oder -unterschreitung 0,฀1
0:฀Relais฀fällt฀ab
1:฀Relais฀zieht฀an

Eingang
Angeschlossener฀Messwertgeber฀in฀Zweileiterschaltung Pt 100:
Messeingangsgruppe฀1฀฀bei฀Typ:฀701050/X1X-1-XX Pt฀1000:฀
KTY2X-6:฀
oder฀
Messeingangsgruppe฀2฀bei฀Typ:฀701050/X2X-1-XX Fe-CuNi฀„J“:
Fe-CuNi฀„L“:
NiCr-Ni฀„K“: ฀
oder฀
Messeingangsgruppe฀3฀bei฀Typ:฀701050/X3X-1-XX 0(4)...฀20฀mA:
฀ ฀/฀
Messeingangsgruppe฀4฀bei฀Typ:฀701050/X4X-1-XX 0฀...฀10฀V:฀ ฀/฀
Anfangswert฀für฀Anzeigebereich฀bei฀Messeingang฀Spannung฀oder฀Strom -999฀...฀0...฀+999
Beispiel:฀Eingangssignal฀ (z.B.฀ 4฀ ...฀20mA)฀soll฀von฀-10...50฀auf฀der฀ Anzeige
abgebildet฀werden.฀Für฀S.cL=฀-10฀und฀S.cH=50฀einstellen.
Endwert฀für฀Anzeigebereich฀bei฀Messeingang฀Spannung฀und฀Strom -999฀...฀100...฀+999
Signal฀für฀Messeingang฀Strom:฀0฀=฀0...20mA 0,฀1
1฀=฀4...20mA
11
Wertebereich
Parameter Bedeutung
Offset Istwert -99,9฀...฀0,0฀...฀99,9
Istwert฀Offset฀in฀K,฀°F฀oder฀Digit฀(keine฀Einheit)
Leitungsabgleichwiderstand 0,0฀...฀0,0฀...฀99,9฀in฀Ω

Dieser฀Wert฀dient฀zur฀Kompensation฀des฀Widerstands฀der฀Fühlerleitung฀bei
Widerstands-Messwertgebern฀und฀ist฀abhängig฀von฀der฀Leitungslänge.
Für฀eine฀bestmögliche฀Temperaturmessung฀muss฀hier฀der฀ohmsche฀Wider-
stand฀der฀Fühlerleitung฀eingegeben฀werden.
A
Wenn฀der฀Gesamtwiderstand฀am฀Messeingang฀(Messwertgeberwi-
derstand฀+฀eingestellter฀Wert฀für฀OF.r)฀bei฀Pt100:฀320฀Ω und฀bei฀
Pt1000/KTY2x-6:฀3200฀Ω überschreitet,฀kommt฀es฀zu฀einem฀
Messfehler฀!
Einheit °C,฀°F฀oder
für฀den฀angezeigten฀Istwert no฀(=฀keine฀Einheit)
A
Bei฀Einstellung฀in฀°F฀wird฀der฀Istwert฀entsprechend฀umgerechnet.฀
Alle฀anderen฀Einstellungen,฀wie฀z. B฀für฀SP฀bleiben฀in฀ihrem฀Wert฀
erhalten.
12
Wertebereich
Parameter Bedeutung
Filterzeitkonstante 0,1฀...฀0,8฀...฀99,9฀s
Zur฀Anpassung฀des฀digitalen฀Eingangsfilters.
Bei฀einem฀Signalsprung฀werden฀nach฀der฀Filterzeitkonstante฀63%฀der฀Ände-
rungen฀erfasst.

Werte฀zwischen฀0,1฀und฀0,7฀werden฀als฀0,8฀interpretiert฀(Abtastzeit).
Wenn฀die฀Filterzeitkonstante฀groß฀ist:
-hohe฀Dämpfung฀von฀Störsignalen
-langsame฀Reaktion฀der฀Istwertanzeige฀auf฀Istwertänderungen
H Mit฀ ฀>฀3฀sec฀zurück฀zum฀1.฀Parameter฀SP฀der฀Parameterebene.
13
4.3 Bedienrechte vergeben (Freigabeebene)
Die฀Einstellung฀in฀der฀Freigabeebene฀legt฀Bedienrechte฀fest,฀die฀darüber฀entscheiden,฀ob฀ein฀Parameter฀in฀der฀Be-
dienebene฀erscheint,฀editiert฀werden฀kann฀oder฀gar฀nicht฀erscheint.
h ฀3฀Sekunden฀lang฀drücken฀und฀ ฀erscheint.

h Code฀82฀für฀den฀Zugang฀zur฀Freigabeebene฀mit฀den฀Tasten฀ ฀und฀ ฀einstellen.
h Mit฀ ฀quittieren
Parameter฀und฀Bedienrecht฀blinken฀abwechselnd฀z. B. .
h Mit฀den฀Tasten฀ ฀und฀ ฀Bedienrecht ,฀ ฀oder฀ einstellen.
Bedienrecht Anzeige werkseitig
Parameter฀ist฀einstellbar
Parameter฀erscheint -
Parameter฀erscheint nicht alle฀anderen฀Parameter
h Einstellungen฀mit฀ ฀quittieren.
h Nächsten฀Parameter฀einstellen,฀siehe฀Funktionsübersicht฀auf฀der฀ersten฀Innenseite.
14
5 Bedienen
Softwareversion anzeigen Sollwert und weitere Parameter ändern
Istwertanzeige
P +
(gleichzeitig)
(Beispiel)
oder฀Timeout฀(nach฀ca.฀30฀Sekunden)
5 Bedienen
P
Sollwert
P
Weitere฀Parameter฀anzeigen
(je฀nach฀eingestelltem฀Bedienrecht
in฀der฀Freigabeebene)
15
6 Technische Daten
Messeingang Bezeichnung Messbereich Messgenauigkeit1/ Erkennung von ...
Umgebungstempe-
ratureinfluss Fühlerkurz- Fühlerbruch
schluss
Widerstands- Pt฀100฀DIN฀EN฀60751 -200 … +600°C 0,1%/฀≤100ppm/K ja ja
thermometer
Pt฀1000฀DIN฀EN฀60751 -200 … +600°C 0,1%/฀≤100ppm/K ja ja
6 Technische Daten
KTY2X-6฀(PTC) -50฀...฀+150฀°C 1%/฀≤100ppm/K ja ja
Widerstand฀0...3000฀Ω Kundentabelle฀3 0,1%/฀≤100ppm/K฀3 =฀0Ω ja
Messstrom฀bei฀Pt100:฀0,2฀mA,฀bei฀Pt1000,฀KTY2X-6฀und฀Widerstand:฀0,02฀mA
Leitungsabgleich฀über฀den฀Parameter฀Leitungsabgleichwiderstand฀ ฀einstellbar
Gesamtwiderstand฀Sensor+Leitung฀darf฀bei฀Pt100฀320Ω฀und฀bei฀Pt1000,฀KTY2X-6฀und฀Widerstand฀3200Ω nicht฀
überschreiten.
Thermo- Fe-CuNi฀„J“฀DIN฀EN฀ -200฀...฀+999฀°C 0,4%/฀≤100ppm/K฀2 nein ja
elemente 60584
Fe-CuNi฀„L“฀DIN฀43710 -200฀...฀+900฀°C 0,4%/฀≤100ppm/K฀2 nein ja
NiCr-Ni฀„K“฀DIN฀EN฀ -200฀...฀+999฀°C 0,4%/฀≤100ppm/K฀2 nein ja
60584
-10...60฀mV ฀Kundentabelle฀3 0,1%/฀≤100ppm/K฀3 nein ja
Für฀den฀Spannungseingang฀(-10...60฀mV)฀kann฀die฀Klemmentemperaturkompensation฀für฀Thermoelemente฀verwen-
det฀werden.
Interne฀Klemmentemperaturkompensation฀über฀Setup-Programm฀abschaltbar฀(0°C).
16
Messeingang Bezeichnung Messbereich Messgenauigkeit1/ Erkennung von ...
Umgebungstempe-
ratureinfluss Fühlerkurz- Fühlerbruch
schluss
Strom 0฀...฀20฀mA -2฀...฀22฀mA 0,1%/฀≤100ppm/K฀3 nein nein
skalierbar฀mit฀
฀und฀ ฀ ฀
oder฀Kundentabelle
6 Technische Daten
4฀...฀20฀mA 2,4฀...฀21,6฀mA 0,1%/฀≤100ppm/K฀3 ja ja
skalierbar฀mit฀
฀und฀ ฀
Eingangswiderstand฀RE฀฀≤ 3Ω
Spannung 0฀...฀10฀V -1฀...฀11฀V 0,1%/฀≤100ppm/K nein nein
skalierbar฀mit฀
฀und฀ ฀
oder฀Kundentabelle
Eingangswiderstand฀RE฀≥ 100kΩ
1.)฀Die฀Genauigkeiten฀beziehen฀sich฀auf฀den฀Messbereichsumfang.
2.)฀gültig฀ab฀-50°C
3.)฀Eine฀gültige฀Kundentabelle฀muß฀über฀Setup-Programm฀eingegeben฀und฀im฀Gerät฀auf฀ ฀umgeschaltet฀werden.฀
฀฀฀฀Dadurch฀kann฀sich฀die฀Messgenauigkeit฀verringern.฀
Umwelteinflüsse
Umgebungstemperaturbereich 0 ... +55°C,฀bei฀Dicht-an-dicht-Montage:฀0 ... +40°C
Lagertemperaturbereich -30... +70°C
Klimafestigkeit ≤฀75%฀rel.฀Feuchte฀ohne฀Betauung
17
Ausgang
Relais฀K1฀(Wechselkontakt) 150.000฀Schaltungen฀bei฀AC฀10A/250V฀50Hz฀ohmscher฀Last
800.000฀Schaltungen฀bei฀AC฀3A/250V฀50Hz฀ohmscher฀Last
Spannungsversorgung
Spannungsversorgung฀ AC 230V฀+10/-15%,฀48 ... 63Hz฀oder฀AC 115V฀+10/-15%,฀48 ... 63Hz
(galvanische฀Trennung฀zum฀Messeingang)
DC 12 ... 24V฀+15/-15%,฀AC฀24V฀+15/-15%,฀48฀...฀63Hz
6 Technische Daten
(keine฀galvanische฀Trennung฀zum฀Messeingang)
Leistungsaufnahme฀ <฀4VA
Gehäuse
Material Polycarbonat
Montage Hutschiene฀35mm฀x฀7,5mm฀nach฀EN฀50022
Einbaulage beliebig
Gewicht ca.฀110g
Schutzart IP฀20
Brennbarkeitsklasse UL฀94฀V0
Elektrische Daten
Datensicherung EEPROM
Anschlussart Schraubklemmen฀für฀Drahtquerschnitte฀bis฀max.฀2,5฀mm2฀
Elektromagnetische฀Verträglichkeit EN฀61326
฀฀Störaussendung Klasse฀B
฀฀Störfestigkeit Industrieanforderung
Elektrische฀Sicherheit DIN฀EN฀61 010,฀Teil฀1,฀Überspannungskategorie฀III,฀Verschmutzungsgrad฀2
18
6.1 Setup Programm
Das฀Programm฀und฀das฀Interface฀mit฀Adapter฀ist฀als฀Zubehör฀erhältlich฀und฀bietet฀folgende฀Möglichkeiten:
- einfache฀und฀komfortable฀Parametrierung฀und฀Archivierung฀über฀PC
- einfaches฀Duplizieren฀der฀Parameter฀bei฀Geräten฀gleichen฀Typs
- Möglichkeit฀der฀Eingabe฀einer฀Linearisierungstabelle
6 Technische Daten
Hard- und Softwaremindestvoraussetzungen:
- PC฀Pentium฀100฀oder฀kompatibel
- 128฀MB฀RAM,฀16฀MB฀freier฀Festplattenspeicher
- CD-ROM฀Laufwerk
- freie฀COM-Schnittstelle
- Microsoft฀Windows฀98/ME/NT4.0/2000/XP
h PC-Interface฀mit฀der฀RS฀232฀Schnittstelle฀des฀PC฀verbinden
h Schwarzen฀Adapter฀(3-polige฀Stifte)฀
seitlich฀ins฀Gerät฀einstecken
19
7 Alarmmeldungen
In฀der฀Temperaturanzeige฀können฀folgende฀Alarmmeldungen฀angezeigt฀werden:
Fehleranzeige Ursache Abhilfe
Anzeigeüberlauf - Sensor฀und฀Anschlussleitung฀auf฀Beschädigung฀
Der฀Messwert฀ist฀zu฀groß฀und฀ oder฀Kurzschluss฀überprüfen
liegt฀außerhalb฀des฀Messbe-
reichs. - Überprüfen,฀ob฀der฀richtige฀Sensor฀eingestellt฀
7 Alarmmeldungen
Anzeigeunterlauf oder฀angeschlossen฀ist
Der฀Messwert฀ist฀zu฀klein฀und฀ v Kapitel฀4฀„Gerät฀in฀Betrieb฀nehmen“
liegt฀außerhalb฀des฀Messbe-
reichs. H Diese฀Meldungen฀werden฀nur฀in฀der฀
Temperaturanzeige฀ausgegeben.
Zeit฀für Einschaltverzögerung฀ h Einschaltverzögerung฀abbrechen

nach฀Netz-Ein฀läuft฀ab. mit฀ ฀+฀
Bei฀Anzeigeüber-฀oder฀-unterlauf฀
wird฀die฀Einschaltverzögerung
verlassen.
unterer฀Alarmgrenzwert฀unter- h Je฀nach฀eingestellter฀Reglerart฀überprüfen,฀ob฀
schritten das฀Heiz-฀oder฀Kühlaggregat฀noch฀einwandfrei฀
funktioniert.
oberer฀Alarmgrenzwert฀über-
h Überprüfen,฀ob฀evtl.฀eingebaute฀Relaisabsiche-
rung฀noch฀in฀Ordnung฀ist.
schritten
Der฀ Alarm฀ verschwindet,฀ sobald฀ der฀ Istwert฀ die฀ AL-Grenzen
um฀die฀Hysterese฀über-฀bzw.฀unterschreitet.
20
JUMO GmbH & Co. KG JUMO JUMO
Hausadresse: Mess- und Regelgeräte Ges.m.b.H. Mess- und Regeltechnik AG
Moritz-Juchheim-Strasse฀1 Pfarrgasse฀48 Laubisrütistrasse฀70
36039฀Fulda,฀Germany 1232฀Wien,฀Austria 8712฀Stäfa,฀Switzerland
Lieferadresse: Telefon: +43฀1฀610610 Telefon: +41฀44฀928฀24฀44
Mackenrodtstraße฀14 Telefax: +43฀1฀6106140 Telefax: +41฀44฀928฀24฀48
36039฀Fulda,฀Germany E-Mail: info@jumo.at E-Mail: info@jumo.ch
Postadresse: Internet: www.jumo.at Internet: www.jumo.ch
36035฀Fulda,฀Germany
Telefon: +49฀661฀6003-0
Telefax: +49฀661฀6003-500
E-Mail: mail@jumo.net
Digital฀Thermostat
B 70.1050.0
Operating Instructions
09.07
Overview of operation
Contents
1 Identifying the instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
2 Assembling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
3 Electrical connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
3.1฀Installation฀notes฀ ฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀. 6
3.2฀Connection฀diagram฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀. 7
4 Commissioning the instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
4.1฀Displays฀and฀controls฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀. 8
Contents
4.2฀Setting฀the฀instrument฀functions฀(parameter฀level)฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀. 9
4.3฀Allocating฀user฀rights฀(enabling฀level)฀ .฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀. 15
5 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
6 Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
6.1฀Setup฀program฀ .฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀. 20
7 Alarm messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
1 Identifying the instrument
The฀nameplate฀with฀the฀order฀code฀is฀affixed฀to฀the฀side฀of฀the฀instrument.฀The฀supply฀voltage฀connected฀must฀corre-
spond฀to฀the฀voltage฀specified฀on฀the฀nameplate.
H All฀necessary฀settings฀are฀described฀in฀these฀Operation฀Instructions.฀However,฀if฀any฀difficulties฀should฀still

arise฀during฀start-up,฀you฀are฀asked฀not฀to฀carry฀out฀any฀unauthorized฀manipulations฀on฀the฀unit.฀This฀could
endanger฀your฀rights฀under฀the฀instrument฀warranty!฀Please฀contact฀the฀nearest฀subsidiary฀or฀the฀head฀office
in฀such฀a฀case.
Please฀read฀these฀operating฀instructions฀before฀commissioning฀the฀instrument.฀Keep฀the฀manual฀in฀a฀place
that฀is฀accessible฀to฀all฀users฀at฀all฀times.฀Please฀assist฀us฀to฀improve฀these฀operating฀instructions,฀where฀nec-
essary.
Order฀code
701050/811-02/000
(1) (2) (3) (4)
Included in delivery
1฀Operating฀Instructions฀B฀70.1050.0
2
(1) Basic version
701050/ ฀฀฀฀฀฀ Digital฀Thermostat
(2) Basic type extension
Version
8 factory-set,฀configurable฀within฀the฀measurement฀input฀group฀

9 configured฀to฀customer฀specifications
Measurement input group1
1 Pt฀100฀฀in฀2-wire฀circuit
Pt฀1000฀in฀2-wire฀circuit฀
KTY2X-6
2 Fe-Con฀J
Fe-Con฀L
NiCr-Ni฀K
3 0฀-฀20฀mA
4฀-฀20฀mA
4 0฀-฀10฀V
Number of relays
1 1฀changeover฀contact฀10A฀250V
(3) Supply
02 AC 230V฀+10/-15%฀48 - 63Hz
05 AC 115V฀+10/-15%฀48 - 63Hz
31 DC 12 - 24V฀+15/-15%฀oder฀AC฀24V฀+15/-15%,฀48-63Hz
(4) Approvals
000 none
061 Underwriters฀Laboratories฀Inc.฀(UL)
(1) (2) (3) (4)

Order code ฀/ ฀- ฀฀/
Order example 701050 ฀/ 811 ฀- 02 ฀฀/ 000
฀฀factory-set
1.)฀฀It฀is฀not฀possible฀to฀switch฀from฀one฀meas.฀input฀group฀to฀another.
3
2 Assembling
Disassembling
°C
(1) (2)
2 Assembling
90
55
≤ 75
4
3.1 Installation notes
- The฀choice฀of฀cable,฀the฀installation,฀the฀fusing฀and฀the฀electrical฀connection฀must฀conform฀to฀the฀requirements฀of฀
VDE 0100฀“Regulations฀on฀the฀Installation฀of฀Power฀Circuits฀with฀nominal฀voltages฀below฀1000฀V”฀or฀the฀appropriate฀
local฀regulations.
- The฀electrical฀connection฀must฀only฀be฀carried฀out฀by฀qualified฀personnel.
- The฀electromagnetic฀compatibility฀(EMC)฀complies฀with฀the฀standards฀and฀regulations฀cited฀in฀the฀technical฀data.
Protect฀the฀instrument฀from฀electrostatic฀discharge฀during฀installation฀and฀operation.
- The฀instrument฀is฀not฀suitable฀for฀installation฀in฀areas฀with฀an฀explosion฀hazard฀and฀must฀be฀built฀into฀a฀housing฀that฀
provides฀protection฀against฀fire฀/electrical฀hazards.
- Apart฀from฀faulty฀installation,฀incorrect฀settings฀on฀the฀instrument฀(setpoint,฀parameter฀level฀data)฀may฀also฀affect฀the฀
proper฀functioning฀of฀controlled฀processes฀or฀lead฀to฀damage.฀Provision฀should฀therefore฀always฀be฀made฀for฀safety฀
devices฀that฀are฀independent฀of฀the฀instrument,฀e.฀g.฀overpressure฀valves฀or฀temperature฀limiters/monitors.฀Adjustment฀
must฀be฀restricted฀to฀specialist฀personnel฀(lock฀parameters฀for฀operation).฀Please฀observe฀the฀corresponding฀safety฀reg-
ulations฀in฀this฀matter.฀Unfavorable฀parameter฀adjustment฀may฀result฀in฀unstable฀control.฀The฀process฀value฀obtained฀
should฀therefore฀be฀monitored฀for฀its฀stability฀and฀knowledge฀about฀the฀process฀should฀be฀obtained.
- The฀load฀circuit฀must฀be฀fused฀for฀the฀maximum฀relay฀current฀in฀order฀to฀prevent฀welding฀of฀the฀output฀relay฀contacts฀in฀
the฀event฀of฀a฀short฀circuit.
- Do฀not฀connect฀any฀additional฀loads฀to฀the฀supply฀terminals฀of฀the฀instrument.
- If฀contact฀with฀live฀components฀is฀possible฀while฀working฀on฀the฀instrument,฀it฀must฀be฀disconnected฀on฀both฀poles฀
from฀the฀supply฀(via฀a฀separate฀mains฀supply฀switch,฀for฀instance).฀
- Supply Measurement input and supply
230V AC฀and฀115V AC short-circuit-proof electrically฀isolated฀from฀each฀other
12 — 24V DC฀and฀24V AC not฀short-circuit-proof not฀electrically฀isolated฀from฀each฀other
5
3.2 Connection diagram
The฀ electrical฀ connection

V must฀only฀be฀carried฀out฀by
specialist฀personnel!
6
4 Commissioning the instrument
4.1 Displays and controls

LC display 3-digit฀9-segment฀display,฀6฀mm฀high,฀and฀symbols฀
for฀the฀temperature฀unit
LED K1 LED฀K1฀lights฀up฀when฀the฀relay฀is฀energized.
LED฀K1฀goes฀out฀when฀the฀relay฀is฀de-energized.
Keys programming
increase฀value
select฀operational฀status฀at฀enabling฀level
decrease฀value
select฀operational฀status฀at฀enabling฀level
Setup The฀instrument฀is฀linked฀to฀a฀PC฀via฀a฀PC฀interface฀
interface with฀TTL/RS232฀converter฀and฀adapter฀(3-pole฀pins).
h Connect฀supply฀voltage฀–฀all฀segments฀light฀up฀twice฀as฀a฀test฀(segment฀test).
When฀everything฀has฀been฀connected฀up฀correctly฀on฀the฀instrument,฀the฀present฀process฀value฀will฀be฀shown.
If฀an฀alarm฀message฀appears,฀see฀Chapter฀7฀“Alarm฀messages”.
The฀relay฀operates฀according฀to฀the฀controller฀type฀that฀was฀set,฀see฀Chapter฀4.2฀“Setting฀the฀instrument฀functions
(parameter฀level)”.
7
4.2 Setting the instrument functions (parameter level)
H Time-out
If฀no฀key฀is฀pressed฀for฀60฀seconds,฀the฀instrument฀automatically฀switches฀back฀to฀process฀value฀display,

see฀Overview of operation฀on฀the฀first฀inside฀page.
The฀instrument฀functions฀and฀values฀are฀set฀at฀the฀parameter฀level.฀
h Press฀ ฀for฀3฀seconds฀and฀ ฀will฀appear฀alternately.
h Set฀code฀72฀for฀accessing฀the฀parameter฀level฀by฀using฀the฀ ฀and฀ ฀keys.

The฀longer฀the฀key฀is฀pressed,฀the฀faster฀the฀value฀will฀change.
h Acknowledge฀with฀ ,฀
parameter name฀and฀value฀appear฀alternately,฀e.g. .
h Set฀value฀within฀the฀specified฀value฀range฀by฀using฀the฀ ฀and฀ ฀keys.

h Acknowledge฀settings฀with฀ .
h Set฀next฀parameter,฀see฀Overview of operation฀on฀the฀first฀inside฀page.
H Switching parameters out of display:

The฀table฀below฀lists฀all฀the฀parameters฀for฀each฀instrument฀type.
Depending฀on฀the฀type฀designation฀on฀the฀nameplate,฀parameters฀which฀are฀not฀required฀can฀be฀hidden.
8
Controller
Value range
Parameter Meaning
from...factory-set...to
SP.L ... 0.0 ... SP.H

Setpoint
target฀value฀of฀control฀action฀(temperature฀value,฀current฀or฀voltage).
Hysteresis 0.2 ... 1.0 ... 99.9
Low setpoint limit -999 ... -50 ... +999

SP฀can฀be฀set฀up฀to฀this฀low฀limit.
High setpoint limit฀ -999 ... 500 ... +999
SP฀can฀be฀set฀up฀to฀this฀high฀limit.
Controller type
:฀cooling฀controller ,
:฀heating฀controller
9
Value range
Parameter Meaning
Switch-on delay after power-on 0 ... 60min
for฀staggered฀switch-on฀of฀several฀equipment฀units.

Minimum ON time 0฀...฀999฀s
Minimum OFF time
Here฀you฀can฀set฀the฀time฀for฀which฀the฀equipment฀unit,฀for฀instance,฀has฀to
remain฀switched฀on฀or฀off.฀These฀values฀depend฀on฀the฀heating฀or฀cooling 0฀...฀999฀s
unit฀being฀used฀(observe฀manufacturer’s฀specifications).
In฀the฀event฀of฀a฀probe error, the฀relay฀is฀operated฀immediately฀as฀set฀in
parameter฀S.Er.
Alarms
Low alarm limit -999 ... -200 ... +999
As฀ soon฀ as฀ the฀ process฀ value฀ falls฀ below฀ this฀ limit,฀ the฀ alarm฀ message
฀is฀displayed,฀see฀Chapter฀7฀“Alarm฀messages”.
High alarm limit -999฀...฀500฀...฀+999
As฀ soon฀ as฀ the฀ process฀ value฀ goes฀ above฀ this฀ limit,฀ the฀ alarm฀ message
฀is฀displayed,฀see฀Chapter฀7฀“Alarm฀messages”.
Alarm hysteresis 0.2 ... 1.0 ... 99.9
The฀hysteresis฀that฀was฀set฀is฀below฀ ฀or฀above฀ .
Alarm suppression time 0฀...฀60฀min
An฀alarm฀from฀ ฀or฀ ฀is฀not฀displayed฀for฀this฀time.฀If฀an฀alarm฀is
present฀for฀longer฀than฀ ,฀then฀it฀will฀be฀displayed.
10
Value range
Parameter Meaning
Response to over/underrange 0,฀1
0:฀relay฀de-energized

1:฀relay฀energized
Input
Sensor฀connected฀in฀2-wire฀circuit Pt100:
Measurement฀input฀group฀1฀on฀Type:฀701050/X1X-1-XX Pt1000:฀
KTY2X-6:฀
or฀
Measurement฀input฀group฀2฀on฀Type:฀701050/X2X-1-XX Fe-Con฀J:
Fe-Con฀L:
NiCr-Ni฀K: ฀
or฀
Measurement฀input฀group฀3฀on฀Type:฀701050/X3X-1-XX 0(4)...฀20฀mA:
฀ ฀/฀
Measurement฀input฀group฀4฀on฀Type:฀701050/X4X-1-XX 0฀...฀10฀V:฀ ฀/฀
Start value฀for฀indication฀range฀with฀measurement฀input฀voltage฀or฀current. -999฀...฀0...฀+999
Example:฀ input฀ signal฀ (e.g.฀ 4 — 20mA)฀ is฀ to฀ be฀ represented฀ on฀ the฀ display
from฀-10฀to฀50.฀Setting:฀S.cL=฀-10฀and฀S.cH=50.
End value฀for฀indication฀range฀with฀measurement฀input฀voltage฀or฀current -999฀...฀100...฀+999
Signal฀for฀measurement฀input฀current:฀0฀=฀0 — 20mA 0,฀1

1฀=฀4 — 20mA
11
Value range
Parameter Meaning
Process value offset -99.9฀...฀0.0฀...฀99.9
process฀value฀offset฀in฀°C,฀°F฀or฀digit฀(no฀unit)

Lead compensation resistance 0.0฀...฀0.0฀...฀99.9฀in฀Ω
This฀value฀is฀used฀for฀compensating฀the฀resistance฀of฀the฀probe฀lead฀for฀re-
sistance฀sensors฀and฀is฀dependent฀on฀the฀lead฀length.
For฀ best฀ temperature฀ measurement฀ results,฀ the฀ resistance฀ value฀ of฀ the
probe฀lead฀has฀to฀be฀entered฀here.
A
If฀the฀total฀resistance฀at฀the฀measurement฀input฀(sensor฀resistance฀+฀
selected฀value฀for฀OF.r)฀exceeds฀320฀Ω with฀Pt100฀or฀3200฀Ω with฀
Pt1000/KTY2x-6,฀a฀measurement฀error฀will฀occur฀!
Unit °C,฀°F฀or
for฀the฀indicated฀process฀value no฀(=฀no฀unit)
A
For฀settings฀in฀°F,฀the฀process฀value฀will฀be฀converted฀correspond-
ingly.฀All฀other฀setting,฀such฀as฀for฀SP,฀will฀retain฀their฀values.
12
Value range
Parameter Meaning
Filter time constant 0.1฀...฀0.8฀...฀99.9฀s
For฀adapting฀the฀digital฀input฀filter.

At฀a฀signal฀step,฀63%฀of฀the฀changes฀are฀registered฀after฀the฀filter฀time฀con-
stant฀has฀elapsed.
Values฀between฀0.1฀and฀0.7฀are฀interpreted฀as฀0.8฀(sampling฀time).
If฀the฀filter฀time฀constant฀is฀long:
-฀high฀damping฀of฀interference฀signals
-฀slow฀reaction฀of฀the฀process฀value฀display฀to฀process฀value฀changes
H Return฀to฀the฀first฀parameter฀SP฀of฀the฀parameter฀level฀by฀pressing฀ ฀>฀3฀sec.
13
4.3 Allocating user rights (enabling level)
The฀setting฀at฀the฀enabling฀level฀defines฀user rights฀which฀determine฀whether฀a฀parameter฀is฀shown฀at฀the฀operating
level,฀can฀be฀edited฀or฀is฀not฀shown฀at฀all.

h Press฀ ฀for฀3฀seconds฀and฀ ฀appears.
h Set฀code฀82฀for฀accessing฀the฀enabling฀level฀using฀ ฀and฀ .
h Acknowledge฀with฀ ฀
Parameter฀and฀User rights฀blink฀in฀alternation฀e. g. .
h Use฀the฀ ฀and฀ ฀keys฀to฀set฀user฀right ,฀ ฀or฀ .
User right Display Factory setting
Parameter฀can be edited
Parameter฀is shown -
Parameter฀is not shown all฀other฀parameters
h Acknowledge฀settings฀with฀ .
h Set฀next฀parameter,฀see฀Overview of operation฀on฀the฀first฀inside฀page.
14
5 Operation
5 Operation
15
6 Technical data
Meas. input Designation Range Meas. accuracy1/ Recognition of ...
ambient tempera-
ture error Probe short- Probe break
circuit
Resistance Pt100฀EN฀60 751 -200 to +600°C 0.1%/฀≤100ppm/°C yes yes
thermometer
Pt1000฀EN฀60 751 -200 to +600°C 0.1%/฀≤100ppm/°C yes yes
6 Technical data
KTY2X-6฀(PTC) -50 to +150฀°C 1%/฀≤100ppm/°C yes yes
Resistance฀0 — 3000฀Ω customer฀table฀3 0.1%/฀≤100ppm/°C฀3 =฀0Ω yes
Measuring฀current฀with฀Pt100:฀0.2฀mA,฀with฀Pt1000,฀KTY2X-6฀and฀resistance:฀0.02฀mA
Lead฀compensation฀is฀settable฀via฀the฀parameter฀Lead฀compensation฀resistance฀ ฀.
Total฀resistance฀(sensor+lead)฀must฀not฀exceed฀320Ω with฀Pt100฀and฀3200Ω with฀Pt1000,฀KTY2X-6฀and฀resistance.
Thermo- Fe-Con฀J฀EN฀60 584 -200 to +999฀°C 0.4%/฀≤100ppm/°C฀2 no yes
couples 2
Fe-Con฀L฀DIN฀43 710 -200 to +900฀°C 0.4%/฀≤100ppm/°C฀ no yes
NiCr-Ni฀K฀EN฀60 584 -200 to +999฀°C 0.4%/฀≤100ppm/°C฀2 no yes
-10฀to฀60฀mV ฀customer฀table฀3 0.1%/฀≤100ppm/°C฀3 no yes
For฀the฀voltage฀input฀(-10฀to฀60฀mV),฀the฀terminal฀temperature฀compensation฀for฀thermocouples฀can฀be฀used.
Internal฀terminal฀temperature฀compensation฀can฀be฀switched฀off฀through฀the฀setup฀program฀(0°C).
16
Meas. input Designation Range Meas. accuracy1/ Recognition of ...
ambient tempera-
ture error Probe short- Probe break
circuit
Current 0 to 20฀mA -2 to 22฀mA 0.1%/฀≤100ppm/°C฀3 no no
scalable฀with฀
฀and฀ ฀ ฀
or฀customer฀table
4 to 20฀mA 2.4 to 21.6฀mA 0.1%/฀≤100ppm/°C฀3 yes yes
6 Technical data
scalable฀with฀
฀and฀ ฀
Input฀resistance฀RIN฀฀≤ 3Ω
Voltage 0 — 10฀V -1 to 11฀V 0.1%/฀≤100ppm/°C no no
scalable฀with฀
฀and฀ ฀
or฀customer฀table
Input฀resistance฀RIN฀≥ 100kΩ
1.)฀The฀accuracy฀refers฀to฀the฀measuring฀range฀span.
2.)฀valid฀from฀-50°C
3.)฀A฀valid฀customer฀table฀must฀be฀entered฀through฀the฀setup฀program฀and฀switched฀over฀to฀ ฀in฀the฀instrument.฀
฀฀฀฀This฀may฀reduce฀the฀measuring฀accuracy.฀
Ambient conditions
Ambient฀temperature฀range 0 to +55°C,฀with฀side-by-side฀mounting:฀0 to +40°C
Storage฀temperature฀range -30 to +70°C
Climatic฀conditions ≤฀75%฀rel.฀humidity,฀no฀condensation
17
Output
Relais฀K1฀(changeover฀contact) 150,000฀operations฀at฀10A/250V AC฀50Hz฀resistive฀load
800,000฀operations฀at฀3A/250V AC฀50Hz฀resistive฀load
Supply
Supply฀voltage 230V AC฀+10/-15%,฀48 — 63Hz฀or฀115V AC฀+10/-15%,฀48 — 63Hz
(isolated฀from฀measurement฀input)
12 — 24V DC฀+15/-15%,฀24V AC฀+15/-15%,฀48 — 63Hz
(not฀isolated฀from฀measurement฀input)
6 Technical data
Power฀consumption <฀2VA
Housing
Material polycarbonate
Mounting DIN฀rail฀35mm฀x฀7.5mm฀to฀EN฀50 022
Operating฀position unrestricted
Weight approx.฀110g
Protection IP20
Flammability฀class UL฀94฀V0
Electrical data
Data฀backup EEPROM
Connection screw฀terminals฀for฀wire฀cross-sections฀up฀to฀2.5฀mm2฀
Electromagnetic฀compatibility EN฀61 326
฀฀interference฀emission Class฀B
฀฀immunity฀to฀interference to฀industrial฀requirements
Electrical฀safety EN฀61 010,฀Part฀1,฀overvoltage฀category฀III,฀pollution฀degree฀2
18
6.1 Setup program
The฀program฀and฀the฀interface฀with฀adapter฀are฀available฀as฀accessories฀and฀offer฀the฀following฀advantages:
- simple฀and฀convenient฀parameterization฀and฀archiving฀from฀a฀PC
- simple฀duplicating฀of฀parameters฀on฀instruments฀of฀the฀same฀type
- possibility฀of฀entering฀a฀linearization฀table
Minimum hardware and software requirements:
6 Technical data
- PC฀Pentium฀100฀or฀compatible
- 128฀MB฀RAM,฀16฀MB฀free฀on฀hard฀disk
- CD-ROM฀drive
- free฀COM฀interface
h Link฀PC฀interface฀to฀the฀RS232฀interface฀on฀the฀PC
h Insert฀black฀adapter฀(3-pole฀pins)฀
into฀the฀side฀of฀the฀instrument
19
7 Alarm messages
The฀following฀alarm฀messages฀can฀be฀shown฀in฀the฀temperature฀display:
Error message Cause Elimination
Display overrun - Check฀sensor฀and฀connecting฀cable฀for฀damage฀
The฀measured฀value฀is฀too฀large฀ or฀short-circuit
and฀outside฀the฀range.
- Check฀whether฀the฀correct฀sensor฀has฀been฀set฀or฀
connected
7 Alarm messages
Display underrun
The฀measured฀value฀is฀too฀small฀ v Chapter฀4฀“Commissioning฀the฀instrument”
and฀is฀outside฀the฀range.
H
These฀messages฀are฀only฀output฀to
the฀temperature฀display.
Time฀for switch-on delay฀after฀ h Cancel฀switch-on฀delay

power-on฀has฀elapsed. with฀ ฀+฀
With฀display฀over/underrun,฀the฀
switch-on฀delay฀becomes
ineffective.
Value฀has฀fallen฀below฀the฀low฀ h Depending฀on฀the฀controller฀type,฀check฀whether฀
alarm limit the฀heating฀or฀cooling฀unit฀functions฀faultlessly.
h Check฀whether฀the฀installed฀relay฀fuse฀is฀still฀in฀
good฀working฀order.
Value฀has฀gone฀above฀the฀high
alarm limit The฀ alarm฀ disappears฀ as฀ soon฀ as฀ the฀ process฀ value฀ goes
above฀or฀below฀the฀AL฀limits฀by฀the฀amount฀of฀the฀hysteresis.
20
JUMO GmbH & Co. KG JUMO Instrument Co. Ltd. JUMO Process Control, Inc.
Street฀adress: JUMO฀House 8฀Technology฀Boulevard
Moltkestraße฀13฀-฀31 Temple฀Bank,฀Riverway Canastota,฀NY฀13032,฀USA
36039฀Fulda,฀Germany Harlow,฀Essex฀CM20฀2TT,฀UK Phone:฀ 315-697-JUMO
Delivery฀address: Phone: +44฀1279฀635533 1-800-554-JUMO
Mackenrodtstraße฀14 Fax: +44฀1279฀635262 Fax: 315-697-5867
36039฀Fulda,฀Germany e-mail: sales@jumo.co.uk e-mail: info@jumo.us
Postal฀address: Internet: www.jumo.co.uk Internet: www.jumo.us
36035฀Fulda,฀Germany
Phone: +49฀661฀6003-0
Fax: +49฀661฀6003-607
e-mail: mail@jumo.net
Thermostat฀numérique
B 70.1050.0
Notice de mise en service
09.07
Aperçu des fonctions
Affichage de la température P >฀3 secondes L’affichage฀change
30 secondes Timeout
ou P + (simultanément)
Saisir le code
Incrémenter Incrémenter
Décrémenter Décrémenter
ou฀30฀secondes Timeout
P P P P
Niveau “Utilisateur” Niveau “Paramétrage” Niveau “Déverrouillage”

Paramètres฀sélectionnés฀au Les฀paramètres฀préréglés฀en฀usine Définir฀les฀paramètres฀qui฀peuvent
niveau฀“Déverrouillage” peuvent฀être฀modifiés฀ici. être฀affichés฀au฀niveau฀“Utilisateur”
ou฀qui฀peuvent฀être฀édités.
L’affichage฀change L’affichage฀change L’affichage฀change
Incrémenter Incrémenter
Peut฀être
Décrémenter Décrémenter
édité
Afficher
P P P P P Ne฀pas
Autres฀paramètres Autres฀paramètres déverrouiller
Autres฀paramètres
…฀Provenant฀du฀niveau
xxx “Déverrouillage” Dernier paramètre
60 secondes Timeout฀ou P+ (simultanément)

Sommaire
1 Identification de l’appareil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
2 Montage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
3 Raccordement électrique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
3.1฀Instructions฀à฀propos฀de฀l’installation฀ ฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀. 5
3.2฀Schéma฀de฀raccordement฀฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀. 6
4 Mise en service de l’appareil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Sommaire
4.1฀Affichage฀et฀commande฀ .฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀. 7
4.2฀฀฀Réglage฀des฀fonctions฀de฀l’appareil฀(niveau฀"Paramétrage")฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀. 8
4.3฀Attribution฀du฀code฀d’accès฀(niveau฀"Déverrouillage")฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀. 14
5 Commande . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
6 Caractéristiques techniques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
6.1฀Logiciel฀Setup฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀.฀. 19
7 Messages d’erreur . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
1 Identification de l’appareil
La฀plaque฀signalétique฀est฀collée฀sur฀la฀partie฀supérieure฀de฀l’appareil.฀La฀tension฀appliquée฀doit฀correspondre฀à฀celle
indiquée฀sur฀la฀plaque฀signalétique.
Tous฀les฀réglages฀et฀toutes฀les฀interventions฀éventuellement฀nécessaires฀sont฀décrits฀dans฀cette฀notice.฀Ce-
pendant,฀si฀vous฀rencontrez฀des฀difficultés฀lors฀de฀la฀mise฀en฀service฀de฀cet฀appareil,฀ne฀procédez฀en฀aucun
cas฀ à฀ des฀ manipulations฀ inadaptées฀ qui฀ pourraient฀ compromettre฀ votre฀ ฀ recours฀ en฀ garantie฀ mais฀ prenez
contact฀avec฀nos฀services.
Veuillez฀lire฀attentivement฀cette฀notice฀avant฀de฀procéder฀à฀la฀mise฀en฀service฀de฀l’appareil฀et฀conservez฀la฀à
un฀endroit฀accessible฀à฀tous฀les฀utilisateurs.
Clé฀de฀commande
701050/811-02/000
(1) (2) (3) (4)
Livraison
1฀notice฀de฀mise฀en฀service฀B฀70.1050.0
2
(1)Exécution de base
701050/ ฀฀฀฀฀฀ Thermostat฀numérique
(2) Extension au type de base
Exécution
8 réglage฀d’usine,฀configurable
9 configuré฀suivant฀spécifications
Entrée de mesure 1
1 Pt฀100฀en฀montage฀2฀fils
Pt฀1000฀en฀montage฀2฀fils฀
KTY2X-6
2 Fe-CuNi฀„J“
Fe-CuNi฀„L“
NiCr-Ni฀„K“
3 0 à 20฀mA
4 à 20฀mA
4 0 à 10฀V
Nombre de relais
1 1relais฀inverseur฀10A/230V
(3) Tension d’alimentation
02 AC 230V฀+10/-15%฀48 à 63Hz
05 AC 115V฀+10/-15%฀48 à 63Hz
31 DC 12 ... 24V฀+15/-15%฀ou฀AC฀24V฀+15/-15%,฀48 à 63Hz
(4) Homologation
000 Aucune
061 Underwriters฀Laboratories฀Inc.฀(UL)
(1) (2) (3) (4)

Code de commande ฀/ ฀- ฀฀/
Exemple de commande 701050 ฀/ 811 ฀- 02 ฀฀/ 000
฀Réglage฀d’usine
1.)฀Les฀groupes฀d’entrées฀de฀mesure฀ne฀peuvent฀être฀permutés
3
2 Montage
Démontage
°C
(1) (2)
90
55
2 Montage
0
≤ 75
4
3 Raccordement électrique
3.1 Instructions à propos de l’installation
- Veuillez฀respecter฀la฀réglementation฀en฀vigueur฀aussi฀bien฀pour฀le฀choix฀du฀matériel฀des฀lignes,฀pour฀l’installa-
tion,฀que฀pour฀le฀raccordement฀électrique฀de฀l’appareil.
- Le฀raccordement฀électrique฀ne฀doit฀être฀effectué฀que฀par฀du฀personnel฀qualifié.
- La฀ compatibilité฀ électromagnétique฀ correspond฀ aux฀ normes฀ et฀ prescriptions฀ mentionnés฀ dans฀ les฀ caractéri-
stiques฀techniques.
- Le฀thermostat฀n’est฀pas฀adapté฀pour฀être฀utilisé฀dans฀des฀atmosphères฀explosibles.
- Non฀seulement฀une฀installation฀défectueuse฀mais฀également฀des฀valeurs฀mal฀réglées฀sur฀l’appareil฀(consignes,฀
données฀de฀paramétrage฀et฀de฀configuration,฀modifications฀effectuées฀à฀l’intérieur฀de฀l’appareil)฀peuvent฀altérer฀
le฀bon฀fonctionnement฀du฀process฀qui฀suit฀ou฀le฀détruire.฀C’est฀pourquoi,฀il฀doit฀toujours฀y฀avoir฀des฀dispositifs฀
de฀sécurité฀indépendants฀de฀l’appareil)฀(soupapes฀de฀surpression฀ou฀limiteur/contrôleur฀de฀température฀par฀
exemple)฀et฀le฀réglage฀ne฀doit฀être฀effectué฀que฀par฀du฀personnel฀qualifié.฀Nous฀vous฀prions฀de฀respecter฀les฀
règles฀de฀sécurité฀correspondantes.฀L’autooptimisation฀ne฀permet฀pas฀de฀contrôler฀tous฀les฀systèmes฀asservis฀
imaginables,฀un฀paramétrage฀instable฀est฀donc฀théoriquement฀possible.฀C’est฀pourquoi,฀il฀faut฀contrôler฀la฀sta-
bilité฀de฀la฀valeur฀réelle฀atteinte.
- En฀cas฀de฀court-circuit฀externe฀dans฀la฀charge,฀pour฀empêcher฀un฀soudage฀des฀relais฀de฀sortie,฀le฀circuit฀de฀
charge฀doit฀être฀protégé฀par฀un฀fusible฀calibré฀au฀courant฀maximal฀du฀relais
- Ne฀฀raccorder฀aucun฀autre฀récepteur฀aux฀bornes฀de฀l’alimentation฀de฀l’appareil
- Le฀fusible฀externe฀de฀l’alimentation,฀dépendant฀de฀la฀section฀de฀fil,฀฀ne฀doit฀pas฀dépasser฀la฀valeur฀de฀1฀A.฀
Séparer฀le฀thermostat฀2฀broches฀฀de฀l’alimentation,฀lorsque฀des฀pièces฀sous฀tension฀peuvent฀฀être฀touchées฀au฀
cours฀de฀travaux.
- Tension d’alimentation Entrée de mesure et tension d’alimentation
230V AC฀฀et฀115V AC Insensible฀au฀court-circuit séparée฀galvaniquement฀l’une฀de฀l’autre
12 à 24V DC฀et฀24V AC฀ n’est฀pas฀insensible฀au฀ n’est฀pas฀séparée฀galvaniquement฀l’une฀de฀l’autre
court-circuit
5
3.2 Schéma de raccordement
Le฀ raccordement฀ élec-
V trique฀ ne฀ doit฀ être฀ effec-

tué฀que฀par฀du฀personnel
qualifié฀!
6
4 Mise en service de l’appareil
4.1 Affichage et commande

Indicateur Indicateur฀à฀3฀chiffres฀de฀6฀mm฀de฀hauteur฀avec฀
LCD symboles฀pour฀température
LED K1 LED฀K1฀s’allume฀lorsque฀le฀relais฀est฀excité.
LED฀K1฀s’éteint฀lorsque฀le฀relais฀est฀désexcité.
Touches Programmer
Incrémenter฀la฀valeur
Sélectionner฀l’état฀de฀commande฀au฀
niveau฀"Déverrouillage"
Décrémenter฀la฀valeur
Sélectionner฀l’état฀de฀commande฀au฀
niveau฀"Déverrouillage"
Interface Le฀thermostat฀est฀relié฀via฀une฀interface฀pour฀PC฀
Setup avec฀un฀convertisseur฀TTL/RS232฀+฀adaptateur฀(à฀3฀
plots)฀à฀un฀PC฀฀
h Appliquer฀la฀tension฀d’alimentation,฀tous฀les฀segments฀s’allument฀2฀fois฀pour฀le฀test฀฀(test฀segment).
Lorsque฀tout฀est฀correctement฀raccordé฀au฀niveau฀de฀l’appareil,฀la฀température฀actuelle฀s’affiche฀(Aff.฀de฀la฀temp.).
Un฀message฀d’erreur฀apparaît,฀voir฀Chapitre฀7฀„Messages฀d’erreur“.
Le฀relais฀fonctionne฀suivant฀le฀type฀de฀régulateur฀réglé,฀voir฀Chapitre฀4.2฀„Réglage฀des฀fonctions฀de฀l’appareil฀(niveau
"Paramétrage")“.
7
4.2 Réglage des fonctions de l’appareil (niveau "Paramétrage")
H Timeout :
Lorsqu’aucune฀touche฀n’est฀actionnée฀pendant฀60฀s,฀l’appareil฀réaffiche฀automatiquement฀la฀température,
voir฀"Aperçu฀des฀fonctions".

Fonctions฀et฀valeurs฀sont฀réglées฀au฀niveau฀"Paramétrage".฀
h Appuyer฀sur฀la฀touche฀ ฀pendant฀3฀s฀et฀ ฀s’affiche฀en฀alternance.
h Entrer฀le฀code฀72฀pour฀avoir฀accès฀au฀niveau฀"Paramétrage"฀au฀moyen฀des฀touches฀ ฀et฀ ฀.
Plus฀on฀maintient฀la฀touche฀enfoncée,฀plus฀la฀valeur฀défile฀vite.
h Valider฀avec฀฀ ฀
Le฀nom฀du paramètre฀et฀la฀valeur฀s’affichent฀en฀alternance,฀par฀ex. .
h Régler฀la฀valeur฀dans฀la฀plage฀de฀valeurs฀indiquée฀à฀l’aide฀des฀touches฀ ฀et฀ ฀.
h Valider฀les฀réglages฀avec฀ ฀.
h Pour฀régler฀les฀paramètres฀suivants,฀voir฀"Aperçu฀des฀fonctions".
H Suppression de paramètres :
Tous฀les฀paramètres฀de฀chaque฀type฀d’appareil฀sont฀énumérés฀dans฀le฀tableau฀ci-dessous.
Suivant฀la฀désignation฀du฀type฀de฀la฀plaque฀signalétique,฀les฀paramètres฀inutiles฀sont฀supprimés.
8
Régulateur
Plage des valeurs
Paramètre Signification
de...d’usine...à
Consigne SP.L à 0.0 à SP.H

Régulera฀sur฀cette฀valeur฀(valeur฀de฀la฀température,฀courant฀ou฀tension).
Hystérésis 0.2 à 1.0 à 99.9
T/°C Froid T/°C Chaud
SP฀=฀70฀°C
HYS
69฀°C
9
HYS
SP฀=฀8฀°C
t t
Relais Relais
excité excité
Désexcité désexcité
t t
Limite inférieure de la consigne -999 à -50 à +999

SP฀peut฀être฀réglé฀jusqu’à฀cette฀limite฀inférieure.
Limite supérieure de la consigne -999 à 500 à +999
SP฀peut฀être฀réglé฀jusqu’à฀cette฀limite฀supérieure.
Type de régulateur
:฀Régulateur฀de฀froid ,
:฀Régulateur฀de฀chaud
9
Plage des valeurs
de...d’usine...à
Enclenchement retardé après mise sous tension 0 à 60min
Pour฀la฀mise฀sous฀tension฀différée฀de฀plusieurs฀unités฀de฀l’installation.

Temps d’activation min. 0฀à฀999฀s
Temps de désactivation min.
On฀peut฀régler฀à฀ce฀niveau฀la฀durée฀min.฀pendant฀laquelle฀l’unité฀doit฀restée
activée/désactivée.฀ Ces฀ données฀ dépendent฀ du฀ type฀ d’appareil฀ (chaud฀ ou 0฀à฀999฀s
froid)฀utilisé฀(veuillez฀tenir฀compte฀des฀informations฀fournies฀par฀le฀construc-
teur).
En฀cas฀de฀défectuosité de la sonde฀le฀relais฀est฀immédiatement฀comman-
dé,฀comme฀réglé฀dans฀Paramètre฀S.Er.
Alarme
Limite inférieure de la température de l’alarme -999 à -200 à +999
Dès฀que฀la฀valeur฀réelle฀passe฀sous฀cette฀limite฀pendant฀le฀mode฀chaud฀ou
froid฀un฀message฀d’erreur฀s’affiche฀ ฀voir฀chap.฀7฀„Messages฀d’erreur“.
Limite supérieure de la température de l’alarme -999฀à฀500฀à฀+999
Dès฀que฀la฀valeur฀réelle฀dépasse฀cette฀limite฀pendant฀le฀mode฀chaud฀ou฀froid
un฀message฀d’erreur฀s’affiche฀ ฀voir฀chapitre฀7฀„Messages฀d’erreur“.
Hystérésis de l’alarme 0.2 à 1.0 à 99.9
L’hystérésis฀réglée฀se฀situe฀en฀dessous฀฀ ฀ou฀au฀dessus฀ .
Délai de suppression de l’alarme 0฀à฀60฀min
฀ ฀ou฀฀ ฀ne฀s’affiche฀pas฀pour฀cette฀période.฀Une฀alarme฀plus฀lon-
gue฀qu฀ ฀est฀affichée.
10
Plage des valeurs
de...d’usine...à
Comportement en cas de dépassement inférieur/supérieur de 0,฀1
l’étendue de mesure
0฀:฀Relais฀désexcité

1฀:฀Relais฀excité
Entrée
Capteur฀raccordé฀en฀montage฀2฀fils Pt 100 :
Groupe฀d’entrée฀de฀mesure฀1฀฀pour฀type฀:฀701050/X1X-1-XX Pt฀1000฀:฀
KTY2X-6฀:฀
ou฀
Groupe฀d’entrée฀de฀mesure฀2฀฀pour฀type฀:฀701050/X2X-1-XX Fe-CuNi฀„J“฀:
Fe-CuNi฀„L“฀:
NiCr-Ni฀„K“฀: ฀
ou฀
Groupe฀d’entrée฀de฀mesure฀3฀฀pour฀type฀:฀701050/X3X-1-XX 0(4)฀à฀20฀mA:
฀ ฀/฀
Groupe฀d’entrée฀de฀mesure฀4฀฀pour฀type฀:฀701050/X4X-1-XX 0฀à฀10฀V:฀ ฀/฀
Valeur initiale ฀pour฀plage฀d’indication฀pour฀entrée฀courant฀ou฀tension -999฀à฀0฀à฀+999
Exemple฀:฀signal฀d’entrée฀(par฀ex.฀4฀à฀20mA)฀il฀faut฀afficher฀-10 à 50.฀
Régler฀pour฀S.cL=฀-10฀et฀S.cH=50.
Valeur finale฀pour฀plage฀d’indication฀pour฀entrée฀courant฀et฀tension -999฀à฀100฀à฀+999
Signal฀pour฀entrée฀de฀mesure฀courant฀: 0฀=฀0 à 20mA 0,฀1

1฀=฀4 à 20mA
11
Plage des valeurs
de...d’usine...à
Offset de la valeur réelle pour฀ plage฀ d’indication฀ pour฀ entrée฀ courant฀ ou -99,9฀à฀0,0฀à฀99,9
tension

Offset฀de฀la฀valeur฀réelle฀en฀K,฀°F฀ou฀Digit฀(pas฀d’unité)
Résistance de tarage de ligne 0,0฀à฀0,0฀à฀99,9฀en฀Ω
Cette฀valeur฀sert฀à฀compenser฀la฀résistance฀de฀la฀ligne฀du฀capteur฀et฀dépend
de฀la฀longueur฀de฀la฀ligne.
Pour฀mesurer฀la฀température฀du฀mieux฀possible,฀il฀faut฀saisir฀ici฀la฀résistance
ohmique฀de฀la฀ligne฀du฀capteur฀lorsque฀celui-ci฀a฀court-circuité.
A Résistance฀totale฀dans฀la฀plage฀de฀mesure฀Pt100฀:฀320฀Ω et
Pt1000/KTY2x-6฀:฀3200฀Ω
Unité °C,฀°F฀ou
pour฀la฀valeur฀réelle฀affichée no฀(=฀pas฀d’unité)
A
Seule฀la฀valeur฀mesurée฀est฀recalculée฀en฀cas฀de฀conversion฀en฀°F.฀
Toutes฀les฀autres฀grandeurs฀de฀température฀comme฀SP฀par฀ex.฀
gardent฀leur฀valeur.
12
Plage des valeurs
de...d’usine...à
Constante de temps du filtre 0,1฀à฀0,8฀à฀99,9฀s
Pour฀adapter฀le฀filtre฀d’entrée฀numérique.
En฀cas฀de฀perturbation฀du฀signal฀(parasites,...),฀63%฀des฀modifications฀sont

enregistrés฀après฀la฀constante฀du฀filtre.
Les฀ valeurs฀ comprises฀ entre฀ 0,1฀ et฀ 0,7฀ sont฀ interprétées฀ comme฀ étant฀ 0,8
(temps฀de฀scrutation).
Lorsque฀la฀constante฀de฀temps฀du฀filtre฀est฀élevée฀:
-amortissement฀important฀des฀signaux฀฀parasites
-réaction฀lente฀de฀l’indication฀de฀valeur฀réelle฀par฀rapport฀aux฀modifications
H Revenir฀au฀premier฀paramètre฀SP฀du฀niveau฀"Paramétrage"฀au฀moyen฀de฀ ฀>฀3฀secondes.
13
4.3 Attribution du code d’accès (niveau "Déverrouillage")
Le฀réglage฀au฀niveau฀"Déverrouillage"฀définit฀les฀droits d’accès฀qui฀déterminent฀si฀un฀paramètre฀s’affiche฀ou฀non฀au
niveau฀"Utilisateur"฀et฀s’il฀peut฀être฀édité.
h Maintenir฀la฀touche฀ ฀enfoncée฀pendant฀3฀secondes฀et฀ ฀s’affiche.

h Saisir฀le฀code฀82฀pour฀accéder฀au฀niveau฀"Déverrouillage"฀à฀l’aide฀des฀touches฀ ฀et฀ ฀.
h Valider฀avec฀฀ ฀
Paramètre฀et฀Droits d’accès฀clignotent฀en฀alternance,฀par฀ex. .
h Régler฀au฀moyen฀des฀touches฀ ฀et฀ ฀un฀droit฀d’accès ,฀ ฀ou฀ .
Droit d’accès Afichage d’usine
Le฀paramètre฀est฀réglable
Le฀paramètre฀s’affiche฀ -
Le฀paramètre฀ne s’affiche pas฀ tous฀les฀autres฀paramètres
h Valider฀les฀réglages฀avec฀ ฀.
h Régler฀le฀paramètre฀suivant,฀voir฀"Aperçu฀des฀fonctions".
14
5 Commande
Afficher la version software Modifier la consigne et les autres
paramètres Affichage฀de฀la฀température
P +
(Simultanément)
(Exemple)
ou฀Timeout฀(après฀30฀secondes฀env.)
5 Commande
P
Température฀modifiée
P
Afficher฀les฀autres฀paramètres
(suivant฀droit฀d’accès฀réglé
au฀niveau฀“Déverrouillage”)
15
6 Caractéristiques techniques
Entrée Désignation Etendue de mesure Précision1/ Détection de ...
Influence de la
température ambi- court-circuit rupture de
ante de sonde sonde
Sonde à rési- Pt฀100฀EN฀60751 -200 à +600°C 0,1%/฀≤100ppm/K oui oui

stance
Pt฀1000฀EN฀60751 -200 à +600°C 0,1%/฀≤100ppm/K oui oui
KTY2X-6฀(PTC) -50฀à฀+150฀°C 1%/฀≤100ppm/K oui oui
Résistance฀0 à 3000฀ Tableau฀spécifique฀au฀ 0,1%/฀≤100ppm/K฀3 =฀0Ω oui
Ω client฀฀3
Courant฀avec฀Pt100฀:฀0,2฀mA,฀avec฀Pt1000,฀KTY2X-6฀et฀résistance฀:฀0,02฀mA
tarage฀de฀ligne฀réglable฀via฀le฀paramètre฀Résistance฀de฀tarage฀de฀ligne฀ ฀
La฀résistance฀totale฀Capteur+Ligne฀ne฀doit฀pas฀dépasser฀avec฀Pt100฀320Ω฀et฀avec฀Pt1000,฀KTY2X-6฀et฀rési-
stance฀3200Ω .
Thermo- Fe-CuNi฀„J“฀EN฀ -200฀à฀+999฀°C 0,4%/฀≤100ppm/K฀2 non oui
couples 60584
Fe-CuNi฀„L“฀DIN฀ -200฀à฀+900฀°C 0,4%/฀≤100ppm/K฀2 non oui
43710
NiCr-Ni฀„K“฀EN฀ -200฀à฀+999฀°C 0,4%/฀≤100ppm/K฀2 non oui
60584
-10 à 60฀mV Tableau฀spécifique฀au฀ 0,1%/฀≤100ppm/K฀3 non oui
client฀3
16
Entrée Désignation Etendue de mesure Précision1/ Détection de ...
Influence de la
température ambi- court-circuit rupture de
ante de sonde sonde
Pour฀l’entrée฀tension฀(-10 à 60฀mV)฀il฀est฀possible฀d’utiliser฀la฀compensation฀de฀température฀aux฀bornes฀pour฀ther-
mocouples.
Désactiver฀la฀compensation฀de฀température฀interne฀aux฀bornes฀via฀le฀logiciel฀Setup฀(0°C).
Courant 0฀à฀20฀mA -2฀à฀22฀mA 0,1%/฀≤100ppm/K฀3 non non
mise฀à฀l’échelle฀avec฀
฀et฀ ฀ou฀ ฀
tableau฀spécifique฀cli-
ent
4฀à฀20฀mA 2,4฀à฀21,6฀mA 0,1%/฀≤100ppm/K฀3 oui oui
฀et฀ ฀
Résistance฀d’entrée฀RE฀฀≤ 3Ω
Tension 0฀à฀10฀V -1฀à฀11฀V 0,1%/฀≤100ppm/K non non
฀et฀ ou฀ ฀
tableau฀spécifique฀cli-
ent
Résistance฀d’entrée฀RE฀≥ 100kΩ
1.)฀Les฀précisions฀se฀rapportent฀à฀l’étendue฀de฀mesure.
2.)฀Valable฀à฀partir฀de฀-50°C
3.)฀Un฀tableau฀spécifique฀au฀client฀฀doit฀être฀saisi฀via฀le฀logiciel฀Setup฀et฀commuté฀dans฀l’appareil฀sur฀ ฀.฀
฀฀฀฀La฀précision฀de฀mesure฀peut฀en฀être฀réduite.฀
17
Influences de l’environnement
Plage฀de฀température฀ambiante 0 à +55°C฀pour฀montage฀bord฀à฀bord฀:฀0 à +40°C
Plage฀de฀température฀de฀stockage -30 à +70°C
Résistance฀climatique ≤฀75%฀humidité฀relative฀sans฀condensation
Sortie
Relais฀K1฀(contact฀inverseur) 150.000฀coupures฀à฀10A/250V AC฀50Hz฀en฀charge฀ohmique
800.000฀coupures฀à฀3A/250V AC฀50Hz฀en฀charge฀ohmique
Tension d’alimentation
Alimentation฀ 230V AC฀+10/-15%,฀48 à 63Hz฀ou฀115V AC฀+10/-15%,฀48 à 63Hz
(séparation฀galvanique฀de฀l’entrée)
12 à 24V DC฀+15/-15%,฀24V฀ AC฀+15/-15%,฀48 à 63Hz
(pas฀de฀séparation฀galvanique฀de฀l’entrée)
Consommation <฀2VA
Boîtiere
Matériel Polycarbonate
Montage Rail฀symétrique฀35mm฀x฀7,5mm฀suivant฀EN฀50022
Position฀d’utilisation au฀choix
Poids env.฀110g
Indice฀de฀protection IP฀20
Classe฀d’inflammabilité UL฀94฀V0
Caractéristiques électriques
Sauvegarde฀des฀données EEPROM
Type฀de฀raccordement Bornes฀à฀visser฀pour฀section฀de฀fil฀jusqu’à฀2,5฀mm2฀max.
18
Compatibilité฀électromagnétique EN฀61326
Emission฀de฀parasites Classe฀B
Résistance฀aux฀parasites Normes฀industrielles
Sécurité฀électrique EN฀61 010,฀partie฀1,฀catégorie฀de฀surtension฀III,฀degré฀de฀pollution฀2
6.1 Logiciel Setup
Le฀logiciel฀et฀l’interface฀avec฀adaptateur฀sont฀en฀option฀et฀offrent฀les฀possibilités฀suivantes฀:
- paramétrage฀et฀archivage฀simples฀et฀aisés฀par฀PC
- duplication฀simple฀des฀paramètres฀pour฀appareils฀de฀type฀identique
- possibilité฀de฀saisir฀un฀tableau฀de฀linéarisation฀
Conditions logicielles et matérielles :

- PC฀Pentium฀100฀ou฀compatible
- 128฀Mo฀RAM,฀16฀Mo฀libre฀sur฀le฀disque฀dur
- Lecteur฀CD-ROM฀
- Port฀COM฀libre
h Interface฀pour฀PC฀connectée฀avec฀une฀interface฀RS฀232฀du฀PC฀
h Adaptateur฀noir฀฀(à฀3฀plots)
enficher฀sur฀le฀côté฀de฀l’appareil
19
7 Messages d’erreur
Les฀messages฀d’erreur฀suivants฀restent฀affichés฀jusqu’à฀ce฀que฀la฀cause฀soit฀supprimée฀:
Message d’erreur Cause Aide
Dépassement sup. de capacité - Vérifier฀que฀le฀capteur฀et฀le฀câble฀de฀raccord.฀ne฀
d’affichage soient฀pas฀endommagé฀ou฀court-circuité
La฀valeur฀est฀trop฀grande฀et฀se฀
situe฀en฀dehors฀de฀l’étendue฀de฀ - Vérifie฀que฀se฀soit฀le฀bon฀capteur฀qui฀soit฀
7 Messages d’erreur
mesure. réglé฀ou฀raccordé
Dépassement inf. de capacité v Chapitre฀4฀„Mise฀en฀service฀de฀l’appareil“
d’affichage
La฀valeur฀est฀trop฀petite฀et฀se฀
situe฀en฀dehors฀de฀l’étendue฀de฀
H Ces฀messages฀ne฀s’affichent฀que฀
lorsque฀la฀température฀est฀affichée.
mesure.
Temps฀pour Enclenchement h Annuler฀l’enclenchement฀retardé฀
retardé฀après฀mise฀sous฀tension฀ au฀moyen฀des฀touches฀ ฀+฀
s’écoule.
En฀cas฀de฀dépassement฀inf.฀/sup.฀
de฀capacité฀d’affichage,฀l’enclen-
chement฀retardé฀est฀abandonné.
Dépassement฀inf.฀de฀la฀tempéra- h Vérifier฀d’après฀le฀type฀de฀régulateur฀réglé฀que฀
ture limite inférieure de l’unité฀chaud฀ou฀froid฀fonctionne฀correctement
l’alarme฀ h Vérifier฀que฀l’éventuelle฀protection฀du฀fusible฀est฀
OK.
Dépassement฀sup.฀de฀la฀tem-
pérature limite supérieure de L’alarme฀disparaît,฀dès฀que฀la฀température฀dépasse฀les฀limites
l’alarme AL฀฀autour฀de฀l’hystérésis
20
JUMO GmbH & Co. KG JUMO Régulation SAS
Adresse฀: Actipôle฀Borny
Moltkestraße฀13฀-฀31 7฀rue฀des฀Drapiers
36039฀Fulda,฀Allemagne B.P.฀45200
Adresse฀de฀livraison฀: 57075฀Metz฀-฀Cedex฀3,฀France
Mackenrodtstraße฀14 Téléphone฀: +33฀3฀87฀37฀53฀00
฀36039฀Fulda,฀Allemagne Télécopieur฀: +33฀3฀87฀37฀89฀00
Adresse฀postale฀: E-Mail฀: info@jumo.net
36035฀Fulda,฀Allemagne Internet฀: www.jumo.fr
Téléphone฀: +49฀661฀6003-0
Télécopieur฀: +49฀661฀6003-607
E-Mail฀: mail@jumo.net
Internet฀: www.jumo.net
JUMO AUTOMATION JUMO Mess- und Regeltechnik AG

S.P.R.L. / P.G.M.B.H. / B.V.B.A
Industriestraße฀18 Laubisrütistrasse฀70
4700฀Eupen,฀Belgique 8712฀Stäfa,฀Suisse
Téléphone฀: +32฀87฀59฀53฀00 Téléphone฀: +41฀44฀928฀24฀44
Téléfax฀: +32฀87฀74฀02฀03 Téléfax฀: +41฀44฀928฀24฀48
E-Mail฀: info@jumo.be E-Mail฀: info@jumo.ch
Internet฀: www.jumo.be Internet฀: www.jumo.ch
ESPAÑOL FRANÇAIS ENGLISH DEUTSCH PHOENIX CONTACT GmbH & Co. KG
D-32823 Blomberg, Germany
Fax +49-(0)5235-341200, Phone +49-(0)5235-300
д Datos técnicos Caractéristiques techniques Technical data Technische Daten www.phoenixcontact.com MNR 9291551-03 / 09.2008
д Tipo de conexión Mode de raccordement Connection type Anschlussart
+2
P SP UT G
4V
O
W
I
E G
O
R ND
U
Borne enchufablesde conexión por tornillo preconfigurado Bloc de jonction à vis préconfiguré Pluggable screw terminal block preconfigured Steckbare Schraubklemme konfiguriert MCR-T-UI 2814090
N
D
I
/U r
R-T
Einbauanweisung für den Elektroinstallateur

we
DE MC
Po
de
Mo
sin configurar non configuré not configured unkonfiguriert MCR-T-UI-NC 2814100
IN
4
2
N
C
3
N
Installation notes for electrical personnel
C
con separación galvánica preconfigurado avec isolation galvanique préconfiguré with electrical isolation preconfigured mit galvanischer Trennung konfiguriert MCR-T-UI-E 2814113 EN 1
2 I
/U 14
09
0
3 R-T 28
MC .:
MCR-T-UI-E-NC
Nr
sin configurar non configuré not configured unkonfiguriert 2814126

t.-
Ar 7
OUT
Instructions d’installation pour l’électricien

8
FR D A
д
9
10
4
Entrada Entrée Input Eingang

µC
11
5 IN 12
ϑ
6 D
1
=
2 =
Instrucciónes de montaje para el instalador eléctrico

3
ES
7
termoresistencias Sondes thermométriques Resistance thermometers Widerstandsthermometer 4 OU

T
T
I
U
8
д д
5 9
6
OU
10
D
2-, 3-, 4- técnica de conexión de 2, 3, 4 hilos raccordement à 2, 3 ou 4 fils 2, 3, 4-wire connection system 2-, 3-, 4-Leiteranschlusstechnik
GN DC
4V 11
+2
12
1 SP
RU 2
3
GN
S
D
detectores termopar Thermocouples Thermocouple sensors Thermoelementsensoren B,E,J,K,N,R,S,T,L,U,C,W,HK

AL
OV
PR
4 AP
C. /
N. N
5 NE
C. IO
N. AT
6
resistencias Résistances Resistances Widerstände ≤ 8 kΩ

OB
PR
AP
potenciómetros Potentiomètres Potentiometers Potentiometer ≤ 8 kΩ MCR-T-UI-...

señales mV lineales Signaux mV linéaire Linear mV signals lineare mV-Signale -20…+2400 mV
( ) Corriente de alimentación (termorresistencias) Courant d’alimentation (sondes thermométriques) Input current (resistance thermometers) Speisestrom (Widerstandsthermometer) 250 µA
Sicherheits- und Warnhinweise kungsrichtung verwendet werden. Die Bürden dürfen
д Protección de entrada Protection Input protection Eingangsschutz beim Spannungsausgang 10 k¾ nicht unterschreiten
д protección contra transitorios contre les transitoires transient protection Transientenschutz Um einen sicheren Betrieb des Gerätes zu ge-
und beim Stromausgang 500 ¾ nicht überschreiten.
währleisten und alle Funktionen nutzen zu kön-
д protección contra sobretensiones contre les surtensions overvoltage protection Überspannungsschutz 30 V DC Ein PNP-Transistorschaltausgang (100 mA) mit 2
nen, lesen Sie diese Anleitung bitte vollständig
д Salida Sortie Output Ausgang Uout Iout
Schaltpunkten und 8 Schaltfunktionen ermöglicht
durch!
д Señal de salida Signal de sortie Output signal Ausgangssignal 0...5 V / 0...10 V 0(4)...20 mA eine zusätzliche Überwachungsfunktion.
Die Installation und Inbetriebnahme darf nur von
± 5 V / ± 10 V entsprechend qualifiziertem Fachpersonal durchge- Das ausgewählte Modul wird werkseitig nach den
DEUTSCH
. д Señal máx. de salida Signal de sortie max. Max. output signal Max. Ausgangssignal ± 12 V 24 mA führt werden. Dabei sind die jeweiligen landesspezifi- gestellten Anforderungen gemäß Bestellschlüssel
Carga Charge Load Bürde ≥ 10 kΩ ≤ 500 Ω schen Vorschriften (z.B. VDE, DIN) einzuhalten. konfiguriert und steht dem Anwender betriebsbereit
К Ripple Ondulation Ripple Ripple ≤ 20 mVSS ≤ 20 mVSS abgeglichen zur Verfügung.
Kurzbeschreibung
д Señal de salida en rotura de cable ajustable Signal sortie en cas de rupture fil réglable Output signal with wire break adjustable Ausgangssignal bei Drahtbruch einstellbar -12...+12 V 0...24 mA
Der MCR-T-UI-...-Konverter ist ein universeller Varianten mit Standardkonfiguration:
д / No alcance/sobrepasar la gama de Dépassement des seuils sup. et inf. Underrange/overrange Messbereichsüber-/unterschreitung Temperaturmessumformer mit frei wählbarem MCR-T-UI(-E)-NC (Pt 100 DIN IEC 751, 3-Leiter von
д medida ajustada ajustable de la plage de mesure réglable adjustable einstellbar -12...+12 V 0...24 mA Temperaturmessbereich für -200…850 °C mit 4…20 mA-Ausgang und
Resolución Résolution Resolution Auflösung 3 mV 6 µA Widerstandsthermometer (-200 °C…850 °C) und gesperrtem Schaltausgang).
д Protección de salida Protection Output protection Ausgangsschutz Thermoelementsensoren (-200 °C…2300 °C). Die Module können mit Hilfe der Konfigurations-Soft-
д protección contra transitorios contre les transitoires transient protection Transientenschutz Ausgangsseitig können die analogen Normsignale ware MCR-PI-CONF-WIN (Art.-Nr. 2814799) beliebig
д д Salida de conexión salida por transistor Sortie de couplage sortie transistor Switching output transistor output Schaltausgang Transistorausgang PNP 0(4)…20 mA, 0…10 V, ±10 V, 0…5 V, ±5 V mit einfa- parametriert werden.
cap. de carga hasta Intensité max. Loaded with Belastbarkeit 100 mA cher (z.B. 0…10 V) und inverser (z.B. 10…0 V) Wir-
д conmuta UB; Commute la tension d’alimentation; Switches supply voltage; Schaltet Versorgungsspannung
- ! no resistente a cortocircuitos Non protégée contre les courts-circuits! Not short-circuit-proof! - Nicht kurzschlussfest! Safety and warning notes and inverse (e.g. 10…0 V) signal flow direction can
In order to guarantee safe operation of the be used for the output. The load should not fall
Datos generales Caractéristiques générales General data Allgemeine Daten short of 10 kΩ at the voltage output and should not
Tensión de alimentación Tension d'alimentation Supply voltage Versorgungsspannung 18...30 V DC device and to be able to make use of all the
functions, please read these instructions exceed 500 Ω at the current output.
./ д . Absorción de corriente Consommation de courant Current consumption Stromaufnahme max./typ. < 60 mA / 40 mA A p-n-p transistor switch output (100 mA) with 2
thoroughly! Further technical information can be
д д / д Error de transmisión del valor final / ó a la salida Erreur de transmission de la déviation max./ou à la sortie Transmission error of end value / or at output Übertragungsfehler vom Endwert/bzw. am Ausgang < 0,1 % / ± 6 mV/12 µA switching points and 8 switching functions provi-
found in the associated data sheet under
д Precisión de punto frío Errer de la compensation de la soudure froide Cold junction error Kaltstellenfehler ≤ 3 K, typ. 1,5 K des an additional means of monitoring.
www.interface.phoenixcontact.com.
ENGLISH
Coeficiente de temperatura máx./típ. Coefficient de température Temperature coefficient Temperaturkoeffizient 0,01 %/K, typ. 0,005 %/K The module you choose is configured in the fac-
The device may only be installed and put into ope-
: д/ д д/ Tensión de prueba: entrada/salida y entrada/alimentación Tension d'essai : entrée/sortie et entrée/alimentation Test voltage: input/output and input/supply Prüfspannung: Ein-/Ausgang und Eingang/Versorgung 1 kV, 50 Hz, 1 min. tory in accordance with the specifications follo-
ration by qualified personnel. The corresponding na-
д Margen de temperatura ambiente Plage de température ambiante Ambient temperature range Umgebungstemperaturbereich -20 °C … +65 °C, ( -4 °F...149 °F) wing the order key and is then adjusted ready
tional regulations (e.g. VDE, DIN) must be observed.
/ Posición p. el montaje/montaje discrecional Emplac. / Montage indifférent Assembly position/mounting any Einbaulage / Montage beliebig for operation for the user.
Short description
(Ш / / ) Dimensiones (A / A / P) Dimensions (L / H / P) Dimensions (W / H / D) Abmessungen (B / H / T) (17,5 / 99 / 114,5) mm
The MCR-T converter is a universal temperature Versions with standard configuration:
д Sección de conductor Section du conducteur Conductor cross section Leiterquerschnitt 0,2...2,5 mm2 (AWG 24-14) transducer with a temperature measuring range MCR-T-UI(-E)-NC (Pt 100 DIN IEC 751, 3-con-
Ejecución de la carcasa Boîtier Housing design Ausführung des Gehäuses that can be selected as required for ductor from -200…850 °C with 4…20 mA output
д , poliamida PA sin reforzar, color verde Polyamide PA non renforcée, vert polyamide PA non-reinforced, green Polyamid PA unverstärkt, Farbe grün resistance thermometer (-200 °C…850 °C) and and disabled switching output).
/д Pruebas / homologaciones Contrôles / homologations Tests / Approvals Prüfungen / Zulassungen thermocouple sensors (-200 °C…2300 °C). The modules can be configured as desired using
PROCESS CONTROL EQUIPMENT PROCESS CONTROL EQUIPMENT PROCESS CONTROL EQUIPMENT PROCESS CONTROL EQUIPMENT PROCESS CONTROL EQUIPMENT The analog standard signals 0(4)…20 mA, 0…10 the configuration software MCR-PI-CONF-WIN
U FOR HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
LISTED 31ZN
LISTED 31ZN
LISTED 31ZN
LISTED 31ZN
LISTED
31ZN
V, ±10 V, 0…5 V, ±5 V with simple (e.g. 0…10 V) (order no.: 2814799).
Conseils de sécurité et avertissements ±5 V à conversion directe (par ex. 0…10 V) ou inver-
Class I Div 2 Groups A, B, C, D Class I Div 2 Groups A, B, C, D Class I Div 2 Groups A, B, C, D Class I Div 2 Groups A, B, C, D Class I Div 2 Groups A, B, C, D Pour garantir un fonctionnement fiable du se (p. ex. 10…0 V). Les charges ne doivent pas être
A)Э д д module et pouvoir utiliser toutes ses fonc- inférieures à 10 k¾ pour la sortie tension ou supérieu-
A)Los equipos eléctricos son adecuados única y A)Les équipements électriques conviennent uni- A) This equipment is suitable for use in Class I, Di- A)Die elektrischen Betriebsmittel sind ausschließ-
д tions, veuillez lire la présente notice dans son re à 500þ¾ pour la sortie courant. Une sortie transis-
exclusivamente para las aplicaciones en áreas quement aux applications en atmosphères ex- vision 2, Groups A, B, C and D or non-hazar- lich für die Anwendungen in explosionsgefähr-
( I, д 2, A, intégralité ! Pour de plus amples informations tech- torisée PNP (100 mA) avec 2 points et 8 fonctions
con riesgo de explosión (Class I, Division 2, plosibles (classe I, division 2, groupe A,B,C,D) et dous locations only. deten Bereichen (Class I, Division 2, Group
B, C, D) niques voir www.interface.phoenixcontact.com. de commutation autorise une fonction de surveil-
Group A,B,C,D) o en áreas no expuestas al non aux applications en atmosphères non explo- B) Warning - explosion hazard - substitution of A,B,C,D) oder in nicht explosionsgefährdeten
д . lance supplémentaire.
FRANÇAIS
riesgo de explosión. sibles. components may impair suitability for Class 1, Bereichen geeignet. Leur installation et leur mise en service ne doivent
) д B)La sustitución de componentes puede poner en B)Le remplacement des composants peut remett- Division 2. B)Das Ersetzen von Komponenten kann die Eig- être confiées qu'à un personnel spécialisé dûment Le module choisi est configuré en usine selon les
д д duda la adecuación para el empleo en áreas con re en cause l'utilisation en atmosphères explo- C) Warning - explosion hazard - do not disconnect nung zum Einsatz in explosionsgefährdeten Be- qualifié. Il faut par ailleurs respecter les normes natio- consignes stipulées conformément au code de
( I, д 2). riesgo de explosión (Class I, Division 2). sibles (classe I, division 2). equipment unless power has been switched off reichen in Frage stellen (Class I, Division 2). nales spécifiques applicables (par exemple NF, etc.). commande et est remis à l’utilisateur étalonné et
B) д д д C)¡Solamente está permitido desenchufar y en- C)Le retrait ou l'enfichage des équipements élec- or the area is known to be non-hazardous. C)Das Ziehen und Stecken von elektrischen Be- Description succincte prêt à fonctionner.
д chufar equipos eléctricos estando desconecta- triques est autorisé seulement lorsque l'alimen- triebsmitteln ist nur bei ausgeschalteter Span- Le module MCR-T est un convertisseur de Les versions avec configuration standard :
da la alimentación de tensión, o si está tation en tension est désactivée ou que l'on a nungsversorgung oder bei der Sicherstellung einer température universel pour sondes à résistance MCR-T-UI(-E)-NC (Pt 100 DIN IEC 751, 3 fils de
д ! asegurado un ambiente sin riesgo de explosión! créé une atmosphère non explosible ! nichtexplosionsgefährdeten Atmosphäre erlaubt! (-200 °C…850 °C) et thermocouples -200…850 °C avec sortie 4…20 mA et sortie de
(-200 °C…2300 °C) permettant de choisir commutation fermée).
Э Conformidad con la directriz CEM Conformité à la directive CEM Conformance with EMC guideline Konformität zur EMV-Richtlinie 2004/108/EG librement la plage de mesure. Les modules peuvent être paramétrés librement
Resistencia a interferencias según Immunité selon Immunity to interference according to Störfestigkeit nach EN 61000-6-2 En sortie, on peut utiliser les signaux analogiques avec le logiciel de configuration
Radiación de perturbaciones según Emission selon Noise emission according to Störabstrahlung nach EN 61000-6-4 normalisés 0(4)…20 mA, 0…10 V, ±10 V, 0…5 V, MCR-PI-CONF-WIN (réf.: 2814799).
Indicaciones de seguridad y advertencias 0(4)…20 mA, 0…10 V, ±10 V, 0…5 V, ±5 V pueden
Para garantizar un funcionamiento seguro utilizarse con dirección de acción simple (p.ej. 0…10 V)
del módulo y poder utilizar todas las funcio- e inversa (p.ej. 10…0 V). Las cargas no pueden pa-
nes, rogamos lea estas instrucciones atenta- sar por debajo de 10 k¾ para la salida de tensión y
mente. Más informaciones técnicas las encon- para la salida de corriente no pueden sobrepasar 500
trará Vd. en la hoja de características ¾. Una salida de conexión por transistor PNP (100
(www.interface.phoenixcontact.com). mA) con 2 puntos de conexión y 8 funciones de co-
ESPAÑOL
La instalación y la puesta en marcha solo puede nexión facilita una función de control adicional.
ser efectuada por personal correspondientemente El módulo elegido se configura en fábrica confor-
especializado. A tal efecto, deben considerarse las me las indicaciones según la clave de pedido y
normas respectivas del país (p.ej. VDE, DIN). se suministra en estado listo para el servicio.
Descripción resumida Variantes con configuración estándar:
Con los convertidores MCR-T se tiene a disposición MCR-T-UI(-E)-NC (Pt 100 DIN IEC 751, 3 conduc-
un convertidor de medición de temperatura universal tores de -200…850 °C con salida de 4…20 mA y
con margen de medición de temperatura seleccio- salida de conexión bloqueada)
nable a voluntad para termoresistencias Los módulos pueden parametrizarse discrecional-
Bestellschlüssel / Order key / Code de commande / Clave de pedido / д (-200 °C…850 °C) y termopares (-200 °C…2300 °C). mente con la ayuda del software de configuración
Artikel-Nr. Sensortyp Eingangskennlinie Anschlusstechnik Messbereich / Measuring range Messeinheit Ausgangssignal Ausgangskennlinie Werkskalibrierzertifikat WKZ A la salida, las señales analógicas normalizadas MCR-PI-CONF-WIN (código 2814799).
Order No. Type of sensor Input charasteristic Connection system Plage de mesure / Margen de medición Unit of measurement Output signal Output charasteristic Manufacturer’s Calibration Certificate WKZ ( , 10…0 ) д .
Référence Type de sonde Caractéristique d’entrée Technique de câblage д Unité de mesure Signal de sortie Caractéristique de sortie Certificat de calibrage du fabricant WKZ д д
Ч д д
Código Tipo de sensor Curva caracteristica de entrada Técnica de conexión Anfang / start Ende / end Unidad Señal de salida Curva caracteristica de salida Certificado de calibraje de fábrica WKZ
, д 10 ѕ д
№ д д д Origine / valor inicial / Déviation max. / valor final / д д д д WKZ 500 ѕ.
д , д
К l д д ! К д p-n-p
(100 A) д
2814090 / PT100 / D / 3 / -200,0 / +850,0 / C / OUT01 / N / NONE д д
siehe Abb. 3 unter D = DIN 2 = 2-Leiter/-wire/conducteurs/hilos/- д bei/at/pour/para bei/at/pour/para 20 mA C = °C OUT01 = 0...20 mA N = normal / normal / NONE = ohne / without / sans / sin / WKZ д д
2814090 "Sensortyp" S = SAMA 3 = 3-Leiter/-wire/conducteurs/hilos/- д 0 mA 20 F = °F OUT02 = 4...20 mA normale / normal / . д .
д д д
= MCR-T-UI 0 = bei/at/pour/para/ 4 = 4-Leiter/-wire/conducteurs/hilos/- 0 V = mV / OUT03 = 0...10 V YES = mit / with / avec / con WKZ (kostenpflichtig/ д
see fig.3 under д ( , VDE, DIN).
"type of sensor" Thermoelement/thermocouple/ 0 = bei/at/pour/para/ (z.B./e.g./par ex./ (z.B./e.g./par ex./ O = Ω OUT05 = 0...5 V a charge will be made/ payant/ pagando) / д
2814100 thermocouple/termopar/ Thermoelement/thermocouple/thermo- por ej. / .: por ej. / .: P = % OUT13 = -5...+5 V I = invers / inverse / д д
= MCR-T-UI-NC voir fig.3 sous , couple/termopar/ , -200,0 °C) +850,0 °C) OUT14 = -10...+10 V inversée / inversa / ( ) К MCR-T-UI-...
« type de sonde » Widerstand/resistor/résistance/ Widerstand/resistor/résistance/resis- . д .
2814113 ver fig.3 en resistencia/ , tencia/ , YESPLUS = WKZ ... д д :
= MCR-T-UI-E "tipo de sensor" Potentiometer/potentiometer/ Potentiometer/potentiometer/ mit 5 Messpunkten (kostenpflichtig)/ д д MCR-T-UI(-E)-NC (Pt 100 DIN IEC 751,
. .3«
potentiomètres/potenciómetro/ potentiomètres/potenciómetro/ with 5 measuring points (a charge will be made)/ (-200 °C…850 °C) 3- д . -200…850 °C д
, , avec 5 points de mesure (payant)/ д (-200 °C…2300 °C). 4…20 A
2814126 д »
= MCR-T-UI-E-NC
Spannung/voltage/tension/ Spannung/voltage/tension/ tensión/ con 5 puntos de medición (pagando)/ д д ).
tensión/ , д … д
NI1000 (Landys&Gyr), CU10, 5 ( ) 0(4)…20 A, 0…10 , ±10 , 0…5 , ±5 MCR-PI-CONF-WIN ( . № 2814799)
KTY 81-110, CU50, CU53 ( , 0…10 ) д .
© PHOENIX CONTACT 2008
DEUTSCH ENGLISH FRANÇAIS ESPAÑOL
1 Programmierbarer Programmable temperature Convertisseurs de température Convertidores de temperatura
4 Temperaturmessumformer MCR-T-UI-... measuring transducers MCR-T-UI-... programmables MCR-T-UI-... programables MCR-T-UI-... MCR-T-UI-...
+2
P S UT G
4V
O P
W
3
E G
O U
R ND
1. Funktionsweise 1. Function 1. Mode de fonctionnement 1. Funcionamiento 1.
N
D
MC
R-T
/U
I
de
Po
we
r
1 Das analoge Eingangssignal des Temperatursensors wird mit The analog input signal of the temperature sensor is digitalized Le signal d'entrée analogique de la sonde est numérisé avec La señal de entrada analógica del detector de temperatura se д д
Mo
einer 24-Bit-Auflösung digitalisiert und dann einem Mikrocont- with a 24-bit resolution and then passed on to a micro controller une résolution 24 Bits puis amené à un micro-contrôleur (µC). digitaliza con una resolución de 24 bits y se aporta un micro- 24-
д
1
roller (µC) zugeführt. Der µC bildet aus dem Eingangssignal ei- (mC). The mC forms a temperature linear digital output value Celui-ci en fait une valeur de sortie numérique suivant la ligne controller (µC). El µC genera de la señal de entrada un valor de (µC). µC
IN
4
2
N
д
3
N
nen temperaturlinearen digitalen Ausgangswert. Dieser wird from the input signal. After being electrically isolated, this is de température. Après sa séparation galvanique par un opto- salida digital lineal de temperatura. Este valor se aporta, sepa- .
C
1 1
2 I
/U 14
09
0
nach einer galvanischen Trennung über Optokoppler einem then transferred to a D/A converter via optocouplers. The coupleur, cette valeur est amenée à un convertisseur N/A. Un rado galvánicamente mediante optoacoplador, a un converti-
д
3 R-T 8
: 2
MC Nr.
Art
.-
T 7
D/A-Wandler zugeführt. Mit einer nachgeschalteten Span- corresponding output signals (e.g. 0…10 V, 0…20 mA) are niveau tension ou courant en aval restitue alors les signaux de dor D/A. Con un nivel de tensión o corriente posconectado se - .
OU
D A
8
9
nungs- bzw. Stromstufe werden dann die entsprechenden created with a downstream voltage or current level. sortie correspondants (par ex. 0…10 V, 0…20 mA) realizan las señales de salida correspondientes (p.ej. 0…10 V,
4
5
µC
10
11 Ausgangssignale (z.B. 0…10 V, 0…20 mA) realisiert. The µC has an integrated memory in which the program flow is Le µC possède une mémoire intégrée, dans laquelle on a en- 0…20 mA). д ( , 0…10 , 0…20 A).
IN ϑ 12
6 D
1
= Der µC besitzt einen integrierten Speicher, in dem der Pro- stored for analysing the measured values. The user-specific registré le programme pour le calcul des valeurs de mesure. El µC contiene una memoria integrada donde se ha almacena- µC ,
2 д
2 =
3
7
grammablauf zur Messwertberechnung abgelegt ist. Die an- parameters are saved in an EEPROM (Electrically Erasable Les paramètres spécifiques de l'utilisateur sont enregistrés do el desarrollo del programa para el cálculo del valor de me- .
д Э
I 8
T
4 OU
5
6
OU
T
U
9
10
wenderspezifischen Parameter werden in einem EEPROM Programmable Read-Only Memory). The programmed data dans une EEPROM (mémoire morte programmable effaçable dición. Los parámetros específicos de aplicación se almacen-
D
GN
+2
4V
DC
11 (elektrisch löschbarer Festwertspeicher) gespeichert. Die pro- remain intact even after the supply voltage has been discon- électriquement). Les données programmées sont conservées an en una EEPROM (memoria de constantes borrable ( ).
1 S P
D
12
grammierten Daten bleiben auch nach Abklemmen der Ver- nected. même lorsque la tension d'alimentation est déconnectée. eléctricamente). Los datos programados tampoco se pierden д
д
2 GN
3
VA
LS sorgungsspannung erhalten. después de una desconexión de la tensión de alimentación. .
P RO
4 AP
2. Conseils de raccordement
.
д
/
N.C N
NE
2.
5 .
N.C ATIO
6
APP
RO
B
2. Anschlusshinweise 2. Notes on connection 2.1. Raccordements et éléments de commande pour 2. Observaciones para la conexión
2.1. Geräteanschlüsse, -bedienungselemente (Abb. 1): 2.1. Device connections and operating elements (fig. 1): appareils (fig. 1): 2.1. Conexión de aparatos, elementos de operación (Fig. 1): 2.1. , , ( . 1):
1 steckbare Schraubklem- 3 Programmierschnittstelle 1 Pluggable screw terminal 3 Programming interface 1 Connecteur MINICONNEC 4 LED de signalisation défaut 1 Bornes enchufables de 3 Interface para programación 1 4 д д д
men 4 Fehleranzeige LED blocks 4 Error display LED 2 Raccord. du blindage 5 Pied métallique de fixation tornillo 4 Indicación de fallo LED 2К д д
5 2 Schirmanschluss 2 Shielded connection (sur BJ "5" ou "6") sur le profilé 2 Conexión de pantalla ( «5» «6») 5 д
Abb./Fig./ .1 5 Metallschloss zur Befesti- 5 Metal latch forfixing to the 5 Clip metálico para suje-
(auf Klemme "5" oder "6") gung auf der Tragschiene (on terminal block "5" or "6") mounting rail 3 Interface de programmation (a los bornes "5" ó "6") ción sobre carril 3
2.2. Installation 2.2. Installation 2.2. Installation 2.2. Instalación 2.2.

Blockschaltbild / Block Diagram / Diagramme schématique / Esquema de conjunto / -
Die Belegung der Anschlussklemmen zeigt Abb. 2. The assignment of the connecting terminal blocks is shown in fig. 2. La fig. 2 montre l'affectation des blocs de jonction. La Fig. 2 muestra la ocupación de los bornes de conexión. .2 д .
OUT Der Temperaturmessumformer ist auf alle 35 mm-Tragschie- The temperature transducer can be snapped onto all 35 mm Le convertisseur de température s’encliquette sur tous les rails El convertidor de temperatura puede encajarse en todos los
IN 35 ,
nen nach EN 60715 aufrastbar. mounting rails according to EN 60715. de 35 mm selon EN 60715. carriles de 35 mm según EN 60715.
. EN 60715.
1 ϑ D 7 O UT I
3. Anschlüsse 3. Connections 3. Conexiones
д
µC
2 D A 8 O UT U 3. Techniques de raccordement 3.
3.1. Thermoelementsensoren - 3.1. Thermocouple Sensors - 3.1. Detectores termopar -
3 9 einfache Temperaturmessung Simple temperature measurement 3.1. Thermocouples - Mesure de température simple 3.1. -
GND Medición simple de temperatura
Für die Temperaturmessung mit in Kapitel 7 beschriebenen In order to carry out temperature measurement using the ther- Pour les mesures de température à l'aide des thermocouples Para la medición de temperatura con los detectores termopar
4 = 0 (+) 24VDC
Thermoelementsensoren sind die Klemmstellen 1 und 2 des décrits point 7 on connecte les points de serrage 1 et 2 du д
mocouple sensors described on point 7, the terminal points 1 descritos en el punto 7 tienen que conectarse los puntos de
NC 5 = ! SP MCR-T unter Berücksichtigung der Polung des Sensors zu be- and 2 of the MCR-T should be connected taking into account MCR-T en tenant compte de la polarité du capteur ( 1 = entrée
embornaje 1 y 2 del MCR-T bajo consideración de la polari- , д 7, д
schalten. ( 1 = "+"-Eingang; 2 = "–"-Eingang) the polarity of the sensor. ( 1 = "+"-input;
"+" ; 2 = entrée "–").
dad del sensor. ( 1 = entrada "+"; 2 = entrada "–") 1 2 MCR-T д .(
NC 6 " (–) GND
3.2. Thermoelementsensoren - 2 = "–"-input) 3.2. Thermocouples - 1= д «+»; 2 = д «–»)
MCR-T-UI(-NC) 3.2. Detectores termopar -
Abb./Fig./ . 2a Differenztemperaturmessung Mesure de différences de température 3.2. -
3.2. Thermocouple Sensors - Medición de diferencia de temperaturas
Zur Messung von Temperaturdifferenzen mit nur einem Tem- Pour permettre la mesure de différences de température avec un
Differential temperature measurement Para la medición de diferencia de temperaturas con sólo un
peraturmesswandler besteht beim MCR-T… die Möglichkeit, In order to measure temperature differences using just one
seul convertisseur, le MCR-T… offre la possibilité de brancher en
convertidor de temperatura, con el MCR-T…se tiene la posibi- д
Blockschaltbild / Block Diagram / Diagramme schématique / Esquema de conjunto / - série deux thermocouples de même type et de raccorder les deux MCR-T…
zwei typengleiche Thermoelementsensoren in Reihe zu schal- temperature transducer, the MCR-T… offers the possibility of lidad de conectar en serie dos detectores termopar de igual
ten und die beiden verbleibenden Äste auf die Klemmstellen connecting two thermocouple sensors of the same type in se- branches restantes sur les points de serrage 1 et 2. Les extré-
tipo y conectar los dos ramales restantes a los puntos de em- д д д д
IN OUT 1 und 2 zu legen. Die Verbindungsenden der beiden Ther- ries and to lay the two remaining branches to terminal points 1
mités pour le raccordement des deux thermocouples peuvent
bornaje 1 y 2. Los finales de cable de ambos detectores ter- , д
moelementsensoren können auf den Klemmstellen 5 und 6 and 2. The connection ends of the two thermocouple sensors
être fixées aux points 5 et 6 (voir diagramme schématique).
mopar pueden conectarse en los puntos de embornaje 5 y 6 1 2. К д д
1 ϑ D 7 O UT I
fixiert werden (siehe Blockschaltbild). can be fixed to terminal points 5 and 6 (see block diagram).
La mesure de températures différentielles ne peut être para-
(ver esquema de conjunto). La medición de la temperatura 5 6( . - ).
µC
2 D A 8 Die Differenztemperaturmessung kann nur mit Hilfe der Konfi- métrée qu'à l'aide du logiciel de configuration MCR-PI-CONF-
O UT U The differential temperature measurement can only be set using diferencial sólo se ajustar con la ayuda del software de confi-
gurationssoftware MCR-PI-CONF-WIN eingestellt werden, da the configuration software MCR-PI-CONF-WIN, as the internal
WIN car, dans ce cas, il faut déconnecter le dispositif interne
guración MCR-PI-CONF-WIN, ya que a tal efecto tiene que MCR-PI-CONF-WIN, д
3 9 GND
hierzu die interne Kaltstellenkompensation abzuschalten ist. de compensation de la soudure froide. д д .
cold point compensation must be switched off for this purpose. desconectarse la compensación de punto frío interna.
4 = 0 (+) 24VDC 3.3. Widerstandsthermometer 3.3. Resistance Thermometers
3.3. Sondes à résistance
3.3. Termoresistencias 3.3.
Für die Temperaturmessung mit in Kapitel 7 beschriebenen Pour les mesures de températures à l'aide des sondes à résis-
NC 5 = ! SP For temperature measurement using the resistance thermo- Para la medición de temperatura con las termoresistencias de-
Widerstandsthermometern sind je nach Anschlusstechnik die meters described on point 7, the terminal points 1 and 3
tance décrites point 7 on câblera, selon la technique de raccor-
scritas en el punto 7 tienen que conectarse, conforme a la téc- , д 7,
NC 6 " (–) GND Klemmstellen 1 und 3 bei 2-Leiter, 1, 2 und 3 bei 3-Leiter should be wired for 2-conductor connections, points 1, 2 and
dement, les bornes 1 et 3 pour 2 fils, 1, 2 et 3 pour 3 fils et
nica de conexión, los puntos de embornaje 1 y 3 para cone- д д д 1 3
MCR-T-UI-E(-NC) Abb./Fig./ . 2b sowie 1, 2, 3 und 4 bei 4-Leitertechnik zu beschalten (sie- 3 should be wired for 3-conductor technology and points 1,
1, 2, 3 et 4 pour la technique à quatre fils (voir diagramme
xión de 2 conductores, 1, 2 y 3 para conexión de 3 д 2- д , 1, 2 3 д 3- д , 1, 2, 3 4
he Blockschaltbild). 2, 3 and 4 for 4-conductor connections (see block diagram).
schématique).
conductores así como 1, 2, 3 y 4 para conexión de д 4- д д ( . - ).
3.4. Messung von mV-Spannungen 3.4. Mesure de tensions en mV 4 conductores (ver esquema de conjunto). 3.4.
3.4. Measuring mV Voltages
Die Messung von Spannungen im Bereich von -20…2400 mV Voltages in the range of -20…2400 mV are measured at the
La mesure de tensions comprises dans la plage de -20 à
3.4. Medición de tensiones mV д -20…2400 д
Widerstandsthermometer / Resistance thermometers /
erfolgt an den Klemmstellen 1 und 2, wobei 1 den "+"-Ein- terminal points 1 and 2, whereby 1 is the "+" input and 2
2400 mV se fait au niveau des points de serrage 1 et 2, 1 re-
La medición de tensiones en el margen de -20…2400 mV 1 2, 1 д
Sondes à resistance / Termoresistencias /
gang und 2 den "–"-Eingang darstellt. the "–" input.
présentant l'entrée "+" et 2 l'entrée "–".
se efectúa en los puntos de embornaje 1 y 2, " " д, 2 - " " д.
Sensortyp 1) / Type of Norm / in acc. Messbereich / Measuring / kleinste Spanne / smallest
3.5. Messung von Widerständen 3.5. Mesure de résistances siendo 1 la entrada "+" y 2 la entrada "–". 3.5.
sensor / Type de sonde / with standard / range / Plage de mesure / span/ intervalle min. / 3.5. Measuring Resistances
Tipo de sensor / Norme / Norma / Margen de medición / alcance mínim / Zur Messung veränderlicher Widerstände zwischen 0…8000 Variable resistances up to 8 kΩ are measured using terminal Pour mesurer des résistances variables comprises entre 3.5. Medición de resistencias д 0…8000 ¾
д 1) д д д Ω werden die Klemmstellen 1 und 3 verwendet. Der An- points 1 and 3. The connection is carried out in 2-conductor 0…8000 Ω on utilise les points 1 et 3. Le câblage se fait selon La medición de resistencias variables entre 0…8000 Ω se 1 3. д
schluss erfolgt in 2-Leitertechnik. technology. la technique à 2 fils. efectúa en los bornes 1 y 3. La conexión se realiza en técnica д 2- д .
PT DIN/SAMA -200 ... 850 °C / 0,4 K
NI DIN/SAMA -60 ... 180 °C / 0,4 K 3.6. Auswertung von Potentiometerstellungen 3.6. Evaluation of Potentiometer Positions 3.6. Evaluation de positions de potentiomètres de 2 conductores. 3.6.
NI 1000 Landis&Gyr -50 ... 160 °C / 0,4 K Zur Auswertung von Potentiometern bis 8 kΩ werden die In order to evaluate potentiometers up to 8 kΩ the terminal Pour évaluer la position de potentiomètres jusqu'à 8 kΩ on relie 3.6. Evaluación de posiciones de potenciómetros д 8 k¾ 1 3 д
CU10 SAMA -70 ... 500 °C / 0,4 K Klemmen 1 und 3 mit den Außenleitungen und die Klemme points 1 and 3 are connected to the external conductors and les bornes 1 et 3 aux lignes extérieures et la borne 2 à la Para la evaluación de potenciómetros hasta 8 kΩ se conectan los д , 2 .
CU50 – -50 ... 200 °C / 0,4 K ligne du curseur.
CU53 – -50 ... 180 °C / 0,4 K 2 mit der Schleiferleitung verbunden. terminal 2 is connected to the slider conductor. bornes 1 y 3 con las fases y, el borne 2 con la línea de contacto. 3.7. д
KTY81 (= KTY81-110) Philips -55 ... 150 °C / 0,4 K 3.7. Schaltausgang 3.7. Switching Output 3.7. Sortie de commutation 3.7. Salida de conexión К д p-n-p
KTY84 (= KTY84-130) – -40 ... 300 °C
Der PNP-Transistorschaltausgang schaltet bei Erfüllung der The p-n-p transistor switch output switches the supply voltage Lorsque les conditions de commutation programmées sont La salida de conexión por transistor PNP conecta la tensión de д
programmierten Schaltbedingung die Versorgungsspannung UB of 24 V to terminal !. when the programmed switching con- remplies, la sortie à transistor PNP amène la tension d'alimen- alimentación UB de 24 V al borne ! si se cumple la condición ! UB 24 . д
Thermoelemente / Thermocouples / Thermocouples / Termopares /
UB von 24 V auf Klemme !. Der Transistorausgang darf nur ditions have been fulfilled. The transistor output may only be tation UB de 24 V sur la borne !. La charge maximale admise de conexión programada. La salida por transistor sólo se pue- д 100 .
Sensortyp 1) / Type of Material Messbereich / Measuring / kleinste Spanne / smallest mit maximal 100 mA belastet werden. Eine Suppressordiode loaded with max. 100 mA. A suppressor diode protects this par cette sortie de commutation est de 100 mA. Une diode zé- de someter a una carga máxima de 100 mA. Un diodo supre- д д д
sensor / Type de sonde / Matériau range / Plage de mesure / span/ intervalle min. / schützt diesen Ausgang vor schnellen Transienten. Zur Pro- output against fast transients. The configuration software ner bidirectionnelle la protège contre les transitoires rapides.
sor protege esta la salida contra transitorios rápidos. Para la д . д
Tipo de sensor / Material Margen de medición / alcance mínim / grammierung dieses Ausganges ist die Konfigurations-Soft- MCR-PI-CONF-WIN is necessary to program this output. Pour programmer cette sortie, on a besoin du logiciel de confi-
programación de ésta salida, se necesita el software de confi- д MCR-PI-CONF-WIN.
д 1) д д ware MCR-PI-CONF-WIN erforderlich. guration MCR-PI-CONF-WIN.
guración MCR-PI-CONF-WIN.
U Cu-CuNi -200 ... 600 °C / >1K 4. Error Recognition 4.
T 2) 4. Fehlererkennung 4. Détection de défauts
Cu-CuNi -200 ... 400 °C / >1K Wire Break/ Measuring Overrange and Underrange with 4. Detección de fallos / д
L Fe-CuNi -200 ... 900 °C / >1K Rupture de fil / dépassement de la plage de mesure dans
J 2) Fe-CuNi -210 ... 1200 °C / >1K
Drahtbruch / Messbereichsüber- und Unterschreitung modules that are configured correspondingly Rotura de cable/sobrepasar y noalcanzar el margen de medi- д д
des modules configurés sur commande:
E 2) NiCr-CuNi -226 ... 1000 °C / >1K bei auftragsbezogen konfigurierten Modulen: • The red MODE LED lights up continuously. ción para módulos configurados según las indicaciones del cliente: д :
• La LED rouge MODE reste allumée.
K 2) NiCr-Ni -200 ... 1372 °C / >1K • Die rote MODE-LED leuchtet ständig. • The following specified voltages or currents can be measu- • El MODE-LED rojo está encendido permanentemente. • д д MODE .
N 2) NiCrSi-NiSi -200 ... 1300 °C / >1K • Durch die Ausgangssignalkonfiguration sind am Ausgang die red at the output via the selected output signal configurati- • Selon la configuration choisie pour le signal de sortie, on peut • Mediante la configuración de las señales de salida selecciona- • д д
S 2) Pt10Rh-Pt -50 ... 1768 °C / >4K mesurer en sortie les tensions ou les courants indiqués ci-
R 2) Pt13Rh-Pt -50 ... 1768 °C / >4K
nachfolgend angegebenen Spannungen oder Ströme mess- on. With customized configurations, these values can be das, se miden a la salida las tensiones siguientes. Para confi- д .
dessous. Dans le cas d'une configuration individuelle, on peut
B 2) Pt30Rh-Pt6Rh 500 ... 1820 °C / >10 K bar. Bei selbständiger Konfiguration sind diese Werte selected as desired between -12…+12 V or 0…24 mA. guración individual, estos valores pueden ajustarse libre- , д
régler librement ces valeurs entre -12…+12 V ou 0…24 mA.
C -18 ... 2316 °C / >4K frei einstellbar zwischen -12…+12 V bzw. 0…24 mA. mente entre -12…+12 V ó 0…24 mA. д -12…+12 0…24 A.
W -18 ... 2316 °C / >4K Output signal Output signal with Signal de Signal de sortie en cas de
HK -200 ... 800 °C / >1K Ausgangs- Ausgangssignal bei Señal de Señal de salida para д д
Wire Break Measuring overrange / sortie rupture dépassement de la plage
1) Weitere Typen oder Kennlinien auf Anfrage / Further types and characteristic curves on request /
signal Drahtbruch Messbereichsüber-/ salida rotura de sobrep./no alcanzar el o д /
underrange de fil de mesure
Autres types ou caractéristiques sur demande / Otros tipos o curvas características bajo demanda /
unterschreitung cable margen de medida д
0…5 V, ±5 V 5,5 V 5,25 V 0…5 V, ±5 V 5.5 V 5.25 V 0…5 V, ±5 V 5,5 V 5,25 V
. 0…5 V, ±5 V 5,5 V 5,25 V 0…5 , ±5 5,5 5,25
0…10 V, ±10 V 11 V 10,5 V 0…10 V, ±10 V 11 V 10.5 V 0…10 V, ±10 V 11 V 10,5 V
2) 0…10 V, ±10 V 11 V 10,5 V 0…10 , ±10 11 10,5
Thermoelemente nach / Thermocouples in acc. with / Thermocouples selon / Termopares según / 0…20 mA 22 mA 21 mA 0…20 mA 22 mA 21 mA 0…20 mA 22 mA 21 mA
0…20 mA 22 mA 21 mA 0…20 A 22 21
: IEC 584/EN 60584. 4…20 mA 22 mA 21 mA 4…20 mA 22 mA 21 mA
4…20 mA 22 mA 21 mA 4…20 mA 22 mA 21 mA 4…20 A 22 21
Eingang / Input Messbereich / Measuring range 5. Changing the Configuration Data д
/ kleinste Spanne / smallest 5. Änderung der Konfigurationsdaten 5. Modificación de los valores de configuración
Entrée / Entrada / д / Plage de mesure / span/ intervalle min. /
5. Modification des paramètres de configuration 5.
Für die Änderung der Konfigurationsdaten ist die Konfigurati- The configuration software MCR-PI-CONF-WIN is used to
Margen de medición / alcance mínim / change the configuration data. An additional manual on CD-
Pour modifier le paramétrage, il faut utiliser le logiciel de confi- Para la modificación de los datos de configuración tiene que д
onssoftware MCR-PI-CONF-WIN zu verwenden. Ein Hand-
д д ROM as well as the on-line help for the software explain the
guration MCR-PI-CONF-WIN. Un manuel ainsi que l'aide On- utilizarse el software de configuración MCR-PI-CONF-WIN. MCR-PI-CONF-WIN. д д CD-
buch auf CD-ROM, sowie die On-Line-Hilfe der Software er-
RES Widerstand / Resistor / 0 ... 8000 Ω (2-Leiter/ / 2Ω configuration possibilities and how to carry them out.
Line du logiciel expliquent les possibilités de configuration et Un manual adicional así como ayuda on- line del software ROM, on-line д
läutern die Konfigurationsmöglichkeiten und deren
Résistance / resistencia / conductor/fils/ The adapter cable MCR-TTL/RS232-E (order no.: 2814388)
leur exécution. Pour relier le module au PC on a besoin du ilustran las posibilidades de configuración y su realización. . д д К
Durchführung. Für die Verbindung von Modul und PC ist das câble d'adaptation MCR-TTL/RS232-E (Réf. 2814388). Il Para la conexión del módulo y del PC hay que utilizar el cable
≤ 8 kΩ hilos/ д .) Adapterkabel MCR-TTL/RS232-E (Art.-Nr. 2814388) einzu- is used to connect the module to the PC. The cable is not MCR-TTL/
included in the configuration kit.
n'est pas compris dans le kit de configuration. adaptador MCR-TTL/RS232-E (código 2814388). El cable no RS232-E ( . № 2814388). д .
POT Potentiometer/Potentiométre/ 0 ... 100 % (3-Leiter/ / 0,2 % setzen. Dieses ist nicht im Konfigurationspaket enthalten. se incluye en el kit de configuración.
potenciómetro / conductor/fils/
6. Types de capteurs (fig.3) 6. д ( . 3)
≤ 8 kΩ hilos/ д .) 6. Sensortypen (Abb.3) 6. Sensor Types (fig.3) 6. Tipos de sensores (fig.3)
V01 Spannung / Voltage / Tension / -20 ... +2400 mV / / 2 mV 6.1. Widerstandsthermometer 6.1. Sondes à résistance 6.1.
6.1. Resistance thermometers 6.1. Termoresistencias
tensión / (Temperaturbereiche nach IEC 751/EN 60 751 bzw. (Plage de température selon IEC 751/EN 60 751 ou ( IEC 751/EN 60 751 DIN 43 760
(Temperature range acc. to IEC 751/EN 60 751 or DIN 43 760 (Márgen de temperatura s. IEC 751/EN 60 751 o DIN 43 760
DIN 43 760 SAMA RC 21-4-1966 in 2-, 3- oder 4-Leiterschaltung) DIN 43 760 SAMA RC 21-4-1966 inen circuit à 2, 3 ou 4 fils) SAMA RC 21-4-1966 2-, 3- 4- д д )
SAMA RC21-4-1966 in 2-, 3- or 4-conductor circuits) SAMA RC 21-4-1966 en conex. de 2, 3 ó 4 conductores)
Abb./Fig./ .3 6.2.
6.2. Thermoelemente 6.2. Thermocouples 6.2. Thermocouples 6.2. Termopares
6.3. Widerstände, Potentiometer, mV-Spannungen 6.3. Résistances, potentiomètres, tensions en mV 6.3. , , ( )
6.3. Resistors, potentiometers, mv voltages 6.3. Resistencias, potenciómetros, tensiones mV
s
SIRIUS 3RF20..
Halbleiterrelais 3RF21..
DE
Originalbetriebsanleitung
EN
Semiconductor relay EL
Ρελέ ημιαγωγού PL
Przekaźnik półprzewodnikowy
Original Operating Instructions Πρωτότυπες οδηγίες χρήσης Oryginalna instrukcja obsługi
FR
Relais statique ET
Pooljuhtrelee RO
Releu semiconductor
Instructions de service originales Originaal-kasutusjuhend Instrucţiuni originale de utilizare
ES
Relés estáticos FI
Puolijohderele SK
Polovodičové relé
Instructivo original Alkuperäinen käyttöohje Originálny návod na obsluhu
IT
Relè statici HR
Poluvodički releji SL
Polprevodniški releji
Istruzioni operative originali Originalne upute za uporabu Originalno navodilo za obratovanje
PT
Relé semicondutor HU
Félvezető relé SV
Halvledarrelä
Instruções de Serviço Originais Eredeti üzemeltetési útmutató Originalbruksanvisning
BG
Полупроводниково реле LT
Puslaidininkinės relės TR
Yarı iletken röle
Оригинално ръководство за експлоатация Originali eksploatacijos instrukcija Orijinal İşletme Kılavuzu
CS
Polovodičové relé LV
Pusvadītāja relejs РУ
Полупроводниковое реле
Originální návod k obsluze Oriģinālā lietošanas pamācība Оригинальное руководство по эксплуатации
DA
Halvlederrelæ NL
Halfgeleiderrelais 半导体继电器
中文
Original brugsanvisning Originele handleiding 原始操作说明
+60 °C
-25 °C
3RF20.. 3RF21..
SIEMENS AG Telephone: +49 (911) 895-5900 (8°° - 17°° CET)

Technical Assistance Fax: +49 (911) 895-5907
Breslauer Str. 5 E-mail: technical-assistance@siemens.com http://support.industry.siemens.com
D-90766 Fürth Internet: www.siemens.com/sirius/technical-assistance
NEB535320010000/RS-AA/003 Last update: 02 June 2016

3ZX1012-0RF20-1AW1
Gefährliche Spannung. Lebensgefahr oder schwere Verletzungsgefahr.
DE ! GEFAHR Vor Beginn der Arbeiten Anlage und Gerät spannungsfrei schalten. Die Installations- und Wartungsarbeiten an diesem Gerät dürfen nur
von einer autorisierten Elektrofachkraft ausgeführt werden.
Hazardous voltage. Will cause death or serious injury.
EN ! DANGER Turn off and lock out all power supplying this device before working on this device. Installation and maintenance work on this device may
only be carried out by an authorized electrician.
Tension dangereuse. Danger de mort ou risque de blessures graves.
FR ! DANGER Mettre hors tension avant d’intervenir sur l’appareil. Les travaux d'installation et d'entretien de cet appareil doivent uniquement être
réalisés par une personne qualifiée en électricité.
Tensión peligrosa. Puede causar la muerte o lesiones graves.
ES ! PELIGRO Desconectar la alimentación eléctrica antes de trabajar en el equipo. Las tareas de instalación y mantenimiento de este equipo solo
puede llevarlas a cabo un un electricista autorizado.
Tensione pericolosa. Può provocare la morte o lesioni gravi.
IT ! PERICOLO Scollegare l’alimentazione elettrica prima di eseguire interventi sull’apparecchiatura. L'installazione e la manutenzione di questo
apparecchio devono essere effettuati solo da specialisti dell'elettronica autorizzati.
Tensão perigosa. Perigo de morte ou ferimentos graves.
PT ! PERIGO Desligue a alimentação eléctrica antes de iniciar os trabalhos no equipamento.Os trabalhos de instalação e manutenção neste
equipamento somente podem ser realizados for eletricistas autorizados.
Опасно напрежение. Опасност за живота или опасност от тежки телесни повреди.
BG ! ОПАСНОСТ Преди започване на работа изключете захранването на инсталацията или устройството. Монтажът и техническото обслужване
на това устройство се извършват единствено от оторизиран електротехник.
Nebezpečné napětí. Nebezpečí smrtelného nebo těžkého úrazu.
CS ! NEBEZPEČÍ Před zahájením prací odpojte zařízení a modul od napětí. Instalační a údržbářské práce smí na tomto přístroji provádět pouze
kvalifikovaný elektrikář.
Farlig spænding. Livsfare eller fare for alvorlige kvæstelser.
DA ! FARE Inden arbejdet påbegyndes skal anlægget og enheden gøres spændingsfri. Installationer og vedligeholdelser på dette apparat må kun
gennemføres af en autoriseret elektriker.
Επικίνδυνη τάση. Κίνδυνος-θάνατος ή κίνδυνος σοβαρού τραυματισμού.
EL ! ΚΙΝΔΥΝΟΣ Πριν από την έναρξη των εργασιών απομονώνετε την εγκατάσταση και τη συσκευή από την παροχή τάσης. Οι εργασίες εγκατάστασης
και συντήρησης αυτής της συσκευής πρέπει να πραγματοποιούνται μόνο από εξουσιοδοτημένο ηλεκτρολόγο.
Ohtlik pinge. Eluoht või tõsiste vigastuste oht.
ET ! OHT Enne tööde algust tuleb süsteemi ja seadme pinge välja lülitada. Seadme paigaldus- ja hooldustöid võib teha ainult atesteeritud elektrik.
Vaarallinen jännite. Vakava loukkaantumisvaara tai hengenvaara.
FI ! VAARA Laite ja laitteisto on kytkettävä jännitteettömiksi ennen töiden aloittamista. Tämän laitteen asennus-ja huoltotöitä saa suorittaa
ainoastaan valtuutettu sähköteknikko.
Opasni napon. Opasnost po život ili opasnost od teških ozljeda.
HR ! OPASNOST Prije početka radova postrojenje i uređaj spojiti bez napona. Radove instalacije i održavanja na uređaju smije izvoditi samo ovlašteno
stručno elektrotehničko osoblje.
Veszélyes feszültség. Életveszély vagy súlyos sérülésveszély.
HU ! VESZÉLY A munkák megkezdése előtt végezze el a berendezés vagy készülék feszültség-mentesítését. Ezen az eszközön a telepítéssel és a
karbantartással kapcsolatos feladatokat kizárólag megfelelő felhatalmazással rendelkező villamossági szakember végezheti.
Pavojinga įtampa. Pavojus gyvybei arba sunkaus susižalojimo pavojus.
LT ! PAVOJUS Prieš darbų pradžią atjunkite sistemos ir prietaiso įtampą. Šio įrenginio įrengimo ir techninės priežiūros darbus leidžiama atlikti tik
įgaliotam elektrikui.
Bīstams spriegums. Letālu seku vai smagu traumu riski.
LV ! BĪSTAMI Pirms uzsākt darbu, atslēdziet iekārtu un ierīci no barošanas. Šīs ierīces uzstādīšanu un tehniskās apkopes darbus drīkst veikt vienīgi
pilnvarots elektriķis.
Gevaarlijke spanning. Levensgevaar of gevaar voor ernstig letsel.
NL ! GEVAAR Schakel vóór aanvang van de werkzaamheden installatie en apparaat spanningsvrij. De installatie- en onderhoudswerken aan dit toestel
mogen enkel door een geautorisseerde elektricien uitgevoerd worden.
Niebezpieczne napięcie. Zagrożenie życia lub niebezpieczeństwo ciężkich obrażeń.
PL ! NIEBEZPIECZEŃSTWO Przed rozpoczęciem wszelkich prac należy urządzenie i przyrząd odłączyć od sieci elektrycznej. Prace instalacyjne i konserwacyjne na
tym urządzeniu może przeprowadzać wyłącznie posiadający odpowiednie kwalifikacje elektryk.
Tensiune periculoasă. Pericol de moarte sau de accidentări grave.
RO ! PERICOL Înaintea începerii lucrărilor, deconectaţi instalaţia şi aparatul de la tensiune. Lucrările de instalare şi întreţinere pentru acest dispozitiv pot
fi efectuate doar de către un electrician autorizat.
Nebezpečné napätie. Nebezpečenstvo ohrozenia života alebo vzniku ťažkých zranení.
SK ! NEBEZPEČENSTVO Pred začatím prác zariadenie a prístroj odpojte od napätia. Inštalačné a údržbárske práce na tomto prístroji môže vykonávať výlučne
autorizovaný elektrikár.
Nevarna napetost. Nevarnost za življenje ali nevarnost hudih poškodb.
SL ! NEVARNOST Pred začetkom dela je treba pri napravi in aparatu odklopiti napajanje. Inštalacijska in vzdrževalna dela na tej napravi sme izvesti samo
pooblaščen električar.
Farlig spänning. Livsfara eller risk för allvarliga personskador.
SV ! FARA Koppla anläggningen och apparaten spänningsfri innan du påbörjar arbetena. Installation och underhåll av denna apparat får endast
utföras av en behörig elektriker.
Tehlikeli gerilim. Ölüm tehlikesi veya ağır yaralanma tehlikesi.
TR ! TEHLİKE Çalışmalara başlamadan önce, sistemin ve cihazın gerilim beslemesini kapatınız.Bu cihazın montajı ve bakımı yalnız yetkili bir elektrik
teknisyeni tarafından yapılmalıdır.
Опасное напряжение. Опасность для жизни или возможность тяжелых травм.
РУ ! ОПАСНОСТЬ Перед началом работ отключить подачу питания к установке и к устройству. Работы по монтажу и техническому обслуживанию
данного устройства должны производиться уполномоченным специалистом по электротехнике.
危险电压。将导致死亡或严重的人身伤害。
中文 ! 危险操作本设备前必须切断并锁定所有供电电源。该设备的安装和维护工作仅能由具备专业资格的电
工完成。
2 3ZX1012-0RF20-1AW1
Die Klemmen des Steuergeräts dürfen nicht berührt werden, wenn das Gerät mit Spannung versorgt wird. An den
DE ! GEFAHR
Ausgangsklemmen steht auch im AUS-Zustand des Steuergeräts Spannung an.
The terminals on the device must not be touched when the system is connected to the power supply. Output terminals
EN ! DANGER
will have voltage present even when device is OFF.
Ne pas toucher les bornes de l'appareil lorsque l'appareil est sous tension. Les bornes de sorties sont sous tension
FR ! DANGER
même à l'état "HORS" de l'appareil.
No se deberán tocar los bornes del equipo de control cuando esté energizado. En los bornes de salida hay aplicada
ES ! PELIGRO
tensión aunque el equipo de control esté en estado DES/OFF.
I morsetti dell'apparecchio di comando non devono essere toccati quando l'apparecchio è alimentato in tensione. Sui
IT ! PERICOLO
morsetti di uscita è presente tensione anche quando l'apparecchio di comando è in stato di disinserzione.
Não se pode tocar nos terminais do aparelho de comando quando este estiver a ser alimentado com tensão. Os
PT ! PERIGO
terminais de saída permanecem sob tensão mesmo com o aparelho de comando em estado DESLIGADO.
Клемите на контролния блок не трябва да се пипат, когато уредът се захранва с електронапрежение. На
BG ! ОПАСНОСТ
изходните клеми има електронапрежение и при изключено състояние на контролния блок.
Nedotýkejte se svorek ovládacího zařízení, pokud je zařízení pod napětím. Na výstupních svorkách je napětí i ve
CS ! NEBEZPEČÍ
VYPNUTÉM stavu ovládacího zařízení.
Styreenhedens klemmer må ikke berøres, mens apparatet forsynes med spænding. Der er også spænding på
DA ! FARE
udgangsklemmerne, når styreenheden er i FRA-tilstand.
Δεν επιτρέπεται η επαφή με τους ακροδέκτες της συσκευής ελέγχου, όταν η συσκευή τροφοδοτείται με τάση. Ακόμη
EL ! ΚΙΝΔΥΝΟΣ
και όταν η συσκευή ελέγχου είναι απενεργοποιημένη, υπάρχει τάση στους ακροδέκτες εξόδου.
Kui seade on pingega varustatud, ei tohi juhtseadme klemme puudutada. Väljundklemmid on ka VÄLJA-lülitatud olekus
ET ! OHT
pinge all.
Ohjauslaitteen liittimiin ei saa koskea, kun laitteen jännitteeensyöttö on kytkettynä. Lähtöliittimet ovat jännitteellisiä
FI ! VAARA
myös silloin, kun ohjauslaite on kytkettynä pois toiminnasta.
Ne dodirujte terminale upravljačkog uređaja dok se uređaj napaja. Izlazni terminali nalaze se pod naponom čak i dok je
HR ! OPASNOST
upravljački uređaj u stanju ISKLJUČENO.
Nem szabad a vezérlőkészülék kapcsaihoz érni, ha a készülék feszültségellátást kap. A kimeneti kapcsokon a
HU ! VESZÉLY
vezérlőkészülék kikapcsolt állapotában is van feszültség.
Negalima liesti valdymo bloko gnybtų, kai blokas turi įtampą. Išėjimo gnybtuose, net valdymo blokui esant išjungimo
LT ! PAVOJUS
būsenos, yra įtampa.
Ja vadības ierīce pieslēgta spriegumam, nedrīkst pieskarties ierīces spailēm. Vadības ierīcei tiek pievadīts spriegums
LV ! BĪSTAMI
arī tad, ja izejas spailes ir izslēgtā režīmā.
De klemmen van de besturing mogen niet worden aangeraakt als er spanning op het apparaat staat. Op de
NL ! GEVAAR
uitgangsklemmen staat ook spanning als de besturing zich in de UIT-toestand bevindt.
Nie wolno dotykać zacisków urządzenia sterującego, gdy jest ono pod napięciem. Zaciski wyjściowe są pod napięciem
PL ! NIEBEZPIECZEŃSTWO
także wtedy, gdy urządzenie sterujące jest wyłączone.
Terminalele unității de comandă nu trebuie atinse, cât timp aparatul este sub tensiune. La terminalele de ieșire este
RO ! PERICOL
prezentă tensiunea și în starea OPRITĂ a unității de comandă.
Svoriek riadiaceho prístroja sa nesmiete dotýkať, keď je prístroj napájaný napätím. Na výstupných svorkách je aj vo
SK ! NEBEZPEČENSTVO
vypnutom stave riadiaceho prístroja napätie.
Sponk krmilne naprave se ne smete dotikati, medtem ko je naprava povezana z napajanjem. Na izhodnih sponkah je
SL ! NEVARNOST
napetost prisotna tudi, ko je krmilna naprava v stanju IZKLOP.
Styrenhetens klämmor får inte vidröras när enheten försörjs med spänning. Utgångsklämmorna står ochså under
SV ! FARA
spänning när styrenheten är i AV-läge.
Cihaz gerilimle beslenirken kontrol ünitesinin klemenslerine dokunulmamalıdır. Çıkış klemenslerinde, kontrol ünitesi
TR ! TEHLİKE
KAPALI durumdayken de gerilim mevcuttur.
Нельзя касаться клемм устройства управления, если оно находится под напряжением. На выходных клеммах
РУ ! ОПАСНОСТЬ
напряжение имеется даже при выключенном устройстве управления.
中文 ! 危险设备通电时严禁触碰控制器的端子。即便控制器处于关闭状态，其输出端子上仍带电。
3ZX1012-0RF20-1AW1 3
3 2
2 x M4
3
4 1
1 therm
1,5 Nm al pa
ste
13 lb · in
3RF2...-1 3RF21..-2 3RF21..-3
L1 - T2 A1 - A2 L1 - T2 A1 - A2 L1 - T2 A1 - A2
2 ... 2,5 Nm 2 ... 2,5 Nm

—
∅ 5 ... 6 mm / PZ2 18 to 22 lb · in ∅ 5 ... 6 mm / PZ2 18 to 22 lb · in
10 2 x 1 ... 2,5 mm² 10

2 x 0,5 ... 2,5 mm²
2 x 2,5 ... 6 mm²
10
DIN 46234
10 2 x 1 ... 2,5 mm² 5 - 2,5 ... 5 - 25
2 x 0,5 ... 1,5 mm²
2 x 2,5 ... 6 mm²
1 x 10 mm² 2 x 0,5 ... 2,5 mm²
AWG 2 x 14 to 10 AWG 2 x 18 to 14
JIS C 2805
R 2 - 5 ... 14 - 5
0,5 ... 0,6 Nm 0,5 ... 0,6 Nm

—
∅ 3,5 mm 4.5 to 5.3 lb · in ∅ 3,5 mm 4.5 to 5.3 lb · in
7 1 x 0,5 ... 2,5 mm² 10 7 1 x 0,5 ... 2,5 mm²

1 x 0,5 ... 2,5 mm²
2 x 0,5 ... 1 mm² 2 x 0,5 ... 1 mm²
7 1 x 0,5 ... 2,5 mm² 10 7 1 x 0,5 ... 2,5 mm²

1 x 0,5 ... 2,5 mm²
2 x 0,5 ... 1 mm² 2 x 0,5 ... 1 mm²
AWG 1 x 20 to 12 AWG 1 x 20 to 12 AWG 1 x 20 to 12
3RF2…-...0. 3RF2…-...1. 3RF2…-...2. 3RF2…-...4.
1 L 1 L 1 L 1 L
A1 + A1 +~ DC 24 V A1~ A1 +
DC 24 V AC 24 V AC 110 – 230 V DC 4 -30 V
A2 - A2~- A2 ~ A2 -
2 T 2 T 2 T 2 T
Technische Änderungen vorbehalten. Zum späteren Gebrauch aufbewahren. 3ZX1012-0RF20-1AW1

Subject to change without prior notice. Store for use at a later date. © Siemens AG 2016
Temperature Measurement Technology
TM General Operating Instructions for Temperature

Measurement with Thermocouples and Resistance
Thermometers
T1/1 Thermocouple wires,

uninsulated, purchase of scrap
platinum
T1/2 Insulated thermocouple wires
T1/3 Thermocouples
T2/1 Straight thermocouples
T2/2 Measurement inserts for

thermocouples
T3 Angled thermocouples
T4/1 Metal protection tube
T4/2 Ceramic protection tubes and

insulation rods
T4/3 Connection heads and

connection bases
T4/4 Installation parts for

thermocouples and resistance
thermometers
T5 Mineral-insulated thermocouples
T5/1 Thermocouple plug connectors

Threaded fittings
T6 Compensation leads
Connection leads
Connection leads for resistance
thermometers
W1 Resistance thermometers and

thermocouples
W2 Measurement inserts for

resistance thermometers
W3 Temperature sensors, Pt100
W5 Mineral-insulated resistance
thermometers, Pt100
TW Thermocouples and resistance

thermometers for special
applications
PO Box 12 20 Telephone +49(0)6851/9339-0 www.conatex.de

1 l l l
D-66592 St.Wendel Telefax +49 (0) 68 51 /20 76 vertrieb@conatex.de
General Operating Instructions for Temperature Measurement

with Thermocouples and Resistance Thermometers
Table of Contents
1. Terms used and abbreviations
2. Mode of operation
2.1 General explanation
2.2 Thermocouples
2.3 Resistance thermometers
3. Commissioning Electric Thermometers

3.1 Installation of electronic thermometers
3.2 Installation and instructions for operation
3.3 Measurement leads
3.4 Mineral-insulated thermocouple leads (MTE leads)
4. Additional information
4.1 Electrical connection diagram for measurement transmitter
4.2 Electrical connection diagram
Straight/angled thermocouples, thermocouple inserts
Mineral-insulated thermocouples Form 6 and Form 7
(plug connections)
Resistance thermometer inserts
4.5 Electrical connection diagram,
Mineral-insulated resistance thermometers,
free connection lead ends, Form 1, and cable version, Form 4
4.6 (plug connections)
5. Thermoelectric voltage Series 8 limiting deviations
6. Colour marking for thermocouples and compensating cables
7. Basic value series and limiting deviations for resistance thermometers
8. Service, calibration service, maintenance

l l l 2
1. Terms used and abbreviations
AGL Compensation cable
Du. Diameter
EL Installed length
EMK Electromotive force, thermoelectric voltage of thermocouples
ME Measuring insert
MML Mineral-insulated cable
MTE Mineral-insulated thermocouple
MTE-Leitung Mineral-insulated thermocouple lead
MW Measurement resistance
MWTM Mineral-insulated resistance thermometer
r Radius
SR Protection tube
TE Thermocouple
TE-ME Thermocouple insert
TP Thermocouple
WTM Resistance thermometer
WTM-ME Resistance thermometer insert
2. Mode of operation
2.1 General explanation
Mode of operation
In many processes it is extremely important to record the temperature, consider for example the melting
of metals, chemical reactions, food processing etc. Different as the sectors mentioned are, the tasks faced by
temperature sensors, the physical principles of their operation, and their technical execution are at least as different or
more so.
The information in this brochure is concerned principally with thermocouples and platinum resistance thermometers.
They are very often used, for example, for measurements in gases, liquids, melts, on surfaces, and inside solid
bodies. Accuracy, response behaviour, temperature range and chemical properties determine the choice of sensors
and protective fittings.

3 l l l
2.2 Temperature measurement with thermocouples
A thermocouple consists of two wires made of different metals or metal alloys spot-welded together. When the
joint (also known as the measuring tip or hot junction) is heated, a voltage arises at the free ends (connections).
The two free ends are extended using special leads (compensation cables) to a constant temperature zone
(reference junction).
A thermocouple measures the temperature difference between the measuring tip and the reference junction. If
a constant reference temperature is not available, the reference junction is executed as a thermostat. This thermostat
regulates the temperature to a fixed value, e.g. 0, 20, 50 or 70°C. Another way to achieve temperature compensation
is to use a voltage compensator. A voltage compensator consists of a Wheatstone’s bridge circuit with a constant
supply voltage. With one or two temperature-dependent resistances, the influence of a variable reference temperature
is eliminated by the additional voltage. The bridge circuit is dimensioned so that there is no additional voltage at the
reference temperature.
The thermocouple must be extended to the reference junction using compensation cables. Up to a temperature of
200°C the compensation cables have the same thermoelectric properties as the thermocouple itself. The effect of
this is that the two leads and their associated thermocouple legs supply no voltage and have the same permissible
tolerances as the thermocouple wires.
From the large number of thermocouple pairs, several have been standardised. These standardised thermocouple pairs
must comply with a range of requirements relating to their composition, purity and processing. They have established
themselves in use due to their reproducibility and reliability. The thermal voltages and permissible tolerances
for the standardised thermocouples are set down in reference tables. These are given in the standard
DIN EN 60584-1 / IEC 584-1.
To provide protection against mechanical and chemical influences, thermocouples are installed in protection tubes.
The protective fittings must be adapted to the relevant operating conditions; they are covered in several DIN
standards.
Copper wire
Reference junction
Reference junction
Compensation cables
Compensation cables
Connection point Connection point
Measuring tip
Measuring tip

l l l 4
2.3 Resistance thermometers
Resistance thermometers exploit the continuous change in resistance of metals as the temperature changes. Due to
its high stability and reproducibility, the resistance material mainly used today is platinum with nickel as the alternative.
Both metals have a positive temperature coefficient, i.e. the resistance increases as the temperature rises.
The temperature is measured by means of a resistance measurement using a resistance bridge (two or three wire
circuit), or by measuring the voltage drop across a resistance at constant current (four-wire circuit, current-voltage
measurement).
In measurements with resistance thermometers, the resistance of the connecting leads must be taken into account.
Generally three different circuits are used.
Four-wire circuit
For the most accurate results a four-wire circuit should be used, because here neither the resistance of the
connecting leads, nor their ambient temperature influences the results.
To measuring instrument
Three-wire circuit
When a three-wire circuit is used, the resistance of the connecting leads must be compensated (Wheatstone’s bridge
circuit).
Two-wire circuit
With a two-wire circuit the connecting lead resistances are completely incorporated into the measurement circuit
of the bridge. With modern regulation devices the influence of connecting lead resistance can be eliminated with a
compensation resistance in a two-wire circuit.

5 l l l
3. Commissioning Electric Thermometers

3.1 Installation of electronic thermometers
The usual methods of installation or attachment are:
zz Threaded mounting (parallel or tapered)
zz Flange and union nut
zz Flange and counter flange, slidable - only suitable for low gas pressures
zz Welded flange, also with lens gasket
zz Slidable compression fitting – suitable for liquids and gases up to high pressures
zz Slidable, spring-loaded compression fitting - suitable for up to ca. 8 bar/100 °C
zz Welded-in to tubes, tube nozzles, vessel walls
zz Bayonet fitting – not leak-tight
zz Screwed, welded or glued to surfaces
zz Location of protection tube in space: at low temperatures, as you wish, at higher temperatures, preferably vertical,
top-mounted
In addition the following points should be observed:
zz Always use the correct compensation cables with a thermocouple
zz Always connect a resistance thermometer with copper wire of the largest possible diameter
zz The ambient temperature at the connection head should be <200°C, and <90°C when a transmitter is installed
zz Installation, commissioning and maintenance should only be carried out by authorised, qualified personnel
zz Relevant DIN standards must be observed
zz For specific data concerning max. working temperature, type of connection etc., please see the appropriate
technical description
zz Ceramic protection tubes must be protected against mechanical effects (blows) and temperature shock. Avoid
direct exposure to flames. When installing from room temperature into a hot process, move slowly into position
(1 - 2 cm/min at 1600°C; 10 - 20 cm/min at 1200°C), or preheat accordingly. Avoid horizontal unsupported
lengths >ca. 500 mm at temperatures >1200 °C.

l l l 6
3.2 Installation and instructions for operation
For all the above installation methods, it is important to ensure that the connection to the process is leak-tight, secure,
safe, and complies with the state of the art and local regulations. Care must also be taken that the thermometer has
adequate heat-exchange surface with the medium that is to be measured, and that errors due to thermal conduction
through the protection tube are kept to a minimum. For technical applications these conditions are met with the
following installed lengths:
in water/
liquids: temperature sensitive length + ca. 5 x SR diameter
in air, gases,
steam: temperature sensitive length + ca. 10 x SR diameter
For thermocouples the temperature sensitive length is generally negligible, while for resistance thermometers the
manufacturer’s instructions must be followed.
In small diameter pipelines the required installed length can only be achieved if the protection tube is installed in an
elbow so that it is against the flow. In an installation where the installed length is, for example, temperature sensitive
length + 1 x SR diameter, you must expect that measurement errors will be relatively large in relation to the standards.
It is important when using resistance thermometers, resistance thermometer measuring inserts, or similar designs,
that the temperature sensitive part, the tip, is never bent; the length that must not be bent is ca. 50 mm for 6 mm und
3 mm diameters.
On the other hand, mineral-insulated thermocouple wire can be bent without affecting its technical properties.
This also applies to mineral-insulated thermocouples and mineral-insulated thermocouple inserts.
3.3 Measurement leads
3.3.1 General
Connection leads between the sensor and other equipment in the measurement circuit generally have insulation
made of plastic, or glass or mineral fibres. They must be chosen so that:
zz They are suitable for the environment, i.e. they are resistant to local thermal, mechanical and chemical effects
zz Measurement signals are falsified as little as possible by connection lead resistance (cross-section, length) and
defective insulation
zz The compensation cables are suitable for the thermocouple and are connected with the correct polarity
zz Interference from other signals is minimised by: static screening, use of twisted pairs for leads, crossing power
lines at right angles, keeping a distance of >0.5 m when laid parallel to power lines
zz On all leads the wires at connections must be clean, bare metal with no loose contacts, so that there is negligible
contact resistance
zz Compensation cables with conductors made from alternative materials should not be exposed to temperatures >200°C.
Measurement leads, thermocouples and resistance thermometers should be checked regularly to ensure that there
are no signs of mechanical and electrical damage.

7 l l l
3.4 Mineral-insulated thermocouple leads (MTE leads)
For especially difficult environments, e.g. continuous exposure to temperatures of 500°C, radioactive radiation,
high mechanical loads etc., normal cables are not adequate. In such cases mineral-insulated thermocouple leads must
be used. They have a metal outer sheath, ceramic powder insulation, and thermocouple wires as the inner conductor;
mineral-insulated measurement leads have copper conductors; both types can be bent if necessary (to r >3 x diameter once,
or to r > 5 x diameter several times). When wound into a helical coil they can be used as an “elastic” lead.
Guidelines for the insulation resistance of mineral-insulated thermocouple leads from

1.5 mm dia.:
At test temperature: 20°C ± 15 1000 MΩ m
At test temperature: 500°C ± 15 5 MΩ
(Test voltage: 500 V DC ± 50 V)
The dimensions (Ohm x m) indicate that a piece 1 m long has the above-mentioned insulation resistance. If the piece
is 10 m long, the total insulation resistance is 1/10th. of the above-mentioned value, and for a piece 0.1 m long it is
10-times that value.
The ceramic insulation of mineral-insulated thermocouple leads (usually MgO) is hygroscopic; the essential seals
must not be damaged. Suitable sealing materials are, for example, epoxy resin (adhesive) or molten plastic.
4. Additional information
4.1 Electrical connection diagram for measurement transmitters
Measurement transmitter with analogue output, e.g. 4 ... 20 mA, or digital output, e.g. Profibus PA
For resistance thermometers and thermocouples with a built-in measurement transmitter, the measurement range
scale is as stated in the product description. Normally the only exception to this is that, when the required setting is
not specified on the order, the dimension is supplied with the basic setting (0 ... 100°C for a Pt100). In this case scaling
must be carried out on site before commissioning.
Please see the operating instructions for the relevant measurement transmitter for the connection diagram and
technical data.
Just ask us for any documents you need!

l l l 8

Straight/angled thermocouples, thermocouple inserts
Please see the product description for possible differences!

Connection head Form A (model range)
Base-metal thermocouple Base-metal thermocouple
1 TP 2 TP 1 TP 2 TP
Connection head Form B1 (model range)
Precious and base-metal thermocouples Thermocouple inserts
+ pole
+ pole + pole
Connection head Forms C, CL and J (model ranges)
Base-metal thermocouple Base-metal thermocouple
+ pole
+ pole + pole
1 TP 2 TP

Mineral-insulated thermocouples Form 6 and Form 7 (plug connections)

Form 6, Lemo connector
Form 7
Standard connector Miniature connector

9 l l l

Resistance thermometer inserts
Connection head Form B (model range)
Pt 100 Pt 100 Pt 100

Two-wire circuit Three-wire circuit Four-wire circuit
White Red Red Red White
Red White Red White
2x Pt 100 2x Pt 100 2x Pt 100

Two-wire circuit Three-wire circuit Four-wire circuit
White
Black White Black White
Black
Red
Yellow Red Red Yellow
Yellow
4.5 Electrical connection diagram, Mineral-insulated resistance thermometers,

free connection lead ends, Form 1, and cable version, Form 4
Resistance thermometer internal connections: circuits and colour codes
Number of Internal circuits

measurement
windings Two-wire Three-wire Four-wire
Red Red
Red Red Red
Pt 100
White White
White
White
Red
Red Red
White White
2x
Pt 100 Black Black
Black
Yellow
Yellow

l l l 10
4.6 Electrical connection diagrams

Mineral-insulated resistance thermometers, Form 6 (plug connections)
Resistance thermometer internal connections: circuits and connections
Connection box and connector, 2 or 4-pin

Internal circuits
Number of measurement windings
Pt 100 2 x Pt 100
Two-wire
Three-wire
Four-wire
Two-wire
with loop

11 l l l
5. Thermal voltages to DIN EN 60584-1 and DIN 43710

Closer tolerances can be supplied on request, for example, to half of DIN 43710, or Class 1 or Class 2 to
DIN EN 60584-2. The individual wires or pairs of wires outside the body are supplied wound on a spool, either singly
or together.
Type L1) and Type U1) thermocouples comply with DIN 437101), December 1985 edition. These two types of
thermocouple have different basic data from thermocouples Type J and Type T to DIN EN 60584-1.
The colour coding is to DIN 43710 or DIN EN 60584 respectively (see also List T6).
Basic data in µV
DIN EN 60584-1 DIN 437101)
°C Cu-CuNi NiCr-CuNi Fe-CuNi NiCr-Ni NiCrSi-NiSi Pt10Rh-Pt Pt13Rh-Pt Pt30Rh-Pt6Rh Cu-CuNi Fe-CuNi
(ITS 90) (Type T) (Type E) (Type J) (Type K) (Type N) (Type S) (Type R) (Type B) (Type U) (Type L)
–200 –5603 –8825 –7890 –5891 –3990 – – – –5700 –8150
–100 –3379 –5237 –4633 –3554 –2407 – – – –3400 –4750
+100 4279 6319 5269 4096 2774 646 647 33 4250 5370
200 9288 13421 10779 8138 5913 1441 1469 178 9200 10950
300 14862 21036 16327 12209 9341 2323 2401 431 14900 16560
400 20872 28946 21848 16397 12974 3259 3408 787 21000 22160
500 37005 27393 20644 16748 4233 4471 1242 27410 27850
600 45093 33102 24905 20613 5239 5583 1792 34310 33670
700 53112 39132 29129 24527 6275 6743 2431 39720
800 61017 45494 33275 28455 7345 7950 3154 46220
900 68787 51877 37326 32371 8449 9205 3957 53140
1000 76373 57953 41276 36256 9587 10506 4834
1100 63792 45119 40087 10757 11850 5780
1200 69553 48838 43846 11951 13228 6786
1300 52410 47513 13159 14629 7848
1400 14373 16040 8956
1500 15582 17451 10099
1600 16777 18849 11263
1700 17947 20222 12433
1800 13591
Thermal voltages in 10°C steps are given in our publication TM, General Operating Instructions for Temperature Measurement with Thermocouples and Resistance
Thermometers. Just ask us for any documents you need!
Tolerance classes for thermocouples (reference junction temperature: 0°C)

Tolerance class 1 2 3
Thermo-couple Temperature
J K N E T R/S B J K N E T R/S B J K N E T R/S B
type in °C
3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 -200

2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 -167
2.5 2.5 2.5 1.0 -67
1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 0.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 1.0 2.5 2.5 2.5 1.0 -40
1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 0.5 1.0 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 1.0 1.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 1.0 0
1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 0.5 1.0 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 1.0 1.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 1.0 40
1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 0.5 1.0 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 1.0 1.5 100
1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 0.5 1.0 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 1.0 1.5 125
1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 0.5 1.0 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 1.0 1.5 133
1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 0.8 1.0 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 1.5 1.5 200
1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.3 1.0 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 1.5 333
Tolerance
1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.4 1.0 2.6 2.6 2.6 2.6 2.6 1.5 350
± ... °C
1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.0 2.8 2.8 2.8 2.8 1.5 375
2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 1.0 3.8 3.8 3.8 3.8 1.5 500
2.4 2.4 2.4 2.4 1.0 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 1.5 1.5 4.0 600
3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 1.0 5.6 5.6 5.6 5.6 1.9 1.9 4.0 750
3.2 3.2 3.2 1.0 6.0 6.0 6.0 2.0 2.0 4.0 800
3.6 3.6 1.0 6.8 6.8 6.8 2.3 2.3 4.5 900
4.0 4.0 1.0 7.5 7.5 2.5 2.5 5.0 1000
1.0 8.3 8.3 2.8 2.8 5.5 1100
1.3 9.0 9.0 3.0 3.0 6.0 1200
2.5 4.0 4.0 8.0 1600
2.8 4.3 8.5 1700
1)
DIN 43710 was withdrawn in 1994; not to be used for new installations.

l l l 12
6. Compensation Cables, Connection Leads and

Thermocouples
Colour coding and temperature ranges
international International Germany USA Great Britain France

DIN 43722 DIN IEC 584 DIN 437101)
Thermocouple type DIN IEC 584 for intrinsically DIN 43713 ANSI MC96.1 BS 4937 NF C 42-324
Typ +Pol –Pol Code safe equipment DIN 43714
T Cu CuNi TX
-25...+100 °C
U1) Cu CuNi UX
0...+100 °C
J Fe CuNi JX
-25...+200 °C
L1) Fe CuNi LX
0...+200 °C
E NiCr CuNi EX
-25...+200°C
K NiCr Ni KX1)
-25...+200°C
N NiCrSi NiSi NC
-25...+200°C
Pt10Rh Pt RC/SC
R/S
Pt13Rh Pt 0...+200°C
B Pt30Rh Pt6Rh BC
0...+200°C
Standard Colour Type T Type E Type J Type K Type N Type S/R Type B Type U Type L
code
+ pole Brown Violet Black Green Pink Orange Grey - -
DIN EN 60584 - pole White White White White White White White - -
Sheat Brown Violet Black Green Pink Orange Grey - -
1)
+ pole - - - Red - Red Red Red Red
DIN 43710 - pole - - - Green - White Grey Brown Blue
Sheath - - - Green - White Grey Brown Blue
+ pole Blue Purple White Yellow Orange Black Grey - -
ANSI MC96.1 - pole Red Red Red Red Red Red Red - -
Sheat Blue Purple Black Yellow Orange Green Grey - -
+ pole White Brown Yellow Brown Orange White - - -
BS 4937 - pole Blue Blue Blue Blue Blue Blue - - -
Sheath Blue Brown Black Red Orange Green - - -
+ pole Yellow Yellow Yellow Yellow - Yellow Yellow - -
NF C42-324 - pole Blue Orange Black Violet - Green Grey - -
Sheath Blue Orange Black Violet - Green Grey - -
Original material Code „X“ with prefixed thermocouple type, e.g. KX for NiCr-Ni.
Alternative material Code „X“ with prefixed thermocouple type, e.g. NC for NiCrSi-NiSi.
1)
DIN 43710 was withdrawn in 1994; not to be used for new installations.

13 l l l
7. Resistance thermometers Pt100 DIN EN 60751
Basic data in 10°C steps from -200 ... 850°C
Temp. Resistance dR/dt Temp. Resistance dR/dt Temp. Resistance dR/dt

in °C in Ohm Ohm/°C in °C in Ohm Ohm/°C in °C in Ohm Ohm/°C
-200 18.5201 0.4322 150 157.3251 0.3734 500 280.9775 0.3330
-190 22.8255 0.4286 160 161.0544 0.3723 510 284.3025 0.3319
-180 27.0964 0.4253 170 164.7721 0.3711 520 287.6160 0.3307
-170 31.3350 0.4222 180 168.4783 0.3700 530 290.9179 0.3296
-160 35.5433 0.4192 190 172.1729 0.3688 540 294.2083 0.3284
-150 39.7232 0.4165 200 175.8560 0.3677 550 297.4871 0.3272
-140 43.8764 0.4139 210 179.5275 0.3665 560 300.7544 0.3261
-130 48.0048 0.4115 220 183.1875 0.3654 570 304.0101 0.3249
-120 52.1098 0.4039 230 186.8359 0.3642 580 307.2543 0.3238
-110 56.1930 0.4072 240 190.4728 0.3631 590 310.4869 0.3226
-100 60.2558 0.4052 250 194.0981 0.3619 600 313.7080 0.3215
-90 64.2996 0.4034 260 197.7119 0.3607 610 316.9175 0.3203
-80 68.3254 0.4016 270 201.3141 0.3596 620 320.1155 0.3192
-70 72.3345 0.4000 280 204.9048 0.3584 630 323.3019 0.3180
-60 76.3278 0.3985 290 208.4839 0.3573 640 326.4768 0.3169
-50 80.3063 0.3971 300 212.0515 0.3561 650 329.6401 0.3157
-40 84.2707 0.3957 310 215.6075 0.3550 660 332.7919 0.3145
-30 88.2217 0.3944 320 219.1520 0.3538 670 335.9321 0.3134
-20 92.1599 0.3931 330 222.6849 0.3527 680 339.0608 0.3122
-10 96.0859 0.3919 340 226.2063 0.3515 690 342.1779 0.3111
0 100.0000 0.3908 350 229.7161 0.3503 700 345.2835 0.3099
10 103.9025 0.3896 360 233.2144 0.3492 710 348.3775 0.3088
20 107.7935 0.3885 370 236.7011 0.3480 720 351.4600 0.3076
30 111.6729 0.3873 380 240.1763 0.3469 730 354.5309 0.3085
40 115.5408 0.3862 390 243.6399 0.3457 740 357.5903 0.3053
50 119.3971 0.3850 400 247.0920 0.3446 750 360.6381 0.3041
60 123.2419 0.3838 410 250.5325 0.3434 760 363.6744 0.3030
70 127.0751 0.3827 420 253.9615 0.3423 770 366.6991 0.3018
80 130.8968 0.3815 430 257.3789 0.3411 780 369.7123 0.3007
90 134.7069 0.3804 440 260.7848 0.3400 790 372.7139 0.2995
100 138.5055 0.3792 450 264.1791 0.3388 800 375.7040 0.2984
110 142.2925 0.3781 460 267.5619 0.3376 810 378.6825 0.2972
120 146.0680 0.3769 470 270.9331 0.3365 820 381.6495 0.2961
130 149.8319 0.3758 480 274.2928 0.3353 830 384.6049 0.2949
140 153.5843 0.3746 490 277.6409 0.3342 840 387.5488 0.2938
850 390.4811 0.2926
Tolerances
Tolerance
class Tolerances for Pt100 resistance sensors
in ± °C 0.55 0.35 0.15 0.35 0.55 0.75 0.95 1.15 1.35 1.45
A in ± Ω 0.24 0.14 0.06 0.13 0.20 0.27 0.33 0.38 0.43 0.46
in ± °C 1.30 0.80 0.30 0.80 1.30 1.80 2.30 2.80 3.30 3.55 3.80 4.30 4.55
B in ± Ω 0.56 0.32 0.12 0.30 0.48 0.64 0.79 0.93 1.06 1.13 1.17 1.28 1.34
Nominal resistance in Ω 18.52 60.62 100.00 138.51 175.86 212.05 247.09 280.98 313.71 329.64 345.28 375.70 390.48
Temperatur in °C -200 -100 0 100 200 300 400 500 600 650 700 800 850

l l l 14
8. Service
Repair of multimeters, measurement and control equipment, thermocouple and resistance

thermometers
Calibration service for temperature and The international quality standards

electrical measurements EN ISO 9000 etc. require that measurement
and test equipment used in production
processes is verified at regular intervals.
The calibration certificate establishes
traceability back to national standards.
The Calibration Laboratory at Conatex has

been a competent partner for DAkkS/DKD for
temperature measurement calibrations in the
range -40 ... 1200°C since 1992.
Naturally we can also quote you for works

calibrations for the same temperature range
and for calibrating electrical measuring
instruments (multimeters, calibrators etc.)
Maintenance Our qualified service personnel can maintain,

test and repair your measurement and control
equipment.
Within the scope of DIN EN ISO 9000 etc.

we can issue measurement reports for your
plant and equipment. The test and calibration
equipment we use is regularly recalibrated in
our own DAkkS/DKD-approved laboratory,
so that traceability to national standards
is possible.

15 l l l
Data sheet 3SK1111-1AB30
SIRIUS safety relay Basic unit Standard series Relay enabling
circuits 3 NO contacts plus Relay signaling circuit 1 NC contact Us =
24 V AC/DC screw terminal
General technical data

Product brand name SIRIUS
Product category Safety relays
Product designation safety relays
Design of the product Relay enabling circuits
Protection class IP of the enclosure IP20
Protection against electrical shock finger-safe
Insulation voltage rated value 300 V
Ambient temperature
● during storage -40 ... +80 °C
● during operation -25 ... +60 °C
Air pressure acc. to SN 31205 90 kPa ... 106 kPa
Relative humidity during operation 10 ... 95 %
Installation altitude at height above sea level 2 000 m
maximum
Vibration resistance acc. to IEC 60068-2-6 5 ... 500 Hz: 0.75 mm
Shock resistance 10g / 11 ms
Surge voltage resistance rated value 4 000 V
EMC emitted interference IEC 60947-5-1, IEC 61000
3SK1111-1AB30 Subject to change without notice

Page 1/8 09/12/2019 © Copyright Siemens
Installation environment regarding EMC This product is suitable for Class B environments and can also be
used in domestic environments.
Overvoltage category 3
Degree of pollution 3
Number of sensor inputs 1-channel or 2-channel 1
Design of the cascading none
Type of the safety-related wiring of the inputs single-channel and two-channel
Product feature cross-circuit-proof Yes
Safety Integrity Level (SIL)
● acc. to IEC 61508 3
Performance level (PL)
● acc. to EN ISO 13849-1 e
Category acc. to EN ISO 13849-1 4
Safe failure fraction (SFF) 99 %
PFHD with high demand rate acc. to EN 62061 0.0000000017 1/h
PFDavg with low demand rate acc. to IEC 61508 0.000001
T1 value for proof test interval or service life acc. to 20 y
IEC 61508
Hardware fault tolerance acc. to IEC 61508 1
Safety device type acc. to IEC 61508-2 Type A
Number of outputs as contact-affected switching
element
● as NC contact
— for signaling function instantaneous 1
contact
— for signaling function delayed switching 0
— safety-related instantaneous contact 0
— safety-related delayed switching 0
● as NO contact
— for signaling function instantaneous 0
contact
— for signaling function delayed switching 0
— safety-related instantaneous contact 3
— safety-related delayed switching 0
Number of outputs as contact-less semiconductor
switching element
● safety-related
— delayed switching 0
— instantaneous contact 0
● for signaling function instantaneous contact 0
Stop category acc. to DIN EN 60204-1 0
General technical data

Design of input

● cascading input/functional switching No
● feedback input Yes
● Start input Yes
Type of electrical connection Plug-in socket No
Operating frequency maximum 360 1/h
Switching capacity current
● of the NO contacts of the relay outputs
— at DC-13
— at 24 V 5 A
— at 115 V 0.2 A
— at 230 V 0.1 A
— at AC-15
— at 115 V 5 A
— at 230 V 5 A
● of the NC contacts of the relay outputs
— at DC-13
— at 24 V 1 A
— at 115 V 0.2 A
— at 230 V 0.1 A
— at AC-15
— at 115 V 1.5 A
— at 230 V 1.5 A
Thermal current of the switching element with 5 A
contacts maximum
Operating current at 17 V minimum 5 mA
Mechanical service life (switching cycles) typical 10 000 000
Design of the fuse link for short-circuit protection of gL/gG: 6A or circuit breaker type A: 3A or circuit breaker type B:
the NO contacts of the relay outputs required 2A or circuit breaker type C: 1A
Design of the fuse link for short circuit protection of Diazed or Neozed fuses, operating class gL/gG: 6 A or MCB type
the NC contacts of the relay outputs required A: 2 A or MCB type B: 2 A or MCB type C: 1 A
Wire length
● for total of all sensor circuits with Cu 1.5 mm² 2 000 m
and 150 nF/km maximum
Make time with automatic start
● typical 200 ms
● at DC maximum 320 ms
● at AC maximum 320 ms
Make time with automatic start after power failure
● typical 200 ms
● maximum 320 ms
Make time with monitored start
● maximum 20 ms

● typical 15 ms
Backslide delay time after opening of the safety 10 ms
circuits typical
Backslide delay time in the event of power failure
● typical 65 ms
● maximum 75 ms
Recovery time after opening of the safety circuits 10 ms
typical
Recovery time after power failure typical 0.09 s
Pulse duration
● of the sensor input minimum 150 ms
● of the ON pushbutton input minimum 0.015 s
Control circuit/ Control

Type of voltage of the control supply voltage AC/DC
Control supply voltage frequency
● 1 rated value 50 Hz
● 2 rated value 60 Hz
Control supply voltage
● at DC
— rated value 24 V
● at AC
— at 50 Hz
— at 60 Hz
Operating range factor control supply voltage rated
value of magnet coil
● at AC
— at 50 Hz 0.85 ... 1.1
— at 60 Hz 0.85 ... 1.1
● at DC 0.85 ... 1.2
Installation/ mounting/ dimensions

Mounting position any
Required spacing for grounded parts at the side 5 mm
Required spacing with side-by-side mounting at the 0 mm
side
Mounting type screw and snap-on mounting
Width 22.5 mm
Height 100 mm
Depth 121.6 mm
Connections/Terminals
Type of electrical connection screw-type terminals

Type of connectable conductor cross-sections
● solid 1x (0.5 ... 2.5 mm²), 2x (1.0 ... 1.5 mm²)
● finely stranded
— with core end processing 1x (0.5 ... 2.5 mm²), 2x (0.5 ... 1.0 mm²)
Type of connectable conductor cross-sections at
AWG conductors
● solid 1x (20 ... 14), 2x (18 ... 16)
● stranded 1x (20 ... 16), 2x (20 ... 16)
Product Function
Product function parameterizable Sensor floating / sensor non-floating, monitored start / autostart
Suitability for operation Device connector 3ZY12 No
Suitability for interaction press control No
Suitability for use
● safety switch Yes
● Monitoring of floating sensors Yes
● Monitoring of non-floating sensors Yes
● magnetically operated switch monitoring Yes
● safety-related circuits Yes
Certificates/approvals
General Product Approval EMC Functional
Safety/Safety
of Machinery
Type Examination
Certificate
Declaration of Conformity Test Certific- Shipping Approval

ates
Miscellaneous Type Test Certific-
ates/Test Report
other Railway
Confirmation Confirmation
Further information

Information- and Downloadcenter (Catalogs, Brochures,…)
http://www.siemens.com/industrial-controls/catalogs
Industry Mall (Online ordering system)
https://mall.industry.siemens.com/mall/en/en/Catalog/product?mlfb=3SK1111-1AB30
Cax online generator
http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/CAXorder/default.aspx?lang=en&mlfb=3SK1111-1AB30
Service&Support (Manuals, Certificates, Characteristics, FAQs,...)
https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/ps/3SK1111-1AB30
Image database (product images, 2D dimension drawings, 3D models, device circuit diagrams, EPLAN macros, ...)
http://www.automation.siemens.com/bilddb/cax_de.aspx?mlfb=3SK1111-1AB30&lang=en
121.7
22.5 116.7
50
100

F/S
A1+
IN1
IN2
IN3
T1
T2
T3
T4
13
23
33
41
IN
-K
Logic
Autostart / Monitored Start
14
24
34
42
A2-

F/S
A1+
IN1
IN2
IN3
T1
T2
T3
T4
13
23
33
41
IN
-K
Logic
Autostart / Monitored Start
14
24
34
42
A2-
last modified: 09/08/2019

DEUTSCH ENGLISH ESPAÑOL 简体中文
Beschreibung Description Descripción 述
SITOP PSU8200 Die SITOP-Stromversorgungen sind Einbaugeräte, SITOP power supplies 24 V/20 A are built-in units, Las fuentes de alimentación SITOP de 24 V/20 A son 24 V/20 A SITOP 电源内置设备，防护方式
6EP1336-3BA10 (24 V/20 A) Schutzart IP20, Schutzklasse I. degree of protection IP20, protection class I. aparatos empotrables con grado de protección IP20 y IP20，防护等 I
Primär getaktete Stromversorgungen zum An- Primary switched-mode power supplies for connec- clase de protección I. 设备时钟电源，用于接在一相交流供电系统
Betriebsanleitung (kompakt)
Operating Instructions (compact) schluss an 1-phasiges Wechselstromnetz oder an 2 tion to 1-phase AC system or to 2 line conductors of Fuente de alimentación conmutada en primario para la 或接在相电源的 2 根线路导线符合
Instrucciones de servicio (resumidas) Außenleiter von Drehstromnetzen (TN-, TT- oder IT- three-phase line supplies (TN, TT or IT line system conexión a la red alterna monofásica o a 2 conductores VDE 0100 T 300 / IEC 364-3标准的 TN TT 或 IT 电
操作说明 (精简版) Netz nach VDE 0100 T 300 / IEC 364-3) mit Nenn- in accordance with VDE 0100 T 300 / IEC 364-3) de fase de redes trifásicas (redes TN, TT o IT según 网标称电压 120 - 230 V，50 - 60 Hz 或
Notice de service (compacte) spannungen 120 - 230 V, 50 - 60 Hz bzw. with rated voltages of 120 - 230 V, 50 - 60 Hz VDE 0100 T 300 / IEC 364-3) con tensiones nominales 110 - 220 V DC 输电压 +24 V DC，电位隔离，
Istruzioni operative (descrizione sintetica) 110 - 220 V DC; Ausgangsspannung +24 V DC, or 110 - 220 V DC; +24 V DC output voltage, isolat- de 120 - 230 V, 50 - 60 Hz o 110 - 220 V DC; tensión de 具有短路保护和空载保护功能
( )
potenzialfrei, kurzschluss- und leerlauffest. ed, short-circuit-proof and idling-proof. salida +24 V DC, aislamiento galvánico, resistente a
cortocircuito y a marcha en vacío.
Siehe Bild 1 Ansicht Gerät (Seite 1) See Image 1 View of unit (Page 1) Ver Figura 1 Vista del aparato (Página 1) 参 1 设备外 ( 1)
Sicherheitshinweise Safety notes Consignas de seguridad 安全示

ACHTUNG NOTICE ATENCIÓN 注意
https://support.industry.siemens.com
Der einwandfreie und sichere Betrieb dieses Appropriate transport, proper storage, mounting, and El funcionamiento correcto y seguro de este 设备/系统的安全常运行依赖于确规范的运输
Gerätes/Systems setzt sachgemäßen Transport, installation, as well as careful operation and service, aparato/sistema presupone un transporte, un 存放装配安装作业及仔细谨慎的操作和维护
sachgemäße Lagerung, Aufstellung und Montage are essential for the error-free, safe and reliable almacenamiento, una instalación y un montaje 在安装和运行设备前请务必阅读并注意设备/系统
sowie sorgfältige Bedienung und Instandhaltung operation of the device/system. conformes a las prácticas de la buena ingeniería, 技术文档中包含的规定和警示
voraus. Setup and operation of this device/system are así como un manejo y un mantenimiento rigurosos.
设备/系统仅允许由专业技术人员安装和调试
Dieses Gerät/System darf nur unter Beachtung der permitted only if the instructions and warnings of the Este aparato/sistema debe ajustarse y utilizarse
Instruktionen und Warnhinweise der zugehörigen associated technical documentation are carefully únicamente teniendo en cuenta las instrucciones y
technischen Dokumentation eingerichtet und observed. advertencias de la documentación técnica
betrieben werden. Only qualified personnel are allowed to install the correspondiente.
Nur qualifiziertes Personal darf das Gerät/System device/system and set it into operation. La instalación y puesta en marcha del
installieren und in Betrieb setzen. aparato/sistema debe encomendarse
exclusivamente a personal cualificado.
Das Gerät erfüllt die ATEX Richtlinie 2014/34/EU; The device complies with ATEX directive El aparato cumple la directiva ATEX 2014/34/UE; 设备符合 ATEX 指 2014/34/EU EN 60079-0
EN 60079-0; EN 60079-15 2014/34/EU; EN 60079-0; EN 60079-15 EN 60079-0; EN 60079-15. EN 60079-15 中的规定
WARNUNG WARNING ADVERTENCIA 警告

SPANNUNGSEINSTELLUNG ODER OPERATE VOLTAGE ADJUSTMENT OR ¡AJUSTAR LA TENSIÓN O ACCIONAR 仅允许在无爆危险的环境执行调压和开关操作！
SCHALTERBETÄTIGUNG NUR IN NICHT- SWITCHES IN NON-HAZARDOUS AREAS ONLY! INTERRUPTORES SÓLO EN ENTORNOS NO
EXPLOSIVER UMGEBUNG DURCHFÜHREN! EXPLOSIVOS!
Montage Assembling Montaje 安装

Montage auf Normprofilschiene TH35-15/7,5 Mounting on a standard mounting rail TH35-15/7.5 Montaje en perfil normalizado TH35-15/7,5 导轨 TH35-15/7.5 (EN 60715) 的安装
Bild 1: Ansicht Gerät (EN 60715). (EN 60715). (EN 60715). 安装设备时应使线端子和入线端子位于方
Image 1: View of unit Das Gerät ist so zu montieren, dass die Eingangs- The device must be mounted in such a way that the El aparato debe montarse de modo que los bornes
Figura 1: Vista del aparato 设备的方和方必须少保留 50 mm 的通风空
und Ausgangsklemmen unten sind. input and output terminals are at the bottom. de entrada y salida queden abajo. 间
1: 设备外
Figure 1: Vue de l'appareil Unterhalb und oberhalb des Gerätes muss mindes- A clearance of at least 50 mm must be maintained Por encima y por debajo del aparato debe dejarse
Figura 1: Vista dell'apparecchio tens ein Freiraum von je 50 mm eingehalten werden. above and below the device. un espacio libre de al menos 50 mm.
1: Bei Installation des Gerätes in explosionsgefährde- If the device is to be used in a hazardous zone (II Si se va a instalar el aparato en una atmósfera po- 设备安装在有爆危险的环境 (II 3G Ex nA nC IIC T3
ter Umgebung (II 3G Ex nA nC IIC T3 Gc) ist dieses 3G Ex nA nC IIC T3 Gc) it must be installed in an tencialmente explosiva (II 3G Ex nA nC IIC T3 Gc), Gc) 中时，必须安装在防护方式符合 IP54 或满足更
in einen Verteilerkasten mit Schutzart IP54 oder enclosure with degree of protection IP54 or higher. deberá montarse en una caja con grado de protec- 高要求的配电箱中该配电箱必须符合 EN 60079-15
höher einzubauen. Dieser Verteilerkasten muss den This enclosure must comply with the requirements ción IP54 o superior. Esta caja debe cumplir los 规定的要求
Anforderungen der EN 60079-15 entsprechen. of EN 60079-15. requisitos de EN 60079-15.
Siehe Bild 2 Aufbau (Seite 2) See Image 2 Design (Page 2) Ver Figura 2 Diseño (Página 2) 参 2 结构 ( 2)
Anschließen Connecting Conexión 接线

WARNUNG WARNING ADVERTENCIA 警告
Vor Beginn der Installations- oder Instandhaltungs- Before installation or maintenance work can begin, Antes de comenzar los trabajos de instalación o 开始安装或维护工作前应该关闭设备的开关，防
arbeiten ist der Hauptschalter der Anlage the main system switch must be opened and mantenimiento, se deberá abrir el interruptor 设备再次被接通反该规定可能会导作业人员接
auszuschalten und gegen Wiedereinschalten zu measures taken to prevent it from being reclosed. If principal del cuadro/tablero y protegerlo para evitar 触到带电零部件，从而导重的人身伤害甚死
sichern. Bei Nichtbeachtung kann das Berühren this instruction is not observed, touching live parts su cierre. Si no se observa esta medida, el contacto 亡
spannungsführender Teile Tod oder schwere can result in death or serious injury. con piezas bajo tensión puede provocar la muerte o 电位计只允许使用缘螺丝刀进行操作
Körperverletzung zur Folge haben. It is only permissible to use an insulated screwdriver lesiones graves.
Die Betätigung des Potenziometers ist nur mittels when actuating the potentiometer. El potenciómetro solo deberá girarse usando un
isoliertem Schraubendreher zulässig. destornillador aislado.
© Siemens AG Ȏsterreich, AT-1210 Vienna 2016. All rights reserved.

A5E36981312, 08.2016 1
Für die Installation der Geräte sind die einschlägi- For installation of the devices, the relevant country- A la hora de instalar los aparatos, se tienen que observar 设备安装同时需遵循相关的作业规范
gen länderspezifischen Vorschriften zu beachten. specific regulations must be observed. las disposiciones o normativas específicas de cada país. 重要示设备输入侧必须配备熔断器馈线断路器
Wichtiger Hinweis: Eingangsseitig ist eine Sicherung Important note: A fuse, a miniature circuit breaker or Nota importante: en el lado de entrada debe instalarse 或者电机断路器
oder ein Leitungs- oder Motorschutzschalter vorzu- circuit breaker must be provided at the input. un fusible o bien un automático magnetotérmico o un 必须按照 IEC 60364 和 EN 50178 标准接供电电压
sehen. The line supply voltage (AC 120 - 230 V) must be guardamotor. (120 - 230 V AC)
Der Anschluss der Versorgungsspannung connected in accordance with IEC 60364 and La conexión de la tensión de alimentación
(AC 120 - 230 V) muss gemäß IEC 60364 und EN 50178. (120 - 230 V AC) debe efectuarse conforme a las normas
EN 50178 ausgeführt werden. IEC 60364 y EN 50178.
Siehe Bild 4 Eingang (Seite 3) See Image 4 Input (Page 3) Ver Figura 4 Entrada (Página 3) 参 4 输入 ( 3)
Siehe Bild 5 Ausgang (Seite 3) See Image 5 Output (Page 3) Ver Figura 5 Salida (Página 3) 参 5 输 ( 3)
Siehe Bild 3 Klemmendaten (Seite 2) See Image 3 Terminal data (Page 2) Ver Figura 3 Datos de los bornes (Página 2) 参 3 端子据 ( 2)
*1) Endanschlag nicht höher belasten *1) Do not subject the end stop to any higher stress *1) Carga máxima del tope de fin de carrera *1) 端挡勿过高负载
Aufbau Structure Diseño 结构

AC/DC-Eingang AC/DC input Entrada AC/DC AC/DC 输入端
DC-Ausgang DC output Salida DC DC 输
Potenziometer 24 - 28,8 V 24 - 28.8 V potentiometer Potenciómetro 24-28,8 V 24 - 28.8 V 电位计
Meldekontakte (13, 14) Signaling contacts (13, 14) Contactos de señalización (13, 14) 信号触 13 14
Kontrollleuchten (24 V O.K., OVERLOAD, Indicator lights (24 V O.K., OVERLOAD, Pilotos de control (24 V OK, OVERLOAD, 指示灯 24 V O.K OVERLOAD
SHUT DOWN) SHUT DOWN) SHUT DOWN) SHUT DOWN
Bild 2: Aufbau
Image 2: Design Wahlschalter Selector switch Selector 选择开关
Figura 2: Diseño
Hutschienenschieber DIN rail slider Corredera de fijación a perfil DIN 导轨滑槽
2: 结构
Figure 2: Structure Konvektion Convection Convección 流
Figura 2: Struttura
2: Freiraum oberhalb/unterhalb Clearance above/below Espacio libre arriba/abajo 方/ 方空间
Siehe Bild 2 Aufbau (Seite 2) See Image 2 Design (Page 2) Ver Figura 2 Diseño (Página 2) 参 2 结构 ( 2)
Betriebsmodus Operating mode Modo de servicio 运行方式

Parallelbetrieb und umschaltbares Kurzschluss- Parallel operation and short-circuit behavior that can Funcionamiento en paralelo y comportamiento 并联运行及短路响应通断功能
verhalten be switched over conmutable en caso de cortocircuito
Parallelschalten von zwei gleichartigen Geräten zur It is only permissible to connect two identical devices in La conexión en paralelo de dos aparatos del mismo tipo 只能通过将选择开关 A 设 “ON” 换输特性曲
Leistungserhöhung ist nur zulässig durch Umschaltung parallel to increase the power rating when the output para aumentar la potencia solo está permitida si se conmuta 线，由并联个同类型设备高功率
der Ausgangskennlinie mittels Wahlschalter A auf ON. characteristic is switched over to ON using selector switch A. la característica de salida colocando el selector A en ON.
A B A B A B A B
ON Parallelbetrieb: Speichernde Abschal- ON Parallel operation: Latching shutdown: The ON Funcionamiento Desconexión con memo- ON 并联运行锁存关闭在过载超
Neigung der Aus- tung: Bei länger als ca. Gradient of the device is shut down if en paralelo: ria: Si la sobrecarga 输特性曲线的坡大 100 毫秒时，设备
gangskennlinie 100 ms anstehender output character- the overload lasts long- Pendiente de la persiste más de aprox. 度关断电源关闭少
*1) Endanschlag nicht höher belasten Überlast erfolgt die Ab- istic er than approx. 100 ms. característica de 100 ms, el aparato se 5 s 后才能重置
*1) Do not subject the end stop to any higher stress schaltung des Gerätes. The system is reset if salida desconecta. El reseteo
*1) Carga máxima del tope de fin de Carrera
Ein Rücksetzen erfolgt the power supply is se efectúa desconectan-
*1) 端挡块勿过高负载 durch Netzversorgung switched off for a mini- do la alimentación de red
*1) Ne pas appliquer une contrainte plus élevée à la butée de
AUS für mind. 5 s. mum of 5 s. durante al menos 5 s.
fin de course
*1) Non caricare ulteriormente l'arresto di fine corsa OFF * Einzelbetrieb * Konstantstrom * OFF * Standalone oper- Constant current * OFF * Modo autónomo * Intensidad constante * OFF * 单独运行 * 恒定电流 *
*1) 1,15 × Nennstrom bei ation * 1.15 × rated current at 1,15 × intensidad nomi- 过载或短路时额定电
Bild 3: Klemmendaten Überlast/Kurzschluss overload/short-circuit nal con sobrecar- 流的 1.15 倍
Image 3: Terminal data ga/cortocircuito
Figura 3: Datos de los bornes * Auslieferzustand * Delivery state * Ajuste de fábrica * 厂状态
3: 端子据
Figure 3: Caractéristiques des bornes Siehe Bеи炸 6 УЭдипЯдЭир点о , Й点и炸点зл观рЭзр See Е见Эг点 6 级点и点Ярло пуерЯд , пег观Эие观г Ял观рЭЯр Ver ВегсоЭ 6 级点и点Ярло , Ял观рЭЯрл 炸点 п点两ЭиецЭЯеó观参 6 选择开关，信号触 ( 3)
Figura 3: Dati dei morsetti (Seite 3) (Page 3) (Página 3)
3: Signalisierung Signaling Señalización 信号指示
LED grün: Ausgangsspannung > 20 V Green LED: Output voltage > 20 V LED verde: Tensión de salida > 20 V 绿色 LED 输电压 > 20 V
LED gelb: Überlast im Betriebsmodus "Konstant- Yellow LED: Overload in "Stabilized current" mode LED amarillo: Sobrecarga en modo de operación 黄色 LED 在“恒定电流”运行方式过载
strom" "Intensidad constante"
LED rot: speichernde Abschaltung im Betriebsmo- Red LED: Latching shutdown in "Shutdown" mode LED rojo: Desconexión que precisa rearme en modo 红色 LED 在“关闭”运行方式锁存关闭
dus "Shut down" "Parada"
Siehe Bild 7 Signalisierung (Seite 4) See Image 7 Signaling (Page 4) Ver Figura 7 Señalización (Página 4) 参 7 信号指示 ( 4)
Meldekontakt Signaling contact Contacto de señalización 信号触
Meldekontakt (13, 14): Ausgangsspannung > 20 V Signaling contact (13, 14): Output voltage > 20 V Contacto de señalización (13, 14): Tensión de salida > 20 V 信号触 13 14 输电压 > 20 V
Kontaktbelastbarkeit: Contact rating: Capacidad de carga de los contactos: 触额定值
AC 30 V/0,5 A; DC 60 V/0,3 A; DC 30 V/1 A AC 30 V/0.5 A; DC 60 V/0.3 A; DC 30 V/1 A 30 V AC/0,5 A; 60 V DC/0,3 A; 30 V DC/1 A 30 V AC/0.5 A; 60 V DC/0.3 A; 30 V DC/1 A
Siehe Bеи炸 6 УЭдипЯдЭир点о , Й点и炸点зл观рЭзр See Е见Эг点 6 级点и点Ярло пуерЯд , пег观Эие观г Ял观рЭЯр Ver ВегсоЭ 6 级点и点Ярло , Ял观рЭЯрл 炸点 п点两ЭиецЭЯеó观参 6 选择开关，信号触 ( 3)
(Seite 3) (Page 3) (Página 3)
2 A5E36981312, 08.2016
Technische Daten Technical data Datos técnicos 技术据
Eingangsgrößen Input variables Magnitudes de entrada 输入变量
Eingangsnennspannung Ue nenn: Rated input voltage Uin rated: Tensión nominal de entrada Ue nom: 额定输入电压 Ue 额定
AC 120 - 230 V, 50 - 60 Hz; DC 110 - 220 V 120 - 230 V AC, 50 - 60 Hz; 110 - 220 V DC 120 - 230 V AC, 50 - 60 Hz; 110 - 220 V DC 120 - 230 V AC，50 - 60 Hz 110 - 220 V DC
Eingangsspannungsbereich: AC 85 - 275 V; DC 88 - 350 V Input voltage range: 85 - 275 V AC; 88 - 350 V DC Rango de tensión de entrada: 85 - 275 V AC, 88 - 350 V DC 输入电压范围 85 - 275 V AC 88 - 350 V DC
Derating bei Ue < 100 V: Tu max= 50 °C Derating at Uin < 100 V: Tu max= 50 °C Derating con Ue < 100 V: Tu máx= 50 °C Ue < 100 V 时的降额Tu 最大= 50 °C
Derating bei 100 V < Ue < 170 V: Tu max= 55 °C Derating at 100 V < Uin < 170 V: Tu max= 55 °C Derating con 100 V < Ue < 170 V: Tu máx= 55 °C 100 V < Ue < 170 V 时的降额 Tu 最大= 55 °C
Eingangsnennstrom Ie nenn: 4,6 - 2,5 A (AC); Rated input current Iin rated: 4.6 - 2.5 A (AC); Intensidad nominal de entrada Ie nom 额定输入电流 Ie 额定 4.6 - 2.5 A (AC)
4,8 - 2,4 A (DC) 4.8 - 2.4 A (DC) 4,6 - 2,5 A (AC); 4,8 - 2,4 A (DC) 4.8 - 2.4 A (DC)
Empfohlener Leitungsschutzschalter Charakteristik Recommended miniature circuit breaker characteris- Automático magnetotérmico recomendado curva C 推荐的馈线断路器 C 或 D 特性 10 A (6 A)
Bild 4: Eingang C (bzw. D): 10 A (6 A) tic C (or D): 10 A (6 A) (o D): 10 A (6 A)
Image 4: Input Für den zweiphasigen Betrieb an 2 Außenleitern For two-phase operation on 2 outer conductors of a Para el alimentación bifásica a 2 conductores de 在相网的 2 个线路导线进行二相运行时，必须
Figura 4: Entrada eines Drehstromnetzes muss als Schutzeinrichtung three-phase system, a two-pole coupled miniature fase de una red trifásica, debe utilizarse un automá- 安装一个二极耦合的馈线断路器作保护设备
4: 输入 ein zweipolig gekoppelter LS-Schalter vorgesehen tico magnetotérmico con dos polos acoplados como
Figure 4: Entrée circuit breaker must be provided.
werden. dispositivo de protección.
Figura 4: Ingresso
4: Leistungsaufnahme (Wirkleistung) bei Volllast: 522 W Power consumption (active power) at full load: 522 W Consumo (potencia activa) a plena carga: 522 W 满负荷时的功耗有功功率 522 W
Ausgangsgrößen Output variables Magnitudes de salida 输端参
Ausgangsnennspannung Ua nenn: 24 V Rated output voltage Uout rated : 24 V Tensión nominal de salida Us nom: 24 V 额定输电压 Ua 额定 24 V
Einstellbereich: 24 - 28,8 V, Einstellung über Poten- Setting range: 24 - 28.8 V, set via a potentiometer at Rango de ajuste: 24 - 28,8 V, ajuste con potenció- 整定范围 24 - 28.8 V，通过设备面的电位计进行
ziometer an der Gerätevorderseite the front of the unit metro en el frontal del aparato 设置
Derating bei Ua > 24 V: 4 % Ia bzw. 3 °C tamb / V Ua Derating at Uout > 24 V: 4 % Iout or 3 °C tamb / V Uout Derating con Us > 24 V: 4 % Is o bien 3 °C tamb/V Us Ua > 24 V 时的降额 4 % Ia 或 3 °C tamb/V Ua
Ausgangsnennstrom Ia nenn: 20 A Rated output current Iout rated: 20 A Corriente nominal de salida Is nom: 20 A 额定输电流 Ia 额定 20 A
Power Boost im Betrieb (für 25 ms): 60 A Power boost in operation (for 25 ms): 60 A Aumento de potencia en servicio (durante 25 ms): 60 A 运行中的功率升 25 ms 内 60 A
Extra Power beim Einschalten und im Betrieb: 30 A Extra power during switch-on and operation: 30 A Potencia adicional al conectar y en servicio: 30 A 接通时和运行过程中的外部电源 30 A，持续 5 s
für 5 s (pro min) for 5 s (pro min) durante 5 s (por min) 每钟
Umgebungsbedingungen Ambient conditions Condiciones ambientales 环境条件
Temperatur für Betrieb: -25 … 70 °C Temperature in operation: -25 ... 70 °C Temperatura de funcionamiento: –25 … 70 °C 运行温度 -25 … 70 °C
Derating ab 60 °C: 3 % Ia nenn/K Derating above 60 °C: 3 % Iout rated/K Derating a partir de 60 °C: 3 % Is nom/K 温度高于 60 °C 时降额系 3 % Ia 额定/K
Bild 5: Ausgang Verschmutzungsgrad 2 Grado de contaminación 2 污染等 2
Image 5: Output Pollution degree 2
Figura 5: Salida Eigenkonvektion Natural convection Convección natural 自然流
5: 输 Schutzfunktion Protective function Función de protección 保护功能
Figure 5: Sortie
Figura 5: Uscita Strombegrenzung bei permanenter Überlast (> 5 s), Current limiting for permanent overload (> 5 s), Limitación de corriente con sobrecarga permanente 持续过载 (> 5 s) 时的限流响应值最大 1.15 × Ia 额
Ansprechwert: max. 1,15 × Ia nenn, ausgenommen response value: max 1.15 × Iout rated, exception Extra (> 5 s), valor de reacción: máx. 1,15 × Is nom, excep- 定，除额外电源
5:
Extra Power Power tuando Extra Power
Kennlinie der Strombegrenzung stetig abfallend Current limiting characteristic, continually decreas- Característica de limitación de corriente: monótona 限流特性曲线持续倾
ing decreciente
Abmessungen Dimensions Dimensiones 尺
Breite × Höhe × Tiefe in mm: Width × height × depth in mm: Altura × anchura × profundidad en mm: 宽 × 高 × 长 (mm)
90 × 125 × 120 90 × 125 × 120 90 × 125 × 120 90 × 125 × 120
Zubehör Accessories Accesorios 附件

Funktionserweiterung durch Ergänzungsmodule Function expansion possible using the additional Posibilidad de ampliación funcional mediante módulos 补充模块冗余模块缓冲模块诊断模块 SITOP
Redundanzmodul, Puffermodul, Diagnosemodul modules redundancy module, buffer module, diag- complementarios: módulo de redundancia, módulo de select 或直流 UPS，它们可带来多种功能扩展
SITOP select oder DC USV möglich. nostics module SITOP select or DC UPS. respaldo, módulo de diagnóstico SITOP select o SAI DC.
www.siemens.de/sitop www.siemens.de/sitop www.siemens.de/sitop www.siemens.de/sitop
Bild 6: Wahlschalter , Meldekontakt
Image 6: Selector switch , signaling contact Directivas de eliminación de
Figura 6: Selector , contacto de señalización Entsorgungsrichtlinien Disposal guidelines residuos 废弃处理原则
6: 选择开关，信号触
Verpackung und Packhilfsmittel sind recyclingfähig Packaging and packaging aids can and must always Todo el material usado para el embalaje es recicla- 包装材料和辅助材料都是可循环利用的，原则应再
Figure 6: Sélecteur , contact de signalisation und sollten grundsätzlich der Wiederverwertung ble, por lo que debería separarse para su reutiliza- 利用产品身得作生活垃圾处置
be recycled. The product itself may not be disposed
Figura 6: Selettore , contatto di segnalazione zugeführt werden. Das Produkt selbst darf nicht ción. El producto propiamente dicho no deberá
of by means of domestic refuse.
6: , über den Hausmüll entsorgt werden. eliminarse a través de la basura doméstica.
Service und Support Service and Support Servicio técnico y asistencia 服务支持

Weiterführende Hinweise erhalten Sie über die Additional information is available through the Encontrará información adicional en la página web 请通过方式获取更多示信息
Homepage (http://www.siemens.de/sitop/manuals) homepage (http://www.siemens.com/sitop/manuals) (http://www.siemens.com/sitop/manuals) (http://www.siemens.com/sitop/manuals)
https://support.industry.siemens.com https://support.industry.siemens.com https://support.industry.siemens.com https://support.industry.siemens.com
Telefon: + 49 (0) 911 895 7222 Telephone: + 49 (0) 911 895 7222 Teléfono: + 49 (0) 911 895 7222 电话 + 49 (0) 911 895 7222
A5E36981312, 08.2016 3
FRANÇAIS ITALIANO
Description Descrizione
Les alimentations SITOP 24 V / 20 A sont des appareils encastrables, Gli alimentatori SITOP 24 V/20 A sono apparecchi da incasso con gra- 级ЕРЛМ 24 /20
avec indice de protection IP20 et classe de protection I. do di protezione IP20 e classe di protezione I. ЕМ20 Е.
Alimentations à découpage primaire destinées au raccordement au Si tratta di alimentatori a commutazione del primario da collegare a una
réseau CA monophasé ou à 2 conducteurs de phase de réseaux tri- rete alternata monofase o a 2 conduttori esterni di reti trifase (rete TN, 2
phasés (réseau TN, TT ou IT selon VDE 0100 T 300 / IEC 364-3) avec TT o IT secondo VDE 0100 T 300 / IEC 364-3) con tensioni nominali ( РК, РР ЕР ТАБ 0100
des tensions nominales de 120 V - 230 V, 50 - 60 Hz ou 110 - 120 - 230 V, 50 - 60 Hz o 110 - 220 VDC; tensione di uscita +24 V DC, T 300 / IEC 364-3) 120 / 230 ,
Bild 7: Signalisierung
Image 7: Signaling 220 V CC ; tension de sortie +24 V CC, libres de potentiel, protégées con separazione di potenziale, a prova di cortocircuito e resistenti al 50 - 60 110 - 220 ;
Figura 7: Señalización contre les courts-circuits et la marche à vide. funzionamento a vuoto. +24 , ,
7: 信号指示 .
Figure 7: Signalisation Voir Figure 1 Vue de l'appareil (Page 1) Vedere Figura 1 Vista dell'apparecchio (Pagina 1) . 1 ( 1)
Figura 7: Segnalazione
7:
Consignes de sécurité Avvertenze di sicurezza
IMPORTANT ATTENZIONE
L'exploitation de cet appareil / ce système dans les meilleures Il funzionamento ineccepibile e sicuro di questo apparecchio/sistema
conditions de fonctionnement et de sécurité suppose un transport, un presuppone un trasporto corretto, un immagazzinaggio idoneo, una / ,
stockage, une installation et un montage adéquats, ainsi qu'une installazione, un montaggio, un utilizzo e una manutenzione accurati. , , ,
manipulation soigneuse et un entretien rigoureux. Questo apparecchio/sistema deve essere installato e impiegato nel .
Cet appareil / ce système ne peut être configuré et exploité qu'à pieno rispetto delle istruzioni e delle avvertenze riportate nella /
condition de respecter les instructions et les avertissements figurant documentazione tecnica pertinente.
dans la documentation technique correspondante. L'apparecchio/il sistema può essere installato e messo in servizio solo .
L'installation et la mise en service de l'appareil / du système doit da personale qualificato. /
impérativement être effectué par des personnes qualifiées. .
L'appareil satisfait à la directive ATEX 2014/34/EU ; EN 60079-0 ; Il dispositivo è conforme alla direttiva ATEX 2014/34/UE; EN 60079-0; AРБФ 2014/34/БС;
EN 60079-15 EN 60079-15 EN 60079-0; EN 60079-15
ATTENTION AVVERTENZA
UTILISER LE RÉGLAGE DE TENSION OU LES COMMUTATEURS IMPOSTARE LA TENSIONE O ATTIVARE L'INTERRUTTORE SOLO
UNIQUEMENT EN ZONES NON EXPLOSIBLES ! IN AMBIENTI NON A RISCHIO DI ESPLOSIONE! 页
Fixation Montaggio
Montage sur rail DIN symétrique TH35-15/7,5 (EN 60715). Montaggio su guida profilata normalizzata TH35-15/7,5 (EN 60715). РД35-15/7,5 (EN 60715).
L'appareil doit être fixé de sorte que les bornes d'entrée et les bornes L'apparecchio va montato con i morsetti di ingresso e di uscita in basso. ,
de sortie se trouvent en bas. Sopra e sotto l'apparecchio deve restare uno spazio libero di 50 mm. .
Un espace libre d'au moins 50 mm doit être prévu au-dessous et au-
dessus de l'appareil. 50 .
Les appareils installés dans les zones à risque d'explosion ( II 3G Ex Nel caso di installazione in aree a rischio d'esplosione (II 3G Ex nA nC (ЕЕ 3Г Бф 观A 观C
nA nC IIC T3 Gc) doivent être montés dans un coffret de distribution IIC T3 Gc), l'apparecchiatura va incorporata in una cassetta di distribu- ЕЕC Р3 ГЯ)
avec indice de protection IP54 ou supérieur. Ce coffret doit répondre zione con grado di protezione IP54 o superiore. Questa cassetta di ЕМ54 .
aux spécifications de la norme EN 60079-15. distribuzione deve essere conforme alle specifiche della normativa БК 60079-15.
EN 60079-15.
Voir Figure 2 Structure (Page 2) Vedere Figura 2 Struttura (Pagina 2) . 2 ( 2)
Raccordement Collegamento
ATTENTION AVVERTENZA
Avant de commencer les travaux d'installation ou de maintenance, Prima dell'inizio dei lavori di installazione o manutenzione è necessario
couper l'interrupteur général de l'installation et le condamner pour disinserire l'interruttore principale dell'impianto e assicurarlo contro la
empêcher la remise sous tension. Le non-respect de cette consigne reinserzione. In caso di mancata osservanza, il contatto con parti sotto
peut entraîner la mort ou des blessures graves en cas de contact avec tensione può provocare la morte o gravi lesioni personali. .
des pièces sous tension. È consentito azionare il potenziometro solo utilizzando un cacciavite
Actionner le potentiomètre uniquement à l'aide d'un tournevis isolé. isolato. .
4 A5E36981312, 08.2016
L'installation des appareils doit se faire en conformité avec les prescrip- Per l'installazione degli apparecchi occorre rispettare le normative na-
tions nationales. zionali vigenti. .
Remarque importante : Un fusible, un disjoncteur de ligne ou un dis- Avvertenza importante: Sul lato d'ingresso si deve predisporre un fusi- :
joncteur moteur doit être prévu en amont. bile, un interruttore magnetotermico o un salvamotore. , .
Le raccordement de la tension d'alimentation (120 - 230 V) doit être L'allacciamento della tensione di alimentazione (AC 120 - 230 V) deve (120 - 230 . )
effectué conformément aux normes IEC 60364 et EN 50178. essere eseguito in conformità alle norme IEC 60364 ed EN 50178. ЕБC 60364 БК 50178.
Voir Figure 4 Entrée (Page 3) Vedere Figura 4 Ingresso (Pagina 3) . 4 ( 3)
Voir Figure 5 Sortie (Page 3) Vedere Figura 5 Uscita (Pagina 3) . 5 ( 3)
Voir Figure 3 Caractéristiques des bornes (Page 2) Vedere Figura 3 Dati dei morsetti (Pagina 2) . 3 ( 2)
*1) Ne pas appliquer un couple plus élevé *1) Non caricare ulteriormente l'arresto di fine corsa *1)
Constitution Struttura
Entrée CA/CC Ingresso AC/DC /
Sortie CC Uscita DC
Potentiomètre 24 - 28,8 V Potenziometro 24 - 28,8 V 24 - 28,8
Contacts de signalisation (13, 14) Contatti di segnalazione (13, 14) (13, 14)
Témoins lumineux (24 V O.K., OVERLOAD, SHUT DOWN) Spie di controllo (24 V O.K., OVERLOAD, SHUT DOWN) (24 V O.K., OVERLOAD, SHUT DOWN)
Sélecteur Selettore
Coulisseau de fixation sur rail DIN symétrique Dispositivo di aggancio per guida profilata АЕК-
Convection Convezione
Espace libre au dessus/en dessous Spazio libero superiore/inferiore /
Voir Figure 2 Structure (Page 2) Vedere Figura 2 Struttura (Pagina 2) . 2 ( 2)
Mode de fonctionnement Modo operativo

Fonctionnement en parallèle et comportement sur court-circuit Funzionamento in parallelo e reazione al cortocircuito commutabile
commutable
Le couplage en parallèle de deux appareils de même type pour Il collegamento in parallelo di due apparecchiature dello stesso tipo per
augmenter la puissance n'est autorisé que par commutation de la aumentare la potenza è unicamente consentito con la commutazione
caractéristique de sortie avec le sélecteur A en position ON. della caratteristica di uscita posizionando il selettore A su ON.
ЛК.
A B A B A B
ON Fonctionnement en pa- Coupure mémorisée : L'appareil ON Funzionamento in paral- Disattivazione con memorizza- ON : :
rallèle : est coupé en cas de surcharge lelo: zione: Se il sovraccarico supera i
pente de la caractéris- présente pendant plus de Inclinazione della carat- 100 ms, l'apparecchiatura si 100
tique de sortie 100 ms environ. Une remise à teristica di uscita disinserisce. Il ripristino avviene .
zéro est effectuée lorsque l'ali- disattivando l'alimentazione di
mentation réseau est désactivée rete per min. 5 s.
pendant au moins 5 s. 5 .
OFF * Mode individuel * Courant constant * OFF * Funzionamento singolo * Corrente costante * OFF * *
1,15 × courant nominal en cas 1,15 × corrente nominale in caso * 1,15 上
de surcharge / court-circuit di sovraccarico/cortocircuito /
* Etat à la livraison * Stato di fornitura *
Voir Вегсо点 6 级éи点Яр点со , Ял观рЭЯр 炸点 пег观ЭиепЭрел观 (Page 3) Vedere ВегсоЭ 6 级点и点ррло点 , Ял观рЭррл 炸е п点г观ЭиЭцел观点 (Pagina 3) . 6 ,
( 3)
Signalisation Segnalazione
LED verte : Tension de sortie > 20 V LED verde: tensione in uscita > 20 V : > 20
LED jaune : Surcharge en mode de fonctionnement "courant perma- LED giallo: sovraccarico nel modo operativo "corrente costante" :
nent" 连 »
LED rouge : Coupure mémorisée en mode de fonctionnement "Shut LED rosso: disinserzione con memorizzazione nel modo operativo "shut :
down" down" "Shut down"
Voir Figure 7 Signalisation (Page 4) Vedere Figura 7 Segnalazione (Pagina 4) . 7 ( 4)
Contact de signalisation Contatto di segnalazione C
Contact de signalisation (13, 14) : Tension de sortie > 20 V Contatto di segnalazione (13, 14): Tensione in uscita > 20 V (13, 14): > 20
Courant maximal admissible au niveau des contacts : Capacità di carico del contatto: :
30 V CA / 0,5 A ; 60 V CC / 0,3 A ; 30 V CC / 1 A AC 30 V/0,5 A; DC 60 V/0,3 A; DC 30 V/1 A AC 30 /0,5 . 60 /0,3 . 30 /1
Voir Вегсо点 6 级éи点Яр点со , Ял观рЭЯр 炸点 пег观ЭиепЭрел观 (Page 3) Vedere ВегсоЭ 6 级点и点ррло点 , Ял观рЭррл 炸е п点г观ЭиЭцел观点 (Pagina 3) . 6 ,
( 3)
A5E36981312, 08.2016 5
Caractéristiques techniques Dati tecnici
Valeurs d'entrée Grandezze di ingresso
Tension d'entrée nominale Ue nom : Tensione di ingresso nominale Ui nom: Сe nenn:
120 - 230 V CA, 50 - 60 Hz ; 110 - 220 V CC AC 120 - 230 V, 50 - 60 Hz; DC 110 - 220 V 120 - 230 (50 - 60 ); 110 - 220
Plage de tension d'entrée : 85 - 275 V CA ; 88 - 350 V CC Campo di tensione di ingresso: AC 85 - 275 V; DC 88 - 350 V : 85 - 275 ;
Déclassement pour Ue < 100 V : Tu max= 50 °C Derating con Ui < 100 V: Tu max= 50 °C 88 - 350
Déclassement pour 100 V < Ue < 170 V : Tu max = 55 °C Derating con 100 V < Ui < 170 V: Tu max= 55 °C Сe < 100 : Рu max= 50 °C
100 < Ue < 170 :
Tu max= 55 °C
Courant d'entrée nominal Ie nom : 4,6 - 2,5 A (CA) ; 4,8 - 2,4 A (CC) Corrente di ingresso nominale Ii nom: 4,6 - 2,5 A (AC); 4,8 - 2,4 A (DC) Еe nenn: 4,6 - 2,5 ( . ); 4,8 - 2,4 ( . )
Disjoncteur de protection ligne recommandé Caractéristique C (ou D) : Interruttore magnetotermico consigliato Caratteristica C (o D): 10 A ,
10 A (6 A) (6 A) ( D): 10 (6 )
Pour le fonctionnement biphasé sur 2 conducteurs d'un réseau tripha- Per il funzionamento bifase su 2 conduttori di linea di una rete trifase è 2
sé, un disjoncteur de protection branché sur deux pôles doit impérati- necessario predisporre un interruttore automatico di protezione con
vement être prévu. collegamento bipolare.
.
Puissance absorbée (puissance active) à pleine charge : 522 W Potenza assorbita a pieno carico (potenza attiva): 522 W ( ) : 522
Valeurs de sortie Grandezze di uscita
Tension de sortie nominale Us nom : 24 V Tensione di uscita nominale Uu nom: 24 V Сa nenn: 24
Plage de réglage : 24 - 28,8 V, réglage par potentiomètre en face avant Campo di impostazione: 24 - 28,8 V, regolazione tramite potenziometro : 24 - 28,8 ,
de l'appareil sul lato frontale dell'apparecchio
Déclassement pour Us > 24 V : 4 % Is ou 3 °C tamb / V Us Derating per Uu > 24 V: 4 % Iu o 3 °C tamb/V Uu Сa > 24 : 4 % Ia 3 °C tamb / Ua
Courant de sortie nominal Is nom : 20 A Corrente di uscita nominale Iu nom: 20 A Еa nenn: 20
Power Boost en service (pendant 25 ms) : 60 A Power Boost in esercizio (per 25 ms): 60 A (Млу点о Bллпр) ( 25 ): 60 A
Puissance supplémentaire à la mise en marche et en service : 30 A Extra Power all'inserzione e in esercizio: 30 A per 5 s (al minuto) (БфроЭ Млу点о)
pendant 5 s (par min) : 30 5 ( .)
Conditions ambiantes Condizioni ambientali
Température de service : -25 ... 70 °C Temperatura in esercizio: -25 ... 70 °C : -25 ... 70 °C
Déclassement à partir de 60 °C : 3 % Is nom/K Derating:a partire da 60 °C: 3 % Iu nom/K : 60 °C: 3 % Ia nenn/K
Degré de pollution 2 Grado di inquinamento 2 2
Convection naturelle Convezione naturale
Fonction de protection Funzione di protezione
Limitation de courant en cas de surcharge permanente (> 5 s), seuil de Limitazione di corrente con sovraccarico permanente (>5 s), valore di (> 5 ),
réponse : max. 1,15 × Ia nom, sauf Extra Power intervento: max. 1,15 × Iu nom, escluso Extra Power : . 1,15 上 Еa nenn,
Courbe de limitation de courant décroissante Caratteristica della limitazione di corrente costantemente decrescente
Dimensions Dimensioni
Largeur × hauteur × profondeur en mm : Larghezza × altezza × profondità in mm: 上上 :
90 × 125 × 120 90 × 125 × 120 90 × 125 × 120
Accessoires Accessori
L'extension de fonction est possible au moyen de modules d'extension : Ampliamento delle funzioni possibile tramite moduli aggiuntivi: modulo
module de redondance, module tampon, module de diagnostic SITOP di ridondanza, modulo buffer, modulo di diagnostica SITOP select o – , ,
select ou ASI CC. modulo DC UPS. 级ЕРЛМ п点и点Яр .
www.siemens.com/sitop www.siemens.de/sitop www.siemens.de/sitop
Directives de recyclage Direttive sullo smaltimento

L'appareil et son emballage sont tous recyclables et doivent donc être L'imballaggio e i materiali ausiliari di imballaggio utilizzati sono riciclabili
traités par une filière de recyclage. Il est interdit de se débarrasser de e devono quindi essere destinati al riciclaggio. Questo prodotto non
l'appareil via les déchets domestiques. deve essere smaltito con i rifiuti ordinari. .
.
SAV et assistance Service & Support

Vous trouverez des informations supplémentaires sur la page d'accueil Per ulteriori informazioni vedere la homepage
(http://www.siemens.com/sitop/manuals) (http://www.siemens.com/sitop/manuals) (http://www.siemens.com/sitop/manuals)
https://support.industry.siemens.com https://support.industry.siemens.com https://support.industry.siemens.com
Téléphone : + 49 (0) 911 895 7222 Telefono: + 49 (0) 911 895 7222 : + 49 (0) 911 895 7222
6 A5E36981312, 08.2016
VPPM-... (LED) 1 Anwendung und Funktion
Das VPPM-... dient bestimmungsgemäß zum Regeln eines
Achten Sie auf genügend Platz für den Kabelanschluss
und die Schlauchanschlüsse (è Bild). Dadurch wird ein
Betriebsmedium
nicht Typ VPPM-...C1 (LCD) Druckes proportional zu einem vorgegebenen Sollwert. Abknicken des Anschlusskabels vermieden. .................................................. Hinweis
Ein integrierter Drucksensor nimmt dazu den Druck am
Zu hoher Restölgehalt in der Druckluft verkürzt die
Arbeitsanschluss auf und vergleicht diesen Wert mit dem
Lebensdauer des Ventils.
Sollwert. Bei Soll-Ist-Abweichungen wird das Regelventil
Bei Verwendung von Bioölen (Öle, die auf der Basis
solange betätigt, bis der Ausgangsdruck den Sollwert
synthetischer Ester oder nativer Ester aufgebaut sind
erreicht hat.
z.B. Rapsölmethylester) darf der Restölgehalt von
maximal 0,1 mg/m³ nicht überschritten werden
(è ISO 8573-1:2010 [-:-:2]).
5.3 Elektrisch
................................................. Warnung
Bedienungsanleitung Festo AG & Co. KG Elektrische Spannung

2 Einsatzbereich und Zulassungen Platzieren Sie das VPPM-... möglichst nahe am Ver Verletzung durch Stromschlag, Schäden an Maschine
Originalbetriebsanleitung Ruiter Straße 82
In Verbindung mit dem ULKennzeichen auf dem Produkt braucher. Dies führt zu besserer Regelgenauigkeit und und Anlage
73734 Esslingen
gelten zusätzlich die Informationen dieses Abschnitts zur kürzeren Ansprechzeiten. Für die elektrische Versorgung ausschließlich
Deutschland
Einhaltung der Zertifizierungsbedingungen von Underwri PELV-Stromkreise nach IEC 602041/EN 602041
+49/711/347-0
ters Laboratories Inc. (UL) für USA und Kanada. Beachten Wandmontage (Muffenventil) verwenden.
www.festo.com
Sie die folgenden Hinweise von UL: Befestigen Sie das VPPM-... (1/8“ und 1/4“) an der vor Ausschließlich Spannungsquellen verwenden, die
gesehenen Stelle mit zwei M4-Schrauben. Verwenden eine sichere elektrische Trennung vom Netz nach
...................................................... Note Sie ggf. hierzu den Winkel Typ VAME-P1-A (siehe Bild). IEC 60204-1/EN 60204-1 gewährleisten.
Bei Montage des VPPM mit Hilfe des Winkels darf das Die Anforderungen der IEC 60204-1/EN 60204-1 an
The Unit shall be supplied by a power source which
VPPM-... nur statisch belastet werden (Anziehdreh PELV-Stromkreise berücksichtigen.
fulfils the requirements on a limited-energy circuit in
8067798 [8067799] 1703f moment ca. 1,5 Nm).
accordance to IEC/EN/UL/CSA 61010-1 or on a Limi
Befestigen Sie das VPPM-… (1/2“) an der vorgesehenen
ted Power Source (LPS) in accordance to IEC/EN/UL/
Stelle mit zwei M5-Schrauben (Anziehdrehmoment
CSA 60950-1 or IEC/EN/UL/CSA 62368-1 or a Class 2 .................................................. Hinweis
Proportional-Druckregelventil Deutsch 2,0 Nm).
...................... circuit in accordance to NEC or CEC.
Lange Signalleitungen reduzieren die Störfestigkeit.
Stellen Sie sicher, dass die Signalleitungen stets
1 2 UL approval information kürzer sind als 10 m.
Product category code QUYX, QUYX7 Überprüfen Sie anhand des Typenschildes welche
File number E322346 Ventilvariante Ihnen vorliegt:
Considered standards UL 610101, CAN/CSAC22.2 No. 610101 Bezeichnung auf dem Typenschild
UL mark VPPM-...-V1... VPPM-...-A4...
3 Benennung Spannungsvariante Stromvariante

3
Elektrischer Sollwert DC 0 ... 10 V 4 ... 20 mA
Electrical and environmental ratings
Supply voltage 24 V DC Hutschienenmontage (Muffenventil)

5 4 Montieren Sie den Hutschienenadapter mit Hilfe der Stellen Sie sicher, dass die Kabel quetsch-, knick- und
Max. Power VPPM-6, VPPM-8 7 W
beigelegten Schrauben (x”: M4 x 65, ¼”: M4 x 77) an dehnungsfrei. verlegt sind:
Max. Power VPPM-12 12 W das VPPM-... (Anziehdrehmoment ca. 1,5 Nm).
1 elektrischer Anschlussstecker (8-polig)
2 Anschluss Arbeitsluft (2), Druckausgang Rated pressure Up to 1.1 MPa
3 Durchgangsbohrungen zur Befestigung Altitude up to 2000m.
4 Anschluss Druckluft (1), Druckeingang
5 Anschluss Entlüftung (3)
3 Varianten des VPPM-...
Verwenden Sie das vorkonfektionierte Steckdosenkabel
Bild 1: Anschlüsse und Befestigungsbohrungen Typenschlüssel des VPPM-...
1 von Festo (Zubehör è www.festo.com/catalogue). Da
(Muffenventil)
durch ist gewährleistet, dass die vorgegebene
1 4 5 6
3 2 Schutzart IP65 und EMV erreicht wird.
VPPM - 6L - L - 1 - G18 - 0L6H - V1N - S1 Wenn ein abgeschirmtes Kabel verwendet wird, erden
Sie die Abschirmung am VPPM-fernen Kabelende.
2 3 7 1 Hutschienenadapter Typ VAME-P1-T
2 VPPM-... Hinweis
Pos. Merkmale Bedeutung ..................................................
3 Befestigungsschrauben
1 1 Nennweite in [mm] 6, 8, 12 Beim Anschluss des Y-Anschlusskabels Typ
Ventilar t F (Flansch), L (Muffe) NEBV-M12G8-KD-..-M12G5 an CPX-E/A-Module ist die
2 Hängen Sie das VPPM-... in die Hutschiene.
2 Dynamikklasse L (Low) galvanische Trennung der E/A-Module nicht mehr
3 3 Ventilfunktion 1 (3-Wege-Druckregelventil, gewährleistet!
ÓÓ
Ruhestellung geschlossen) Verkabeln Sie das VPPM-... gemäß des entsprechenden
1 Kanal (2) Arbeitsluft, Druckausgang 4 Pneu. Anschluss Anschlussbildes:
ÓÓ
– Flansch/Anschlus F
2 Kanal (1) Druckluft, Druckeingang splatte Anschlussbilder VPPM-...
ÓÓ
3 Kanal (3) Entlüftung – ISO-Gewinde G18 (1/8”), G14 (1/4”), G12 (1/2“) Spannungsvariante (Typ Stromvariante
– NPT-Gewinde N18 (NPT 1/8), N14 (NPT 1/4), N12
VPPM-...-V1...) (Typ VPPM-...-A4...)
ÔÔ
ÓÓ
Bild 2: Pneumatische Anschlüsse (Flanschventil) (NPT 1/2)
5 PIN PIN
ÓÓ
Regelbereiche:
– unterer Druckwert 0L (0 bar) 1 Uv 2 Uv 2
– oberer Druckwert 2H (2 bar), 6H (6 bar), 10H (10 bar) D3out
ÓÓ
D3out 8
Alternative Regelbe 8 4...20 mA 4
reiche: 0...10 VW+ 4 W+
– unterer Druckwert ...L (... = Wert zwischen 0 ... 10 bar)
2 W- W-
3 3
z.B. 1L 1 Hutschienen-Klemmeinheit X 6
– oberer Druckwert ...H (... = Wert zwischen 0 ... 10 bar) X 6
z.B. 7H
2 Hutschiene GND 7 GND 7
6 – Sollwer tvorgabe A4 (4 ... 20 mA), V1 (0 ... 10 V) 1 5 1
– Schaltausgang P (PNP), N (NPN) Sichern Sie das VPPM-... mit den Sicherungsschrauben 5
des Hutschienenadapters (Anziehdrehmoment 1,5 Nm). D1 D2 D1 D2
7 Genauigkeit ... (2 %), S1 (1 %) ext ext ext ext
Bediengerät ... (LED), C1 (LCD)
8 in in in in
1 Anschlussplattenmontage (Flanschventil)
Befestigen Sie das VPPM-... mit Hilfe der beigelegten
4 Voraussetzungen für den Produkteinsatz
Schrauben (1/8“: M4x65, 1/4“: M4x77) auf dem An Die einzelnen Pins am elektrischen Anschluss sind
7 Allgemeine, stets zu beachtende Hinweise für den ord
2 nungsgemäßen und sicheren Einsatz des Produkts:
schlussblock. Lage der Befestigungsbohrungen (siehe folgendermaßen belegt:
Bild).
Vergleichen Sie die Grenzwerte in dieser Bedienungsan 8
Ziehen Sie die Befestigungsschrauben an (Anziehdreh
3 leitung mit denen Ihres Einsatzfalls (z. B. Betriebsme
moment 1,5 Nm). 1
dium, Drücke, Kräfte, Momente, Temperaturen, Massen, 2
Geschwindigkeiten, Spannungen). 1
4 6 Berücksichtigen Sie die Umgebungsbedingungen am
Einsatzort.
Halten Sie alle geltenden nationalen und internationa
len Vorschriften ein. 3 7
5 Entfernen Sie die Transportvorkehrungen wie
Schutzwachs, Folien (Polyamid), Kappen (Polyethylen), 2
Kartonagen. 4 6
1 LED (gelb) schnelles Regelverhalten
Die Verpackungen sind vorgesehen für eine Verwertung
2 LED (gelb) universelles Regelverhalten auf stofflicher Basis (Ausnahme: Ölpapier = Restmüll). 3
(Werkseinstellung) 5
Verwenden Sie den Artikel im Originalzustand ohne
3 LED (gelb) für präzises Regelverhalten jegliche eigenmächtige Veränderung.
4 Taste UP Berücksichtigen Sie die Warnungen und Hinweise am 1 Anschlussplatte
5 Taste EDIT Produkt und in dieser Bedienungsanleitung. 2 VPPM
6 Taste DOWN Sorgen Sie für ordnungsgemäß aufbereitete Druckluft 3 Befestigungsbohrungen
7 LED (rot) ERROR (è Technische Daten).
Belüften Sie Ihre gesamte Anlage langsam. Dann treten 5.2 Pneumatisch (Muffenventil)
8 LED (grün) POWER
keine unkontrollierten Bewegungen auf. Entfernen Sie die Verschlusselemente an den Druckluft-
Bild 3: Anzeige und Bedienelemente anschlüssen.
5 Einbau Verschlauchen Sie folgende Anschlüsse (è Bild 1):
5.1 Mechanisch – Druckeingang (1) Pos. 4
– Druckausgang (2) Pos. 2
Montieren Sie an Entlüftung (3) (Pos. 5 ) einen Schall
.................................................. Hinweis
dämpfer oder führen Sie die Abluft gefasst ab.
Alle verfügbaren Dokumente zum Produkt Der Einbau und die Inbetriebnahme darf nur gemäß
è www.festo.com/pk der Bedienungsanleitung und von qualifiziertem
Fachpersonal erfolgen.
Pin Kabel- Anschlussbezeichnungen – Wählen Sie mit der Taste UP bzw. DOWN den ge 11 Sicherheitseinstellung 13 Technische Daten
Farbe 1) wünschten Parametersatz aus. Die LED des gewähl
Spannungsva Stromvariante Typ Kabel Spannungstyp Stromtyp Typ VPPM-... Typ Typ Typ
ten Parametersatzes leuchtet. bruch 2 bar 6 bar 10 bar
riante Typ VPPM-...-A4...
VPPM-...-V1...
– Drücken Sie erneut die EDIT-Taste zum Bestätigen 30 psi 90 psi 150 psi
ihrer Wahl. Sollwer t Ausgangsdruck sinkt auf letzter Wert wird
1 weiß (WH) Digitaler Eingang D1 0 bar gesicher t. Mittelfristig Bauart Propor tional Druckregelventil
kann sich er der Druck am
2 braun (BN) DC +24 V Versorgungsspannung Das Regelverhalten des VPPM kann über die digitalen Ausgang erhöhen oder Einbaulage Beliebig, vorzugsweise liegend
Eingänge D1 und D2 auch ferngesteuert eingestellt wer verringern. (Anzeigeelemente nach oben)
3 grün (GN) Analoger Eingang W- (- Sollwert) den: Versorgungs- letzter Wert wird gesichert. Ausgangsdruck bleibt Medium Druckluft nach
spannung ungeregelt erhalten. Mittelfristig kann sich der Druck ISO 8573-1:2010 [7.4.4],
4 gelb (YE) Analoger Eingang Analoger Eingang Para Regelverhalten Eingang Eingang am Ausgang erhöhen oder verringern.
W+ (+ Sollwert) W+ (+ Sollwert) inerte Gase
meter D1PIN 1 D2PIN 5
0 ... 10 V 4 ... 20 mA
satz Druckbereiche [bar]
5 grau (GY) Digitaler Eingang D2 12 Störungsbeseitigung – Zul. Eingangsdruck max. 4 max. 8 max. 11
1 schnelles Regelverhalten 1 1) 0 1) – Regelbereich 0,02 ... 2 0,06 ... 6 0,1 ... 10
6 rosa (PK) Analoger Ausgang X (Istwert) Ursache Zustand der LED Anzeigen
2 universelles Regelverhalten 0 1 Eingangsdruck p1 min. 1 bar
7 blau (BU) DC 0 V oder GND (Werkseinstellung) Power LED ERROR-LED über Ausgangsdruck p2
(grün) (rot)
8 rot (RD) Digitaler Ausgang D3 2) 3 präzises Regelverhalten 1 1 Gesamtleckage im Neuzu [l/h] <5
– Unterspannung bzw. leuchtet leuchtet stand
1) Bei Verwendung der Anschlussdose mit Kabel lt. Zubehör. 1) 1 = 24 V DC / 0 = 0 V DC
Überspannung des Soll
Das Anziehdrehmoment der Anschlussdose M12 beträgt Anschlüsse G1/8” (1/8 NPT), G1/4”
wertes
max. 0,5 Nm (1/4 NPT). G1/2“ (1/2 NPT)
2) Die Hysterese des digitalen Komparatorausgangs D3 beträgt
0,5% FS
Belüften Sie das VPPM-... mit einem mindestens um 1 bar – Hardwarefehler leuchtet blinkt
Nennweite [mm]
höheren Eingangsdruck als der maximal gewünschte Aus – Überspannung (> 30 V) – Belüftung 6 (bei 1/8”), 8 (bei 1/4”),
– Interne Temperatur zu – Entlüftung 12 (bei 1/2“)
gangsdruck. Es stellt sich ein dazu proportionaler Aus hoch
Digitaler Komparatorausgang D3 4,5 (bei 1/8”), 6 (bei 1/4”),
gangsdruck p2 ein. Dem Sollwertsignal ist dann folgender 12 (bei 1/2“)
Die Funktion “Druck erreicht” ermöglicht die Überwa – Unterspannung (< 18 V) dunkel dunkel
Ausgangsdruck zugeordnet:
chung der Druckregelfunktion. Dazu wird der Sollwert mit Schutzar t IP65 im montiertem Zustand,
VPPM-... Ausgangsdruck beim Ausgangsdruck beim mit angezogenen Befest
dem Istwert verglichen. igungsschrauben, in Verbin
Der digitale Schaltausgang D3 wird aktiv, sobald die Signal 1 % FS 1) Signal 100 % FS 1) Störung Mögliche Ursache Abhilfe dung mit Anschlussdose laut
Regelabweichung š 0,5% FS beträgt und wird inaktiv, Zubehör.
2 bar Typ 0,02 bar 2 bar VPPM-... Versorgungsspannung Anschluss der
wenn die Regelabweichung > 1% FS überschreitet. reagier tnicht fehlt, POWER-LED Versorgungsspannung 24 Zul. Temp.-bereich [°C]
6 bar Typ 0,06 bar 6 bar leuchtet nicht VDC überprüfen – Umgebung 0 ... +60
– Medium +10 ... +50
Diagramm zur Schaltvariante PNP 10 bar Typ 0,1 bar 10 bar Sollwer tspannung bzw. Steuergerät überprüfen, – Lagerung –10 ... +70
Sollwer tstrom fehlt Anschluss überprüfen
1 2 3 4 1) – FS = Full scale: Elektrischer Anschluss Steckkontakt M12x1, 8-polig
W, X (1 % FS = 0,1 V bzw. 4,16 mA / 100 % FS = 10 V bzw. 20 mA) Durchflussme Verengung des Anschlussalternativen
– Ausgangsdruck: nge zu gering Strömungsquerschnitts einsetzen Zul. Betriebsspannung [V DC] 21,6 ... 26,4
0 V bzw. 4 mA erzeugt einen Ausgangsdruck von 0 bar durch Anschlusstechnik (zul. Restwelligkeit max. 10 %)
±1% (Schwenkverschraubung
en) Max. elektrische [W]
Wählen Sie einen passenden Parametersatz aus: Leistungsaufnahme
Druckanstieg Großes Zylindervolumen Anderen Parametersatz – Nenngröße 1/8“ und 7
Empfohlene Parametersätze VPPM-... Baugröße 1/8” zulangsam und lange Schlauchlänge wählen 1/4“
1% – Nenngröße 1/2“ 12
Druck kon – Bruch des Versor – Versorgungskabel er
Schlauch Offenes Ausgangsvolumen in ml
t stant trotz gungskabels (Der zu setzten Belastbarkeit des digita [mA]
länge 1) System veränder ter letzt eingestellte Aus
UD3out 0 ... 100 100 ... 1000 > 1000 len Schaltausgangs D3
Sollwer tvor gangsdruck bleibt un (PIN 8 im el. Anschluss) max. 60
gabe geregelt erhalten. Mit
0m 3 3 2 1 telfristig kann sich der
W-X<1% Max. zul. Versorgungs- [m]
UV-1V Druck am Ausgang er und Signalleitungslänge
1m 3 3 2 2 höhen oder verrin 10
gern.)
3m 3 3 3 2 – Zu geringer Versor – Versorgungsdruck er Gesamtgenauigkeit [bar]
0V gungsdruck P1 höhen – Standard
³5m 3 3 3 2
t (2 %) +0,5 x Hysterese 0,045 0,135 0,225
1) Manuelles Auf den digitalen Eingän An digitale Eingänge D1 – Klasse S1
1 Sollwert bei Schlauchinnendurchmesser 6 mm oder 8mm Auswählen gen D1 und D2 liegt und D2 0 V DC anlegen (1 %) +0,5 x Hysterese 0,025 0,075 0,125
2 Istwert der Parame Spannung an
tersätze über Hysterese 0,5 % Full scale
3 obere Toleranzgrenze UP/DOWN-
Empfohlene Parametersätze VPPM-... Baugröße 1/4” Tasten am Spannungstyp
4 untere Toleranzgrenze VPPM-... VPPM-...-V1.-...
Diagramm zur Schaltvariante NPN Schlauch Offenes Ausgangsvolumen in ml nicht mög – Sollwer tgröße [V DC] 0 ... +10
länge 1) System lich – Eingangswider
1 2 3 4 0 ... 500 500 ... 2000 > 2000 stand(Sollwer t) [kΩ] 10
– Bürde Istwertausgang [kΩ] min. 2
W, X 0m 3 1 2 3
Stromtyp
1m 3 1 2 3 VPPM-...-A4.-...
±1% – Sollwer tgröße [mA] 4 ... 20
3m 3 2 3 3 – Eingangswider
stand(Sollwer t) [Ω] 250
³5m 3 3 3 3 – Bürde Istwertausgang [Ω] max. 500
1) bei Schlauchdurchmesser 8 mm oder 10 mm Elektromagnetische Ver Siehe Konformitätserklärung
1% träglichkeit 1) è www.festo.com
– EMV Störaussendung CE-Konformität für
u. Störfestigkeit Industriebereiche erfüllt
UD3out Empfohlene Parametersätze VPPM-... Baugröße 1/2”
Schwingung und Schock Nachfolgende Angaben gelten
Schlauch Offenes Ausgangsvolumen in ml nicht bei Montage des
länge 1) System VPPM-... an den Winkel
UV-1V 0 ... 2000 2000 ... > 10000 VAME-P1-A.
10000 – Schwingung – Geprüft nach DIN/IEC 68/
EN 60068 Teil 2-6;
bei Wandmontage:
W-X<1% 0m 3 1 2 3
0,35 mm Weg
0V bei 10 ... 60 Hz,
1m 3 1 2 3
5 g Beschleunigung
1 Sollwert bei 60 ... 150 Hz
3m 3 2 3 3
2 Istwert – Schock – Geprüft nach DIN/IEC 68/
EN 60068 Teil 2-27;
3 obere Toleranzgrenze ³5m 3 3 3 3
bei Wandmontage:
4 untere Toleranzgrenze 1) bei Schlauchdurchmesser 12 mm oder 16 mm ±30 g bei 11 ms Dauer;
5 Schocks je Richtung
Werkstoffe
7 Bedienung und Betrieb – Gehäuse Aluminium-Knetlegierung
Schaltbilder VPPM-... Schaltausgang
PAXMD6 GF50/gr-P
PNP NPN – Dichtungen Nitrilkautschuk
.................................................. Hinweis – Schmierung Silikonfrei
P 2 BN +24 V P 2 BN +24 V Stellen Sie sicher, dass beim Abschalten des
8 RD Gewicht [g] 1/8”: 400, 1/4”: 560,
8 RD RL VPPM-... zuerst der Sollwert auf 0 V bzw. 4 mA 1/2”: 2050
RL
eingestellt wird, dann der Versorgungsdruck,
PNP 7 BU 0V 7 BU 0V 1) Das Ventil ist für den Einsatz im Industriebereich vorgesehen.
NPN danach der Sollwert und zuletzt die Versorgungs Außerhalb von industriellen Umgebungen, z. B. in Gewerbe- und
spannung abgeschaltet wird. Wohn-Mischgebieten, müssen evtl. Maßnahmen zur Funkentstö
rung getroffen werden.
6 Inbetriebnahme
8 Wartung und Pflege
Zur Reinigung:
.................................................. Hinweis
Schalten Sie zur äußeren Reinigung folgende Energie
Stellen Sie sicher, dass hochfrequente Einstrahlun quellen ab:
gen (z.B. durch Funkgeräte, Funktelefone oder son – Betriebsspannung
stige störaussendende Geräte) vom VPPM-... fernge – Druckluft
halten werden. So vermeiden Sie erhöhte Toleranzen Reinigen Sie bei Bedarf das VPPM-... von außen mit
des Ausgangsdrucks (Angaben zur EMV è einem weichen Lappen.
Technische Daten). Die zulässigen Reinigungsmittel sind eine milde Seifen
Das VPPM-... interpretiert Sollwertsignale, die kleiner wasserlösung (max. +50 °C) oder alle werkstoffschonen
als 1 % Full scale sind als 0 V bzw. 4 mA (è Tabelle den Medien.
Ausgangsdruckbereich). In diesem Fall wird der Ar
beitsdruck auf Umgebungsdruck gesetzt. 9 Ausbau
Zum Ausbau:
Verbinden Sie das VPPM-... mit einem Sollwertsignal.
Das VPPM-... verfügt über einen so genannten “Diffe Schalten Sie folgende Energiequellen ab:
renzeingang”. Das Sollwertsignal 0 ... 10 V bzw. – Betriebsspannung
4 … 20 mA wird dabei an die Kontakte 3 und 4 angelegt, – Druckluft
wobei das niedrigere Potenzial am Kontakt 3 und das Trennen Sie die jeweiligen Anschlüsse vom VPPM-...
höhere Potenzial an Kontakt4 anzuschließen ist. Kon Demontieren Sie das VPPM-... von der Befestigungsflä
takt 3 (– Sollwert) kann mit Kontakt 7 (GND) verbunden che/Hutschiene.
werden.
Bestromen Sie das VPPM-... mit Gleichstrom (Versor 10 Zubehör
gungsspannung UV = 24VDC ±10 %). Zubehör è www.festo.com/catalogue
Wählen Sie den Parametersatz für den Regler aus
(è tech. Daten):
– Drücken Sie die Taste EDIT für 3 sec.
BA01271P/00/EN/05.17 Products Solutions Services
71353696
Cerabar PMC11, PMC21, PMP11,
PMP21, PMP23
Process pressure measurement
Pressure transducer for safe measurement and
monitoring of absolute and gauge pressure
Cerabar PMC11, PMC21, PMP11, PMP21, PMP23
Order code: XXXXX-XXXXXX

1. Ser. no.: XXXXXXXXXXXX
Ext. ord. cd.: XXX.XXXX.XX
Serial number
2. www.endress.com/deviceviewer Endress+Hauser
Operations App
3.
A0023555
• Make sure the document is stored in a safe place such that it is always available when
working on or with the device.
• To avoid danger to individuals or the facility, read the "Basic safety instructions" section
carefully, as well as all other safety instructions in the document that are specific to
working procedures.
• The manufacturer reserves the right to modify technical data without prior notice. Your
Endress+Hauser distributor will supply you with current information and updates to
these Instructions.
2 Endress+Hauser
Cerabar PMC11, PMC21, PMP11, PMP21, PMP23 Table of contents
Table of contents
1 Document information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 9 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

1.1 Document function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 9.1 Exterior cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
1.2 Symbols used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
1.3 Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 10 Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
1.4 Terms and abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
1.5 Turn down calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 10.1 General notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
10.2 Return . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
2 Basic safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

11 Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
2.1 Requirements concerning the staff . . . . . . . . . . 9
2.2 Designated use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 11.1 Weld-in adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
2.3 Workplace safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 11.2 Process adapter M24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
2.4 Operational safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 11.3 Plug-on display PHX20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
2.5 Product safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 11.4 M12 plug connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
3 Product description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 12 Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

3.1 Product design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 12.1 Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
3.2 Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 12.2 Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
12.3 Performance characteristics of ceramic
process isolating diaphragm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
4 Incoming acceptance and product 12.4 Performance characteristics of metallic
identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 process isolating diaphragm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
4.1 Incoming acceptance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 12.5 Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
4.2 Product identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 12.6 Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
4.3 Storage and transport . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
5 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
5.1 Mounting dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
5.2 Installation conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
5.3 Influence of the installation position . . . . . . . . 16
5.4 Mounting location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
5.5 Mounting the profiled seal for the universal
process adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
5.6 Mounting instructions for oxygen
applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
5.7 Post-installation check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
6 Electrical connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
6.1 Connecting the measuring unit . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
6.2 Connection conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
6.3 Connection data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
6.4 Post-connection check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
7 Operation options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
7.1 Plug-on display PHX20 (optional) . . . . . . . . . . 23
8 Diagnostics and troubleshooting . . . 26

8.1 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
8.2 Response of output to errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
8.3 Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Endress+Hauser 3
Document information Cerabar PMC11, PMC21, PMP11, PMP21, PMP23
1 Document information
1.1 Document function

These Operating Instructions contain all the information that is required in various phases
of the life cycle of the device: from product identification, incoming acceptance and
storage, to mounting, connection, operation and commissioning through to
troubleshooting, maintenance and disposal.
1.2 Symbols used
1.2.1 Safety symbols
Symbol Meaning
DANGER!
DANGER This symbol alerts you to a dangerous situation. Failure to avoid this situation will result in
serious or fatal injury.
WARNING!
WARNING This symbol alerts you to a dangerous situation. Failure to avoid this situation can result in
serious or fatal injury.
CAUTION!
CAUTION This symbol alerts you to a dangerous situation. Failure to avoid this situation can result in
minor or medium injury.
NOTE!
NOTICE This symbol contains information on procedures and other facts which do not result in
personal injury.
1.2.2 Electrical symbols
Symbol Meaning Symbol Meaning
Protective ground connection Ground connection

A terminal which must be connected A grounded terminal which, as far as
to ground prior to establishing any the operator is concerned, is
other connections. grounded via a grounding system.
1.2.3 Tool symbols
Symbol Meaning
Open-ended wrench
A0011222
1.2.4 Symbols for certain types of information
Symbol Meaning
Permitted
Procedures, processes or actions that are permitted.
Forbidden
Procedures, processes or actions that are forbidden.
Tip
Indicates additional information.
4 Endress+Hauser
Cerabar PMC11, PMC21, PMP11, PMP21, PMP23 Document information
Symbol Meaning
Reference to documentation
A Reference to page
Reference to graphic
1. , 2. , 3. … Series of steps
Result of a step
Visual inspection
1.2.5 Symbols in graphics
Symbol Meaning
1, 2, 3 ... Item numbers
1. , 2. , 3. … Series of steps
A, B, C, ... Views
1.3 Documentation
The document types listed are available:
In the Download Area of the Endress+Hauser Internet site: www.endress.com →
Download
1.3.1 Technical Information (TI): planning aid for your device

PMC11: TI01133P
PMP11: TI01133P
PMC21: TI01133P
PMP21: TI01133P
PMP23: TI01203P
The document contains all the technical data on the device and provides an overview of
the accessories and other products that can be ordered for the device.
1.3.2 Brief Operating Instructions (KA): getting the 1st measured

value quickly
KA01164P:
The Brief Operating Instructions contain all the essential information from incoming
acceptance to initial commissioning.
Endress+Hauser 5
1.3.3 Safety Instructions (XA)

Safety Instructions (XA) are supplied with the device depending on the approval. These
instructions are an integral part of the Operating Instructions.
Device Directive Documentation Option 1)
PMP21 ATEX II 1/2G Ex ia IIC T4 Ga/Gb XA01271P BA

PMP23
PMC21 ATEX II 2G Ex ia IIC T4 Gb XA01271P BB
PMC21 ATEX II 3G Ex ec IIC T4 Gc XA01533P BC

PMP21
PMC21 FM IS Cl. I, Div.1 Gr. A-D T4 XA01321P FA

PMP21
PMP23
PMC21 CSA C/US IS Cl. I Div. 1 Gr. A-D XA01322P CB

PMP21
PMP23
PMC21 EAC Ex ia IIC T4 Ga/Gb XA01540P GA

PMP21
PMP23
PMC21 IEC Ex ia IIC T4 Ga/Gb XA01271P IA

PMP21
PMP23
PMC21 NEPSI Ex ia IIC T4 XA01363P NA

PMP21
PMP23
PMC21 TIIS Ex ia IIC T4 In preparation TA

PMP21
PMP23
1) Product Configurator, order code for "Approval"
The nameplate provides information on the Safety Instructions (XA) that are relevant
for the device.
6 Endress+Hauser
Cerabar PMC11, PMC21, PMP11, PMP21, PMP23 Document information
1.4 Terms and abbreviations
p
0
LRL LRV URV URL MWP OPL
A0029505
Item Term/ Explanation

abbreviation
1 OPL The OPL (over pressure limit = sensor overload limit) for the measuring device
depends on the lowest-rated element, with regard to pressure, of the selected
components, i.e. the process connection has to be taken into consideration in
addition to the measuring cell. Also observe pressure-temperature dependency. For
the relevant standards and additional notes, see the "Pressure specifications" section
→  44 .
The OPL may only be applied for a limited period of time.
2 MWP The MWP (maximum working pressure) for the sensors depends on the lowest-
rated element, with regard to pressure, of the selected components, i.e. the process
connection has to be taken into consideration in addition to the measuring cell.
Also observe pressure-temperature dependency. For the relevant standards and
additional notes, see the "Pressure specifications" section →  44 .
The MWP may be applied at the device for an unlimited period.
The MWP can also be found on the nameplate.
3 Maximum sensor Span between LRL and URL

measuring range This sensor measuring range is equivalent to the maximum calibratable/adjustable
span.
4 Calibrated/ Span between LRV and URV

adjusted span Factory setting: 0 to URL
Other calibrated spans can be ordered as customized spans.
p - Pressure
- LRL Lower range limit
- URL Upper range limit
- LRV Lower range value
- URV Upper range value
- TD (turn down) Turn down

The turn down is preset at the factory and cannot be changed.
Example - see the following section.
Endress+Hauser 7
1.5 Turn down calculation
1=2 3
LRL LRV URV URL
A0029545
1 Calibrated/adjusted span
2 Zero point-based span
3 URL sensor
Example
• Sensor:10 bar (150 psi) • Calibrated/adjusted span: 0 to 5 bar (0 to 75 psi)

• Upper range value (URL) = 10 bar (150 psi) • Lower range value (LRV) = 0 bar (0 psi)
• Upper range value (URV) = 5 bar (75 psi)
Turn down (TD):
URL
TD =
|URV - LRV|
10 bar (150 psi)

TD = = 2
|5 bar (75 psi) - 0 bar (0 psi)|
In this example, the TD is 2:1.

This span is based on the zero point.
8 Endress+Hauser
Cerabar PMC11, PMC21, PMP11, PMP21, PMP23 Basic safety instructions
2 Basic safety instructions
2.1 Requirements concerning the staff

The personnel for installation, commissioning, diagnostics and maintenance must fulfill
the following requirements:
‣ Trained, qualified specialists: must have a relevant qualification for this specific
function and task
‣ Are authorized by the plant owner/operator
‣ Are familiar with federal/national regulations
‣ Before beginning work, the specialist staff must have read and understood the
instructions in the Operating Instructions and supplementary documentation as well as
in the certificates (depending on the application)
‣ Following instructions and basic conditions
The operating personnel must fulfill the following requirements:
‣ Being instructed and authorized according to the requirements of the task by the
facility's owner-operator
‣ Following the instructions in these Operating Instructions
2.2 Designated use
2.2.1 Application and media

The Cerabar is used to measure absolute and gauge pressure in gases, vapors and liquids.
The process-wetted materials of the measuring device must have an adequate level of
resistance to the media.
The measuring device may be used for the following measurements (process variables)
• in compliance with the limit values specified under "Technical data"
• in compliance with the conditions that are listed in additional documentation such as the
XA and this manual.
Measured process variable

• PMC11: gauge pressure
• PMP11: gauge pressure
• PMC21: gauge pressure or absolute pressure
• PMP21: gauge pressure or absolute pressure
Calculated process variable

Pressure
2.2.2 Incorrect use

The manufacturer is not liable for damage caused by improper or non-designated use.
Verification for borderline cases:
‣ For special fluids and fluids for cleaning, Endress+Hauser is glad to provide assistance
in verifying the corrosion resistance of process-wetted materials, but does not accept
any warranty or liability.
2.2.3 Residual risks

When in operation, the housing may reach a temperature close to the process
temperature.
Endress+Hauser 9
Basic safety instructions Cerabar PMC11, PMC21, PMP11, PMP21, PMP23
Danger of burns from contact with surfaces!

‣ For elevated process temperatures, ensure protection against contact to prevent burns.
2.3 Workplace safety

For work on and with the device:
‣ Wear the required personal protective equipment according to federal/national
regulations.
‣ Switch off the supply voltage before connecting the device.
2.4 Operational safety

Risk of injury!
‣ Operate the device in proper technical condition and fail-safe condition only.
‣ The operator is responsible for interference-free operation of the device.
Conversions to the device
Unauthorized modifications to the device are not permitted and can lead to unforeseeable
dangers.
‣ If, despite this, modifications are required, consult with Endress+Hauser.
Hazardous area
To eliminate the risk of danger to persons or the facility when the device is used in the
approval-related area (e.g. explosion protection, pressure equipment safety):
‣ Check the nameplate to verify if the device ordered can be put to its intended use in the
approval-related area.
‣ Observe the specifications in the separate supplementary documentation, such as the
XA or SD, which is an integral part of these Instructions.
2.5 Product safety

This measuring device is designed in accordance with good engineering practice to meet
state-of-the-art safety requirements, has been tested, and left the factory in a condition in
which it is safe to operate.
It meets general safety standards and legal requirements. It also complies with the EU
directives listed in the device-specific EU Declaration of Conformity. Endress+Hauser
confirms this by affixing the CE mark to the device.
10 Endress+Hauser
Cerabar PMC11, PMC21, PMP11, PMP21, PMP23 Product description
3 Product description
3.1 Product design

Overview Position Description
A B C-1 C-2 A Valve plug
B Cable
C- 1 M12 plug
Housing cap made of plastic
C- 2 M12 plug
A0027231 A0027232 A0021987 A0027289 For Ex ec and IP69: metal housing cap
Metal housing cap can also be ordered as an option.
D D Housing
E Process connection (sample illustration)
A0027226
A0027215
A0027227
3.2 Function
3.2.1 Calculating the pressure
Devices with ceramic process isolating diaphragm (Ceraphire®)

The ceramic sensor is an oil-free sensor, i.e. the process pressure acts directly on the
robust ceramic process isolating diaphragm and causes it to deflect. A pressure-dependent
Endress+Hauser 11
Product description Cerabar PMC11, PMC21, PMP11, PMP21, PMP23
change in capacitance is measured at the electrodes of the ceramic substrate and the
process isolating diaphragm. The measuring range is determined by the thickness of the
ceramic process isolating diaphragm.
Devices with metallic process isolating diaphragm

The process pressure deflects the metal process isolating diaphragm of the sensor and a fill
fluid transfers the pressure to a Wheatstone bridge (semiconductor technology). The
pressure-dependent change in the bridge output voltage is measured and evaluated.
12 Endress+Hauser
Cerabar PMC11, PMC21, PMP11, PMP21, PMP23 Incoming acceptance and product identification
4 Incoming acceptance and product

identification
4.1 Incoming acceptance
DELIVERY NOTE
A0028673
1=2
A0016870
Is the order code on the delivery note (1) identical to the order code on
the product sticker (2)?
A0022100
A0028673
A0022103
Are the goods undamaged?
A0028673
DELIVERY NOTE
A0022105
Do the data on the nameplate correspond to the order specifications and

the delivery note?
Endress+Hauser 13
Incoming acceptance and product identification Cerabar PMC11, PMC21, PMP11, PMP21, PMP23
A0028673
A0022106
Is the documentation available?

If required (see nameplate): Are the safety instructions (XA) present?
If one of these conditions does not apply, please contact your

Endress+Hauser sales office.
4.2 Product identification

The following options are available for identification of the measuring device:
• Nameplate specifications
• Order code with breakdown of the device features on the delivery note
• Enter serial numbers from nameplates in W@M Device Viewer
(www.endress.com/deviceviewer): All information about the measuring device is
displayed.
For an overview of the technical documentation provided, enter the serial number from
the nameplates in the W@M Device Viewer (www.endress.com/deviceviewer)
4.2.1 Nameplate
1
2 Cerabar
Made in Germany,
D-79689 Maulburg
3 Ord. cd.:
4 Ser. no.:
5 Ext. ord. cd.:
Date:
TAG:
A0024456
1 Manufacturer's address
2 Device name
3 Order number
4 Serial number
5 Extended order number
4.3 Storage and transport
4.3.1 Storage conditions

Use original packaging.
Store the measuring device in clean and dry conditions and protect from damage caused by
shocks (EN 837-2).
Storage temperature range

–40 to +85 °C (–40 to +185 °F)
14 Endress+Hauser
Cerabar PMC11, PMC21, PMP11, PMP21, PMP23 Incoming acceptance and product identification
4.3.2 Transporting the product to the measuring point

LWARNING
Incorrect transport!
Housing and diaphragm may become damaged, and there is a risk of injury!
‣ Transport the measuring device to the measuring point in its original packaging or by
the process connection.
Endress+Hauser 15
Installation Cerabar PMC11, PMC21, PMP11, PMP21, PMP23
5 Installation
5.1 Mounting dimensions

For dimensions, see the "Mechanical construction" section in the Technical Information.
5.2 Installation conditions

• No moisture may enter the housing when installing or operating the device, or when
establishing the electrical connection.
• For metal M12 plugs: Do not remove the protection cap (only for IP69 and Ex ec version)
of the M12 plug terminal until shortly before the electrical connection.
• Do not clean or touch process isolating diaphragms with hard and/or pointed objects.
• Do not remove the protector on the process isolating diaphragm until just before
installation.
• Always firmly tighten the cable entry.
• Point the cable and connector downwards where possible to prevent moisture from
entering (e.g. rain or condensation water).
• Protect the housing from impact
• The following instruction applies for devices with a gauge pressure sensor and M12 plug
or valve plug:
NOTICE
If a heated device is cooled during the cleaning process (e.g. by cold water), a vacuum
develops for a short time, whereby moisture can penetrate the sensor through the
pressure compensation element (1).
Device could be destroyed!
‣ In this case, mount the device with the pressure compensation element (1) pointing
diagonally downwards where possible or to the side.
1 1 1
A0022252
5.3 Influence of the installation position

Any orientation is possible. However, the orientation may cause a zero point shift i.e. the
measured value does not show zero when the vessel is empty or partially full.
A B C
A0024708
16 Endress+Hauser
Cerabar PMC11, PMC21, PMP11, PMP21, PMP23 Installation
Type Process isolating Process isolating diaphragm Process isolating diaphragm

diaphragm axis is pointing upwards (B) pointing downwards (C)
horizontal (A)
PMP11 Calibration position, no Up to +4 mbar (+0.058 psi) Up to –4 mbar (–0.058 psi)

PMP21 effect
PMP23
PMC11, PMC21 Calibration position, no Up to Up to

< 1 bar (15 psi) effect +0.3 mbar (+0.0044 psi) –0.3 mbar (–0.0044 psi)
PMC11, PMC21 Calibration position, no Up to +3 mbar (+0.0435 psi) Up to –3 mbar (–0.0435 psi)
≥1 bar (15 psi) effect
5.4 Mounting location
5.4.1 Pressure measurement
Pressure measurement in gases

Mount the device with shutoff device above the tapping point so that any condensate can
flow into the process.
A0021904
1 Device
2 Shutoff device
Pressure measurement in vapors

For pressure measurement in vapors, use a siphon. The siphon reduces the temperature to
almost ambient temperature. Mount the device with a shutoff device at the same height as
the tapping point.
Advantage:
only minor/negligible heat effects on the device.
Note the max. permitted ambient temperature of the transmitter!
3
A0024395
1 Device
2 Shutoff device
3 Siphon
Endress+Hauser 17
Installation Cerabar PMC11, PMC21, PMP11, PMP21, PMP23
Pressure measurement in liquids

Mount the device with a shutoff device at the same height as the tapping point.
2 1
A0024399
1 Device
2 Shutoff device
5.4.2 Level measurement

• Always install the device below the lowest measuring point.
• Do not install the device at the following positions:
– In the filling curtain
– In the tank outlet
– In the suction area of a pump
– Or at a point in the tank which could be affected by pressure pulses from the agitator.
A0024405
5.5 Mounting the profiled seal for the universal process

adapter
For details on mounting, see KA00096F/00/A3.
5.6 Mounting instructions for oxygen applications

Oxygen and other gases can react explosively to oils, grease and plastics, such that, among
other things, the following precautions must be taken:
• All components of the system, such as measuring devices, must be cleaned in accordance
with the BAM requirements.
• Dependent on the materials used, a certain maximum temperature and a maximum
pressure for oxygen applications must not be exceeded.
• The following table lists devices (devices only, not accessories or enclosed accessories),
which are suitable for gaseous oxygen applications.
1)
Device pmax for oxygen applications Tmax for oxygen applications Option
PMC21 40 bar (600 psi) –10 to +60 °C (+14 to +140 °F) HB
1) Product Configurator, order code for "Service"
18 Endress+Hauser
Cerabar PMC11, PMC21, PMP11, PMP21, PMP23 Installation
5.7 Post-installation check

 Is the device undamaged (visual inspection)?
Does the device conform to the measuring point specifications?

For example:
 • Process temperature
• Process pressure
• Ambient temperature range
• Measuring range
 Are the measuring point identification and labeling correct (visual inspection)?
 Is the device adequately protected from precipitation and direct sunlight?
 Are the securing screws tightened securely?
 Does the pressure compensation element point downwards at an angle or to the side?
 To prevent the penetration of moisture: are the connecting cables/plugs pointing downwards?
Endress+Hauser 19
Electrical connection Cerabar PMC11, PMC21, PMP11, PMP21, PMP23
6.1 Connecting the measuring unit
6.1.1 Terminal assignment

LWARNING
Risk of injury from the uncontrolled activation of processes!
‣ Make sure that downstream processes are not started unintentionally.
LWARNING
Supply voltage might be connected!
Risk of explosion!
‣ Make sure that no supply voltage is applied when connecting.
LWARNING
Limitation of electrical safety due to incorrect connection!
‣ In accordance with IEC/EN61010 a separate circuit breaker must be provided for the
device .
‣ The device must be operated with a 500 mA fine-wire fuse (slow-blow).
‣ When using the measuring device in hazardous areas, installation must comply with
the corresponding national standards and regulations and the Safety Instructions or
Installation or Control Drawings.
‣ All explosion protection data are given in separate documentation which is available
upon request. The Ex documentation is supplied as standard with all devices approved
for use in explosion hazardous areas.
‣ Protective circuits against reverse polarity are integrated.
Connect the device in the following order:
1. Check whether the supply voltage matches the supply voltage indicated on the
nameplate.
2. Connect device in accordance with the following diagram.
Switch on supply voltage.
For devices with a cable connection: do not close reference air hose (see (a) in the
following drawings)! Protect reference air hose against penetration by water/condensate.
4 to 20 mA output
Device M12 plug Valve plug Cable
PMC11 0.5A 0.5A 1 0.5A

PMP11 L+ 1 L+ L+
PMC21 2 1
3 2
PMP21 3 4 L–
PMP23 L– 3
2
A0023487 L–
(a)
A0022823 A0023783
1 brown = L+
2 blue = L-
3 green/yellow = ground connection
(a) reference air hose
20 Endress+Hauser
Cerabar PMC11, PMC21, PMP11, PMP21, PMP23 Electrical connection
0 to 10 V output
Device M12 plug Valve plug Cable
PMC11 0.5A 1 -
PMP11 L+ 3
2 1
4
3
2 L–
L–
A0017576
L+
0.5A
A0022822
6.1.2 Supply voltage

LWARNING
Supply voltage might be connected!
Risk of explosion!
‣ When using the measuring device in hazardous areas, installation must comply with
the corresponding national standards and regulations as well as the Safety Instructions.
‣ All explosion protection data are given in separate documentation which is available
upon request. The Ex documentation is supplied as standard with all devices approved
for use in explosion hazardous areas.
Electronic version Device Supply voltage
4 to 20 mA output PMC11 10 to 30 V DC
PMP11
PMC21
PMP21
PMP23
0 to 10 V output PMC11 12 to 30 V DC
PMP11
6.1.3 Current consumption and alarm signal
Number of wires Device Normal operation Alarm signal 1)
2 PMC11 ≤ 26 mA > 21 mA
PMP11
PMC21
PMP21
PMP23
3 PMC11 < 12 mA 11 V
PMP11
1) For MAX alarm (factory setting)
6.2 Connection conditions
6.2.1 Cable specification

For valve plug: < 1.5 mm2 (16 AWG) and Ø3.5 to 6.5 mm (0.14 to 0.26 in)
6.3 Connection data
Endress+Hauser 21
Electrical connection Cerabar PMC11, PMC21, PMP11, PMP21, PMP23
6.3.1 Load (for 4 to 20 mA devices )

In order to guarantee sufficient terminal voltage in two-wire devices, a maximum load
resistance RL (including line resistance) must not be exceeded, depending on the supply
voltage UB of the supply unit.
R L max
[W ]
1068
614 2 R L max £ U B - 6.5V

22mA
10 20 30 UB
[V]
1
A0029452
1 Power supply 10 to 30 V DC
2 RLmax maximum load resistance
UB Supply voltage
6.3.2 Load resistance (for 0 to 10 V devices)

The load resistance must be ≥ 5 [kΩ].
6.4 Post-connection check

 Is the device or cable undamaged (visual check)?
 Do the cables comply with the requirements ?
 Do the cables have adequate strain relief?
 Are all the cable glands installed, firmly tightened and leak-tight?
 Does the supply voltage match the specifications on the nameplate?
 Is the terminal assignment correct ?
 If required: Has protective ground connection been established ?
22 Endress+Hauser
Cerabar PMC11, PMC21, PMP11, PMP21, PMP23 Operation options
7 Operation options
7.1 Plug-on display PHX20 (optional)

No display or other operation facility is required to operate the device. However, devices
with a valve plug can be fitted with the optional local display PHX20.
A 1-line liquid crystal display (LCD) is used. The local display shows measured values, fault
messages and information messages. The device display can be turned in 90° steps.
Depending on the orientation of the device, it is therefore easy to read the measured
values.
7.1.1 Storage conditions

• Use original packaging.
• Storage temperature range: –30 to +80 °C (–22 to +176 °F)
7.1.2 Installation
1 2 3 4
A0022208
1. Place seals between the sensor/plug-on display and the plug-on display/connector.
2. Fit the plug-on display (2) between the connector (3) and connector socket (1) of the
sensor.
3. Replace the securing screw (4) with the longer screw included in the delivery.
4. An adhesive label (included in the delivery) with information on the technical unit
can be fixed beneath the LED display.
Mounting dimensions
42 (1.65)
42 (1.65) 48 (1.89)
A0022210
7.1.3 Technical data
Display: 4-digit, red LED display
Digit height: 7.62 mm; programmable decimal point setting
Display range: -1999 to 9999
Accuracy: 0.2% of the span ±1 digit
Endress+Hauser 23
Operation options Cerabar PMC11, PMC21, PMP11, PMP21, PMP23
Electrical connection: To transmitter with 4 to 20 mA output and elbow plug DIN 43 650,
reverse polarity protection
Display power supply: Not required, powered automatically from the power loop
Voltage drop: ≤ 5 V (corresponds to load: max. 250 Ω)
Rate of conversion: 3 measurements per second
Damping: 0.3 to 20 s (configurable)
Data backup: Non-volatile EEPROM
Error message: • HI: overrange

• LO: below range
Programming: Via 2 keys, menu-guided, display range scaling, decimal point, damping,
error message
Degree of protection: IP 65
Influence of temperature on the 0.1% / 10 K

display:
Electromagnetic compatibility Interference emission as per EN 50081, interference immunity as per EN

(EMC): 50082
Permitted current load: Max. 60 mA
Ambient temperature: 0 to +60 °C (+32 to +140 °F)
Housing material: Pa6 GF30 plastic, blue

Front screen made from red PMMA
Order number: 52022914
7.1.4 Electrical connection
Pin assignment
LWARNING
Is the supply voltage switched off?
Risk of electric shock!
• PIN 1: L+ (supply voltage UB)
• PIN 2: L- (0 V)
• PIN 3: Not assigned
Supply voltage
The supply voltage (mostly 24 V DC) must be greater than the sum of the voltage drop Us
at the sensor, the voltage drop of 5 V at the display and other voltage loss Ua (such as
additional evaluation and power loss).
The following therefore applies: Ub = Us + 5 V + Ua
Post-connection check
 Is the device or cable undamaged (visual check)?
 Are all cable glands installed, securely tightened and leak-tight?
 If supply voltage is present, is the device ready for operation and do values appear on the display module?
24 Endress+Hauser
Cerabar PMC11, PMC21, PMP11, PMP21, PMP23 Operation options
7.1.5 Commissioning
NOTICE
Risk of injury from the uncontrolled activation of processes!
‣ Ensure that no uncontrolled processes are activated in the system.
Configuring the menu items

To configure the menu items, loosen the 4 Phillips screws (1) on the display and remove
the cover.
1 1
A B
1 1
A0022209
A Move down and select the items

B Move up and select the items
A+B Select the item to configure or acknowledge the setting
Setting the decimal point
Press the B key until "dP" is displayed. d P
Press A+B to set the decimal point: - - -. -
Press B or A for up or down: - -. - -
Press A+B to quit the setting function and to go to the "dP" menu item. d P
Out of range setting

Message if signal is below 4 mA or above 20 mA:
• "HI" message = over range
• "LO" message = below range
Press the B key until "HILO" is displayed. H I L O
Press A+B for the setting function (message inactive): o F F
Press B or A for up or down (message active): o n
Press A+B to quit the setting function and to go to the "HILO" menu item. H I L O
Please note: If the "HILO" message is not active, the error "Er06" is displayed if the display
range (-1999 to +9999) is exceeded.
Changing to the measuring mode

Depending on the menu item selected, press key A or B between 1 and 8 times.
Endress+Hauser 25
Diagnostics and troubleshooting Cerabar PMC11, PMC21, PMP11, PMP21, PMP23
8 Diagnostics and troubleshooting
8.1 Troubleshooting
If an illegal configuration exists in the device, the device switches to error mode.
General errors
Error Possible cause Solution
Device is not responding. Supply voltage does not match that specified on Apply correct voltage.
the nameplate.
Supply voltage has incorrect polarity. Reverse polarity of supply voltage.
Connecting cables are not in contact with the Check the contacting of the cables
terminals. and correct if necessary.
Output current Signal line is not wired correctly. Check wiring.

≤ 3.6 mA
8.2 Response of output to errors

The response of the output to error is regulated in accordance with NAMUR NE43.
Factory setting MAX alarm: >21 mA
8.2.1 alarm current
Device Description Option
PMC21 Adjusted min. alarm current IA 1)

PMP21
PMP23
1) Product Configurator order code for "Service"
8.3 Disposal
When disposing, separate and recycle the device components based on the materials.
9 Maintenance
No special maintenance work is required.
Keep the pressure compensation element (1) free from contamination.
A0022141
26 Endress+Hauser
Cerabar PMC11, PMC21, PMP11, PMP21, PMP23 Maintenance
9.1 Exterior cleaning

Please note the following points when cleaning the device:
• The cleaning agents used should not corrode the surface and the seals.
• Mechanical damage to the process isolating diaphragm, e.g. due to sharp objects, must
be avoided.
• Observe the degree of protection of the device. See the nameplate if necessary →  14.
Endress+Hauser 27
Repair Cerabar PMC11, PMC21, PMP11, PMP21, PMP23
10 Repair
10.1 General notes
10.1.1 Repair concept

Repairs are not possible.
10.2 Return
The measuring device must be returned if the wrong device has been ordered or delivered.
As an ISO-certified company and also due to legal regulations, Endress+Hauser is obliged
to follow certain procedures when handling any returned products that have been in
contact with medium. To ensure swift, safe and professional device returns, please read
the return procedures and conditions on the Endress+Hauser website at
www.services.endress.com/return-material
28 Endress+Hauser
Cerabar PMC11, PMC21, PMP11, PMP21, PMP23 Accessories
11 Accessories
11.1 Weld-in adapter

Various weld-in adapters are available for installation in vessels or pipes.
Device Description Option 1) Order number
PMP23 Weld-in adapter M24, d=65, 316L PM 71041381
PMP23 Weld-in adapter M24, d=65, 316L 3.1 EN10204-3.1 PN 71041383

material, inspection certificate
PMP21 Weld-in adapter G½, 316L QA 52002643
PMP21 Weld-in adapter G½, 316L 3.1 EN10204-3.1 material, QB 52010172

inspection certificate
PMP21 Weld-in tool adapter G½, brass QC 52005082
PMP23 Weld-in adapter G1, 316L, conical metal joint QE 52005087
PMP23 Weld-in adapter G1, 316L, 3.1, conical metal joint, QF 52010171
EN10204-3.1 material, inspection certificate
PMP23 Weld-in tool adapter G1, brass QG 52005272
PMP23 Weld-in adapter G1, 316L, silicone O-ring seal QJ 52001051
PMP23 Weld-in adapter G1, 316L, 3.1, silicone O-ring seal, QK 52011896
EN10204-3.1 material, inspection certificate
PMP23 Weld-in adapter Uni D65, 316L QL 214880-0002
PMP23 Weld-in adapter Uni D65, 316L 3.1 EN10204-3.1 QM 52010174

PMP23 Weld-in tool adapter Uni D65/D85, brass QN 71114210
PMP23 Weld-in adapter Uni D85, 316L QP 52006262
PMP23 Weld-in adapter Uni D85, 316L 3.1 EN10204-3.1 QR 52010173

1) Product Configurator, order code for "Enclosed accessories"
If installed horizontally and weld-in adapters with a leakage hole are used, ensure that the
leakage hole is pointing down. This allows leaks to be detected as quickly as possible.
11.2 Process adapter M24

The following process adapters can be ordered for the process connections with order
option X2J and X3J:
Device Description Order number Order number with inspection certificate 3.1 EN10204
PMP23 Varivent F DN32 PN40 52023996 52024003
PMP23 Varivent N DN50 PN40 52023997 52024004
PMP23 DIN11851 DN40 52023999 52024006
PMP23 DIN11851 DN50 52023998 52024005
PMP23 SMS 1½" 52026997 52026999
PMP23 Clamp 1½" 52023994 52024001
PMP23 Clamp 2" 52023995 52024002
Endress+Hauser 29
Accessories Cerabar PMC11, PMC21, PMP11, PMP21, PMP23
11.3 Plug-on display PHX20

→  23
11.4 M12 plug connectors

Connector Degree of protection Material Option 1) Order
number
M12 IP67 • Union nut: Cu Sn/Ni R1 52006263

(self-terminated connection • Body: PBT
at M12 plug) • Seal: NBR
(0.8)
ø20
53 (2.09)
A0024475
M12 90 degrees IP67 • Union nut: GD Zn/Ni RZ 52010285

with 5m (16 ft) cable • Body: PUR
• Cable: PVC
(1.1)
28
³40 (1.57)
A0024476
M12 90 degrees IP67 • Union nut: GD Zn/Ni RM 71114212

(self-terminated connection • Body: PBT
at M12 plug) • Seal: NBR
28
(1.1)
(1.38)
35
20 (0.79)
A0024478
M12 90 degrees IP69 2) • Union nut: 316L RW 52024216

with 5m (16 ft) cable (1.4435)
(terminated at one end) • Body and cable:
PVC and PUR
(1.1)
28
³40 (1.57)
A0024477
1) Product Configurator, order code for "Enclosed accessories"

2) Designation of the IP protection class according to DIN EN 60529. Previous designation "IP69K" according
to DIN 40050 Part 9 is no longer valid (standard withdrawn on November 1, 2012). The tests required by
both standards are identical.
30 Endress+Hauser
Cerabar PMC11, PMC21, PMP11, PMP21, PMP23 Technical data
12 Technical data
12.1 Input
12.1.1 Measured variable
Measured process variable

• PMC11: gauge pressure
• PMP11: gauge pressure
• PMC21: gauge pressure or absolute pressure
Calculated process variable

Pressure
12.1.2 Measuring range
Ceramic process isolating diaphragm
Sensor Device Maximum Lowest MWP OPL Factory settings 2) Option 3)

Sensor measuring range calibratable
span 1)
lower (LRL) upper (URL)
[bar (psi)] [bar (psi)] [bar (psi)] [bar (psi)] [bar (psi)]
Devices for gauge pressure measurement

4)
100 mbar (1.5 psi) PMC21 –0.1 (–1.5) +0.1 (+1.5) 0.02 (0.3) 2.7 (40.5) 4 (60) 0 to 100 mbar (0 to 1.5 psi) 1C
5)
250 mbar (4 psi) PMC21 –0.25 (–4) +0.25 (+4) 0.05 (1) 3.3 (49.5) 5 (75) 0 to 250 mbar (0 to 4 psi) 1E
6)
400 mbar (6 psi) PMC11 –0.4 (–6) +0.4 (+6) 0.08 (1.2) 5.3 (79.5) 8 (120) 0 to 400 mbar (0 to 6 psi) 1F
PMC21
6)
1 bar (15 psi) PMC11 –1 (–15) +1 (+15) 0.2 (3) 6.7 (100.5) 10 (150) 0 to 1 bar (0 to 15 psi) 1H
PMC21
6)
2 bar (30 psi) PMC11 –1 (–15) +2 (+30) 0.4 (0.6) 12 (180) 18 (270) 0 to 2 bar (0 to 30 psi) 1K
PMC21
6)
4 bar (60 psi) PMC11 –1 (–15) +4 (+60) 0.8 (1.2) 16.7 (250.5) 25 (375) 0 to 4 bar (0 to 60 psi) 1M
PMC21
6)
6 bar (90 psi) PMC11 –1 (–15) +6 (+90) 2.4 (36) 26.7 (400.5) 40 (600) 0 to 6 bar (0 to 90 psi) 1N
PMC21
6)
10 bar (150 psi) PMC11 –1 (–15) +10 (+150) 2 (30) 26.7 (400.5) 40 (600) 0 to 10 bar (0 to 150 psi) 1P
PMC21
6)
16 bar (240 psi) PMC11 –1 (–15) +16 (+240) 6.4 (96) 40 (600) 60 (900) 0 to 16 bar (0 to 240 psi) 1Q
PMC21
6)
25 bar (375 psi) PMC11 –1 (–15) +25 (+375) 10 (150) 40 (600) 60 (900) 0 to 25 bar (0 to 375 psi) 1R
PMC21
6)
40 bar (600 psi) PMC11 –1 (–15) +40 (+600) 8 (120) 40 (600) 60 (900) 0 to 40 bar (0 to 600 psi) 1S
PMC21
Endress+Hauser 31
Technical data Cerabar PMC11, PMC21, PMP11, PMP21, PMP23

span 1)
Devices for absolute pressure measurement
100 mbar (1.5 psi) 6) PMC21 0 +0.1 (+1.5) 0.1 (1.5) 2.7 (40.5) 4 (60) 0 to 100 mbar (0 to 1.5 psi) 2C
6)
250 mbar (4 psi) PMC21 0 +0.25 (+4) 0.25 (4) 3.3 (49.5) 5 (75) 0 to 250 mbar (0 to 4 psi) 2E
6)
400 mbar (6 psi) PMC21 0 +0.4 (+6) 0.4 (6) 5.3 (79.5) 8 (120) 0 to 400 mbar (0 to 6 psi) 2F
6)
1 bar (15 psi) PMC21 0 +1 (+15) 0.4 (6) 6.7 (100.5) 10 (150) 0 to 1 bar (0 to 15 psi) 2H
6)
2 bar (30 psi) PMC21 0 +2 (+30) 0.4 (0.6) 12 (180) 18 (270) 0 to 2 bar (0 to 30 psi) 2K
6)
4 bar (60 psi) PMC21 0 +4 (+60) 0.8 (1.2) 16.7 (250.5) 25 (375) 0 to 4 bar (0 to 60 psi) 2M
6)
10 bar (150 psi) PMC21 0 +10 (+150) 2 (30) 26.7 (400.5) 40 (600) 0 to 10 bar (0 to 150 psi) 2P
6)
40 bar (600 psi) PMC21 0 +40 (+600) 8 (120) 40 (600) 60 (900) 0 to 40 bar (0 to 600 psi) 2S
1) Highest turn down that can be set at the factory: 5:1. The turn down is preset and cannot be changed.
2) Other measuring ranges (e.g. –1 to +5 bar (–15 to 75 psi)) can be ordered with customer-specific settings (see the Product Configurator, order
code for "Calibration; Unit" option "J"). It is possible to invert the output signal (LRV = 20 mA; URV = 4 mA). Prerequisite: URV < LRV
3) Product Configurator, order code for "Sensor range"
4) Vacuum resistance: 0.7 bar (10.5 psi) abs
6) Vacuum resistance: 0 bar (0 psi) abs
Maximum turn down which can be ordered for absolute pressure and gauge pressure
sensors
• 6 bar (90 psi), 16 bar (240 psi), 25 bar (375 psi): TD 1:1 to TD 2.5:1
• All other measuring ranges: TD 1:1 to TD 5:1
• 100 mbar (1.5 psi), 250 mbar (4 psi), 400 mbar (6 psi): TD 1:1
• 1 bar (15 psi): TD 1:1 to TD 2.5:1
• All other measuring ranges: TD 1:1 to TD 5:1
32 Endress+Hauser
Metal process isolating diaphragm

span 1)

4)
400 mbar (6 psi) PMP11 –0.4 (–6) +0.4 (+6) 0.4 (6) 1 (15) 1.6 (24) 0 to 400 mbar (0 to 6 psi) 1F
PMP21
PMP23
1 bar (15 psi) 4) PMP11 –1 (–15) +1 (+15) 0.4 (6) 2.7 (40.5) 4 (60) 0 to 1 bar (0 to 15 psi) 1H
PMP21
PMP23
2 bar (30 psi) 4) PMP11 –1 (–15) +2 (+30) 0.4 (6) 6.7 (100.5) 10 (150) 0 to 2 bar (0 to 30 psi) 1K
PMP21
PMP23
4 bar (60 psi) 4) PMP11 –1 (–15) +4 (+60) 0.8 (12) 10.7 (160.5) 16 (240) 0 to 4 bar (0 to 60 psi) 1M
PMP21
PMP23
6 bar (90 psi) 4) PMP11 –1 (–15) +6 (+90) 2.4 (36) 16 (240) 24 (360) 0 to 6 bar (0 to 90 psi) 1N
PMP21
PMP23
10 bar (150 psi) 4) PMP11 –1 (–15) +10 (+150) 2 (30) 25 (375) 40 (600) 0 to 10 bar (0 to 150 psi) 1P
PMP21
PMP23
16 bar (240 psi) 4) PMP11 –1 (–15) +16 (+240) 5 (75) 25 (375) 64 (960) 0 to 16 bar (0 to 240 psi) 1Q
PMP21
PMP23
25 bar (375 psi) 4) PMP11 –1 (–15) +25 (+375) 5 (75) 25 (375) 100 (1500) 0 to 25 bar (0 to 375 psi) 1R
PMP21
PMP23
40 bar (600 psi) 4) PMP11 –1 (–15) +40 (+600) 8 (120) 100 (1500) 160 (2400) 0 to 40 bar (0 to 600 psi) 1S
PMP21
PMP23
100 bar (1 500 psi) 4) PMP21 –1 (–15) +100 (+1500) 20 (300) 100 (1500) 160 (2400) 0 to 100 bar (0 to 1 500 psi) 1U
4)
400 bar (6 000 psi) PMP21 –1 (–15) +400 (+6000) 80 (1200) 400 (6000) 600 (9000) 0 to 400 bar (0 to 6 000 psi) 1W
Endress+Hauser 33

span 1)
400 mbar (6 psi) 4) PMP21 0 (0) 0.4 (+6) 0.4 (6) 1 (15) 1.6 (24) 0 to 400 mbar (0 to 6 psi) 2F
PMP23
1 bar (15 psi) 4) PMP21 0 (0) 1 (+15) 0.4 (6) 2.7 (40.5) 4 (60) 0 to 1 bar (0 to 15 psi) 2H
PMP23
2 bar (30 psi) 4) PMP21 0 (0) 2 (+30) 0.4 (6) 6.7 (100.5) 10 (150) 0 to 2 bar (0 to 30 psi) 2K
PMP23
4 bar (60 psi) 4) PMP21 0 (0) 4 (+60) 0.8 (12) 10.7 (160.5) 16 (240) 0 to 4 bar (0 to 60 psi) 2M
PMP23
10 bar (150 psi) 4) PMP21 0 (0) 10 (+150) 2 (30) 25 (375) 40 (600) 0 to 10 bar (0 to 150 psi) 2P
PMP23
40 bar (600 psi) 4) PMP21 0 (0) +40 (+600) 8 (120) 100 (1500) 160 (2400) 0 to 40 bar (0 to 600 psi) 2S
PMP23
100 bar (1 500 psi) 4) PMP21 0 (0) +100 (+1500) 20 (300) 100 (1500) 160 (2400) 0 to 100 bar (0 to 1 500 psi) 2U
4)
400 bar (6 000 psi) PMP21 0 (0) +400 (+6000) 80 (1200) 400 (6000) 600 (9000) 0 to 400 bar (0 to 6 000 psi) 2W
1) Highest turn down that can be set at the factory: 5:1. The turn down is preset and cannot be changed.
2) Other measuring ranges (e.g. –1 to +5 bar (–15 to 75 psi)) can be ordered with customer-specific settings (see the Product Configurator, order
code for "Calibration; Unit" option "J"). It is possible to invert the output signal (LRV = 20 mA; URV = 4 mA). Prerequisite: URV < LRV
3) Product Configurator, order code for "Sensor range"
Maximum turn down which can be ordered for absolute pressure and gauge pressure
sensors
Device Range 400 mbar (6 psi) 1 bar (15 psi) 2 bar (30 psi)
6 bar (90 psi) 4 bar (60 psi)
16 bar (240 psi) 10 bar (150 psi)
25 to 400 bar (375 to 6 000 psi)
25 to 40 bar (375 to 600 psi)
PMP11 0.5% TD 1:1 TD 1:1 to TD 2.5:1 TD 1:1 to TD 5:1
34 Endress+Hauser
12.2 Output
12.2.1 Output signal
Description Option 1)
4 to 20 mA (2-wire) 1
PMC11: 0 to 10 V output (3-wire) 2

PMP11: 0 to 10 V output (3-wire)
1) Product Configurator, order code for "Output"
12.2.2 Signal range 4 to 20 mA

3.8 mA to 20.5 mA
12.2.3 Load (for 4 to 20 mA devices )

In order to guarantee sufficient terminal voltage in two-wire devices, a maximum load
resistance RL (including line resistance) must not be exceeded, depending on the supply
voltage UB of the supply unit.
R L max
[W ]
1068
614 2 R L max £ U B - 6.5V

22mA
10 20 30 UB
[V]
1
A0029452
1 Power supply 10 to 30 V DC
2 RLmax maximum load resistance
UB Supply voltage
12.2.4 Load resistance (for 0 to 10 V devices)

The load resistance must be ≥ 5 [kΩ].
12.2.5 Signal on alarm 4 to 20 mA

The response of the output to error is regulated in accordance with NAMUR NE43.
Factory setting MAX alarm: >21 mA
alarm current
Device Description Option
PMC21 Adjusted min. alarm current IA 1)

PMP21
PMP23
1) Product Configurator order code for "Service"
Endress+Hauser 35
12.2.6 Dead time, time constant

Presentation of the dead time and the time constant:
I
100 %
90 %
63 %
t1 t2 t
t3
A0019786
12.2.7 Dynamic behavior
Analog electronics
Dead time (t1) [ms] Time constant (T63), t2 [ms] Time constant (T90), t3 [ms]
6 ms 10 ms 15 ms
36 Endress+Hauser
12.3 Performance characteristics of ceramic process

isolating diaphragm
12.3.1 Reference operating conditions

• As per IEC 60770
• Ambient temperature TA = constant, in the range of:+21 to +33 °C (+70 to +91 °F)
• Humidity φ = constant, in the range of 5 to 80 % rH
• Ambient pressure pA = constant, in the range of:860 to 1 060 mbar (12.47 to 15.37 psi)
• Position of measuring cell = constant, in range: horizontal ±1° (see also "Influence of the
installation position" section →  16)
• Zero based span
• Material of process isolating diaphragm: Al2O3 (aluminum-oxide ceramic, Ceraphire®)
• Supply voltage: 24 V DC ±3 V DC
• Load: 320 Ω (at 4 to 20 mA output)
12.3.2 Measuring uncertainty for small absolute pressure measuring

ranges
The smallest extended uncertainty of measurement that can delivered by our
standards is:
• in range 1 to 30 mbar (0.0145 to 0.435 psi): 0.4 % of reading
• in range < 1 mbar (0.0145 psi): 1 % of reading.
12.3.3 Influence of the installation position

→  16
12.3.4 Resolution
Current output: min. 1.6 μA
12.3.5 Reference accuracy

The reference accuracy contains the non-linearity [DIN EN 61298-2 3.11] including the
pressure hysteresis [DIN EN 61298-23.13] and non-repeatability [DIN EN 61298-2 3.11]
in accordance with the limit point method as per [DIN EN 60770].
Device % of the calibrated span to the maximum turn down
Reference accuracy Non-linearity 1) Non-repeatability

2)
PMC11 ±0.5 ±0.1 ±0.1
PMC21 ±0.3 ±0.1 ±0.1
1) The non-linearity for the 40 bar (600 psi) sensor can be up to ± 0.15% of the calibrated span up to the
maximum turn down.
2) For devices with 0 to 10 V output, a non-linearity of up to max. 0.3 V can occur for signal values below
0.03 V.
Endress+Hauser 37
Overview of the turn down ranges →  32
Measuring ranges Turn down Device % of URL
100 mbar (1.5 psi)to 1:1 to TD 5:1 PMC11 ±0.5

40 bar (600 psi)
PMC21 ±0.3 1)
1) For the 100 mbar (1.5 psi) and 250 mbar (4 psi) measuring ranges, the following applies: In the event of
heat effects on the initial reference conditions, an additional deviation of max. 0.3 mbar (4.5 psi) from the
zero point or the output span is possible.
12.3.6 Thermal change of the zero output and the output span
Measuring cell –20 to +85 °C (–4 to +185 °F) –40 to –20 °C (–40 to –4 °F)
+85 to +100 °C (+185 to +212 °F)
% of URL for TD 1:1
<1 bar (15 psi) <1 <1.2
≥ 1 bar (15 psi) <0.8 <1
12.3.7 Long-term stability
1 year 5 years 8 years
% of URL
±0.2 ±0.4 ±0.45
12.3.8 Switch-on time

≤2 s (For small measuring ranges, pay attention to the thermal compensation effects.)
38 Endress+Hauser
12.4 Performance characteristics of metallic process

isolating diaphragm
12.4.1 Reference operating conditions

• As per IEC 60770
• Ambient temperature TA = constant, in the range of:+21 to +33 °C (+70 to +91 °F)
• Humidity φ = constant, in the range of 5 to 80 % rH
• Ambient pressure pA = constant, in the range of:860 to 1 060 mbar (12.47 to 15.37 psi)
• Position of measuring cell = constant, in range: horizontal ±1° (see also "Influence of the
installation position" section →  16)
• Zero based span
• Process isolating diaphragm material: AISI 316L (1.4435)
• Filling oil: NSF-H1 synthetic oil in accordance with FDA 21 CFR 178.3570
• Supply voltage: 24 V DC ±3 V DC
• Load: 320 Ω (at 4 to 20 mA output)
12.4.2 Measuring uncertainty for small absolute pressure measuring

ranges
The smallest extended uncertainty of measurement that can delivered by our
standards is:
• in range 1 to 30 mbar (0.0145 to 0.435 psi): 0.4 % of reading
• in range < 1 mbar (0.0145 psi): 1 % of reading.
12.4.3 Influence of the installation position

→  16
12.4.4 Resolution
Current output: min. 1.6 μA
12.4.5 Reference accuracy

The reference accuracy contains the non-linearity [DIN EN 61298-2 3.11] including the
pressure hysteresis [DIN EN 61298-23.13] and non-repeatability [DIN EN 61298-2 3.11]
in accordance with the limit point method as per [DIN EN 60770].
Device % of the calibrated span to the maximum turn down
Reference accuracy Non-linearity Non-repeatability

1)
PMP11 ±0.5 ±0.1 ±0.1
PMP21 ±0.3 ±0.1 ±0.1
PMP23 ±0.3 ±0.1 ±0.1
1) For devices with 0 to 10 V output, a non-linearity of up to max. 0.3 V can occur for signal values below
0.015 V.
Overview of the turn down ranges →  34
Endress+Hauser 39
12.4.6 Thermal change of the zero output and the output span
PMP11, PMP21
Measuring cell –20 to +85 °C (–4 to +185 °F) –20 to –40 °C (–4 to –40 °F)
+85 to +100 °C (+185 to +212 °F)
% of the calibrated span for TD 1:1
<1 bar (15 psi) <1 <1.2
≥ 1 bar (15 psi) <0.8 <1
PMP23
Measuring cell –10 to +85 °C (+14 to +185 °F) +85 to +100 °C (+185 to +212 °F)
% of the calibrated span for TD 1:1
<1 bar (15 psi) <1 <1.2
≥ 1 bar (15 psi) <0.8 <1
12.4.7 Long-term stability
1 year 5 years 8 years
% of URL
±0.2 ±0.4 ±0.45
12.4.8 Switch-on time

≤2 s
40 Endress+Hauser
12.5 Environment
12.5.1 Ambient temperature range
Device Ambient temperature range 1)
PMC11 –40 to +70 °C (–40 to +158 °F)

PMP11
PMC21 –40 to +85 °C (–40 to +185 °F)

PMP21
PMP23
PMC21 Devices for hazardous areas: –40 to +70 °C (–40 to +158 °F)
PMP21
PMP23
1) Exception: the following cable is designed for an operating temperature range of

–25 to +70 °C (–13 to +158 °F): Product Configurator order code for "Accessory enclosed", option "RZ".
12.5.2 Storage temperature range

–40 to +85 °C (–40 to +185 °F)
12.5.3 Climate class
Device Climate class Note
PMP23 Class 4K4H Air temperature: –20 to +55 °C (–4 to +131 °F),
relative humidity: 4 to 100 %
satisfied according to DIN EN 60721-3-4 (condensation is possible)
PMC11 Class 3K5 Air temperature: –5 to +45 °C (+23 to +113 °F),

PMP11 relative humidity: 4 to 95 %
PMC21 satisfied according to IEC 721-3-3 (condensation not possible)
PMP21
12.5.4 Degree of protection
Device Connection Climate class Option 1)
PMP21 Cable5 m (16 ft) IP66/68 2) NEMA type 4X/6P enclosure A

PMP21
PMP23
PMP21 Cable10 m (33 ft) IP66/68 2) NEMA type 4X/6P enclosure B

PMP21
PMP23
PMP21 Cable25 m (82 ft) IP66/68 2) NEMA type 4X/6P enclosure C

PMP21
PMP23
PMC11 M12 plug IP65 NEMA type 4X enclosure L

PMP11
PMC21 M12 plug IP65/67 NEMA type 4X enclosure M

PMP21
PMP23
PMP23 M12 plug made of metal IP66/69 3) NEMA type 4X enclosure N
Endress+Hauser 41
Device Connection Climate class Option 1)
PMC11 Valve plug ISO4400 M16 IP65 NEMA type 4X enclosure U

PMP11
PMC21
PMP21
PMP23
PMC11 Valve plug ISO4400 NPT ½ IP65 NEMA type 4X enclosure V

PMP11
PMC21
PMP21
PMP23
1) Product Configurator, order code for "Electrical connection"

2) IP 68 (1.83m H2O for 24 h)
3) Designation of the IP protection class according to DIN EN 60529. Previous designation "IP69K" according
to DIN 40050 Part 9 is no longer valid (standard withdrawn on November 1, 2012). The tests required by
both standards are identical.
12.5.5 Vibration resistance
Test standard Vibration resistance
IEC 60068-2-64:2008 Guaranteed for 5 to 2000Hz: 0.05g2/Hz
12.5.6 Electromagnetic compatibility

• Interference emission as per EN 61326-1 equipment B
• Interference immunity as per EN 61326-1 (industrial environment)
• NAMUR recommendation EMC (NE21)
• Maximum deviation: 1.5% for TD 1:1
For more details, refer to the Declaration of Conformity.
42 Endress+Hauser
12.6 Process
12.6.1 Process temperature range for devices with ceramic process

isolating diaphragm
Device Process temperature range
PMC11 –25 to +85 °C (–13 to +185 °F)
PMC21 –25 to +100 °C (–13 to +212 °F)
PMC21 for oxygen applications –10 to +60 °C (+14 to +140 °F)
• For saturated steam applications, use a device with a metal process isolating diaphragm,
or provide a siphon for temperature isolation when installing.
• Pay attention to the process temperature range of the seal. See also the following table.
Seal Notes Process temperature range Option
FKM - –20 to +100 °C (–4 to +212 °F) A 1)
FKM Cleaned for oxygen service –10 to +60 °C (+14 to +140 °F) A 1) and HB 2)
EPDM 70 - –25 to +100 °C (–13 to +212 °F) J 1)
1) Product Configurator, order code for "Seal"

2) Product Configurator, order code for "Service"
Applications with changes in temperature

Frequent extreme changes in temperatures can temporarily cause measuring errors.
Temperature compensation takes place after a few minutes. Internal temperature
compensation is faster the smaller the change in temperature and the longer the time
interval.
For further information please contact your local Endress+Hauser Sales Center.
12.6.2 Process temperature range for devices with metallic process

isolating diaphragm
Device Process temperature range
PMP11 –25 to +85 °C (–13 to +185 °F)
PMP21 –40 to +100 °C (–40 to +212 °F)
PMP23 –10 to +100 °C (+14 to +212 °F)
PMP23 At +135°C (+275 °F) for a maximum of one hour (device in operation but not within
Sterilization in place (SIP) measuring specification)
Applications with changes in temperature

Frequent extreme changes in temperatures can temporarily cause measuring errors.
Internal temperature compensation is faster the smaller the change in temperature and
the longer the time interval.
For further information please contact your local Endress+Hauser Sales Center.
Endress+Hauser 43
12.6.3 Pressure specifications

LWARNING
The maximum pressure for the measuring device depends on the lowest-rated
element with regard to pressure.
‣ For pressure specifications, see the "Measuring range" section and "Mechanical
construction" section in the Technical Information.
‣ The Pressure Equipment Directive (2014/68/EU) uses the abbreviation "PS". The
abbreviation "PS" corresponds to the MWP (maximum working pressure) of the
measuring device.
‣ MWP (maximum working pressure): The MWP (maximum working pressure) is
specified on the nameplate. This value is based on a reference temperature of
+20 °C (+68 °F) and may be applied to the device for an unlimited period of time.
Observe the temperature dependency of the MWP.
‣ OPL (over pressure limit): The test pressure corresponds to the over pressure limit of
the sensor and may only be applied temporarily to ensure that the measurement is
within the specifications and no permanent damage develops. In the case of sensor
range and process connections where the over pressure limit (OPL) of the process
connection is smaller than the nominal value of the sensor, the device is set at the
factory, at the very maximum, to the OPL value of the process connection. If you want
to use the entire sensor range, select a process connection with a higher OPL value.
‣ Oxygen applications: In oxygen applications, the values for "pmax and Tmax for oxygen
applications may not be exceeded .
‣ Devices with ceramic process isolating diaphragm: avoid steam hammering! Steam
hammering can cause zero point drifts. Recommendation: Residue (water droplets or
condensation) may remain on the process isolating diaphragm following CIP cleaning
and can result in local steam hammering the next time steam cleaning takes place. In
practice, drying the process isolating diaphragm (e.g. by blowing) has proved to prevent
steam hammering.
44 Endress+Hauser
Cerabar PMC11, PMC21, PMP11, PMP21, PMP23 Index
Index
A
Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
C
CE mark (declaration of conformity) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
D
Declaration of Conformity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Designated use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
E
Exterior cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
F
Field of application
Residual risks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
M
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
N
Nameplate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
O
Operational safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
P
Product safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
R
Repair concept . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
S
Safety instructions
Basic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Safety Instructions (XA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Staff
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
T
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
U
Use of the measuring device
see Designated use
Use of the measuring devices
Borderline cases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Incorrect use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
W
Workplace safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Endress+Hauser 45
*71353696*
71353696
www.addresses.endress.com
Instruction Leaflet
Montageanweisung
Notice d’installation
Instrucciones de montaje
Istruzioni per il montaggio
11/17 IL03802003Z 安装说明
(AWA1150-1890) И я а
P1…/E(+SVB) en Electric current! Danger to life!

Only skilled or instructed persons may
P1…/EA/SVB carry out the following operations.
de Lebensgefahr durch elektrischen Strom!
P1…/EZ Nur Elektrofachkräfte und elektrotechnisch
unterwiesene Personen dürfen die im Folgenden
beschriebenen Arbeiten ausführen.
fr Tension électrique dangereuse !
Seules les personnes qualifiées et averties doivent
exécuter les travaux ci-après.
ON es ¡Corriente eléctrica! ¡Peligro de muerte!
El trabajo a continuación descrito debe ser realizado
OFF
por personas cualificadas y advertidas.
it Tensione elettrica: Pericolo di morte!
Solo persone abilitate e qualificate possono eseguire
le operazioni di seguito riportate.
zh 触电危险！
P1-…/E(EZ) P1…/EA/SVB
只允许专业人员和受过专业训练的人员进行
下列工作。
d
b
ru Э !О а я !
Т и и и и и и
d = 4 - 8 mm (d = 0.16 - 0.31“) и я и ии.
≦3x b + d ≦ 47 mm (b + d ≦ 1.85“)
P1…/E
P1…/EA/SVB(-SW) a
P1…/E + SVB(-SW)-T0 a
H-P1(4) P1 10.5 mm (0.41")
H-P1(4) HI11-P1/P3 7.5 mm (0.3")
UV-T0 9 mm (0.35")
2 x ST 2.2 x 6.5
0.6 Nm (5.31 lb-in)
HI11-P1/P3
0.5 - 1.5 mm2 1 Nm
2
(8.85 lb-in)
0.75 - 2.5 mm
≦ 5 mm
H-P1(4) AWG 18 - AWG 14
(≦ 0.2”)
UV-T0
P1…
Fig. 1 1 x 1.0 - 4.0 mm2 1.6 Nm
AE-T0
2 x 1.0 - 4.0 mm2 (14.16 lb-in)
1 x 1.5 - 6.0 mm2
2 x 1.5 - 6.0 mm2
2 x ST 2.9 x 16 ZFS(NT)…T0 AWG 14 - AWG 8
1 Nm (8.85 lb-in)
75 °C Cu wire only
ON ON
2 x ST 2.9 x 16 UL-File: E 36 332

OFF
1 Nm (8.85 lb-in) OFF Suitable For Use As Motor Disconnecting Means
With Suffix SVB
Break All Lines
FS908-T0
L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3
KNB-T0 1 3 5 1 3 5 N
0.6 Nm KNB-RT-T0 2 4 6 2 4 6 N
SVB-T0 T1 T2 T3 T1 T2 T3
(5.31 lb-in) 0.6 Nm SVB-SW-T0
I
0
I
0
(5.31 lb-in) P1… P1…/N

L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3
1 3 5 13 21 1 3 5 N 13 21
2 4 6 14 22 2 4 6 N 14 22
T1 T2 T3 T1 T2 T3
I I
0 0
P1…/HI11 P1…/N/HI11
L1 L2 L3
1 3 5 13 21 31 43
2 4 6 14 22 32 44
T1 T2 T3
I
0
Emergency On Call Service: Local representative (www.eaton.eu/aftersales) or +49 (0) 180 5 223822 (de, en) 1/2
P1…/EZ P1…/EZ/OFS
P1…/E + EZ-P1
≦ 5 mm ≦ 5 mm
(≦ 0.2”) (≦ 0.2”)
AE (+ 9 mm)-T0 AE (+ 9 mm)-T0
2 x ST 2.9 x 13
1.3 Nm (11.50 lb-in)
2 x ST 2.9 x 13
1.3 Nm (11.50 lb-in)
ON
Fig. 2 Fig. 2
OFF
0.6 Nm
0.6 Nm (5.31 lb-in)
(5.31 lb-in)
P1…/E…
N-P1E
HI11-P1/P3E
N-P1E
(HI11-P1/P3E) HI11-P1/P3E
(N-P1E) 0.6 Nm
(5.31 lb-in)
2
0.6 Nm
11/17 IL03802003Z
(5.31 lb-in) ON
2 OFF
3.1 - 3.5 mm Fig. 2

(0.12 - 0.14”) 3.2 mm (0.13”)
10 -11 mm
12.5 mm
(0.39 - 0.43”)
(0.49”)
30 mm (1.18”)
22.3 mm+0.4
0
mm
12.2 mm 0.91” +0.02”

0
(0.48”)
en Components drawn in broken lines are not included in the scope of delivery.
de Gestrichelt gezeichnete Komponenten gehören nicht zum Lieferumfang.
fr Les éléments représentés en pointillés ne font pas partie de la fourniture.
es Los componentes dibujados en líneas discontinuas no están incluídos en el suministro.
it Gil apparechi contrassegnati con un tratteggio con fanno parte della fornitura.
zh
ru З и я и.
2/2 Emergency On Call Service: Local representative (www.eaton.eu/aftersales) or +49 (0) 180 5 223822 (de, en)
Eaton Industries GmbH, Hein-Moeller-Straße 7-11, 53115 Bonn, Germany 11/17 IL03802003Z ETN
© 2000 by Eaton Industries GmbH, www.eaton.eu/documentation All Rights Reserved Printed in Great Britain (11/17)
Instruction manual
Mini CORI-FLOW
Compact Coriolis Mass Flow
Meters/Controllers for Liquids and Gases
Doc nr.: 9.17.050J Date: 21-12-2015
ATTENTION
Please read this instruction manual carefully before installing and operating the instrument.
Not following the guidelines could result in personal injury and/or damage to the equipment.
®
BRONKHORST
SCOPE OF THIS MANUAL

This manual covers the general part of digital mini CORI-FLOW mass flow instruments for
gases and liquids. It treats the general instructions needed for the instruments.
More information can be found in other documents.
Mini CORI-FLOW instruments have modular instruction manuals consisting of:
- Short form instruction manual mini CORI-FLOW (document nr. 9.17.052)
- General instructions mini CORI-FLOW (document nr. 9.17.050)
- Operation instructions digital instruments (document nr. 9.17.023)
- Fieldbus/interface description:
- FLOW-BUS Interface (document nr. 9.17.024)
- PROFIBUS-DP Interface (document nr. 9.17.025)
- DeviceNet Interface (document nr. 9.17.026)
- RS232 Interface with FLOW-BUS protocol (document nr. 9.17.027)
- Modbus interface (document nr. 9.17.035)
page 2 9.17.050
®
BRONKHORST
Even though care has been taken in the preparation and

publication of the contents of this manual, we do not
assume legal or other liability for any inaccuracy,
mistake, mis-statement or any other error of whatsoever
nature contained herein. The material in this manual is
for information purposes only, and is subject to change
without notice.
Warranty
The products of Bronkhorst® are warranted against
defects in material and workmanship for a period of
three years from the date of shipment, provided they are
used in accordance with the ordering specifications
and the instructions in this manual and that they are not
subjected to abuse, physical damage or
contamination. Products that do not operate properly
during this period may be repaired or replaced at no
charge. Repairs are normally warranted for one year or
the balance of the original warranty, whichever is the
longer.
See also paragraph 9 of the Conditions of sales.
The warranty includes all initial and latent defects,

random failures, and undeterminable internal causes.
It excludes failures and damage caused by the

customer, such as contamination, improper electrical
hook-up, physical shock etc.
Re-conditioning of products primarily returned for

warranty service that is partly or wholly judged non-
warranty may be charged for.
Bronkhorst High-Tech B.V. prepays outgoing freight

charges when any party of the service is performed
under warranty, unless otherwise agreed upon
beforehand. However, if the product has been returned
collect to Bronkhorst High-Tech B.V., these costs are
added to the repair invoice. Import and/or export
charges, foreign shipping methods/carriers are paid for
by the customer.
9.17.050 page 3
®
BRONKHORST
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1 INTRODUCTION .............................................................................................................................................. 6
1.1 General description ................................................................................................................................... 6
1.1.1 Gas / Liquid flow................................................................................................................................. 6
1.1.2 Housing .............................................................................................................................................. 6
1.1.3 Valves ................................................................................................................................................ 7
1.1.4 Badger Meter Valves .......................................................................................................................... 9
1.1.5 Liquid dosing systems with pumps................................................................................................... 10
1.2 Sensor measuring principle ..................................................................................................................... 11
1.2.1 Mini CORI-FLOW sensor ................................................................................................................. 11
1.3 Valve principles ....................................................................................................................................... 11
1.3.1 Solenoid valve .................................................................................................................................. 11
1.3.2 Vary-P valve ..................................................................................................................................... 11
1.3.3 Pilot operated valve .......................................................................................................................... 11
1.4 Software for physical properties of gases and liquids. ............................................................................ 12
1.5 (mini) Cori-Flow accuracy........................................................................................................................ 12
2 INSTALLATION .............................................................................................................................................. 16
2.1 Receipt of equipment .............................................................................................................................. 16
2.2 Return shipment ...................................................................................................................................... 16
2.3 Service .................................................................................................................................................... 16
2.4 Mounting instructions .............................................................................................................................. 17
2.4.1 Flow direction: .................................................................................................................................. 17
2.4.2 Base mounting: ................................................................................................................................ 17
2.4.3 Mounting position general: ............................................................................................................... 17
2.4.4 Mounting position (integrated) valve with purge connector: ............................................................. 17
2.4.5 Mounting position in pipe line for liquid applications: ....................................................................... 18
2.4.6 Liquid purging: .................................................................................................................................. 18
2.4.7 Mounting position in pipe line for gas applications: .......................................................................... 18
2.4.8 Gas purging:..................................................................................................................................... 19
2.4.9 Inlet bends and pipe support: ........................................................................................................... 19
2.4.10 Pipe line reducers: ........................................................................................................................... 19
2.4.11 Vibrations: ........................................................................................................................................ 19
2.4.12 Crosstalk: ......................................................................................................................................... 20
2.5 Notes for temperature considerations ..................................................................................................... 20
2.6 Fluid/gas connections .............................................................................................................................. 21
2.7 Piping....................................................................................................................................................... 21
2.8 Electrical connections .............................................................................................................................. 22
2.9 Pressure testing ...................................................................................................................................... 23
2.10 Supply pressure ................................................................................................................................... 23
2.11 System purging .................................................................................................................................... 23
2.12 Seals .................................................................................................................................................... 23
2.13 Equipment storage............................................................................................................................... 23
2.14 Electromagnetic compatibility .............................................................................................................. 24
2.15 Electro static discharge........................................................................................................................ 25
3 OPERATION .................................................................................................................................................. 25
3.1 General .................................................................................................................................................... 25
3.2 Power and warm-up ................................................................................................................................ 25
3.3 Start-up .................................................................................................................................................... 25
3.4 Zeroing .................................................................................................................................................... 26
3.4.1 What is zero-stability ? ..................................................................................................................... 26
3.4.2 Procedure for zeroing....................................................................................................................... 26
3.4.3 Zero-procedure information ............................................................................................................. 26
3.4.4 Alternatives for starting zero procedure ........................................................................................... 27
3.4.5 Zeroing with the Micro-switch........................................................................................................... 27
3.4.6 Zeroing through the digital communication ...................................................................................... 27
3.5 Operating conditions ............................................................................................................................... 28
3.6 Manual operation ..................................................................................................................................... 28
3.7 Analog operation ..................................................................................................................................... 28
3.8 BUS / digital operation ............................................................................................................................. 29
3.9 RS232 communication cable T-part ........................................................................................................ 30
4 MAINTENANCE ............................................................................................................................................. 31
4.1 General .................................................................................................................................................... 31
4.2 mini CORI-FLOW sensor ........................................................................................................................ 31
4.3 Controllers ............................................................................................................................................... 31
page 4 9.17.050
®
BRONKHORST
4.4 Control valves .......................................................................................................................................... 31

4.4.1 Solenoid valves ................................................................................................................................ 31
4.4.2 Vary-P valve ..................................................................................................................................... 31
4.4.3 Pilot operated valve .......................................................................................................................... 32
4.5 Kv-value calculation ................................................................................................................................. 32
4.5.1 For gases ......................................................................................................................................... 32
4.5.2 For Liquids ....................................................................................................................................... 33
4.6 Calibration procedure .............................................................................................................................. 34
4.7 Instrument re-ranging .............................................................................................................................. 35
4.8 Instrument filter settings .......................................................................................................................... 35
5 INTERFACE DESCRIPTION.......................................................................................................................... 36
6 TROUBLESHOOTING ................................................................................................................................... 36
6.1 General .................................................................................................................................................... 36
6.2 Calibration check ..................................................................................................................................... 36
6.3 Troubleshooting summary general .......................................................................................................... 37
9.17.050 page 5
®
BRONKHORST
1 INTRODUCTION
1.1 General description
1.1.1 Gas / Liquid flow

®
The Bronkhorst series mini CORI-FLOW mass-flow meter/controller for gases and liquids is an accurate
device for measuring gas and liquid flows up to 200 bara depending on body rating, virtually independent of
pressure and temperature changes. The mini CORI-FLOW is a real mass-flow meter/controller and measures
the flow in mass, it does not matter what the properties of the gases or liquids are. The system can be
completed with a control valve or a pump and flexible readout unit to measure and control gas and liquid flows.
Mini CORI-FLOW series are precise and compact Mass Flow Meters and Controllers, based on the Coriolis
measuring principle. Designed to cover the needs of the low flow market, there are 4 models to overlap flow
ranges from 5 g/h up to 300 kg/h (full scale values), each offering “multi-range” functionality: factory calibrated
ranges can be rescaled by the user, maintaining the original accuracy specs. The instruments are equipped
with a robust IP65 weatherproof housing.
Instruments of the mini CORI-FLOW series contain a uniquely shaped, single loop sensor tube, forming part of
an oscillating system. When a fluid flows through the tube, Coriolis forces cause a variable phase shift, which
is detected by sensors and fed into the integrally mounted pc-board. The resulting output signal is strictly
proportional to the real mass flow rate. Coriolis mass flow measurement is fast, accurate and inherently bi-
directional. The mini CORI-FLOW features density and temperature of the fluid as secondary outputs.
1.1.2 Housing
Each instrument housing style incorporates several provisions to comply with EMC requirements.
Also the instrument housing is a robust IP65 weatherproof housing.
Meter housing M12-M14 Meter housing M15 Controller housing

with metal seal valve
page 6 9.17.050
®
BRONKHORST
1.1.3 Valves
M12, M13 and M14 mini CORI-FLOW controllers are fitted with a fixed or modular valve.
The M15 mini CORI-FLOW controller can only be equipped with a modular valve.
Integrated valves for liquids and gases
For liquids the valve has an extra purge adaptor on top for de-gassing.
In case of a modular valve it is attached by means of a port connector.
Possible combinations:
Liquid Gas
C2I C0I, C1I

M12
F-033CI F-033CI
C2I C01, C1I

M13 C5I C5I
F-033CI F-033CI
C2I C0I, C1I

M14
F-033CI F-033CI
C2I C5I
C5I F-033CI
M15
F-033CI F-004AI
F-004AI F-012AI, F-013AI
Valves:
C2I valve C5I valve

Direct operating valve for liquids Direct operating valve for liquid/gas
(“open” sleeve) metal sealed with metal sealed.
purge connector. C5I valve = normally closed
C2I valve = normally closed
9.17.050 page 7
®
BRONKHORST
C0I / C1I valve F-033CI valve

Direct operating valve for gases Vary-P operating valve for liquid/gas
metal sealed elastomeric sealed
C0I valve = normally closed
C1I valve = normally open F-033CI valve = normally closed
F-004AI / BI valve F-012AI/F-013AI valve

Bellow valve for liquid/gas Pilot operated valve for gases elastomeric
elastomeric sealed sealed
F-004AI/BI valve = normally closed F-012AI/F-013AI valve = normally closed
page 8 9.17.050
®
BRONKHORST
1.1.4 Badger Meter Valves
For those special applications where the Bronkhorst valves do

not meet the specifications anymore we can use Badger Meter
valves as a good alternative.
Reasons for using an alternative valve could be requirements

for:
- Higher maximum pressure or delta-pressure
- Higher Kv-values
- Higher or lower temperatures
- Faster response time
- Metal sealed (e.g. for supercritical gases like CO2 or
ethylene)
Badger Meter offers a wide range and variety of valves. These

membrane valves are operated indirectly using an I/P-converter
with compressed air. The I/P-converter is connected to the controller output of the mini CORI-FLOW.
To be able to meet the quality and security standards Bronkhorst is used to, we will accept only those Badger
Meter valves which meet the “Bronkhorst Quality Norm”.
This norm includes certain predefined specifications to enable our production department to adjust, optimize
and test these valves if they were Bronkhorst valves.
Main items on this “Bronkhorst Quality Norm” are:

• Limit amount of models: RC200, ¼”, ½” and 1” types
• Special O-ring chambers in valve bodies for Swagelok RS adaptor types (no NPT)
• If no O-rings possible: adaptors welded to valve body
• Spindle seals: Kalrez compound 3035 (in stead of Teflon) for reduced emission
For operation interface:

• ABB TEIP11 I/P-converter: input signal 4-20 mA / output signal 0,2-1 bara
(or 0.4-2 bara)
• If not possible: Samson 3730-0 positioner
Please note that for proper functioning of the pump or valve the MFC needs to be adjusted electrically and also
needs to be provided with the right parameter settings. This will be taken care of in our factory.
For pump- or valve connections in the field after delivery, please contact your local sales representative.
9.17.050 page 9
®
BRONKHORST
1.1.5 Liquid dosing systems with pumps
In Bronkhorst liquid mass dosing systems Liqui-Flow or CORI-FLOW instruments control liquid mass flow
using a pump through a U/f converter. The pump is just used as an actuator to follow the controller to achieve
the wanted mass flow (setpoint). It is not used as a positioner as it normally is, using the standard pump control
software. Normally Bronkhorst will take care of all electrical and mechanical connections between the parts as
mentioned above are realized, as well as an optimization of the PID-control and a test on water/IPA (when
possible).
The analog controller output signal, which normally would be used to drive a proportional valve, is limited to
either 10 Vdc/15 Vdc and connected to the analog input signal of the pump drive.
Each Liquid Dosing System consists of a flow sensor with controlling function, a pump and all inter-connecting
material. A filter and check valve can be supplied on request. Furthermore, Bronkhorst will take care of
electrical and mechanical connection, testing and optimization including the PID-integrated controller.
In addition to the Bronkhorst Liquid Pump for small flow ranges, a complete series of pumps is available for
those applications which require higher flow rates, higher pressures, wide control ranges or aggressive fluids.
Further to operation in an analog mode, the system can also be used digitally with RS232 or with on-board
®
interface to PROFIBUS-DP , DeviceNet™, Modbus-RTU, or FLOW-BUS.
See picture below for schematic setup.
Please note that for proper functioning of the pump or valve the MFC needs to be adjusted electrically and also
needs to be provided with the right parameter settings. This will be taken care of in our factory.
For pump- or valve connections in the field after delivery, please contact your local sales representative.
page 10 9.17.050
®
BRONKHORST
1.2 Sensor measuring principle
1.2.1 Mini CORI-FLOW sensor
Mini CORI-FLOW mass flow meters/controllers operate according to the Coriolis principle.
The instrument can be used to simultaneously measure the mass flow, temperature and density.
When a fluid flows through a vibrating tube, Coriolis forces are generated which bend or twist the tube.
The extremely small tube displacements are detected by optimally positioned sensors and evaluated
electronically.
Since the measured phase shift of the sensor signals is proportional to the mass flow, the mini CORI-FLOW
measures the mass flow directly. The measurement principle is independent of the density, temperature,
viscosity, pressure, heat-capacity or conductivity. The tubes always vibrate at their natural frequency, which is a
function not only of the tube geometry and the tube material properties but also the mass of the fluid in the
vibrating tubes.
1.3 Valve principles

Control valves are not designed to provide positive shut-off, although some models have excellent capabilities
for this purpose.
It is recommended to install a separate shut-off valve in the line if required. Also pressure surges, as may
occur during system pressurisation must be avoided. The following models can be distinguished:
1.3.1 Solenoid valve
This is considered to be the standard (direct operated) control valve. In

general it is a normally closed solenoid valve. The plunger is lifted by the
force of the magnetic field of the coil. The orifice under the plunger is
Flow control removable for optimising the orifice diameter. Also a normally opened
valve solenoid valve is available.
1.3.2 Vary-P valve
For process conditions where up- and downstream pressure

varies much, a special type of valve, VARY-P has been designed.
This valve consists of two valves, a solenoid operated control
flow control pressure
valve and a fixed adjusted pressure compensation valve.
valve compensating
valve
1.3.3 Pilot operated valve
For high flow rates the pilot operated valve has been designed. A
solenoid driven control valve controls the pressure difference across a
pilot valve pressure piston, which lifts the main plunger.
compensating
valve
P1 P2
flow control valve
9.17.050 page 11
®
BRONKHORST
1.4 Software for physical properties of gases and liquids.

Bronkhorst has access to the physical properties of over 600 fluids in a database called FLUIDAT.
Application software, such as FLOW CALCULATIONS, enables the user to calculate properties, not only at
20°C / 1 atm but also at any temperature/pressure combination, both for gases and for liquids.
Apply to your distributor for more details about this software.
1.5 (mini) Cori-Flow accuracy

Zeroing of a (mini) Cori-Flow instrument is required each time process conditions have been changed.
What is zero-stability ?
Due to mechanical construction of the sensor tubes each (mini) Cori-Flow sensor will have a very small offset
signal, even when the mass flow is zero. This is called the zero-stability error and is specified for accuracy
separately for all Coriolis instruments. Main reason for this is the fact that this error can be (temporarily)
neutralized after performing a zero-action.
Immediately after zeroing, zero-stability error is 0%. However, it is allowed to move between a certain band
depending on the environment (process) and fluid conditions.
In ideal situations, where actual process conditions do not change, this error will remain the same.
See below for possible reasons of change of zero-stability. See also paragraph 3.4.1. to learn how to zero.
Zero-stability depends on the (mini) Cori-Flow model:
Model DN (mm) Zero-stability Nominal flow

M12 0.25 < 0.1 g/h 100 g/h
M13 0.5 < 0.2 g/h 1 kg/h
M14 1.3 < 6 g/h 10 kg/h
M15 3.12 < 50 g/h 100 kg/h
M53 1 < 10 g/h 5 kg/h
M54 2 < 50 g/h 50 kg/h
M55 4 < 100 g/h 500 kg/h
Nominal flow: mass flow rate of liquid at a pressure drop of approx. 1 bar and based on
reference conditions of water at approx. 20 °C
NOTE:
In practice zero-stability turns out to be better than the values in the table, but for calculation we will take worst
case values.
Accuracy
The accuracy of a (mini) Cori-Flow is either 0.2% reading for liquids or 0.5% reading for gases.
This specification is based on mass flow (e.g. g/h, kg/h, etc.). If the instrument will be used on volume flow
(e.g. l/h, ml/min, etc) this will introduce an extra inaccuracy, based on the density (measurement).
Process conditions
Each time process conditions have been changed significantly a (mini) Cori-Flow needs to be zeroed in order
to get rid of the offset error due to zero-stability. At least the very first time an instrument is used a zero
procedure will be required.
The zero-stability error will mainly change when one or more of the following items change significantly:
• Temperature (of fluid or environment)
• Pressure
• Density of fluid
• Vibrations working on instrument via environment
• Pulsation of supply pressure working on instrument
page 12 9.17.050
®
BRONKHORST
What changes are allowed ?

How many changes in quantity for certain process conditions are allowed without the need of a new zero
procedure for the (mini) Cori-Flow depends on the influence this will have on the mass in the tubes.
As soon as a fluid will be measured at its critical point, a small change in process conditions like temperature
or pressure can already result in a rapid increase or decrease of density and/or dynamic viscosity. This will also
influence the mass (flow) in the sensor tubes and therefore the zero stability. So please try to avoid phase
changes or almost phase changes.
E.g. CO2 and Ethylene have a large transition area (“no meat, no fish”). Experiences in practice turned out that
measuring (and even controlling) in such an area can be highly accurate.
So measuring in critical, or even supercritical area’s, is good possible with (mini) Cori-Flow. Inaccuracies are to
be expected when a phase change takes place. See also gas or liquid.
Temperature changes of several °C or pressure changes of several bar for e.g. Air when measuring at 20°C
and 5 bara will not be a problem. This will not affect density or dynamic viscosity that much.
However when measuring e.g. Ethylene at 10°C and 52 bara, a small increase of temperature or decrease of
pressure will already result in large changes of density and even phase change. This last example might need
a new zero procedure to get rid of offset errors due to zero stability.
Error visualization
+/- 0.05% repeatability
+ x % error (zero stability)
0%
- x % error (zero stability)

-> time
Temperature considerations
Effects on accuracy:
(Mini) Cori-Flow sensors do have an internal temperature measurement device for measuring fluid temperature
and compensation on mechanical changes of the sensor due to temperature changes.
9.17.050 page 13
®
BRONKHORST
Error calculation:
Total error = accuracy reading ± [(zero stab./flow)x100] [% reading]
Example 1:
error at 10 kg/h reading at M14 for a liquid (= ±0.2% of reading)
zero stability error of M14 < 6 g/h; calculate with 6 g/h
Total error = ±(0.2% + (6/10000 * 100))% = ±(0.2 + 0.06)% = ±0.26 % (= ± 26 g/h)
Example 2:
error at 500 g/h reading at M13 for gases (= ±0.5% of reading)
zero stability error of M13 < 0.2 g/h; calculate with 0.2 g/h
Total error = ± (0.5% + (0.2/500 * 100))% = ±(0.5 + 0.04)% = ±0.54 % (= ± 2.7 g/h)
Example 3:
Total error of M14 (at constant temperature)
Total error M14 up to 30 kg/h
4%
3% |0.2| %RD + |6| g/h
2%
Max. error [%RD]
1%
0%
0 5000 10000 15000 20000 25000 30000
-1%
-2%
-3%
-4%
Flow [g/h]
page 14 9.17.050
®
BRONKHORST
Gas and liquid

(mini) Cori-Flows can be used for gases and liquids.
In all instruments capable of density measurement (e.g. mini CORI-FLOW series) there will be an automatic
adjustment for change in density. CORI-FLOW M50-series however, cannot measure density.
For those instruments it is advisable to calibrate them on air for gases and on water for liquids.
Multi-range instrument
Thanks to extremely high linearity of the sensor, (mini) Cori-Flow instruments can be easily re-ranged to a
different full scale range (100% point). The analog output and the digital measured flow value will be scaled to
this FS 100% point.
E.g. An M13 can be used for a full scale between 50 g/h and 2000 g/h.
Switching between these ranges can be realized using fieldbus, E-8000, Bright module or RS232 interface.
There is free tooling software (FlowPlot) available for this purpose. Mini Cori-Flow instruments will get a
calibration certificate for all possible FS ranges. The actual FS of the instrument is set to a value wanted by the
customer and can be found on the gray sticker on the instrument.
Summary
In general: a (mini) Cori-Flow instrument is independent of physical properties.
Performing an auto-zero on actual conditions (with zero flow) before use will get rid of offsets in the sensor.
When these properties, like temperature, pressure, density and dynamic viscosity do not affect the mass in the
tube or the mechanical sensor construction to much, error due to zero-stability will be small.
Environment conditions are important to the mechanical behaviour of the sensor:

• Vibrations (of sensor, rack, pipes etc.) with frequencies or harmonics close to the sensor’s natural
frequency could result in errors in the measurement. Sensor oscillation frequencies vary from 90…450 Hz,
depending on the model.
• Pulsation of supply pressure may have negative influence on accuracy. Avoiding this is the best. Filtering is
an option for improvement.
• Turbulences in flow may add extra noise to the measured value. Especially with high flow of gases straight
pipes with lengths of 20..30 cm. at least are advisable for realizing a more undisturbed flow.
For other applications (e.g. liquids) inlets of about 10x inner diameter of tube are sufficient.
Smooth reducing from wide to small tubes is advisable. See below:
Optimal angle is approx. 7°
• Gas bubbles entrapped in liquids (and/or locked-up in sensor tube) give disturbances to flow
measurement, especially in the lower flow ranges. Try to avoid this and purge with high flow to remove
them.
• Fluid drops in gas flow (and/or locked-up in sensor tube) give disturbances to flow measurement,
especially in lower flow ranges. Try to avoid this and purge with high flow to remove them.
9.17.050 page 15
®
BRONKHORST
2 INSTALLATION
2.1 Receipt of equipment

Check the outside packing box for damage incurred during shipment. Should the packing box be damaged,
then the local carrier must be notified at once regarding his liability, if so required. At the same time a report
should be submitted to:
BRONKHORST HIGH-TECH B.V.
RUURLO HOLLAND
If applicable, otherwise contact your distributor.

Remove the envelope containing the packing list; carefully remove the equipment from the packing box.
Do not discard spare or replacement parts with the packing material and inspect the contents for damaged or
missing parts.
2.2 Return shipment

When returning material, always describe the problem and if possible the work to be done, in a covering letter.
It is absolutely required to notify the factory if toxic or dangerous fluids have been metered with the
instrument!
This to enable the factory to take sufficient precautionary measures to safe-guard the staff in their repair
department. Take proper care of packaging. If possible use the original packing box. Seal instrument in plastic
Contaminated instruments must be dispatched with a completely filled in 'declaration on
contamination form'.
Contaminated instruments without this declaration will not be accepted.
Note:
If the instruments have been used with toxic or dangerous fluids the customer should pre-clean the instrument.
Important:
Clearly note, on top of the package, the customer clearance number of Bronkhorst High-Tech B.V., namely:
NL818936514B01
If applicable, otherwise contact your distributor for local arrangements.
2.3 Service
If the equipment is not properly serviced, serious personal injury and/or damage to the equipment could be the
result. It is therefore important that servicing is performed by trained and qualified service personnel.
Bronkhorst High-Tech B.V. has a trained staff of servicemen available.
page 16 9.17.050
®
BRONKHORST
2.4 Mounting instructions
2.4.1 Flow direction:

Install the mini CORI-FLOW in accordance with the direction of the FLOW arrow.
The arrow for flow direction is indicated on the mini CORI-FLOW, between process
fittings.
2.4.2 Base mounting:

Mount the mini CORI-FLOW instrument, with screws in the body, to a rigid, stiff base body or heavy
mass on a vibration-free position, such as a wall, heavy rig or stable construction.
This is essential to achieve optimal accuracy with the mini CORI-FLOW instrument.
Examples: M1 M2 M3
®
If there is no firm, steady, vibration-free base available, Bronkhorst can offer a special mounting block
for achieving optimal accuracy with the mini CORI-FLOW instrument.
This mounting block has a mass and stiffness precisely tuned for the specific mini CORI-FLOW model
and can be used as a base. Please contact your local sales representative.
2.4.3 Mounting position general:

For gas and liquid mini CORI-FLOW meters can be mounted in any position for a proper measurement.
M4 M5 M6
2.4.4 Mounting position (integrated) valve with purge connector:

Only for mini CORI-FLOW instruments with (integrated) liquid valve with purge adaptor, mounting
position can be critical for a good quality of de-gassing.
M7 M8 M9
Gas bubbles might collect in sensor !

+ Prevent running dry !
9.17.050 page 17
®
BRONKHORST
2.4.5 Mounting position in pipe line for liquid applications:

For liquids, mount the mini CORI-FLOW at a level in the pipe where gas entrainment is not possible and
be certain that the mini CORI-FLOW is filled at all times during operation. Try to avoid gas accumulation
(in the sensor tube) at the highest point of a pipeline or in front of a control valve. Gas bubbles in the
sensor tube may result in measuring errors. If there is gas entrainment, make sure gas bubbles can
easily get out of the mini CORI-FLOW and piping.
M10 M11 M12
Prevent running dry!
M13 M14 M15
Gas bubbles might collect in sensor! Gas bubbles might collect in sensor! Gas bubbles might collect in sensor!
2.4.6 Liquid purging:

In order to remove gas bubbles during start-up, flushing with relatively high flow rate of liquid for some
minutes is recommended.
2.4.7 Mounting position in pipe line for gas applications:

For gases mount the mini CORI-FLOW at a level in the pipe line system where condensate can not
accumulate in the mini CORI-FLOW. Especially take care at the lower 3 situations at zero flow.
M16 M17 M18
M19 M20 M21
page 18 9.17.050
®
BRONKHORST
2.4.8 Gas purging:

In order to remove condensation drops during start-up, flushing with dry gas for some minutes with high
flow rate is recommended.
Leak tightness:
Verification of leaks is required prior starting up of the process.
2.4.9 Inlet bends and pipe support:

Avoid pipe bends too close to the mini CORI-FLOW inlet. This might cause turbulence (especially for
gases). Use pipe supports on equal distance of mini CORI-FLOW inlet and outlet.
M22 M23 M24
2.4.10 Pipe line reducers:

Avoid abrupt pipeline reducers and other obstructions in the piping. They can cause cavitation inside the
meter tubes and will result in higher pressure drops. Mount reducers outside the rigid pipe supports.
M25 M26
2.4.11 Vibrations:
Avoid vibrations or mechanical shocks on the mini CORI-FLOW.
Flow vibrations of pumps can influence meter performances. Therefore avoid connecting the pump
directly to the meter or install a dampening device. A flexible connection (eg. Teflon tubing) or extra loop
in the piping to neutralize vibrations is advised. Do not mount the sensor in areas subject to vibration.
M27 M28 M29
9.17.050 page 19
®
BRONKHORST
2.4.12 Crosstalk:
Be carefull when mounting two or more mini CORI-FLOW instruments close together. Vibrations from
one instrument might interfere with the resonance frequency of another instrument. Therefore, for
multiple mini CORI-FLOW instruments: mount them on rigid, stiff bases/masses individually, but
mechanically isolated from each other. Special mounting blocks can be isolated using rubber
suspension or caps for muffling/damping. These mounting blocks can be optionally obtained at your
local sales representative. It is favourable to mount the instruments parallel to each other.
Examples:
M30 M31
2.5 Notes for temperature considerations

The mini CORI-FLOW has to be installed in such a way that levels of different temperature within the mini
CORI-FLOW are avoided. Avoid multiple heating and cooling of the instrument.
Temperature shocks have to be avoided in any case. (max. 1°C/sec)
After using the mini CORI-FLOW the first time at low temperature tighten the connector screws again in order
to prevent any leakage!
Please note: if you do not tighten the screws, the leaking connector / fitting can cause damage!
After the first shrinking and tightening of the screws, no further precaution is necessary.
Note that the maximum temperature in the housing of the mini CORI-FLOW is allowed to be up to 70 ºC max.
Also note that a mini CORI-FLOW will have an amount of self-heating due to the power dissipation on the
electronics (DSP). This self-heating can be up to approx. 15 ºC.
It will be at maximum if there is no flow (less cooling).
In practice, there will be a balance between fluid temperature, self heating, cooling effects and ambient
temperature at the instrument.
If the fluid is really hot, it would help if the instrument is in a cool environment. It will also depend on how well
the installation where the instrument has been mounted in/on is capable of cooling.
Anyway, one must take care that the instrument in the housing will not exceed the 70 °C, otherwise the
To check this, the internal temperature sensor can be used. Via FLOW-DDE/E-8000 or Bright it can be read
out. (FlowDDE par. 142).
Please make sure the temperature value readout here (=actual temperature in housing) will not exceed 70 °C.
On the next page some facts about maximum Tambient and Tfluid:
page 20 9.17.050
®
BRONKHORST
Max. temperature in housing is 70ºC,but:

Operating temperature conditions (continuous):
Tfluid + Tambient < 110ºC With:
Tfluid < 100ºC
Tambient < 55ºC
For cleaning purpose, instrument without power (continuous)

Tfluid + Tambient < 130ºC With:
Tfluid < 130ºC
T ambient < 80ºC
In all situations:
Tfluid > 0 ºC
Tambient > 0 ºC
Storage temperature (dry tube)
[-30 .. 80] ºC
2.6 Fluid/gas connections

®
Bronkhorst mini CORI-FLOW meters/controllers are equipped with compression or face-seal-fittings. For leak
tight installation of compression type fittings make sure that the tube is inserted to the shoulder in the fitting
body and that no dirt or dust is present on tube, ferrules or fittings. Tighten the nut finger-tight; while holding the
instrument and then tighten the nut 1 turn.
If applicable follow the guidelines of the supplier of the fittings. Special types of fittings are available on request.
* Note: Always check your system for leaks, before applying fluid/gas pressure. Especially if toxic, explosive or
other dangerous fluids are used.
2.7 Piping
BE SURE THAT PIPING IS ABSOLUTELY CLEAN!

DO NOT install small diameter piping on high flow rates, because the inlet jet-flow will affect the accuracy.
DO NOT mount abrupt angles direct on in- and outlet, especially not with high flow rates. We recommend at
least 20 pipe diameters distance between the angle and the instrument.
Special care should be taken in regard to reducers placed just in front of the mini CORI-FLOW. High pressure
drop and flow disturbance can occur which can influence the mini CORI-FLOW.
Warning!
During the manufacturing process, the instruments have been tested with water. Despite the fact that the
instruments have been purged thoroughly afterwards, we cannot guarantee that the delivered instruments are
®
absolutely free from water droplets. Bronkhorst strongly recommends performing an additional, adequate
drying procedure for those applications where remaining water particles may cause undesired reactions such
as corrosion.
9.17.050 page 21
®
BRONKHORST
2.8 Electrical connections

®
Bronkhorst recommends using their standard cables. These cables have the right connectors and if loose
ends are used, these will be marked to prevent wrong connection.
page 22 9.17.050
®
BRONKHORST
2.9 Pressure testing

Each CORI-FLOW is pressure tested to at least 1.5 times the working pressure of the process conditions
stipulated by the customer, with a minimum of 8 bara.
The tested pressure is stated on the flow meter/controller with a RED COLOURED sticker. Check test
pressure before installing in the line.
If the sticker is not available or the test pressure is incorrect, the instrument should not be mounted in the
process line and be returned to the factory.
-9
Each instrument is helium leak tested to at least 2⋅10 mbar l/s Helium outboard.
2.10 Supply pressure

Do not apply pressure until electrical connections are made. When applying pressure to the system, take care
to avoid pressure shocks in the system and increase pressure gradually, especially on high pressure units
incorporating a piston operated control valve.
Make sure in case of a controller that the used valve can withstand the system pressure.
Give special attention to the maximum delta pressure of the valve.
2.11 System purging

If explosive gases are to be used, purge the process with inert dry gas like Nitrogen, Argon etc. for at least 30
minutes at a high enough flow.
In systems with corrosive or reactive fluids, purging with an inert gas is absolutely necessary, before taking in
use.
Preventing chemical reactions inside the tubes or instrument as this will tend to clog up or corrode the system.
Complete purging is also required to remove such fluids from the system before exposing the system to air. It
is preferred not to expose the system to air, when working with these corrosive fluids.
2.12 Seals
®
Bronkhorst has gathered a material compatibility chart from a number of sources believed to be reliable.
However, it is a general guide only. Operating conditions may substantially change the accuracy of this guide.
Therefore there is no liability for damages occurring from the use of this guide.
The customer’s application will demand its own specific design or test evaluation for optimum reliability.
So check if the seals like O-rings and plunger are correct for the process.
2.13 Equipment storage

The equipment should be stored in its original packing in a cupboard warehouse or similar. Care should be
taken not to subject the equipment to excessive temperatures, humidity, vibrations or shocks.
9.17.050 page 23
®
BRONKHORST
2.14 Electromagnetic compatibility

Conditions for compliance with EMC requirements
All instruments described in this manual carry the CE-mark.

Therefore they have to comply with the EMC requirements, as they are valid for these instruments.
However compliance with the EMC requirements is not possible without the use of proper cables and
connector/gland assemblies.
®
For good results Bronkhorst can provide standard cables. Otherwise follow the guidelines as stated below.
1. Connector mini CORI-FLOW
Note:
When connecting the system to other devices (e.g. to PLC), be sure that the integrity of the shielding is not
affected. Do not use unshielded wire terminals.
1. For FLOW-BUS S(F)TP data (patch) cable connection to M12 connectors follow the instructions of the
supplier. It is important to use shielded twisted pair cables and shielded RJ45 modular jack connectors.
2. For PROFIBUS-DP, Modbus or DeviceNet data cable connections follow the instructions of the cable
suppliers for the specific field-bus system.
page 24 9.17.050
®
BRONKHORST
2.15 Electro static discharge

This instrument contains electronic components that are susceptible to damage by static electric discharges.
Proper handling procedures must be taken during installation, removing and connecting the electronics.
3 OPERATION
3.1 General
®
The Bronkhorst instruments are designed in such a way that they will meet user process requirements in the
best possible way.
The mini CORI-FLOW meters/controllers can be powered from +15 Vdc to +24 Vdc.
When providing your own power supply be sure that voltage and current rating are according to the
specifications of the instrument(s) and furthermore that the source is capable of delivering enough power to the
instrument(s).
Cable wire diameters should be sufficient to carry the supply current and voltage losses must be kept as low as
possible. When in doubt: consult factory.
Mini CORI-FLOW instruments can be operated by means of:
1. Analog interface (0...5Vdc/0...10Vdc/0...20mA/4...20mA)

2. RS232 interface (connected to COM-port by means of special cable on 38400 Baud)
3. FLOW-BUS
4. PROFIBUS-DP
5. DeviceNet
6. Modbus
7. other fieldbus interfaces on request
Option 1 and 2 are always present on multibus instruments. An interface to any available fieldbus is optional.
Operation via analog interface, RS232 interface and an optional fieldbus can be performed at the same time.
A special parameter called “control mode” indicates to which setpoint the controller should respond: analog or
digital (via fieldbus or RS232). The RS232 interface behaves like a FLOW-BUS interface.
When using more interfaces at the same time, reading and operation can be done simultaneously without
problems. When changing a parameter value, the last value send by an interface will be valid.
Also the push-button switch and the LED’s on the left side of the instrument can be used for manual operation
of some options.
The green LED will indicate in what mode the instrument is active.
The red LED will indicate error/warning situations.
3.2 Power and warm-up

Before switching on power, check if all connections have been made according to the hook-up diagram which
belongs to the instrument.
Check fluid connections and make sure there is no leakage. If needed, purge the system with a proper fluid.
For a gas instrument only purging with gases is allowed. Liquid instruments may be purged with either a gas or
a liquid, whatever is needed for the purpose.
Turn on power and allow at least 30 minutes to warm up and stabilise. In cases where no electronics are
involved (valves only) warming up is not needed.
During warm-up period, fluid pressure may either be on or off.
3.3 Start-up
Turn on fluid supply gently. Avoid pressure shocks, and bring the instrument gradually up to the level of the
actual operating conditions. Also switch off fluid supply gently when shutting down.
9.17.050 page 25
®
BRONKHORST
3.4 Zeroing
3.4.1 What is zero-stability ?
Due to mechanical construction of the sensor tubes each Coriolis sensor will have a very small offset signal,
even when the mass flow is zero. This is called the zero-stability error and is specified for accuracy separately
for all Coriolis instruments. Main reason for this is the fact that this error can be neutralized after performing a
zero-action.
Immediately after zeroing, zero-stability error is 0%. However it is allowed to move between a certain band
depending on the environment and fluid conditions.
In ideal situations where actual process conditions do not change, this error will remain the same.
Each time process conditions have been changed significantly a mini CORI-FLOW needs to be zeroed in order
to get rid of the offset error due to zero-stability. At least the very first time an instrument is used a zero
procedure will be required.
The zero-stability error might change when one or more of the following items change significantly:
Mainly:
• Temperature (of fluid and environment)
• Mounting position of instrument
Less important:
• Dynamic viscosity of fluid
• Vibrations working on instrument via environment
• Pulsation of supply pressure working on instrument
• Pressure
• Density of fluid
3.4.2 Procedure for zeroing

(See also Short form instruction manual mini CORI-FLOW, document nr. 9.17.052)
• Warm-up instrument for at least 30 minutes.

• Purge as long as needed with fluid to make sure there is no gas in the liquid or no condensate in the gas
• Fill instrument with fluid under process conditions.
• Close all valves at output to establish zero flow. Closing valves at input will not be critical (under
circumstances even better to let them open) but extra shut-off valves at output should be closed, as well as
control valve of instrument e.g. by means of setpoint = 0% or control mode = “close valve” .
• To start the zero procedure: Press push-button switch (#) on the side of the instrument and hold it (LED’s
will respond) until only the green LED is burning and then release the button.
This command is also possible via any available fieldbus- or RS232 interface.
• The zeroing procedure will start at that moment and can be monitored by the LED’s.
The green LED will blink until the procedure is ready. This will take about 30 seconds.
• When it is ready it will burn green continuously again.
3.4.3 Zero-procedure information

If the instrument has problems finding a proper and stable zero, it will repeat the auto-zero step a few times
(max. 4 times). Each time no proper zero can be achieved, the instrument will give a short notice signalling its
LED’s after the procedure.
The red and green LED will blink turn-by-turn for a few seconds to indicate that the auto-zero wasn’t able to
find a zero (because of too much noise in the signal). This is mostly the case when the instrument is placed in
a vibrating environment.
When ready zeroing after trying several (max. 4) times, the final result for the zero value will be a moving
average value of all attempts. The instrument will save this zero value into its non-volatile memory and will
keep this value until a next zero-procedure will be performed.
This value (Sensor Input Zero Scale Adjustment) can be accessed (read/written), via parameter 218 in the
parameter table of FlowDDE (note: Depending on firmware of instrument).
The mini CORI-FLOW will accept a proper zero only if the measured signal is within a limited noise band.
Best way to achieve this is to avoid external noise influences. However, when this is not possible, filter settings
of the mini CORI-FLOW can be changed to improve noise immunity.
Important:
Always make sure that there is absolutely no flow when the instrument is performing the (auto-)zero procedure
and there are no vibrations or pulsating inlet pressures.
page 26 9.17.050
®
BRONKHORST
3.4.4 Alternatives for starting zero procedure

• Through FLOW-BUS, using an E-8000 readout/control module.
• Through FLOW-BUS, via a RS232/FLOW-BUS converter using software on a PC or PLC.
• Through RS232, using software on a PC or PLC
• Through RS232, using a Bright compact local readout/control module
• Through other fieldbus system (PROFIBUS-DP/DeviceNet/ModBus)
3.4.5 Zeroing with the Micro-switch

Before using the instrument zeroing is required.
• Set process conditions

After warm-up, pressure up and fill system including the mini CORI-FLOW
according to the process conditions.
• Stop flow
Make sure there is no flow through the instrument by closing the shut-off valves before and after the
instrument.
• Press and hold, until GREEN LED is on, than release button
With no flow, use the push-button switch (#) on the left side of the instrument to start the zero
adjustment procedure.
Press the push-button (#) and hold it, after a short time the red LED will go ON and OFF then the
green LED will go ON. At that moment release the push-button (#).
• Zeroing
The zeroing procedure will start at that moment and the green LED will blink fast. The zeroing
procedure waits for a stable signal and saves the zero. If the signal is not stable, zeroing will take long
and the nearest point to zero is accepted. The procedure will take approx. 25 sec.
Make sure that there is no flow through the instrument when performing the zeroing procedure.
• Ready
When indication is showing 0% signal and the green indication LED is continuously on, then zero has
been performed well.
3.4.6 Zeroing through the digital communication
It is also possible to start the zero adjustment procedure through the FLOW-BUS, using an E-8000
readout/control unit or a software program on a PC, connected to a FLOW-BUS interface module.
The following parameters must be used for zeroing an instrument:
Initreset [unsigned char, RW,0...255, DDEpar. = 7, Proces/par. = 0/10]

Cntrlmode [unsigned char, RW,0...255, DDEpar. = 12, Proces/par. = 1/4]
CalMode [unsigned char, RW,0...255, DDEpar. = 58, Proces/par. = 115/1]
• Set process conditions

Warm-up, pressure up the system and fill the instrument according to the process conditions.
• Stop flow
Make sure there is no flow through the instrument by closing the shut-off valves before and after the
instrument.
• Send parameters
Send the following values to the parameters in this sequence.
Initreset 64
Cntrlmode 9
Calmode 255
Calmode 0
Calmode 9
• Zeroing
The zeroing procedure will start at that moment and the green LED will blink fast. The zeroing
procedure waits for a stable signal and saves the zero. If the signal is not stable zeroing, will take long
and the nearest point to zero is accepted. The procedure will take approx. 25 sec.
Make sure there is no flow through the instrument when performing the zeroing procedure.
• Ready
When indication is showing 0% signal and the green indication LED is burning
continuously again, then zeroing has been performed well. Also parameter control mode
goes back to its original value. As last send 0 to parameter initreset.
9.17.050 page 27
®
BRONKHORST
3.5 Operating conditions

Each instrument has been adjusted for customer process conditions, if possible.
Controllers or valves may not operate correctly, if process conditions vary too much, because of the restriction
of the orifice in the valve. Please change supply- or backpressure to improve control behaviour.
If this does not help, contact your local sales representative to assist you.
3.6 Manual operation

By means of manual operation of the push-button switch (#) some important actions for the instrument can be
selected/started. These options are available in both analog and BUS/digital operation modes.
(See also manual operation in document number 9.17.023)
These functions are:

- Reset (instrument firmware-program reset)
- Reset in case of an alarm
- Zeroing
- Restore factory settings (in case of unintentionally change of the settings)
for FLOW-BUS only:
- Automatic installation to FLOW-BUS (installs instrument to free address)
- Remote installation to FLOW-BUS (instruments will be installed by PC-software)
3.7 Analog operation

Digital instruments can be operated with analog signals through the 8-pin circular connector. The instruments
are compatible in use with analog instruments on this point.
Analog operated instruments, can be hooked up using an 8-wire shielded cable, connected according to the
®
Bronkhorst standard.
Each electronic PC-board is set for one of the following output (and corresponding input) signals:
Signal output (sensor) input (setpoint)

code signal signal
A 0…5 Vdc 0…5 Vdc

B 0…10 Vdc 0…10 Vdc
F 0…20 mA (sourcing) 0…20 mA (sinking)
G 4…20 mA (sourcing) 4…20 mA (sinking)
Current output signals
Sourcing
output I
+
instrument mA
-
0V common
For meters only the output signal is available.
At analog operation the following parameters are available:

- measured value
- setpoint (controllers only)
- valve voltage (controllers only)
Note:
When operating the instrument through the analog interface it is possible to connect the instrument to any
supported fieldbus system (or RS232-interface with special cable) for reading/changing parameters (e.g.
controller response or other fluid selection).
For FLOW-BUS versions of the instruments a readout/control module for digital instruments can be temporarily
connected to the M12 fieldbus connector.
page 28 9.17.050
®
BRONKHORST
3.8 BUS / digital operation

Operation via fieldbus reduces the amount of cables to build a system of several instruments and offers more
parameter values to be monitored/changed by the user.
See instruction manual: operating digital mass flow / pressure instruments for more details (document nr.
9.17.023).
Operation by means of a fieldbus adds a lot of extra features (compared to analog operation) to the
instruments.
Such as:
- adjustable filter settings to smoothen or speed-up the output signal
- setpoint slope (ramp function on setpoint for smooth control)
- adjustment of controller output (response time) for valve or pump control (PID-settings)
- direct reading at readout/control module or host computer
- testing and self diagnosis
- response alarm (setpoint-measure too high for too long time)
- several control/setpoint modes (e.g. purge/close valve)
- master/slave modes for ratio control (FLOW-BUS only)
- identification (serial number, model number, device type, user tag)
- adjustable minimal and maximal alarm limits
- (batch) counter
- adjustable response time for controller when opening from zero
- adjustable response time for normal control
- adjustable response time for stable control (|setpoint-measure| < 2%)
Special software like FlowDDE, FlowPlot and FlowView can be used to control these settings.
For operation of digital instruments by means of a specific fieldbus system or RS232, see following documents
(available as PDF-file):
• for FLOW-BUS document number: 9.17.024

• for PROFIBUS-DP document number: 9.17.025
• for DeviceNet document number: 9.17.026
• for RS232 document number 9.17.027
• for Modbus document number 9.17.035
9.17.050 page 29
®
BRONKHORST
3.9 RS232 communication cable T-part
Note:
Special RS232 cable has partnr. 7.03.444 and consists of a T-part with 1 male and 1 female 8-pin DIN
connector on one instrument-side and a normal female sub-D 9 connector on the side of the computer.
By means of this cable it is possible to offer RS232 communication and still be able to connect power-supply
and analog interface through the (analog) 8-pin DIN connector.
RS232 communication is only possible with a baudrate of 38.4 KBaud and can be used for either:
• Uploading new firmware by means of a special program (for trained Bronkhorst-service personnel only)
• Servicing your instrument using Bronkhorst-service programs (for trained Bronkhorst-service personnel
only)
• Operating your instrument using FLOWDDE, FLOWB32.DLL or RS232-ASCII protocol (end user)
page 30 9.17.050
®
BRONKHORST
4 MAINTENANCE
4.1 General
No routine maintenance is required to be performed on the meters or controllers. In case of severe
contamination it may be required to clean the valve orifice separately.
4.2 mini CORI-FLOW sensor

The mini CORI-FLOW sensor is constructed in such a way that there is very little dead volume.
The sensor is maintenance free.
4.3 Controllers
All sensor types can be combined with a control valve to be operated together as a control loop. Controller
systems are either available as separate units; a sensor and a control valve, or as an integrated unit.
If applicable maintenance procedures are described under “control valves”
4.4 Control valves

Control valves cannot be used for shut-off and/or on-off applications. Pressure surges, as may occur during
system pressurisation or deflation must be avoided.
4.4.1 Solenoid valves
These are considered to be the directly operated control and pilot valves. They can be disassembled in the
field by the user for cleaning and servicing. The parts can be cleaned with a cleaning liquid, or in an ultrasonic
bath.
To disassemble the valve proceed as follows:
a) disconnect the instrument connector (not necessary with separate valve)
b) remove the hex nut on top of the valve assembly
c) lift the cover (coil) assembly
d) unscrew the flange
e) lift valve assembly carefully from the base
f) unscrew set screw for the orifice and subsequently loosen the orifice and the orifice holder
g) remove the plunger assembly
Clean parts and carefully re-assemble in reverse order. It is recommended to replace the O-rings prior to re-
assembly.
After having re-assembled the control valve, it is recommended to check the control characteristics of the
valve. This can best be done by using a separate variable 15 Vdc power supply source.
Proceed as follows:
- disconnect the valve leads and connect to supply source
- apply gas pressure as per working conditions
- apply power by gradually increasing voltage
- the valve should open at 7 Vdc ± 3 Vdc
- the fully opened position is reached at approx. 9 Vdc ± 1.5 Vdc.
In case the valve does not operate within the voltage levels stated, then it must be disassembled, and the
orifice must be adjusted to the proper position.
Re-assemble valve and repeat procedure if required.
4.4.2 Vary-P valve
The vary-P valve is designed to cope with extremely varying process conditions on either upstream or
downstream side of the valve or a combination of these. ∆p can vary over a wide range. The basic control
valve is a direct operated solenoid control valve.
The design has been patented.
For orifice selection and maintenance other than the pilot valve consult the factory.
9.17.050 page 31
®
BRONKHORST
4.4.3 Pilot operated valve
This control valve is an indirect control valve, consisting of a spring loaded membrane/orifice system which is
positioned by a solenoid operated direct control (pilot valve). The two devices are integrated in one block.
Basically follow the same procedures for dis-assembly as stipulated under “Solenoid valves”
For cleaning purposes it may be required to dis-assemble further, i.e. also remove the membrane assembly.
For pilot operated valves the maximum pressure drop is limited to 20 bard. If the pressure drop during start-up
is higher, it is preferred to install a bypass valve. During start-up this valve should be opened. Also the
minimum pressure drop is limited. For exact figures consult factory or proceed according to the technical data
and/or additional instructions given by the sales office or department.
Note:
When pressure testing a system incorporating a pilot operated control valve, a special procedure must be
followed in order to prevent damage to the valve. In such cases it is necessary to contact the factory prior to do
this.
4.5 Kv-value calculation
This calculation method can be used to determine the Kv-value of the main orifice of a control valve.
4.5.1 For gases
Determine desired ∆p across valve.

∆p must be at least 20% of supply pressure, or in closed loop systems, of total pressure difference in the loop.
If ∆p is 20-50% of supply pressure, use formula:
Φm ρn ⋅ T
Kv = under critical
514 ⋅ ρ n ∆p ⋅ p2
If ∆P is 50-100% of supply pressure, use formula:
Φm
Kv = ρn ⋅ T over critical
257 ⋅ ρ n ⋅ p1
Units:
Φm = flow [kg/h]
p1 = supply pressure [bara]
p2 = downstream pressure [bara]
∆p = pressure difference (p1 - p2) [bara]
T = temperature [K]
ρn = density [kg/mn ]
3
The orifice diameter can be determined by: d= 7.6 K v [mm]
page 32 9.17.050
®
BRONKHORST
4.5.2 For Liquids
Determine desired ∆p across valve.

∆p must be at least 50% of supply pressure
Φm ρ
Kv-value calculation Kv =
ρ ∆p ⋅ 1000
Units: flow - Φ m (kg/h )
density - ρ(kg / m 3 ) at 20  C and 1 atm.

delta p - ∆p(bard)
The orifice bore diameter can be determined by:
d = 7.6 K v [mm]
For C2 type of valves the diameter of the orifice can be calculated as shown above or looked up in the graph
below.
ρcustomer
Φ v H 2 O = Φ v customer
ρH 2 O
in which: Φv = volume flow
ρ = density
10 -1 10 0 10 1
d = 1.0 mm d = 0.7 mm
d = 0.5 mm
10 4 10 4
d = 0.37 mm
d = 0.3 mm
d = 0.2 mm
d = 0.14 mm
10 3 10 3
d = 0.1 mm
O v H2O (m l/h)
10 2 10 2
P m ax.
10 1 10 1
10 0
10 -2 10 -1 10 0 10 1
P (bar)
If liquids have viscosity’s >15 mPa.s (water = 1 mPa.s), the flat orifice and plunger type control mechanism
cannot be used. For measuring systems only check maximum possible viscosity with factory.
9.17.050 page 33
®
BRONKHORST
4.6 Calibration procedure

All instruments are factory calibrated on all possible ranges, independent of customer conditions.
Calibration will be performed with water under normal temperature and atmospheric conditions (20°C and 1
bara). After calibration the instruments will be dried thoroughly.
Instruments will be calibrated using water on 6 points over the full flow range where the instrument can be used
for. Because Coriolis instruments measure mass flow, they will have the same accuracy for all fluids and
therefore calibrations on actual fluids will not be necessary.
Also density will be calibrated and calibration checks on air will be performed.
For the flow calibration, the instrument will be set to the maximum full scale value and seven points (including
zero) will be compared with a reference. All points will be shown in a graph to illustrate that they are within
limits of total accuracy (±0.2% ±Zero Stability).
After this calibration, the actual capacity (full scale) value will be set to the wanted flow value ordered by the
enduser. This value can be easily changed on site by the enduser using Bronkhorst tooling software (FlowDDE
and FlowPlot) which can be downloaded from the website: http://downloads.bronkhorst.com/.
Thus re-ranging the instrument will be possible between a minimum and a maximum capacity. Over this
complete range the instrument calibration certificate will be valid.
Analog outputs (A: 0…5Vdc /B: 0…10Vdc /F: 0…20mA /G: 4…20mA) for flow and analog inputs for giving
setpoints to controllers, will be adjusted as ordered. These adjustments include an extra uncertainty of < ±0.1%
at each input as well as at each output.
The analog output and -input maximum values are equal to the actual capacity (full scale) value of the
instrument and will be linear to the flow.
If the instrument will be re-ranged: actual capacity will be set to another value, this analog value will get another
meaning.
The original, factory set, actual capacity (full scale) value and type of analog signal will be displayed on the grey
sticker on the instrument. This will be the value what the instrument had been ordered for.
G: 4…20mA analog input and output
Capacity (FS) = 150 g/h Mix
Example:
M13 instrument has a maximum flow of max. 2000 g/h.
It will be calibrated up to 2000 g/h on 7 points, including zero.
Enduser wants to use it with 4…20 mA and orders the instrument for 150 g/h.
When the instrument leaves the factory 20mA will correspond with 150 g/h.
After re-ranging it to a full scale of 500 g/h, 20mA will correspond with 500 g/h Mix.
After re-ranging it to a full scale of 2000 g/h, 20mA wil correspond with 2000 g/h.
Note:
The fluidname “Mix” is just indicative for actual use. However, the meter will measure all fluids with same
accuracy as long as the instrument is capable of handling the fluid (pressure drop, corrosion resistance,
suitability of valve or pump etc.).
page 34 9.17.050
®
BRONKHORST
4.7 Instrument re-ranging

Re-ranging can easily be performed by changing the capacity of the instrument. This can be performed by
using FlowPlot, E-8000 or Bright readout/control module, RS232 digital communication or any available
fieldbus communication interface supporting parameter 21: capacity. Capacity can be set between minimum
capacity and maximum capacity. The actual values depend on the type of instrument.
FlowPlot can be downloaded at: http://downloads.bronkhorst.com
Example of changing flow range using FlowPlot:
Enter max flow range here (capacity) or move the slider.
4.8 Instrument filter settings
Changing filter settings can be done using FlowPlot.

FlowPlot can be downloaded at: http://downloads.bronkhorst.com
Output filter:
Dynamic display factor and Static display factor are filter settings for readout only (at analog output and digital
output). Output signal filtering at stable situation and at a flow-step can be set separately.
Sensor filter:
Exponential smoothing factor is the most important filter parameter to influence the stability of the meter and
will also influence the controller behaviour, where it will be provided as input for the controller.
Adaptive smoothing factor does not have functionality for a mini CORI-FLOW. For a mini CORI-FLOW it will
temporarily switch off the filter during a flow-step to enable fast controller behaviour together with strong
filtering.
For all filter settings:

A value can be entered between 0 and 1, where values close to 0 will filter strongly and slow down the output.
A value close to 1 will speed-up the output and will introduce more noise.
At value = 0, the filter has been switched off. No signal is put-through: no signal changing.
At value = 1, the output is equal to the input: no filtering at all.
9.17.050 page 35
®
BRONKHORST
5 INTERFACE DESCRIPTION
For a description of the available interfaces see document numbers:
9.17.024 for FLOW-BUS

9.17.025 for PROFIBUS-DP
9.17.026 for DeviceNet
9.17.027 for RS232
9.17.035 for Modbus
These documents are available as PDF on the documentation/software tool CD.
6 TROUBLESHOOTING
6.1 General
For a correct analysis of the proper operation of a mini CORI-FLOW meter or controller it is recommended to
remove the unit from the process line and check it without applying fluid supply pressure. In case the unit is
dirty, this can be ascertained immediately by loosening the compression type couplings and, if applicable the
flange on the inlet side.
Energising or de-energising of the instrument indicates whether there is an electronic failure. When powering
up the red LED is on and the green LED is flashing for a second or two. Then the instrument should go in
normal operation mode. See document number 9.17.023 for detailed description of the LED indication.
After that, fluid pressure is to be applied in order to check behaviour.
6.2 Calibration check

In case of checking the instrument for correct calibration, the only proper way to do this is to use a weighing
scale with correct accuracy. Alternatively another Coriolis instrument might be used as a reference.
However, volumetric flow meters should not be used as a reference.
The integrated totalizer of the instrument can be used to compare a batch of flow during several minutes to a
weighing scale.
The easiest way is to fill a cup, e.g. with water for 2 minutes or more.
To activate and zero the totalizer, FlowPlot and FlowDDE can be used, to be downloaded at
http://downloads.bronkhorst.com/.
Alternatively a Bright module or E-8000 could be used to operate the counter for a mini CORI-FLOW.
For this check, proceed as follows:

- put an empty cup on the weighing scale
- zero the scale with the empty cup on the scale
- reset the totalizer of the mini CORI-FLOW before filling the cup
- make sure the inlet pressure is stable and sufficient for proper control and correct flow rate
- in case of a controller: give a setpoint to open the valve
- in case of a meter, open a manual valve with correct inlet pressure
- fill the cup during at least 2 minutes and stop the flow
(Totalizer can be used as batch controller to dose a certain batch within a certain time in case of controller)
- compare the totalizer value to the value indicated by a weighing scale.
- make sure you understand the total acceptable error = reading accuracy (0.2% for a liquid) ± zero stability
as explained in paragraph 1.5
NOTE: This method should be used only to get a quick impression about the calibration of the instrument.
Please understand that performing an accurate calibration requires knowledge and optimal control of many
parameters involved, such as: pressure, temperature, time-measurement, evaporation of liquid, mounting
position of weighing scale, tubing and flow.
page 36 9.17.050
®
BRONKHORST
6.3 Troubleshooting summary general
Symptom Possible cause Action

Red LED is irregular or Gas bubbles in tube (of liquid meter) Purge to get rid of gas bubbles
continuously on. Advise: use frequency and/or density signal
to detect if gas or liquid is in the tube.
Too much vibrations Mount isolation rubbers and flexible tubing.
Red LED is continuously on Hardware error Have instrument checked by specialist
Wanted flow is not reached Clogging of the instrument Purge at outlet and/or inlet with dry air if
possible and compare max flow with fixed inlet
pressure to values in the table of the brochure
or using CoriCalc pressure calculations.
No output signal No power supply 1a) check power supply
1b) check cable connection
Output stage damaged due to long lasting 1c) return to factory
shortage and/or high-voltage peaks
Supply pressure too low, or differential pressure 1d) increase supply pressure
across meter too low
Valve blocked/contaminated 1e) connect 0 .. 15 Vdc to valve and slowly
increase voltage while supply pressure is ‘on’.
The valve should open at 7V ± 3V; if not open,
then clean parts and adjust valve (qualified
personnel only)
Piping or filters blocked 1f) clean system
Sensor failure 1g) return to factory
Maximum output signal Output stage damaged 2a) return to factory
Sensor failure 2b) return to factory
Output signal much lower than Piping or filters blocked/contaminated 3a) clean system
setpoint signal or desired flow sensor blocked/contaminated 3b) clean sensor with a gas or fluid
Valve blocked/contaminated 3c) clean valve
Valve internal damage (swollen seat in plunger) 3d) replace plunger assembly and adjust valve
or return
Incorrect type of gas is used and/or 3e) try instrument on conditions for which it was
pressure/diff. pressure is to low designed
Flow is gradually decreasing Condensation, occurs with NH 3 , hydrocarbons 4a) decrease supply pressure and/or heat gas
to be measured
such as C 3 H 8 ,C 4 H10 etc.
Valve adjustment has changed 4b) see ‘1e’
Oscillation Supply pressure/diff. pressure too high 5a) lower pressure
Pipeline too short between pressure regulator 5b) increase length or diameter of piping
and mini CORI-FLOW upstream
Increase between pressure regulator and mini
CORI-FLOW
External vibration is present 5c) Remove external vibration
Valve sleeve or internals damaged 5d) replace damaged parts and adjust valve,
see ‘1e’ or return to factory
Controller adjustment wrong 5e) adjust controller
Software like FLOWPLOT can be used to do
Unstable upstream pressure this. Please contact the distributor for details.
Small flow at zero setpoint Valve leaks due to damaged plunger or dirt in 6a) clean orifice and/or, when replacing plunger
orifice assembly, see ‘1e’
Pressure too high or much too low 6b) apply correct pressure
Zero procedure not done or with gas in the tube 6c) Purge and Zero the instrument
High flow at zero setpoint Damaged diaphragm (only applicable to valves 7a) replace membrane seal
with membrane)
Zero procedure not done or with gas in the tube 7b) Purge and Zero the instrument
Disturbances in the flow Gas in the system 8a) Purge the system
Expansion of liquids to gasses 8b) Check properties fluid used
Advise: use frequency and/or density signal
to detect if gas or liquid is in the tube
Calibration error Zero procedure not done or with gas in the tube 9a) Purge and Zero the instrument
Gas in the system 9b) Purge the system
Measure time to short 9c) Measure long enough to get a reliable
measurement
Right reference instrument 9d) The mini CORI-FLOW is a mass-flow
meter/controller and should not be checked with
a volume-meter.
Totalization error Pulsating or fast changing flow Used special CORI-FILL (> 8V16) firmware
specially optimized for totalizing flow.
(Use dampener to stabilize inlet pressure.)
Note: For other (more specific) problems see also troubleshooting parts in other documents.
9.17.050 page 37
Quick Installation Guide
Doc nr.: 9.17.052H Date: 10-12-2015
SCOPE OF THIS GUIDE
mini CORI-FLOW™ instruments are highly accurate instruments for measuring and controlling the mass flow rate of liquids and/or
gases, independent of fluid properties. These smart Coriolis instruments offer multiple process values as input- or output
parameters. Many parameters can be read and/or changed using analog or digital interfaces.
Output parameters are: mass flow, density, temperature, totalized mass flow, alarms.
Input parameters are: setpoint (desired mass flow rate for controllers), reset alarm/counter.
This manual will help you start-up your mini CORI-FLOW™ in only 10 steps and contains:
1. Instrument functional properties 6. Electrical connection
2. Check safety properties 7. Operation
3. Check piping 8. Multi-functional switch
4. Mount/install instrument 9. Purging
5. Leak check 10. Zeroing
mini CORI-FLOW™ instruments have modular instruction manuals consisting of:

- Instruction manual mini CORI-FLOW™ (document nr. 9.17.050)
Info about e.g. : sensors, valves, liquid dosing systems, maintenance, tooling, calibration, Kv-value calculation, troubleshooting.
- Operation instructions digital instruments (document nr. 9.17.023)
- Hookup diagram mini CORI-FLOW™ and CORI-FLOW™ (general) (document nr. 9.16.044)
- FlowPlot Manual (document nr. 9.17.030)
Depending on optional fieldbus interface:

Fieldbus/interface description Manual Hookup diagram
- RS232 Interface with FLOW-BUS protocol 9.17.027 9.16.044
- FLOW-BUS Interface 9.17.024 9.16.048
- PROFIBUS DP Interface 9.17.025 9.16.049
- DeviceNet™ Interface 9.17.026 9.16.050
- Modbus interface 9.17.035 9.16.066
i
www
These documents can be downloaded from the website:
http://www.bronkhorst.com/qrcoriolis or can be sent by e-mail on request.
Notes for temperature considerations

After having used the mini CORI-FLOW™ the first time at low temperature tighten the fluid adaptor screws again in order to
prevent any leakage! Please note: if you do not tighten, the leaking adaptor / fitting can cause damage!
After the first shrinking and tightening of the screws, no further precaution is necessary.
Note that the maximum temperature in the housing of the mini CORI-FLOW™ is 70 °C.
To check this, the internal temperature sensor can be used. Temperature can be readout digitally via FLOW-DDE/
E-8000 (FlowDDE par. 142) or BRIGHT (local readout/control module).
Make sure the temperature value readout here (=actual temperature in housing) will not exceed 70 °C.
STARTING-UP
1 Check mini CORI-FLOW™ functional properties

Before installing your Mass Flow Meter/Controller it is important to
read the attached label and check:
 Flow rate
 Fluid to be measured
 Up- and downstream pressures
 Input/output signal
 Temperature
 Valve type (if controller)
2 9.17.052
2 Check test-pressure
The tested pressure is stated on the instrument with a red-coloured sticker.
Before installation, make sure that the test pressure is in accordance with
normal safety factors for your application. If there is no Pressure Testing
Sticker on the device or if the test pressure is incorrect, the instrument
should not be mounted in the process line and be returned to the factory.
3 Check if system piping is clean

For reliable measurement always make sure the fluid stream is clean.
Use filters to assure a particle free liquid stream or a moisture- and
oil-free gas stream. Recommended pore size: 10...40 µm. If back flow can
occur, a downstream filter and a check valve are recommended too.
For high flow rates select a suitable filter size, to avoid too high pressure
drop or cavitation.
Warning!
During the manufacturing process, the instruments have been tested with water. Despite the fact that the
instruments have been purged thoroughly afterwards, we cannot guarantee that the delivered instruments are
absolutely free from water droplets. Bronkhorst strongly recommends performing an additional, adequate drying
procedure for those applications where remaining water particles may cause undesired reactions such as corrosion.
4.1 Mount/install instrument properly

Install the mini CORI-FLOW™ Meter/Controller in the line and tighten the fittings according to the instructions of
the supplier of the fittings. Mount the mini CORI-FLOW™ instrument, with screws in the body, to a rigid, stiff base
body or heavy mass, such as a wall, heavy rig or stable steel construction. This is essential to achieve optimal
accuracy with the mini CORI-FLOW™ instrument.
4.2 Flow direction

Install the mini CORI-FLOW™ in accordance with the direction of
the FLOW arrow. The arrow for flow direction is indicated on the
mini CORI-FLOW™, between process fittings.
4.3 Base mounting

Mount the mini CORI-FLOW™ instrument, with screws in the body, to a rigid, stiff base body or heavy mass on a
vibration-free position, such as a wall, heavy rig or stable construction. This is essential to achieve optimal accuracy
with the mini CORI-FLOW™ instrument.
By default the mini CORI-FLOW™ M12, M13 and M14 will be delivered on a special mounting block for achieving
optimal accuracy.This mounting block has a mass and stiffness precisely tuned for the specific model.
Removing the mounting block will cause inaccuracy unless the instrument is firmly mounted on a stiff and rugged
surface.
4.4 Mounting position general

For gas and liquid mini CORI-FLOW™ meters can be mounted in any position for a proper measurement.
© Bronkhorst High-Tech B.V. 3

4.5 Mounting position (integrated) valve with purge connector
Only for mini CORI-FLOW™ instruments with (integrated) liquid valve with purge adaptor, mounting position
can be critical for a good quality of de-gassing.
Please consult the Instruction Manual for additional information on mounting the mini CORI-FLOW instruments. This
i
www document can be found in the download section of our website: coriolis.bronkhorst.com/en/downloads/
instruction_manuals/
Liquid purging
In order to remove gas bubbles during start-up, flushing with relatively high flow rate of liquid for some minutes is
recommended.
Gas purging
In order to remove condensation drops during start-up, flushing with dry gas for some minutes with high flow rate is
recommended.
Leak tightness
Verification of leaks is required prior starting up of the process.
5 Leak check
Check the system for leaks before applying (fluid) pressure. Especially if toxic, explosive or other dangerous fluids
are used!
Gas tight is not the same as liquid tight

Please note that connections which are tight for liquid, could still be untight for gas. This can result in Air enclosure
in the liquid, e.g. when using pumps, which might lead to errors in measurement.
Electrical connections must be made with a standard cable or according to
the mini CORI-FLOW™ hook-up diagram.
mini CORI-FLOW™ instruments have a IP65 ingress protection rating.
Optional mini CORI-FLOW™ instruments can be ATEX Zone 2 protected. For ATEX Zone 2 applications, all
(optional) connectors and the impact protection cover must be mounted on the instrument.
7.1 Analog/Local operation

Connect the mini CORI-FLOW™ to the power supply/readout unit with the 8-pin cable at the circular connector.
The two examples below have the following electrical properties:
Power : +15...+24 Vdc Example 1 Example 2
Analog : 0...5 Vdc / 0...10 Vdc

output 0...20 mA / 4...20 mA
Analog input : 0...5 Vdc / 0...10 Vdc

(controller) 0...20 mA / 4...20 mA
4 9.17.052
7.2 BUS/digital operation Example 3 Example 4
For this procedure see description

for RS232 operation or specific
(optional) fieldbus.
RS232 connection cable 7.03.444
enables to use (free downloadable)
tooling programs for Windows.
8 Multi-functional switch operation

Using the 2 colored LEDs and the switch on the mini CORI-FLOW™, several
actions can be monitored and started. The green LED is used for status
indication. The red LED is used for errors/warnings. The switch can be used to
start several actions, such as auto-zero, restore factory settings and bus-
initialization actions. See specific zero-procedure part in this manual or see
‘General instructions for mini CORI-FLOW™’ for more details.
Important warning! When red LED blinks shortly: measuring signal is unstably or noisy: instrument is possibly
exposed to vibrations or pulsating flow.
9 Purging
In systems for use with corrosive or reactive fluids, purging with an inert gas is absolutely necessary before use. After
use with corrosive or reactive fluids, complete purging is also required before exposing the system to air. Purge the
mini CORI-FLOW™ with actual fluid to get rid of all the Air/gas in the tubes (for liquids) or to remove all possible
condensation drops (for gases).
Special control mode for purging

In case of a mini CORI-FLOW™ controller give setpoint = 100 % to control the valve or the pump. It is also possible
to use special control mode = 8 to fully open the valve or set the pump at max. rpm, using a digital interface. This
will bypass the PID-controller and might be usefull when having the mini CORI-FLOW™ set to a low capacity. It will
ensure you to get the highest possible flow for purging.
Warm-up time
Let the mini CORI-FLOW™ warm-up for at least 30 minutes for best accuracy.
10 Zeroing
Before first use, when process conditions change significantly (especially temperature) or when the instrument has
been re-mounted (e.g. after servicing) it is recommended to perform an automatic zero action with the mini CORI-
FLOW™. This action can be started manually (as described below) or via a digital interface (see document Operation
instructions digital instruments: 9.17.023). Under normal (constant) conditions it will not be necessary to zero before
each application start-up.
10.1 Set process conditionsAfter warming-up, pressuring and purging the system, including the mini CORI-FLOW™,
prepare the mini CORI-FLOW™ for actual process conditions.
10.2 Stop flow Make sure there is no flow through the mini CORI-
FLOW™ by closing a shut-off valve (in front of and)
after the instrument. At least one (shut-off) valve
after the mini CORI-FLOW™ is required. High
quality up- and downstream shut-off valves are
recommended for proper zero point calibration.
© Bronkhorst High-Tech B.V. 5

10.3 Start Auto-Zero With no flow, use the push-button switch (#) on the
mini CORI-FLOW™ to start the zero adjustment
procedure (LEDs first will go off). (1), (2) and (3):
Press the push-button (#) and hold it for 8..12
seconds (each 4 seconds the LED-indication will
change). (4): Release the push-button (#) when the
green LED is on.
10.4 Zeroing procedure The zeroing procedure will start now and the green
LED will blink fast. The procedure will take at least
45 sec. When the signal is not stable the procedure
will take longer (max. 6 retries will be performed).
The red LED will blink when signal is unstable/noisy.
Make sure that there is no flow through the mini
CORI-FLOW™ when performing the zeroing
45 sec.
procedure and avoid vibrations !
10.5 Ready When indication is showing 0% signal and the

green indication LED is continuously on, then zero
has been performed well. Instrument is in normal
operation mode now and ready for use.
Measurement check
For a controller: send a setpoint to the mini CORI-FLOW™ and check the measured value.
Make sure the mini CORI-FLOW™ indicates 0% at zero flow.
Your mini CORI-FLOW™ is now ready for operation.
Bronkhorst High-Tech B.V., Nijverheidsstraat 1a, NL-7261AK Ruurlo The Netherlands

T +31(0)573 45 88 00 F +31(0)573 45 88 08 I www.bronkhorst.com E info@bronkhorst.com
measuring
•
Magnetic Level Switches monitoring
for liquids •
analysing
M01-M20
OO Switch points: max. 4

OO pmax: 100 bar; tmax: 150 °C
OO Connection:
G , G , G ½ ,G 1, G 1½
G 2, 1" NPT, 1½" NPT,
2" NPT, PG 7 male,
DIN and ANSI flanges,
N1
special connections
OO Material:
stainless steel, brass,
PVC-U, PP, NBR, PVDF
OO ATEX-Certificate:
Ex ia, Ex d
OO Connection heads:
aluminium, PA, PP, ABS
KOBOLD companies worldwide: KOBOLD Messring GmbH

Nordring 22-24
ARGENTINA, AUSTRALIA, AUSTRIA, BELGIUM, BULGARIA, CANADA, CHILE, CHINA, COLOMBIA, D-65719 Hofheim/Ts.
CZECHIA, EGYPT, FRANCE, GERMANY, GREAT BRITAIN, HUNGARY, INDIA, INDONESIA, ITALY, Head Ofice:
MALAYSIA, MEXICO, NETHERLANDS, PERU, POLAND, REPUBLIC OF KOREA, ROMANIA, +49(0)6192 299-0
+49(0)6192 23398
SINGAPORE, SPAIN, SWITZERLAND, TAIWAN, THAILAND, TUNISIA, TURKEY, USA, VIETNAM info.de@kobold.com
1/10 - 2017
www.kobold.com
1
Magnetic Level Switches for Liquids Model M01-M20
Design Connection
Anschluss- Model Codes
thread
gewinde
M07 P R10 SCXX P E
Model
Konter- nut
Counter
mutter Guide tube material
E = stainless steel 1.4404
M = brass
P = PVC
S = PVDF
Float
Schwimmer
Process connection
R05 = G
Reedkontakt
Reed contact
R10 = G
R15 = G ½
Magnet
Magnet PG7 = Pg7,
1R6 ... 9AC = connection box
with thread or flange connection
No. of contacts and function*
S = N/O contact,
Description C = N/C contact
Magnetic level switches are used for the monitoring and W = changeover contact
control of liquid levels in vessels. Magnetic level switches are X = no contact
manufactured to customer specification. Electr. connection
0 = with housing
An overview of types available with minimum lengths of guide
P = 1 m PVC-cable
tube is set out on the following pages. Please refer to this
S = 1 m silicone cable
overview when placing your order. Furthermore any limits can L = 1 m PVC cable (stock model)
be specified within the limits found in the brochure. Y = special length and type
For example:
ATEX
OO Longer guide tube 0 = without
OO Longer connection cable E = ATEX Ex ia
F = ATEX Ex d
OO Different cable materials
OO Several contacts and different contact operations *Please note:
OO Wide range connections and electrical terminal boxes Contact state referred to empty tank. Simply link letters for
OO Different materials several contacts. The first letter represents the topmost
contact, the second letter the second contact from the top,
and so on. The position of the contacts, measured from
Method of Operation the sealing edge of the connection screwing, must also be
Kobold magnetic float switches are fitted with a hermetically specified.
sealed contact which is situated in the tube.
L1 = highest contact (mm) from the top (sealing edge)
The float sliding on the tube contains a ring magnet whose L2 = second contact (mm) from the top (sealing edge)
magnetic field switches the sealed contact in a non and so forth
contacting fashion. The sealed contacts are available as N/O,
N/C or changeover contacts. Guide tube length is designated as L0 (see dimensional
drawings)
The float sliding up and down on the liquid is the only moving
part in the Kobold magnetic float switches. Definition of switching points
Advantages
L1
OO Simple installation
OO Long electrical service life due to sealed contacts
L2
OO High-degree of operational reliability with air gap between

L3
guide tube and floats

L4
L0
OO Installation in top or bottom of vessel

OO Several levels can be monitored with one float
OO Open/close function or changeover contact available
1/10- 2017
2 www.kobold.com No responsibility taken for errors;

subject to change without prior notice.
Magnetic Level Switches for Liquids Model M01-M20
Float designs
Model Form Materials Float Height Bore hole Ø Min. Liquid Max. Nominal
outside Ø [mm] [mm] density temperature pressure
[mm] [kg/dm³] at 20 °C
M01 Cylinder solid material NBR 18 25 10 > 0.6 80 °C 10 bar
M02 Cylinder hollow PP 26 16 10 > 0.65 80 °C 3 bar
M03 Cylinder hollow PVC-U 26 26 10 > 0.9 55 °C 3 bar
Stainless steel
M04 Ball hollow 30 28 9 > 0.8 150 °C 15 bar
1.4404
M05 Cylinder hollow PP 42 40 14 > 0.6 80 °C 3 bar
M061) Cylinder solid material PP 40 20 14 > 0.9 90 °C 100 bar

Stainless steel
M08 Cylinder hollow 44 52 15 > 0.65 150 °C 20 bar
1.4404
Stainless steel
1.4404
Stainless steel
1.4404
M13 Cylinder hollow PVDF 38 60 18 > 0.6 125 °C 2 bar

Stainless steel
M20 Ball hollow 95 95 20.8 > 0.5 150 °C 15 bar
1.4404
1)
For model M06, one float is required for each switch point.
For all other floats two contacts can be operated with one float.
ATEX-Certificate: Supplementary devices:

II 1 GD Ex ia IIC T6 Ga / Ex ia IIIC T85 ºC Da -20 ≤ Ta ≤ 1. Contact protection relays/isolation switching amplifier
+60 ºC (LOM 14ATEX2075 X)
We recommend the use of contact protection relays in
II 1/2 G Ex d IIC T1...T6 Ga/Gb
conjunction with sealed contacts.
II 2D Ex t IIIC T410 ºC Db (LOM 14ATEX2075 X)
Contact protection relays have the following advantages:
OO No contact overloads arising from sparking and high
Mounting instructions currents, which can, for example, be caused by
Float switches can also be fitted in the bottom of vessels. self-induced emf when switching solenoid valves.
Important: The contact operation is then reversed. OO Float switches are electrically isolated from the high
Damping tube for agitated liquids voltage power supply system.
Float switches with damping tube for agitated or dirty liquids OO Protection for persons who come into contact with
can be supplied upon request. liquids according to VDE 0100.
Temperature monitoring OO Standard models:
Float switches with inegrated temperature switch, fixed Model MSR 10, 1 channel
switch point between 60 ºC and 150 ºC upon request Model MSR 20, 2 channels
Option: PT100 available Model MSR 11, 1 changeover bistable
OO ATEX-models:
Model KFD2-SR2-Ex1.W, 1 channel, 1 relay output,
supply 20 ... 30 VDC
Model KFA6-SR2-Ex1.W, 1 channel, 1 relay output,
supply 207 ... 253 VAC
Model KFD2-SR2-Ex2.W, 2 channels, 2 relays output,
supply 20 ... 30 VDC
Model KFA6-SR2-Ex2.W, 2 channels, 2 relays output,
supply 207 ... 253 VAC
1/10 - 2017
No responsibility taken for errors; www.kobold.com 3

Mini Switches Model M01-M04
Mini Switches Technical Details

Dimensions [mm] N/O contact*: 230 VAC/DC / 0.5 A / 10 VA
ATEX Ex ia: Ui: 40 V
G⅛ N/C contact*: 230 VAC/DC / 0.5 A / 10 VA
Changeover contact*: 100 VAC/DC / 0.5 A / 3 VA
14 * Note: contact state referred to empty tank and switch point distance refer
L1min = 25
to a density 1.0 kg/dm3
Cable length: 1m
L0min = 46
Installation position: vertical ± 30°

Protection type: IP 64
25
Ø18 Min. liquid density: > 0.6 kg/dm3

Max. pressure (at 20 ºC): 3 bar (PVC tube),
10 bar (brass,1.4404 tube)
Max. temp. PVC cable: 55 ºC (PVC tube), 70 ºC (brass,
Ø8 1,4404 tube)
Max. temp. silicone cable: 55 ºC (PVC tube), 80 ºC (brass,
1,4404 tube)
Max. length of guide tube: 1 m (PVC tube), 2 m (brass,
1.4404 tube)
Connection heads: see following pages
Switch point min. distance
from end of meas. tube: 21 mm (for special length)
between contacts: between L1 and L2: 28 ±3 mm
between L2 and L3: 35 ±3 mm
Hysteresis: 3 mm
Model Guide Process connection Contact Contact Contact Electr. connection ATEX
tube1) L1 L2 L32)
05) = with housing
R05 = G X = without XX = P = 1 m PVC-cable 0 = without
M01- M = brass S = N/O without
S = N/O S = 1 m silicone cable E = ATEX
(NBR E = 1.4404 XXX = see following C = N/C SX =
pages for different W = SPDT C = N/C N/O L3) = 1 m PVC-cable (stock F6) = ATEX
float) P = PVC connection heads W = SPDT CX = N/C model) Ex d
Y4) = special length and type
1)
Please specify in writing total and contact lengths
2)
Max. number of contacts 3 pieces N/O, N/C, or 2 SPDT contacts.
3)
Stock model always with one contact and minimum guide tube length, without ATEX
4)
Please specify in writing length and type of cable
5)
Only with connection head
6)
Only available with guide tube option »E« (1.4404) and connection head »L«
1/10- 2017

Mini switches Technical Details

L1min =17

Cable length: 1m
L0min = 40

16

Max. pressure (at 20 ºC): 3 bar
Max. temp. PVC cable: 70 ºC
Max. temp. silicone cable: 80 ºC
Ø8 Max. length of guide tube: 2m
from end of meas. tube: 23 mm
Hysteresis: 3 mm
tube1) L1 L2 L32)
X = 05) = with housing
R05 = G 0 = without
M02- S = N/O without XX = without P = 1 m PVC-cable
M = brass XXX = see following E = ATEX
(PP C = N/C S = N/O SX = N/O S = 1 m silicone cable
E = 1.4404 pages for different F6) = ATEX
float) W = SPDT C = N/C CX = N/C L3) = 1 m PVC-cable (stock model)
connection heads Ex d
W = SPDT Y4) = special length and type
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
1/10 - 2017

Mini Switches Technical Details

N/C contact*: 230 VAC/DC / 0.5 A / 10 VA
G⅜ or PG7 ATEX Ex ia: Ui: 40 V
* Note: contact state referred to empty tank and switch point distance refer
L1min = 15
Cable length: 1m
Ø8
L0min = 49
Min. liquid density: > 0.9 kg/dm3
Ø26
26

Max. temperature: 55 ºC
Max. length of guide tube: 1m
from end of meas. tube: 32 mm (for special length)
34 mm (for L0: 49 mm)
Hysteresis: 3 mm
tube1) L1 L2 L32)
05) = with housing
R10 = G X = without XX = P = 1 m PVC-cable
M03- PG7 = Pg7 S = N/O 0 = without
S = N/O without S = 1 m silicone cable
(PVC P = PVC XXX = see following C = N/C E = ATEX Ex
C = N/C SX = N/O L3) = 1 m PVC-cable (stock
float) pages for different W = SPDT ia
connection heads W = SPDT CX = N/C model)
1)
2)
3)
Stock model always with one contact and minimum guide tube length, without ATEX, including counter nut
4)
5)
1/10- 2017

Mini switches Technical Details


L1min = 24

Cable length: 1m
L0min = 50

28

Ø8 Connection heads: see following pages
Ø30 from end of meas. tube: 30 mm (for special length)
26 mm (for L0: 50 mm)
Hysteresis: 3 mm
tube1) L1 L2 L32)
05) = with housing
X = 0 = without
R05 = G without XX = P = 1 m PVC-cable
M04- S = N/O E = ATEX
M = brass without S = 1 m silicone cable
XXX = see following C = N/C S = N/O Ex ia
(1.4404 SX = N/O
E = 1.4404 pages for different 3)
L = 1 m PVC-cable (stock
float) W = SPDT C = N/C F6) = ATEX
connection heads CX = N/C model)
W = SPDT Ex d
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
1/10 - 2017

Standard Switches Model M05-M20
Cylindrical float made of polypropylene Technical Details

Dimensions [mm] N/O contact*: 230 VAC/DC / 1 A / 60 VA
G⅜ ATEX Ex ia: Ui: 40 V
N/C contact*: 230 VAC/DC / 1 A / 60 VA
Changeover contact*: 230 VAC/DC / 1 A / 60 VA
Cable length: 1m
L1 min = 40

L0 min = 85
Max. pressure (at 20ºC): 3 bar

40

Hysteresis: 5 mm
Ø42
Model Guide Process Contact Contact Contact Contact Electr. connection ATEX
tube1) connection L1 L2 L3 L42)
R10 = G
04) = with housing 0 = without
XXX = see X = without X = without X =
S = N/O P = 1 m PVC-cable E = ATEX
M05- M = brass following S = N/O S = N/O without
pages for C = N/C S = 1 m silicone cable Ex ia
(PP float) E = 1.4404 C = N/C C = N/C S = N/O
different W = SPDT Y3) = special length F5) = ATEX
connection W = SPDT W = SPDT C = N/C
and type Ex d
heads
1)
2)
Max. number of contacts 4 pieces N/O, N/C, or 3 SPDT contacts
3)
4)
5)
1/10- 2017

High-pressure applications Technical Details

Cable length: 1m
L1 mi n = 30
L0 mi n = 85

20

Hysteresis: 5 mm
Ø40
R10 = G
X = X = 04) = with housing 0 = without
XXX = see without without
S = N/O X = without P = 1 m PVC-cable E = ATEX
M06- M = brass following
pages for C = N/C S = N/O S = N/O S = N/O S = 1 m silicone cable Ex ia
(PP float) E = 1.4404
different W = SPDT C = N/C C = N/C C = N/C Y3) = special length F5) = ATEX
connection W = SPDT W = SPDT and type Ex d
heads
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
1/10 - 2017

Cylindrical float and tube made of PVC Technical Details

22
L 1 min = 35
Cable length: 1m
Ø12 Installation position: vertical ± 30°
L 0 min = 75

40

Ø42 between contacts: between L1 and L2: 45 ±3 mm
Hysteresis: 5 mm
R10 = G
X = X = 04) = with housing
XXX = see without without X = 0 = without
S = N/O
M07- following without P = 1 m PVC-cable E = ATEX
P = PVC C = N/C S = N/O S = N/O
(PVC float)
pages for S = N/O S = 1 m silicone cable Ex ia
different W = SPDT C = N/C C = N/C Y3) = special length
connection C = N/C
W = SPDT W = SPDT and type
heads
1)
2)
3)
4)
1/10- 2017

Cylindrical float made of stainless steel 1.4404 Technical Details

22
Cable length: 1m
L1 min = 35
L0 min = 85

52

Hysteresis: 5 mm
Ø44
R10 = G
X = 04) = with housing 0 = without
XXX = see X = without X =
S = N/O without P = 1 m PVC-cable
M08- M = brass following S = N/O without E = ATEX
pages for C = N/C S = N/O S = 1 m silicone cable Ex ia
(1.4404 float) E = 1.4404 C = N/C S = N/O
different W = SPDT C = N/C F5) = ATEX
C = N/C Y3) = special length
connection W = SPDT Ex d
W = SPDT and type
heads
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
1/10 - 2017

Ball float made of stainless steel 1.4404 Technical Details

Cable length: 1m
L1 min = 40

L0 min = 85

52

Hysteresis: 5 mm
Ø52
R10 = G
X = X = 04) = with housing 0 = without
XXX = see S = N/O without without X =
following without P = 1 m PVC-cable E = ATEX
M10- M = brass C = N/C
pages for S = N/O S = N/O S = 1 m silicone cable Ex ia
(1.4404 float) E = 1.4404 W= S = N/O
different C = N/C C = N/C Y3) = special length F5) = ATEX
connection SPDT C = N/C
W = SPDT W = SPDT and type Ex d
heads
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
1/10- 2017

Adjustable for height Technical Details

Cable length: 1m
G½ Protection type: IP 65
L1 mi n = 45

Ø12 Max. pressure (at 20 ºC): 30 bar
L0 mi n = 90

52

Hysteresis: 5 mm
Ø52
X = X =
without without X = P = 1 m PVC-cable
S = N/O 0 = without
M11- M = brass without S = 1 m silicone cable
R15 = G ½ C = N/C S = N/O S = N/O E = ATEX Ex
(1.4404 float) E = 1.4404 S = N/O Y3) = special length
W = SPDT C = N/C C = N/C ia
C = N/C and type
W = SPDT W = SPDT
1)
2)
3)
1/10 - 2017

PVDF design Technical Details

10
Ø25
Cable length: 1m
L1min = 33
Ø16
L0min = 100

60

Hysteresis: 5 mm
Ø38
R10 = G
X = X = 04) = with housing
XXX = see without without X =
S = N/O
M13- following without P = 1 m PVC-cable 0 = without
S = PVDF pages for C = N/C S = N/O S = N/O
(PVDF float) S = N/O S = 1 m silicone cable E = ATEX
different W = SPDT C = N/C C = N/C Y3) = special length Ex ia
connection C = N/C
W = SPDT W = SPDT and type
heads
1)
2)
3)
4)
1/10- 2017

PVC flange design Technical Details

60


DN 80
Max. temp.: 55 ºC
L1min = 38

Ø16 from end of meas. tube: 52 mm
L0min = 90

Hysteresis: 5 mm
60
Ø60
X = without X = without
S = N/O X = without 0 = without
M16- S = N/O S = N/O
P = PVC F80 = DN80 C = N/C S = N/O 0 = with housing E = ATEX
(PVC float) C = N/C C = N/C
W = SPDT C = N/C Ex ia
W = SPDT W = SPDT
1)
2)
1/10 - 2017

Heavy-duty design Technical Details

G½ ATEX Ex ia: Ui: 40 V
27 to a density 1.0 kg/dm3
Cable length: 1m
L1mi n = 70
Ø18
L0mi n = 135

95

Hysteresis: 5 mm
Ø95
Model Guide tube1) Process Contact Contact Contact Contact Electr. connection ATEX
connection L1 L2 L3 L42)
R15 = G ½ 0 = without cable

XXX = see X = without X = without P = 1 m PVC-
S = N/O X = without cable 0 = without
M20- following S = N/O S = N/O
E = 1.4404 pages for C = N/C S = N/O S = 1 m silicone E = ATEX Ex ia
(1.4404 float) C = N/C C = N/C
different W = SPDT C = N/C cable F4) = ATEX Ex d
connection W = SPDT W = SPDT
Y = special length
3)
heads and type

1)
2)
3)
4)
Only available for head model »L«
1/10- 2017

Connection Heads for Guide Tube 8 ... 12 mm Ø Model M01-M20
Model 1 PP screwed cover housing
Dimensions and materials

Model Process Width Electrical Overall Screwed Thread tmax
connection across connection height fitting length
C (A)1) flats (B) (C) D) (E) (F)2)
D
...R6 = G 1 27 AF 18 mm
...R8 = G 1½ 30 AF 22 mm
...R9 = G 2 36 AF 24 mm
B
1... PG16 100 mm PP 90 ºC
...N6 = 1" NPT 27 AF 25 mm
E
...N8 = 1½" NPT 30 AF 25 mm
F
...N9 = 2" NPT 36 AF 27 mm

1)
Size of process connection must be according with float size
2)
Given lengths L0, L1... are always with thread included.
A
Model 2/4 Aluminium housing

connection across connection height fitting length2)
(A)1) flats (C) (D) (E) (F)
C
D
(B)
...R6 =G1 27 AF 18 mm
B ...R8 = G 1½ 30 AF 22 mm
...R9 =G2 36 AF 24 mm
2 ... M16 x 1.5 73 mm Brass 90 ºC
F
E ...N6 = 1" NPT 27 AF 25 mm

...N8 = 1½" NPT 30 AF 25 mm
...N9 = 2" NPT 36 AF 27 mm
A ...R6 =G1 27 AF 18 mm
...R8 = G 1½ 30 AF 22 mm
...R9 =G2 36 AF 24 mm
4 ... M16 x 1.5 73 mm 1.4404 90 ºC
...N6 = 1" NPT 27 AF 25 mm
...N8 = 1½" NPT 30 AF 25 mm
...N9 = 2" NPT 36 AF 27 mm
1)
2)
Model 3 PA screwed cover housing

C (A)1) flats (B) (C) (D) (E) (F)
...R6 = G 1 27 AF 18 mm
D
...R8 = G 1½ 30 AF 22 mm
...R9 = G 2 36 AF 24 mm
3 ... M16 x 1.5 104 mm 1.4404 90 ºC
B ...N6 = 1" NPT 27 AF 25 mm
E ...N8 = 1½" NPT 30 AF 25 mm
F
...N9 = 2" NPT 36 AF 27 mm

1)
2)
A Given lengths L0, L1... are always with thread included.
1/10 - 2017

Connection Heads for Guide Tube 8 ... 12 mm Ø Model M01-M20
Model 5 ABS Housing

C (A)1) flats (B) (C) (D) (E) (F)
D
...R6 = G 1 27 AF 18 mm
...R8 = G 1½ 30 AF 22 mm
...R9 = G 2 36 AF 24 mm
B 5 ... M16 x 1.5 100 mm PVC 55 ºC
...N6 = 1" NPT 27 AF 25 mm
F
E ...N8 = 1½" NPT 30 AF 25 mm

...N9 = 2" NPT 36 AF 27 mm
1)
A 2)
Model 6 PA Screwed cover housing

C (A)1) flats (B) (C) (D) (E) (F)
...R8 = G 1½ 22 mm
D
6 ... 30 AF M16 x 1.5 104 mm PVDF 90 ºC

...N8 = 1½" NPT 25 mm
1)
B 2)
E
F
Model 7/8 Threaded process connection with PA connector DIN 43650 (3 pin),
DIN VDE 0627 (6 pin)
C
(A)1) flats (B) (C) (D) (E) (F)
D
...R6 = G 1 27 AF 18 mm
...R8 = G 1½ 30 AF 22 mm
B 7... ...R9 = G 2 36 AF 24 mm
M16 x 1.5 65 mm PP 90 ºC
(3-pin) ...N6 = 1" NPT 27 AF 25 mm
...N8 = 1½" NPT 30 AF 25 mm
F
E
...N9 = 2" NPT 36 AF 27 mm
...R6 = G 1 27 AF 18 mm
...R8 = G 1½ 30 AF 22 mm
8 ... ...R9 = G 2 36 AF 24 mm
A (6-pin) ...N6 = 1" NPT 27 AF
PG7 50 mm PP
25 mm
90 ºC
...N8 = 1½" NPT 30 AF 25 mm

...N9 = 2" NPT 36 AF 27 mm
1)
2)
1/10- 2017

Connecting Flanges for Guide Tube 8 ... 12 mm Ø Model M01-M20
Model 7PP, 8PP Oval flange process connection with PA connector DIN 43650 (3 pin),
C
D
E Model Electrical Overall height Oval flange tmax

connection (C) (D) (E)
6
7PP
M16 x 1.5 65 mm PP 90 ºC
(3-pin)
8PP
PG7 45 mm PP 90 ºC
(6-pin)
6.5
50
55
80
Model 7MS ... 8PV Round flange process connection with PA connector DIN 43650 (3 pin),
C
Model Flange (E) Overall height Electrical tmax
D
E
(D) connection (C)
5
...MS = Brass
3-pole
7... ...VA = 1.4404 65 mm 90 ºC
M16 x 1.5
...PV = PVC
...MS = Brass
5.5
60
74
6-pole
8 ... ...VA = 1.4404 45 mm 90 ºC
PG7
...PV = PVC
Flanged process connection acc. DIN EN1092-1 PN16 / ANSI B 16.5 150 lbs
Model 9 with aluminium housing
Model Flange size 1.4404 D b LK Ø d1 Electrical tmax
C connection (C)
54
d1
...F8 = DN 40 150 16 110 4 x Ø 18
...F9 = DN 50 165 18 125 4 x Ø 18
b
...F0 = DN 65 185 18 145 4 x Ø 18

...FB = DN 80 200 20 160 4 x Ø 18
LKØ ...FC = DN 100 220 20 180 8 x Ø 18
D ...FD = DN 125 250 22 210 8 x Ø 18
9... M16 x 1.5 90 ºC
...A8 = 1½" 127 17.5 98.6 4 x Ø 15.7
...A9 = 2" 152.4 19.1 120.7 4 x Ø 19.1
...A0 = 2½" 177.8 22.4 139.7 4 x Ø 19.1
...AB = 3" 190.5 23.9 152.4 4 x Ø 19.1
...AV = 3½" 215.0 23.9 177.8 8 x Ø 19.1
...AC = 4" 228.6 23.9 190.5 8 x Ø 19.1
1/10 - 2017

Connecting Headsfor Guide Tube 8 ... 12 mm Ø Model M01-M20
Model L Aluminium housing, for application ATEX II GD Ex d IIC T1...T6

connection across flats connection height fitting length2)
(A)1) (B) (C) (D) (E) (F)
D
...R6 = G 1 27 AF 18 mm
...R8 = G 1½ 30 AF 22 mm
B ...R9 = G 2 36 AF 24 mm
E
L ... M20 x 1.5 145 mm 1.4404 90 ºC
F
...N6 = 1" NPT 27 AF 25 mm
...N8 = 1½" NPT 30 AF 25 mm

A
...N9 = 2" NPT 36 AF 27 mm
1)
2
) Given lengths L0, L1... are always with thread included.
Heads Selector for Magnetic Level Model M

Heads M01 M02 M03 M04 M05 M06 M07 M08 M10 M11 M13 M16 M20
Ø18 mm Ø26 mm Ø26 mm Ø30 mm Ø42 mm Ø40 mm Ø42 mm Ø44 mm Ø52 mm Ø52 mm Ø38 mm Ø60 mm Ø95 mm
1R6 x x x x
1R8 x x x x x x x x x
1R9 x x x x x x x x x x x
1N6 x x x
1N8 x x x x x x x x
1N9 x x x x x x x x x x x
2R6 x x x x
2N6 x x x
2N8 x x x x x x x x
3R6 x x x x
3N6 x x x
3N8 x x x x x x x x
4R6 x x x x
4N6 x x x
4N8 x x x x x x x x
5R6 x x x x
1/10- 2017

Heads Selector Model M01-M20
Heads Selector for Magnetic Level Model M (continued)

Heads M01 M02 M03 M04 M05 M06 M07 M08 M10 M11 M13 M16 M20
Ø18 mm Ø26 mm Ø26 mm Ø30 mm Ø42 mm Ø40 mm Ø42 mm Ø44 mm Ø52 mm Ø52 mm Ø38 mm Ø60 mm Ø95 mm
5N6 x x x
5N8 x x x x x x x x
6N8 x x x x x x x x
7R6 x x x x
7N6 x x x
7N8 x x x x x x x x
7PP x x x x x x x
7MS x x x x x x x x x
7VA x x x x x x x x x
7PV x x x x x x x x x
8R6 x x x x
8N6 x x x
8N8 x x x x x x x x
8PP x x x x x x x
8MS x x x x x x x x x
8VA x x x x x x x x x
8PV x x x x x x x x x
For flanged connection, please ensure that float diameter is less than flange hole diameter!
9F8 x x x x x
9F9 x x x x x x x x x
9F0 x x x x x x x x x x x x
9FB x x x x x x x x x x x x
9FC x x x x x x x x x x x x x
9FD x x x x x x x x x x x x x
9A8 x x x x
9A9 x x x x x x x x x
9A0 x x x x x x x x x x x x
9AB x x x x x x x x x x x x
9AV x x x x x x x x x x x x x
9AC x x x x x x x x x x x x x
1/10 - 2017

Contact protection relay Model M01-M20
Technical Details
Model MSR
Model KFA6-SR2-Ex1.W (Single channel)
Power supply: 230 VAC -10/+6 % 50 - 60 Hz ATEX-approval: II (1) G [Ex ia] IIC,
II (1) D [Ex ia] IIIC
Power consumption: max. 6 VA
Ex / I.S. data, ATEX-:
Relay output: MSR-010 U o: 10.6 V
(1 floating changeover contact) Io: 19.1 mA
MSR-020 P o: 51 mW
(2 floating changeover contact) U m: 253 VAC
MSR-011
(1 floating changeover contact Power supply: 207 ... 253 VAC, 45 ... 65 Hz
bistable) Power consumption: max. 1 W
max. 250 VAC, 8 A Relay Output: max. 253 VAC, 2A
Details: see datasheet Details: see datasheet
Model KFA6-SR2-Ex2.W (Double channel) Model KFD2-SR2-Ex1.W (Single channel)

ATEX-approval: II (1) G [Ex ia] IIC, ATEX-approval: II (1) G [Ex ia] IIC,
II (1) D [Ex ia] IIIC II (1) D [Ex ia] IIIC
Ex / I.S. data, ATEX: Ex / I.S. data, ATEX-:
U o: 10.6 V U o: 10.5 V
I o: 19.1 mA Io: 13 mA
Po: 51 mW P o: 34 mW
Um: 253 VAC U m: 253 VAC
Power supply: 20 ... 30 VDC, 45 ... 65 Hz
Power supply: 207 ... 253 VAC, 45 ... 65 Hz
Power consumption: max. 0.9 W
Power consumption: max. 1 W
Relay Output: max. 253 VAC, 2A
Relay Output: max. 253 VAC, 2 A
Details: see datasheet
Model KFD2-SR2-Ex2.W (Double channel)

ATEX-approval: II(1) G [Ex ia] IIC,
II (1) D [Ex ia] IIIC
Ex / I.S. data, ATEX:
Uo: 10.5 V
I o: 13 mA
Po: 34 mW
Um: 253 VAC
Power supply: 20 ... 30 VDC
Power consumption: max. 0.9 W
Relay Output: max. 253 VAC, 2 A
1/10- 2017

Wiring diagram contact protection relay Model M01-M20
Standard models
MSR010 MSR011 MSR020
Supply M SERIES Supply M SERIES Supply M SERIES M SERIES

230 V
230VA AC
C CONTAC T 230 VAAC
230V C CONTACT 230 VAACC
230V CONTAC T CONTAC T
L 42 12 13 L 42 12 13 11 L 42 52 12 13 22 23
MSR 010 MSR 011 MSR 020
42 L N
42 L N 42 52 L N
12 22
12
12
~
~ ~
DC DC
13
13 13
11
41 43 82 81 23
41 43 82 81
41 43 51 53 82 81
41 43 82 81 N
41 43 82 81 N 41 43 51 53 82 81 N
ATEX Ex ia models
KFD2-SR2-Ex2.W (Double channel) KFD2-SR2-Ex1.W (Single channel)

KFA6-SR2-Ex2.W (Double channel) KFA6-SR2-Ex1.W (Single channel)
Hazardous Safe Hazardous Safe

Zone Zone Zone Zone
M SE R I E S
M SE R I E S
Rela y C. Relay C.
CONTACT
CONTACT
7 7
1 1
2
8 Rela y N.O. 2
8 Relay N.O.
3 9 Rela y N.C. 3 9 Relay N.C.
Rela y C.
M SE R I E S
10
CONTACT
4
11 Rela y N.O.
5
12 Rela y N.C.
6
14 14
Supply Supply
15 15
KFD2-SR2-Ex2.W supply: 20 ... 30 VDC KFD2-SR2-Ex1.W supply: 20 ... 30 VDC

KFA6-SR2-Ex2.W supply: 207 ... 253 VAC KFA6-SR2-Ex1.W supply: 207 ... 253 VAC
1/10 - 2017

GEL 260
Magnetisch-inkrementaler Drehgeber
Magnetic Incremental Encoder
Betriebsanleitung
Inhalt Contents
1. Allgemeine Sicherheitshinweise ......... 3 1. General safety instructions .............. 13
2. Beschreibung ..................................... 4 2. Description....................................... 14
3. Typenschlüssel .................................. 7 3. Type code........................................ 17
4. Montage ............................................. 8 4. Mounting.......................................... 18
D-71B-260 (2.1)
5. Elektrischer Anschluss ....................... 9 5. Electrical connection........................ 19

6. Technische Daten ............................ 11 6. Technical data ................................. 21
7. Maßbilder ......................................... 23 7. Dimensioned drawings .................... 23
Irrtum und technische Änderungen Right to technical changes and

vorbehalten errors reserved. 2012-02
Lenord, Bauer & Co. GmbH Doc. No. D-71B-260 (2.1)
Dohlenstrasse 32
46145 Oberhausen  Germany
Fon: +49 (0)208 9963-0  Fax: +49 (0)208 676292
Internet: http://www.lenord.de  E-Mail: info@lenord.de
2 GEL 260
Betriebsanleitung Deutsch
1. Allgemeine Sicherheitshinweise

Zur Erhaltung der Funktionsfähigkeit des Drehgebers unbedingt folgende Punkte
beachten:
 Drehgeber nur über eine flexible Kupplung mit der Antriebswelle verbinden
 Drehgeber vor mechanischen Beschädigungen schützen (bei Einbau und Betrieb,
siehe dazu die Handhabungshinweise in Kapitel 4).
 Einbau-, Anschluss- und Service-Arbeiten nur von qualifiziertem und geschultem
Fachpersonal durchführen lassen, unter Berücksichtigung der einschlägigen
Unfallverhütungs- und Sicherheitsvorschriften sowie der Angaben in dieser
Betriebsanleitung.
 Drehgeber nicht öffnen oder auseinander nehmen. Notwendige Reparaturen dürfen
nur von LENORD+BAUER oder einer davon ausdrücklich ermächtigten Stelle
durchgeführt werden.
 Die in der Produktdokumentation angegeben Grenzwerte unbedingt einhalten.
 Buchstabenanordnung in der Steckerbelegung (Kapitel 5) beachten: Ein häufig
auftretender Fehler ist das spiegelbildliche Anschließen von Leitungen an den
Gegenstecker.

Drehgeber nur bestimmungsgemäß verwenden:
Die Drehgeber GEL 260 sind ausschließlich für Messaufgaben im industriellen und
gewerblichen Bereich bestimmt. Mit ihnen können Positionen, Längen, Winkel oder
Drehzahlen gemessen werden.
Sie gelten als Zubehörteil einer Anlage und erfordern den Anschluss an eine spezielle
Auswertelektronik, wie sie ein Positioniercontroller oder ein elektronischer Zähler
enthält.
Zur bestimmungsgemäßen Verwendung gehört auch, dass alle in der Produkt-
dokumentation gegebenen Hinweise beachtet werden.
Eine andere oder darüber hinausgehende Verwendung gilt als nicht bestimmungs-
gemäß. Für hieraus entstehende Schäden haftet die Firma LENORD, BAUER & CO.
GMBH nicht.
Hinweis in eigener Sache

Die Betriebsanleitung wurde mit größter Sorgfalt erstellt. Es kann jedoch keine Gewähr für
Fehlerfreiheit übernommen werden.
Die Betriebsanleitung ist bestimmt für den Betreiber bzw. Anlagenbauer sowie dessen
Personal. Bitte bewahren Sie sie sorgfältig auf, so dass sie auch für einen möglichen
späteren Serviceeinsatz am Drehgeber zur Verfügung steht. Bei Weitergabe des Gebers
an Dritte bitte auch diese Betriebsanleitung mitgeben.
GEL 260 3
Deutsch Betriebsanleitung
2. Beschreibung
Einsatzbereich
Die Drehgeber GEL 260 sind robuste Signalgeber für die Messung von Rotations-
bewegungen oder Positionen. Sie sind für den Einsatz in rauer Umgebung geeignet, da
sie eine hohe Beständigkeit gegen Betauung, Spritz- und Kondenswasser sowie einen
großen Temperaturbereich von 0 °C bis +70 °C, optional sogar von -20 °C bis +85 °C
aufweisen.
Ausgegeben werden diverse Rechtecksignale (siehe Signalmuster weiter unten), die eine
eindeutige Richtungserkennung zulassen und – im Fall von optionalen inversen Signalen –
eine hohe Datensicherheit garantieren. Ein optionaler Referenzimpuls kann zum
Referenzieren der Anlage herangezogen werden. Ein ebenfalls optionaler Tachoausgang
liefert einen drehzahlabhängigen Strom.
Die Spannungsversorgung beträgt 5 V DC oder 10…30 V DC (siehe Signalmuster weiter
unten).
Aufbau und Ausführungen

Die Drehgeber enthalten
 ein berührungsloses magnetisches Abtastsystem (Magnetfeldsensor),
 ein Zahnrad als Maßverkörperung,
 eine Elektronik mit Auswerte- und Treiber-ASICs
 eine massive Welle mit wählbarem Durchmesser/Länge,
 einen radialen oder axialen Stecker- oder Kabelabgang.
Optionen enthalten z. B. einen Kondenswasserauslass oder einen zusätzlichen Feuchtig-
keits- und Vibrationsschutz der Elektronik für den Betrieb in rauer Umgebung.
Funktionsprinzip
Das Magnetfeld des Sensors im Drehgeber wird durch das sich drehende, interne Zahnrad
(Maßverkörperung) verändert. Die Magnetfeldänderung wird vom Sensor erfasst und in
entsprechende sinusförmige Messsignale umgesetzt. Eine interne Auswertelektronik
generiert daraus die rechteckförmigen Ausgangssignale und – optional – einen drehzahl-
abhängigen Strom.
Signalmuster
a) S, SN S p u r 1
S p u r 2 U B U S
1 0 ... 3 0 V D C H T L
ti ts
S p u r N
( O p tio n )
ti: Impulsdauer 20 µs (wahlweise auch 5 µs oder 100 µs)

ts: Verzögerungszeit 10 µs (wahlweise auch 2 µs oder 30 µs)
Bei einem Drehrichtungswechsel folgen die Impulse mit einer kurzen Ver-
zögerung (ts), damit die nachfolgende Zählschaltung sich ohne Impuls-
verlust darauf einstellen kann. Das Richtungssignal (Spur 1) kann mit DIP-
Schalter S1 invertiert werden (siehe Seite 6).
Die bei der Bestellung angegebene Impulsbreite ti ist auf dem Typenschild
vermerkt (z.B. 't=5 µs'). Die Verzögerungszeit ts wurde abhängig von ti ein-
gestellt:
4 GEL 260
ti 5 µs 20 µs 100 µs
ts 2 µs 10 µs 10 µs oder 30 µs
b) V, VN 360° el.
Spur 1
90°
UB US
Spur 2
10 ... 30 VDC HTL
tF
Spur N
(Option)
tF: Flankenabstand bei 200 kHz  0,6 µs (gilt für alle Signalmuster außer S/SN)
c) T, TN; Spur 1
U, UN;
X, XN Spur 1
UB US
T(N) 5 VDC ± 5% TTL
Spur 2 U(N) 10 ... 30 VDC TTL
X(N) 10 ... 30 VDC HTL
Spur 2
Spur N
(Option)
Spur N
Signaldarstellung für Rechtslauf bei Sicht auf die Geberwelle;

UB = Betriebsspannung, US = Signalamplitude
Stromausgang (Option)
Für Anzeige- und Regelzwecke kann aus der Impulsfrequenz ein drehzahl- und gegebe-
nenfalls drehrichtungsabhängiger Messstrom von 0 ... 20 mA, 4 ... 20 mA oder -20 ....
+20 mA gewonnen werden. Hierzu wird die Impulsfrequenz integriert und in einen
drehzahlabhängigen Ausgangsstrom umgewandelt. Es ergibt sich ein streng linearer
Zusammenhang zwischen dem Messstrom und der Impulsfrequenz.
Infolge der hohen Auflösung (bis zu 273.408 drehrich-
t
tungsabhängige Impulse pro Umdrehung) erhält man v
schon bei einem sehr niedrigen Drehzahlbereich (z. B. 90 %

Ausgangsstrom Ia
-1
0…0,5 min ) einen Messgleichstrom mit geringem Ober-
wellenanteil, der abhängig ist von der Impulsfrequenz und 50 %
der gewählten Dämpfung d. Letztere wiederum beeinflusst
die Anstiegs-, Abfall- und Verzögerungszeit bei sprung-
hafter Änderung der Drehzahl. 10 %
Die Dämpfung wurde entsprechend nachfolgendem Dia- t t a
gramm werkseitig eingestellt (bei der Bestellung ange-

geben; Standard: d3). Anstiegszeit ta und Verzögerungszeit tv
bei einer sprunghaften Drehzahl-
änderung
GEL 260 5
% Die Drehzahl für den Maximal-

1 0 0 2 2 4 ,7 1 ,0 0 ,2 2 0 ,1 1 m s A n s tie g s z e it ta strom 20 mA, die bei der Be-
8 0 1 7 3 ,7 0 ,8 0 ,1 7 0 ,0 8 m s V e r z ö g .- Z e it tv
2 0 stellung angegeben wurde, ist
d 5 d 4 d 3 d 2 d 1 d 0 D ä m p fu n g d auf dem Typenschild vermerkt
O b e r w e lle n a n te il F
1 0
(z.B. '4000 min-1'). Die Dämpfung
5
wurde werksseitig so eingestellt,
2 dass der Oberwellenanteil p bei
1
Nenndrehzahl  1% ist; sie ist
ebenfalls auf dem Typenschild
0 ,5
angegeben (z. B. 'd5').
0 ,2
0 ,1
1 0 2 0 5 0 1 0 0 2 0 0 5 0 0 1 k 2 k 5 k 1 0 k 2 0 k 5 0 k 1 0 0 k 2 0 0 k H z
e ffe k tiv e Im p u ls fr e q u e n z B
ta, tv = f (d ) p = I e ff / I a f = n · i [H z ]
Oberwellenanteil des Ausgangsstroms in Abhängigkeit von der Impuls-
frequenz und der wählbaren Dämpfung
Ausgangsvarianten
I
Drehrichtungsabhängiger Messstrom mit einem Nennbereich von
A: n
-20...+20 mA (invertierbar über DIP-Schalter S2, siehe unten)
I
Drehrichtungsunabhängiger Messstrom mit einem Nennbereich von
B: n
0...+20 mA
I
Drehrichtungsunabhängiger Messstrom mit einem Nennbereich von
C: n
+4...20 mA
Die Polarität des Stromes lässt sich durch den von außen
zugänglichen DIP-Schalter S2 umkehren.
Drehgeber mit Signalmuster S:

Das drehrichtungsabhängige S-Signal (Spur 1) wird mit S2
ebenfalls invertiert. Dies kann durch zusätzliches Um-
schalten von S1 wieder rückgängig gemacht werden. S1 S2
DIP-Schalter 1 und 2 hinter der
Schraubkappe auf der Geber-
rückseite
Daten
max. Bürde Ra 550 
Messgeräte-Klasse K 1
Nennstromtoleranz <1%
Linearitätsfehler <1%
Reproduzierbarkeit r 100 %
Temperaturdrift IaT < ±3 µA/°K
min. Drehzahl (für Dämpfung d5) nmin el. 1,5  103 / i min-1 (i = Nennimpulszahl)
max. Drehzahl nmax el. 6  10 / i min 6 -1
6 GEL 260
3. Typenschlüssel
GEL 260 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
       
 Stromausgang
– ohne
A -20 … +20 mA
B 0 … +20 mA
C +4 … +20 mA
 Signalmuster (jeweils 2 Spuren, siehe auch Seite 4)
S Zählimpulse mit Richtungssignal, HTL-Pegel (UB = 10…30 VDC)
V um 90° versetzte Zählimpulse, HTL (UB = 10…30 VDC)
X um 90° versetzte Zählimpulse mit inversen Signalen, HTL (UB = 10…30 VDC)
U um 90° versetzte Zählimpulse mit inversen Signalen, TTL (UB = 10…30 VDC)
T um 90° versetzte Zählimpulse mit inversen Signalen, TTL (UB = 5 VDC)
 Referenzimpuls
– ohne
N mit
 Impulszahl
10 … 10.240
 Anschluss (Gegenstecker im Lieferumfang enthalten)
A 6-poliger Stecker, axial
B 6-poliger Stecker, radial
C 12-poliger Stecker, axial
D 12-poliger Stecker, radial
E 7-adriges Kabel, nur EEx-Version
F 6-adriges Kabel, axial Jede Ader des Kabels muss im
Anschlussgehäuse (siehe Maß-
G 6-adriges Kabel, radial
bilder) aufgelegt werden;
H 10-adriges Kabel, axial Kabellänge 2 m, andere
I 10-adriges Kabel, radial Längen auf Anfrage
K 12-adriges Kabel, nur EEx-Version
 Wellendurchmesser/-länge
0 12/30 mm (Standard), 12/27 mm (EEx) Auf Wunsch sind die Drehgeber
1 6/13 mm anstatt mit Wellendichtring auch mit
2 8/30 mm einer Kugellagerabdeckscheibe
3 8/30 mm WF (IP50) für ein niedrigeres Anlauf-
drehmoment lieferbar
4 10/30 mm
5 10/30 mm WF WF = Welle zusätzlich mit
7 12/30 mm WF Scheibenfeder DIN 6888
 Schutz der Elektronik
0 ohne zusätzlichen Schutz (Standard)
1 Feuchtigkeitsschutz
2 Vibrationsschutz
3 Feuchtigkeitsschutz und Vibrationsschutz Fortsetzung 
4 Feuchtigkeitsschutz und Kondenswasserauslass
GEL 260 7
5 Feuchtigkeits- und Vibrationsschutz, Kondenswasserauslass

6 Schutzart EEx mit GEL 260 ohne zusätzlichen Schutz
7 Schutzart EEx mit GEL 260 und Feuchtigkeitsschutz
8 Schutzart EEx mit GEL 260 und Vibrationsschutz
9 Schutzart EEx mit GEL 260 und Feuchtigkeits- und Vibrationsschutz
 Temperaturbereich
1 0 … +70 °C
3 -20 … +85 °C
Ein Typenschlüssel der Form 260 Y … bezeichnet eine kundenspezifische Aus-

führung mit einer möglichen Spezialkonfektionierung oder Abweichung von den
technischen Standardspezifikationen.
4. Montage
Bitte für die Montage folgende Hinweise beachten:
Den Drehgeber weder Drehgeber und Antriebs-
teilweise noch ganz welle nicht mit einer
öffnen und/oder demon- starren Kupplung ver-
tieren; dies gilt besonders binden
für das Schutzgehäuse Es könnten zu hohe Kräfte
des GEL 260 EEx auf die Lagerung ausgeübt
Sie könnten ihn beschädi- werden. Elastische, aber
gen und die weitere Funk- drehsteife Kupplungen ver-
tion beeinträchtigen (Verlust wenden! Diese können ab
des Explosionsschutzes!). Werk geliefert werden (bitte
Kontakt aufnehmen für
nähere Informationen).
Drehgeber so montieren, Drehgeber mit Kondens-

dass die Funktion des wasserauslass so
Gerätes nicht beeinträch- einbauen, dass der
tigt wird Stopfen nach unten zeigt
Keine höheren axialen Nicht auf die Welle oder

oder radialen Kräfte auf das Gehäuse schlagen
die Welle ausüben, als in oder treten
den technischen Daten Dies könnte zu äußeren
angegeben und inneren Beschädi-
gungen des Gebers führen.
Die Welle nicht anbohren
oder anschleifen
Dies könnte Beschädigun-
gen im Inneren des Dreh-
gebers verursachen.
8 GEL 260
5. Elektrischer Anschluss
EGB-Hinweise (Elektrostatisch gefährdete Bauelemente)
Wie bei jedem elektronischen Gerät sind auch beim Anschluss des Dreh-
geber GEL 260 EGB-Vorsichtsmaßnahmen zu treffen. Grundsätzlich gilt,
dass elektronische Baugruppen – insbesondere Steckerstifte
und Anschlussdrähte – nur dann berührt werden sollen, wenn
dies wegen daran vorzunehmender Arbeiten unvermeidbar ist.
Der genaue Umfang richtet sich nach den örtlichen Gegebenheiten. S T O P
Detaillierte Auskunft gibt die DIN EN 100 015-1 (CECC 00015-1).
Im allgemeinen ist eine leitfähige, fachkundig geerdete
Arbeitsunterlage in Verbindung mit einem EGB-Armband
ausreichend.
Es ist erforderlich, die Schutzmaßnahmen in regelmäßigen
Abständen auf ihre Wirksamkeit zu überprüfen.
EMV-Hinweise (Elektromagnetische Verträglichkeit)

Zur Verbesserung des elektromagnetischen Umfeldes (EMV) bitte folgende Einbau-
hinweise beachten:
 Möglichst nur Stecker mit Metallgehäuse oder einem Gehäuse aus metallisiertem
Kunststoff und abgeschirmte Kabel verwenden; den Schirm am Steckergehäuse
auflegen.
 Schirme möglichst großflächig auflegen.
 Alle ungeschirmten Leitungen möglichst kurz halten.
 Erdungsverbindungen möglichst kurz und mit großem Querschnitt ausführen (z. B.
induktionsarmes Masseband, Flachbandleiter).
 Sollten zwischen den
optionale
Maschinen- und Elektronik- Pegel-Impuls-Umsetzer (PIU)
oder Leitungstreiber (LT)
Erdanschlüssen Potential-
differenzen bestehen oder PIU, Auswert-
Maschine Geber LT elektronik
auftreten, so ist durch ge-
eignete Maßnahmen dafür
zu sorgen, dass über den Potentialaus-
gleichsleitung Nur bei ungünstigen
Kabelschirm keine Aus- Bedingungen wie:
- sehr lange Kabel
gleichsströme fließen - extreme Störpegel
Steuerleitungen
können; z. B. Potentialaus-
gleichsleitung mit großem Querschnitt verlegen (siehe Grafik) oder Kabel mit getrennter
2fach-Schirmung verwenden, wobei die Schirme nur auf jeweils einer Seite aufgelegt
werden.
 Signal- und Steuerleitungen räumlich von den Leistungskabeln getrennt verlegen; ist
dies nicht möglich, paarig verseilte und geschirmte Leitungen (twisted pair) verwenden
und/oder die Geberleitung in einem Eisenrohr verlegen.
 Sicherstellen, dass extern Schutzmaßnahmen gegen Stoßspannungen (Surge)
durchgeführt wurden (EN61000-4-5).
GEL 260 9
Kabel- und Steckerbelegung
1 9 8
A
F B 10 12
2 7
11
E C 3 6
D
4 5
6-poliger Steckeranschluss 12-poliger Steckeranschluss
Stecker/Kabel Signal/Funktion Kabel EEx

6-polig 12/10-polig S, V SN, VN T, U, X TN, UN, XN 7-pol. 12-pol.
C braun 5 weiß Spur 1 Spur 1 Spur 1 Spur 1 3 3
– – 6 braun – – Spur 1 Spur 1 – 8
B weiß 8 rosa Spur 2 Spur 2 Spur 2 Spur 2 2 2
– – 1 schwarz – – Spur 2 Spur 2 – 7
D grau 3 violett – Spur N – Spur N 4 4
– – 4 gelb – – – Spur N – 9
F gelb 12 rot UB: +10…30 V (S, U, V, X) oder +5 V ± 5% (T) 6 6
A grün 10 blau 0 V (GND, Bezugsmasse) 1 1
E rosa 7 grau Stromausgang (Option) 5 5
– – 2 – + Sense (UB) – –
– – 11 – – Sense (GND) – –
S(N), V(N), X(N) T(N), U(N)

Signalspannung (US) HTL (10…30 V) TTL (5 V)
Hinweise:
 Kabelabgang: Abschirmung auf der Drehgeber-Seite nicht angeschlossen
 Sense-Funktion: Falls diese nicht zum Einsatz kommt, die freien Leitungen mit
für die Spannungsversorgung nutzen (Halbierung des Span-
nungsabfalls durch Parallelschaltung)
 Nicht aufgeführte Steckeranschlüsse/Kabelfarben sind nicht belegt
Maximale Kabellängen
Die folgenden Angaben für die jeweiligen Signalmuster sind Richtwerte und beziehen sich
auf Kabel vom Typ LiYCY 6 (10)  0,25 mm2 zwischen Drehgeber und nachgeschalteter
Elektronik.
1)
 TTL f=  50 100 200 kHz
(T/TN, U/UN) L= 200 145 72 m
 HTL (bei UB = 20 V) f =  10 20 50 100 200 kHz

(S/SN, V/VN, [X/XN]) L = 200 200 [100] 80 [40] 40 [20] 20 [10] m
1)
Die angegebenen Längen gelten bei Verwendung eines Netzteils mit Sense-Regelung.
10 GEL 260
6. Technische Daten
Messschritte pro Umdrehung 10 … 273.408
Auflösung 36° … 0,0013°

Genauigkeit (Werte gültig für höchste Auflösung)
Fehlergrenze 0,07°
Messschrittabweichung 0,01°
Wiederholbarkeit 0,005°

Elektrische Daten
Betriebsspannung UB für Signalmuster … (siehe auch Seite 4)
– S/SN, U/UN, V/VN, X/XN 10 … 30 VDC
– T/TN 5 VDC ± 5%
Leistungs- RL = , UB = 10…30 VDC  1,3 W (mit Stromausgang:  1,65 W)
aufnahme RL = , UB = 5 VDC  1,0 W (mit Stromausgang:  1,4 W)
Ausgangsfrequenz 0…200 kHz
Ausgangspegel für Signalmuster T/TN High:  UB - 1,00 V bei I = 10 mA;
(TTL)  UB - 1,20 V bei I = 30 mA
Low:  0,75 V bei I = 10 mA;
 1,00 V bei I = 30 mA
Ausgangspegel für Signalmuster U/UN High:  4,00 V bei I = 10 mA;
(TTL)  3,85 V bei I = 30 mA
Low:  0,75 V bei I = 10 mA;
 1,00 V bei I = 30 mA
Ausgangspegel für Signalmuster S/SN, High:  UB - 1,80 V bei I = 10 mA;
V/VN und X/XN (HTL)  UB - 2,20 V bei I = 30 mA
Low:  1,15 V bei I = 10 mA;
 1,55 V bei I = 30 mA
Spitzenausgangsstrom zur Umladung der 100 mA
Kabelkapazität
Impulsdauer ti bei Signalmuster S/SN Standard: 20 µs; wahlweise auch 5 µs oder
100 µs (bei der Bestellung anzugeben)
Verzögerungszeit ts bei Signalmuster Standard: 10 µs; wahlweise auch 2 µs oder
S/SN 30 µs (bei der Bestellung anzugeben)

Mechanische Daten
Masse 0,7 kg
EEx-Version: 5,1 kg
max. Betriebsdrehzahl 10.000 min-1
EEx-Version: 3.000 min-1
Trägheitsmoment des Rotors 7 · 10-5 kg m2
max. Winkelbeschleunigung extrem hoch, da Welle und Messrad (Stahl)
verpresst sind
Betriebsdrehmoment 0,03 N m (<0,01 N m mit optionaler Kugel-
lagerabdeckscheibe)
GEL 260 11
Anlaufdrehmoment 0,05 N m (0,01 N m mit optionaler Kugel-

lagerabdeckscheibe)
EEx-Version: 0,06 N m
Maximale Wellenbelastung axial und 200 N
radial (Angriffspunkt 15 mm von der
Flanschanlage)
Zulässige Wellenbewegung Ankopplung über eine flexible Kupplung
empfohlen
Lagerlebensdauer (Umdrehungen) bei
– halber Wellenbelastung 12.600 · 106 Umdrehungen
– maximaler Wellenbelastung 2.000 · 106 Umdrehungen

Umweltbedingungen
Arbeitstemperaturbereich 0 … +70 °C, optional: -20 … +85 °C
Betriebstemperaturbereich -20 … +85 °C
Lagertemperaturbereich -40 … +105 °C
Schutzart nach DIN EN 60529
– Standard IP 65
– mit Kondenswasserauslass (Option) IP 64
– EEx-Version Druckfest IP 54
Ex-Schutz (druckfestes Gehäuse), nur II 2G EEx de [ia/ib] IIC T5-T6
GEL 260 EEx (Zertifikat: PTB03ATEX1051)
Vibrationsfestigkeit nach
1)
DIN EN 60068-2-6
– Frequenzbereich 10…2.000 Hz
– Spitzenbeschleunigung 100 ms-2
– Frequenzzyklen 10
Schockfestigkeit nach Spitzenbeschleunigung 1.000 ms-2,
1)
DIN EN 60068-2-27 Dauer 11 ms
Isolationsfestigkeit nach VDE 0660 Teil Ri > 1 M, bei einer Prüfspannung von
500 Ausg. 08/00 oder DIN EN 60439-1 500 VAC
Elektromagnetische Verträglichkeit EN 61000-6-1 bis 4
Maßbilder  Seite 23
1)
Für stärkere Vibrations- oder Schockbelastungen wird der optionale Zusatz-Vibrationsschutz empfohlen (siehe
Typenschlüssel Seite 7)
12 GEL 260
Operating Instructions English
1. General safety instructions


In order to maintain the encoder's functioning please note the following instructions:
 Only use a flexible coupling to connect the encoder to the driving shaft
 Protect the encoder from being mechanically damaged when mounting and
operating, please observe the handling notes given in chapter 4.
 Only skilled personnel are allowed to commission, connect and service these
components while following the current regulations for prevention of accidents and
safety instructions as well as the information given in this manual.
 Do not open the encoder nor disassemble it; if repairs are necessary they must only
be carried out by LENORD+BAUER personnel or by a person/company expressly
authorized by LENORD+BAUER.
 Keep to the limit values stated in the product documentation.
 Note the orientation of the characters in the connector's pin layout (see chapter 5).
A common mistake is a mirror image connection of the lines to the plug pins.

Make use of the encoder only as designated:
The encoders GEL 260 have been exclusively designed for performing measuring
tasks in industry. They can be used to measure positions, lengths, angles or speeds.
They are considered to be components of a complete system and need to be con-
nected to a special evaluation electronics such as incorporated in a positioning con-
troller or an electronic counter.
The designated use requires as well the observance of all instructions listed in the
product documentation.
Any use other than specified must be considered as non-designated and, conse-
quently, LENORD, BAUER & CO. GMBH cannot be held responsible for any damage
resulting from such use.
Note
These Operating Instructions have been produced with great care. However, no guaran-
tees can be made for possible errors.
The Operating Instructions are meant for use by the user or system builder as well as their
employees. Please deposit this manual in a safe place for future use, and enclose it with
the encoder when passing it on to another user.
GEL 260 13
English Operating Instructions
2. Description
Scope
The GEL 260 encoders are highly resistant to harsh environmental conditions and are
particularly resistant to the effects of condensation. The high temperature range from 0 °C
to +70 °C, optional from -20 °C to +85 °C, ensures functional reliability in a wide range of
conditions. The encoder is thus also ideally suited to applications in heavy industry and in
outdoor locations.
Various rectangular signals are output (see signal patterns below) which provide an clear
direction detection and, in case of using inverse signals, a high data reliability. Additionally,
an optional reference pulse can be used for calibrating the drive, and an optional
tachometer supplies a speed-dependent current.
Supply voltage is either 5 V DC or 10 – 30 V DC depending on the signal pattern used
(see below).
Design
The encoders contain
 a contactless magnetic scanning system (magnetic field sensor),
 a toothed wheel serving as measuring scale,
 an electronic with evaluation and driver ASICs
 an solid shaft with various diameter/length combinations,
 a radial or axial connector or cable outlet.
Optional designs include a condensed-water outlet or other additional protection measures
against moisture and vibration for harsh environmental conditions.
Functional principle
The sensor’s magnetic field inside the encoder is changed by the passing of the integrated
toothed wheel. The sensor recognizes the change in the magnetic field and converts into
sinusoidal measuring signals. An internal interpolation electronic generates the rectangular
output signals and, as an option, a speed-dependent current from the sinusoidal signals.
Signal patterns
a) S, SN T ra c k 1
V S V s ig
T ra c k 2
1 0 to 3 0 V D C H T L
ti ts
T ra c k N
( o p tio n )
ti: pulse duration 20 µs (optional also 5 µs or 100 µs)
ts: delay time 10 µs (optional also 2 µs or 30 µs)
In the case of a direction change the pulses will follow slightly delayed (ts),
so that a subsequent counting electronic can react without lost of a pulse.
The direction signal (Track 1) can be inverted via DIP switch S1 (see p. 16).
The signal pulse width ti stated when ordering the encoder is indicated on
the identification plate (e.g. 't=5 µs'). The delay time ts has been set depend-
ent on ti :
ti 5 µs 20 µs 100 µs
ts 2 µs 10 µs 10 µs or 30 µs
14 GEL 260
b) V, VN 3 6 0 ° e l.
T ra c k 1
9 0 °
V S V s ig
T ra c k 2
1 0 to 3 0 V D C H T L
tF
T ra c k N
( o p tio n )
tF: edge distance at 200 kHz  0.6 µs (valid for all signal patterns except S/SN)
c) T, TN; T ra c k 1
U, UN;
X, XN T ra c k 1
V S V s ig
T (N ) 5 V D C ± 5 % T T L
T ra c k 2 U (N ) 1 0 to 3 0 V D C T T L
X (N ) 1 0 to 3 0 V D C H T L
T ra c k 2
T ra c k N
( o p tio n )
T ra c k N
Signals shown for clockwise shaft movement;

VS = supply voltage, Vsig = signal amplitude
Current output (option)

For the means of displaying and controlling, a measuring current of 0 to 20 mA, 4 to 20 mA
or -20 to +20 mA can be obtained from the pulse frequency which depends on the speed
and – if ordered – the sense of rotation. For this purpose the measuring pulses are inte-
grated and converted into a rotation speed dependent output current. There is a strictly
linear interrelation between the measuring current and the pulse frequency.
Because of the high resolution (up to 273,408 pulses per re-
t
volution) a DC output current is obtained which shows a low v
90 %
harmonic content even at a very low speed range (e.g. 0 to
Output current Ia
-1
0.5 min ). The harmonic content depends on the pulse fre-
quency and the determined attenuation d, latter influencing 50 %
the rising and trailing edge times as well as the delay time in
case of erratic changes of the speed. 10 %
The preferred attenuation had been specified when ordering t t a
the encoder corresponding to the following diagram; d3 is the
default setting. Rising edge time ta and delay time tv
for erratic speed changing
The speed at which the maximum current of 20 mA is
achieved – as stated when ordering – is indicated on the identification plate (e.g. '4000
min–1'). The attenuation has been adjusted so that the harmonic content p for the rated
speed is  1%; it is also indicated on the identification plate (e.g. 'd5').
GEL 260 15
%
1 0 0 2 2 4 ,7 1 ,0 0 ,2 2 0 ,1 1 m s r is e tim e ta
8 0 1 7 3 ,7 0 ,8 0 ,1 7 0 ,0 8 m s d e la y tim e tv
2 0
d 5 d 4 d 3 d 2 d 1 d 0
a tte n u a tio n d
H a r m o n ic c o n te n t F
1 0
5
2
1
0 ,5
0 ,2
0 ,1
1 0 2 0 5 0 1 0 0 2 0 0 5 0 0 1 k 2 k 5 k 1 0 k 2 0 k 5 0 k 1 0 0 k 2 0 0 k H z
E ffe c tiv e p u ls e fr e q u e n c y B
ta, tv = f (d ) p = I e ff / I a f = n · i [H z ]
Harmonic content of the output current depending on the pulse frequency
and the selectable attenuation
Output variants
I
Measuring current range –20 to +20 mA, polarity depending on the
A: n
sense of rotation (can be inverted via DIP switch S2, see below)
I
Measuring current range 0 to +20 mA, independent of the sense of
B: n
rotation
I
Measuring current range +4 to 20 mA, independent of the sense of
C: n
rotation
The polarity of the current can be reversed by DIP switch

S2, accessible from the outside.
Encoder with signal pattern S:

The signal which indicates the sense of rotation (Track 1) is
also reversed by switch S2. You can compensate this by
toggling switch S1.
S1 S2
DIP switches 1 and 2 behind screw
cap on the rear side of the encoder
Specifications
Max. load Ra 550 
Instrument class K 1
Rated current tolerance <1%
Linearity error <1%
Repeatability r 100 %
Temperature drift IaT < ±3 µA/°K
Min. speed (for attenuation d5) nmin el. 1.5 x 103 / i min-1 (i = rated pulse number)
6 -1
Max. speed nmax el. 6 x 10 / i min
16 GEL 260
3. Type code
GEL 260 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
       
 Current output
– none
A -20…+20 mA
B 0…+20 mA
C +4…+20 mA
 Signal pattern (two tracks each, see also page 14)

S Count pulses and direction signal, HTL level (VS = 10–30 VDC)
V 2 count pulse tracks phase-shifted by 90°, HTL level (VS = 10–30 VDC)
X 2 count pulse tracks phase-shifted by 90° with inverse signals, HTL (VS = 10–30 VDC)
U 2 count pulse tracks phase-shifted by 90° with inverse signals, TTL (VS = 10–30 VDC)
T 2 count pulse tracks phase-shifted by 90° with inverse signals, TTL (VS = 5 VDC)
 Reference signal
– none
N yes
 Pulse number
10 … 10,240
 Connection (counter plug enclosed)

A 6-pole connector, axial
B 6-pole connector, radial
C 12-pole connector, axial
D 12-pole connector, radial
E 7-core cable, EEx version only
Each individual core has to be
F 6-core cable, axial connected in the special
G 6-core cable, radial junction box (see dimensioned
H 10-core cable, axial drawings); cable length 2 m,
I 10-core cable, radial other lengths on request
K 12-core cable, EEx version only
 Shaft diameter/length
0 12/30 mm (Standard), 12/27 mm (EEx) On request, the encoder can be
1 6/13 mm equipped with a ball-bearing cover
(IP 50) instead of the standard shaft
2 8/30 mm
seal ring, in order to achieve a lower
3 8/30 mm WF starting torque
4 10/30 mm
WF = shaft additionally fitted with
5 10/30 mm WF Woodruff key according to
7 12/30 mm WF DIN 6888
GEL 260 17
 Protection of the electronics

0 No additional protection method
1 Moisture protection
2 Vibration protection
3 Moisture and vibration protection
4 Moisture protection and condensed water outlet
5 Moisture and vibration protection, condensed water outlet
6 Protection class EEx with GEL 260 and no additional protection
7 Protection class EEx with GEL 260 and moisture protection
8 Protection class EEx with GEL 260 and vibration protection
9 Protection class EEx with GEL 260 and moisture + vibration protection
 Temperature range
1 0 to +70 °C
3 -20 to +85 °C
Type code 260 Y … is a customer-specific version. Deviations from the type code
above and/or the technical specifications are possible.
4. Mounting
Please note the following handling notes when mounting the encoder:
Do not open the encoder Do not connect the en-
neither partially nor encoder and the motor shaft
tirely and/or disassemble by means of a rigid
it. This is particularly im- coupling.
portant for the flame- The forces applied to the
proof enclosure of the bearing assembly might be
GEL 260 EEx! too high. Use elastic, but
By doing so you may torsion-proof couplings! We
damage the encoder and can supply you with various
cause malfunctioning and, couplings (please contact
in case of an EEx type, us for detailed information)
invalidate the Ex-protection.
Mount the encoder in Mount encoders with

such a way that its condensed water outlet
function is not adversely (special design) in such a
influenced. way that the outlet is
facing downwards.
Do not apply higher radial

or axial forces to the shaft Do not hit or step onto the
than indicated in the shaft or the housing.
technical data. You may cause damages
outside and inside the en-
Do not bore or grind the coder housing.
shaft.
You may cause damages
inside the encoder housing.
18 GEL 260
5. Electrical connection
ESD protection (Electrostatic sensitive devices)
For every electronic device, ESD protection is important. This also applies to
the encoders GEL 260. Do not touch electronic devices unless servicing is
required. This is particularly important for connector pins and
loose wires. Which precautions are required in the particular
case is dependant on to local situation. DIN EN 100 015-1 (CECC 00015-
1) gives a comprehensive overview on possible solutions.
In most situations, a grounded working surface together S T O P
with ESD wrist straps will give sufficient protection.
We do recommend to check the ESD equipment
regularly.
EMC measures (Electromagnetic compatibility)

To avoid influencing the certified EMC the following assembly instructions should be
observed:
Only use connectors with metal housing or a housing made of metallized plastic and
screened cables; make sure to set up a contact between the screening and the connec-
tor housing.
The screenings must have large-surface contact.
Keep all unscreened lines as short as possible.
Provide for earth connections being as short as possible and having a large cross-
section (e.g. low-inductance metal-alloy tape, flat-band conductor).
Should there be any poten- optional
Level-Pulse Converter (LPC)
tial difference between the or Line Driver (LD)
earth connection of the ma- LPC, Interpretation

En-
chine and the electronics, Machine LD Electronics
coder
appropriate measures must
be taken to ensure that no Potential Equi-
compensating currents can lization Line Under unfavourable
conditions only, as:
flow through the cable - very long cables Control Lines
- extreme noise level
screening (e.g. lay a potential
equalisation line with large
cross-section (see illustration) or use a cable with separated duplex screening – each
screen being connected at one side only).
Signal and control lines must be laid away from electric power cables; if that is not
possible use screened twisted pair cables and/or lay the encoder lines in iron pipes.
Make sure that surge protective measures have been carried out externally (EN61000-
4-5).
GEL 260 19
Cable and pin layout
1 9 8
A
F B 10 12
2 7
11
E C 3 6
D
4 5
6-pole plug socket 12- pole plug socket
Connector/cable Signal/Function Cable EEx

6-pole 12/10-pole S, V SN, VN T, U, X TN, UN, XN 7-pole 12-pole
C brown 5 white Track 1 Track 1 Track 1 Track 1 3 3
– – 6 brown – – Track 1 Track 1 – 8
B white 8 pink Track 2 Track 2 Track 2 Track 2 2 2
– – 1 black – – Track 2 Track 2 – 7
D grey 3 violet – Track N – Track N 4 4
– – 4 yellow – – – Track N – 9
F yellow 12 red VS: +10…30 V (S, U, V, X) or +5 V ± 5% (T) 6 6
A green 10 blue 0 V (GND, reference ground) 1 1
E pink 7 grey Current output (option) 5 5
– – 2 – + Sense (VS) – –
– – 11 – – Sense (GND) – –
S(N), V(N), X(N) T(N), U(N)

Signal voltage (Vsig) HTL (10–30 V) TTL (5 V)
Explanations:
 Cable outlet: screen is not connected inside the encoder
 Sense function: if not utilised use the free cores for the power supply (thus
halving the voltage drop by the parallel connection)
 Plug pins / cable colours not mentioned in the table are not connected
Maximum cable lengths

The following values are related to a cable type LiYCY 6 (10)  0.25 mm2 between en-
coder and electronic next in line.
1)
 TTL f=  50 100 200 kHz
(T/TN, U/UN) L= 200 145 72 m
 HTL (at VS = 20 V) f=  10 20 50 100 200 kHz

(S/SN, V/VN, [X/XN]) L = 200 200 [100] 80 [40] 40 [20] 20 [10] m
1)
The given lengths are only valid for a power supply with Sense control
20 GEL 260
6. Technical data
Measuring steps per revolution 10 to 273,408
Resolution 36° to 0.0013°

Accuracy (valid for maximum resolution)
Error limit 0.07°
Incremental deviation 0.01°
Repeatability 0.005°

Electrical data
Operating voltage VS for signal pattern … (see also page 14)
– S/SN, U/UN, V/VN, X/XN 10 to 30 VDC
– T/TN 5 VDC ± 5%
Power RL = , VS = 10 – 30 VDC  1.3 W (with current output:  1.65 W)
consumption RL = , VS = 5 VDC  1.0 W (with current output:  1.4 W)
Output frequency 0 – 200 kHz
Output level for T/TN (TTL) High:  VS – 1.00 V at I = 10 mA;
 VS – 1.20 V at I = 30 mA
Low:  0.75 V at I = 10 mA;
 1.00 V at I = 30 mA
Output level for U/UN (TTL) High:  4.00 V at I = 10 mA;
 3.85 V at I = 30 mA
Low:  0.75 V at I = 10 mA;
 1.00 V at I = 30 mA
Output level for S/SN, V/VN and X/XN High:  VS – 1.80 V at I = 10 mA;
(HTL)  VS – 2.20 V at I = 30 mA
Low:  1.15 V at I = 10 mA;
 1.55 V at I = 30 mA
Peak output current for charging the cable 100 mA
capacity
Pulse width ti with signal pattern S/SN 20 µs per default; alternatively 5 µs or 100 µs
(has been stated when ordering)
Delay time ts with signal pattern S/SN 10 µs per default; alternatively 2 µs or 30 µs
(has been stated when ordering)

Mechanical data
Weight 0.7 kg
EEx type: 5.1 kg
Max. operating speed 10,000 min-1
EEx type: 3,000 min-1
Rotor moment of inertia 7 · 10-5 kg m2
Max. angular acceleration extremely high, as shaft and measuring
wheel (steel) are pressed
Operating torque 0.03 Nm (< 0.01 N m with optional ball-
bearing cover)
Starting torque 0.05 N m (0.01 N m with optional ball-bearing
cover)
EEx type: 0.06 N m
GEL 260 21
Permissible shaft load, axial and radial 200 N

(point of impact 15 mm off the mounting
flange)
Permissible shaft movement flexible coupling recommended
Bearing life time (revolutions) for
– half shaft load 12,600 · 106
– maximum shaft load 2,000 · 106

Environmental conditions
Operating temperature 0 to +70 °C, optional: -20 to +85 °C
Ambient temperature -20 to +85 °C
Storage temperature -40 to +105 °C
Protective class acc. to DIN EN 60529
– standard IP 65
– with condensed-water outlet (option) IP 64
– EEx type Flame-proof IP 54
Ex protection (compression-proof hous- II 2G EEx de [ia/ib] IIC T5-T6
ing), GEL 260 EEx only (certificate: PTB03ATEX1051)
Vibration protection acc. to DIN EN 60068
1)
Part 2-6
– frequency range 10 to 2,000 Hz
– peak acceleration 100 ms-2
– frequency cycles 10
Shock protection acc. to DIN EN 60068 1,000 ms-2 peak acceleration,
1)
Part 2-27 11 ms duration
Insulation strength acc. to VDE 0660 Part Ri > 1 M, at a test voltage of 500 V AC
500 (issue 08/00) or DIN EN 60439-1
Electromagnetic compatibility EN 61000-6-1 to 4
1)
For increased vibration or shock loads we recommend using an additional vibration protection (option, see Type code
on page 18)
22 GEL 260
7. Maßbilder (Maße in mm)
Dimensioned drawings (dimensions in mm)
a) Standard
mit 6pol. Gegenstecker ca. 62 mm
2,2 mit 12pol. Gegenstecker ca. 72 mm
approx. 62 mm with 6-pole plug
approx. 72 mm with 12-pole plug
M5x10/90°
ø 12 h6
25
ø 50 h9
ø 70
ø 85,6
ø 90
3
2 Kondenswasserauslass:
30 66 Condensed-water outlet:
Geber encoder
Radialer Steckerabgang
Radial plug output 20
b) EEx
Geber im druckfesten Gehäuse: Anschlussgehäuse EEx e:
Encoder in flame-proof enclosure: Junction box EEx e:
Kabelverschraubung Pg13,5
Cable bushing socket
Ø 50 h7
Ø 50 h7
Ø 120
Ø 90
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
135
80
52
2,5 9
13,5 34
200 163
90° 90°
175
x15 Æ 4,3
4.3 Klemmenanzahl: 12
M6x1
5 M6
Number of terminals
Ø 70 Ø 70
21
54
Æ 8
Exzenterklemmstücke für die Flanschbefestigung und weitere Montageteile lieferbar.

Eccentric discs (clamps) for flange mounting and other mounting accessories are
available.
GEL 260 23
Gaugeable Tube Fittings and Adapter Fittings 1
www.swagelok.com
FITTINGS
TUBE
Gauge able Tube Fit tings
and Adapte r Fit tings
■ Available in tube sizes from 1/16 to 2 in. and 2 to 50 mm
■ Consistent gaugeability upon initial installation
■ Easy to disconnect and retighten
■ Wide variety of materials and conigurations
■ Demonstrated reliability and performance

2 Tube Fittings
Features
FITTINGS
TUBE
■ Live-loaded, two-ferrule design.

■ Easy to install.
■ No torque is transmitted to tubing during installation.
■ Swagelok® gap inspection gauge ensures suficient pull-up upon initial installation.
Back ferrule
Hinge point
Nut
Tubing
Front ferrule
Fitting body
During assembly of the advanced-geometry design

(above), the front ferrule is driven into the itting body and
the tubing to create primary seals, while the back ferrule
hinges inward to create a strong grip on the tubing. The
back ferrule geometry allows for an improved engineering
hinging-colleting™ action that translates axial motion into
radial swaging action on the tube, yet operates with a low
assembly torque requirement.
Two-Ferrule, Mechanical Grip Design Advanced-Geometry, Hinging-Colleting

The two ferrules separate sealing and tube gripping Back Ferrule Design
functions; each ferrule is optimized for its function. This design is standard on all 1/4 to 1 in. and 6 to
The front ferrule creates a seal: 25 mm Swagelok stainless steel tube ittings to help
installers make more consistent, leak-tight tube
■ against the itting body
connections.
■ on the tubing outside diameter.
In these sizes, a patented case hardening process
As the nut is turned, the back ferrule: and patented recessed and contoured geometry
■ axially advances the front ferrule provide a unique engineered advantage to the
■ radially applies an effective tube grip. Swagelok back ferrule, providing:
■ excellent gas-tight sealing and tube-gripping action
■ easily achieved proper installation
■ consistent remakes
■ excellent vibration fatigue resistance and tube
support
■ full compatibility with original Swagelok stainless
steel tube ittings of identical sizes.
For additional information, see the 316 Stainless Steel
Swagelok Tube Fittings with Advanced Geometry
Back Ferrules technical report, MS-06-16.
Contents
FITTINGS
TUBE
Features, 2 Straight Fittings Weld Connectors
The Swagelok Tube Unions

Fitting Advantage, 6 Tube Socket, 20
Union, 10
Reducing Union,
Compliance with Industry
11
Standards, 7
Male Pipe, 21
Materials, 8
Bulkhead Union
and Bulkhead
Thread Speciications, 8
Reducing Female Connectors
Union, 12
O-Rings, 8 NPT, 22
ISO/BSP Tapered
Cleaning and
Male Connectors Thread (RT),
Packaging, 8
ISO/BSP Parallel
NPT, 13 Thread (RJ and
Metric Swagelok Tube
ISO/BSP Tapered RP), 23
Fittings, 9
Thread (RT), 14 ISO/BSP Parallel
Pressure Ratings, 9 ISO/BSP Parallel Thread (RG,
Thread (RS), 15 Gauge), 24
Ordering Numbers and
ISO/BSP Parallel
Dimensions, 10 Thread (RP), 16
Bulkhead
NPT, 24
Bulkhead
NPT, 17
Reducers
SAE/MS
Straight Thread Reducer, 25
(ST) and Long Long Reducer,
Additional Products SAE/MS Straight 26
■ For Alloy 2507 super duplex Thread (ST), 17
tube ittings, see the Swagelok
Gaugeable Alloy 2507 Super
O-Seal (SAE/MS Bulkhead
Duplex Tube Fittings catalog
(MS-01-174). Straight Thread Reducer, 26
■ For alloy 400 tube ittings,
and NPT), 18
see the Swagelok Gaugeable
Alloy 400/R-405 Mechanically AN and
Attached Pipe and Tube Fittings Port Connectors
AN Bulkhead
catalog MS-02-332. Port Connector
Fitting, 19
■ For PFA tube ittings, see the and Reducing
Swagelok PFA Tube Fittings
10-32 Thread, Port Connector,
catalog (MS-01-05).
M5 × 0.8 Thread, 27
■ For medium- and high-pressure
tube ittings, see the Swagelok and Metric
Medium- and High-Pressure Thread (RS), 20
Fittings, Tubing, Valves, and
Accessories catalog
(MS-02-472).
4 Tube Fittings
Contents
FITTINGS
TUBE
Caps and Plugs 45° Elbows Cross

Male
Cap, 28 Union, 40
NPT, 34
Plug, 28
Positionable, Application-Speciic Fittings
SAE/MS Straight
Thread (ST), 34 Kwik-Clamp Flange
Vent Protectors
to Swagelok Tube
Fitting, 41
Mud Dauber, 28
Tees
Oriice Plate Fitting,
Unions
42
90° Elbows
Union and Reducing Bored-Through Fittings
Unions Union, 35
For thermocouples, dip tubes, and heat
exchanger tees, 16
Union, 29
Male
Tube Adapters
Branch, NPT Tube Adapter Information, 43
Male
(TTM), 37
NPT, 30 Male
ISO/BSP Tapered
Run, NPT (TMT), 37 NPT and ISO/BSP
Thread (RT), 31
Tapered Thread (RT),
44
Reducing, 31 Positionable Branch,
SAE/MS Straight ISO/BSP Parallel
Positionable, ISO/BSP Thread (TTS) and Thread (RS and RP),
Parallel Thread (PR) Positionable Branch, 45
and Positionable, ISO/BSP Parallel
SAE/MS Straight Thread (TTR), 38
SAE/MS Straight
Thread (ST), 32
Positionable Run, Thread (ST) and O-Seal
SAE/MS Straight (SAE/MS Straight
Weld Thread), 46
Thread (TST), 38
Tube Socket, 33 Positionable Run,

ISO/BSP Parallel AN Thread, 46
Thread (TRT), 39
Male Pipe, 33 Female
Pipe Weld, 47
Run, NPT (TFT), 39
Female
NPT, 33 Branch, NPT

(TTF), 40
Contents
FITTINGS
TUBE
Female ISO/BSP Parallel Gaskets Gaugeability, 62
NPT and ISO/BSP Steel (RS Fitting),
Tapered Thread Copper (RP Fitting), Installation Instructions, 62
(RT), 47 Copper (RG, Gauge
Swagelok Tube Fittings, 63
Fitting), and PTFE
ISO/BSP Parallel (RJ Fitting), 54 O-Seal Male Connectors, 63
Thread (RP and RJ),
and ISO/BSP O-Rings Caps and Plugs, 64
Parallel Thread (RG, Buna N (O-Seal Port Connectors, 64
Gauge), 48 Straight Threads
and O-Seal Pipe Positionable Elbows and Tees, 65
Threads) and Tube Adapters, 65
Fluorocarbon FKM
AN Thread, 48 AN Thread Swivel Nut, 65
(ISO/BSP Parallel
Threads and Weld Fittings, 66
SAE/MS Straight
Threads), 55 Depth Marking Tool, 66
Additional Ordering
Preswaging Tool, 66
Information, 49 Tools and Accessories
Hydraulic Swaging Units, 56
Replacement Parts Chromatograph Fittings
Nuts See the Swagelok
Gaugeable
Chromatograph and
Female, 51 Column End Fittings
catalog (MS-02-173).
Preswaging Tools, 58
Dielectric Fittings
See the Swagelok
Knurled Female, 51 Dielectric
Wrenches, 59
Fittings catalog
(MS-02-36-SCS).
Gap Inspection
Gauges and Depth Flanges
Male, 51
Marking Tools, 60 For ANSI, DIN, and
JIS langes, see the
Swagelok Flange
Bulkhead Retainers,
Adapters catalog
Ferrules 61 (MS-02-200).
Front, 52
Inserts for Soft VCO® and VCR®
Plastic Tubing, 61 Face Seal Fittings
See the Swagelok
VCR Metal Gasket
Back, 52 For liquid leak detectors, lubricants, Face Seal Fittings and
and sealants, see the Swagelok Leak VCO O-Rings Face
Nut-Ferrule Set and Detectors, Lubricants, and Sealants Seal Fittings catalogs
Package and catalog (MS-01-91). (MS-01-24) and
Ferrule Set and (MS-01-28).
For tube benders and tube preparation
Ferrule-Pak™
tools, see the Swagelok Tubing Tools and
Package, 53
Accessories catalog (MS-01-179).
6 Tube Fittings
The Swagelok Tube Fitting Advantage

FITTINGS
TUBE
“Over 10 000 fittings

and not a single leak.”
Messages from customers credit
Swagelok components and tube
ittings, along with Swagelok distributor
support, as having played a major role
in helping them succeed.
Swagelok continues to improve the
performance and reliability of the tube
itting for use in thousands of diverse
applications—including research,
alternative fuels, analytical and process
instrumentation, oil and gas, power,
petrochemical, and semiconductor
industries—and addressing such
critical issues as:
■ gas-tight seal
■ vibration (tube grip)
Vibration (Tube Grip) minimizes the effects of bending
■ thermal shock delection at the point of grip on the
The patented case-hardening process
■ compliance with industry standards and back-ferrule geometry provide tubing.
■ installation excellent vibration fatigue resistance Contact your authorized Swagelok
and tube support—even in harsh representative for more information
■ corrosion
or stressful environments, such as about vibration test reports.
■ intermix/interchange.
hydrocarbon processing, on-vehicle
applications, or rotary equipment
Gas-tight Seal
applications.
Excellent sealing and consistent
reassembly help ensure accurate
Swagelok has conducted vibration “Used exclusively on our
measurements of process
tests, which show that the Swagelok equipment and has proven
tube itting with advanced geometry to be very reliable and easy
parameters—air, steam, fuel, and
hinging-colleting back ferrule isolates
water—to keep your plant operating to maintain.”
and protects the stress riser that is
eficiently. Moreover, Swagelok tube
generated along the tube during the
ittings minimize fugitive emissions,
gripping part of assembly. The colleting
as well as process luid leakage and
portion of the back ferrule allows
operation costs.
more material to contact the tube, for
Contact your authorized Swagelok sales additional support. This colleting action
and service representative for more enhances gripping performance and
information about Swagelok Energy provides both direct and axial support
Emissions Surveys or to schedule a to the gripping function. This design
survey.
“I have used Swagelok

fittings from when I was
a technician through
today in my role in facility
management. Would
recommend them for any
use.”
FITTINGS
TUBE
Thermal Shock Third-Party Agencies metallurgical, and mechanical
The elastic, live-loaded two-ferrule ■ Vd TÜV uniformity that allow predictable,
design compensates for changes in repeatable installation.
■ TÜV SUD Automotive
temperature during system start-up ■ DVGW Swagelok authorized sales and service
and shutdown and helps eliminate centers offer installation training
■ Department of the Navy (U.S.)
leakage related to rapid thermal seminars that provide additional
■ Det Norske Veritas (DNV)
expansion or contraction. information on:
■ Nippon Kaiji Kyokai (NK)
Swagelok has conducted tests ■ The requirements for making safe,
■ American Bureau of Shipping (ABS) leak-tight connections
that demonstrated the capability of
Swagelok tube ittings to withstand ■ Lloyd’s Register of Shipping (LR) ■ A variety of tools and accessories
thermal shock and high temperature. ■ Bureau Veritas (BV) designed for use with Swagelok tube
Contact your authorized Swagelok ■ RS Maritime ittings.
representative for more information ■ Canadian Provincial Agencies (CRN)
about thermal shock test reports. Corrosion
■ Russian GOST TR (Customs Union
Countries) Swagelok tube ittings are available
Compliance with in a variety of materials, including
■ UkSepro for Ukraine
Industry Standards optimized 316 stainless steel chemistry
■ Inspecta Nuclear for Sweden
Swagelok Company works with with elevated nickel, chromium, and
■ METI/KHK other elements for superior corrosion
standards organizations around the
world to provide you with products that ■ Engineers India Limited (EIL) resistance in a variety of applications,
address your needs. For a complete listing, please refer to including chemical processing, sour
Stainless steel Swagelok tube ittings the Swagelok Tube Fitting Performance gas and subsea systems.
used with 316 stainless steel and 316 Ti Product Test Reports PTRs and Swagelok has conducted tests in
stainless steel alloy tubing as shown Third-Party Product Approvals and accordance with ASTM B117-95 to
in the table have been tested to the Registrations, MS-06-108. evaluate the corrosion resistance of
requirements of ECE R110. In addition, Swagelok tube ittings.
See Materials, page 8; Thread
stainless steel Swagelok tube ittings
are available with EC-79 certiication. Speciications, page 8; and Contact your authorized Swagelok
Pressure Ratings, page 9, for more representative for more information
Tube OD Wall Thickness information about the speciications about corrosion resistance test reports.
3 to 16 mm 0.7 to 2.5 mm to which Swagelok tube ittings are
1/8 to 5/8 in. 0.028 to 0.095 in. manufactured. Intermix/Interchange
Contact your authorized Swagelok This practice can be dangerous.
NACE - Sour Gas representative for more information Leak-tight seals that will withstand
about Swagelok tube itting high pressure, vibration, vacuum,
Swagelok offers ittings in materials
that meet metallurgical requirements of certiications. and temperature changes depend
NACE MR0175/ISO 15156 and MR0103. on close tolerances and consistent,
Installation exacting quality control in conjunction
NORSOK The Swagelok tube itting installation with good design principles. The
Swagelok offers ittings in materials that advantages: critical interaction of precision parts is
are compliant with M650. essential for reliability and safety.
■ Easy to install
Contact your authorized sales and service Components of other manufacturers
■ No torque is transmitted to tubing
representative for additional details. may look like Swagelok tube itting
during installation
components—but they cannot be
■ Swagelok gap inspection gauge
manufactured in accordance with
assures suficient pull-up upon initial Swagelok engineering standards, nor
installation. do they beneit from innovations in
Swagelok tube itting components design and precision manufacturing
provide exceptional dimensional, deined by more than 45 Swagelok
tube itting patents issued since 1989.
8 Tube Fittings
Materials Thread Speciications

FITTINGS
Materials Standards
TUBE
Thread Type (End Connection) Reference Specification

NPT ASME B1.20.1, SAE AS71051
Material Bar Stock➀ Forgings➁
ISO/BSP (parallel)
316 stainless ASTM A276, ASME ASTM A182, (Based on DIN 3852) ISO 228, JIS B0202
steel SA479, EN 1.4401 ASME SA182, EN 1.4401 (Swagelok PR, RP, and RS fittings)
Alloy 20 ASTM B473 ASTM B462 ISO/BSP (tapered)
ISO 7, BS EN 10226-1,
6-Moly ASTM A479 ASTM A182 (Based on DIN 3852)
JIS B0203
(Swagelok RT fittings)
Alloy 400 ASTM B164 ASTM B564, ASME SB564
ISO/BSP (gauge)
Alloy 600 ASTM B166, ASME SB166 ASTM B564, ASME SB564 (Based on EN 837-1 and 837-3) ISO 228, JIS B0202
Alloy 625 ASTM B446➂ ASTM B564, ASME SB564➃ (Swagelok RG and RJ fittings)
Alloy 825 ASTM B425 ASTM B564, ASME SB564 Unified (SAE)
ASME B1.1
(Swagelok ST fittings)
Alloy C-276 ASTM B574 ASTM B564
Aluminum ASTM B211 ASTM B247 Pipe Thread Sealants
Brass ASTM B16, ASTM B453 ASTM B283 A thread sealant should always be used when assembling
Carbon steel ASTM A108 — tapered threads. SWAK™ anaerobic pipe thread sealant and
Nylon ASTM D4066 — Swagelok PTFE tape are available. For more information,
PFA➄ — ASTM D3307 Type I see the Swagelok Leak Detectors, Lubricants, and Sealants
catalog (MS-01-91).
PTFE ASTM D1710 ASTM D3294
Alloy 2507 ASTM A479 ASTM A182
O-Rings
Titanium
ASTM B348 ASTM B381 O-seal ittings include a 70 durometer Buna N O-ring. Other
(grade 4)
➀ Straight ittings and tube adapters.
straight-thread ittings with O-rings include a 90 durometer
➁ Elbows, crosses, and tees. luorocarbon FKM O-ring. Other O-ring materials are available
➂ All straight fittings and tube adapters and 1/4 and 3/8 in.; 6 and 10 mm upon request. O-rings are coated with a thin ilm of silicone-
elbows, crosses, and tees. based lubricant. Removal of factory-applied lubricants may
➃ Elbows, crosses, and tees larger than 3/8 in. and 10 mm. alter performance.
➄ See the Swagelok PFA Tube Fittings catalog (MS-01-05).
➅ See the Swagelok Gaugeable Alloy 2507 Super Duplex Tube Fittings
For ST and ST positionable ittings used in ECE-R110
catalog (MS-01-174). applications, add the DE O-ring sufix to the ordering number.
Example: SS-600-1-6STDE
Additional Processing
Fitting bodies are processed for improved performance, as Cleaning and Packaging
listed below. No additional processing is required for alloy 625, Fitting components are cleaned to remove machine oil, grease,
alloy 825, brass, nylon, 316 stainless steel, and PTFE materials. and loose particles. For more information, see Swagelok
Standard Cleaning and Packaging (SC-10) (MS-06-62).
Fitting Body Material Process Fittings are available individually bagged; add CP to the
Aluminum Anodized, hydrocarbon film ordering number. Example: SS-200-6CP
Alloy 400, alloy 20,
alloy C-276, alloy 600
Hydrocarbon film On request, ittings can be specially cleaned and packaged.
Cleaning and packaging options can be found in Special
Carbon steel (except weld bodies) Zinc plating
Cleaning of Swagelok Tube Fittings, SCS-00663. Contact
Hydrocarbon film chemical
Carbon steel (weld bodies)
conversion coating
your authorized Swagelok representative for details.
Titanium Anodized Fittings cleaned and packaged in accordance with ASTM G93
Level C, will have the front ferrule silver-plated and Krytox®
■ Over 1 in./25 mm ittings are supplied with a package of 240 AC applied to the internal surface of the nut. To order, add
luorinated-base with PTFE and tungsten disulide lubricant BQ to the ordering number.
for use in itting assembly.
Example: SS-400-1-4BQ
■ Over 1 in./25 mm stainless steel ittings use stainless steel
ferrules with PFA coating. Applications above 450°F (232°C) Oxygen Service Hazards
require silver-plated front ferrules and uncoated back For more information about hazards and risks of oxygen-
ferrules. To order ittings with silver-plated front ferrules enriched systems, see the Swagelok Oxygen System Safety
and uncoated back ferrules, add BM to the itting ordering technical report (MS-06-13).
number.
Example: SS-2400-6BM
■ All carbon steel Swagelok tube ittings are supplied with
316 stainless steel back ferrules.
Metric Swagelok Tube Fittings Swagelok

metric
Swagelok
fractional
Swagelok
metric tube
tube end tube stub ends
Metric tube ittings have a stepped shoulder on the body hex.
FITTINGS
TUBE
Shaped ittings, such as elbows, crosses, and tees, are
stamped MM for metric tubing and have no step on the forging.
Stepped identiication No shoulder Stepped identiication

shoulders shoulders
Pressure Ratings
Swagelok Tube Fitting Pressure Ratings SAE/MS Fittings Pressure Ratings Basis
Swagelok tube itting ends are rated to the working pressure Pressure ratings are based on SAE J1926/3 at ambient
of tubing as listed in Swagelok Tubing Data, MS-01-107. temperature.
Careful selection of high-quality tubing is important when
installing safe, leak-tight systems. 316 SS and Carbon Steel
Nonpositionable Positionable
SAE/MS
Pipe End (NPT and ISO 7) Thread Size Designator psig bar psig bar
Pressure Ratings Basis 5/16-24 2ST
Pressure ratings for ittings with both tube itting and pipe 7/16-20 4ST 4568 314
thread ends are determined by the end connection with the
1/2-20 5ST 4568 314
lower pressure rating. The table lists pressure ratings for male
9/16-18 6ST
and female tapered pipe thread ends. For female and male 3626 249
pipe threads to have the same pressure rating in the same 3/4-16 8ST
nominal pipe size, the female thread would require a heavier 7/8-14 10ST
3626 249 2900 199
wall, resulting in a itting too large and bulky to be practical. 1 1/16-12 12ST
1 3/16-12 14ST
Allowable Stress 2900 199 2320 159
1 5/16-12 16ST
Stress values are based on ASME Code for Pressure Piping
1 5/8-12 20ST
B31.3, Process Piping, at ambient temperature. 2320 159 1813 124
1 7/8-12 24ST
Allowable Stress 2 1/2-12 32ST 1813 124 1450 99
Material psi bar
316 SS 20 000 1378 Male AN (JIC) Fittings Pressure Ratings
Brass 10 000 689 Pressure ratings are at ambient temperature and apply to
Steel 20 000 1378 slide-on and crimped-on swivel nuts with a female gland.
316 SS
Pressure Ratings Male AN
Straight Shape
(JIC)
Ratings are based on ASME Code for Pressure Piping B31.3, Thread Size Designator psig bar psig bar
Process Piping, at ambient temperature.
7/16-20 4AN 10 000 689 10 000 689
NPT/ 9/16-18 6AN
ISO 316 SS and Carbon Steel Brass 8 200 564 7 600 523
Pipe 3/4-16 8AN
Male Female Male Female
Size 1 1/16-12 12AN 7 000 482 6 300 434
in. psig bar psig bar psig bar psig bar
1 5/16-12 16AN 5 000 344 4 100 282
1/16 11 000 757 6700 461 5500 378 3300 227
1/8 10 000 689 6500 447 5000 344 3200 220
1/4 8 000 551 6600 454 4000 275 3300 227
O-Seal Pressure Ratings
3/8 7 800 537 5300 365 3900 268 2600 179 Stainless steel and carbon steel O-seal ittings up to 1 in. and
1/2 7 700 530 4900 337 3800 261 2400 165 25 mm are rated to 3000 psig (206 bar).
3/4 7 300 502 4600 316 3600 248 2300 158
1 5 300 365 4400 303 2600 179 2200 151 Positionable, ISO/BSP Parallel Thread (PR)
1 1/4 6 000 413 5000 344 3000 206 2500 172 Pressure Ratings
1 1/2 5 000 344 4600 316 2500 172 2300 158 Pressure ratings are at ambient temperature.
2 3 900 268 3900 268 1900 130 1900 130
ISO/BSP
316 SS and
■ To determine pressure ratings in accordance with Male Pipe
Carbon Steel
Size
ASME B31.1, Power Piping: in. psig bar
■ carbon steel material—multiply by 0.85. 1/8, 1/4, 3/8 4568 314
Stainless steel and brass material ratings remain the same. 1/2, 3/4, 1 2320 159
■ To determine MPa, multiply bar by 0.10.
10 Tube Fittings
Ordering Numbers and Dimensions

■ See How to Order, below. Minimum order quantities may apply to certain materials and conigurations.
FITTINGS
TUBE
■ Dimensions are for reference only and are subject to change. Unless noted otherwise, dimensions shown are for stainless
steel components and with Swagelok nuts inger-tight. For Swagelok nut dimensions, see page 51.
■ CAD templates are available on www.swagelok.com.
Straight Fittings
Unions
F lat
Tx
D E D D E Dx
A A
Union Union (Metric to Fractional)

Basic Basic
Dimensions Tube OD Dimensions
Tube Ordering Ordering
OD Number A D E T Tx, in. Number A D Dx E F
Dimensions, in. Dimensions, mm
1/16 -100-6 0.99 0.34 0.05 1/8 -2M0-6-2 35.2 12.8 12
2 12.9 1.7
1/8 -200-6 1.40 0.50 0.09 1/4 -2M0-6-4 38.6 15.3 14
3/16 -300-6 1.47 0.54 0.12 3 1/8 -3M0-6-2 35.2 12.9 12.8 2.4 12
1/8 -4M0-6-2 36.5 12.8 12
1/4 -400-6 1.61 0.60 0.19 4 13.7 2.4
1/4 -4M0-6-4 39.4 15.3 14
5/16 -500-6 1.69 0.64 0.25 1/16 -6M0-6-1 34.3 8.6 1.3 14
3/8 -600-6 1.77 0.66 0.28 1/8 -6M0-6-2 38.5 12.8 2.4 14
1/2 -810-6 2.02 0.90 0.41 6 1/4 -6M0-6-4 41.0 15.3 15.3 4.8 14
5/16 -6M0-6-5 42.3 16.2 4.8 14
1/2 -810-6-0030➀ 4.30 — 3/8 -6M0-6-6 43.2 16.8 4.8 16
0.50
5/8 -1010-6 2.05 1/4 -8M0-6-4 42.3 15.3 4.8 15
0.96 8 16.2
3/4 -1210-6 2.11 0.62 3/8 -8M0-6-6 44.3 16.9 6.4 16
7/8 -1410-6 2.17 1.02 0.72 1/8 -10M0-6-2 41.8 12.8 2.4
1 -1610-6 0.88 1/4 -10M0-6-4 44.5 15.3 4.8
2.55 1.23 10 17.2 18
5/16 -10M0-6-5 45.1 16.2 6.4
1 1/8 B-1810-6 0.97
3/8 -10M0-6-6 45.9 16.9 7.1
1 1/4 -2000-6 3.63 1.62 1.09
1/4 -12M0-6-4 47.0 15.3 4.8
1 1/2 -2400-6 4.25 1.97 1.34 5/16 -12M0-6-5 47.8 16.2 6.4
12 22.8 22
2 -3200-6 5.88 2.66 1.81 3/8 -12M0-6-6 48.4 16.9 7.1
Dimensions, mm 1/2 -12M0-6-8 51.2 22.9 9.5
2 -2M0-6 35.6 1.7 14 1/2 -14M0-6-8 52.0 24.4 22.9 10.3 24
12.9 15 1/2 -15M0-6-8 52.0 24.4 22.9 10.3 24
3 -3M0-6 35.3
2.4 16 5/8 -16M0-6-10 52.0 24.4 24.4 12.7 24
4 -4M0-6 37.3 13.7
18 3/4 -18M0-6-12 53.5 24.4 24.4 15.1 27
6 -6M0-6 41.0 15.3 4.8
1/2 -20M0-6-8 55.0 22.9 10.3 30
8 -8M0-6 43.2 16.2 6.4 20 26.0
1 -20M0-6-16 62.8 31.3 15.9 35
10 -10M0-6 46.2 17.2 7.9
25 1 -25M0-6-16 65.0 31.3 31.3 21.8 35
12 -12M0-6 51.2 22.8 9.5
14 -14M0-6 11.1
How to Order
15 -15M0-6 52.0 11.9
24.4 Select a basic ordering number. Example -100-6
16 -16M0-6 12.7
18 -18M0-6 53.5 15.1 Add a material designator. Example: SS-100-6
20 -20M0-6 15.9 Material Designator Material Designator
55.0 26.0
22 -22M0-6 18.3 316 SS SS Alloy 2507 2507
25 -25M0-6 65.0 31.3 Aluminum A Alloy C-276 HC
21.8
-28M0-6 85.0 36.6 Alloy 20 C20 Brass B
28
B-28M0-6 65.4 31.6 24.6 6-Moly 254 Carbon steel S
30 -30M0-6 92.7 39.6 26.2 Alloy 400 M Nylon NY
32 -32M0-6 97.3 42.0 28.6 Alloy 600 INC PTFE T
38 -38M0-6 114 49.4 33.7 Alloy 625 625 Titanium
50 -50M0-6 146 65.0 45.2 TI
Alloy 825 825 (grade 4)
➀ Bored through.
Refer to Installation Instructions, beginning on page 62.
Straight Fittings
FITTINGS
TUBE
Unions Reducing Union
Basic
Tx Tube OD Dimensions
Ordering
T T Tx Number A D Dx E
Dimensions, in.
D E Dx
1/8 1/16 -200-6-1 1.22 0.50 0.34 0.05
A 1/16 -300-6-1 1.27 0.34 0.05
3/16 0.54
1/8 -300-6-2 1.44 0.50 0.09
1/16 -400-6-1 1.35 0.34 0.05
1/4 1/8 -400-6-2 1.52 0.60 0.50 0.09
3/16 -400-6-3 1.55 0.54 0.12
1/8 -500-6-2 1.56 0.50 0.09
5/16 0.64
1/4 -500-6-4 1.66 0.60 0.19
1/16 -600-6-1 1.44 0.34 0.05
1/8 -600-6-2 1.61 0.50 0.09
3/8 0.66
1/4 -600-6-4 1.70 0.60 0.19
5/16 -600-6-5 1.74 0.64 0.25
1/8 -810-6-2 1.78 0.50 0.09
1/2 1/4 -810-6-4 1.85 0.90 0.60 0.19
3/8 -810-6-6 1.91 0.66 0.28
3/8 -1010-6-6 1.94 0.66 0.28
5/8 0.96
1/2 -1010-6-8 2.05 0.90 0.41
1/4 -1210-6-4 1.94 0.60 0.19
3/8 -1210-6-6 2.00 0.66 0.28
3/4 0.96
1/2 -1210-6-8 2.11 0.90 0.41
5/8 -1210-6-10 2.11 0.96 0.50
1/2 -1610-6-8 0.90 0.41
1 2.38 1.23
3/4 -1610-6-12 0.96 0.62
Dimensions, mm
3 2 -3M0-6-2M 35.3 12.9 12.9 1.7
2 -6M0-6-2M 38.6 12.9 1.7
6 3 -6M0-6-3M 38.6 15.3 12.9 2.4
4 -6M0-6-4M 39.4 13.7 2.4
8 6 -8M0-6-6M 42.3 16.2 15.3 4.8
6 -10M0-6-6M 44.5 15.3 4.8
10 17.2
8 -10M0-6-8M 45.1 16.2 6.4
6 -12M0-6-6M 47.0 15.3 4.8
12 8 -12M0-6-8M 47.8 22.8 16.2 6.4
10 -12M0-6-10M 48.7 17.2 7.9
14 12 -14M0-6-12M 48.8 24.4 22.8 6.4
15 12 -15M0-6-12M 48.8 24.4 22.8 6.4
10 -16M0-6-10M 49.5 17.2 7.9
16 24.4
12 -16M0-6-12M 52.0 22.8 9.5
18 12 -18M0-6-12M 53.5 24.4 22.8 9.5
18 -25M0-6-18M 61.0 24.4 15.1
25 31.3
20 -25M0-6-20M 62.3 26.0 15.9
18 -30M0-6-18M 75.4 24.4 15.1
30 20 -30M0-6-20M 75.4 39.6 26.0 15.9
25 -30M0-6-25M 80.1 31.3 21.8
18 -32M0-6-18M 77.8 24.4 15.1
32 20 -32M0-6-20M 77.8 42.0 26.0 15.9
25 -32M0-6-25M 82.3 31.3 21.8
20 -38M0-6-20M 87.5 26.0 15.9
38 25 -38M0-6-25M 92.0 49.4 31.3 21.8
30 -38M0-6-30M 105 39.6 26.2

12 Tube Fittings
Straight Fittings
FITTINGS
TUBE
Unions Bulkhead Union

F lat F lat
Dimensions
Basic Panel Max
Tube Ordering Hole Panel
OD Number A D E F Size Thickness
D D Dimensions, in.
E
A 1/16 -100-61 1.24 0.34 0.05 5/16 13/64 0.12➀
1/8 -200-61 2.02 0.50 0.09 1/2 21/64
0.50
3/16 -300-61 2.11 0.54 0.12 9/16 25/64
1/4 -400-61 2.27 0.60 0.19 5/8 29/64 0.40
5/16 -500-61 2.39 0.64 0.25 11/16 33/64
0.44
3/8 -600-61 2.45 0.66 0.28 3/4 37/64
1/2 -810-61 2.80 0.90 0.41 15/16 49/64
0.50
5/8 -1010-61 2.86 0.96 0.50 1 1/16 57/64
3/4 -1210-61 3.11 0.96 0.62 1 3/16 1 1/64 0.66
1 -1610-61 3.77 1.23 0.88 1 5/8 1 21/64
1 1/4 -2000-61 4.85 1.62 1.09 1 7/8 1 41/64
0.75
1 1/2 -2400-61 5.48 1.97 1.34 2 1/4 1 61/64
2 -3200-61 7.10 2.66 1.81 2 3/4 2 41/64
Dimensions, mm
3 -3M0-61 51.3 12.9 2.4 8.3
14 12.7
4 -4M0-61 53.6 13.7 2.4 9.9
6 -6M0-61 57.7 15.3 4.8 16 11.5 10.2
8 -8M0-61 61.0 16.2 6.4 18 13.1
11.2
10 -10M0-61 63.7 17.2 7.9 22 16.3
12 -12M0-61 71.0 22.8 9.5 24 19.5
14 -14M0-61 72.5 24.4 11.1 22.5
12.7
15 -15M0-61 72.5 24.4 11.9 27
22.8
16 -16M0-61 72.5 24.4 12.7
18 -18M0-61 78.9 24.4 15.1 30 26.0 16.8
20 -20M0-61 84.5 26.0 15.9 35 29.0
25 -25M0-61 96.0 31.3 21.8 41 34.0
30 -30M0-61 124 39.6 26.2 40.5 19.0
50
32 -32M0-61 128 42.0 28.6 42.5
38 -38M0-61 145 49.4 33.7 60 50.5
➀ Minimum panel thickness is 0.06 in.
Bulkhead Reducing Union

F lat F lat
Tube OD Dimensions
Tx Basic Panel Max
T Ordering Hole Panel
T Tx Number A D Dx E F Size Thickness
Dimensions, in.
D E Dx
A 1/8 1/16 -200-61-1 1.85 0.50 0.34 0.05 1/2 21/64 0.50
1/4 1/8 -400-61-2 2.17 0.60 0.50 0.09 5/8 29/64 0.40
3/8 1/4 -600-61-4 2.39 0.66 3/4 37/64 0.44
0.60 0.19
1/2 1/4 -810-61-4 2.63 0.90 15/16 49/64 0.50
Bulkhead Reducing Union (Metric to Fractional)
Tube OD Dimensions
Basic Panel Max
Ordering Hole Panel
T Tx, in. Number A D Dx E F Size Thickness
Dimensions, mm
6 1/8 -6M0-61-2 55.1 15.3 12.7 2.4 16 11.5 10.2

Straight Fittings
FITTINGS
TUBE
Male Connectors
F lat
D
A
NPT
Basic NPT Basic
Dimensions Dimensions
Tube NPT Ordering Tube Size Ordering
OD Size Number A D E➀ F OD in. Number A D E➀ F
1/16 -100-1-1 0.94 5/16 2 1/8 -2M0-1-2 30.5 12.9 1.7 12
1/16 1/8 -100-1-2 1.03 0.34 0.05 7/16 1/8 -3M0-1-2 30.5 12
1/4 -100-1-4 1.22 9/16 3 12.9 2.4
1/4 -3M0-1-4 35.6 14
1/16 -200-1-1 1.17 7/16 1/8 -4M0-1-2 31.2 12
1/8 -200-1-2 1.20 7/16 4 13.7 2.4
1/4 -4M0-1-4 36.3 14
1/8 1/4 -200-1-4 1.40 0.50 0.09 9/16
3/8 -200-1-6 1.41 11/16 1/8 -6M0-1-2 32.8 14
1/2 -200-1-8 1.66 7/8 1/4 -6M0-1-4 37.9 14
6 15.3 4.8
3/8 -6M0-1-6 38.4 18
1/8 -300-1-2 1.23 7/16 1/2 -6M0-1-8 44.7 22
3/16 0.54 0.12
1/4 -300-1-4 1.43 9/16
1/8 -8M0-1-2 34.2 4.8 15
1/16 -400-1-1 1.29 0.12 1/2 1/4 -8M0-1-4 38.7 6.4 15
1/8 -400-1-2 1.29 0.19 1/2 8 16.2
3/8 -8M0-1-6 39.3 6.4 18
1/4 -400-1-4 1.49 0.19 9/16
1/4 0.60 1/2 -8M0-1-8 45.6 6.4 22
3/8 -400-1-6 1.51 0.19 11/16
1/2 -400-1-8 1.76 0.19 7/8 1/8 -10M0-1-2 36.3 4.8 18
3/4 -400-1-12 1.82 0.19 1 1/16 1/4 -10M0-1-4 40.9 7.1 18
10 3/8 -10M0-1-6 40.9 17.2 7.9 18
1/8 -500-1-2 1.34 0.19 9/16 1/2 -10M0-1-8 46.5 7.9 22
5/16 1/4 -500-1-4 1.52 0.64 0.25 9/16 3/4 -10M0-1-12 48.0 7.9 27
3/8 -500-1-6 1.54 0.25 11/16
1/8 -12M0-1-2 38.8 4.8 22
1/8 -600-1-2 1.39 0.19 5/8 1/4 -12M0-1-4 43.4 7.1 22
1/4 -600-1-4 1.57 0.28 5/8 12 3/8 -12M0-1-6 43.4 22.8 9.5 22
3/8 -600-1-6 1.57 0.28 11/16 1/2 -12M0-1-8 49.0 9.5 22
3/8 0.66
1/2 -600-1-8 1.82 0.28 7/8 3/4 -12M0-1-12 50.5 9.5 27
3/4 -600-1-12 1.88 0.28 1 1/16
1 -600-1-16 2.14 0.28 1 3/8 1/4 -14M0-1-4 44.1 7.1
14 3/8 -14M0-1-6 44.1 24.4 9.5 24
1/8 -810-1-2 1.53 0.19 13/16 1/2 -14M0-1-8 49.0 11.1
1/4 -810-1-4 1.71 0.28 13/16
3/8 -810-1-6 1.71 0.38 13/16 15 1/2 -15M0-1-8 49.0 24.4 11.9 24
1/2 0.90
1/2 -810-1-8 1.93 0.41 7/8 3/8 -16M0-1-6 44.1 9.5 24
3/4 -810-1-12 1.99 0.41 1 1/16 16 1/2 -16M0-1-8 49.0 24.4 11.9 24
1 -810-1-16 2.25 0.41 1 3/8 3/4 -16M0-1-12 50.5 12.7 27
1/4 -1010-1-4 1.74 0.28 15/16 1/2 -18M0-1-8 11.9
18 50.5 24.4 27
3/8 -1010-1-6 1.74 0.38 15/16 3/4 -18M0-1-12 15.1
5/8 0.96
1/2 -1010-1-8 1.93 0.47 15/16 1/2 -20M0-1-8 11.9
3/4 -1010-1-12 1.99 0.50 1 1/16 20 52.3 26.0 30
3/4 -20M0-1-12 15.9
3/8 -1210-1-6 1.80 0.41 1 1/16 3/4 -22M0-1-12 52.3 15.9 30
22 26.0
1/2 -1210-1-8 1.99 0.47 1 1/16 1 -22M0-1-16 57.1 18.3 35
3/4 0.96
3/4 -1210-1-12 1.99 0.62 1 1/16 1/2 -25M0-1-8 57.5 11.9
1 -1210-1-16 2.25 0.62 1 3/8 25 3/4 -25M0-1-12 57.5 31.3 15.9 35
1/2 -1410-1-8 1.99 0.47 1 3/16 1 -25M0-1-16 62.3 21.8
7/8 3/4 -1410-1-12 1.99 1.02 0.62 1 3/16 1 -28M0-1-16 72.4 41
1 -1410-1-16 2.25 0.72 1 3/8 36.6 21.8
1 1/4 -28M0-1-20 73.1 46
1/2 -1610-1-8 2.26 0.47 28
1 B-28M0-1-16 75.0 41
1 3/4 -1610-1-12 2.26 1.23 0.62 1 3/8 31.6 24.6
1 1/4 B-28M0-1-20 77.3 46
1 -1610-1-16 2.45 0.88
30 1 1/4 -30M0-1-20 77.2 39.6 26.2 46
1 1/8 1 B-1810-1-16 2.45 1.23 0.88 1 5/8
32 1 1/4 -32M0-1-20 79.6 42.0 28.6 46
1 -2000-1-16 0.88
1 1/4 3.04 1.62 1 3/4 38 1 1/2 -38M0-1-24 91.6 49.4 33.7 55
1 1/4 -2000-1-20 1.09
1 1/2 1 1/2 -2400-1-24 3.50 1.97 1.34 2 1/8 ➀ The E dimension is the minimum nominal opening. These ittings may have
a larger opening at the pipe/straight thread end.
2 2 -3200-1-32 4.47 2.66 1.81 2 3/4
➀ The E dimension is the minimum nominal opening. These ittings may have

14 Tube Fittings
Straight Fittings
FITTINGS
TUBE
Male Connectors
F lat
See page 8 for thread speciications.

E
D
A
ISO/BSP Tapered Thread (RT)

ISO Basic ISO Basic
Tube Thread Ordering Tube Thread Ordering
OD Size Number A D E➀ F OD Size, in. Number A D E➀ F
1/8 -200-1-2RT 1.20 7/16 2 1/8 -2M0-1-2RT 30.5 12.9 1.7 12
1/8 0.50 0.09
1/4 -200-1-4RT 1.40 9/16 1/8 -3M0-1-2RT 30.5 12
3 12.9 2.4
1/8 -400-1-2RT 1.29 1/2 1/4 -3M0-1-4RT 35.6 14
1/4 -400-1-4RT 1.49 9/16 1/8 -4M0-1-2RT 31.2 12
1/4 0.60 0.19 4 13.7 2.4
3/8 -400-1-6RT 1.51 11/16 1/4 -4M0-1-4RT 36.3 14
1/2 -400-1-8RT 1.76 7/8
1/8 -6M0-1-2RT 32.8 14
1/8 -500-1-2RT 1.34 0.19 1/4 -6M0-1-4RT 37.9 14
5/16 0.64 9/16 6 15.3 4.8
1/4 -500-1-4RT 1.52 0.25 3/8 -6M0-1-6RT 38.4 18
1/8 -600-1-2RT 1.39 0.19 5/8 1/2 -6M0-1-8RT 44.7 22
1/4 -600-1-4RT 1.57 0.28 5/8
1/8 -8M0-1-2RT 34.2 4.8 15
3/8 3/8 -600-1-6RT 1.57 0.66 0.28 11/16
1/4 -8M0-1-4RT 38.7 6.4 15
1/2 -600-1-8RT 1.82 0.28 7/8 8 16.2
3/8 -8M0-1-6RT 39.2 6.4 18
3/4 -600-1-12RT 1.88 0.28 1 1/16
1/2 -8M0-1-8RT 45.6 6.4 22
1/4 -810-1-4RT 1.71 0.28 13/16
1/8 -10M0-1-2RT 36.3 4.8 18
3/8 -810-1-6RT 1.71 0.38 13/16
1/2 0.90 1/4 -10M0-1-4RT 40.9 7.1 18
1/2 -810-1-8RT 1.93 0.41 7/8
10 3/8 -10M0-1-6RT 40.9 17.2 7.9 18
3/4 -810-1-12RT 1.99 0.41 1 1/16
1/2 -10M0-1-8RT 46.5 7.9 22
5/8 1/2 -1010-1-8RT 1.93 0.96 0.47 15/16 3/4 -10M0-1-12RT 48.0 7.9 27
3/4 -1210-1-12RT 1.99 1 1/16 1/4 -12M0-1-4RT 43.4 7.1 22
3/4 0.96 0.62
1 -1210-1-16RT 2.25 1 3/8 3/8 -12M0-1-6RT 43.4 9.5 22
12 22.8
3/4 -1610-1-12RT 2.26 0.63 1/2 -12M0-1-8RT 49.0 9.5 22
1 1.23 1 3/8 3/4 -12M0-1-12RT 50.5 9.5 27
1 -1610-1-16RT 2.45 0.88
1 1/4 1 1/4 -2000-1-20RT 3.04 1.62 1.09 1 3/4 1/4 -14M0-1-4RT 44.1 7.1
14 24.4 24
3/8 -14M0-1-6RT 44.1 9.5
a larger opening at the pipe/straight thread end. 15 1/2 -15M0-1-8RT 49.0 24.4 11.9 24
1/4 -16M0-1-4RT 44.1 7.1 24
3/8 -16M0-1-6RT 44.1 9.5 24
16 24.4
1/2 -16M0-1-8RT 49.0 11.9 24
3/4 -16M0-1-12RT 50.5 12.7 27
1/2 -18M0-1-8RT 11.9
18 50.5 24.4 27
3/4 -18M0-1-12RT 15.1
1/2 -20M0-1-8RT 11.9
20 52.3 26.0 30
3/4 -20M0-1-12RT 15.9
3/4 -22M0-1-12RT 52.3 15.9 30
22 26.0
1 -22M0-1-16RT 57.1 18.3 35
1/2 -25M0-1-8RT 57.5 11.9
25 3/4 -25M0-1-12RT 57.5 31.3 15.9 35
1 -25M0-1-16RT 62.3 21.8
1 -28M0-1-16RT 72.4 41
36.6 21.8
1 1/4 -28M0-1-20RT 73.1 46
28
1 B-28M0-1-16RT 75.0 41
31.6 22.2
1 1/4 B-28M0-1-20RT 77.3 46
30 1 1/4 -30M0-1-20RT 77.2 39.6 26.2 46
32 1 1/4 -32M0-1-20RT 79.6 42.0 28.6 46
38 1 1/2 -38M0-1-24RT 91.6 49.4 33.7 55

Straight Fittings
FITTINGS
TUBE
Male Connectors
F lat
E

ISO/BSP parallel gaskets are available. See page 54.
D
A
ISO/BSP Parallel Thread (RS)

ISO Basic ISO Basic
1/8 -200-1-2RS 1.31 9/16 2 1/8 -2M0-1-2RS 33.3 12.9 1.7 14
1/8 1/4 -200-1-4RS 1.50 0.50 0.09 3/4 1/8 -3M0-1-2RS 33.3 14
3/8 -200-1-6RS 1.53 7/8 3 12.9 2.4
1/4 -3M0-1-4RS 38.1 19
1/8 -400-1-2RS 1.40 0.16 9/16 4 1/8 -4M0-1-2RS 34.0 13.7 2.4 14
1/4 -400-1-4RS 1.59 0.19 3/4
1/4 0.60 1/8 -6M0-1-2RS 35.6 4.0 14
3/8 -400-1-6RS 1.62 0.19 7/8
1/2 -400-1-8RS 1.70 0.19 1 1/16 1/4 -6M0-1-4RS 40.4 4.8 19
6 15.3
3/8 -6M0-1-6RS 41.1 4.8 22
1/8 -600-1-2RS 1.49 0.16 5/8 1/2 -6M0-1-8RS 43.2 4.8 27
1/4 -600-1-4RS 1.65 0.23 3/4
3/8 0.66 1/8 -8M0-1-2RS 36.6 4.0 15
3/8 -600-1-6RS 1.68 0.28 7/8
1/2 -600-1-8RS 1.76 0.28 1 1/16 1/4 -8M0-1-4RS 41.4 5.9 19
8 16.2
3/8 -8M0-1-6RS 42.2 6.4 22
1/4 -810-1-4RS 1.76 0.23 13/16 1/2 -8M0-1-8RS 44.2 6.4 27
1/2 3/8 -810-1-6RS 1.79 0.90 0.31 7/8
1/2 -810-1-8RS 1.87 0.41 1 1/16 1/4 -10M0-1-4RS 42.2 5.9 19
10 3/8 -10M0-1-6RS 42.9 17.2 7.9 22
1/2 -1210-1-8RS 1.92 0.47 1 1/16
3/4 0.96 1/2 -10M0-1-8RS 45.0 7.9 27
3/4 -1210-1-12RS 2.05 0.62 1 5/16
1/4 -12M0-1-4RS 44.5 5.9 22
1/2 -1610-1-8RS 2.19 0.47 1 3/8
3/8 -12M0-1-6RS 45.5 7.9 22
1 3/4 -1610-1-12RS 2.27 1.23 0.63 1 3/8 12 22.8
1/2 -12M0-1-8RS 47.5 9.5 27
1 -1610-1-16RS 2.35 0.78 1 5/8
3/4 -12M0-1-12RS 52.1 9.5 35
➀ The E dimension is the minimum nominal opening. These ittings may have 3/8 -14M0-1-6RS 43.9 7.9 24
a larger opening at the pipe/straight thread end. 14 24.4
1/2 -14M0-1-8RS 47.5 11.1 27
3/8 -15M0-1-6RS 45.5 7.9 24
15 1/2 -15M0-1-8RS 47.5 24.4 11.9 27
3/4 -15M0-1-12RS 52.8 11.9 35
3/8 -16M0-1-6RS 45.5 7.9 24
16 1/2 -16M0-1-8RS 47.5 24.4 11.9 27
3/4 -16M0-1-12RS 52.8 12.7 35
1/2 -18M0-1-8RS 48.8 11.9 27
18 24.4
3/4 -18M0-1-12RS 52.1 15.1 35
1/2 -20M0-1-8RS 50.5 11.9 30
20 26.0
3/4 -20M0-1-12RS 52.6 15.9 35
3/4 -22M0-1-12RS 52.6 15.9 35
22 26.0
1 -22M0-1-16RS 54.9 18.3 41
3/4 -25M0-1-12RS 57.7 15.9 35
25 31.3
1 -25M0-1-16RS 59.7 19.8 41
1 -28M0-1-16RS 69.9 19.8 41
36.6
1 1/4 -28M0-1-20RS 72.9 21.8 50
28
1 B-28M0-1-16RS 72.5 19.8 41
31.6
1 1/4 B-28M0-1-20RS 77.1 24.6 54
30 1 1/4 -30M0-1-20RS 76.7 39.6 26.2 50
32 1 1/4 -32M0-1-20RS 79.2 42.0 28.6 50
38 1 1/2 -38M0-1-24RS 90.9 49.4 31.8 55

16 Tube Fittings
Straight Fittings
FITTINGS
TUBE
Male Connectors
F lat

E
ISO/BSP parallel gaskets are available. See page 54.
D
A
ISO/BSP Parallel Thread (RP)

ISO Basic ISO Basic
1/8 -200-1-2RP 1.31 9/16 1/8 -3M0-1-2RP 33.3 14
1/8 0.50 0.09 3 12.9 2.4
1/4 -200-1-4RP 1.50 3/4 1/4 -3M0-1-4RP 38.1 19
1/8 -400-1-2RP 1.40 0.16 9/16 4 1/8 -4M0-1-2RP 34.0 13.7 2.4 14
1/4 0.60
1/4 -400-1-4RP 1.59 0.19 3/4 1/8 -6M0-1-2RP 35.6 4.0 14
3/8 -810-1-6RP 1.79 0.31 7/8 1/4 -6M0-1-4RP 40.4 4.8 19
1/2 0.90 6 15.3
1/2 -810-1-8RP 1.87 0.41 1 1/16 3/8 -6M0-1-6RP 41.2 4.8 22
1/2 -1210-1-8RP 1.92 0.47 1 1/16 1/2 -6M0-1-8RP 43.2 4.8 27
3/4 0.96
3/4 -1210-1-12RP 2.05 0.62 1 5/16 1/8 -8M0-1-2RP 36.5 4.0 15
1 1 -1610-1-16RP 2.35 1.23 0.78 1 5/8 1/4 -8M0-1-4RP 41.3 5.9 19
8 16.2
3/8 -8M0-1-6RP 41.9 6.4 22
➀ The E dimension is the minimum nominal opening. These ittings may have 1/2 -8M0-1-8RP 44.1 6.4 27
1/4 -10M0-1-4RP 42.2 5.9 19
10 3/8 -10M0-1-6RP 42.9 17.2 7.9 22
Bored-Through Fittings for Thermocouples, 1/2 -10M0-1-8RP 45.0 7.9 27
Dip Tubes, and Heat Exchanger Tees 1/4 -12M0-1-4RP 45.4 5.9 22
3/8 -12M0-1-6RP 45.4 7.9 22
12 22.8
1/2 -12M0-1-8RP 47.5 9.5 27
3/4 -12M0-1-12RP 52.1 9.5 35
15 1/2 -15M0-1-8RP 47.5 24.4 11.9 27
3/8 -16M0-1-6RP 45.4 7.9 24
16 24.4
1/2 -16M0-1-8RP 47.5 11.9 27
1/2 -18M0-1-8RP 49.0 11.9 27
18 24.4
3/4 -18M0-1-12RP 52.3 15.1 35
1/2 -20M0-1-8RP 50.5 11.9 30
20 26.0
3/4 -20M0-1-12RP 52.5 15.9 35
3/4 -22M0-1-12RP 52.8 15.9 35
22 26.0
1 -22M0-1-16RP 54.5 18.3 41
3/4 -25M0-1-12RP 57.8 15.9 35
25 31.3
1 -25M0-1-16RP 59.8 19.8 41
1 -28M0-1-16RP 69.8 19.8 41
36.6
Swagelok bored-through male connectors accommodate 1 1/4 -28M0-1-20RP 72.9 21.8 50
28
thermocouples or dip tubes. Most male connectors are 1 B-28M0-1-16RP 72.5 19.8 41
31.6
1 1/4 B-28M0-1-20RP 77.1 24.6 54
available as a bored-through itting, but male connectors
whose pipe thread end is small relative to the tube itting 30 1 1/4 -30M0-1-20RP 76.8 39.6 26.2 50
end—such as -600-1-2 or -8M0-1-2RT—cannot be bored 32 1 1/4 -32M0-1-20RP 79.2 42.0 28.6 50
through. 38 1 1/2 -38M0-1-24RP 92.1 49.4 31.8 55
Swagelok bored-through reducers and standard Swagelok ➀ The E dimension is the minimum nominal opening. These ittings may have
tees can be used to create a heat exchanger tee.
To order bored-through ittings, add BT to the ordering
number. Example: SS-400-1-4BT Reduced Pressure Rating Factors
Bored-through ittings have a reduced pressure rating.
In general, we have multiplied the allowable working Size (in.) Size (mm) Factor
pressure of the tubing, as found on the Tubing Data Sheet Up to 1/2 in. Up to 12 mm 0.75
(MS-01-107) by the factors in the table to the right. Above 1/2 in. to 3/4 in. Above 12 mm to 18 mm 0.50
Above 3/4 in. Above 18 mm 0.25

Straight Fittings
FITTINGS
TUBE
Male Connectors Bulkhead NPT
F lat
Dimensions
NPT Basic Panel Max
E Tube Size Ordering Hole Panel
OD in. Number A D E➀ F Size Thickness
Dimensions, in.
D
A 1/8 1/8 -200-11-2 1.83 0.50 0.09 1/2 21/64 0.50
1/8 -400-11-2 1.95
1/4 0.60 0.19 5/8 29/64 0.40
1/4 -400-11-4 2.13
1/4 -600-11-4 2.26 3/4
3/8 3/8 -600-11-6 2.26 0.66 0.28 3/4 37/64 0.44
1/2 -600-11-8 2.51 7/8
3/8 -810-11-6 2.49 0.38
1/2 0.90 15/16 49/64 0.50
1/2 -810-11-8 2.71 0.41
3/4 3/4 -1210-11-12 3.00 0.96 0.62 1 3/16 1 1/64 0.66
1 1 -1610-11-16 3.67 1.23 0.88 1 5/8 1 21/64 0.75
Dimensions, mm
1/8 -6M0-11-2 49.5
6 15.3 4.8 16 11.5 10.2
1/4 -6M0-11-4 53.6
12 1/2 -12M0-11-8 68.8 22.8 9.5 24 19.5 12.7
➀ The E dimension is the minimum nominal opening. These ittings may have a larger opening at the
pipe/straight thread end.
F lat
O-ring
Adapts to SAE J1926/1 and ISO 11926-1

straight thread boss.
D E
A
SAE/MS Straight Thread (ST)

SAE/MS Basic SAE/MS Basic
OD Size Number A D E➀ F OD Size Number A D E➀ F
5/16-24 -200-1-2ST 1.18 7/16 6 9/16-18 -6M0-1-6ST 35.6 15.3 4.8 18
1/8 7/16-20 -200-1-4ST 1.24 0.50 0.09 9/16 9/16-18 -10M0-1-6ST 37.3 7.1 18
9/16-18 -200-1-6ST 1.31 11/16 10 17.2
3/4-16 -10M0-1-8ST 39.4 7.9 22
5/16-24 -400-1-2ST 1.27 0.09 1/2 7/16-20 -12M0-1-4ST 40.6 5.2
7/16-20 -400-1-4ST 1.34 0.19 9/16 12 9/16-18 -12M0-1-6ST 39.9 22.8 7.1 22
1/4 9/16-18 -400-1-6ST 1.40 0.60 0.19 11/16 3/4-16 -12M0-1-8ST 41.9 9.5
3/4-16 -400-1-8ST 1.48 0.19 7/8
7/8-14 -400-1-10ST 1.60 0.19 1 ➀ The E dimension is the minimum nominal opening. These ittings may have
5/16 1/2-20 -500-1-5ST 1.37 0.64 0.25 5/8
7/16-20 -600-1-4ST 1.40 0.18 5/8
9/16-18 -600-1-6ST 1.46 0.28 11/16 Long SAE/MS Straight Thread (ST)
3/8 0.66
3/4-16 -600-1-8ST 1.54 0.28 7/8
7/8-14 -600-1-10ST 1.66 0.28 1 SAE/MSBasic
Dimensions
Tube Thread
Ordering
9/16-18 -810-1-6ST 1.54 0.28 13/16
OD SizeNumber A D E➀ F
3/4-16 -810-1-8ST 1.65 0.41 7/8 Long SAE/MS Straight Thread
1/2 0.90 Dimensions, in.
7/8-14 -810-1-10ST 1.77 0.41 1
1 1/16-12 -810-1-12ST 1.93 0.41 1 1/4 1/4 7/16-20 -400-1L-4ST 2.26 0.60 0.19 9/16
3/4-16 -1010-1-8ST 1.65 0.42 15/16 1/2 3/4-16 -810-1L-8ST 3.01 0.90 0.41 7/8
5/8 0.96
7/8-14 -1010-1-10ST 1.78 0.50 1
3/4-16 -1210-1-8ST 1.81 0.42 1 1/16 a larger opening at the pipe/straight thread end.
3/4 1 1/16-12 -1210-1-12ST 1.93 0.96 0.62 1 1/4
1 5/16-12 -1210-1-16ST 1.96 0.63 1 1/2 For ST and ST positionable ittings used in ECE-R110
7/8 1 3/16-12 -1410-1-14ST 1.93 1.02 0.72 1 3/8 applications, add the DE O-ring sufix to the ordering number.
1 1/16-12 -1610-1-12ST 2.10 0.66 1 3/8 Example: SS-600-1-6STDE
1 1.23
1 5/16-12 -1610-1-16ST 2.14 0.88 1 1/2
1 1/4 1 5/8-12 -2000-1-20ST 2.69 1.62 1.09 1 7/8
➀ The E dimension is the minimum
1 1/2 1 7/8-12 -2400-1-24ST 3.06 1.97 1.34 2 1/8 nominal opening. These ittings
may have a larger opening at the
2 2 1/2-12 -3200-1-32ST 4.00 2.66 1.81 2 3/4
18 Tube Fittings
Straight Fittings
FITTINGS
TUBE
Male Connectors
F lat
F lat
O-ring O-ring
E E
D D
A A
O-Seal (SAE/MS Straight Thread) O-Seal (NPT)

SAE/MS Basic Basic
Tube Thread Ordering Tube NPT Ordering
OD Size Number A D E➀ F OD Size Number A D E➀ F
Dimensions, in. Dimensions, in.
1/16 5/16-24 -100-1-OR 1.05 0.34 0.05 9/16 1/8 1/8 -200-1-2-OR 1.29 0.50 0.09 3/4
1/8 5/16-24 -200-1-OR 1.29 0.50 0.09 9/16 1/8 -400-1-2-OR 1.38 3/4
1/4 0.60 0.19
3/16 3/8-24 -300-1-OR 1.35 0.54 0.12 5/8 1/4 -400-1-4-OR 1.51 15/16
1/4 7/16-20 -400-1-OR 1.51 0.60 0.19 3/4 1/4 -600-1-4-OR 1.57 15/16
3/8 3/8 -600-1-6-OR 1.63 0.66 0.28 1 1/8
5/16 1/2-20 -500-1-OR 1.60 0.64 0.25 7/8 1/2 -600-1-8-OR 1.85 1 5/16
3/8 9/16-18 -600-1-OR 1.67 0.66 0.28 15/16 1/2 1/2 -810-1-8-OR 1.96 0.90 0.41 1 5/16
1/2 3/4-16 -810-1-OR 1.81 0.90 0.41 1 1/8
3/4 1 1/16-12 -1210-1-OR 2.06 0.96 0.62 1 1/2 a larger opening at the pipe/straight thread end.
1 1 5/16-12 -1610-1-OR 2.29 1.23 0.88 1 3/4
Mounting Dimensions for O-Seal Fittings

For a raised surface, see Fig. 1. The minimum diameter allows metal-to-metal contact outside of the O-ring sealing
diameter to prevent O-ring extrusion.
For a recessed hole that allows the round shoulder of the O-seal itting into the recess, see Fig. 2.
For a recessed hole that allows the hex of the O-seal itting into the recess, see Fig. 3.
Fig. 1 Fig. 2
SAE/MS A B C D E
Thread NPT Min Min Min Max Max
Size Size Dia Dia Dia Depth Depth
D Dimensions, in.
5/16-24 0.16
— 0.50 0.59 0.66 0.09
5/16-24 0.22
— 1/8 0.69 0.78 0.88 0.16 0.28
➀ ➀ 3/8-24 — 0.56 0.66 0.75 0.09 0.22
A B
7/16-20 —
0.69 0.78 0.88 0.28
— 1/8
Fig. 3 ➀ Allow clearance for full thread. — 1/4 0.87 0.97 1.09
1/2-20 — 0.75 0.91 1.03 0.16
1/8 in. 0.31
9/16-18 — 0.81
0.97 1.09
— 1/4 0.87
E — 3/8 1.00 1.16 1.31 0.34
— 1/2 1.22 1.34 1.53 0.22 0.44
3/4-16 — 1.00 1.16 1.31 0.16 0.34
➀ — 1/2 1.22 1.34 1.53 0.44
C
1 1/16-12 — 1.41 1.53 1.75 0.22 0.50
1 5/16-12 — 1.69 1.78 2.03 0.56

Straight Fittings
FITTINGS
TUBE
Male Connectors AN Fitting
F lat AN Tube Basic
37° Dimensions
Tube Flare Ordering
OD Size Number A D E➀ F S
E
Dimensions, in.
S 1/16 1/8 -100-6-2AN 1.07 0.34 0.05 7/16 5/16-24UNJF-3
D
A 1/8 -200-6-2AN 1.27 0.06 7/16 5/16-24UNJF-3
1/8 0.50
1/4 -200-6-4AN 1.38 0.09 1/2 7/16-20UNJF-3
1/4 1/4 -400-6-4AN 1.48 0.60 0.17 1/2 7/16-20UNJF-3
5/16 5/16 -500-6-5AN 1.51 0.64 0.23 9/16 1/2-20UNJF-3
1/4 -600-6-4AN 0.17 7/16-20UNJF-3
3/8 1.56 0.66 5/8
3/8 -600-6-6AN 0.28 9/16-18UNJF-3
1/2 1/2 -810-6-8AN 1.81 0.90 0.39 13/16 3/4-16UNJF-3
3/4 3/4 -1210-6-12AN 2.10 0.96 0.61 1 1/8 1 1/16-12UNJ-3
1 1 -1610-6-16AN 2.42 1.23 0.84 1 3/8 1 5/16-12UNJ-3
AN Bulkhead Fitting
F lat F lat
AN Dimensions
37°
Tube Basic Panel Max
Tube Flare Ordering Hole Panel
E
OD Size Number A D E F S Size Thickness
Dimensions, in.
S
D 1/4 1/4 -400-61-4AN 2.12 0.60 0.17 5/8 7/16-20UNJF-3 29/64 0.40
A
3/8 3/8 -600-61-6AN 2.25 0.66 0.28 3/4 9/16-18UNJF-3 37/64 0.44
1/2 1/2 -810-61-8AN 2.59 0.90 0.39 15/16 3/4-16UNJF-3 49/64 0.50
3/4 3/4 -1210-61-12AN 3.11 0.96 0.61 1 3/16 1 1/16-12UNJ-3 1 1/64 0.66
1 1 -1610-61-16AN 3.64 1.23 0.84 1 5/8 1 5/16-12UNJ-3 1 21/64 0.75

20 Tube Fittings
Straight Fittings
FITTINGS
TUBE
Male Connectors 10-32 Thread

F lat
Gasket Basic
Dimensions
E Tube Ordering
OD Number A D E➀ F
Dimensions, in.
1/8 -200-1-0157 0.95 0.50 7/16
D 0.09
A 1/4 -400-1-0256 1.08 0.60 9/16
➀ The E dimension is the minimum nominal opening. These ittings
may have a larger opening at the pipe/straight thread end.
M5 × 0.8 Thread
F lat
Basic
Dimensions
E Tube Ordering
Dimensions, mm
6 -6M0-1-0046 29.2 15.3 2.0 14
D
A ➀ The E dimension is the minimum nominal opening. These ittings
may have a larger opening at the pipe/straight thread end.
Metric Thread (RS)
F lat Basic
Dimensions
E
Tube Ordering
E
Dimensions, mm
-6M0-1-M10X1.0RS 36.3 3.2
6 15.3 14
D -6M0-1-M12X1.0RS 40.4 4.8
A
12 -12M0-1-M16X1.5RS 45.5 22.8 9.5 22
➀ The E dimension is the minimum nominal opening. These ittings may
have a larger opening at the pipe/straight thread end.
Weld Connectors Tube Socket Weld

Socket Basic
Dimensions
Tube Weld Ordering
J OD Size Number A B D E J
Dimensions, in.
D E B 1/8 1/8 -200-6-2W 1.14 0.10 0.50 0.09 0.29
A
1/4 1/4 -400-6-4W 1.32 0.28 0.60 0.19 0.48
3/8 3/8 -600-6-6W 1.48 0.31 0.66 0.28 0.60
1/2 1/2 -810-6-8W 1.62 0.38 0.90 0.41 0.73
3/4 3/4 -1210-6-12W 1.71 0.44 0.96 0.62 1.04
1 1 -1610-6-16W 2.07 0.62 1.23 0.88 1.36

Straight Fittings
FITTINGS
TUBE
Weld Connectors Male Pipe Weld (Fractional)
F lat
37.5°
Pipe Basic
Dimensions
Tube Weld Ordering
OD Size Number A D E➀ F J
E J
Dimensions, in.
1/8 1/8 -200-1-2W 1.20 0.50 0.09 7/16 0.405
D
A 3/16 1/8 -300-1-2W 1.23 0.54 0.12 7/16 0.405
1/8 -400-1-2W 1.29 1/2 0.405
1/4 0.60 0.19
1/4 -400-1-4W 1.49 9/16 0.540
1/8 -500-1-2W 1.34 0.21 0.405
5/16 0.64 9/16
1/4 -500-1-4W 1.52 0.25 0.540
1/4 -600-1-4W 1.57 5/8 0.540
3/8 -600-1-6W 1.57 11/16 0.675
3/8 0.66 0.28
1/2 -600-1-8W 1.82 7/8 0.840
3/4 -600-1-12W 1.88 1 1/6 1.050
3/8 -810-1-6W 1.71 13/16 0.675
1/2 -810-1-8W 1.93 7/8 0.840
1/2 0.90 0.41
3/4 -810-1-12W 1.99 1 1/16 1.050
1 -810-1-16W 2.25 1 3/8 1.315
5/8 1/2 -1010-1-8W 1.93 0.96 0.50 15/16 0.840
1/2 -1210-1-8W 0.55 0.840
3/4 1.99 0.96 1 1/16
3/4 -1210-1-12W 0.62 1.050
1 1 -1610-1-16W 2.45 1.23 0.88 1 3/8 1.315
1 1/4 1 1/4 -2000-1-20W 3.04 1.62 1.09 1 3/4 1.660
1 1/2 1 1/2 -2400-1-24W 3.50 1.97 1.34 2 1/8 1.900
2 2 -3200-1-32W 4.47 2.66 1.81 2 3/4 2.375
➀ The E dimension is the minimum nominal opening. These ittings may have a larger
opening at the weld end. Wall thickness at the weld end is based on schedule 80 pipe.
Male Pipe Weld (Metric to Fractional)
Pipe
Weld Basic
Dimensions
Tube Size Ordering
OD in. Number A D E➀ F F, in.➁ J
Dimensions, mm
3 1/8 -3M0-1-2W 30.5 12.9 2.4 12 1/2 10.3
4 1/8 -4M0-1-2W 31.2 13.7 2.4 12 1/2 10.3
1/8 -6M0-1-2W 32.8 1/2 10.3
6 15.3 4.8 14
1/4 -6M0-1-4W 37.9 9/16 13.7
1/8 -8M0-1-2W 34.2 5.4 15 9/16 10.3
8 1/4 -8M0-1-4W 38.7 16.2 6.4 15 9/16 13.7
1/2 -8M0-1-8W 45.6 6.4 22 7/8 21.3
1/4 -10M0-1-4W 40.9 7.5 18 11/16 13.7
10 3/8 -10M0-1-6W 40.9 17.2 7.9 18 11/16 17.1
1/2 -10M0-1-8W 46.5 7.9 22 7/8 21.3
1/4 -12M0-1-4W 43.4 7.5 22 13/16 13.7
3/8 -12M0-1-6W 43.4 9.5 22 13/16 17.1
12 22.8
1/2 -12M0-1-8W 49.0 9.5 22 7/8 21.3
3/4 -12M0-1-12W 50.5 9.5 27 1 1/16 26.7
14 3/8 -14M0-1-6W 44.1 24.4 10.7 24 15/16 17.1
15 1/2 -15M0-1-8W 49.0 24.4 11.9 24 15/16 21.3
16 1/2 -16M0-1-8W 49.0 24.4 12.7 24 15/16 21.3
18 1/2 -18M0-1-8W 50.5 24.4 13.9 27 1 1/16 21.3
30 1 1/4 -30M0-1-20W 77.2 39.6 26.2 46 46 mm 42.2
32 1 1/4 -32M0-1-20W 79.6 42.0 28.6 46 46 mm 42.2
38 1 1/2 -38M0-1-24W 91.6 49.4 33.7 55 55 mm 48.3
weld end. Wall thickness at the weld end is based on schedule 80 pipe.
➁ This dimension is for steel and aluminum ittings.

22 Tube Fittings
Straight Fittings
FITTINGS
TUBE
Female Connectors
F lat
E
D
A
NPT
Basic NPT Basic
OD Size Number A D E F OD in. Number A D E F
1/16 -100-7-1 0.93 7/16 1/8 -3M0-7-2 28.7 14
1/16 0.34 0.05 3 12.9 2.4
1/8 -100-7-2 0.96 9/16 1/4 -3M0-7-4 33.5 19
1/8 -200-7-2 1.13 9/16 4 1/8 -4M0-7-2 29.7 13.7 2.4 14
1/8 0.50 0.09
1/4 -200-7-4 1.32 3/4 1/8 -6M0-7-2 31.3 14
3/16 1/8 -300-7-2 1.17 0.54 0.12 9/16 1/4 -6M0-7-4 35.8 19
6 15.3 4.8
1/8 -400-7-2 1.23 9/16 3/8 -6M0-7-6 37.6 22
1/4 -400-7-4 1.41 3/4 1/2 -6M0-7-8 42.5 27
1/4 0.60 0.19
3/8 -400-7-6 1.48 7/8 1/8 -8M0-7-2 32.1 15
1/2 -400-7-8 1.67 1 1/16 1/4 -8M0-7-4 37.0 19
8 16.2 6.4
1/8 -500-7-2 1.26 9/16 3/8 -8M0-7-6 38.5 22
5/16 0.64 0.25 1/2 -8M0-7-8 43.3 27
1/4 -500-7-4 1.45 3/4
1/8 -600-7-2 1.29 5/8 1/4 -10M0-7-4 37.8 19
1/4 -600-7-4 1.48 3/4 10 3/8 -10M0-7-6 39.4 17.2 7.9 22
3/8 3/8 -600-7-6 1.54 0.66 0.28 7/8 1/2 -10M0-7-8 44.2 27
1/2 -600-7-8 1.73 1 1/16 1/4 -12M0-7-4 40.3 22
3/4 -600-7-12 1.88 1 5/16 12 3/8 -12M0-7-6 41.9 22.8 9.5 22
1/4 -810-7-4 1.59 13/16 1/2 -12M0-7-8 46.7 27
3/8 -810-7-6 1.65 7/8 15 1/2 -15M0-7-8 46.7 24.4 11.9 27
1/2 0.90 0.41
1/2 -810-7-8 1.84 1 1/16 16 1/2 -16M0-7-8 46.9 24.4 12.7 27
3/4 -810-7-12 1.90 1 5/16
1/2 -20M0-7-8 47.9 30
3/8 -1010-7-6 1.65 15/16 20 26.0 15.9
3/4 -20M0-7-12 49.7 35
5/8 1/2 -1010-7-8 1.84 0.96 0.50 1 1/16
3/4 -1010-7-12 1.90 1 5/16 3/4 -22M0-7-12 49.7 35
22 26.0 18.3
1 -22M0-7-16 57.9 41
1/2 -1210-7-8 1.84 1 1/16
3/4 0.96 0.62 3/4 -25M0-7-12 53.4 35
3/4 -1210-7-12 1.90 1 5/16 25 31.3 21.8
1 -25M0-7-16 62.3 41
7/8 3/4 -1410-7-12 1.96 1.02 0.72 1 5/16
3/4 -1610-7-12 2.10 1 3/8
1 1.23 0.88
1 -1610-7-16 2.45 1 5/8
1 1/4 1 1/4 -2000-7-20 2.94 1.62 1.09 2 1/8
1 1/2 1 1/2 -2400-7-24 3.28 1.97 1.34 2 3/8
2 2 -3200-7-32 4.00 2.66 1.81 2 7/8

Straight Fittings
FITTINGS
TUBE
Female Connectors
F lat
F lat E
E
ISO/BSP parallel thread
(RJ) ittings are available in
See page 8 for thread
stainless steel only.
speciications.
See page 8 for thread
speciications.
D D
A A
ISO/BSP Tapered Thread (RT) ISO/BSP Parallel Thread (RJ)
ISO ISO
Thread Basic Thread
Tube Size Ordering Tube Size Ordering
OD in. Number A D E F OD in. Number A D E F
1/8 1/8 -200-7-2RT 1.13 0.50 0.09 9/16 1/4 SS-400-7-4RJ 1.48 0.18 3/4
1/8 -400-7-2RT 1.23 9/16 1/4 3/8 SS-400-7-6RJ 1.48 0.60 0.19 15/16
1/4 -400-7-4RT 1.41 3/4 1/2 SS-400-7-8RJ 1.71 0.19 1 1/16
1/4 0.60 0.19 1/4 SS-500-7-4RJ 1.51 0.22 3/4
3/8 -400-7-6RT 1.48 7/8 5/16 0.64
1/2 -400-7-8RT 1.67 1 1/16 1/2 SS-500-7-8RJ 1.61 0.28 1 1/16
1/4 -600-7-4RT 1.48 3/4 1/4 SS-600-7-4RJ 1.54 0.22 3/4
3/8 3/8 -600-7-6RT 1.54 0.66 0.28 7/8 3/8 3/8 SS-600-7-6RJ 1.52 0.66 0.26 15/16
1/2 -600-7-8RT 1.73 1 1/16 1/2 SS-600-7-8RJ 1.65 0.28 1 1/16
1/4 -810-7-4RT 1.59 13/16 1/4 SS-810-7-4RJ 1.65 0.22 13/16
1/2 3/8 -810-7-6RT 1.65 0.90 0.41 7/8 1/2 3/8 SS-810-7-6RJ 1.75 0.90 0.26 15/16
1/2 -810-7-8RT 1.84 1 1/16 1/2 SS-810-7-8RJ 1.90 0.28 1 1/16
Dimensions, mm Dimensions, mm
3 1/8 -3M0-7-2RT 28.7 12.9 2.4 14 1/4 SS-6M0-7-4RJ 37.6 19
6 3/8 SS-6M0-7-6RJ 37.6 15.3 4.8 24
1/8 -6M0-7-2RT 31.3 14
1/2 SS-6M0-7-8RJ 43.5 27
1/4 -6M0-7-4RT 35.8 19
6 15.3 4.8 1/4 SS-8M0-7-4RJ 38.5 5.5 19
3/8 -6M0-7-6RT 37.6 22
1/2 -6M0-7-8RT 42.5 27 8 3/8 SS-8M0-7-6RJ 36.2 16.2 6.5 24
1/2 SS-8M0-7-8RJ 41.0 7.0 27
1/8 -8M0-7-2RT 32.1 15
1/4 -8M0-7-4RT 37.0 19 1/4 SS-10M0-7-4RJ 39.4 5.5 19
8 16.2 6.4 10 3/8 SS-10M0-7-6RJ 38.8 17.2 6.5 24
3/8 -8M0-7-6RT 38.5 22
1/2 -8M0-7-8RT 43.3 27 1/2 SS-10M0-7-8RJ 42.1 7.0 27
1/8 -10M0-7-2RT 33.0 18 1/4 SS-12M0-7-4RJ 41.9 5.5 22
1/4 -10M0-7-4RT 37.8 19 12 3/8 SS-12M0-7-6RJ 44.4 22.8 6.5 24
10 17.2 7.9 1/2 SS-12M0-7-8RJ 48.2 7.0 27
3/8 -10M0-7-6RT 39.4 22
1/2 -10M0-7-8RT 44.2 27
1/8 -12M0-7-2RT 35.5 8.3 22
1/4 -12M0-7-4RT 40.3 9.5 22
12 3/8 -12M0-7-6RT 41.9 22.8 9.5 22 F lat
1/2 -12M0-7-8RT 46.7 9.5 27 E
3/4 -12M0-7-12RT 49.0 9.5 35
3/8 -15M0-7-6RT 41.9 24 See page 8 for thread
15 24.4 11.9
1/2 -15M0-7-8RT 46.7 27 speciications.
1/2 -20M0-7-8RT 47.9 30
20 26.0 15.9 D
3/4 -20M0-7-12RT 49.7 35
A
3/4 -22M0-7-12RT 49.7 35
22 26.0 18.3
1 -22M0-7-16RT 57.9 41 ISO/BSP Parallel Thread (RP)
3/4 -25M0-7-12RT 53.4 35
25 31.3 21.8
1 -25M0-7-16RT 62.3 41 ISO
Thread Basic
Dimensions
Tube Size Ordering
OD in. Number A D E F
Dimensions, mm
1/8 -6M0-7-2RP 33.5 14
6 15.3 4.8
1/4 -6M0-7-4RP 39.4 19
22 3/4 -22M0-7-12RP 53.3 26.0 18.3 35
25 1 -25M0-7-16RP 63.9 26.5 21.8 40

24 Tube Fittings
Straight Fittings
FITTINGS
TUBE
Female Connectors ISO/BSP Parallel Thread (RG, Gauge)

F lat ISO
E Thread Basic
Dimensions
Tube Size Ordering
OD in. Number A D E F
Dimensions, in.
D 1/8 1/4 -200-7-4RG 1.39 0.59 0.09 3/4
A 1/8 -400-7-2RG 1.26 0.18 9/16
1/4 -400-7-4RG 1.48 0.19 3/4
1/4 0.60
See page 8 for thread speciications. 3/8 -400-7-6RG 1.48 0.19 15/16
ISO/BSP parallel gaskets are available. 1/2 -400-7-8RG 1.71 0.19 1 1/16
See page 54. 1/4 -500-7-4RG 1.51 0.22 3/4
5/16 0.64
1/2 -500-7-8RG 1.61 0.28 1 1/16
1/4 -600-7-4RG 1.54 0.22 3/4
3/8 3/8 -600-7-6RG 1.52 0.66 0.26 15/16
1/2 -600-7-8RG 1.65 0.28 1 1/16
3/8 -810-7-6RG 1.75 0.26 15/16
1/2 0.90
1/2 -810-7-8RG 1.90 0.28 1 1/16
Dimensions, mm
3 1/4 -3M0-7-4RG 35.3 12.9 2.4 19
1/8 -6M0-7-2RG 32.0 4.5 14
1/4 -6M0-7-4RG 37.6 4.8 19
6 15.3
3/8 -6M0-7-6RG 37.6 4.8 24
1/2 -6M0-7-8RG 43.5 4.8 27
1/4 -8M0-7-4RG 38.5 5.5 19
8 3/8 -8M0-7-6RG 36.2 16.2 6.5 24
1/2 -8M0-7-8RG 41.0 7.0 27
1/4 -10M0-7-4RG 39.4 5.5 19
10 3/8 -10M0-7-6RG 38.8 17.2 6.5 24
1/2 -10M0-7-8RG 42.1 7.0 27
1/4 -12M0-7-4RG 41.9 5.5 22
12 3/8 -12M0-7-6RG 44.4 22.8 6.5 24
1/2 -12M0-7-8RG 48.2 7.0 27
20 1/2 -20M0-7-8RG 54.3 26.0 7.0 30
22 1/2 -22M0-7-8RG 54.3 26.0 7.0 30
Bulkhead NPT
F lat
Dimensions
E
NPT Basic Panel Max
Tube Size Ordering Hole Panel
OD in. Number A D E F Size Thickness
Dimensions, in.
D 1/8 1/8 -200-71-2 1.76 0.50 0.09 9/16 21/64 0.50
A
1/8 -400-71-2 1.85 5/8
1/4 0.60 0.19 29/64 0.40
1/4 -400-71-4 2.04 3/4
3/8 1/4 -600-71-4 2.17 0.66 0.28 3/4 37/64 0.44
3/8 -810-71-6 2.43 15/16
1/2 0.90 0.41 49/64 0.50
1/2 -810-71-8 2.62 1 1/16
Dimensions, mm
6 1/4 -6M0-71-4 51.8 15.3 4.8 19 11.5 10.2
12 1/2 -12M0-71-8 66.5 22.8 9.5 27 19.5 12.7

Straight Fittings
FITTINGS
TUBE
Reducers
G lat
F lat
F lat F lat
T Tx T Tx T Tx
D E D D E
A E A
A
1 in. and Under Over 1 in. 25 mm and Under
Reducer (Fractional) Reducer (Metric)

Basic Basic
Tube OD Dimensions Tube OD Dimensions
Ordering Ordering
T Tx Number A D E F G T Tx Number A D E F
1/8 -100-R-2 1.15 2 3 -2M0-R-3M 33.5 12.9 1.7 12
1/16 0.34 0.05 5/16 —
1/4 -100-R-4 1.24 4 -3M0-R-4M 35.0 12
1/16 -200-R-1 1.14 0.03 7/16 3 6 -3M0-R-6M 36.1 12.9 2.4 12
1/8 -200-R-2 1.32 0.08 7/16 10 -3M0-R-10M 38.4 14
3/16 -200-R-3 1.35 0.09 7/16 4 6 -4M0-R-6M 37.1 13.7 2.4 12
1/8 0.50 —
1/4 -200-R-4 1.42 0.09 7/16
3/8 -200-R-6 1.48 0.09 7/16 3 -6M0-R-3M 36.9 1.9 14
1/2 -200-R-8 1.74 0.09 9/16 8 -6M0-R-8M 39.9 4.8 14
6 10 -6M0-R-10M 40.7 15.3 4.8 14
1/8 -300-R-2 1.37 0.08 12 -6M0-R-12M 46.3 4.8 14
3/16 0.54 7/16 —
1/4 -300-R-4 1.46 0.12 18 -6M0-R-18M 49.6 4.8 22
1/8 -400-R-2 1.45 0.08 1/2 6 -8M0-R-6M 40.3 4.1
3/16 -400-R-3 1.48 0.12 1/2 8 10 -8M0-R-10M 42.0 16.2 6.4 15
1/4 -400-R-4 1.54 0.17 1/2 12 -8M0-R-12M 47.6 6.4
5/16 -400-R-5 1.57 0.19 1/2
1/4 0.60 — 6 -10M0-R-6M 42.4 4.1 18
3/8 -400-R-6 1.60 0.19 1/2
1/2 -400-R-8 1.82 0.19 9/16 8 -10M0-R-8M 43.4 5.6 18
5/8 -400-R-10 1.89 0.19 11/16 10 12 -10M0-R-12M 49.8 17.2 7.9 18
3/4 -400-R-12 1.88 0.19 13/16 15 -10M0-R-15M 51.3 7.9 18
18 -10M0-R-18M 51.3 7.9 22
3/8 -500-R-6 1.65
5/16 0.64 0.25 9/16 — 6 -12M0-R-6M 44.9 4.1 22
1/2 -500-R-8 1.87
8 -12M0-R-8M 45.9 5.6 22
1/4 -600-R-4 1.63 0.17 5/8 10 -12M0-R-10M 46.7 7.1 22
3/8 -600-R-6 1.70 0.27 5/8 16 -12M0-R-16M 53.8 9.5 22
3/8 1/2 -600-R-8 1.91 0.66 0.28 5/8 — 12 22.8
18 -12M0-R-18M 53.8 9.5 22
5/8 -600-R-10 1.98 0.28 11/16 20 -12M0-R-20M 56.1 9.5 22
3/4 -600-R-12 1.98 0.28 13/16 22 -12M0-R-22M 56.1 9.5 24
1/4 -810-R-4 1.77 0.17 13/16 25 -12M0-R-25M 62.4 9.5 27
3/8 -810-R-6 1.84 0.27 13/16 14 12 -14M0-R-12M 53.0 24.4 8.8 24
1/2 -810-R-8 2.06 0.37 13/16
1/2 0.90 — 15 12 -15M0-R-12M 53.0 24.4 8.8 24
5/8 -810-R-10 2.12 0.41 13/16
3/4 -810-R-12 2.12 0.41 13/16 16 12 -16M0-R-12M 53.0 24.4 8.8 24
1 -810-R-16 2.37 0.41 1 1/16 12 -18M0-R-12M 54.6 8.8
3/4 -1010-R-12 2.15 15/16 16 -18M0-R-16M 56.1 12.0
5/8 7/8 -1010-R-14 2.21 0.96 0.50 15/16 — 18 20 -18M0-R-20M 57.6 24.4 15.1 27
1 -1010-R-16 2.40 1 1/16 22 -18M0-R-22M 57.6 15.1
1/2 -1210-R-8 2.15 0.37 25 -18M0-R-25M 62.4 15.1
3/4 0.96 1 1/16 —
1 -1210-R-16 2.46 0.62 16 -20M0-R-16M 57.9 12.0
1 1/4 -1610-R-20➀ 3.17 1 3/8 1 7/8 18 -20M0-R-18M 57.9 13.9
20 26.0 30
1 1 1/2 -1610-R-24➀ 3.51 1.23 0.88 1 5/8 2 1/4 22 -20M0-R-22M 59.4 15.9
2 -1610-R-32➀ 4.43 2 1/8 3 25 -20M0-R-25M 64.2 15.9
1 1/2 -2000-R-24➀ 4.10 1 3/4 2 1/4 18 -22M0-R-18M 57.9 13.9
1 1/4 1.62 1.09 22 20 -22M0-R-20M 59.4 26.0 15.5 30
2 -2000-R-32➀ 4.93 2 1/8 3
25 -22M0-R-25M 64.2 18.3
1 1/2 2 -2400-R-32➀ 5.17 1.97 1.34 2 1/8 3
18 -25M0-R-18M 63.1 13.9
➀ Furnished with nut and preswaged ferrules. 25 31.3 35
20 -25M0-R-20M 64.6 15.5

26 Tube Fittings
Straight Fittings
FITTINGS
TUBE
Reducers
F lat F lat
T Tx T Tx
D E D E
A A
Reducer (Metric to Fractional) Reducer (Fractional to Metric)

Basic Basic
Tube OD Dimensions Tube OD Dimensions
Ordering Ordering
T Tx, in. Number A D E F T Tx, mm Number A D E F
Dimensions, mm Dimensions, in.
2 1/8 -2M0-R-2 33.5 12.9 1.7 12 1/8 6 -200-R-6M 1.42 0.50 0.09 7/16
1/8 -3M0-R-2 33.5 2.0
3 12.9 12
1/4 -3M0-R-4 36.1 2.4
4 1/4 -4M0-R-4 37.1 13.7 2.4 12
1/8 -6M0-R-2 36.9 2.0
1/4 -6M0-R-4 39.2 4.4
6 5/16 -6M0-R-5 39.9 15.3 4.8 14
3/8 -6M0-R-6 40.7 4.8
1/2 -6M0-R-8 46.3 4.8
1/4 -8M0-R-4 40.3 4.4
8 3/8 -8M0-R-6 42.0 16.2 6.4 15
1/2 -8M0-R-8 47.6 6.4
3/8 -10M0-R-6 44.2 6.8
10 17.2 18
1/2 -10M0-R-8 49.8 7.9
1/2 -12M0-R-8 52.3 9.3
12 22.8 22
3/4 -12M0-R-12 53.8 9.5
3/4 -18M0-R-12 56.1 14.7
18 24.4 27
1 -18M0-R-16 62.4 15.1
25 1 -25M0-R-16 69.5 31.3 20.2 35
Long Reducer
F lat
Basic
Tube OD Dimensions
Ordering
T E Tx T Tx Number A D E F
Dimensions, in.
D
3/8 1/2 -600-RF-8 2.57 0.66 0.25 5/8
A Use only long reducers in female Swagelok end connections.
Bulkhead Reducer
F lat F lat
Dimensions
Basic Panel Max
E Tube Ordering Hole Panel
OD Number A D E F Size Thickness
Dimensions, in.
D
A 1/8 -200-R1-2 1.95 0.50 0.08 1/2 21/64 0.50
1/4 -400-R1-4 2.20 0.60 0.17 5/8 29/64 0.40
3/8 -600-R1-6 2.41 0.66 0.27 3/4 37/64 0.44
1/2 -810-R1-8 2.87 0.90 0.37 15/16 49/64 0.50
5/8 -1010-R1-10 2.96 0.96 0.47 1 1/16 57/64 0.50
3/4 -1210-R1-12 3.21 0.96 0.58 1 3/16 1 1/64 0.66
1 -1610-R1-16 3.95 1.23 0.80 1 5/8 1 21/64 0.75

Straight Fittings
FITTINGS
TUBE
Port Connectors Port Connector
Basic Basic
Tube Ordering Tube Ordering
E OD Number E H OD Number E H
H
1/16 -101-PC 0.03 0.54 3 -3M1-PC 1.9 22.2
1 in./25 mm 1/8 -201-PC 0.08 0.88 6 -6M1-PC 4.1 25.0
and under
1/4 -401-PC 0.17 0.98 8 -8M1-PC 5.6 26.0
5/16 -501-PC 0.22 1.02 10 -10M1-PC 7.1 27.1
3/8 -601-PC 0.27 1.05 12 -12M1-PC 8.8 36.2
1/2 -811-PC 0.37 1.43 15 -15M1-PC 11.2 37.8
E
5/8 -1011-PC 0.47 1.49 16 -16M1-PC 12.0 37.8
3/4 -1211-PC 0.58 1.49 18 -18M1-PC 13.9 37.8
1 -1611-PC 0.80 1.94 20 -20M1-PC 15.5 39.4
H 1 1/4 -2000-PC➀ 1.02 2.72 25 -25M1-PC 19.9 49.3
Over 1 in./25mm 1 1/2 -2400-PC➀ 1.25 3.31 28 B-28M1-PC 22.6 49.0
2 -3200-PC➀ 1.72 4.56 28 -28M0-PC➀ 22.5 63.5
➀ Furnished with nuts and preswaged ferrules. 30 -30M0-PC➀ 24.3 67.6
32 -32M0-PC➀ 26.5 69.7
38 -38M0-PC➀ 31.6 81.9
➀ Furnished with nuts and preswaged ferrules.
Reducing Port Connector

Basic Basic
Tube OD Ordering Dimensions Tube OD Dimensions
Ordering
T Tx Number E H T Tx Number E H
T E Tx Dimensions, in. Dimensions, mm
H 1/8 1/16 -201-PC-1 0.03 0.72 6 3 -6M1-PC-3M 1.9 22.9
1/16 -401-PC-1 0.03 0.75 8 6 -8M1-PC-6M 4.1 25.4
1/4
1/8 -401-PC-2 0.08 0.90 6 -10M1-PC-6M 4.1 25.8
1/8 -601-PC-2 0.08 0.92 10
3/8 8 -10M1-PC-8M 5.6 26.3
1/4 -601-PC-4 0.17 1.00 6 -12M1-PC-6M 4.1 29.6
1/4 -811-PC-4 0.17 1.17 12 8 -12M1-PC-8M 5.6 30.1
1/2
3/8 -811-PC-6 0.27 1.21 10 -12M1-PC-10M 7.1 30.6
3/4 1/2 -1211-PC-8 0.37 1.49 16 12 -16M1-PC-12M 8.8 37.5
1/2 -1611-PC-8 0.37 1.69 28 25 -28M1-PC-25M 19.8 56.5
1
3/4 -1611-PC-12 0.58 1.72 32 25 -32M1-PC-25M 19.8 60.3
38 25 -38M1-PC-25M 19.8 65.8

28 Tube Fittings
Straight Fittings
FITTINGS
TUBE
Caps and Plugs
D
A
Cap Plug
Basic Basic Basic Basic
Tube Ordering Tube Ordering Tube Ordering Tube Ordering
OD Number A D OD Number A D OD Number OD Number
Dimensions, in. Dimensions, mm Dimensions, in. Dimensions, mm
1/16 -100-C 0.59 0.34 2 -2M0-C 20.1 12.9 1/16 -100-P 2 -2M0-P
1/8 -200-C 0.79 0.50 3 -3M0-C 20.1 12.9 1/8 -200-P 3 -3M0-P
3/16 -300-C 0.84 0.54 4 -4M0-C 21.3 13.7 3/16 -300-P 4 -4M0-P
1/4 -400-C 0.92 0.60 6 -6M0-C 23.1 15.3 1/4 -400-P 6 -6M0-P
5/16 -500-C 0.96 0.64 8 -8M0-C 24.5 16.2 5/16 -500-P 8 -8M0-P
3/8 -600-C 1.01 0.66 10 -10M0-C 26.6 17.2 3/8 -600-P 10 -10M0-P
1/2 -810-C 1.21 0.90 12 -12M0-C 30.6 22.8 1/2 -810-P 12 -12M0-P
5/8 -1010-C 1.24 0.96 14 -14M0-C 31.4 24.4 5/8 -1010-P 14 -14M0-P
3/4 -1210-C 1.27 0.96 15 -15M0-C 31.4 24.4 3/4 -1210-P 15 -15M0-P
7/8 -1410-C 1.37 1.02 16 -16M0-C 31.4 24.4 7/8 -1410-P 16 -16M0-P
1 -1610-C 1.61 1.23 18 -18M0-C 32.2 24.4 1 -1610-P 18 -18M0-P
1 1/8 B-1810-C 1.61 1.23 20 -20M0-C 34.8 26.0 1 1/4 -2000-P 20 -20M0-P
1 1/4 -2000-C 2.10 1.62 22 -22M0-C 34.8 26.0 1 1/2 -2400-P 22 -22M0-P
1 1/2 -2400-C 2.54 1.97 25 -25M0-C 41.0 31.3 2 -3200-P 25 -25M0-P
2 -3200-C 3.41 2.66 -28M0-C 48.5 36.6 28 -28M0-P
28
B-28M0-C 41.2 31.6 30 -30M0-P
30 -30M0-C 53.4 39.6 32 -32M0-P
32 -32M0-C 55.8 42.0 38 -38M0-P
38 -38M0-C 65.4 49.4
Vent Protectors Mud Dauber

Swagelok vent protectors, more commonly
F lat
40 mesh known as mud dauber ittings, protect open
wire ends of instruments, tubing, outlet vents, and
screen E bleed-off lines.
The mesh wire screen prevents foreign objects,
A such as mud dauber insects, from entering and
40 mesh 300 series clogging various systems and causing damage.
stainless steel Vent protectors are available in stainless steel
wire screen assembly
and brass. To order brass, replace SS in the
ordering number with B.
Example: B-MD-2
NPT Ordering
Size Number A E F
Dimensions, in.
1/8 SS-MD-2 0.56 0.19 1/2
1/4 SS-MD-4 0.78 0.28 9/16
3/8 SS-MD-6 0.81 0.41 11/16
1/2 SS-MD-8 1.03 0.50 7/8
3/4 SS-MD-12 1.06 0.72 1 1/16

90° Elbows
FITTINGS
TUBE
Unions
E
F lat
Tube ports are identical.

D
A
Basic Basic
OD Number A D E F OD Number A D E F, in.
1/16 -100-9 0.70 0.34 0.05 3/8 3 -3M0-9 22.3 12.9 2.4 3/8
1/8 -200-9 0.88 0.50 0.09 3/8 4 -4M0-9 25.4 13.7 2.4 1/2
3/16 -300-9 1.00 0.54 0.12 1/2 6 -6M0-9 27.0 15.3 4.8 1/2
1/4 -400-9 1.06 0.60 0.19 1/2 8 -8M0-9 28.8 16.2 6.4 9/16
5/16 -500-9 1.13 0.64 0.25 9/16 10 -10M0-9 31.5 17.2 7.9 11/16
3/8 -600-9 1.20 0.66 0.28 5/8 12 -12M0-9 36.0 22.8 9.5 13/16
1/2 -810-9 1.42 0.90 0.41 13/16 14 -14M0-9 38.0 24.4 11.1 15/16
5/8 -1010-9 1.50 0.96 0.50 15/16 15 -15M0-9 38.0 24.4 11.9 15/16
3/4 -1210-9 1.57 0.96 0.62 1 1/16 16 -16M0-9 38.0 24.4 12.7 15/16
7/8 -1410-9 1.76 1.02 0.72 1 3/8 18 -18M0-9 39.8 24.4 15.1 1 1/16
1 -1610-9 1.93 1.23 0.88 1 3/8 20 -20M0-9 44.6 26.0 15.9 1 3/8
1 1/8 B-1810-9 2.17 1.23 0.97 1 11/16 22 -22M0-9 44.6 26.0 18.3 1 3/8
1 1/4 -2000-9 2.67 1.62 1.09 1 11/16 25 -25M0-9 49.1 31.3 21.8 1 3/8
1 1/2 -2400-9 3.10 1.97 1.34 2 -28M0-9 64.0 36.6 21.8 41 mm
28
2 -3200-9 4.22 2.66 1.81 2 3/4 B-28M0-9 55.4 31.6 24.6 1 11/16
30 -30M0-9 69.9 39.6 26.2 46 mm
32 -32M0-9 72.3 42.0 28.6 46 mm
38 -38M0-9 84.0 49.4 33.7 55 mm
50 -50M0-9 106 65.0 45.2 2 3/4

30 Tube Fittings
90° Elbows
FITTINGS
TUBE
Male
E
F lat
NPT
Basic NPT Basic
OD Size Number A D E➀ F OD in. Number A D E➀ F, in.
1/16 -100-2-1 1/8 -3M0-2-2 23.6 7/16
1/16 0.75 0.34 0.05 7/16 3 12.9 2.4
1/8 -100-2-2 1/4 -3M0-2-4 24.6 1/2
1/16 -200-2-1 0.93 7/16 1/8 -4M0-2-2
4 25.4 13.7 2.4 1/2
1/8 1/8 -200-2-2 0.93 0.50 0.09 7/16 1/4 -4M0-2-4
1/4 -200-2-4 0.97 1/2 1/8 -6M0-2-2 27.0 1/2
1/8 -300-2-2 1/4 -6M0-2-4 27.0 1/2
3/16 1.00 0.54 0.12 1/2 6 15.3 4.8
1/4 -300-2-4 3/8 -6M0-2-6 29.8 11/16
1/16 -400-2-1 1.06 0.12 1/2 1/2 -6M0-2-8 31.8 13/16
1/8 -400-2-2 1.06 0.19 1/2 1/8 -8M0-2-2 28.8 4.8 9/16
1/4 1/4 -400-2-4 1.06 0.60 0.19 1/2 1/4 -8M0-2-4 28.8 6.4 9/16
3/8 -400-2-6 1.17 0.19 11/16 8 16.2
3/8 -8M0-2-6 30.6 6.4 11/16
1/2 -400-2-8 1.25 0.19 13/16 1/2 -8M0-2-8 32.6 6.4 13/16
1/8 -500-2-2 1.13 0.19 9/16 1/8 -10M0-2-2 31.5 4.8 11/16
5/16 1/4 -500-2-4 1.13 0.64 0.25 9/16 1/4 -10M0-2-4 31.5 7.1 11/16
3/8 -500-2-6 1.20 0.25 11/16 10 17.2
3/8 -10M0-2-6 31.5 7.9 11/16
1/8 -600-2-2 1.20 0.19 5/8 1/2 -10M0-2-8 33.5 7.9 13/16
1/4 -600-2-4 1.20 0.28 5/8 1/4 -12M0-2-4 36.0 7.1 13/16
3/8 3/8 -600-2-6 1.23 0.66 0.28 11/16 3/8 -12M0-2-6 36.0 9.5 13/16
1/2 -600-2-8 1.31 0.28 13/16 12 22.8
1/2 -12M0-2-8 36.0 9.5 13/16
3/4 -600-2-12 1.46 0.28 1 1/16 3/4 -12M0-2-12 39.8 9.5 1 1/16
1/4 -810-2-4 1.42 0.28 13/16 14 1/2 -14M0-2-8 38.0 24.4 11.1 15/16
3/8 -810-2-6 1.42 0.38 13/16
1/2 0.90 15 1/2 -15M0-2-8 38.0 24.4 11.9 15/16
1/2 -810-2-8 1.42 0.41 13/16
3/4 -810-2-12 1.57 0.41 1 1/16 3/8 -16M0-2-6 38.0 9.5 15/16
16 1/2 -16M0-2-8 38.0 24.4 11.9 15/16
3/8 -1010-2-6 1.50 0.38 15/16 3/4 -16M0-2-12 39.8 12.7 1 1/16
5/8 1/2 -1010-2-8 1.50 0.96 0.47 15/16
3/4 -1010-2-12 1.57 0.50 1 1/16 1/2 -18M0-2-8 11.9
18 39.8 24.4 1 1/16
3/4 -18M0-2-12 15.1
1/2 -1210-2-8 0.47
3/4 1.57 0.96 1 1/16 1/2 -20M0-2-8 11.9
3/4 -1210-2-12 0.62 20 44.6 26.0 1 3/8
3/4 -20M0-2-12 15.9
7/8 3/4 -1410-2-12 1.76 1.02 0.62 1 3/8
3/4 -22M0-2-12 15.9
3/4 -1610-2-12 0.62 22 44.6 26.0 1 3/8
1 1.93 1.23 1 3/8 1 -22M0-2-16 18.3
1 -1610-2-16 0.88
3/4 -25M0-2-12 15.9
1 1/4 1 1/4 -2000-2-20 2.67 1.62 1.09 1 11/16 25 49.1 31.3 1 3/8
1 -25M0-2-16 21.8
1 1/2 1 1/2 -2400-2-24 3.10 1.97 1.34 2 30 1 1/4 -30M0-2-20 69.9 39.6 26.2 46 mm
2 2 -3200-2-32 4.22 2.66 1.81 2 3/4 32 1 1/4 -32M0-2-20 72.3 42.0 27.8 46 mm
➀ The E dimension is the minimum nominal opening. These ittings may have 38 1 1/2 -38M0-2-24 84.0 49.4 33.7 55 mm

90° Elbows
FITTINGS
TUBE
Male
E
F lat
ISO/BSP Tapered Thread (RT)

ISO Basic ISO
Dimensions
Tube Thread Ordering Thread Basic
OD Size Number A D E➀ F Dimensions
Tube Size Ordering
Dimensions, in. OD in. Number A D E➀ F
1/8 -200-2-2RT 0.83 7/16 Dimensions, mm
1/8 0.50 0.09
1/4 -200-2-4RT 0.97 1/2 1/8 -3M0-2-2RT 23.6 7/16
3 12.9 2.4
1/8 -400-2-2RT 1.06 1/2 1/4 -3M0-2-4RT 24.6 1/2
1/4 -400-2-4RT 1.06 1/2 1/8 -4M0-2-2RT
1/4 0.60 0.19 4 25.4 13.7 2.4 1/2
3/8 -400-2-6RT 1.17 11/16 1/4 -4M0-2-4RT
1/2 -400-2-8RT 1.25 13/16 1/8 -6M0-2-2RT 27.0 1/2
5/16 1/4 -500-2-4RT 1.13 0.64 0.25 9/16 1/4 -6M0-2-4RT 27.0 1/2
6 15.3 4.8
1/8 -600-2-2RT 1.20 5/8 3/8 -6M0-2-6RT 29.8 11/16
3/8 1/4 -600-2-4RT 1.20 0.66 0.28 5/8 1/2 -6M0-2-8RT 31.8 13/16
3/8 -600-2-6RT 1.23 11/16 1/8 -8M0-2-2RT 28.8 4.8 9/16
1/4 -810-2-4RT 0.28 1/4 -8M0-2-4RT 28.8 6.4 9/16
8 16.2
1/2 3/8 -810-2-6RT 1.42 0.90 0.38 13/16 3/8 -8M0-2-6RT 30.6 6.4 11/16
1/2 -810-2-8RT 0.41 1/2 -8M0-2-8RT 32.6 6.4 13/16
3/4 1/2 -1210-2-8RT 1.57 0.96 0.47 1 3/8 1/4 -10M0-2-4RT 31.5 7.1 11/16
10 3/8 -10M0-2-6RT 31.5 17.2 7.9 11/16
1 1 -1610-2-16RT 1.93 1.23 0.88 1 3/8
1/2 -10M0-2-8RT 33.5 7.9 13/16
1/8 -12M0-2-2RT 36.0 4.8 13/16
1/4 -12M0-2-4RT 36.0 7.1 13/16
12 3/8 -12M0-2-6RT 36.0 22.8 9.5 13/16
1/2 -12M0-2-8RT 36.0 9.5 13/16
3/4 -12M0-2-12RT 39.8 9.5 1 1/16
14 1/2 -14M0-2-8RT 38.1 24.4 11.1 15/16
15 1/2 -15M0-2-8RT 38.1 24.4 11.9 15/16
3/8 -16M0-2-6RT 9.5
16 38.0 24.4 15/16
1/2 -16M0-2-8RT 11.9
1/2 -18M0-2-8RT 11.9
18 39.8 24.4 1 1/16
3/4 -18M0-2-12RT 15.1
1/2 -20M0-2-8RT 11.9
20 44.6 26.0 1 3/8
3/4 -20M0-2-12RT 15.9
3/4 -22M0-2-12RT 15.9
22 44.6 26.0 1 3/8
1 -22M0-2-16RT 18.3
3/4 -25M0-2-12RT 15.9
25 49.1 31.3 1 3/8
1 -25M0-2-16RT 21.8
1 -28M0-2-16RT 64.0 36.6 21.8 41 mm
28
1 B-28M0-2-16RT 55.4 31.6 22.2 1 11/16
E a larger opening at the pipe/straight thread end.
F lat
Reducing
T
Basic
Tube OD Dimensions
D Ordering
T Tx Number A D E F, in.
Dimensions, mm
6 6 -6M0-2R-6M 27.0 15.3 4.6 1/2
A
Tx 12 12 -12M0-2R-12M 38.1 22.8 8.8 15/16

32 Tube Fittings
90° Elbows
FITTINGS
TUBE
Male Positionable, ISO/BSP Parallel Thread (PR)
A ISO
F lat Thread Basic
Dimensions
Tube Size Ordering
OD in. Number A D E➀ F, in. Fx, in. U
Dimensions, in.
D E 1/8 -400-2-2PR 1.06 0.16 1/2 9/16 0.60
1/4 0.60
1/4 -400-2-4PR 1.14 0.19 5/8 3/4 0.80
Fx lat
1/4 -600-2-4PR 1.20 0.23 5/8 3/4 0.80
3/8 0.66
O-ring 3/8 -600-2-6PR 1.31 0.28 13/16 7/8 0.96
1/4 -810-2-4PR 1.42 0.23 13/16 3/4 0.80
U 1/2 3/8 -810-2-6PR 1.42 0.90 0.31 13/16 7/8 0.96
retainer OD
1/2 -810-2-8PR 1.50 0.41 15/16 1 1/16 1.16
5/8 1/2 -1010-2-8PR 1.50 0.96 0.47 15/16 1 1/16 1.16
1/2 -1210-2-8PR 0.47 1 1/16 1.16
3/4 1.57 0.96 1 1/16
3/4 -1210-2-12PR 0.62 1 3/8 1.43
3/4 -1610-2-12PR 0.62 1 3/8 1.43
1 1.93 1.23 1 3/8
1 -1610-2-16PR 0.78 1 5/8 1.82
Dimensions, mm
1/8 -6M0-2-2PR 27.0 4.0 1/2 9/16 15.2
6 15.3
1/4 -6M0-2-4PR 29.0 4.8 5/8 3/4 20.3
1/8 -8M0-2-2PR 28.8 4.0 9/16 9/16 15.2
8 16.2
1/4 -8M0-2-4PR 29.9 5.9 5/8 3/4 20.3
1/4 -10M0-2-4PR 5.9 3/4 20.3
10 33.5 17.2 13/16
3/8 -10M0-2-6PR 7.9 7/8 24.4
1/4 -12M0-2-4PR 36.0 5.9 13/16 3/4 20.3
3/8 -12M0-2-6PR 36.0 7.9 13/16 7/8 24.4
12 22.8
1/2 -12M0-2-8PR 38.0 9.5 15/16 1 1/16 29.5
3/4 -12M0-2-12PR 39.8 9.5 1 1/16 1 3/8 36.3
Positionable, SAE/MS Straight Thread (ST)

A
E SAE/MS Basic
F lat Dimensions
Tube Thread Ordering
OD Size Number A D E➀ F, in. Fx, in. U
Dimensions, in.
7/16-20 -400-2-4ST 1.12 1/2 9/16 0.65
D
1/4 0.60 0.19
9/16-18 -400-2-6ST 1.20 5/8 11/16 0.79
Fx lat 5/16 1/2-20 -500-2-5ST 1.19 0.64 0.23 9/16 5/8 0.72
7/16-20 -600-2-4ST 1.26 0.20 5/8 9/16 0.65
O-ring
3/8 9/16-18 -600-2-6ST 1.26 0.66 0.28 5/8 11/16 0.79
3/4-16 -600-2-8ST 1.37 0.28 13/16 7/8 1.01
U
washer OD 9/16-18 -810-2-6ST 0.28 11/16 0.79
1/2 1.48 0.90 13/16
3/4-16 -810-2-8ST 0.41 7/8 1.01
SAE/MS positionable fittings are available in
5/8 7/8-14 -1010-2-10ST 1.56 0.96 0.50 15/16 1 1.16
carbon steel and stainless steel only.
Adapts to SAE J1926/1 and ISO 11926-1 3/4 1 1/16-12 -1210-2-12ST 1.63 0.96 0.62 1 1/16 1 1/4 1.44
straight thread boss. 7/8 1 3/16-12 -1410-2-14ST 1.70 1.02 0.72 1 3/16 1 3/8 1.59
1 1 5/16-12 -1610-2-16ST 1.99 1.23 0.88 1 3/8 1 1/2 1.73
1 1/4 1 5/8-12 -2000-2-20ST 2.67 1.62 1.09 1 11/16 1 7/8 2.16
1 1/2 1 7/8-12 -2400-2-24ST 3.07 1.97 1.34 2 2 1/8 2.45
2 2 1/2-12 -3200-2-32ST 4.22 2.66 1.81 2 3/4 2 3/4 3.16
For ST and ST positionable ittings ➀ The E dimension is the minimum nominal opening. These ittings may have a larger opening at the
used in ECE-R110 applications, add pipe/straight thread end.
the DE O-ring sufix to the ordering

number. Example: SS-600-2-6STDE

90° Elbows
FITTINGS
TUBE
Weld Tube Socket Weld
A Socket Basic
E Dimensions
F lat Tube Weld Ordering
OD Size Number A B D E F K
Dimensions, in.
1/4 1/4 -400-9-4W 1.06 0.28 0.60 0.19 1/2 0.50
D 3/8 3/8 -600-9-6W 1.20 0.31 0.66 0.28 5/8 0.63
B
1/2 1/2 -810-9-8W 1.42 0.38 0.90 0.41 13/16 0.81
K 3/4 3/4 -1210-9-12W 1.57 0.44 0.96 0.62 1 1/16 1.06
1 1 -1610-9-16W 1.93 0.62 1.23 0.88 1 3/8 1.38
Male Pipe Weld
A Pipe Basic
E Dimensions
F lat Tube Weld Ordering
OD Size Number A D E➀ F J
Dimensions, in.
1/8 -400-2-2W 0.405
1/4 1.06 0.60 0.19 1/2
D 1/4 -400-2-4W 0.540
3/8 1/4 -600-2-4W 1.20 0.66 0.28 5/8 0.540
37.5°
1/2 1/2 -810-2-8W 1.42 0.90 0.41 13/16 0.840
J 3/4 3/4 -1210-2-12W 1.57 0.96 0.62 1 1/16 1.050
opening at the weld end. Wall thickness at the weld end is based on schedule 80 pipe.
Female
E
F lat
A
NPT
Basic NPT Basic
OD Size Number A D E F OD in. Number A D E F, in.
1/8 -200-8-2 0.97 1/2 1/8 -6M0-8-2 27.0 1/2
1/8 0.50 0.09
1/4 -200-8-4 1.08 11/16 6 1/4 -6M0-8-4 29.8 15.3 4.8 11/16
3/16 1/8 -300-8-2 1.00 0.54 0.12 1/2 1/2 -6M0-8-8 34.6 1
1/8 -400-8-2 1.06 1/2 8 1/4 -8M0-8-4 30.6 16.2 6.4 11/16
1/4 -400-8-4 1.17 11/16 1/8 -10M0-8-2 31.5 11/16
1/4 0.60 0.19 10 17.2 7.9
3/8 -400-8-6 1.25 13/16 1/4 -10M0-8-4 33.5 13/16
1/2 -400-8-8 1.36 1 1/4 -12M0-8-4 36.0 13/16
12 22.8 9.5
1/8 -500-8-2 1.13 9/16 1/2 -12M0-8-8 38.8 1
5/16 0.64 0.25
1/4 -500-8-4 1.20 11/16 16 1/2 -16M0-8-8 39.5 24.4 12.7 1 1/16
1/8 -600-8-2 1.20 5/8
1/4 -600-8-4 1.23 11/16
3/8 0.66 0.28
3/8 -600-8-6 1.31 13/16
1/2 -600-8-8 1.42 1
1/4 -810-8-4 1.42 13/16
1/2 3/8 -810-8-6 1.42 0.90 0.41 13/16
1/2 -810-8-8 1.53 1
3/8 -1010-8-6 1.50 15/16
5/8 0.96 0.50
1/2 -1010-8-8 1.57 1 1/16
1/2 -1210-8-8 1.57 1 1/16
3/4 0.96 0.62
3/4 -1210-8-12 1.76 1 3/8
7/8 3/4 -1410-8-12 1.76 1.02 0.72 1 3/8
3/4 -1610-8-12 1.93 1 3/8
1 1.23 0.88
1 -1610-8-16 2.11 1 11/16 Refer to Installation Instructions, beginning on page 62.
34 Tube Fittings
45° Elbows
FITTINGS
TUBE
Male NPT
A Basic
F lat Dimensions
Tube NPT Ordering
OD Size Number A D E➀ F
Dimensions, in.
1/8 -400-5-2
D 1/4 0.97 0.60 0.19 1/2
1/4 -400-5-4
E
1/8 -600-5-2 1.10 0.19 5/8
3/8 1/4 -600-5-4 1.10 0.66 0.28 5/8
3/8 -600-5-6 1.15 0.28 13/16
3/8 -810-5-6 0.38
1/2 1.26 0.90 13/16
1/2 -810-5-8 0.41
3/4 3/4 -1210-5-12 1.33 0.96 0.62 1 1/16
1 1 -1610-5-16 1.59 1.23 0.88 1 3/8
Positionable, SAE/MS Straight Thread (ST)

A SAE/MS Basic
F lat Dimensions
OD Size Number A D E➀ F U
Dimensions, in.
1/4 7/16-20 -400-5-4ST 1.01 0.60 0.19 1/2 0.65
D 3/8 9/16-18 -600-5-6ST 1.10 0.66 0.28 5/8 0.79
O-ring 1/2 3/4-16 -810-5-8ST 1.26 0.90 0.41 13/16 1.01
E
D
rO
as U
3/4 1 1/16-12 -1210-5-12ST 1.33 0.96 0.62 1 1/16 1.44

he
w
1 1 5/16-12 -1610-5-16ST 1.59 1.23 0.88 1 3/8 1.73

opening at the pipe/straight thread end.

carbon steel and stainless steel only.
straight thread boss.

Tees
FITTINGS
TUBE
Unions
E
D F lat
Ax
Ax
A
Union
Basic Basic
OD Number A Ax D E F OD Number A Ax D E F, in.
1/16 -100-3 1.40 0.70 0.34 0.05 3/8 2 -2M0-3 44.7 22.3 12.9 1.7 3/8
1/8 -200-3 1.76 0.88 0.50 0.09 3/8 3 -3M0-3 44.7 22.3 12.9 2.4 3/8
3/16 -300-3 1.92 0.96 0.54 0.12 7/16 4 -4M0-3 50.8 25.4 13.7 2.4 1/2
1/4 -400-3 2.12 1.06 0.60 0.19 1/2 6 -6M0-3 53.9 27.0 15.3 4.8 1/2
5/16 -500-3 2.34 1.17 0.64 0.25 5/8 8 -8M0-3 59.7 29.9 16.2 6.4 5/8
3/8 -600-3 2.40 1.20 0.66 0.28 5/8 10 -10M0-3 63.0 31.5 17.2 7.9 11/16
1/2 -810-3 2.84 1.42 0.90 0.41 13/16 12 -12M0-3 72.0 36.0 22.8 9.5 13/16
5/8 -1010-3 3.06 1.53 0.96 0.50 1 14 -14M0-3 77.6 38.8 24.4 11.1 1
3/4 -1210-3 3.14 1.57 0.96 0.62 1 1/16 15 -15M0-3 77.6 38.8 24.4 11.9 1
7/8 -1410-3 3.52 1.76 1.02 0.72 1 3/8 16 -16M0-3 77.6 38.8 24.4 12.7 1
1 -1610-3 3.86 1.93 1.23 0.88 1 3/8 18 -18M0-3 79.6 39.8 24.4 15.1 1 1/16
1 1/8 B-1810-3 4.34 2.17 1.23 0.97 1 11/16 20 -20M0-3 89.3 44.6 26.0 15.9 1 3/8
1 1/4 -2000-3 5.34 2.67 1.62 1.09 1 11/16 22 -22M0-3 89.3 44.6 26.0 18.3 1 3/8
1 1/2 -2400-3 6.20 3.10 1.97 1.34 2 25 -25M0-3 98.3 49.1 31.3 21.8 1 3/8
2 -3200-3 8.44 4.22 2.66 1.81 2 3/4 -28M0-3 128 64.0 36.6 21.8 41 mm
28
B-28M0-3 103 51.4 31.6 24.6 1 11/16
30 -30M0-3 140 69.9 39.6 26.2 46 mm
32 -32M0-3 145 72.3 42.0 28.6 46 mm
38 -38M0-3 168 84.0 49.4 33.7 55 mm
50 -50M0-3 211 106 65.0 45.2 2 3/4
Reducing Union (Fractional)

Basic
Tube OD Dimensions
Ordering
T T Tx Number A Ax D Dx E F
Dimensions, in.
Ax D E F lat 3/8 1/4 -600-3-6-4 2.40 1.14 0.66 0.60 0.19 5/8
Dx
1/4 -810-3-8-4 1.25 0.60 0.19
1/2 2.84 0.90 13/16
3/8 -810-3-8-6 1.31 0.66 0.28
Tx
A 5/8 3/8 -1010-3-10-6 3.06 1.42 0.96 0.66 0.28 1
3/8 -1210-3-12-6 1.46 0.66 0.28
3/4 3.14 0.96 1 1/16
1/2 -1210-3-12-8 1.57 0.90 0.41
3/8 -1610-3-16-6 1.65 0.66 0.28
1 1/2 -1610-3-16-8 3.86 1.76 1.23 0.90 0.41 1 3/8
3/4 -1610-3-16-12 1.76 0.96 0.62
1 1/4 1 -2000-3-20-16 5.34 2.17 1.62 1.23 0.88 1 11/16
1 1/2 1 -2400-3-24-16 6.20 2.36 1.97 1.23 0.88 2
2 1 -3200-3-32-16 8.44 2.79 2.66 1.23 0.88 2 3/4

36 Tube Fittings
Tees
FITTINGS
TUBE
Unions Reducing Union (Metric)

Basic
Tube OD Dimensions
Ordering
T Tx Number A Ax D Dx E F, in.
T
Dimensions, mm
3 -3M0-3-3M-6M 49.3 26.9 12.9 15.3 2.4 1/2
Ax D E F lat
Dx
8 -8M0-3-8M-6M 59.9 29.0 16.2 15.3 4.8 5/8
6
10 -10M0-3-10M-6M 63.0 29.7 17.2 15.3 4.8 11/16
Tx 12 -12M0-3-12M-6M 72.0 31.8 22.8 15.3 4.8 13/16
A
15 -15M0-3-15M-12M 77.7 38.9 24.4 22.8 9.5 1
16 -16M0-3-16M-12M 77.6 38.9 24.4 22.8 9.5 1
18 12 -18M0-3-18M-12M 79.8 39.9 24.4 22.8 9.5 1 1/16
22 -22M0-3-22M-12M 89.4 44.7 26.0 22.8 9.5 1 3/8
25 -25M0-3-25M-12M 98.0 44.7 31.3 22.8 9.5 1 3/8
Reducing Union
E F lat
Basic
Tube OD Dimensions
Ordering
T Tx
T Tx Number A Ax Ay D Dx E F
Dx Dimensions, in.
D
Ax 3/8 1/4 -600-3-4-6 2.34 1.20 1.14 0.66 0.60 0.19 5/8
T
Ax Ay
A
E F lat Basic
Tube OD Dimensions
Ordering
T Tx Number A Ax Ay D Dx E F
T Tx
Dimensions, in.
Dx 1/2 -810-3-6-6 2.73 1.42 1.31 0.90 0.66 0.28 13/16
Ay D
5/8 3/8 -1010-3-6-6 2.95 1.53 1.42 0.96 0.66 0.28 1
3/4 -1210-3-6-6 3.03 1.57 1.46 0.96 0.66 0.28 1 1/16
Tx
Ax Ay
A
F lat Dx
Basic
Tube OD Dimensions
Ordering
T Tx T Tx Tx1 Number A Ax Ay Ay1 D Dx Dx1 E F
Dimensions, in.
5/8 1/2 -1010-3-8-6 3.06 1.53 1.53 1.42 0.96 0.90 1
Ay1 D E
3/4 1/2 3/8 -1210-3-8-6 3.14 1.57 1.57 1.46 0.96 0.90 0.66 0.28 1 1/16
Dx1 1 3/4 -1610-3-12-6 3.69 1.93 1.76 1.65 1.23 0.96 1 3/8
Tx1
Ax Ay
A

Tees
FITTINGS
TUBE
Male Branch, NPT (TTM)
E NPT Basic
Dimensions
Tube Size Ordering
OD in. Number A D E➀ F, in. H
Dimensions, in.
1/8 -200-3TTM 1.86 7/16 0.70
D 1/8 0.50 0.09
H F lat 1/4 -200-3-4TTM 1.94 1/2 0.92
3/16 1/8 -300-3TTM 1.92 0.54 0.12 7/16 0.70
1/8 -400-3TTM 0.74
A 1/4 2.12 0.60 0.19 1/2
1/4 -400-3-4TTM 0.92
5/16 1/8 -500-3TTM 2.34 0.64 0.19 5/8 0.82
1/4 -600-3TTM 2.40 5/8 1.00
3/8 0.66 0.28
3/8 -600-3-6TTM 2.62 13/16 1.11
3/8 -810-3TTM 0.38 1.11
1/2 2.84 0.90 13/16
1/2 -810-3-8TTM 0.41 1.30
5/8 1/2 -1010-3TTM 3.06 0.96 0.47 1 1.41
3/4 3/4 -1210-3TTM 3.14 0.96 0.62 1 1/16 1.45
Dimensions, mm
1/8 -6M0-3TTM 18.8
6 53.9 15.3 4.8 1/2
1/4 -6M0-3-4TTM 23.4
1/8 -8M0-3TTM 4.8 20.8
8 59.7 16.2 5/8
1/4 -8M0-3-4TTM 6.4 25.4
10 1/4 -10M0-3TTM 67.0 17.2 7.1 13/16 26.2
3/8 -12M0-3TTM 9.5 28.2
12 1/4 -12M0-3-4TTM 72.0 22.8 7.1 13/16 28.2
1/2 -12M0-3-8TTM 9.5 33.0
16 1/2 -16M0-3TTM 77.6 24.4 11.9 1 35.8
Run, NPT (TMT)

NPT Basic
Dimensions
Tube Size Ordering
E OD in. Number A Ax D E➀ F, in.
Dimensions, in.
D F lat 1/8 -200-3TMT 1.63 0.93 7/16
Ax 1/8 0.50 0.09
1/4 -200-3-4TMT 1.89 0.97 1/2
3/16 1/8 -300-3TMT 1.66 0.96 0.54 0.12 7/16
1/8 -400-3TMT 1.80
Ax 1/4 1.06 0.60 0.19 1/2
1/4 -400-3-4TMT 1.98
A
5/16 1/8 -500-3TMT 1.99 1.17 0.64 0.19 5/8
1/4 -600-3TMT 2.20 1.20 5/8
3/8 0.66 0.28
3/8 -600-3-6TMT 2.42 1.31 13/16
3/8 -810-3TMT 2.53 0.38
1/2 1.42 0.90 13/16
1/2 -810-3-8TMT 2.72 0.41
5/8 1/2 -1010-3TMT 2.88 1.50 0.96 0.47 15/16
3/4 3/4 -1210-3TMT 3.02 1.57 0.96 0.62 1 1/16
Dimensions, mm
1/8 -6M0-3TMT 45.8
6 27.0 15.3 4.8 1/2
1/4 -6M0-3-4TMT 50.3
8 1/4 -8M0-3-4TMT 55.3 29.9 16.2 6.4 5/8
1/4 -12M0-3-4TMT 64.2 7.1
12 36.0 22.8 13/16
1/2 -12M0-3-8TMT 69.0 9.5
16 1/2 -16M0-3TMT 73.1 38.0 24.4 11.9 15/16

38 Tube Fittings
Tees
FITTINGS
TUBE
Male Positionable Branch, SAE/MS Straight Thread (TTS)

E F lat
SAE/MS Basic
Dimensions
OD Size Number A Ax D E➀ F Fx H U
Dimensions, in.
D 1/4 7/16-20 -400-3TTS 2.24 1.12 0.60 0.19 1/2 9/16 1.12 0.65
H
Fx lat
3/8 9/16-18 -600-3TTS 2.52 1.26 0.66 0.28 5/8 11/16 1.27 0.79
1/2 3/4-16 -810-3TTS 2.96 1.48 0.90 0.41 13/16 7/8 1.49 1.01
O-ring
3/4 1 1/16-12 -1210-3TTS 3.26 1.63 0.96 0.62 1 1/16 11/4 1.92 1.44
U
washer OD 1 1 5/16-12 -1610-3TTS 3.98 1.99 1.23 0.88 1 3/8 1 1/2 2.11 1.73
Ax
A 1 1/4 1 5/8-12 -2000-3TTS 5.34 2.67 1.62 1.09 1 11/16 1 7/8 2.29 2.16
1 1/2 1 7/8-12 -2400-3TTS 6.14 3.07 1.97 1.34 2 2 1/8 2.45 2.45
carbon steel and stainless steel only. 2 2 1/2-12 -3200-3TTS 8.44 4.22 2.66 1.81 2 3/4 2 3/4 2.77 3.16
Adapts to SAE J1926/1 and ISO 11926-1 ➀ The E dimension is the minimum nominal opening. These ittings may have a larger opening at the pipe/
straight thread boss. straight thread end.
Positionable Branch, ISO/BSP Parallel Thread (TTR)
E F lat ISO
Thread Basic Dimensions
Tube Size Ordering
OD in. Number A Ax D E➀ F, in. Fx, in. H U
Dimensions, in.
D 1/8 -400-3TTR 2.12 1.06 0.16 1/2 9/16 1.04 0.60
H 1/4 0.60
Fx lat 1/4 -400-3-4TTR 2.28 1.14 0.19 5/8 3/4 1.27 0.80
3/8 1/4 -600-3TTR 2.40 1.20 0.66 0.23 5/8 3/4 1.27 0.80
O-ring
3/8 -810-3TTR 2.84 1.42 0.31 13/16 7/8 1.46 0.96
1/2 0.90
U 1/2 -810-3-8TTR 3.00 1.50 0.41 15/16 1 1/16 1.71 1.16
retainer OD
Ax
5/8 1/2 -1010-3TTR 3.00 1.50 0.96 0.47 15/16 1 1/16 1.71 1.16
A 3/4 -1210-3TTR 0.62 1 3/8 1.92 1.43
3/4 3.14 1.57 0.96 1 1/16
1/2 -1210-3-8TTR 0.47 1 1/16 1.78 1.16
Tube ports are identical.
1 1 -1610-3TTR 3.86 1.93 1.23 0.78 1 3/8 1 5/8 2.11 1.92
Dimensions, mm
1/8 -6M0-3TTR 53.9 27.0 4.0 1/2 9/16 26.4 15.2
6 15.3
1/4 -6M0-3-4TTR 58.0 29.0 4.8 5/8 3/4 32.2 20.3
1/8 -8M0-3TTR 57.7 4.0 9/16 9/16 28.4 15.2
8 30.0 16.2
1/4 -8M0-3-4TTR 59.7 5.9 5/8 3/4 32.3 20.3
10 1/4 -10M0-3TTR 67.0 33.5 17.2 5.9 13/16 3/4 35.1 20.3
3/8 -12M0-3TTR 72.0 36.1 7.9 13/16 7/8 37.1 24.4
12 22.8
1/2 -12M0-3-8TTR 76.1 38.1 9.5 5/16 1 1/16 43.4 29.5
➀ The E dimension is the minimum nominal opening. These ittings may have a larger opening at the pipe/
straight thread end.
Positionable Run, SAE/MS Straight Thread (TST)

E F lat Fx lat SAE/MS Basic
Dimensions
U OD Size Number A Ax D E➀ F Fx U
washer
OD Dimensions, in.
1/4 7/16-20 -400-3TST 2.24 1.12 0.60 0.19 1/2 9/16 0.65
D
Ax O-ring 3/8 9/16-18 -600-3TST 2.53 1.26 0.66 0.28 5/8 11/16 0.79
1/2 3/4-16 -810-3TST 2.97 1.48 0.90 0.41 13/16 7/8 1.01
3/4 1 1/16-12 -1210-3TST 3.55 1.63 0.96 0.62 1 1/16 1 1/4 1.44
Ax 1 1 5/16-12 -1610-3TST 4.10 1.99 1.23 0.88 1 3/8 1 1/2 1.73
A
1 1/4 1 5/8-12 -2000-3TST 4.96 2.67 1.62 1.09 1 11/16 1 7/8 2.16
SAE/MS positionable fittings are available in 1 1/2 1 7/8-12 -2400-3TST 5.45 3.07 1.97 1.34 2 2 1/8 2.45
carbon steel and stainless steel only. 2 2 1/2-12 -3200-3TST 7.04 4.22 2.66 1.81 2 3/4 2 3/4 3.16
straight thread boss. ➀ The E dimension is the minimum nominal opening. These ittings may have a larger opening at the

Tees
FITTINGS
TUBE
Male Positionable Run, ISO/BSP Parallel Thread (TRT)
E F lat Fx lat
ISO
U Thread Basic
Dimensions
retainer Tube Size Ordering
OD OD in. Number A Ax D E➀ F, in. Fx, in. U
D Dimensions, in.
Ax O-ring 1/8 -400-3TRT 2.10 1.06 0.16 1/2 9/16 0.60
1/4 0.60
1/4 -400-3-4TRT 2.41 1.14 0.19 5/8 3/4 0.80
3/8 1/4 -600-3TRT 2.47 1.20 0.66 0.23 5/8 3/4 0.80
Ax 3/8 -810-3TRT 2.88 1.42 0.31 13/16 7/8 0.96
A 1/2 0.90
1/2 -810-3-8TRT 3.21 1.50 0.41 15/16 1 1/16 1.16
See page 8 for thread speciications. 5/8 1/2 -1010-3TRT 3.21 1.50 0.96 0.47 15/16 1 1/16 1.16
3/4 -1210-3TRT 3.49 0.62 1 3/8 1.43
3/4 1.57 0.96 1 1/16
1/2 -1210-3-8TRT 3.35 0.47 1 1/16 1.16
1 1 -1610-3TRT 4.04 1.93 1.23 0.78 1 3/8 1 5/8 1.82
Dimensions, mm
1/8 -6M0-3TRT 53.4 27.0 4.0 1/2 9/16 15.2
6 15.3
1/4 -6M0-3-4TRT 61.2 29.0 4.8 5/8 3/4 20.3
1/8 -8M0-3TRT 56.3 28.8 4.0 9/16 9/16 15.2
8 16.2
1/4 -8M0-3-4TRT 62.1 29.9 6.4 5/8 3/4 20.3
10 1/4 -10M0-3TRT 68.6 33.5 17.2 5.9 13/16 3/4 20.3
3/8 -12M0-3TRT 73.1 36.0 7.9 13/16 7/8 24.4
12 22.8
1/2 -12M0-3-8TRT 81.5 38.0 9.5 15/16 1 1/16 29.5
Female Run, NPT (TFT)
F lat NPT Basic

Dimensions
Tube Size Ordering
OD in. Number A Ax D E F, in.
Dimensions, in.
1/8 1/8 -200-3TFT 1.72 0.97 0.50 0.09 1/2
E
D 1/8 -400-3TFT 1.81 1.06 1/2
Ax 1/4 0.60 0.19
1/4 -400-3-4TFT 2.05 1.17 11/16
3/8 1/4 -600-3TFT 2.11 1.23 0.66 0.28 11/16
3/8 -810-3TFT 2.30 1.42 13/16
1/2 0.90 0.41
Ax 1/2 -810-3-8TFT 2.69 1.57 1 1/16
A 3/4 3/4 -1210-3TFT 3.01 1.76 0.96 0.62 1 3/8
3/4 -1610-3-12TFT 3.18 1.93 1 3/8
1 1.23 0.88
Tube ports are identical. 1 -1610-3TFT 3.61 2.11 1 11/16
Dimensions, mm
1/8 -6M0-3TFT 46.0 27.0 1/2
6 15.3 4.8
1/4 -6M0-3-4TFT 52.1 29.8 11/16
1/8 -8M0-3TFT 48.9 29.9 5/8
8 16.2 6.4
1/4 -8M0-3-4TFT 53.0 30.6 11/16
10 1/4 -10M0-3TFT 55.9 33.5 17.2 7.9 13/16
1/4 -12M0-3-4TFT 58.4 36.0 9.5 13/16
12 3/8 -12M0-3TFT 58.4 36.0 22.8 10.3 13/16
1/2 -12M0-3-8TFT 68.3 39.8 9.5 1 1/16
16 1/2 -16M0-3TFT 68.2 39.8 24.4 12.7 1 1/16

40 Tube Fittings
Tees
FITTINGS
TUBE
Female Branch, NPT (TTF)
E NPT Basic
Dimensions
Tube Size Ordering
OD in. Number A D E F, in. H
Dimensions, in.
1/8 1/8 -200-3TTF 1.94 0.50 0.09 1/2 0.75
H
D F lat 1/8 -400-3TTF 2.12 1/2 0.75
1/4 0.60 0.19
1/4 -400-3-4TTF 2.34 11/16 0.88
A 1/4 -600-3TTF 2.46 11/16 0.88
3/8 3/8 -600-3-6TTF 2.62 0.66 0.28 13/16 0.88
1/2 -600-3-8TTF 2.84 1 1.12
1/4 -810-3-4TTF 2.84 13/16 0.88
1/2 3/8 -810-3TTF 2.84 0.90 0.41 13/16 0.88
1/2 -810-3-8TTF 3.06 1 1.12
5/8 1/2 -1010-3TTF 3.06 0.96 0.50 1 1.12
3/4 3/4 -1210-3TTF 3.52 0.96 0.62 1 3/8 1.25
3/4 -1610-3-12TTF 3.86 1 3/8 1.25
1 1.23 0.88
1 -1610-3TTF 4.22 1 11/16 1.50
Dimensions, mm
1/8 -6M0-3TTF 53.9 1/2 19.0
6 15.3 4.8
1/4 -6M0-3-4TTF 59.5 11/16 22.4
1/8 -8M0-3TTF 59.7 5/8 19.0
8 16.2 6.4
1/4 -8M0-3-4TTF 61.2 11/16 22.4
10 1/4 -10M0-3TTF 67.0 17.2 7.9 13/16 22.4
1/4 -12M0-3-4TTF 72.0 13/16 22.4
12 3/8 -12M0-3TTF 72.0 22.8 9.5 13/16 22.4
1/2 -12M0-3-8TTF 77.7 1 28.4
16 1/2 -16M0-3TTF 77.6 24.4 12.7 1 28.4
Cross
Union Basic
Dimensions
Tube Ordering
OD Number A D E F, in.
Dimensions, in.
E 1/8 -200-4 1.76 0.50 0.09 3/8
1/4 -400-4 2.12 0.60 0.19 1/2
A
5/16 -500-4 2.34 0.64 0.25 5/8
3/8 -600-4 2.40 0.66 0.28 5/8
F lat D
1/2 -810-4 2.84 0.90 0.41 13/16
3/4 -1210-4 3.14 0.96 0.62 1 1/16
1 -1610-4 3.86 1.23 0.88 1 3/8
A
Dimensions, mm
3 -3M0-4 44.7 12.9 2.4 3/8
6 -6M0-4 53.9 15.3 4.8 1/2
8 -8M0-4 59.7 16.2 6.4 5/8
10 -10M0-4 67.0 17.2 7.9 13/16
12 -12M0-4 72.0 22.8 9.5 13/16
16 -16M0-4 74.0 24.4 12.7 15/16
18 -18M0-4 76.6 24.4 15.1 1 1/16
20 -20M0-4 89.3 26.0 15.9 1 3/8
22 -22M0-4 89.4 26.0 18.3 5/8
25 -25M0-4 98.3 31.3 21.8 1 3/8

Sanitary Flange Fittings
FITTINGS
E minimum opening
TUBE
F lat
B G
C
A
Kwik-Clamp Flange To Swagelok Tube Fitting

Tube Flange
Dimensions, in. (mm)
OD Size Ordering
in. in. Number A B C E F G
1/2 SS-400-SC-8 1.57 (39.9) 0.37 (9.4) 0.60 (15.2) 0.19 (4.8) 1 0.98 (24.9)
3/4 SS-400-SC-12 1.57 (39.9) 0.62 (15.7) 0.60 (15.2) 0.19 (4.8) 1 0.98 (24.9)
1/4
1 SS-400-SC-16 1.57 (39.9) 0.87 (22.1) 0.60 (15.2) 0.19 (4.8) 13/16 1.98 (50.3)
1 1/2 SS-400-SC-24 1.75 (44.4) 1.37 (34.8) 0.60 (15.2) 0.19 (4.8) 1 1/4 1.98 (50.3)
1/2 SS-600-SC-8 1.63 (41.4) 0.37 (9.4) 0.66 (16.8) 0.28 (7.1) 1 0.98 (24.9)
3/4 SS-600-SC-12 1.63 (41.4) 0.62 (15.7) 0.66 (16.8) 0.28 (7.1) 1 0.98 (24.9)
3/8
1 SS-600-SC-16 1.63 (41.4) 0.87 (22.1) 0.66 (16.8) 0.28 (7.1) 13/16 1.98 (50.3)
1 1/2 SS-600-SC-24 1.72 (43.7) 1.37 (34.8) 0.66 (16.8) 0.28 (7.1) 1 1/4 1.98 (50.3)
1/2 SS-810-SC-8 1.74 (44.2) 0.37 (9.4) 0.90 (22.9) 0.37 (9.4) 1 0.98 (24.9)
3/4 SS-810-SC-12 1.74 (44.2) 0.62 (15.7) 0.90 (22.9) 0.40 (10.2) 1 0.98 (24.9)
1/2
1 SS-810-SC-16 1.74 (44.2) 0.87 (22.1) 0.90 (22.9) 0.40 (10.2) 13/16 1.98 (50.3)
1 1/2 SS-810-SC-24 1.80 (45.7) 1.37 (34.8) 0.90 (22.9) 0.40 (10.2) 1 1/4 1.98 (50.3)
1 SS-1610-SC-16 1.92 (48.8) 0.87 (22.1) 1.24 (31.5) 0.87 (22.1) 1 1/4 1.98 (50.3)
1
2 SS-1610-SC-32 2.50 (63.5) 1.87 (47.5) 1.24 (31.5) 0.87 (22.1) 2 3/4 2.52 (64.0)

42 Tube Fittings
Oriice Plate Fittings

FITTINGS
TUBE
■ Restrict flow in process and analytical systems
■ Constructed from 316 SS as standard. When ordering

E minimum an end connection in another material, the orifice plate is
opening available in the matching material.
The minimum oriice size (E dimension) that an oriice plate

can be machine-drilled to is 0.010 in. (0.3 mm). Oriice sizes
from 0.001 in. (0.03 mm) to 0.009 in. (0.23 mm) can be laser-
plate thickness: drilled.
0.060 in. (1.52 mm)
The maximum oriice size (E) that can be selected is
dependent on the tube itting size. Please see the maximum E
dimension that can be provided for each itting size.
Typical Ordering Number Maximum E Dimension

Fitting Tube OD E
S S - 810-6PD
Dimensions, in.
Base 1/8 0.070
Ordering Number
3/16 0.117
Please include e-dimension at time of order. E-dimension will 1/4 0.164
be between .010 in. (0.3 mm) and maximum E dimension for
5/16 0.211
size of tube itting.
3/8 0.258
1/2 0.352
Typical Laser-Drilled Ordering Number
5/8 0.446
S S - 810-6 PD LD - E - 001 3/4 0.539
Base 7/8 0.633

Oriice Size
Ordering Number Value between 0.001 in. 1 0.727
(0.03 mm) and 0.009 in. (0.23 mm). 1 1/4 0.891
1 1/2 1.090
2 1.394
Laser-drilled plate
Include when ordering oriice
sizes between 0.001 in. (0.03 mm)
and 0.009 in. (0.23 mm).
Plate Style
PD = Oriice plate assembled in tube port (if more than one,
then larger end; if tee, then on run); oriice plate is 316 SS
PK = Oriice plate assembled in tube port (if more than one,
then larger end; if tee, then on run); oriice plate same
material as body
PE = Oriice plates assembled in both tube ports on run
PF = Oriice plates assembled in one tube port on run and tube
port on branch
PG = Oriice plate assembled in one tube port on branch
PH = Oriice plates assembled in both tube ports on run and
one in branch tube port
PJ = Oriice plate assembled in one end of a pipe itting
PL = Oriice plate assembled in smaller tube port
For special oriice itting requirements - contact your

authorized Swagelok representative.

Tube Adapters
Solve Alignment Problems and Reduce Inventories
FITTINGS
TUBE
Swagelok tube adapters can help eliminate dificult alignment problems and
100
reduce inventories. Swagelok tube adapters can be used with any Swagelok tube
50 5 150
ittings in this catalog. So, stocking union elbows and union tees in various sizes
10
and materials—along with commonly used Swagelok adapters—eliminates the
0 14
need for stocking special elbows and tees.
0 200
Typical Alignment Problem
When installing pipe elbows or tees, it is often dificult to align the itting with the
desired run.
1. In this example, the 2. When the pipe connection

installation requires is tightened, the male elbow
connecting tubing to a points in the wrong direction
female end connection. for the desired run. Loosening
the pipe connection could
mean leakage at the pipe
thread.
Swagelok Solution
By using a Swagelok tube adapter in conjunction with a union elbow or tee, these
dificulties can be avoided.
3. Tighten the pipe 4. Connect a Swagelok union

connection of a elbow or tee to the adapter by
Swagelok male adapter tightening the Swagelok tube
into the female end itting with a wrench, while
connection. holding the elbow or tee in the
desired direction. Insert the
tubing into the other end of the
Swagelok elbow or tee and
install the itting.
• Swagelok tube adapters are to be used ONLY in Swagelok tube ittings.

Use in ittings made by other manufacturers may result in leakage or
slippage.

44 Tube Fittings
Tube Adapters
FITTINGS
TUBE
Male
F lat
F lat
E E
A
A
1 in./25 mm and under Over 1 in./25 mm
NPT ISO/BSP Tapered Thread (RT)

NPT Basic ISO
Dimensions
Tube Size Ordering Thread Basic
OD in. Number A E➀ F Dimensions
Tube Size Ordering
Dimensions, in. OD in. Number A E➀ F
1/8 -2-TA-1-2 1.16 7/16 Dimensions, in.
1/8 0.08
1/4 -2-TA-1-4 1.37 9/16 1/8 -2-TA-1-2RT 1.16 7/16
1/8 0.08
1/8 -3-TA-1-2 1.19 7/16 1/4 -2-TA-1-4RT 1.37 9/16
3/16 0.12
1/4 -3-TA-1-4 1.40 9/16 1/8 -4-TA-1-2RT 1.25 7/16
1/4 0.17
1/8 -4-TA-1-2 1.25 7/16 1/4 -4-TA-1-4RT 1.46 9/16
1/4 -4-TA-1-4 1.46 9/16 1/4 -6-TA-1-4RT 1.53 9/16
1/4 0.17
3/8 -4-TA-1-6 1.49 11/16 3/8 3/8 -6-TA-1-6RT 1.56 0.27 11/16
1/2 -4-TA-1-8 1.71 7/8 1/2 -6-TA-1-8RT 1.78 7/8
1/8 -5-TA-1-2 1.29 0.19 7/16 1/4 -8-TA-1-4RT 1.75 0.28 9/16
5/16
1/4 -5-TA-1-4 1.50 0.22 9/16 1/2 3/8 -8-TA-1-6RT 1.78 0.37 11/16
1/8 -6-TA-1-2 1.32 0.19 7/16 1/2 -8-TA-1-8RT 2.00 0.37 7/8
1/4 -6-TA-1-4 1.53 0.27 9/16 3/4 3/4 -12-TA-1-12RT 2.06 0.58 1 1/16
3/8
3/8 -6-TA-1-6 1.56 0.27 11/16 1 1 -16-TA-1-16RT 2.60 0.80 1 3/8
1/2 -6-TA-1-8 1.78 0.27 7/8
Dimensions, mm
1/4 -8-TA-1-4 1.75 0.28 9/16
1/8 -6-MTA-1-2RT 32.8 12
1/2 3/8 -8-TA-1-6 1.78 0.37 11/16 6 4.1
1/4 -6-MTA-1-4RT 38.1 14
1/2 -8-TA-1-8 2.00 0.37 7/8
8 1/4 -8-MTA-1-4RT 39.1 5.6 14
5/8 1/2 -10-TA-1-8 2.06 0.47 7/8
1/4 -10-MTA-1-4RT 39.9 14
1/2 -12-TA-1-8 0.47 7/8 10 7.1
3/4 2.06 3/8 -10-MTA-1-6RT 40.6 18
3/4 -12-TA-1-12 0.58 1 1/16
1/4 -12-MTA-1-4RT 46.5 7.1 16
3/4 -16-TA-1-12 2.31 0.62 1 1/16
1 12 3/8 -12-MTA-1-6RT 46.2 8.8 18
1 -16-TA-1-16 2.60 0.80 1 3/8
1/2 -12-MTA-1-8RT 51.8 8.8 22
1 1/4 1 1/4 -20-TA-1-20➁ 3.16 1.02 1 3/4
1 -28-MTA-1-16RT➁ 74.7 22.2 35
1 1/2 1 1/2 -24-TA-1-24➁ 3.72 1.25 2 1/8 1 1/4 -28-MTA-1-20RT➁ 76.2 22.5 46
28
2 2 -32-TA-1-32➁ 4.70 1.72 2 3/4 1 B-28-MTA-1-16RT 68.6 22.2 1 3/8 in.
Dimensions, mm 1 1/4 B-28-MTA-1-20RT 70.1 22.6 45
1/8 -6-MTA-1-2 32.8 12 30 1 1/4 -30-MTA-1-20RT➁ 80.0 24.3 46
6 4.1
1/4 -6-MTA-1-4 38.1 14 32 1 1/4 -32-MTA-1-20RT➁ 81.0 26.5 46
1/4 -8-MTA-1-4 39.1 14 38 1 1/2 -38-MTA-1-24RT➁ 92.2 31.6 55
8 5.6
3/8 -8-MTA-1-6 39.9 19
1/4 -10-MTA-1-4 39.9 14 have a larger opening at the pipe/straight thread end.
10 3/8 -10-MTA-1-6 40.6 7.1 18 ➁ Furnished with nut and preswaged ferrules.
1/2 -10-MTA-1-8 46.2 22
1/4 -12-MTA-1-4 46.5 7.1 16
12
1/2 -12-MTA-1-8 52.1 8.8 22
1 -28-MTA-1-16➁ 74.7 22.2 35
1 1/4 -28-MTA-1-20➁ 76.2 22.5 46
28
1 B-28-MTA-1-16 68.6 22.2 1 3/8 in.
1 1/4 B-28-MTA-1-20 70.1 22.6 45
1 -30-MTA-1-16➁ 79.2 22.2 41
30
1 1/4 -30-MTA-1-20➁ 80.0 24.3 46
32 1 1/4 -32-MTA-1-20➁ 81.0 26.5 46
38 1 1/2 -38-MTA-1-24➁ 92.2 31.6 55
➁ Furnished with nut and preswaged ferrules.
Tube Adapters
FITTINGS
TUBE
Male
F lat F lat
F lat
E E E
A
A A
ISO/BSP parallel gaskets are available. See page 54. ISO/BSP parallel gaskets are available. See page 54.
ISO/BSP Parallel Thread (RS) ISO/BSP Parallel Thread (RP)
ISO ISO
Thread Basic Thread Basic
OD in. Number A E➀ F OD in. Number A E➀ F
1/8 -2-TA-1-2RS 1.25 9/16 1 -28-MTA-1-16RP➁ 72.7 19.8 41
1/8 0.08
1/4 -2-TA-1-4RS 1.43 3/4 1 1/4 -28-MTA-1-20RP➁ 77.3 22.5 50
28
1/8 -4-TA-1-2RS 1.35 0.16 1 B-28-MTA-1-16RP 65.8 19.8 1 5/8 in.
1/4 9/16 3/4
1/4 -4-TA-1-4RS 1.53 0.17 1 1/4 B-28-MTA-1-20RP 71.1 22.6 50
1/4 -6-TA-1-4RS 1.59 0.23 3/4 30 1 1/4 -30-MTA-1-20RP➁ 81.1 24.3 50
3/8
3/8 -6-TA-1-6RS 1.62 0.27 7/8 32 1 1/4 -32-MTA-1-20RP➁ 82.1 26.5 50
1/4 -8-TA-1-4RS 1.85 0.23 3/4 38 1 1/2 -38-MTA-1-24RP➁ 94.5 31.8 55
1/2 3/8 -8-TA-1-6RS 1.88 0.31 7/8
1/2 -8-TA-1-8RS 1.96 0.37 1 1/16 ➀ The E dimension is the minimum nominal opening. These ittings may
3/4 3/4 -12-TA-1-12RS 2.20 0.58 1 5/16
1 1 -16-TA-1-16RS 2.59 0.80 1 5/8
Dimensions, mm
1/8 -6-MTA-1-2RS 34.3 4.0 14
6
1/4 -6-MTA-1-4RS 38.9 4.1 19
8 1/4 -8-MTA-1-4RS 39.6 5.6 19
1/4 -10-MTA-1-4RS 40.4 5.9 19
10 3/8 -10-MTA-1-6RS 41.1 7.1 22
1/2 -10-MTA-1-8RS 43.2 7.1 27
1/4 -12-MTA-1-4RS 47.0 5.9 19
12 3/8 -12-MTA-1-6RS 47.8 7.9 22
1/2 -12-MTA-1-8RS 49.8 8.8 27
1/2 -18-MTA-1-8RS 51.3 11.9 27
18
3/4 -18-MTA-1-12RS 55.9 13.9 35
1 -28-MTA-1-16RS➁ 71.9 19.8 41
1 1/4 -28-MTA-1-20RS➁ 75.4 22.5 50
28
1 B-28-MTA-1-16RS 65.8 19.8 1 5/8 in.
1 1/4 B-28-MTA-1-20RS 69.3 22.6 50
30 1 1/4 -30-MTA-1-20RS➁ 79.8 24.3 50
32 1 1/4 -32-MTA-1-20RS➁ 80.8 26.5 50
38 1 1/2 -38-MTA-1-24RS➁ 91.9 31.6 55

46 Tube Fittings
Tube Adapters
FITTINGS
TUBE
Male
F lat
O-ring F lat
F lat O-ring
O-ring
E E E
A
A
A
1 in./25 mm and under Over 1 in./25 mm See page 18 for mounting dimensions.
Adapts to SAE J1926/1 and ISO 11926-1 straight thread boss.
SAE/MS Straight Thread (ST) O-Seal (SAE/MS Straight Thread)

SAE/MS Basic SAE/MS Basic
OD Size Number A E➀ F OD Size Number A E F
1/8 5/16-24 -2-TA-1-2ST 1.20 0.08 7/16 1/8 5/16-24 -2-TA-1-OR 1.28 0.08 9/16
1/4 7/16-20 -4-TA-1-4ST 1.39 0.17 9/16 3/16 3/8-24 -3-TA-1-OR 1.38 0.12 5/8
7/16-20 -6-TA-1-4ST 1.46 0.20 9/16 1/4 7/16-20 -4-TA-1-OR 1.54 0.17 3/4
3/8 9/16-18 -6-TA-1-6ST 1.52 0.27 11/16 5/16 1/2-20 -5-TA-1-OR 1.64 0.22 7/8
3/4-16 -6-TA-1-8ST 1.60 0.27 7/8
3/8 9/16-18 -6-TA-1-OR 1.70 0.27 15/16
9/16-18 -8-TA-1-6ST 1.74 0.28 11/16
1/2 1/2 3/4-16 -8-TA-1-OR 1.95 0.37 1 1/8
3/4-16 -8-TA-1-8ST 1.82 0.37 7/8
5/8 7/8-14 -10-TA-1-10ST 1.94 0.47 1
3/4 1 1/16-12 -12-TA-1-12ST 2.10 0.58 1 1/4
1 1 5/16-12 -16-TA-1-16ST 2.41 0.80 1 1/2
1 1/4 1 5/8-12 -20-TA-1-20ST➁ 2.81 1.02 1 7/8
1 1/2 1 7/8-12 -24-TA-1-24ST➁ 3.28 1.25 2 1/8
2 2 1/2-12 -32-TA-1-32ST➁ 4.23 1.72 2 3/4
F lat
37°
AN Thread
AN
Tube Basic
Dimensions
Tube Flare Thread Ordering
OD Size Size Number A E➀ F
Dimensions, in.
1/4 1/4 7/16-20UNJF-3 -4-TA-1-4AN 1.46 0.17 1/2
1/4 7/16-20UNJF-3 -6-TA-1-4AN 1.53 0.17 1/2
3/8
3/8 9/16-18UNJF-3 -6-TA-1-6AN 1.56 0.27 5/8
1/2 1/2 3/4-16UNJF-3 -8-TA-1-8AN 1.91 0.37 13/16
3/4 3/4 1 1/16-12UNJ-3 -12-TA-1-12AN 2.21 0.58 1 1/8
1 1 1 5/16-12UNJ-3 -16-TA-1-16AN 2.58 0.80 1 3/8

Tube Adapters
FITTINGS
TUBE
Male Pipe Weld
37.5° Pipe Basic
Dimensions
Tube Weld Ordering
OD Size Number A E J
E J Dimensions, in.
1/4 1/4 -4-TA-1-4W 1.14 0.17 0.540
3/8 1/2 -6-TA-1-8W 1.46 0.27 0.840
A
1/2 -8-TA-1-8W 1.66 0.840
1/2 0.37
3/4 -8-TA-1-12W 1.68 1.050
3/4 3/4 -12-TA-1-12W 1.87 0.58 1.050
Wall thickness at weld end is based on schedule 80 pipe.
Female
F lat
F lat
E E
A
A
NPT ISO/BSP Tapered Thread (RT)

NPT Basic ISO
Dimensions
Tube Size Ordering Thread Basic
OD in. Number A E F Dimensions
Tube Size Ordering
Dimensions, in. OD in. Number A E F
1/8 -2-TA-7-2 1.24 9/16 Dimensions, in.
1/8 0.08
1/4 -2-TA-7-4 1.39 3/4 1/8 -4-TA-7-2RT 1.30 9/16
1/4 0.17
3/16 1/4 -3-TA-7-4 1.41 0.12 3/4 1/4 -4-TA-7-4RT 1.45 3/4
1/8 -4-TA-7-2 1.30 9/16 1/4 -6-TA-7-4RT 1.50 3/4
3/8 0.27
1/4 -4-TA-7-4 1.46 3/4 3/8 -6-TA-7-6RT 1.59 7/8
1/4 0.17
3/8 -4-TA-7-6 1.55 7/8 1/4 -8-TA-7-4RT 1.71 3/4
1/2 -4-TA-7-8 1.79 1 1/16 1/2 3/8 -8-TA-7-6RT 1.80 0.37 7/8
5/16 1/4 -5-TA-7-4 1.48 0.22 3/4 1/2 -8-TA-7-8RT 2.05 1 1/16
1/8 -6-TA-7-2 1.35 9/16 Dimensions, mm
1/4 -6-TA-7-4 1.50 3/4 6 1/8 -6-MTA-7-2RT 33.0 4.1 14
3/8 0.27
3/8 -6-TA-7-6 1.59 7/8 8 1/4 -8-MTA-7-4RT 37.6 5.6 19
1/2 -6-TA-7-8 1.84 1 1/16
10 1/4 -10-MTA-7-4RT 38.1 7.1 19
1/4 -8-TA-7-4 1.71 3/4
1/2 3/8 -8-TA-7-6 1.79 0.37 7/8
1/2 -8-TA-7-8 2.05 1 1/16
5/8 1/2 -10-TA-7-8 2.09 0.47 1 1/16
1/2 -12-TA-7-8 2.08 1 1/16
3/4 3/4 -12-TA-7-12 2.16 0.58 1 5/16
1 -12-TA-7-16 2.30 1 5/8
3/4 -16-TA-7-12 2.39 1 5/16
1 0.80
1 -16-TA-7-16 2.53 1 5/8
1 1/4 1 1/4 -20-TA-7-20➀ 3.06 1.02 2 1/8
1 1/2 1 1/2 -24-TA-7-24➀ 3.50 1.25 2 3/8
2 2 -32-TA-7-32➀ 4.23 1.72 2 7/8
Dimensions, mm
1/8 -6-MTA-7-2 32.5 14
6 4.1
1/4 -6-MTA-7-4 37.1 19
8 1/4 -8-MTA-7-4 37.6 5.6 19
1/4 -10-MTA-7-4 38.1 19
10 3/8 -10-MTA-7-6 40.1 7.1 22
1/2 -10-MTA-7-8 46.7 27
1/4 -12-MTA-7-4 43.7 19
12 8.8
1/2 -12-MTA-7-8 52.3 27
➀ Furnished with nut and preswaged ferrules. Refer to Installation Instructions, beginning on page 62.
48 Tube Fittings
Tube Adapters
FITTINGS
TUBE
Female
F lat F lat
ISO/BSP parallel gaskets ISO/BSP parallel gaskets

E and O-rings are available. E and O-rings are available.
See page 54. See page 54.
A A
ISO/BSP Parallel Thread (RP) ISO/BSP Parallel Thread (RG, Gauge)
ISO ISO
Thread Basic Thread Basic
OD in. Number A E F OD in. Number A E F
1/8 1/8 -2-TA-7-2RP 1.17 0.08 9/16 1/4 1/4 -4-TA-7-4RG 1.39 0.17 3/4
1/8 -4-TA-7-2RP 1.25 9/16 3/8 3/8 -6-TA-7-6RG 1.55 0.26 15/16
1/4 0.17
1/4 -4-TA-7-4RP 1.50 3/4 1/2 1/2 -8-TA-7-8RG 1.80 0.28 1 1/16
1/4 -6-TA-7-4RP 1.55 3/4 Dimensions, mm
3/8 0.27
3/8 -6-TA-7-6RP 1.57 15/16
1/4 -6-MTA-7-4RG 35.3 19
3/8 -8-TA-7-6RP 1.78 15/16 6 3/8 -6-MTA-7-6RG 38.4 4.1 24
1/2 0.38
1/2 -8-TA-7-8RP 2.02 1 1/16 1/2 -6-MTA-7-8RG 42.9 27
Dimensions, mm 1/4 -8-MTA-7-4RG 33.0 5.5 19
1/8 -6-MTA-7-2RP 32.0 14 8 3/8 -8-MTA-7-6RG 38.9 5.6 24
6 4.1
1/4 -6-MTA-7-4RP 37.8 19 1/2 -8-MTA-7-8RG 43.7 5.6 27
12 1/2 -12-MTA-7-8RP 49.8 8.8 27 1/4 -10-MTA-7-4RG 34.5 5.5 19
10 3/8 -10-MTA-7-6RG 36.1 6.5 24
1/2 -10-MTA-7-8RG 41.1 7.1 27
1/4 -12-MTA-7-4RG 40.1 5.5 19
F lat 12 3/8 -12-MTA-7-6RG 44.7 6.5 24
1/2 -12-MTA-7-8RG 48.8 7.0 27
ISO/BSP parallel thread
(RJ) ittings are available in 16 1/2 -16-MTA-7-8RG 49.0 7.0 27
E stainless steel only. 18 1/2 -18-MTA-7-8RG 49.3 7.0 27
ISO/BSP parallel gaskets
and O-rings are available.
See page 54.
A
74° F lat
ISO/BSP Parallel Thread (RJ)
ISO
Thread
Dimensions
Tube Size Ordering
OD in. Number A E F AN Thread
Dimensions, in.
AN
1/4 1/4 SS-4-TA-7-4RJ 1.39 0.17 3/4 Tube Basic
3/8 3/8 SS-6-TA-7-6RJ 1.55 0.26 15/16 Tube Flare Ordering
1/2 1/2 SS-8-TA-7-8RJ 1.94 0.28 1 1/16 OD Size Number F
Dimensions, mm Dimensions, in.
1/4 SS-6-MTA-7-4RJ 35.3 19 1/8 -200-A-2ANF 3/8
1/8
6 3/8 SS-6-MTA-7-6RJ 38.6 4.1 24 1/4 -200-A-4ANF 9/16
1/2 SS-6-MTA-7-8RJ 42.9 27 1/4 1/4 -400-A-4ANF 9/16
1/4 SS-8-MTA-7-4RJ 33.0 5.5 19 3/8 3/8 -600-A-6ANF 11/16
8 3/8 SS-8-MTA-7-6RJ 39.4 5.6 24 1/2 1/2 -810-A-8ANF 7/8
1/2 SS-8-MTA-7-8RJ 43.7 5.6 27
3/4 3/4 -1210-A-12ANF 1 1/4
1/4 SS-10-MTA-7-4RJ 34.5 5.5 19
10 3/8 SS-10-MTA-7-6RJ 36.1 6.5 24
1/2 SS-10-MTA-7-8RJ 41.1 7.1 27
1/4 SS-12-MTA-7-4RJ 40.1 5.5 19
12 3/8 SS-12-MTA-7-6RJ 44.7 6.5 24
1/2 SS-12-MTA-7-8RJ 48.8 7.0 27

Additional Ordering Information

Swagelok tube itting ordering numbers follow the sequence shown below.
FITTINGS
TUBE
SS
A - 2 0 D
B C 0 - 1
E - 2
F RT
G
SS - 2 0 0 - 1 - 2 RT
A Material C Series F Second End Connection Size
A = Aluminum 0 = Fractional 1/16 to 3/8 in. and Add a size designator from the list at
B = Brass 1 1/4 to 2 in. left for the second end connection or if
C20 = Alloy 20 1 = Fractional 1/2 to 1 1/8 in. the itting is a reducing union.
HC = Alloy C-276 M = Millimeter tube size
G Second End Connection Type
INC = Alloy 600 To order a female Swagelok tube fitting, add F.
M = Alloy 400 Example: SS-100F-1-1. Add a second end connection type
NY = Nylon designator as needed.
D Component AN = 37° male AN lare
S = Carbon steel
SS = 316 stainless steel 0 = Fitting ANF = 37° female AN lare
6ELT = High-temperature 1 = Body BT = Bored-through itting
316 stainless steel F = Female thread
T = PTFE E Fitting Type KN = Knurled nut, nylon ferrules
TI = Titanium 1 = Male connector KT = Knurled nut, PTFE ferrules
254 = 6-Moly 2 = 90° male elbow M = Metric tube end
625 = Alloy 625 3 = Tee, union OR = O-seal connection
825 = Alloy 825 4 = Cross, union PR = ISO/BSP positionable parallel
2507 = Alloy 2507 5 = 45° male elbow pipe thread
6 = Union RG = ISO/BSP parallel pipe thread
B Size (Tube OD) 7 = Female connector (gauge)
8 = Female elbow RJ = ISO/BSP parallel pipe thread
Fractional, in. Metric, mm
9 = Elbow, union (Japanese gauge)
1 = 1/16 2=2
11 = Bulkhead male connector RP = ISO/BSP parallel pipe thread
2 = 1/8 3=3
61 = Bulkhead union RS = ISO/BSP parallel pipe thread
3 = 3/16 4=4
71 = Bulkhead female connector RT = ISO/BSP tapered pipe thread
4 = 1/4 6=6
A = Adapter ST = Straight thread with O-ring
5 = 5/16 8=8
C = Cap (for SAE/MS)
6 = 3/8 10 = 10
P = Plug W = Male pipe weld/tube socket
8 = 1/2 12 = 12
PC = Port connector weld
10 = 5/8 14 = 14
R = Reducer
12 = 3/4 15 = 15
R1 = Bulkhead reducer
14 = 7/8 16 = 16
2R = Reducing elbow
16 = 1 18 = 18
TFT = Tee, female run
18 = 1 1/8 20 = 20
TMT = Tee, male run
20 = 1 1/4 22 = 22
TRT = Tee, ISO/BSP parallel male
24 = 1 1/2 25 = 25
positionable run
32 = 2 28 = 28
TST = Tee, straight thread with
32 = 32
O-ring male positionable run
38 = 38
TTF = Tee, female branch
50 = 50
TTM = Tee, male branch
TTR = Tee, ISO/BSP parallel male
positionable branch
TTS = Tee, straight thread with
O-ring male positionable
branch
Tees and Crosses Additional Sizes and Materials

Ordering numbers for tees and crosses 4 Contact your authorized Swagelok representative for
indicate irst the size of the run (1 to 2) information about additional sizes and special alloys.
and then the size of the branch (3 for
tees and 3 to 4 for crosses). 1 2
Example: SS-6M0-3-4TTF for a 316 SS
female tee for 6 mm tube with
1/4 in. female NPT branch
3
50 Tube Fittings
Additional Ordering Information

Swagelok tube adapter ordering numbers follow the sequence shown below.
FITTINGS
TUBE
SS
A - B
2 - TA
C - D
1 - E
4 RT
F
SS - 2 - TA - 1 - 4 RT
A Material C Component E Second End Connection Size
A =Aluminum TA = Fractional tube adapter Add a size designator from the list at
B =Brass MTA = Metric tube adapter left for the second end connection.
C20 =Alloy 20
HC =Alloy C-276 D Adapter Type F Second End Connection Type
INC =Alloy 600 1 = Male adapter Add a second end connection type
M =Alloy 400 7 = Female adapter designator as needed.
NY =Nylon AN = 37° male AN lare
S =Carbon steel ANF = 37° female AN lare
SS =316 stainless steel RG = ISO/BSP parallel pipe thread
6ELT =High-temperature (gauge)
316 stainless steel RJ = ISO/BSP parallel pipe thread
T = PTFE (Japanese gauge)
TI = Titanium RP = ISO/BSP parallel pipe thread
254 = 6-Moly RS = ISO/BSP parallel pipe thread
625 = Alloy 625 RT = ISO/BSP tapered pipe thread
825 = Alloy 825 ST = Straight thread with O-ring
2507 = Alloy 2507 (for SAE/MS)
W = Male pipe weld/tube socket
weld
B Size (Tube OD)
Fractional, in. Metric, mm
1 = 1/16 2=2
2 = 1/8 3=3
3 = 3/16 4=4
4 = 1/4 6=6
5 = 5/16 8=8
6 = 3/8 10 = 10
8 = 1/2 12 = 12
10 = 5/8 14 = 14
12 = 3/4 15 = 15
14 = 7/8 16 = 16
16 = 1 18 = 18
18 = 1 1/8 20 = 20
20 = 1 1/4 22 = 22
24 = 1 1/2 25 = 25
32 = 2 28 = 28
32 = 32
38 = 38
50 = 50
Replacement Parts
To order, add a material designator from the How to Order table on page 10.
FITTINGS
TUBE
Nuts Female
G lat
Basic Basic
OD Number G L OD Number G L
L
1/16 -102-1 5/16 0.31 2 -2M2-1 12 11.9
1/8 -202-1 7/16 0.47 3 -3M2-1 12 11.9
3/16 -302-1 1/2 0.47 4 -4M2-1 12 11.9
1/4 -402-1 9/16 0.50 6 -6M2-1 14 12.7
5/16 -502-1 5/8 0.53 8 -8M2-1 16 13.5
3/8 -602-1 11/16 0.56 10 -10M2-1 19 15.1
1/2 -812-1 7/8 0.69 12 -12M2-1 22 17.4
5/8 -1012-1 1 0.69 14 -14M2-1 25 17.4
3/4 -1212-1 1 1/8 0.69 15 -15M2-1 25 17.4
7/8 -1412-1 1 1/4 0.69 16 -16M2-1 25 17.4
1 -1612-1 1 1/2 0.81 18 -18M2-1 30 17.4
1 1/4 -2002-1 1 7/8 1.25 20 -20M2-1 32 17.4
1 1/2 -2402-1 2 1/4 1.50 22 -22M2-1 32 17.4
2 -3202-1 3 2.06 25 -25M2-1 38 20.6
-28M2-1 46 30.6
28
B-28M2-1 45 20.6
30 -30M2-1 50 32.7
32 -32M2-1 50 34.4
38 -38M2-1 60 40.6
50 -50M2-1 3 in. 52.3
G lat
Knurled Female
The Swagelok knurled nut tube itting provides a leak-tight seal without the
use of inserts on most wall thicknesses of polyethylene tubing. Inserts may be
required for larger sizes.
L
To set the ferrules on the tubing, initial connections must be made with a
wrench, tightening the nut one and one-quarter turns from inger-tight (three-
quarter turn for 1/16, 1/8 and 3/16 in.; 2, 3, and 4 mm ittings). Leak-tight
connections may be reassembled with inger-tight assembly.
To order a knurled nut, add K to the female nut basic ordering number.
Example: B-402-1K
To order a knurled nut on an assembled itting with nylon ferrules, add KN to
the itting ordering number.
Example: SS-400-1-2KN
To order a knurled nut on an assembled itting with PTFE ferrules, add KT to
the itting ordering number.
Example: SS-400-1-2KT
Male
G lat
Basic Basic
OD Number G L OD Number G L
L
1/16 -1F2-1GC 1/4 0.38 10 -10MF2-1 22 22.1
1/8 -2F2-1GC 3/8 0.53 12 -12MF2-1 24 22.1
For use in female Swagelok
end connections. 1/4 -4F2-1 1/2 0.62
1/2 -8F2-1 15/16 0.87
52 Tube Fittings
Replacement Parts
To order, add a material designator from the How to Order table on page 10.
FITTINGS
TUBE
Ferrules
Front Back
Basic Basic Basic Basic
Tube Ordering Tube Ordering Tube Ordering Tube Ordering
OD Number OD Number OD Number OD Number
Dimensions, in. Dimensions, mm Dimensions, in. Dimensions, mm
1/16 -103-1 2 -2M3-1 1/16 -104-1 2 -2M4-1
1/8 -203-1 3 -3M3-1 1/8 -204-1 3 -3M4-1
3/16 -303-1 4 -4M3-1 3/16 -304-1 4 -4M4-1
1/4 -403-1 6 -6M3-1 1/4 -404-1 6 -6M4-1
5/16 -503-1 8 -8M3-1 5/16 -504-1 8 -8M4-1
3/8 -603-1 10 -10M3-1 3/8 -604-1 10 -10M4-1
1/2 -813-1 12 -12M3-1 1/2 -814-1 12 -12M4-1
5/8 -1013-1 14 -14M3-1 5/8 -1014-1 14 -14M4-1
3/4 -1213-1 15 -15M3-1 3/4 -1214-1 15 -15M4-1
7/8 -1413-1 16 -16M3-1 7/8 -1414-1 16 -16M4-1
1 -1613-1 18 -18M3-1 1 -1614-1 18 -18M4-1
1 1/4 -2003-1➀ 20 -20M3-1 1 1/4 -2004-1➀ 20 -20M4-1
1 1/2 -2403-1➀ 22 -22M3-1 1 1/2 -2404-1➀ 22 -22M4-1
2 -3203-1➀ 25 -25M3-1 2 -3204-1➀ 25 -25M4-1
➀ Over 1 in. and over 28 -28M3-1➀ ➀ Over 1 in. and over 28 -28M4-1➀
25 mm stainless steel 30 -30M3-1➀ 25 mm stainless steel 30 -30M4-1➀
front ferrules are PFA back ferrules are PFA
coated. To order silver- 32 -32M3-1➀ coated. To order back 32 -32M4-1➀
plated front ferrules, add 38 -38M3-1➀ ferrules without PFA 38 -38M4-1➀
-BL to the basic ordering coating, add -WC to the
number. 50 -50M3-1➀ basic ordering number. 50 -50M4-1➀
Example: SS-2003-1-BL Example: SS-2004-1-WC
Replacement Parts
FITTINGS
TUBE
Nut-Ferrule Set and Ferrule Set
Use of Nuts and Ferrules
Using Swagelok nuts and ferrules on tube ittings or valves with tube end connections
requires critical interaction of precision parts.
Swagelok nuts and ferrules are sold as replacement parts for use with only Swagelok
bodies, ittings, valves, and hose products.
Sets are shown with arbors. One arbor holds ive nut-ferrule sets or ten ferrule sets.
Nut-Ferrule Set Ferrule Set
The nut-ferrule set contains one nut, one back ferrule, and The ferrule set contains one front ferrule and one back ferrule.
one front ferrule. To order, add a material designator to the basic ordering number.
To order, add a material designator to the basic ordering number. Please order ferrule sets in multiples of ten.
Please order nut-ferrule sets in multiples of ive. Example: SS-100-SET
Example: SS-400-NFSET
Material Designator Tube Basic Material Designator Tube Basic

Brass B OD Ordering Number Alloy 400 M OD Ordering Number
Carbon steel S Aluminum A
1/4 -400-NFSET 1/16 -100-SET
316 stainless Brass B
SS 3/8 -600-NFSET 1/8 -200-SET
steel Carbon steel S
1/2 -810-NFSET 3/16 -300-SET
Nylon NY
Dimensions, mm 1/4 -400-SET
PTFE T
6 -6M0-NFSET 5/16 -500-SET
316 stainless
8 -8M0-NFSET SS 3/8 -600-SET
steel
10 -10M0-NFSET 1/2 -810-SET
12 -12M0-NFSET Dimensions, mm
6 -6M0-SET
8 -8M0-SET
10 -10M0-SET
Nut-Ferrule Package and Ferrule-Pak Package 12 -12M0-SET
To order the nut-ferrule package (50 nut-ferrule sets) or ferrule-pak package (100 front
and back sets), contact your authorized Swagelok sales and service representative.
Nut-Ferrule Package Ferrule-Pak Package

54 Tube Fittings
Replacement Parts
FITTINGS
TUBE
ISO/BSP Parallel Gaskets

Steel and Stainless Steel ISO
(RS Fitting) Thread Ordering Number
RS itting steel Gasket Size, in. RS Gasket➀ RSD Gasket➁ RSNB Gasket
gaskets provide 1/8 S-2-RS-2V SS-2-RSD-2V 304L-2-RSNB-2
a seal with male 1/4 S-4-RS-2V➂ SS-4-RSD-2V 304L-4-RSNB-2
RS/RSD ISO/BSP parallel 3/8 S-6-RS-2V➂ SS-6-RSD-2V 304L-6-RSNB-2
Gasket
threads. 1/2 S-8-RS-2V➂ SS-8-RSD-2V 304L-8-RSNB-2
The RS gasket is 3/4 S-12-RS-2V SS-12-RSD-2V 304L-12-RSNB-2
of a luorocarbon 1 S-16-RS-2V SS-16-RSD-2V 304L-16-RSNB-2
FKM inner ring bonded to a carbon 1 1/4 S-20-RS-2V SS-20-RSD-2V 304L-20-RSNB-2
steel outer ring. 1 1/2 S-24-RS-2V SS-24-RSD-2V 304L-24-RSNB-2
The RSD (DIN-style) gasket is a ➀ Also available with a Buna inner ring. To order, replace V with B
luorocarbon FKM inner ring bonded to in the ordering number.
a stainless steel or carbon steel outer Example: S-2-RS-2B
➁ Also available with a carbon steel outer ring. To order, replace
ring as recommended in ISO 1179-1973. SS with S in the ordering number.
It can be used with end connections Example: S-8-RSD-2V
designed in accordance with DIN 3852 ➂ Also available with a stainless steel outer ring. To order, replace
Part 2. S with SS in the ordering number.
Example: SS-8-RS-2V
The RSNB gasket is an all-metal
304L stainless steel gasket similar to
RSNB DIN 7603 form D.
Gasket
Copper (RP and RS Fitting) ISO

The RP and RS Gasket Thread Ordering
itting copper Size, in. Number
gasket provides 1/8 CU-2-RP-2
a seal with male 1/4 CU-4-RP-2
ISO/BSP parallel 3/8 CU-6-RP-2
threads. 1/2 CU-8-RP-2
3/4 CU-12-RP-2
1 CU-16-RP-2
1 1/4 CU-20-RP-2
1 1/2 CU-24-RP-2
Copper and Nickel Gasket PTFE (RJ Fitting)

(RG, Gauge Fitting) The RJ itting PTFE gasket provides
The RG itting gasket provides a seal with ISO/BSP parallel male
a seal on pressure gauges equipped threads.
with ISO/BSP parallel male threads.
ISO
ISO Thread Ordering
Thread Ordering Number Size, in. Number
Size, in. Copper Nickel Regular Gaskets
1/4 CU-4-RG-2 NI-4-RG-2 1/4 T-4-RJ-2
3/8 CU-6-RG-2 NI-6-RG-2 3/8 T-6-RJ-2
1/2 CU-8-RG-2 NI-8-RG-2 1/2 T-8-RJ-2
Thick Gaskets
1/4 T-4-RJ-2-T
3/8 T-6-RJ-2-T
1/2 T-8-RJ-2-T
Contact your authorized Swagelok representative for gasket dimensions.

Replacement Parts
FITTINGS
TUBE
O-Rings
Buna N Buna N
(O-Seal Straight Threads) (O-Seal Pipe Threads)
O-ring hardness is 70 durometer. O-ring hardness is 70 durometer.
Thread Uniform NPT/ISO Uniform

Size Size Ordering Pipe Size Size Ordering
in. Number Number in. Number Number
5/16-24 011 BN-70-OR-011 1/8 013 BN-70-OR-013
3/8-24 012 BN-70-OR-012 1/4 113 BN-70-OR-113
7/16-20 013 BN-70-OR-013 3/8 116 BN-70-OR-116
1/2-20 112 BN-70-OR-112 1/2 118 BN-70-OR-118
9/16-18 113 BN-70-OR-113
3/4-16 116 BN-70-OR-116
1 1/16-12 121 BN-70-OR-121
1 5/16-12 125 BN-70-OR-125
Fluorocarbon FKM Fluorocarbon FKM

(Positionable Fittings, (SAE/MS Straight Threads)
ISO/BSP Parallel Threads) O-ring hardness is 90 durometer.
O-ring hardness is 90 durometer.
SAE/MS
ISO Thread Uniform
Thread Uniform Size Size Ordering
Size Size Ordering in. Number Number
in. Number Number 5/16-24 902 FCBR-90-OR-902
1/8 502➀ FSP-90-OR-502 3/8-24 903 FCBR-90-OR-903
1/4 111 FCBR-90-OR-111 7/16-20 904 FCBR-90-OR-904
3/8 113 FCBR-90-OR-113 1/2-20 905 FCBR-90-OR-905
1/2 508➀ FCBR-90-OR-508 9/16-18 906 FCBR-90-OR-906
3/4 119 FCBR-90-OR-119 3/4-16 908 FCBR-90-OR-908
1 217 FCBR-90-OR-217 7/8-14 910 FCBR-90-OR-910
➀ Not a uniform O-ring size. 1 1/16-12 912 FCBR-90-OR-912
1 3/16-12 914 FCBR-90-OR-914
1 5/16-12 916 FCBR-90-OR-916
1 5/8-12 920 FCBR-90-OR-920
1 7/8-12 924 FCBR-90-OR-924
2 1/2-12 932 FCBR-90-OR-932
56 Tube Fittings
Tools and Accessories

FITTINGS
Hydraulic Swaging Units

TUBE
Swagelok hydraulic swaging units preswage Swagelok ferrules onto tubing prior to
assembly and provide Swagelok tube itting connections that are 100 % gaugeable
upon initial installation. Multihead hydraulic and air-actuated hydraulic swaging units:
■ Place no initial strain on nut or itting body threads or on body seal surfaces
■ Are available with interchangeable fractional and metric tooling
■ Fit neatly in a rugged plastic carrying case
■ Reduce assembly and installation time and operator error.
Multihead Hydraulic Swaging Unit (MHSU)

■ Is available in two unit sizes, with
tooling for:
■ 1/2 to 1 in. and 12 to 25 mm tubing
and tube adapters
■ 1 to 2 in. and 25 to 50 mm tubing
and tube adapters
■ Must be used to install 1 1/4, 1 1/2,
and 2 in. and 28, 30, 32, 38, and
50 mm Swagelok tube ittings
■ Is standard with a tube marking
feature to indicate when tube is
properly bottomed in the unit
MHSU Unit Components Tooling Kit Components
■ Is available with a support base (as
shown). See Ordering Information, ■ Multihead hydraulic swaging unit ■ Die head sets for Swagelok tube
page 57. ■ Hydraulic hose—2 ft (0.6 m) with all fitting sizes:
■ Is available with stainless steel units except 1 in./25 mm and over ■ Fractional, up to 1 in.—1/2, 5/8, 3/4,
connection tubing in place of hydraulic unit without support base, which 7/8, and 1 in.
hose; support base is required. See contains 6 ft (1.8 m) hose ■ Fractional, 1 in. and over—1, 1 1/4,
Ordering Information, page 57. ■ Retaining ring pliers 1 1/2, and 2 in.
■ Safety glasses ■ Metric, up to 25 mm—12, 14, 15,
The MHSU cannot be used for
Alloy 2507 tubing 1/2 in. and under ■ Operating instructions 16, 18, 20, 22, and 25 mm
or for medium-pressure tubing. ■ Carrying case ■ Metric, 25 mm and over—25, 28,
For 5/8 and 3/4 in. alloy 2507 tubing, 30, 32, and 38 mm
order the 1 in./25 mm and over unit ■ 50 mm tooling available separately
and alloy 2507 tooling kit and gap ■ Gap inspection gauges
inspection gauges. ■ Chamfer block (up to 1 in./25 mm
sizes only)
Recommended Minimum Wall Thickness of Tubing for use with the MHSU
Technical Data
Steel Stainless Steel Steel Stainless Steel
Tooling Tooling ■ Dimensions—MHSU case
Size Tubing Wall Size Tubing Wall
22 in. (55.9 cm) high, 24 in. (61.0 cm)
wide, 8.75 in. (22.2 cm) deep
1/2 0.049 12
■ Weight
5/8 14 1.5
0.065 Up to 1 in./25 mm MHSU in case with
3/4 15 1.5
0.065 tooling kit and support base—40 lb
7/8 16 (18.1 kg)
1.8
1 0.083 18 1 in./25 mm and over MHSU in case
1 1/4 20 with tooling kit and support base—
0.083 0.095
1 1/2 22 2.0 2.0 55 lb (24.9 kg)
2 0.095 0.109 25 ■ Construction
28 High-strength stainless steel tooling
Use of tubing below the 30 2.2 for durability and corrosion resistance
recommended minimum wall 32 2.2
thickness may result in the tube See next page for Ordering Information.
38
sticking in the die head. 2.5
50
FITTINGS
Hydraulic Swaging Units
TUBE
MHSU Ordering Information Air-Actuated
Hydraulic Swaging Unit (AHSU)
Select an ordering number. Tooling Kits
Ordering Numbers Up to 1 in./25 mm

MHSU Unit
Tube Ordering
Up to 1 in./ OD Number
MS-MHSU-U-E
25 mm sizes
Dimensions, in.
1 in./25 mm
MS-MHSU-O-E 1/2 MS-MHSUT-U-810-M
and over sizes
MHSU Unit with Tooling Kit 5/8 MS-MHSUT-U-1010-M
Fractional 3/4 MS-MHSUT-U-1210-M ■ Requires only one unit with
MS-MHSU-U-E-FKIT-M
up to 1 in. sizes 7/8 MS-MHSUT-U-1410-M interchangeable tooling to swage
Fractional 1 in. 1 MS-MHSUT-U-1610-M 1/4 to 1/2 in. and 6 to 12 mm
MS-MHSU-O-E-FKIT-M
and over sizes Swagelok tube itting ferrule sizes
Metric up to Alloy 2507 Tubing
MS-MHSU-U-E-MKIT-M ■ Requires no threading of nut on or off
25 mm sizes 5/8 MS-MHSUT-O-2507-1010-M
Metric 25 to
the tooling
MS-MHSU-O-E-MKIT-M 3/4 MS-MHSUT-O-2507-1210-M
38 mm➀ sizes
Dimensions, mm The AHSU cannot be used for
➀ 50 mm tooling available separately. alloy 2507 tubing or for medium-
12 MS-MHSUT-U-12M0-M
14 MS-MHSUT-U-14M0-M pressure tubing.
Support Base
15 MS-MHSUT-U-15M0-M AHSU Unit Components
Add -B to the ordering number.
16 MS-MHSUT-U-16M0-M ■ Air-actuated hydraulic swaging unit
Examples: MS-MHSU-U-E-B
MS-MHSU-U-E-FKIT-M-B 18 MS-MHSUT-U-18M0-M ■ Hex key
20 MS-MHSUT-U-20M0-M ■ Adapter plates—for tube ittings
Operating Instructions 22 MS-MHSUT-U-22M0-M smaller than 1/2 in. or 12 mm
MHSU ordering numbers include 25 MS-MHSUT-U-25M0-M ■ Safety glasses
English-language instructions. For
■ Gap inspection gauges
other languages, visit swagelok.com. 1 in./25 mm and Over
■ Operating instructions
Accessories Tube Ordering ■ Carrying case
Additional and replacement gap OD Number
inspection gauges are available. See Dimensions, in. Tooling Kit Components
page 60. 1 MS-MHSUT-O-1610-M ■ Die head sets and gap inspection
See the table below for replacement 1 1/4 MS-MHSUT-O-2000-M gauges for Swagelok tube itting sizes:
retaining rings and pliers. 1 1/2 MS-MHSUT-O-2400-M ■ Fractional—1/4, 3/8, and 1/2 in.
2 MS-MHSUT-O-3200-M ■ Metric—6, 8, 10, and 12 mm
MHSU Unit Ordering Number
Dimensions, mm
Retaining Ring Technical Data
25 MS-MHSUT-O-25M0-M
Up to 1 in./ ■ Dimensions—AHSU case
MS-MHSU-N5000-200-H 28 MS-MHSUT-O-28M0-M
25 mm sizes
30 MS-MHSUT-O-30M0-M 19 in. (48.3 cm) high, 15.5 in. (39.4 cm)
1 in./25 mm
and over sizes
MS-MHSU-N5000-315-H wide, 7.5 in. (19.0 cm) deep
Retaining Ring Pliers ■ Weight
Up to 1 in./ 50 MS-MHSUT-O-50M0-M AHSU in case with tooling kit—28 lb
MS-MHSU-0504
25 mm sizes (12.7 kg)
1 in./25 mm ■ Power requirements
MS-MHSU-0700
and over sizes
20 to 70 psig (1.4 to 4.8 bar)
See the Swagelok Multihead Hydraulic
regulated shop air, depending on
Swaging Unit (MHSU) Setup and
itting size and material
Operating Instructions, MS-12-37, for
information about using the MHSU. ■ Construction
High-strength stainless steel
tooling for durability and corrosion
resistance
■ Air inlet port
1/4 in. Swagelok tube itting
58 Tube Fittings

FITTINGS
Hydraulic Swaging Units Preswaging Tools

TUBE
AHSU Ordering Information For Swagelok tube itting

installations in close quarters,
Select an ordering number.
the Swagelok preswaging tool is
a convenient accessory.
Ordering Numbers
AHSU Unit Features
AHSU only MS-AHSU-E ■ Preswages ferrules onto the tube
AHSU Unit with Tooling Kit ■ Enables the installer to work in a more open, safe area
1/4, 3/8, 1/2 in.
MS-AHSU-E-FKIT ■ Makes it possible to complete the installation by following
sizes
6, 8, 10, 12 mm
retightening instructions for Swagelok tube ittings.
MS-AHSU-E-MKIT
sizes
Tooling Kits OD Number OD Number
Tube Ordering
OD Number Female Nut Female Nut
Dimensions, in. 1/16 MS-ST-100 3 MS-ST-3M0
1/4 MS-AHSUT-400-1 1/8 MS-ST-200 4 MS-ST-4M0
Dimensions, mm 5/16 MS-ST-500 10 MS-ST-10M0
6 MS-AHSUT-6M0-1 3/8 MS-ST-600 12 MS-ST-12M0
8 MS-AHSUT-8M0-1 1/2 MS-ST-810 14 MS-ST-14M0
10 MS-AHSUT-10M0-1 5/8➀ MS-ST-1010 15 MS-ST-15M0
12 MS-AHSUT-12M0-1 5/8 (alloy 2507) MS-ST-2507-1010 16 MS-ST-16M0

3/4➀ MS-ST-1210 18 MS-ST-18M0
Operating Instructions 3/4 (alloy 2507) MS-ST-2507-1210 20 MS-ST-20M0
AHSU ordering numbers include 7/8 MS-ST-1410 22 MS-ST-22M0
English-language instructions. For 1 MS-ST-1610 25 MS-ST-25M0
other languages, visit swagelok.com.
Male Nut
Accessories 1/16 MS-ST-1F0
Additional and replacement gap 1/4 (medium-

MS-ST-4FK0
pressure)
inspection gauges are available. See
3/8 (medium-
page 60. pressure)
MS-ST-6FK0
See the Swagelok Air-Actuated 1/2➁ MS-ST-8F0

Hydraulic Swaging Unit (AHSU) Setup 1/2 (medium-
MS-ST-8FK0
and Operating Instructions, MS-12-38, pressure)
for information about using the AHSU. ➀ For alloy 2507 tubing, use the preswaging tool
for the appropriate tube OD and with 2507 in
the ordering number.
High-Volume Swaging Unit (HVSU) ➁ For medium-pressure tubing, use the
The Swagelok preswaging tool for the appropriate tube OD
and with FK0 in the ordering number.
high-volume
swaging unit
(HVSU) is
designed to
easily preswage a
Swagelok nut and
ferrules onto stainless
steel tubing. The pneumatically
driven and electronically controlled
semiautomatic unit uses sensors
to start and stop the process for
consistent preswaging results.
For more information, see the Swagelok
High-Volume Swaging Unit catalog,
MS-02-441.
FITTINGS
Wrenches
TUBE
Tee Wrench Ratchet Wrench
The tee wrench provides positive backup support when The ratchet wrench is designed for use on Swagelok nuts for
installing Swagelok union tees and crosses. itting installation.
Features Features
■ Allows user to hold itting body irmly and precisely ■ 11 fractional and metric sizes are available.
■ Is available in a variety of sizes ■ 1/12 turn ratchet facilitates use in close quarters.
■ Fits and carries easily in tool box, pouch, or belt ■ Heavy-duty construction includes:
■ Head and handle constructed of stainless steel ■ heat-treated, black oxide-plated steel handle
■ Features a cushioned vinyl grip and generous gripping area ■ black-oxide plated steel jaws
for handle ■ stainless steel spring and fasteners.
■ Holds tee in various orientations
Ordering Information Ordering Information
For Swagelok Gaugeable Union Tees and Crosses Tube Ordering Wrench
OD Number Length
Tube OD Ordering Number Tee Cross
1/4 in. and 6 mm MS-TW-4 ✓ ✓ Dimensions, in.
1/8 MS-RW-200
5/16 and 3/8 in. and 8 mm MS-TW-6 ✓ ✓ 5.38
3/16 MS-RW-300
10 mm MS-TW-10M ✓ ➀
1/4 MS-RW-400
1/2 in. and 12 mm MS-TW-8 ✓ ✓
5/16 MS-RW-500 7.25
➀ Use MS-TW-8 on 10 mm Swagelok crosses.
3/8 MS-RW-600
1/2 MS-RW-810 10.1
Dimensions, mm
3 MS-RW-3M0 136
6 MS-RW-6M0
8 MS-RW-8M0 184
10 MS-RW-10M0
12 MS-RW-12M0 257
Ratchet Wrench Pouch

A heavy-duty pouch is available for
holding up to six Swagelok ratchet
wrenches.
Ordering Number: MS-RWP
60 Tube Fittings

FITTINGS
Gap Inspection Gauges

TUBE
Swagelok gap inspection gauges assure the installer or

inspector that the itting has been suficiently pulled up
on initial installation, whether using a Swagelok multihead
hydraulic swaging unit (MHSU), page 56, or air-actuated
hydraulic swaging unit (AHSU), page 57, or wrench
tightening. All metal Swagelok tube ittings are gaugeable,
with the exception of a few forged bodies in aluminum.
For Installation Using the AHSU For Installation Using a Wrench
Fitting Size Fitting Size Ordering

in. mm Ordering Number in. mm Number
Female Nut Female Nut
1/4, 3/8, 1/2 — MS-AHSU-IG-468 1/16 — MS-IG-100
— 6, 8, 10, 12 MS-AHSU-IG-612M 1/8 2, 3 MS-IG-200
3/16 4 MS-IG-300
For Installation Using the MHSU 1/4 6 MS-IG-400
1/4, 3/8, 1/2 6, 12 MS-IG-468
Fitting Size
1/4, 1/2 6, 8, 10, 12 MS-IG-612M
in. mm Ordering Number
5/16 8 MS-IG-500
Female Nut
1/2➀ 12 MS-MHSU-IG-810 3/8 — MS-IG-600
5/8➁ 14, 15, 16 MS-MHSU-IG-1010 — 10 MS-IG-10M0
5/8 (alloy 2507) — MS-MHSU-IG-2507-1010 1/2 12 MS-IG-810
3/4➁ 18 MS-MHSU-IG-1210 5/8 14, 15, 16 MS-IG-1010
3/4 (alloy 2507) — MS-MHSU-IG-2507-1210 5/8 (alloy 2507) — MS-IG-2507-1010
7/8 20, 22 MS-MHSU-IG-1410 3/4 18 MS-IG-1210
1 25 MS-MHSU-IG-1610-1 3/4 (alloy 2507) — MS-IG-2507-1210
28 MS-MHSU-IG-28M0-1 7/8 20, 22 MS-IG-1410
—
30 MS-MHSU-IG-30M0-1
1 25 MS-IG-1610
1 1/4 — MS-MHSU-IG-2000-2
Male Nut
— 32 MS-MHSU-IG-32M0-1
1/16 — MS-IG-1F0
1/8 2, 3 MS-IG-2F0
1 1/2 — MS-MHSU-IG-2400-1
1/4, 3/8, 1/2
(medium- — MS-IG-FK0
2 — MS-MHSU-IG-3200-1 pressure)
➀ The MHSU cannot be used for alloy 2507 tubing 1/2 in. and under
or for medium-pressure tubing.
➁ For 5/8 and 3/4 in. alloy 2507 tubing, order the 1 in. (25 mm) and
over unit and alloy 2507 tooling and gauge.
Depth Marking Tools

Swagelok depth
marking tools help OD Number OD Number
ensure that tubing Dimensions, in. Dimensions, mm
is bottomed on the
1/4 MS-DMT-400 6 MS-DMT-6M0
shoulder inside
3/8 MS-DMT-600 8 MS-DMT-8M0
the Swagelok tube
1/2 MS-DMT-810 10 MS-DMT-10M0
itting body.
5/8 MS-DMT-1010 12 MS-DMT-12M0
3/4 MS-DMT-1210 16 MS-DMT-16M0
7/8 MS-DMT-1410 18 MS-DMT-18M0
1 MS-DMT-1610
FITTINGS
TUBE
Bulkhead Retainers "U" drive
screw
(included) “U” drive screw
By using the bulkhead retainer,
one person can tighten the jam F E Bulkhead retainer
nut on side A for initial bulkhead
Bulkhead fitting installation
itting installation. Now tubing utilizing bulkhead retainer
can be connected to side A and B A
by one person with one wrench,
Side A Side B
because the bulkhead retainer Jam Body
D nut hex
acts as a backup wrench.
B 1/8 in.
Dimensions, in. “U”

Fitting Drill Drive
Size Ordering Hole Screw Drill
in. mm Number A B D E F Dia Size Number
1/16 — SS-102-61F 3/8 5/16 5/16 5/32
1/8 — SS-202-61F 1/2 1/2 13/32 7/32
3/16 3, 4 SS-302-61F 9/16 9/16 15/32 1/4
1/4 6 SS-402-61F 5/8 5/8 1/2 9/32 5/32 0.120 6-3/8 31
5/16 — SS-502-61F 11/16 11/16 9/16 5/16
— 8 SS-8M2-61F 11/16 18 mm 9/16 5/16
3/8 — SS-602-61F 3/4 3/4 5/8 11/32
— 10 SS-10M2-61F 15/16 22 mm 3/4 13/32
1/2 12 SS-812-61F 15/16 15/16 3/4 13/32
5/8 15, 16 SS-1012-61F 1 1 1/16 13/16 13/32
7/32 0.144 10-1/2 27
3/4 18 SS-1212-61F 1 1/16 1 3/16 29/32 15/32
7/8 — SS-1412-61F 1 1/8 1 5/16 1 1/32 17/32
1 — SS-1612-61F 1 9/32 1 5/8 1 5/32 9/16
Inserts for Soft Plastic Tubing Basic

Tube Tube Bore Ordering
ID of OD ID ID Number
bore
Dimensions, in.
Tube Tube 3/16 1/8 0.09 -305-2
ID OD
1/8 0.09 -405-2
1/4 0.17 0.11 -405-170
Swagelok inserts help secure soft plastic tubing being used 3/16 0.14 -405-3
with standard Swagelok tube ittings. To determine the 1/8 0.09 -505-2
correct size of the Swagelok insert to be used, check both 5/16 3/16 0.12 -505-3
outside diameter and inside diameter of the plastic tubing. 1/4 0.19 -505-4
For a complete line of hose connectors for soft plastic 3/16 0.12 -605-3
3/8
tubing, see the Swagelok Hose and Flexible Tubing catalog 1/4 0.19 -605-4
(MS-01-180). 1/4 0.19 -815-4
1/2
3/8 0.31 -815-6
Ordering Information 3/8 0.31 -1015-6
Material Designator 5/8
Add the insert material 1/2 0.44 -1015-8
Alloy 400 M
designator to the basic 1/2 0.44 -1215-8
Aluminum A 3/4
ordering number. 5/8 0.56 -1215-10
Brass B
Example: B-305-2 1 3/4 0.69 -1615-12
Carbon steel S
Dimensions, mm
Nylon NY
6 4 2.8 -6M5-4M
Stainless steel SS
8 6 4.4 -8M5-6M
10 8 6.4 -10M5-8M
8 6.4 -12M5-8M
12
10 8.3 -12M5-10M
62 Tube Fittings
Gaugeability
On initial installation, the Swagelok gap inspection gauge
FITTINGS
TUBE
assures the installer or inspector that a itting has been

suficiently tightened.
Position the Swagelok gap inspection gauge next to the gap between the nut and body.
If the gauge will not enter the gap, the If the gauge will enter the gap,
itting is suficiently tightened. additional tightening is required.
• Always depressurize a system before adjusting the

tightness of a tube itting connection.
Installation Instructions
Swagelok tube ittings 1 in./25 mm and smaller can be installed quickly, easily, and reliably with simple hand tools.
Over 1 in./25 mm sizes require use of a hydraulic swaging unit to swage the ferrules onto the tubing.
Safety Precautions Tubing Considerations

■ Do not bleed system by loosening itting nut or itting plug. ■ Metal tubing material should be softer than itting material.
■ Do not assemble or tighten ittings when system is For example, stainless steel tubing should not be used with
pressurized. brass ittings.
■ Make sure that the tubing rests irmly on the shoulder of the ■ When tubing and ittings are made of the same material,
tube itting body before tightening the nut. tubing must be fully annealed.
■ Use the correct Swagelok gap inspection gauge to ensure ■ Always use an insert with extremely soft or pliable plastic
suficient pull-up upon initial installation. tubing.
■ Always use proper thread sealants on tapered pipe ■ Extremes of wall thickness should always be checked
threads. against the suggested minimum and maximum wall
thickness limitations.
■ Do not mix materials or itting components from various
manufacturers—tubing, ferrules, nuts, and itting bodies. ■ Surface inish is very important to proper sealing. Tubing
with any kind of depression, scratch, raised portion, or
■ Never turn itting body. Instead, hold itting body and turn
other surface defect will be dificult to seal, particularly in
nut.
gas service.
■ Avoid unnecessary disassembly of unused ittings.
■ Tubing that is oval and will not easily it through itting nuts,
■ Use only long reducers in female Swagelok end ferrules, and bodies should never be forced into the itting.
connections.
See Swagelok Tubing Data (MS-01-107) for more information
See the instructions starting on the next page for installation about tubing selection.
of Swagelok tube ittings, O-seal male connectors, caps and
plugs, port connectors, tube adapters, positionable elbows and
tees, weld ittings, depth marking tool, and preswaging tool.
FITTINGS
TUBE
Swagelok Tube Fittings Up to 1 in./25 mm
These instructions apply both to traditional ittings and to ittings with the advanced back-ferrule geometry.
Fully insert the tube into the itting and Mark the nut at the 6 o’clock position. While holding the itting body steady,
against the shoulder; rotate the nut tighten the nut one and one-quarter
inger-tight. turns to the 9 o’clock position.
High-pressure applications and high For 1/16, 1/8, and 3/16 in.; 2, 3, and
safety-factor systems: Further tighten 4 mm tube ittings, tighten the nut only
the nut until the tube will not turn by three-quarters turn to the 3 o’clock
hand or move axially in the itting. position.
Swagelok Tube Fittings Over 1 in./25 mm

1. Preswage the ferrules onto the 3. Insert the tube with preswaged 5. While holding the itting body
tube using a Swagelok multihead ferrules into the itting until the steady, tighten the nut one-half
hydraulic swaging unit (MHSU). front ferrule seats against the itting turn to the 12 o’clock position.
2. Apply the lubricant packaged body; rotate the nut inger-tight.
Use the Swagelok MHSU gap
with the itting lightly to the body 4. Mark the nut at the 6 o’clock inspection gauge to ensure that the
threads and the rear surface of the position. itting has been tightened suficiently.
back ferrule.
Reassembly—All Sizes
You may disassemble and reassemble Swagelok tube ittings many times.
Always depressurize the system before disassembling a Swagelok tube itting.
Prior to disassembly, mark the tube at Insert the tube with preswaged ferrules While holding the itting body steady,
the back of the nut; mark a line along into the itting until the front ferrule rotate the nut with a wrench to the
the nut and itting body lats. seats against the itting body. previously pulled-up position, as
Use these marks to ensure that you Over 1 in./25 mm sizes: If needed, indicated by the marks on the tube
return the nut to the previously pulled- reapply lubricant lightly to the body and lats. At this point, you will feel
up position. threads and the rear surface of the a signiicant increase in resistance.
back ferrule. Tighten the nut slightly.
• Do not use the Swagelok gap inspection gauge with reassembled ittings.
O-Seal Male Connectors

1. Turn the O-seal connector into the female end until it is inger-tight.
2. Tighten the O-seal connector until it makes metal-to-metal contact with the
face of the female end.
3. Tighten slightly with a wrench.
64 Tube Fittings
FITTINGS
TUBE
Caps and Plugs

Caps Plugs
See Swagelok tube While holding itting body steady, tighten the plug one-quarter turn from
itting installation and the inger-tight position.
reassembly, page 63. For 1/16, 1/8, and 3/16 in.; 2, 3, and 4 mm tube ittings, tighten the plug one-eighth turn.
For over 1 in./25 mm tube ittings, tighten the plug one-quarter turn.
• Do not use the Swagelok gap inspection gauge with plug assemblies.
Reassembly
You may disassemble and reassemble Swagelok plugs many times. Make subsequent
connections by slightly tightening with a wrench after snugging the nut by hand.
Port Connectors
Connect the machined ferrule end before connecting the tube adapter end.
Machined Ferrule End Tube Adapter End
1. Remove the nut and ferrules from the Swagelok end 5. Insert the tube adapter until it rests irmly on the shoulder
connection. Discard the ferrules. of the Swagelok tube itting body. Finger-tighten the nut.
SWAGELOK
SWAGELOK
KOLEGAWS
Discard
Over 1 in./25 mm sizes: Remove and discard the nut

SWAGELOK
and ferrules from the end connection, then insert the
tube adapter.
2. Slip the nut over 6. Mark the nut at the 6 o’clock position. While holding
the machined itting body steady, tighten the nut one and one-quarter
ferrule end of the
SWAGELOK
turns to the 9 o’clock position.

port connector.
Over 1 in./25 mm
sizes: The nut is 1 in./25 mm
preassembled on and under Over 1 in./25 mm
12
the port connector.
3. Insert the port 9
connector into the
SWAGELOK
end connection 3
and inger-tighten 6
the nut.
4. While holding
itting body steady,
tighten the nut
one-quarter turn.
For 1/16, 1/8, and
3/16 in.; 2, 3, and
For 1/16, 1/8, and 3/16 in.; 2, 3, and 4 mm tube ittings,
4 mm tube ittings,
tighten the nut three-quarters turn to the 3 o’clock
tighten the nut
position.
one-eighth turn.
For preswaged over 1 in./25 mm and over tube ittings,
• Do not use the tighten the nut one-half turn to the 12 o’clock position.
Swagelok gap
inspection gauge • Do not use the Swagelok gap inspection gauge
with machined with preswaged tube adapter connections over
ferrule ends. 1 in./25 mm.
Reassembly Reassembly
You may disassemble and reassemble Swagelok port See Swagelok tube itting reassembly, page 63.
connectors many times. Make subsequent connections by
slightly tightening with a wrench after snugging the nut by hand.
FITTINGS
TUBE
Positionable Elbows and Tees
1. Turn the positionable end into the female itting until the metal backup washer
contacts the face of the itting.
2. Turn the positionable end out of the female itting (not more than one turn) until
Lock nut Backup the Swagelok tube itting end is positioned properly.
washer 3. While holding itting body steady, tighten the lock nut until the metal backup
washer contacts the face of the itting.
Tube Adapters
Fig. 1 Up to 1 in./25 mm Over 1 in./25 mm
1. Install the end opposite the tube Swagelok tube adapters over 1 in./
adapter end (Fig. 1). 25 mm are furnished with nuts and
2. Insert the tube adapter into the preswaged ferrules.
Female pipe port
on existing equipment Swagelok tube itting. Make sure that To assemble, follow steps 2 through
Fig. 2
the tube adapter rests irmly on the 5 of the Swagelok tube ittings over
shoulder of the tube itting body and 1 in./25 mm assembly instructions,
that the nut is inger-tight (Fig. 2). page 63.
3. Mark the nut at the 6 o’clock
position.
• Do not use the Swagelok gap
inspection gauge with preswaged
4. While holding itting body steady, tube adapter connections over
tighten the nut one and one- 1 in./25 mm.
quarter turns to the 9 o’clock
position. Reassembly
For 1/16, 1/8, and 3/16 in.; 2, 3, See Swagelok tube itting reassembly,
and 4 mm tube ittings, tighten the page 63.
nut only three-quarters turn to the
3 o’clock position.
AN Thread Swivel Nut
Reassembly instructions:
12 12 There are a maximum of 10 re-assemblies per SAE J514.
1. Prior to disassembly, mark a line along the AN swivel nut
9 9 and male AN body, parallel with the axis of the assembly.
3 3 2. For reassembly, rotate the nut with a wrench to the
6 6 previously pulled-up position, as indicated by the marks
on the AN swivel nut and male AN body. At this point, you
will feel a signiicant increase in resistance. Tighten the
nut slightly.
Note: Swagelok nut and ferrules removed from Note: For carbon steel ittings, reassemble the nut to
the illustration for clarity. inger-tight, then tighten to torque per SAE J514.
1. Thread the AN swivel nut of the female AN assembly

onto the male AN body until it is inger-tight.
2. Mark a line along the AN swivel nut and male AN body,
parallel with the axis of the assembly, at the 6 o’clock
position.
3. Hold the male AN body steady and tighten the AN swivel
nut with a wrench one-quarter turn past inger tight, to
the 9 o’clock position.
Note: For carbon steel ittings, assemble nut to inger-
tight, then tighten to torque per SAE J514, Hydraulic
Tube Fittings.
66 Tube Fittings
FITTINGS
TUBE
Weld Fittings
Welding Precautions for Swagelok Tube Fittings with Weld End Connections
1. Remove the nut and ferrules. 5. Complete the weld.
2. Turn a Swagelok tube itting plug or another nut onto the 6. Remove the plug or nut and replace the nut and ferrules.
itting so that it is inger-tight. This protects the threads
and sealing components. • Caution: When welding carbon steel ittings, the heat
often removes the protective oil from the threads.
3. Provide a suitable heat sink to dissipate the heat.
It is important to apply another lubricant, such as
4. Tack weld at four positions 90° apart to hold the itting in Goop™ thread lubricant.
place and to ensure alignment and concentricity of the
components.
Depth Marking Tool

Fig. 1 Fig. 2 1. Insert cleanly cut, fully deburred of the itting body (Fig. 2). Rotate
tube into the depth marking tool the nut inger-tight. If any portion of
(DMT) until the tube is against the the mark on the tube can be seen
shoulder of the tool. Using a pen above the itting nut, the tube is not
or pencil, mark the tube at the top fully inserted into the itting.
of the DMT (Fig. 1). 3. While holding the itting body
2. Remove the tube from the DMT steady, follow Swagelok tube
and insert it into the Swagelok itting installation instructions,
itting until it is against the shoulder page 63.
Preswaging Tool
Fig. 1 1. Install the Swagelok nut and 7. Remove the tube with preswaged
ferrules onto the preswaging tool. ferrules from the preswaging tool.
2. Insert the tube into the preswaging If the tube sticks in the preswaging
tool. tool, remove the tube by gently
rocking it back and forth. Do not
3. Make sure that the tube rests irmly
turn the tube (Fig. 2).
on the shoulder of the preswaging
tool body and that the nut is inger- 8. Insert the tube with preswaged
tight. ferrules into the itting until the front
Fig. 2 ferrule seats against the itting body.
4. Mark the nut at the 6 o’clock
position. 9. While holding the itting body
steady, rotate the nut with a
5. While holding the preswaging tool
wrench to the previously pulled-up
steady, tighten the nut one and
position; at this point, you will feel
one-quarter turns to the 9 o’clock
a signiicant increase in resistance.
position.
Fig. 3 10. Tighten the nut slightly (Fig. 3).
For 1/16, 1/8, and 3/16 in.; 2, 3,
and 4 mm tube ittings, tighten the • Do not use the Swagelok gap
nut only three-quarters turn to the inspection gauge with ittings
3 o’clock position (Fig. 1). that were assembled using the
6. Loosen the nut. preswaging tool.
Tubing Tools and Tubing Products

Accessories
FITTINGS
Swagelok offers a wide variety of
TUBE
For tube benders, tube preparation tubing products.
tools, and tube support systems, Contact your authorized
see the Swagelok Tubing Tools and Swagelok representative or
Accessories catalog (MS-01-179). see these Swagelok catalogs
for more information:
■ Stainless Steel Seamless Tubing, Fractional, Metric, and
Imperial Sizes (MS-01-181)
■ Ultrahigh-Purity and High-Purity Stainless Steel Tubing,
Fractional, Metric, and Imperial Sizes (MS-01-182).
Leak Detectors, Lubricants,
and Sealants
For liquid leak detectors, lubricants,
and sealants, see the Swagelok Leak
Detectors, Lubricants, and Sealants
catalog (MS-01-91).
Caution: Do not mix or interchange parts with those of

other manufacturers. MS-01-140, RevU, November 2017
About this document
Thank you for downloading this electronic catalog, which is part of General Product
catalog Swagelok published in print. This type of electronic catalog is updated as new
information arises or revisions, which may be more current than the printed version.
Swagelok Company is a major developer and provider of luid system solutions,
including products, integration solutions and services for industry research,
instrumentation, pharmaceutical, oil and gas, power, petrochemical, alternative fuels,
and semiconductor. Our manufacturing facilities, research, service and distribution
facilities support a global network of more than 200 authorized sales and service
centers in 57 countries.
Visit www.swagelok.com to locate your Swagelok representative and obtain any
information on features, technical information and product references, or to learn about
the variety of services available only through authorized sales centers and service
Swagelok.
Safe Product Selection

Warranty Information
When selecting a product, the total system design must be Swagelok products are backed by The Swagelok Limited
considered to ensure safe, trouble-free performance. Function, Lifetime Warranty. For a copy, visit your Swagelok Web site or
material compatibility, adequate ratings, proper installation, contact your authorized Swagelok representative.
operation, and maintenance are the responsibilities of the system
designer and user.
Swagelok, Ferrule-Pak, Goop, Hinging-Colleting, IGC, Kenmac,

Micro-Fit, Nupro, Snoop, Sno-Trik, SWAK, VCO, VCR, Ultra-
Torr, Whitey—TM Swagelok Company
Aflas—TM Asahi Glass Co. Ltd.
AL-6XN—TM Allegheny Ludlum Corporation
AutoCAD—TM Autodesk, Inc.
CSA—TM Canadian Standards Association
DeviceNet—TM ODVA
Kalrez, Krytox—TM DuPont
Elgiloy—TM Elgiloy Specialty Metals
FM—TM FM Global
Grafoil—TM GrafTech International Holdings, Inc.
MAC—TM MAC Valves Inc.
Microsoft, Windows—TM Microsoft Corp.
NACE—TM NACE International
Nitronic—TM AK Steel Corporation
picofast—TM HansTurck KG
Pillar—TM Nippon Pillar Packing Company, Ltd.
Rapid Tap—TM Relton Corporation
15-7 PH, 17-7 PH—TM AK Steel Corp.
Sandvik—TM SandvikAB
Silconert—TM Silcotek Corporation
Simriz—TM Freudenberg-NOK
SolidWorks—TM SolidWorks Corporation
© 2017 Swagelok Company
Walter Schumacher Mit dem Medium in Berührung kommende Teile
Impuls-Technik GmbH Installation
Reessweg 7 Ventilkörper Material : 1.4305 ( X8CrNiS18-9)
74626 Bretzfeld-Bitzfeld Achten Sie nach dem Entfernen der Verpackung darauf,
dass keine Verschmutzung in das System gelangt. Material Innenteile : Membrane FPM
Betriebsanleitung und Installationsanleitung zu Achten Sie vor der Montage des Systems darauf, dass
Artikelnummer 255.01.00010 keine Verschmutzung in den Rohrleitungen oder im Ventil-
Gehäuse vorliegt. Betrieb
Sehr geehrter Kunde!
Es ist eine beliebige Einbaulage der Ventile zulässig, Als zulässige Medien kommen Gase und Flüssigkeiten in
Zur Sicherstellung der Funktion und zu Ihrer eigenen vorzugsweise jedoch mit stehendem Magnet. Betracht, die das System und die beinhaltenden Dicht-
Sicherheit lesen Sie bitte aufmerksam die beiliegende Werkstoffe nicht angreifen.
Bedienungsanleitung, bevor Sie mit der Installation
Anzugsdrehmoment der Magnet-Befestigungsmutter: Um die störungsfreie Funktion und Dichtheit der Ventile zu
beginnen. Sollten trotzdem noch Fragen auftreten, so
1,2 Nm gewährleisten, dürfen sich keine Feststoffanteile im
wenden Sie sich bitte an die Walter Schumacher Impuls-
Technik GmbH. Medium befinden.
Tel. ++49 (0) 7946 91 30-0 Vermeiden Sie, das Gerät von außen mit flüssigen oder
Fax. ++49 (0) 7946 91 30 10 Elektrischer Anschluss: korrodierenden Medien in Berührung zu bringen.
e-mail info@sit-ventile.de
Der auf dem Typenschild aufgedruckte Betriebsdruck des
Steckfahnen für Gerätesteckdose
Betriebsanleitung Gerätes darf auf keinen Fall überschritten werden. Der
n. EN 175301-803 Typ A (entspr. DIN 45 650)
pneumatische Steuerdruck sollte 4 bar nicht unterschreiten
Allgemeine Bedingungen und 8 bar nicht überschreiten.
Achten Sie beim Verschrauben der Anschlußlitzen darauf,
Bei Nichtbeachtung dieser Hinweise, sowie bei nicht dass die Aderenden vollständig in der Verbindungsklemme
sachgemäßen Eingriffen in das Gerät, entfällt jegliche sitzen. Führen Sie alle 6 Monate eine Funktions- und
Haftung unserer Person. Ferner erlischt die Garantie auf Dichtheitsprüfung durch.
das Gerät und die Zubehörteile. Verhindern Sie ein scharfes Abknicken der Anschluss-
Leitungen und Litzen, um Kurzschlüsse und Belasten Sie das Gerät nicht durch Biegung oder Torsion.
Beachten Sie die Hinweise dieser Betriebsanleitung, sowie Unterbrechungen zu vermeiden.
die Einsatzbedingungen und zulässigen Daten, die aus den Verhindern Sie ein scharfes Abknicken der
Aufdrucken / Typenschildern der jeweiligen Geräte Vor Inbetriebnahme des Gerätes ist sicherzustellen, dass Anschlussleitungen und Litzen, um Kurzschlüsse und
hervorgehen. die gesamte Maschine bzw. die Anlage den Bestimmungen Unterbrechungen zu vermeiden.
der EDV-Richtlinien entspricht.
Störungen
Richten Sie sich bei der Auswahl und dem Betrieb eines Wenn durch den Einbau Potentialunterschiede auftreten
Gerätes nach den allgemeinen Regeln der Technik. sollten, muss eine leitfähige Verbindung zum Potential- Überprüfen Sie bei Störungen die Leitungsanschlüsse, die
Ausgleich geschaffen werden. Betriebsspannung, den Betriebsdruck sowie den pneum.
Treffen Sie geeignete Maßnahmen, um unbeabsichtigtes Steuerdruck.
Aktivieren oder unzulässige Beeinträchtigungen Einzelteile bestellen Sie bitte komplett unter Angabe der
auszuschließen. Artikelnummer gemäß der Anlage Detailzeichnung. Sollte die Störung dadurch nicht behoben sein, dann stellen
Sie sicher, dass am Gerät kein Druck ansteht, und trennen
Beachten Sie, dass in unter Druck stehenden Systemen Die Installation darf nur durch Fachpersonal unter Sie das Gerät von der Versorgungsspannung und dem
und Leitungen, Ventilen nicht gelöst werden dürfen. Berücksichtigung einschlägiger Vorschriften erfolgen. Steuerdruck. Wenden Sie sich mit dem defekten Gerät an
autorisiertes und geschultes Fachpersonal.
1
1 4
4
1
1
4
1
1 1
4
1
1
1
1
4 4
4
14
1
11
1 1 1 14
1
1
1
11
1
1
4 1
1 1 1
11 1 1
P
1
Walter Schumacher Impuls-Technik GmbH

41
1
1
1 1
11 4
14
14
1 4
4
4
1
11
1 1
41 1
1
1
4
1
1 4
114
Walter Schumacher Impuls-Technik GmbH 14 1
4
1 1
1 1
1
1
1 1
4
1 1 1 1
Walter Schumacher Installation Betrieb
Impuls-Technik GmbH
Reessweg 7 Achten Sie nach dem Entfernen der Verpackung darauf, Als zulässige Medien kommen Gase und Flüssigkeiten in
74626 Bretzfeld-Bitzfeld dass keine Verschmutzung in das System gelangt. Betracht, die das System und die beinhaltenden Dicht-
Werkstoffe nicht angreifen.
Achten Sie vor der Montage des Systems darauf, dass
Betriebsanleitung und Installationsanleitung zu keine Verschmutzung in den Rohrleitungen oder im Ventil- Um die störungsfreie Funktion und Dichtheit der Ventile zu
Artikelnummer 369.01.00014 Gehäuse vorliegt. gewährleisten, dürfen sich keine Feststoffanteile im
Medium befinden.
Es ist eine beliebige Einbaulage der Ventile zulässig,
vorzugsweise jedoch mit stehendem Magnet.
Zur Sicherstellung der Funktion und zu Ihrer eigenen
Verhindern Sie ein scharfes Abknicken der Anschluss- Vermeiden Sie, das Gerät von außen mit flüssigen oder
Sicherheit lesen Sie bitte aufmerksam die beiliegende
Leitungen um Unterbrechungen zu vermeiden. korrodierenden Medien in Berührung zu bringen.
beginnen. Sollten trotzdem noch Fragen auftreten, so Der auf dem Typenschild aufgedruckte Betriebsdruck des
Vor Inbetriebnahme des Gerätes ist sicherzustellen, dass
wenden Sie sich bitte an die Walter Schumacher Impuls- Gerätes darf auf keinen Fall überschritten werden. Der
die gesamte Maschine bzw. die Anlage den Bestimmungen
Technik GmbH. pneumatische Steuerdruck sollte 4 bar nicht unterschreiten
und 8 bar nicht überschreiten.
Tel. ++49 (0) 7946 91 30-0
Einzelteile bestellen Sie bitte komplett unter Angabe der
Fax. ++49 (0) 7946 91 30 10
Artikelnummer gemäß der Anlage Detailzeichnung.
Führen Sie alle 6 Monate eine Funktions- und
Die Installation darf nur durch Fachpersonal unter Dichtheitsprüfung durch.
Betriebsanleitung
Berücksichtigung einschlägiger Vorschriften erfolgen.
Belasten Sie das Gerät nicht durch Biegung oder Torsion.
Allgemeine Bedingungen
Mit dem Medium in Berührung kommende Teile
Verhindern Sie ein scharfes Abknicken der Anschluss-
Bei Nichtbeachtung dieser Hinweise, sowie bei nicht leitungen um Unterbrechungen zu vermeiden.
Ventilkörper Material : 1.4305 (X 8 CrNiS 18-9)
sachgemäßen Eingriffen in das Gerät, entfällt jegliche
Haftung unserer Person. Ferner erlischt die Garantie auf Störungen
Material Innenteile : 1.4305 ( X 8 CrNiS 18-9)
das Gerät und die Zubehörteile.
Material der Dichtungen : O-Ringe FPM Überprüfen Sie bei Störungen die Leitungsanschlüsse, den
Beachten Sie die Hinweise dieser Betriebsanleitung, sowie
Ventilsitz PP (Polypropen) Betriebsdruck sowie den pneumatischen Steuerdruck.
die Einsatzbedingungen und zulässigen Daten, die aus den
Aufdrucken / Typenschildern der jeweiligen Geräte
Sollte die Störung dadurch nicht behoben sein, dann stellen
hervorgehen.
Sie sicher, dass am Gerät kein Druck des Mediums
ansteht, und trennen Sie das Gerät vom Steuerdruck.
Richten Sie sich bei der Auswahl und dem Betrieb eines Wenden Sie sich mit dem defekten Gerät an autorisiertes
Gerätes nach den allgemeinen Regeln der Technik. und geschultes Fachpersonal.
Treffen Sie geeignete Maßnahmen, um unbeabsichtigtes

Aktivieren oder unzulässige Beeinträchtigungen
auszuschließen.
Beachten Sie, dass in unter Druck stehenden Systemen

und Leitungen, Ventilen nicht gelöst werden dürfen.
1 4
1
1 4
4
1 4
4 1 4
4
4
1 4
1
14 1 4
4
11
Walter Schumacher Impuls-Technik GmbH 14
1 1
1 1
4
1 1 14 1 1
1 4
1
1
1
1
1
1
11
4
14
4
14
1
1
11
41
1 1
4
4
1
4
14
1
4
1
Walter Schumacher Installation Betrieb
Impuls-Technik GmbH
Reessweg 7 Achten Sie nach dem Entfernen der Verpackung darauf, Als zulässige Medien kommen Gase und Flüssigkeiten in
74626 Bretzfeld-Bitzfeld dass keine Verschmutzung in das System gelangt. Betracht, die das System und die beinhaltenden Dicht-
Werkstoffe nicht angreifen.
Achten Sie vor der Montage des Systems darauf, dass
Betriebsanleitung und Installationsanleitung zu keine Verschmutzung in den Rohrleitungen oder im Ventil- Um die störungsfreie Funktion und Dichtheit der Ventile zu
Artikelnummer 369.01.00015 Gehäuse vorliegt. gewährleisten, dürfen sich keine Feststoffanteile im
Medium befinden.
Es ist eine beliebige Einbaulage der Ventile zulässig,
vorzugsweise jedoch mit stehendem Magnet.
Zur Sicherstellung der Funktion und zu Ihrer eigenen
Verhindern Sie ein scharfes Abknicken der Anschluss- Vermeiden Sie, das Gerät von außen mit flüssigen oder
Sicherheit lesen Sie bitte aufmerksam die beiliegende
Leitungen um Unterbrechungen zu vermeiden. korrodierenden Medien in Berührung zu bringen.
beginnen. Sollten trotzdem noch Fragen auftreten, so Der auf dem Typenschild aufgedruckte Betriebsdruck des
Vor Inbetriebnahme des Gerätes ist sicherzustellen, dass
wenden Sie sich bitte an die Walter Schumacher Impuls- Gerätes darf auf keinen Fall überschritten werden. Der
die gesamte Maschine bzw. die Anlage den Bestimmungen
Technik GmbH. pneumatische Steuerdruck sollte 4 bar nicht unterschreiten
und 8 bar nicht überschreiten.
Tel. ++49 (0) 7946 91 30-0
Einzelteile bestellen Sie bitte komplett unter Angabe der
Fax. ++49 (0) 7946 91 30 10
Artikelnummer gemäß der Anlage Detailzeichnung.
Führen Sie alle 6 Monate eine Funktions- und
Die Installation darf nur durch Fachpersonal unter Dichtheitsprüfung durch.
Betriebsanleitung
Berücksichtigung einschlägiger Vorschriften erfolgen.
Belasten Sie das Gerät nicht durch Biegung oder Torsion.
Allgemeine Bedingungen
Mit dem Medium in Berührung kommende Teile
Verhindern Sie ein scharfes Abknicken der Anschluss-
Bei Nichtbeachtung dieser Hinweise, sowie bei nicht leitungen um Unterbrechungen zu vermeiden.
Ventilkörper Material : 1.4305 (X 8 CrNiS 18-9)
sachgemäßen Eingriffen in das Gerät, entfällt jegliche
Haftung unserer Person. Ferner erlischt die Garantie auf Störungen
Material Innenteile : 1.4305 ( X 8 CrNiS 18-9)
das Gerät und die Zubehörteile.
Material der Dichtungen : O-Ringe FPM Überprüfen Sie bei Störungen die Leitungsanschlüsse, den
Beachten Sie die Hinweise dieser Betriebsanleitung, sowie
Ventilsitz PP (Polypropen) Betriebsdruck sowie den pneumatischen Steuerdruck.
die Einsatzbedingungen und zulässigen Daten, die aus den
Aufdrucken / Typenschildern der jeweiligen Geräte
Sollte die Störung dadurch nicht behoben sein, dann stellen
hervorgehen.
Sie sicher, dass am Gerät kein Druck des Mediums
ansteht, und trennen Sie das Gerät vom Steuerdruck.
Richten Sie sich bei der Auswahl und dem Betrieb eines Wenden Sie sich mit dem defekten Gerät an autorisiertes
Gerätes nach den allgemeinen Regeln der Technik. und geschultes Fachpersonal.
Treffen Sie geeignete Maßnahmen, um unbeabsichtigtes

Aktivieren oder unzulässige Beeinträchtigungen
auszuschließen.
Beachten Sie, dass in unter Druck stehenden Systemen

und Leitungen, Ventilen nicht gelöst werden dürfen.
1 4
1
1 4
4
1 4
4 4
1 4
1
4
14
1
1
1 4
4
14 1
4
11
Walter Schumacher Impuls-Technik GmbH 14
11 1
1 1 1
1 4
1 1 1 1 1
1 4
1
1 4
1 1
1
1
1
1
1
1 4
11
14
1
1
4
1
1
11
41
4
4
1
4
1
4
1
Polypropylene - hoses
Technical datasheet
The hoses consist of specific high-heat resistant Polypropylene copolymer. They are
tough elastic (elastic modulus at 20°C about 800 N/mm²). Continuous thermal
operationally up to 70°C. Short peak temperatures up to 110°C are unproblematic.
The hoses don’t show any changes of their mechanical properties when storing in
wet environments or water. Good chemical resistance.
Fluidfix Polypropylen is a polymer of ethylene with an isotactic arrangement of methyl
groups. It belongs to the group of fluoroplastics.
Fluidfix polypropylene-hoses can be sterilized (at +121°C) and have good
mechanical and chemical properties.
Physical properties
General properties
Density 0,904 – 0,907 g/cm³
Upper working temperature without load 90-100°C
Flammability flammable
Absorption of water < 0,05 %
Color milky
Radiation resistance 0,020 Mgy
Food-safe yes
Mechanical properties
Tensile strength 23°C 25-40 N/mm²
Tensile strength 70°C 18-28 N/mm²
Yield strength at 23°C 25-40 N/mm²
Ultimate elongation at 23°C 400-800%
Elastic modulus at 23°C 1100-2100 N/mm²
Maximum bending stress at 23°C 45-60 N/mm²
Bending elastic modulus 800-1500 N/mm²
Ball impression hardness 132/60 58-80 N/mm²
Shore hardness (DIN 53 505) 70-75° Shore D
Friction coefficient, dyn. against steel, dry 0,3-0,5
Thermal properties
Melting temperature 158-167°C
Dimensional stability in heat A (18,5) Kp/cm³ 55-60°C
Lin. thermal expansion coefficient 15-18 1K x 10-5
Thermal conductivity at 23°C 0,22 W/K x m
Specific heat at 23°C 1,68 Kj/Kg x K
Oxygen index < 30%
Page 1 of 2
Electrical properties
Dielectric constant at 10³ 2,26-2,4
Dielectric constant at 106 2,25
Specific on-resistance > 1016 O x cm
Surface resistivity > 1013 O
Arc resistance KA3c
Dielectric strength 60-90 KV/mm
Gas permeability
Nitrogen permeability 4,3 cm3/m² d/bar
Oxygen permeability 19 cm3/m² d/bar
Carbon dioxide permeability 61 cm3/m² d/bar
Steam permeability 2,1 cm3/m² d/bar
Page 2 of 2
Installation and Operating instructions for
“Economy” Panel PC CP72xx
Version: 2.0
Date: 2016-11-09
Table of contents
Table of contents
1. Foreword 3
Notes on the Documentation 3
Liability Conditions 3
Trademarks 3
Patent Pending 3
Copyright 3
State at Delivery 3
Delivery conditions 3
Description of safety symbols 4
Basic safety measures 5
Operator’s obligation to exercise diligence 6
Operator requirements 6
2. Product Description 7
Appropriate Use 7
Structure 7
Access to memory and battery 8
Interfaces 10
Power supply 10
Network connection 10
Additional plug-in cards (optional) 10
3. Installation Instructions 11
Transport and Unpacking 11
Transport 11
Unpacking 11
Installation of the Panel PC 12
Mounting arm installation 12
Earthing measures 13
Power Supply Connection 14
Beckhoff power supply technology 14
Pin assignment of the power supply connector 15
Pre-assembled cable sets for the power supply 16
Fitting the power supply cable with IP65 connector 16
Connecting Power Supply 17
Cable Cross Sections 17
Configuration for shutting down the PC 17
PC_ON and Power Status functions 17
Wiring diagram CP72xx 18
Wiring diagram CP72x4 with 24-inch display (discontinued) 19
Connecting the Network 20
Pre-assembled network cables 20
Fitting the network cable with IP65 connector 20
USB-interface (optional) 21
Pre-assembled USB-cables 21
Fitting the USB-cable with IP65 connector 21
RS232-interface (optional) 22
Pre-assembled serial interface cables 22
Fitting the RS232-interface cable with IP65 connector 22
Connecting devices 23
Connecting cables 23
Check voltage rating and connect 23
4. Operating Instructions 24
Switching the Industrial PC on and off 24
First switching on and driver installation 24
Keyboard codes 25
Maintenance 27
Cleaning the Industrial PC 27
Servicing 27
Replacing the battery on the motherboard 27
CP72xx 1
Table of contents
Emergency procedures 27
Shutting down 27
Disposal 27
5. UPS Software Components (optional) 28
Installation on the PC 28
Help files 28
6. Troubleshooting 29
Fault correction 29
Beckhoff Support & Service 30
Beckhoff branches and partner companies 30
Beckhoff Headquarters 30
Beckhoff Support 30
Beckhoff Service 30
7. Appendix 31
Assembly dimensions 31
Dimensions and total weight 35
8. Appendix 36
Technical data 36
Approvals 36
FCC: Federal Communications Commission Radio Frequency Interference
Statement 36
FCC: Canadian Notice 36
2 CP72xx
Foreword
Foreword
Notes on the Documentation
This description is only intended for the use of trained specialists in control
and automation engineering who are familiar with the applicable national
standards. It is essential that the following notes and explanations are
followed when installing and commissioning these components.
The responsible staff must ensure that the application or use of the
products described satisfy all the requirements for safety, including all the
relevant laws, regulations, guidelines and standards.
Liability Conditions
The documentation has been prepared with care. The products described
are, however, constantly under development. For that reason the
documentation is not in every case checked for consistency with
performance data, standards or other characteristics. In the event that it
contains technical or editorial errors, we retain the right to make alterations
at any time and without warning. No claims for the modification of products
that have already been supplied may be made on the basis of the data,
diagrams and descriptions in this documentation.
All pictures shown in the documentation are exemplary. Illustrated
configurations can differ from standard.
Trademarks
Beckhoff®, TwinCAT®, EtherCAT®, Safety over EtherCAT®, TwinSAFE®
and XFC® are registered trademarks of and licensed by Beckhoff
Automation GmbH.
Other designations used in this publication may be trademarks whose use
by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the
owners.
Patent Pending
The EtherCAT Technology is covered, including but not limited to the
following patent applications and patents: EP1590927, EP1789857,
DE102004044764, DE102007017835 with corresponding applications or
registrations in various other countries.
The TwinCAT Technology is covered, including but not limited to the
following patent applications and patents: EP0851348, US6167425 with
corresponding applications or registrations in various other countries.
Copyright
© Beckhoff Automation GmbH & Co. KG.
The reproduction, distribution and utilization of this document as well as the
communication of its contents to others without express authorization are
prohibited. Offenders will be held liable for the payment of damages. All
rights reserved in the event of the grant of a patent, utility model or design.
State at Delivery
All the components are supplied in particular hardware and software
configurations appropriate for the application. Modifications to hardware or
software configurations other than those described in the documentation
are not permitted, and nullify the liability of Beckhoff Automation GmbH &
Co. KG.
Delivery conditions
In addition, the general delivery conditions of the company Beckhoff
Automation GmbH & Co. KG apply.
CP72xx 3
Foreword
Description of safety symbols

The following safety symbols are used in this operating manual. They are
intended to alert the reader to the associated safety instructions.
Acute risk of injury!
If you do not adhere the safety advise adjoining this symbol, there is
DANGER immediate danger to life and health of individuals!
Risk of injury!
WARNING danger to life and health of individuals!
Hazard to individuals!
CAUTION obvious hazard to individuals!
Hazard to devices and environment
If you do not adhere the notice adjoining this symbol, there is obvious
Attention hazard to materials and environment.
Note or pointer
This symbol indicates information that contributes to better understanding.

Note
4 CP72xx
Foreword
Basic safety measures

Only switch the PC off after Before the Industrial PC is switched off, software that is running must
closing the software be properly closed.
Otherwise it is possible that data on the storage medium is lost. Please
read the section Switching the Industrial PC on and off.
Switch off all parts of the equipment, then uncouple the fieldbus
Before opening the housing of the PC, and whenever the PC is being
Attention used for purposes other than plant control, such as during functional tests
following repair, all parts of the equipment must first be switched off, after
which the Industrial PC can be uncoupled from the plant.
Pulling out the fieldbus connection plug uncouples the PC (optional).
Items of equipment that have been switched off must be secured against
being switched on again.
The Industrial PC’s power supply unit must be supplied with 24VDC.
Do not open the power supply unit while voltage is applied!
The supply voltage must be switched off before the power supply unit
CAUTION housing is opened.
Do not exchange any parts when under power
When components are being fitted or removed, the supply voltage must
Attention be switched off.
Fitting work on the Industrial PC can result in damage:
• if metal objects such as screws or tools fall onto operating circuit
boards.
• if connecting cables internal to the PC are removed or inserted
during operation.
• if plug-in cards are removed or inserted when the PC is switched
on.
High Voltage!
Displays used for the Control Panel’s LC-display are operated with a
DANGER voltage of up to 1000 V, depending on type. For that reason:
The supply voltage must be disconnected before the housing of the
Control Panel is opened.
CP72xx 5
Foreword
Operator’s obligation to exercise diligence

The operator must ensure that
• the Industrial PC is only used for its intended purpose (see chapter
Product Description).
• the Industrial PC is only operated in a sound condition and in
working order (see chapter Maintenance).
• the Industrial PC is operated, maintained and repaired only by
suitably qualified and authorized personnel.
• the personnel is instructed regularly about relevant occupational
safety and environmental protection aspects, and is familiar with
the operating manual and in particular the safety notes contained
herein.
• the instruction manual is in good condition and complete, and
always available for reference at the place of installation of the
Industrial PC.
• none of the safety and warning notes attached to the Industrial PC
are removed, and all notes remain legible.
• every user is familiar with all the functions of the software installed
on the Industrial PC to which he has access.
National regulations Depending on the type of machine and plant in which the Industrial PC is
depending on the machine used, national regulations governing the controllers of such machines will
type apply, and must be observed by the operator. These regulations cover,
amongst other things, the intervals between inspections of the controller.
The operator must initiate such inspections in good time.
Only trained persons may open the Industrial PC housing
The operator is responsible for ensuring that only trained electrical staff
Note opens the housing of the Industrial PC.
Procedure in the event of a In the event of faults at the Industrial PC, the list in the section
fault Troubleshooting can be used to determine the measures to be taken.
Operator requirements
Read the operating Anyone who uses the Industrial PC must have read these operating
instructions instructions.
Software knowledge Every user must be familiar with all the functions of the software installed
on the Industrial PC to which he has access.
6 CP72xx
Product Description
Product Description
Appropriate Use
The CP72xx Panel PC with 3½” motherboard is designed for mounting
behind a Beckhoff Control Panel. Cooling is achieved via heat sink
structure between the Control Panel and the add-on PC. A fan inside the
closed housing ensures that the heat is distributed evenly.
The Industrial PC is designed for mounting arm installation.
Do not use the Panel PC in areas of explosive hazard!
The Panel PC must not be used where there is a risk of explosion.

DANGER
Structure
Rear view of theCP72xx
1 1 1 1
2 2
Access to the connectors

In order to get access to the connectors, first unscrew the according M4-
cross-head screws (1) (see photo above). The plastic caps (2) can then be
taken off easily.
View to the connectors
The picture shows the view to the connectors when the plastic caps are
removed.
CP72xx 7
Product Description
Access to memory and battery
Removing the drive cover
After unscrewing the two Allen screws (see arrows) the drive cover can be
taken off.
View to the hard-disk drive

(optional) and the memory 1
card
+ pole
3
- pole
Removing the drive cover allows access to the IDE-hard-disk (1) (optional),
the Compact-Flash-memory card (2) and the lithium battery of the system
clock (3).
8 CP72xx
Product Description
Removing the hard-disk

drive and the memory card
+ pole
polarity
- pole
The hard-disk drive and the memory card can now be pulled out. Here,
changing the lithium battery is also possible.
The installation takes place in reverse order.
Danger of Explosion!
Replace battery only with the identical type or an alternative type

WARNING recommended by the manufacturer. Notice correct polarity!
Handling of Lithium Batteries
Lithium Batteries should not be recharged, exposed to fire, opened and

WARNING they should be protected against sunlight and moisture.
CP72xx 9
Product Description
Interfaces
Power supply
Power supply
X101
The power supply connection of the Industrial PC and the connection with
the UPS (optional) is established via the power supply socket (X101).
Network connection
Network connection
X106
The Ethernet-interface with RJ-45-connector (X106) allows the PC to be

connected to a network (LAN). In the basic configuration a Gigabit-port is
available.
Additional plug-in cards (optional)

Type plate There are notes at the Industrial PC and in the connection area which
provide information about the hardware configuration of the Industrial PC at
the time it was supplied.
10 CP72xx
Please also refer to chapter Foreword.
Transport and Unpacking

The specified storage conditions must be observed (see chapter Technical
data).
Transport
Despite the robust design of the unit, the components are sensitive to
strong vibrations and impacts. During transport, your Control Panel should
therefore be protected from excessive mechanical stress. Therefore,
please use the original packaging.
Danger of damage to the unit
If the device is transported in cold weather or is exposed to extreme

Attention variations in temperature, make sure that moisture (condensation) does
not form on or inside the device.
Prior to operation, the unit must be allowed to slowly adjust to room
temperature. Should condensation occur, a delay time of approximately
12 hours must be allowed before the unit is switched on.
Unpacking
Proceed as follows to unpack the unit:
1. Remove packaging.
2. Do not discard the original packaging. Keep it for future relocation.
3. Check the delivery for completeness by comparing it with your order.
4. Please keep the associated paperwork. It contains important
information for handling the unit.
5. Check the contents for visible shipping damage.
6. If you notice any shipping damage or inconsistencies between the
contents and your order, you should notify Beckhoff Service.
CP72xx 11
Installation of the Panel PC

The Panel PC series CP72xx is designed for mounting arm installation. A
Control Panel is installed in the front of the IP65 Panel PC.
The ambient conditions specified for operation must be observed (see the
section Technical data).
Circulation of air
When the unit is installed in an enclosure, adequate space for ventilation

Note and for opening the PC must be provided.
Please note the following points during installation of the PC:
• Position the PC in such a way that reflections on the screen are

avoided as far as possible.
• Use the position of the screen as a guide for the correct installation
height; it should be optimally visible for the user at all times.
• The PC should not be exposed to direct sunlight.
Avoid extreme environmental conditions
Extreme environmental conditions should be avoided as far as possible.

Attention Protect the rear of your PC from dust, humidity and heat.
The clearance above and below the housing must be at least 20 cm in
order to ensure adequate ventilation of the PC.
The cooling ribs of the PC must not be covered.
Mounting arm installation

Rotatable mounting arm The industrial PC is designed for mounting arm installation using a 48 mm
adapter diameter mounting arm tube. The case features an integrated rotatable
mounting arm adapter.
Rotatable and tiltable The swivelling range of the tiltable

mounting arm adapter mounting arm adapter (optional) amounts
(optional) to approx. 45°.
~45°
12 CP72xx
Mounting arm installation For Installation the Industrial PC at the mounting arm, first push back the
red ring cover (1) (see arrows).
Now you get access to the allen head screws (2), with which the mounting
arm tube is fixed in the adapter.
The picture shows the rotatable and tiltable mounting arm adapter
(optional).
Earthing measures
Earthing measures Earthing connections dissipate interference from external power supply
cables, signal cables or cables to peripheral equipment.
The picture shows the earthing connection in the wiring area of the PC
(see arrow). The earthing cable is laid through the support arm.
CP72xx 13
Power Supply Connection

Supplied mains power unit The Industrial PC is fitted with a 24 VDC power supply unit .
Uninterruptible power supply (UPS)
When the Industrial PC is provided with a power supply unit with

Note integrated UPS (order option) you can realize an uninterruptible power
supply (UPS) using the battery pack C9900-U330.
Danger of Explosion if using other battery packs!

WARNING
Beckhoff power supply technology
Schematic diagram of
power supply unit wirings
Innovative solution for Industrial PCs equipped with a UPS are in actual use frequently switched
shutting down Industrial off by simply turning off the supply voltage. In this case the PC shuts down
PCs via the battery. However, over time this reduces the service life of the
battery.
The new Beckhoff power supply technology approach addresses this
problem and now offers the user the option of switching the PC off without
the need for using the battery, thereby reducing the load on the battery.
In addition to the main switch this innovative solution uses an ON/OFF
switch for the machine. Basically, the main switch remains switched on and
provides the power supply for the PC during shutdown.
Once the PC has shut down, the PC power supply unit issues a signal to
indicate that the process is complete and that the main voltage can be
switched off. This can be done manually via a signal lamp connection or
via a contactor. With this solution the main switch generally only has to be
switched off if the control cabinet has to be opened.
14 CP72xx
In order to maintain a screen display for the Industrial PC in the event of a

power failure, the power supply unit is equipped with a UPS output for
connecting a Control Panel. This enables a power failure to be visualised
and displayed to the user. Once the PC has shut down, the UPS output is
switched off in order to avoid total discharge of the battery.
Internal connection
The UPS output of the CP72xx power supply unit is internally connected
Note with the panel
For a detailed functional description please refer to section Connecting

Power Supply.
Pin assignment of the power supply connector

The power supply and the external circuit for switching the Industrial PC on
and off are connected via the 12-pole plug connector .
Pin assignment CP72xx
Pin assignment for View connector-sided Pin Wire Function

connecting the power 1 1 - Battery Pack
supply, the switch and the 2 2 + (with UPS)
battery pack (optional) Male 3 3 NC
connector 4 ye/gn
5 4 - 24 V DC Power Supply
6 5 +
7 6 PC_ON
Connector 12-pole Coninvers 8 7 Power-Status
RC-12P1N1126000
Pin assignment CP72x4 with 24-inch display (discontinued)
Pin assignment for View connector-sided Pin Wire Function

connecting the power 1 1 - Battery Pack
supply, the switch and the 2 2 + (with UPS)
battery pack (optional) Male 3 3 NC
connector 4 ye/gn
6 5 + PC Unit
7 6 PC_ON
Connector 12-pole Coninvers 8 7 Power-Status
RC-12P1N1126000 9 8 - Battery Pack
10 9 + (with UPS)
12 11 + Display
CP72xx 15
Pre-assembled cable sets for the power supply

Pre-assembled power For easy installation of the power supply there are pre-assembled
supply cables connection cables of different length and with IP65 connectors available
(see table).
Order number Denomination

C9900-K271 Power supply cable IP65 for CP72xx, length 5 m, pre-
assembled, M23-female connector, screwable, 8-wire,
second end open
C9900-K272 Power supply cable IP65 for CP72xx, length 10 m, pre-
assembled, M23-female connector, screwable, 8-wire,
second end open
C9900-K275 Power supply cable IP65 for CP72x4 with 24-inch display,
length 5 m, pre-assembled, M23-female connector,
screwable, 12-wire, second end open
C9900-K276 Power supply cable IP65 for CP72x4 with 24-inch display,
C9900-K277 Power supply cable IP65 for CP72xx up to 19-inch display,
Fitting the power supply cable with IP65 connector

Basic configuration without In the basic configuration of the Industrial PC there is no connection cable
connecting cable and provided for connecting the power supply. For connecting the power supply
connector following connectors can be used:
Cable 8-pole for CP72xx
Coninvers female connector Series RC 12-pole
(Crimp Coninvers RM-12S1N8A1100, Coninvers Connector 12-pole, with
metric screw connection M16)
Cable 12-pole for CP72x4 (discontinued)
Coninvers female connector Series RC 12-pole
(Crimp Coninvers RM-12S1N8A1300, Coninvers Connector 12-pole, with
metric screw connection M20)
The connectors and special tools for the assembly are available via the
company Coninvers http://www.coninvers.com as well as different
distributors.
16 CP72xx
Connecting Power Supply

The external wiring consists of the connection of the power supply, the
battery pack (optional) and the connection of customised components for
shutting down the PC.
Cable Cross Sections

Note cable cross sections, For the connection of the power supply, wiring with a cable-cross-section
avoid voltage drop! of 1.0 mm2 must be used.
With bigger distances between voltage source and PC, you take the
voltage drop as a function of the cable-cross-section as well as voltage
fluctuations of your distribution voltage into account, so that is secured that
the voltage doesn't fall under 22 V at the power supply.
Insert fuse
The power supply must be protected with maximum 10 A.

Attention
Configuration for shutting down the PC

The connections for shutting down the Industrial PCs are established via
the PC_ON input and the Power Status output.
PC_ON and Power Status functions

• If the PC_ON input is connected to 24 V via a switch, the PC shuts
down according to the rules. The PC_ON signal is inverted, i.e. the
PC shuts down if the 24 V connection is live.
• If the PC_ON input is NOT connected by the user, the PC can be
booted in the familiar way by connecting the supply voltage and shut
down via the battery by switching off the supply voltage.
Service life of the rechargeable battery
This procedure significantly reduces the service life of the rechargeable

Attention battery and should therefore not be used.
• Once the PC has shut down, the Power Status output is switched
from 24 V to 0 V. Via this output a signal lamp can be connected or a
contactor for de-energising the whole system. The maximum load for
the Power Status output is 0.5 A and a suitable fuse should be
provided.
CP72xx 17
Wiring diagram CP72xx

Wiring according to the wiring diagram (the circuit of PC_ON and Power-
Status is symbolical):
Wiring diagram power

supply and external wiring
Connection of the Battery Pack
Connection of the Battery Pack in combination with integrated UPS (order

Note option).
18 CP72xx
Wiring diagram
CP72x4 with 24-inch display (discontinued)
Wiring according to the wiring diagram (the circuit of PC_ON and Power-
Status is symbolical):
Wiring diagram
power supply and
external wiring
Connection of the Battery Pack
Connection of the Battery Pack in combination with integrated UPS (order

Note option).
CP72xx 19
Connecting the Network
Pre-assembled network cables

Pre-assembled network For easy installation of the network connection there are pre-assembled
cables connection cables of different length and with IP65 – RJ45 connectors
available (see table).
In addition to the specified network cables, cables for further configuration
are available.

C9900-K281 Network cable for CP72xx, length 3 m, pre-assembled,
Harting-Push-Pull-Ethernet-connector IP65, second cable
end RJ45 IP20
end RJ45 IP20
end RJ45 IP20
end RJ45 IP20
end RJ45 IP20
end RJ45 IP20
end RJ45 IP20
end RJ45 IP20
Fitting the network cable with IP65 connector

Basic configuration without In the basic configuration of the Industrial PC there is a connector cap
network cable and provided without connector.
connector
For network connection following Harting Push Pull connector RJ45, 8-pole
can be used:
• Connector RJ45 8-pole Harting Push Pull connector-set according to
IEC24702, white No. 09 45 145 1500
The connector and special tools for the assembly are available via the
company Harting http://www.harting.de/ as well as different distributors.
20 CP72xx
USB-interface (optional)
Order option C9900-E187 Optionally a USB 2.0 interface with 4-pole-connector (M12-female
connector IP65) in the connection area is available with order option
C9900-E187:

C9900-E187 IP65 connector M12 in the wiring area of a CP72xx for one
USB 2.0 Port
Pin assignment for Pin assignment, Pin Signal Color

view connector-sided 1 VCC
connecting the USB- Red
interface (optional) 2 D- White
3 GND Black
4 D+ Green
Female connector 4-pole Escha 8029477
Pre-assembled USB-cables
Pre-assembled USB-cables For easy installation of the USB-interface in the wiring area there are pre-
assembled USB-cables of different length and with IP65-connectors
Usage of the Cables
These USB-cables can not be used for connecting the following options:
Note
• C9900-E190 (USB-A in the wiring area of a CP72xx for one USB 2.0
Port)
• C9900-E169 (2-port USB socket inside the Control Panel back plane)

C9900-K291 USB cable for CP72xx, length 3 m, assembled,
M12 connector IP65, screw type, 4 pin, second end USB-B
connector
C9900-K292 USB cable for CP72xx, length 5 m, assembled,
M12 connector IP65, screw type, 4 pin, second end USB-B
connector
Fitting the USB-cable with IP65 connector

Required connector For connecting the USB-interface the following connector is needed cable-
sided:
• Connector 4-pole round shield Binder 99142981404
For further information see http://www.binder-connector.de/.
CP72xx 21
RS232-interface (optional)
Order option C9900-E186 Optionally a RS232-interface with 12-pole-connector (M12-female
connector IP65) is available in the connection area with order option
C9900-E186:

C9900-E186 IP65-connector M12 in the wiring area of a CP72xx for one
serial interface RS232
Pin assignment for Pin assignment, Pin Signal

view connector-sided 1 DCD
connecting the RS232-
interface (optional) 2 RXD
3 TXD
4 DTR
5 SGND
6 DSR
7 RTS
8 CTS
9 RI
10 NC
SG 12-pole M12 11 NC
Escha 8029505 12 NC
Pre-assembled serial interface cables

Pre-assembled For easy installation of the serial interface in the wiring area there are pre-
RS232-cables assembled RS232-cables of different length and with IP65-connectors

C9900-K295 Serial interface cable RS232 for CP72xx, length 3 m,
assembled, M12 connector IP65, screw type, 12 pin,
second end D-Sub 9 pin plug
Fitting the RS232-interface cable with IP65 connector

Required connector For connecting the RS232-interface the following connector is needed
cable-sided:
• Cable with connector M12 12-pole, 12x0,14mm² 5m Escha 8028494
For further information see http://www.escha.de/.
22 CP72xx
Connecting devices
Power supply plug
The power supply plug must be withdrawn!

Attention
Please read the documentation for the external devices prior to
connecting them.
During thunderstorms, plug connector must neither be inserted nor
removed.
When disconnecting a plug connector, always handle it at the plug. Do not
pull the cable!
Connecting cables
The connections are located at the top of the Industrial PC and are
documented in the Product Description chapter.
When connecting the cables to the Industrial PC, proceed according to the
following sequence:
• Switch off all the devices that are to be connected.
• Disconnect all the devices that are to be connected from the power
supply.
• Connect all the cables between the Industrial PC and to the
devices that are to be connected.
• Connect all data transfer cables (if present) to the appropriate
plug-in receptacles of the data/telecommunication networks.
• Reconnect all devices to the power supply.
Check voltage rating and connect

Fitted with the 24 VDC power supply unit:
1. Check that the external power supply is providing the correct
voltage.
2. Insert the power supply cable that you have assembled into the
Industrial PC's power supply socket. Then connect it to your
external 24 V power supply.
Use same type of rechargeable battery
If a 24 V UPS is installed, the same type of rechargeable battery must be

Attention used.
CP72xx 23
Switching the Industrial PC on and off

Switch on The Industrial PC does not have its own mains switch. The Industrial PC
will start when the equipment is switched on, or when it is connected to the
power supply.
Shutting down and When the plant is switched off, or when it is disconnected from its power
switching off supply, the Industrial PC will be switched off.
Control software such as is typically used on Industrial PCs permits various

users to be given different rights. A user who may not close software may
also not switch the Industrial PC off, since data can be lost from the hard
disk by switching off while software is running.
First shut down, then switch off the PC
If the Industrial PC is switched off as the software is writing a file to the

Attention storage medium, the file will be destroyed. Control software typically writes
something to the storage medium every few seconds, so that the
probability of causing damage by switching off while the software is
running is very high.
Switch off power supply
When you have shut down the Industrial PC, you have to switch off power
Attention supply for at least 10 seconds before rebooting the system.
After resetting power supply the PC will start booting automatically.
First switching on and driver installation

When you switch on the Industrial PC for the first time, the pre-installed
operating system (optional) will be started. In this case, all the required
drivers for any additional, optional hardware components ordered with the
PC will already have been installed.
If the PC was ordered without operating system, you have to install the
operating system and the driver software for any auxiliary hardware
yourself. Please follow the instructions in the documentation for the
operating system and the additional devices.
24 CP72xx
Keyboard codes
Type-dependent number of Depending on the precise type, the Control Panel can have fewer keys
keys than those described here.
Operation The cursor is the blinking character that marks the point at which the next
character entered will be displayed. The cursor is also known as the
insertion point. The cursor keys each move the cursor one place in the
associated direction.
The Home key moves the cursor to the beginning of the line, while the End
Home End
key moves it to the end of the line.
The Pg Up key scrolls one page back, the Pg Dn key scrolls one page
Pg Up Pg Dn
forward.
The Tab key takes the cursor to the next input field, while Shift and Tab
moves to the previous input field.
The mouse cursor can be moved over the screen with the aid of the touch
L R screen or of the touch pad (optional). The keys correspond to the left and
right hand keys of a Microsoft mouse.
The Del key deletes the character to the right of the cursor.
Del
The Ins key causes characters to the right of the cursor to be overwritten.
Ins
The overwrite mode is cancelled by pressing the key again.
Print-Screen prints a hard copy of a text screen on the printer.
Print
The Pause key stops the computer until another key is pressed (only under
Pause
MS-DOS).
Your input is confirmed with the Enter key.

Enter
Backspace deletes the character to the left of the cursor.
If the Shift key is pressed at the same time as another key, then instead of
Shift
the numbers you obtain the character printed above the number, and you
obtain upper case letters instead of lower case letters.
Caps Pressing the Caps Lock key once activates and locks the Shift key.
Lock Pressing the Shift key cancels this function.
Rather like the effect of the Shift key, Ctrl and Alt also change the meaning
Ctrl Alt
of another key that is pressed at the same time.
This key brings up the Start menu of the operating system in use (Windows
95, 98, ME, NT, 2000, XP).
Pressing this key opens the property sheet of the active (or marked) object.
Esc The Esc key has the effect of closing dialog windows and of interrupting
some of the computer’s working operations.
! @ All other keys bring the character printed on them onto the display at the
Q W
...
1 2 position of the cursor.
CP72xx 25
F1 F2 F3 F4 The meaning of the function keys, F1 to F10, is determined by the software

and is displayed at the bottom edge of the display.
F5 F6 F7 F8
F9 F10 F11 F12
Einschub Einschub Einschub Einschub

The function of the special keys above the display is also determined by
Streifen Streifen Streifen Streifen the software. The function is displayed at the top edge of the display.
The special keys each have an orange LED controlled by the software.
26 CP72xx
Maintenance
Cleaning the Industrial PC
Disconnect from power supply
Switch off the Industrial PC and all connected devices, and disconnect the
Attention Industrial PC from the power supply.
The Industrial PC can be cleaned with a soft, damp cloth. Do not use any
aggressive cleaning materials, thinners, scouring material or hard objects
that could cause scratches.
Servicing
The Industrial PC requires no maintenance.
Replacing the battery on the motherboard

A used battery on the motherboard has to be replaced. See also chapter
Access to memory and battery.
Replace battery only with the identical type or an alternative type

WARNING recommended by the manufacturer. Notice correct polarity!
Handling of Lithium Batteries
Lithium Batteries should not be recharged, exposed to fire, opened and

WARNING they should be protected against sunlight and moisture.
The used battery must be disposed of in accordance with national

electronics scrap regulations.
Emergency procedures
In case of fire, the Industrial PC should be extinguished with powder or
nitrogen.
Shutting down
Disposal
Dismantling the Industrial The device must be fully dismantled in order to dispose of it. The housing
PC can be sent for metal recycling.
Observe national Electronic parts such as disk drives and circuit boards must be disposed of
electronics scrap in accordance with national electronics scrap regulations.
regulations
CP72xx 27
UPS Software Components (optional)
UPS Software Components (optional)

Installing the UPS driver For operating the power supply unit as a UPS, the UPS driver software and
software the associated UPS driver must be installed on the Industrial PC.
On delivery of the Beckhoff Industrial PC with operating system the

software is already installed. Should the software not be installed on your
PC, the drivers can be installed from the driver CD provided.
Installation on the PC
Installation To install the UPS driver software, execute file
Beckhoff_UPS_vx.xx.xx.exe from the subdirectory of UPS\… from the
CD provided on the Industrial PC (Driver-archive for the Industrial-PC,
C9900-S700-xxxx).
The program is self-extracting and will guide the user through the
installation routine.
Help files
Beckhoff Information The driver software comes with a detailed help function.
System The help files can be called up either directly from the configuration register
by clicking the Help button, or under via Start > Programs > Beckhoff >
UPS software components.
28 CP72xx
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
Pixel errors
Pixel errors in the TFT display are production-caused and represent no

Note complaint-reason!
Fault correction
Fault Cause Procedure
Nothing happens after the Industrial No power supply to the Industrial Check power supply cable.
PC has been switched on PC
Other cause Call Beckhoff Service
The Industrial PC does not boot Setup settings are incorrect Check the setup settings
fully
Other cause Call Beckhoff Service
Computer boots, software starts, Cause of the fault is either in the Call the manufacturer of the
but control does not operate software or in parts of the plant machine or the software
correctly outside the Industrial PC
Memory device error Faulty memory device Check memory in another

device
Call Beckhoff Service

USB error while TwinCAT access Cycle time in TwinCAT is set on Increase the cycle time up to
via USB 10 ms (standard) 50 ms till 80 ms
The Industrial PC functions only Defective components in the Call Beckhoff Service
partially or only part of the time, e.g. Industrial PC
no or dark picture, but memory
drive responds when switching on
CP72xx 29
Troubleshooting
Beckhoff Support & Service

Beckhoff and their partners around the world offer comprehensive support
and service, guaranteeing fast and competent assistance with all questions
related to Beckhoff products and system solutions.
Beckhoff branches and partner companies

Please contact your Beckhoff branch office or partner company for local
support and service on Beckhoff products!
The contact addresses for your country can be found in the list of Beckhoff
branches and partner companies: www.beckhoff.com
You will also find further documentation for Beckhoff components there.
Beckhoff Headquarters
Beckhoff Automation GmbH & Co. KG
Huelshorstweg 20
33415 Verl
Germany
Phone: +49(0)5246/963-0
Fax: +49(0)5246/963-198
e-mail: info@beckhoff.com
Beckhoff Support
Beckhoff offers you comprehensive technical assistance, helping you not
only with the application of individual Beckhoff products, but also with wide-
ranging services:
• worldwide support
• design, programming and commissioning of complex automation
systems
• training program for Beckhoff system components
Hotline: +49(0)5246/963-157
Fax: +49(0)5246/963-9157
e-mail: support@beckhoff.com
Beckhoff Service
The Beckhoff service center supports you in all matters of after-sales
service:
• on-site service
• repair service
• spare parts service
• hotline service
Hotline: +49(0)5246/963-460
Fax: +49(0)5246/963-479
e-mail: service@beckhoff.com
Quote the project number If servicing is required, please quote the project number of your product.
30 CP72xx
Appendix
Appendix
Assembly dimensions
The illustrations show the measurements of the Panel-PCs. Please refer to
the tables for the dimensions of the Control Panel. All Dimensions in mm.
CP72xx Mounting arm installation from top, rotatable
CP72xx 31
Appendix
CP72xx Mounting arm installation from bottom, rotatable
32 CP72xx
Appendix
CP72xx Mounting arm installation from top, rotatable and tiltable
CP72xx 33
Appendix
CP72xx Mounting arm installation from bottom, rotatable and tiltable
34 CP72xx
Appendix
Dimensions and total weight

Display only without Dimensions a b t Weight
touch screen CP7201-0000 12“ Display 353.8 326.3 27.5 9.7 kg
CP7202-0000 15“ Display 426 395 28.5 11.4 kg
CP7203-0000 19“ Display 504 455 45 16.3 kg
CP7204-00xx 24“ Display 610 450 64 16,0 kg
with touch screen Dimensions a b t Weight
CP7201-0001 12“ Display 353.8 326.3 27.5 9.7 kg
CP7202-0001 15“ Display 426 395 28.5 11.6 kg
CP7203-0001 19“ Display 504 455 45 16.1 kg
CP7204-00x1 24“ Display 610 450 64 16,0 kg
With function keys without Dimensions a b t Weight

touch screen CP7211-0000 12“ Display 353.8 326.3 27.5 9.7 kg
CP7212-0000 15“ Display 426 395 28.5 11.4 kg
CP7213-0000 19“ Display 504 455 45 16.3 kg
CP7211-0001 12“ Display 353.8 326.3 27.5 9.7 kg
CP7212-0001 15“ Display 426 395 28.5 11.6 kg
CP7213-0001 19“ Display 504 455 45 16.1 kg
Numeric keyboard without Dimensions a b t Weight

touch screen CP7221-0000 12“ Display 406 308.3 27.5 9.9 kg
CP7222-0000 15“ Display 515 370.2 28.5 12.0 kg
CP7223-0000 19“ Display 563 426 45 16.6 kg
CP7221-0001 12“ Display 406 308.3 27.5 10.0 kg
CP7222-0001 15“ Display 515 370.2 28.5 12.3 kg
CP7223-0001 19“ Display 563 426 45 16.5 kg
with touch pad Dimensions a b t Weight
CP7221-0002 12“ Display 406 308.3 27.5 10.2 kg
CP7222-0002 15“ Display 515 370.2 28.5 12.0 kg
CP7223-0002 19“ Display 563 426 45 16.6 kg
Alphanumeric without Dimensions a b t Weight

keyboard touch screen CP7231-0000 12“ Display 426 370.2 27.5 10.6 kg
CP7232-0000 15“ Display 483 410.2 28.5 12.3 kg
CP7233-0000 19“ Display 504 535 45 17.8 kg
CP7231-0001 12“ Display 426 370.2 27.5 10.7 kg
CP7232-0001 15“ Display 483 410.2 28.5 12.5 kg
CP7233-0001 19“ Display 504 535 45 17.6 kg
with touch pad Dimensions a B t Weight
CP7231-0002 12“ Display 426 370.2 27.5 10.8 kg
CP7232-0002 15“ Display 483 410.2 28.5 12.3 kg
CP7233-0002 19“ Display 504 535 45 17.7 kg
CP72xx 35
Appendix
Appendix
Technical data
Dimensions and weight See section Assembly dimensions
Do not use the PC in areas The Industrial PC may not be used in areas of explosive hazard.
of explosive hazard
The following conditions must be observed during operation:
Environmental conditions Ambient temperature: 0 to 45°C
Atmospheric humidity: Maximum 95%, non-condensing
Shock resistance Sinusoidal vibration:
(EN 60068-2-6) 10 to 58 Hz: 0.035 mm
58 to 500 Hz: 0.5 G (~ 5 m/ s2)
During reading of CD-ROM: 10 to 58 Hz: 0.019 mm
58 to 500 Hz: 0.25 G (~ 2.5 m/ s2)
Impact:
(EN 60068-2-27) 5 G (~ 50 m/ s²), duration: 30 ms
During reading of CD-ROM: 5 G (~ 50 m/ s²), duration: 11 ms
Protection class Protection class: IP65
Power supply Supply voltage: 24 VDC (22 – 30 VDC)
24 VDC power pack Power consumption: approx. 55 W for the basic version,
approx. 69 W with 12“ display
If operated with USV: additional 30 W (while charging)
EMC compatibility Resistance to interference: conforms to EN 61000-6-2
Emission of interference: conforms to EN 61000-6-4
Transport and storage The same values for atmospheric humidity and shock resistance are to be
observed during transport and storage as in operation. Suitable packaging
of the Industrial PC can improve the resistance to impact during transport.
The ambient temperature during storage and transport must be between
-20°C and +65°C.
Pixel errors
Pixel errors in the TFT display are production-caused and represent no

Note complaint-reason!
Approvals
FCC: Federal Communications Commission
Radio Frequency Interference Statement
FCC Approval for USA This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a
Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits
are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference
when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This
equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if
not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may
cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this
equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in
which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own
expense.
FCC: Canadian Notice
FCC Approval for Canada This equipment does not exceed the Class A limits for radiated emissions
as described in the Radio Interference Regulations of the Canadian
Department of Communications.
36 CP72xx
Isolated switch amplifiers KFD2-SR2-Ex2.W
Output: relay
Connection
Input I EEx ia IIC Input II EEx ia IIC
Hazardous area,
Switch S3 in position I
zone 0, zone 1
1+ 3- 4+ 6-
• 2-channel
Switch S3 in position I
• Control circuit EEx ia IIC 10 kΩ 10 kΩ
1+ 3- 4+ 6-
• Reversible mode of operation
without LB
• 1 signal output with 1 changeover Switch S3 in position II
contact per channel 1+ 3- 4+ 6-
• EMC acc. to NAMUR NE 21 1+ 2+ 3- 4+ 5+ 6-
24 V DC:
Safe area or hazardous area, zone 2

KFD2-SR2-Ex2.W
Replaces model KFD2-SR-Ex2
LB LB
Function I II S3 I II S3
S1 red S2 red
The transformer isolated barrier
transfers digital signals from the & &
hazardous area. Sensors per
DIN EN 60947-5-6 (NAMUR) and
mechanical contacts may be used as green
alarms. The control circuit is monitored
yellow yellow
for lead breakage (LB).
AC units have a low heat build-up due
to voltage peak value generation. This
switching technique has been patented. 7 8 9 10 11 12 14+ 15-
The input is safely isolated from the Output I Output II ~ Power rail
output and the power supply in Power only
accordance with DIN EN 50020. The supply KFD2-SR2-Ex2.W
output and power supply are safely
isolated from each other in accordance
with DIN VDE 0106 Section 101.
Composition
The outputs and the power supply are
galvanically isolated per DIN EN 50178
for a design isolation voltage of
AC 253 V.
037374_ENG.xml
10/22/04
Subject to reasonable modifications due to technical advances. Copyright Pepperl+Fuchs, Printed in Germany
Pepperl+Fuchs Group • Tel.: Germany +49 621 776-0 • USA +1 330 4253555 • Singapore +65 67799091 • Internet http://www.pepperl-fuchs.com 1
Technical data KFD2-SR2-Ex2.W
Supply
Connection Power Rail or terminals 14+, 15-
Rated voltage 20 ... 30 V DC
Ripple ≤ 10 %
Rated current ≤ 50 mA
Power loss 0,7 W
Power consumption < 1,3 W
Input
Connection terminals 1+, 3-; 4+, 6-
Rated values acc. to IEC 60947-5-6 (NAMUR, DIN 19234), see system description for electrical data
Open circuit voltage/Short-circuit current approx. 8 V DC / approx. 8 mA
Switching point/Switching hysteresis 1,2 ... 2,1 mA / approx. 0,2 mA
Pulse/Pause ratio ≥ 20 ms / ≥ 20 ms
Lead monitoring breakage I ≤ 0,1 mA
Output
Connection output I: terminals 7, 8, 9 ; output II: terminals 10, 11, 12
Output I and II signal ; relay
Contact loading 253 V AC / 2 A / cos ϕ > 0.7; 40 V DC / 2 A resistive load;
Energised/De-energised delay approx. 20 ms / approx. 20 ms
Mechanical life 107 switching cycles
Transfer characteristics
Switching frequency ≤ 10 Hz
Electrical isolation
Input/Output safe electrical isolation acc. to EN 50020, voltage peak value 375 V
Input/power supply safe electrical isolation acc. to EN 50020, voltage peak value 375 V
Output/power supply safe isolation acc. to DIN VDE 0106, rated insulation voltage 253 Veff
Output/Output basic insulation acc. to DIN EN 50178, rated insulation voltage 253 Veff
Directive conformity
Electromagnetic compatibility standards
Directive 89/336/EC acc. to EN 50081-2 / EN 50082-2
Standard conformity
Insulation coordination acc. to DIN EN 50178
Electrical isolation acc. to DIN EN 50178
Electromagnetic compatibility acc. to EN 50081-2 / EN 50082-2, NAMUR NE 21
Climatic conditions acc. to DIN IEC 721
Input acc. to IEC 60947-5-6 (NAMUR, DIN 19234), see system description for electrical data
Ambient conditions
Ambient temperature -20 ... 60 °C (253 ... 333 K)
Mechanical specifications
Protection degree IP20
Mass approx. 150 g
Data for application in conjunction
with hazardous areas
EC-Type Examination Certificate PTB 00 ATEX 2080 ; for additional certificates see www.pepperl-fuchs.com
Group, category, type of protection ¬ II (1) G D [EEx ia] IIC [circuit(s) in zone 0/1/2]
Voltage U0 10,5 V
Current I0 13 mA
Power P0 34 mW
Supply
Safety maximum voltage Um 253 V AC / 125 V DC (Attention! Um is no rated voltage.)
Type of protection [EEx ia and EEx ib]
Explosion group IIA IIB IIC
External capacitance 75 µF 16,8 µF 2,41 µF
External inductance 1000 mH 840 mH 210 mH
Electrical isolation
Input/Output safe electrical isolation acc. to EN 50020, voltage peak value 375 V
Directive conformity standards
Directive 94/9 EC EN 50014, EN 50020
Entity parameter
037374_ENG.xml
Certification number J.I.3002773

FM control drawing No. 116-0035
Suitable for installation in division 2 yes
Connection terminals 1, 3; 2, 3; 4, 6; 5, 6
Input I
Voltage VOC 12,9 V
10/22/04
Current It 19,8 mA
Explosion group A&B C&E D, F&G

Max. external capacitance Ca 1,273 µF 3,82 µF 10,18 µF
Max. external inductance La 84,8 mH 254,4 mH 678,4 mH
Safety parameter
UL control drawing E 106378
CSA control drawing LR 36087-13
Control drawing No. 116-0047
Connection terminals 1, 3; 2, 3; 4, 6; 5, 6
Input I
Safety parameter 12,6 V / 650 Ohm
Voltage VOC 12,9 V
Current ISC 19,8 mA
Explosion group A&B C&E D, F&G
Max. external capacitance Ca 1,273 µF 3,82 µF 10,18 µF
Max. external inductance La 84,88 mH 298,7 mH 744,4 mH
Notes
Customs tariff number 8536 5019 000

Available approvals for the worldwide use
Country Testing institut Approval number Note

Australia MDA
Australia SA
Canada CSA LR 36087-13
China NEPSI GYJ 97 116
Germany TÜV TÜV 99 ATEX 1499X for installation of devices in zone 2
England BASEEFA Ex 96D2393
Japan TIIS
Korea KROS
Korea KISCO
Poland KDB KDB 99.222W
Russia ISZWE
Switzerland SEV
Czchech Rep. FTZU
Ungarn BKI
USA FM
USA UL
The available approvals are continuously expanded
Desired specimen are available on request or via WWW.Pepper-Fuchs.com
Housing type C
Operating manual KF-System

037374_ENG.xml
Application
• These devices are used in MSR technology for the galvanic isolation of MSR signals such as for example 20mA and 10V unit signals, or
additionally for the adjustment or standardization of signals. Devices which have intrinsically safe control circuits, serve for operating intrin-
sically safe field devices within hazardous areas. The data sheets of the manufacturer should be observed.
• The devices of the KF-Systems are not suited for the isolation of signals in power engineering, unless it is specially noted in the respective
10/22/04
data sheet.
• The laws or directives for the use or the planned purpose should be observed.
Commissioning, installation
• The devices are designed according to the protection class IP20 and have to protected against adverse environmental conditions such as
for example water splashing or dirt beyond grime accumulation level 2.
• The devices have to be installed out of the hazardous area! Only the circuits which are marked to be Intrinsically safe may be lead in the
hazardous area.
• For connecting intrinsically safe field devices with the intrinsically safe circuitry of the related devices of the KF-Systems, the respective peak
values of the field device and of the related device with regard to the explosion protection should be considered (verification of intrinsic
safety). The EC-certificates of conformity or the EC-Prototype test label should be observed. Especially important is the observance of the
included "Special terms".
• When using the intrinsically safe circuitry in the hazardous area dust "D" only specially certificated field devices may be connected.
Commissioning, Installation within zone 2

• The devices are to be installed in switch or junction boxes in the protection class IP54 or higher.
• The devices can be installed within zone 2. Only circuits that are marked to be intrinsically safe can be used in zone 1 or zone 0, depending
on the ignition protection class. The installation of the intrinsically safe circuits is to be conducted in accordance with the relevant installation
dirctions..
• For connecting intrinsically safe field devices with the intrinsically safe circuitry of the related devices of the KF-Systems, the respective
peak values of the field device and of the related device with regard to the explosion protection should be considered. The EG-certificate of
conformity or EG-Prototype test label should be observed.
• For operation within zone 2 the conformity information of the certification centres or the declarations of conformity of the manufacturers
should be considered additionally. Especially important is the observance of the included "Special terms".
• When using the intrinsically safe circuitry in the hazardous area dust "D" only specially certificated field devices may be connected.
Repair and Maintenance

• The transmission of the devices is stable over long time periods, a regular adjustment or similar is not necessary. Also otherwise, mainte-
nance is not required.
Fault Elimination
• Devices, which are suited for operation in hazardous areas may not be modified. Device repairs may only be conducted by specially trained
and certified personnel.
Isolation Coordinates for units with Ex certification according to EN 50020

The devices are rate for installation in accumulation level 2, according to DIN EN 50178.
037374_ENG.xml
10/22/04
®
WALTHER CONNECTING & DOCKING
Leckarme
Einbauelemente
für Werkzeugmaschinen
Low leakage
Cartridge Couplings Serie 57, 85
for Machine Tools
Series 57, 85
Einbauelemente für Werkzeugmaschinen Einbauelemente für Werkzeugmaschinen
Series 57 / 85 Cartridge Coupling Elements for Machine Tools Series 57 / 85 Cartridge Coupling Elements for Machine Tools
Beschreibung: Description: Edelstahl / Stainless steel 1.4104 V

Kompakte Einbauelemente für kundenseitige Kavitäten speziell Compact cartridge couplings for cavities in customers’ machi-
angepasst für die Anforderungen in Werkzeugmaschinen. nes, purpose-built for machine tool requirements. Pmax.
Bestellnummer NW gekuppelt entkuppelt D SW Lo L A T N Cv
Ausgerüstet mit leckarmer Ventil-Technologie. Vielseitige Ein- The coupling elements are equipped with a valve technology connected disconnected
baumöglichkeiten durch hohe Mittenabweichungstoleranz beim that is low in leakage. Operation is versatile thanks to high Part number NB [metrisch
[mm] [bar / psi] [bar / psi] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] metrical] [mm] [mm]
Kuppeln sowie geringe Kuppelkraft wegen kleinbauender center deviation tolerance during connection. They require little
Konstruktion. connecting force due to the compact design. 57-G06-2-XX002-07-2 VN 29,7 12x1,5 10,7 11,5
6 70 / 1.015 40 / 580 21 19 49,4 0,37
57-G06-0-XX001-07-2 VK 31,6 14x1,5 20,7
Serie 57 Series 57
Einfacher und sauberer Wechsel von Maschinenkomponenten, Simple and clean change of machine components, e. g. for the 57-G08-2-XX002-07-2 VN 30,0 14x1,5 11,0 9,5
8 200 / 2.900 60 / 870 27 24 51,3 0,37
beispielsweise zur Versorgung von wechselbaren Fräsköpfen supply of exchangeable milling heads of machine tools.
an Werkzeugmaschinen. • Materials: stainless steel (1.4104 V) combined with chemi- 57-G08-0-XX001-07-2 VK 33,5 18x1,5 22,3
• Werkstoffe: Edelstahl (1.4104 V) kombiniert mit chemikalien- cal resistant FKM seals 57-G12-2-XX002-07-2 VN 41,2 20x1,5 17,0 15,2
resistenten FKM-Dichtungen • Max. working pressure 200 bar (2900 psi) 12 80 / 1.160 40 / 580 30 27 64,0 1,55
• Max. Betriebsdruck 200 bar • Clean-break valve 57-G12-0-XX001-07-2 VK 40,0 22x1,5 29,0
• Clean-Break Ventile • Suitable for cooling lubricant, hydraulic clamping, blow-off air
• Geeignet für Kühlschmieremulsion, Spannhydraulik, • For depressurised connection 57-G16-2-XX002-07-2 VN 62,2 27x2 24,0 27,0
16 80 / 1.160 30 / 435 50 46 96,7 3,58
Abblasluft • Mechanically rugged through protected seal 57-G16-0-XX001-07-2 VK 62,8 36x2 54,7
• Zum Kuppeln im drucklosen Zustand • Your advantage: simple and clean change of machine
• Mechanisch robust durch geschützte Abdichtungen components
• Mittenabweichung: ± 0,5 mm • Center deviation: ± 0,5 mm
Sonderstahl komplett brüniert / High quality steel, oil-burnished
Serie 85 Series 85 Pmax.
Schnelles Verfahren von Paletten auch im anspruchsvollen Quick moving of pallets, even in demanding operating cycles Bestellnummer NW gekuppelt entkuppelt D SW Lo L A T N Cv
NB connected disconnected
Zyklusbetrieb mit hydraulischen Spannfunktion bei Paletten- with hydraulic clamping function for pallet changing systems. Part number [metrisch
wechselsystemen. • Materials: high quality steel, oil-burnished, combined with [mm] [bar / psi] [bar / psi] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] metrical] [mm] [mm]
• Werkstoffe: brünierter Sonderstahl, kombiniert mit robusten robust seals made of FKM / PUR 85-006-2-00000-AAAB-Z01-P000 VN -0,5 34,7 24x1,5 26,5 8,2
Dichtungen FKM / PUR • Max. clamping pressure 240 bar (3480 psi) 6 240* / 3.480* 240 / 3.480 24 – 59,0 0,9
• Maximaler Spanndruck 240 bar • Suitable for all common hydraulic oils 85-006-0-00000-AAAA-Z01-P000 VK 32,0 24x1,5 32,0
• Geeignet für alle gängigen Hydrauliköle • Ultra short couple stroke “N”
85-010-2-00000-AAAD-Y01-P000 VN 45,7 27x1,5 29,3 9,2
• Ultrakurzer Kuppelhub “N” • Prevents dirt ingression due to encapsulated seals 10 240* / 3.480* 240 / 3.480 27,8 – 71,5
-0,5
2,03
• Verschmutzungsresistent durch gekapselte Abdichtungen • Easy to connect even against residual pressures up to 40 85-010-0-00000-AAAC-Y01-P000 VK 34,5 27x1,5 27,3
• Unproblematisches Kuppeln auch gegen Restdrücke bis 40 bar / 580 psi (coupling to adaptor); 60 bar, 870 psi (adaptor
bar (Kupplung zu Nippel); 60 bar (Nippel zu Kupplung) to coupling) Sonderstahl brüniert, chemisch vernickelt / High quality steel, oil-burnished, chemically nickel plated
• Winkelabweichung: ± 0,15° • Angular misalignment: ± 0,15° 85-006-2-00000-AAAN-Z01-P000 VN -0,5 34,7 24x1,5 26,5 8,2
6 210* / 3.045* 210 / 3.045 24 – 59,0 0,9
Für spezielle Anforderungen stehen weitere Einbauelemente The WALTHER programme offers more coupling elements for 85-006-0-00000-AAAM-Z01-P000 32,0 24x1,5 32,0
VK
aus dem WALTHER-Programm zur Verfügung. special requirements.
85-010-2-00000-AAAF-Y01-P000 VN -0,5 45,7 27x1,5 29,3 9,2
10 80* / 1.160* 80 / 1.160 27,8 – 71,5 2,03
L L Lo 85-010-0-00000-AAAE-Y01-P000 VK 34,5 27x1,5 27,3
T T 18 * während des Entkuppelns p. max = 60 bar / when disconnecting p.max = 60 bar / 870 psi
N
Series 57
Montagezubehör / Mounting accessories

D
D
A
SW SW
L L
1
T Lo
N
Series 85
2
D
D
A
Ratsche kundenseitig
Wrench provided by customer
Verschlussnippel Verschlusskupplung
VN Self sealing adaptor
VK Self sealing coupling
entkuppelt / disconnected gekuppelt / connected 1* 4-Stift-Schlüssel: BM-01-100-119, für Type 85-006 / 4 pin wrench: BM-01-100-119, for types 85-006
Genaue Einbaumaße auf Anfrage / exact installation dimensions on request 2* 6-Stift-Schlüssel: BM-01-100-208, für Type 85-010 / 6 pin wrench: BM-01-100-208, for types 85-010
Einbauelemente für Werkzeugmaschinen Einbauelemente für Werkzeugmaschinen
Series 57 / 85 Cartridge Coupling Elements for Machine Tools Series 57 / 85 Cartridge Coupling Elements for Machine Tools
Beschreibung: Description: Edelstahl / Stainless steel 1.4104 V

Kompakte Einbauelemente für kundenseitige Kavitäten speziell Compact cartridge couplings for cavities in customers’ machi-
angepasst für die Anforderungen in Werkzeugmaschinen. nes, purpose-built for machine tool requirements. Pmax.
Bestellnummer NW gekuppelt entkuppelt D SW Lo L A T N Cv
Ausgerüstet mit leckarmer Ventil-Technologie. Vielseitige Ein- The coupling elements are equipped with a valve technology connected disconnected
baumöglichkeiten durch hohe Mittenabweichungstoleranz beim that is low in leakage. Operation is versatile thanks to high Part number NB [metrisch
[mm] [bar / psi] [bar / psi] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] metrical] [mm] [mm]
Kuppeln sowie geringe Kuppelkraft wegen kleinbauender center deviation tolerance during connection. They require little
Konstruktion. connecting force due to the compact design. 57-G06-2-XX002-07-2 VN 29,7 12x1,5 10,7 11,5
6 70 / 1.015 40 / 580 21 19 49,4 0,37
57-G06-0-XX001-07-2 VK 31,6 14x1,5 20,7
Serie 57 Series 57
Einfacher und sauberer Wechsel von Maschinenkomponenten, Simple and clean change of machine components, e. g. for the 57-G08-2-XX002-07-2 VN 30,0 14x1,5 11,0 9,5
8 200 / 2.900 60 / 870 27 24 51,3 0,37
beispielsweise zur Versorgung von wechselbaren Fräsköpfen supply of exchangeable milling heads of machine tools.
an Werkzeugmaschinen. • Materials: stainless steel (1.4104 V) combined with chemi- 57-G08-0-XX001-07-2 VK 33,5 18x1,5 22,3
• Werkstoffe: Edelstahl (1.4104 V) kombiniert mit chemikalien- cal resistant FKM seals 57-G12-2-XX002-07-2 VN 41,2 20x1,5 17,0 15,2
resistenten FKM-Dichtungen • Max. working pressure 200 bar (2900 psi) 12 80 / 1.160 40 / 580 30 27 64,0 1,55
• Max. Betriebsdruck 200 bar • Clean-break valve 57-G12-0-XX001-07-2 VK 40,0 22x1,5 29,0
• Clean-Break Ventile • Suitable for cooling lubricant, hydraulic clamping, blow-off air
• Geeignet für Kühlschmieremulsion, Spannhydraulik, • For depressurised connection 57-G16-2-XX002-07-2 VN 62,2 27x2 24,0 27,0
16 80 / 1.160 30 / 435 50 46 96,7 3,58
Abblasluft • Mechanically rugged through protected seal 57-G16-0-XX001-07-2 VK 62,8 36x2 54,7
• Zum Kuppeln im drucklosen Zustand • Your advantage: simple and clean change of machine
• Mechanisch robust durch geschützte Abdichtungen components
Sonderstahl komplett brüniert / High quality steel, oil-burnished
Serie 85 Series 85 Pmax.
Schnelles Verfahren von Paletten auch im anspruchsvollen Quick moving of pallets, even in demanding operating cycles Bestellnummer NW gekuppelt entkuppelt D SW Lo L A T N Cv
NB connected disconnected
Zyklusbetrieb mit hydraulischen Spannfunktion bei Paletten- with hydraulic clamping function for pallet changing systems. Part number [metrisch
wechselsystemen. • Materials: high quality steel, oil-burnished, combined with [mm] [bar / psi] [bar / psi] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] metrical] [mm] [mm]
• Werkstoffe: brünierter Sonderstahl, kombiniert mit robusten robust seals made of FKM / PUR 85-006-2-00000-AAAB-Z01-P000 VN -0,5 34,7 24x1,5 26,5 8,2
Dichtungen FKM / PUR • Max. clamping pressure 240 bar (3480 psi) 6 240* / 3.480* 240 / 3.480 24 – 59,0 0,9
• Maximaler Spanndruck 240 bar • Suitable for all common hydraulic oils 85-006-0-00000-AAAA-Z01-P000 VK 32,0 24x1,5 32,0
• Geeignet für alle gängigen Hydrauliköle • Ultra short couple stroke “N”
85-010-2-00000-AAAD-Y01-P000 VN 45,7 27x1,5 29,3 9,2
• Ultrakurzer Kuppelhub “N” • Prevents dirt ingression due to encapsulated seals 10 240* / 3.480* 240 / 3.480 27,8 – 71,5
-0,5
2,03
• Verschmutzungsresistent durch gekapselte Abdichtungen • Easy to connect even against residual pressures up to 40 85-010-0-00000-AAAC-Y01-P000 VK 34,5 27x1,5 27,3
• Unproblematisches Kuppeln auch gegen Restdrücke bis 40 bar / 580 psi (coupling to adaptor); 60 bar, 870 psi (adaptor
bar (Kupplung zu Nippel); 60 bar (Nippel zu Kupplung) to coupling) Sonderstahl brüniert, chemisch vernickelt / High quality steel, oil-burnished, chemically nickel plated
• Winkelabweichung: ± 0,15° • Angular misalignment: ± 0,15° 85-006-2-00000-AAAN-Z01-P000 VN -0,5 34,7 24x1,5 26,5 8,2
6 210* / 3.045* 210 / 3.045 24 – 59,0 0,9
Für spezielle Anforderungen stehen weitere Einbauelemente The WALTHER programme offers more coupling elements for 85-006-0-00000-AAAM-Z01-P000 32,0 24x1,5 32,0
VK
aus dem WALTHER-Programm zur Verfügung. special requirements.
85-010-2-00000-AAAF-Y01-P000 VN -0,5 45,7 27x1,5 29,3 9,2
10 80* / 1.160* 80 / 1.160 27,8 – 71,5 2,03
L L Lo 85-010-0-00000-AAAE-Y01-P000 VK 34,5 27x1,5 27,3
T T 18 * während des Entkuppelns p. max = 60 bar / when disconnecting p.max = 60 bar / 870 psi
N
Series 57
Montagezubehör / Mounting accessories

D
D
A
SW SW
L L
1
T Lo
N
Series 85
2
D
D
A
Ratsche kundenseitig
Wrench provided by customer
Verschlussnippel Verschlusskupplung
VN Self sealing adaptor
VK Self sealing coupling
entkuppelt / disconnected gekuppelt / connected 1* 4-Stift-Schlüssel: BM-01-100-119, für Type 85-006 / 4 pin wrench: BM-01-100-119, for types 85-006
Genaue Einbaumaße auf Anfrage / exact installation dimensions on request 2* 6-Stift-Schlüssel: BM-01-100-208, für Type 85-010 / 6 pin wrench: BM-01-100-208, for types 85-010
Einbauelemente für Werkzeugmaschinen
Series 57 / 85 Cartridge Coupling Elements for Machine Tools
© WALTHER-PRÄZISION • Änderungen und Irrtümer vorbehalten / Subject to modifications, errors excepted • 1026 / A / 2000
Leistungsdiagramm / Performance diagram ®
Durchflusswerte Cv: Messung in Anlehnung an DIN IEC 534 mit Medium Wasser bei 20 °C / Flow rates Cv: test acc. to DIN IEC 534 with water at 20 °C
WALTHER CONNECTING & DOCKING
0,42 0,54 4,8 6 60 m3/h
0,06 0,12 0,18 0,24 0,3 0,36 0,38 0,6 1,2 1,8 2,4 3 3,6 4,2 5,4 12 18 24 30 36 42 48 54
5
3
Druckdifferenz / pressure difference ªp=p1 - p2 [bar]
2
7
8
,03
0,3
0,3
1,5
3,5
,9
1 =0
=2
0,9
v=
v=
v=
v=
0,8
Leckarme
Cv
Cv
;C
;C
;C
;C
0,7
6;
0;
06
08
12
16
0,6
-00
-01
-G
-G
-G
-G
Einbauelemente
57
57
85
57
85
57
0,5
0,4
0,3
für Werkzeugmaschinen
0,2
Low leakage
0,1
Cartridge Couplings Serie 57, 85
Series 57, 85
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 200 300 400 500 700 900
100 600 800 1000 l/min
for Machine Tools
Serie 85 / Series 85
Spannhydraulik in einem Fräszentrum / Hydraulic clamping in a milling centre
Verschlussnippel, Self sealing adaptor
Verschlusskupplung, Self sealing coupling
WALTHER-PRÄZISION
Carl Kurt Walther GmbH & Co. KG
Hausadresse / Head office: Postadresse / Postal address:
Westfalenstrasse 2 PF / P.O. Box 420444
42781 Haan, Germany 42404 Haan, Germany
®
T +49 (0) 21 29 567-0 E info@walther-praezision.de
F +49 (0) 21 29 567-450 W www.walther - praezision.de WALTHER CONNECTING & DOCKING

HeadfileFAS4-334 07 PT

Enviado por

Dados do documento

Direitos autorais

Formatos disponíveis

Compartilhar este documento

Compartilhar ou incorporar documento

Opções de compartilhamento

Você considera este documento útil?

Este conteúdo é inapropriado?

Direitos autorais:

Formatos disponíveis

HeadfileFAS4-334 07 PT

Enviado por

Direitos autorais:

Formatos disponíveis

Pasta do guia

Souza Cruz S/A

Flavor Application System FAS4 – 334

N.º de projeto 86-01641

Manual de instruções original

Versão Elaborado: Descrição da alteração Revisor:

02 Hubers Recém-criado após revisão da

03 Hubers Nova estrutura

04 Hubers Visão geral área ATEX

05 Thees Adaptação à versão em inglês

06 Thees Capítulos 12 e 14.2 atualizados

07 Thees Layout alterado para impressão

1.1 Endereço do fabricante

KÖHL Maschinenbau AG Tel.: +352 276827 - 0

17, Am Scheerleck Fax: +352 276827 - 99

6868 Wecker http://www.koehl-mb.eu/

1.2 O manual de instruções

Para melhor orientação, informações importantes são colocadas nos cabeçalhos e

• Documentação OEM (Fabricante de Equipamento Original)

Alterações não autorizadas na máquina e uso indevido excluem qualquer

1.4 Qualificação do pessoal operacional

O pessoal operacional também deve ter conhecimento de como detectar e evitar

O manuseio de extintores portáteis deve ser praticado em intervalos regulares e a

1.5 Deveres do pessoal operacional

Em caso de dúvida, pergunte ao responsável pela segurança e prevenção de

Após a ingestão de estupefacientes, medicamentos ou alimentos que possam

O pessoal operacional é obrigado a manter um livro de controle.

No caso de qualquer alteração ou comportamento operacional que possa

Antes de utilizar a máquina pela primeira vez, recomendamos a realização de

1.6 Atividades de verificação

1.7 Medidas organizacionais da empresa gestora

A empresa gestora do sistema ou seu representante é obrigado a instruir

Além desse manual de instruções, as regulamentações legais gerais sobre

O equipamento de proteção individual deve ser fornecido ao pessoal operacional.

Em conformidade com o manual de instruções, o manuseio consciente da

Os trabalhos de verificação e manutenção devem ser planejados e executados de

As avarias devem ser comunicadas à pessoa ou organismo responsável por isso e

Danos menores devem ser reparados imediatamente por pessoal especializado

As modificações intencionais e adições ou conversões na máquina devem ser

Ao operar o sistema, certifique-se de que o pessoal usa

1.8 Identificação do sistema

As características de seu sistema são muito importantes para contatos posteriores

Elas nos permitem fornecer peças de reposição corretamente e fornecer um

IMPORTANTE A estação e o tanque

Estação – FAS4 - 000

Tanque – TW FAS4 - 000

Compatibilidade tanque – estação

FAS 4 COLD TWIN

FAS 4 UNI CLASSIC

FAS 4 UNI TWIN

FAS 4 COLD TWIN

FAS 4 UNI CLASSIC

FAS 4 UNI CLASSIC

FAS 4 UNI CLASSIC

Essa seção informa você sobre possíveis perigos ao manusear o sistema.

Essas instruções contêm informações importantes sobre como operar a máquina de

Essas instruções devem ser lidas e aplicadas por cada pessoa

Leia esse manual de instruções cuidadosamente e siga todas as indicações.

A máquina só pode ser usada em condições técnicas adequadas, de forma

Como mencionado acima, danos pessoais e danos materiais podem ocorrer no

2.1 Símbolos e indicações gerais

Seguir esta indicação torna possível um trabalho eficaz e evita

Refere-se a uma situação perigosa, se não puder ser evitada,

Refere-se a uma situação perigosa, se não puder ser evitada,